The History and 
 
 Conquest h e Philippines 
 
 AND OUR 
 
 OTHER ISLAND POSSESSIONS 
 
 By ALDEN MARCH, A. M. 
 
 The Noted Journalist and Author. 
 
 EMBRACING 
 
 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS IN 1899 
 
 Together With a Complete History of Those Islands from the Earliest Times to the Present 
 
 AN AUTHENTIC HISTORY OF THE SPANISH WAR 
 
 PREPARED FROM OFFICIAL GOVERNMENT REPORTS OF OUR ARMY AND NAVY OFFICERS, 
 PRESENTING ALL THE FACTS FOR THE FIRST TIME 
 
 THE HISTORY OF CUBA, PORTO RICO, 
 The Ladrone and the Hawaiian Islands 
 
 FROM THEIR DISCOVERY TO THE PRESENT TIME 
 
 RICHLY EMBELLISHED WITH OVER ONE HUNDRED FULL PAGE 
 HALF-TONE AND OTHER ENGRAVINGS 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 WORLD BIBLE HOUSE 
 
 PHILADELPHIA, PA. 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1899 
 
 BY 
 WM. K. SCULL 
 
 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 
 
 EVERY CHAPTER IN THIS VOLUME BEING ORIGINAL MATTlfcR PREPARED EXPRESSLY 
 FOR THIS WORK, ALL PERSONS ARE WARNED NOT TO INFRINGE UPON OUR COPYRIGHT BY 
 USCVG EITHER THK MATTKR OR THE PICTURES, WITHOUT EXPRESS PERMISSION. 
 
M 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 THE whole world has turned its eyes upon the Philippine Islands. 
 The nations of Europe and of the far East are anxiously 
 watching their future. The United States stands with that 
 future in its possession. Our country has made itself more vital 
 than ever before in the great brotherhood of nations. 
 
 The magnificent victory of Admiral Dewey in the Bay of Manila, 
 when he scorned hidden torpedoes and open foes, and swept the ves 
 sels of Montojo s fleet from the face of the waters without the loss of 
 a single man or any considerable damage to his own battleships, not 
 only brought our nation to the very forefront as a naval power, but 
 focused upon the Philippines the eyes of all the world. 
 
 Previous to that time nobody knew or cared where the distant 
 archipelago was. To-day there is not a schoolboy who cannot tell 
 you, or a street urchin who does not speak its name as familiarly 
 almost as that of his own city. 
 
 Necessarily, however, popular knowledge of the islands is ex 
 tremely limited. Most persons have read in snatches here and there, 
 of Aguinaldo, of the insurgents, of the famous battle of May ist, of 
 General Merritt, General Otis, General McArthur and the brave lot 
 of soldiers, volunteers and regulars, who have crossed the 10,000 
 miles of sea, which leads to this our new possession. 
 
 THE PURPOSE OF THIS VOLGME. 
 
 It is the purpose of this volume to present a clear, concise, inter 
 esting and readable story of the conquest of the Philippines and of 
 our other island possessions. 
 
 Now that the smoke of battle has cleared away and we are able 
 to see more distinctly the splendid work of American arms, the valor 
 of the American soldiers, the generalship of the American leaders, 
 
 
 543 
 
vi INTRODUCTION 
 
 and the wise direction of American statesmanship, we are ready and 
 anxious to know not only the story of our march of victory, but also 
 something about the new lands and the new people, which have come 
 under the folds of the flag, and which from now on are likely to be so 
 prominent in the scheme of our national life. 
 
 Ever since the beginning of the war an elaborate, careful collec 
 tion has been made of all books, newspaper and magazine articles, 
 published both in this country and abroad, about the Philippines and 
 about the events which have taken place there since our troops landed 
 on those shores. These have been at the disposal of the writer, and 
 their very possession alone insures the most complete record of the 
 history of the Philippines possible. 
 
 This volume aims to bring you in contact with the people of 
 these islands so vividly that you will know their past and their present, 
 and become so interested in their future, that every word spoken for 
 or against them will enlist your attention. 
 
 LONG STRUGGLE FOR LIBERTY. 
 
 As a people the Filipinos appeal to the American heart through 
 their long years of struggle for liberty, a struggle that has been 
 marked throughout by a trail of life-blood of patriots,- -a struggle 
 that has been waged against unequal odds, a struggle that was 
 once, years ago, at the verge of successful issue, but was brought 
 to naught at the very hour of victory, by an accident. 
 
 As a nation the Filipinos are not strong enough to protect them 
 selves alone against the governments of the world. The United States 
 took them under its protection. It offered to them liberty and civi 
 lization under its rule. Unhappily for them the insurgent leaders, 
 whether for motives of personal gain, or from ill-advised sentiments 
 against their protectors, have turned upon the hand that helped them. 
 
 The battle which was so costly, both to insurgents and to our 
 own gallant soldiers, has made it impossible for the United States to 
 back. The demands of civilization hold us to the islands. Presi 
 dent McKinley in his speech at Boston in February, 1899, summed 
 up the situation and the duty of the Government as follows : 
 
 "The future of the Philippine Islands are now in the hands of 
 the American people, and the Paris Treaty commits the free and 
 
1 .EAR-ADMIRAI, JOHN CRITTENDEN WATSON. REAR-ADMIRAL WINFIELD SCOTT SCHLEY. 
 
 LEADING COMMANDERS OF OUR NAVV IN THE SPAN ISH A M ER 1C AN WAR. 
 
INTRODUCTION xi 
 
 through Spanish cruelty, tin* new race of Cubans, the feeble insurrec 
 tion of a hundred years, the more virile Ten Years War, and, finally, 
 the War of 1895, that last great struggle for liberty, reads like a 
 romance. And at last the terrible oppression and cruelty of Spain 
 brought forth such an agonizing cry for help, that America could no 
 longer resist its appeal, and " for the sake of humanity " took up arms 
 in her behalf. 
 
 The campaign in Cuba and Porto Rico was a brilliant one. It 
 was short, decisive, heroic. The deeds that were clone, and the vic 
 tories that were won, rival the greatest stories of valor that the world 
 has ever heard. And now Cuba and Porto Rico are ours, one tem 
 porarily, the other forever. Porto Rico, which Columbus discovered 
 and where he was buried, will be familiar in the future to all the world 
 as a winter resort. Beautiful, fertile and healthful, it will ever be a 
 land of romance and of pleasure and of poetry. Hawaii, too, brought 
 by the new cable in touch with the rest of the world, will be a part of 
 us from this time onward. Their interests and our interests mingle. 
 It is of them, and of Hawaii, " the Paradise of the Pacific," that a 
 fuller knowledge is desired by all persons. And so in this history of 
 our conquest of the Philippines and our other island possessions, 
 they play an important part, and enlist your interest. 
 
 ALDEN MARCH. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 The Philippines Past and Present 
 
 A Rapid Review of History, Place and People. The Story of Discovery. The First 
 World Girdlers. Another Expedition. Naming the Islands. Struggles for 
 Supremacy. English Take Manila. Uprisings of the Natives. The Last 
 Struggle for Liberty. A Warlike People. Manila and other Towns. Industries, 
 Climate, Etc. Admiral Dewey begins a New Era. 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 Behind Admiral Dewey s Guns 
 
 The Magnificent Naval Battle of May ist Described by an Officer who stood by 
 Dewey during the Fight. The Personal Side of the Nation s Greatest Hero. 
 A Brush with German Officers. The Surrender of Cavite. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 The Second Battle of Manila 
 
 How 8,000 American Soldiers Swept into a Heavily Entrenched City, Garrisoned by 
 Nearly Twice that Number of Spaniards. Insurgent Army Kept from Plunder. 
 Rare Bravery and Sacrifice. What Major-General Wesley Merritt, Command 
 ing the Expedition, General Frank F. Greene, General Arthur McArthur and 
 General Thomas Anderson Said Officially of the Battle. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 The Trouble with General Aguinaldo 
 
 A Face-to-Face View of the Insurgent Leader. A Man of Craft and Cunning. His 
 Rapid Rise to Prominence. Sold Out His Own People. The Battle Against the 
 United States. Insurgents Swept Into the Sea. Sacrifice of Life and Property. 
 The Flight of Agoncillo to Canada. The Battle and the Treaty of Peace in 
 the Senate, The Oregon Needed "for Political Reasons," 
 
 xiii 
 
xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 The Men Who Won Fame in Battle 
 
 Commanders and Soldiers whose Bravery lias Brought them Special Honors. Intrepid 
 Fighting. Mad Dashes, and Fierce Firing of Boys from Pennsylvania, New York 
 aii I other States of the Kast ; from Tennessee, Kentucky and the Rest of the 
 South Line; and the Heroic Warriors from Oregon, California, Dakota, Kansas, 
 Iowa and the Middle and Far West. Individual Deeds of Daring. Scout Work 
 Outside and Inside of the City. 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 A Past History Written in Blood 
 
 Fvcr Since their Discovery the Philippines have been the Scene of Terrible Conflicts. 
 Began with an Alliance of Peace, but soon were Rife with War. Lcgaspi Forti 
 fied Manila and made it a Stronghold. The Raid of Limahong, the Chinese 
 Pirate. A Naval Battle with the Dutch for Half a Century. England Takes 
 Manila, but Returns It to Spain. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 <^ 
 
 Filipinos Struggles for Freedom 
 
 Periodically the Natives Turned under the Cruel Spanish Heel and Rose up in their 
 Might. Revolts against the Tyranny of the Church. How a Flight of Sky 
 rockets once Tore Victory from the Hands of the Natives. The Last Fight for 
 Freedom. The Greatest of Insurgent Martyrs, Doctor Rizal. His Dramatic 
 Execution a Few Years Ago. Other Fighters for Freedom. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 The Great Value of the Philippines 
 
 Why all Nations Covet what the United States has Won. Importance from a Strategic 
 Standpoint. Immense Wealth and Resources. Exports and Imports Amount to 
 over $40,000,000. Rich in Sugar, Rice, Hemp, Coffee, Cocoa, Spices and a 
 Host of other Things. Untold and Untried Mineral Wealth. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 The People of the Island 
 
 Over Flighty Different Tribes, most of whom have never seen a White Man. Inter 
 esting Traits in the Character of the Natives. Cannibalism in all of its Horrors. 
 Cock Fighting as a Pastime. How the Better Class Live. Educational and 
 Social Conditions. Something about the A etas, Negritos, Gadanes, Itavis, Igor- 
 rotes, Pinguianes and others, 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 xv 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 Fascinations and Terrors of a New Land 
 
 The Awful Wildness of Typhoons. A Land Ruled by Volcanoes. Thousands Killed 
 by Earthquakes. All Business Suspended until Evening, owing to the Heat. A 
 Glimpse of its Birds, Beasts and Reptiles. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 Manila, the Metropolis of the Philippines 
 
 A Delightful City which may become a Resort under the Stars and Stripes. High and 
 Low Life. Foreigners kept out by the Spanish as much as Possible. The 
 Chinese Class. The Splendid Big Convent. Shops that Delight the Eye. Rare 
 Fabrics Woven from Plants and Embroidered by Nuns. A New York Officer s 
 Big Purchase. A Dress that it took Months to Weave. Inside of the English 
 Club. Americans have Started a Splendid Club for the Army and Navy. The 
 Famous Mestiza Girls. 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 Other Important Cities of the Islands 
 
 A Sight-seeing Trip to Iloilo, Second in Commercial Importance to Manila, Cebu, 
 which once outranked it, Leyte and other Places of Importance. Scenes and 
 Incidents among the Strange Population. The Terrible Sultan of Sulu. Super 
 stitions of the Moros. Funny Episodes of a very Lively Trip. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 The Future of the Islands 
 
 How they will Develop under the Care of the United States. The Treaty of Peace 
 at Paris and its Effect. What President McKinley says about the Situation. 
 Extracts from his Famous Speeches on the Subject. The views of Anti-Expan 
 sionists. Extracts from Speeches made by Senators and Representatives. 
 Freedom and Prosperity in Sight for the Long Misgoverned Islands. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 The Ladrone Islands 
 
 The Bloodless Battle of Guam. When the Charleston Opened Fire on the Little City 
 of Agafia, the Governor Thought we were Saluting Him. A Population which 
 has Twice Disappeared. Poverty and Laziness on all Sides. The Value of the 
 
 Island as a Military Station, 
 
xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 The Hawaiian Islands, "the Paradise of the Pacific" 
 
 Annexed to the United States by Act of Congress, July 7, 1898. Truly a Paradise in 
 Climate, Fertility and Healthfulness. Discovery by Captain Cook. Something 
 about the Inhabitants. Old Times in Hawaii. A Pen Sketch of Queen 
 Liliuokalani, the Last of the Royal Line. The Revolution of 1893. The Plea 
 for Admission to the United States. The Mission of Senator Blount. The Work I 
 of American Missionaries. Some Hawaiian Superstitions and Amusements. I 
 Products and Commerce. Sugar is to the Islands what Wheat is to our Northwest, j 
 Honolulu, the Capital City. A Beautiful and Delightful Resort. On the j 
 Threshold of a great Industrial Era. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 Cuba, "the Child of Our Adoption" 
 
 The Island whose Cry to Humanity Brought the War of Relief. How It Received its 
 Name. The Founding of the Capital, Havana. A Terrible History of Spanish 
 Cruelty. The Extermination of a Great People, Beginning in the Time of the- 
 Son of Columbus, before 1560 the Whole of the Population had Disappeared) 
 from the Island. The First Cuban Revolt. The Capture of Havana by the) f 
 English. Its Restoration to Spain. A Long Series of Insurrections. The) 
 Seven Years War. The Last and Final Uprising. The Advent of Weyler, "the 
 Butcher." Atrocities before which the whole World Stood Aghast. His Motto 
 was "Subjugation or Death." American Filibusters Lend a Helping Hand. 
 The Death of General Maceo, through Treachery, a great Blow to the Insurgents. 
 Weyler and the Reconcentrados. Two Hundred Thousand Men, Women and 
 Children Die of Disease and Starvation. Insurgents the Masters of almost the 
 whole Island. The Fearful Cost of the War. The Cuban Debt Reached 
 Nearly $300,000,000. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 Possibilities of the Island 
 
 Its Possibilities, its Hopes. The Extent of the Island, its Soil and its vast Products. 
 Rich in Sugar, in Timber and in Minerals, it is a Place Promising Wealth, -. 
 Rivaling that of the Klondike. Its Commerce and its Climate. Havana, the 1 
 Capital City, and other Ports. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 The Explosion of the Maine, and War 
 
 The Awful Catastrophe to our Battleship in Havana Harbor. A firm Belief that the , 1 
 Vessel was Blown up by Spaniards, A Naval Board of Inquiry. A Wave of 1 
 
x o 
 c *> 
 
 trs n ~ 
 c ~.a 8 
 2- g 
 
 ,4 L* ^ 
 
 So-cr 1 ^ 
 
 ^H^s;- 
 
 SK-S-S 
 
 .c.S9 
 
 ir"2 
 
 S" n 3 
 
 s?r 
 
 ""H 
 
 
 I 
 
S 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 It; 
 
 1 
 
 <5 v 
 
 o 
 
 I 5 3| 
 
 I Z o| 
 
 | Ml 
 
 loll 
 
 I UJ % rt 
 
 I !3 0i 
 
 u 
 
 s t> 
 
 rt u 
 
 1 8 
 
 . .2 
 
 O J3 
 
 Pi 
 
 2 3 
 
 ^ Jj 
 
 s 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS xix 
 
 Feeling Sweeps the whole Nation. McKinley Places the Matter before Congress. 
 War is Declared, for the Sake of Humanity. The First Call for Troops. All 
 the States of the Union Respond Immediately with their Quota of Men. The 
 Mobilization of the American Army. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 The Campaign in Cuba 
 
 close Blockade Established at Havana Harbor. The First Shot of the War. The 
 Buena Ventura Captured as the Initial Prize of the Conflict. Ensign Worth 
 Bagley, of the Torpedo Boat Winslow, Killed, the First Death of the War. 
 Admiral Cervera s Fleet Leaves Spain for the Cape Verde Islands. A Period of 
 Search and Apprehension. The Spanish Vessels Reach Santiago. Commodore 
 Schley Bottles up the Fleet in Santiago Harbor. "I ve got them and they will 
 never get out alive." Sampson takes Charge of the Blockade. Lieutenant 
 Hobson s Daring Deed of Heroism. The Brilliant Young Naval Officer Sinks 
 the Merrimac at the Mouth of the Harbor so as to Prevent the Enemy from 
 Coming Out. Afloat on a Raft Amid the Shells of Spanish Forts and Cruisers. 
 Taken Prisoner and Landed in Morro Castle. The American Vessels Shelled the 
 Castle, although the Captured Men were Exposed by the Spaniards to the Deadly 
 Fire. The Magnificent Naval Battle of July 3d. The Capture of Admiral 
 Cervera and the total Annihilation of the Spanish Fleet. 
 
 CHAPTEPv XX 
 The Invasion of Cuba by the Army 
 
 General Shafter Starts from Tampa with Transports. The Shutting up of the Spanish 
 Fleet Changes the Campaign from Havana to Santiago. The Landing of Troops 
 at Baiquiri. The Brilliant Charge of the "Rough Riders" under Colonel Wood 
 and "Teddy" Roosevelt. Marvelous Bravery at El Caney and San Juan Hill. 
 The Small American Force though Handicapped on all Sides Wins Victory from 
 the Better Armed and Better Protected Spaniards by Sheer Bravery, and the Mad 
 Rush of their Battle. Terrible and Costly Hours of Waiting. Shafter 111 in the 
 Rear, Generals Wheeler, Lawton, Chaffee, Colonels Wood and "Teddy" 
 Roosevelt Lead the Men to a Marvelous Victory. The Second Day s Fight. 
 The Spanish Flag of Truce. Consultation for Surrender. General Miles, 
 Commander-in-Chief of the Army, Joins Shafter, and Takes Part in the 
 Negotiations. General Toral Surrenders, after the Destruction of Cervera s 
 Fleet. Hobson and His Fellow Heroes Exchanged. A Rousing Reception 
 from the Troops. 
 
xx TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 The Surrender of Santiago 
 
 Truce Proclaimed and Prolonged from Day to Day. Consultation for Surrender of 
 Santiago. General Miles, Commander-in-Chief of the Army, Joins Shatter and 
 Takes Part in the Negotiations. General Toral Surrenders. Terms of Evacua 
 tion. Raising the Stars and Stripes Above the City. Hobson and His Fellow- 
 Heroes Exchanged. A Rousing Reception Ly Land and Sea. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 
 The Campaign in Porto Rico 
 
 General Miles Plans for the Invasion of the Island. Preliminary Operations by 
 Sampson s Fleet. Bombardment of San Juan de Porto Rico. Miles in Charge 
 of the Army Expedition. Troops Meet with but Little Resistance. Capture of 
 Towns, and Movements of the Army. The First Steps Toward Peace in Wash 
 ington. As the Guns of Pennsylvania Troops were Being Placed in Position for 
 a Battle, Word Came from Washington, Announcing that Fighting Must Cease. 
 The Last Scenes and Shots of the War. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII 
 
 Porto Rico Past, Present and Future 
 
 The Island and its Population. Its Future as a Winter Resort. Timber in Abundance 
 and Variety. Minerals and Mining. Some Facts About its Commerce. The 
 Chief Cities and Towns of Porto Rico. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV 
 The Heroes of 1898 and 1899 
 
 Something About the Men Who Led Our Forces on to the Great Victories Achieved 
 by American Arms. Sketches of Dewey, Sampson, Schley, Bob Evans, Captain 
 Clarke, Captain Gridley, Lieutenant Hobson and Lieutenant-Commander Wain- 
 wright, Who Won Fame at Sea, and Generals Miles, Shafter, Wheeler, Lawton, 
 and Colonel Roosevelt, Who Made History in Cuba, and Generals Merritt, Otis 
 and MacArthur, 
 
 CHAPTER XXV 
 The Closing Events of the Philippine War 
 
 A Proclamation by the Commissioners from the United States. Dagupan Bom 
 barded. General Montenegro, One of the Great Insurgent Leaders, Killed, 
 Lawton s Flying Column Sweeps Down Upon the Province of Laguna. Santa 
 Cruz Captured. Lumban and Pagsangan Also Fall Before the American Troops. 
 Lawton s Expedition Recalled. MacArthur s Men Gloriously Storm Calumpit s 
 Trenches. 
 
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 Map of the Philippines. Frontispiece, 
 Map, Hawaiian Islands. Frontispiece. 
 In the War Room at Washington, . 7 
 Leading Commanders of our Navy 
 in the Spanish-American War, . 8 
 
 The Oregon," 17 
 
 The Battle of Manila, May i, 1898, 18 
 Typical Group of Negritos, Philip 
 pine Islands, 29 
 
 Volcano Mayon in Luzon, .... 30 
 Church of Cavite, Philippine Islands, 30 
 Native Boats and Outriggers ... 39 
 A Bend in the Pasig River, Manila, 40 
 
 The Escolta, Manila, 49 
 
 The Barracks at Corregidor After 
 
 Spanish Withdrawal, 50 
 
 Commandante s House, Cavite, . 50 
 Raising the Flag on Fort San An 
 tonio de Abad, Malate, .... 59 
 The Beautiful Luneta, Manila s 
 Fashionable Promenade and 
 
 T Drive, 60 
 
 A Street Scene in Albay, 69 
 
 Sacloban, Island of Leyte, .... 70 
 Pampanga, a Village in the Sugar 
 
 Country, 70 
 
 First Battle Between Americans and 
 
 Filipinos, February 4 and 5, 1899, 79 
 General Aguinaldo in February, 
 
 1899, . - 80 
 
 View Along the Escolta After the 
 Last Great Fire. 80 
 
 The Harbor and City of Cebu, 
 Puebla, in the Lake of Bay, 
 
 90 
 90 
 
 Insurgents Attempt to Burn Manila, 
 
 February 22, 1899, 99 
 
 Cafe and Chocolate Factory, Manila, 100 
 Interior View of a Cigar and Ciga 
 rette Factory, Manilla, 100 
 
 Blockhouse Taken by the Astor Bat 
 tery in Their Famous Revolver 
 
 Charge, 109 
 
 Convent at Malate Showing Effect 
 
 of Shells, no 
 
 The Philippine Pony and Cart, . .no 
 Saint Ana, a Suburb of Manila, . .119 
 The Cordage Factory of Santa Mesa, 
 
 a Suburb of Manila, 120 
 
 The Famous Spanish Prison, Manila, 1 20 
 A Market Man in Manila, . . . .129 
 Fast Freight of the Philippines, . .130 
 Cockfightmg, the Chief Sport of the 
 
 Natives, ... 130 
 
 The Shipyards and Arsenal at Cavite, 139 
 The Island of Corregidor, Manila 
 
 Bay, 140 
 
 Native Water Carriers in Iloilo, . .165 
 A Native Filipino Woman, . . . .166 
 A Spanish Filipino Mestiza, . . . .166 
 The Mouth of the Pasig River, . .175 
 Young Man of the Upper Class, 
 
 Philippine Islands, 176 
 
 Aguinaldo at the Age of 22, . . .176 
 
 Doing the Family Wash, 176 
 
 Native Woman Fruit Seller, . . . .176 
 Death by the Garrote, Method of 
 
 Execution in Manila, 185 
 
 Savage Negrito Warriors, . . . . . 186 
 Tagalog Tribe, 186 
 
 (XXI) 
 
XX11 
 
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 A Native Residence in the Suburbs 
 
 of Manila, 195 
 
 The Strange Wagons of Albay, . .195 
 Iloilo, Capital of the Province of 
 
 Panay, 196 
 
 A Native Mining Camp in Luzon, .221 
 A Popular Street Conveyance, 
 
 Manila, 222 
 
 Drying Sugar, Philippine Islands, .222 
 Bridge Over the Pasig River, . . .231 
 
 A Wedding Procession, 231 
 
 All-Chinese-Shop Quarter on the 
 
 Rosario, 232 
 
 Milkmen of Manila at their Dairy, . 241 
 View in Banca, Showing Dutch For 
 tifications, 242 
 
 The Native Farmer and His Faithful 
 
 Servant, 242 
 
 Spaniards Executing Insurgent 
 
 Chiefs, Manila, 251 
 
 Senor Montero Rios, President of 
 
 the Spanish Peace Commission, . 252 
 General Ramon Blanco, Captain- 
 General of Cuba, 252 
 
 Admiral Cervera, 252 
 
 Sagasta, Premier of Spain, . . . .252 
 
 Royal Palace, Hawaii, 277 
 
 Raising the American Flag in Hono 
 lulu, August 12, 1898, 277 
 
 Church in Honolulu, Hawaiian 
 
 Islands, 278 
 
 Sugar Cane Plantation, Hawaiian 
 
 Islands, 278 
 
 Map of Cuba, 282 
 
 Entrance to the Public Grounds, 
 
 Havana, Cuba, 287 
 
 Indian Statue in the Prado, Havana, 
 
 Cuba, 287 
 
 General Antonio Maceo, 288 
 
 General Calixto Garcia, 288 
 
 General Maximo Gomez, 288 
 
 Jose Marti, President of the Cuban 
 Revolutionary Party, 288 
 
 The Rough Riders Driving Back the 
 Spaniards, Previous to the Attack 
 
 on Santiago, 313 
 
 Major-General Nelson A. Miles, . . 314 
 Major-General Fitzhugh Lee, . . .314 
 Major-General Wesley Merritt, . .314 
 Major -General William R. Shafter, . 314 
 Spaniards Repelling the Attack of 
 
 Cuban Insurgents, 323 
 
 United States Battleship Maine," 324 
 
 Captain Sigsbee, . . 324 
 
 Officers of the "Maine/ .... 324 
 The Peace Commissioners, . . . .333 
 The Fleet of Admiral Cervera at 
 
 Cape Verde Islands, 334 
 
 President McKmley and the War 
 
 Cabinet, ....,..,.., 343 
 Americans Storming San Juan Hill, 344 
 City of Havana and Harbor, Show 
 ing Wreck of the "Maine," . . 369 
 
 General Joseph Wheeler, 370 
 
 Lieutenant Richmond Pearson Hob 
 
 son, . 37 
 
 Governor Theodore Roosevelt, . .370 
 Major- General Elvvell S. Otis, . . .370 
 
 Havana Harbor, 379 
 
 Landing at Tampa, 379 
 
 Camp Scene at Chicamauga, . . .37 
 The Surrender of Santiago, July 17, 
 
 1899, 380 
 
 The Market Place, Ponce, Porto 
 
 Rico, 4 2 1 
 
 The Custom House, Ponce, Porto 
 
 Rico, 421 
 
 Native Belles, Porto Rico, . . . .422 
 Hula Dancing Girls, Hawaii, . . .422 
 Sunrise Executions, Outside the 
 
 Prison Walls, Havana, 431 
 
 A Market Girl, Porto Rico, . . . .431 
 A Volante, the Typical Cuban Con 
 veyance, 431 
 
 San Juan, Porto Rico, 432 
 
CHAPTER I 
 
 The Philippines Past and Present 
 
 A Rapid Review of History, Place and People. The Story of Discovery. The First 
 World Girdlers. Another Expedition. Naming the Islands. Struggles for 
 Supremacy. English take Manila. Uprisings of the Natives. The Last Struggle 
 for Liberty. A Warlike People. Manila and other Towns. Industries, Climate, 
 Etc. Admiral Dewey begins a New Era. 
 
 THE most important, and by far the most interesting, as well as 
 the least known of America s new possessions, gained by her 
 war with Spain, are the Philippine Islands. Comparatively 
 few Americans have ever set foot upon that far-away and semi- 
 civilized land, the possession of which enables America to say with 
 England, " The sun never sets upon our flag." 
 
 The Philippines lie almost exactly on the other side of the globe 
 from us. Approximately speaking, our noonday is their midnight ; 
 our sunset is their sunrise. There are some 1,800 of these islands, 
 400 of which are inhabited or capable of supporting a population ; 
 they cover about 125,000 square miles; they lie in the tropical seas, 
 generally speaking, from five to eighteen degrees north latitude; and 
 are bounded by the China Sea on the west and the Pacific Ocean on 
 the east ; they are about 7,000 miles southwest from San Francisco, 
 a little over 600 miles southeast from Hong Kong, China, and about 
 i, ooo miles almost due north from Australia; they contain between 
 8,000,000 and 10,000,600 inhabitants, about one-third of whom had 
 prior to Dewey s victory, May i, 1898, acknowledged Spanish 
 sovereignty to the extent of paying regular tribute to the Spanish 
 crown; the remainder are bound together in tribes under independent 
 native princes or Mohammedan rulers. Perhaps 2,500,000 all told 
 have become nominal Catholics in religion. The rest are Moham 
 medans and idolaters. There are no Protestant churches in the 
 islands. 
 
 THE STORY OF DISCOVERY. 
 
 It was twenty-nine years after Columbus discovered America 
 that Magellan saw the Philippines, the largest archipelago in the 
 
 2 (- 5) 
 
26 THE PHILIPPINES PAST AND PRESENT 
 
 world, in 1521. The voyage of Magellan was much longer and 
 scarcely less heroic than that of the discoverer of America. Having 
 been provided with a fleet by the Spanish king with which to search 
 for spice islands, but secretly determined to sail round the world, he 
 set out with five vessels on August 10, 1519, crossed the Atlantic to 
 America, and skirted the eastern coast southward in the hope of find 
 ing some western passage into the Pacific, which, a few years previous 
 had been discovered by Balboa. It was a year and two months to a 
 day from the time he left Spain until he reached the southern point 
 of the mainland of South America and passed through the straight 
 which has since borne his name. On the way, one of his vessels de 
 serted ; another was wrecked in a storm. When he passed through 
 the Straight of Magellan he had remaining but three of his original 
 five ships, and they were the first European vessels that ever breasted 
 the waves of the mighty western ocean. Once upon the unknown 
 but placid sea which he named the Pacific the bold navigator 
 steered straight to the northwest. Five months later, about March 
 ist, he discovered the Ladrone Islands which name Magellan gave 
 to the group on account of the thieving propensities of the natives 
 the word Ladrone meaning robber. 
 
 After a short stay at the islands, he steered southwest, landing 
 on the north coast of Mindanao, the second largest island of the 
 Philippines. The natives were friendly and offered to pilot Magellan 
 to the Island of Cebu, which lay to the north, and which they reported 
 to be very rich. After taking possession of Mindanao in the name 
 of his king, the discoverer proceeded to Cebu, where he gave such 
 descriptions of the glory and power of Spain that he easily formed a 
 treaty with the king of the island, who swore allegiance to his new 
 found master and had himself and chief advisers baptized in the 
 Catholic faith. Magellan then joined the king in his war against 
 some of the neighboring powers, and on April 25, 1521, was killed in 
 a skirmish. The spot where he fell is now marked by a monument. 
 
 FIRST CIRCUMNAVIGATION OF THE GLOBE. 
 
 Trouble soon arose between Magellan s sailors and their new 
 found allies. The Spaniards were invited to a banquet, and twenty- 
 seven of them were treacherously slain. The remainder, fearing for 
 
SECOND EXPEDITION TO THE PHILIPPINES 2; 
 
 their lives, escaped in their ships and sailed for home. It was soon 
 discovered that they had too few men to manage the three vessels, 
 and one of them was destroyed. The other two proceeded on their 
 voyage and discovered the spice island of Tidor, where they loaded 
 with spices ; but a few days later one of the vessels sprang a leak and 
 went clown with her freight and crew. The other, after many hard 
 ships, reached Spain, thus completing the first circumnavigation of 
 the globe. 
 
 SECOND EXPEDITION TO THE PHILIPPINES. 
 
 I* 1 X 555 Philip II. came to the Spanish throne and determined 
 to send another expedition to the East Indies. His religious zeal 
 inspired him to conquer and christianize the islands. To shorten the 
 long and dangerous voyage, he decided to prepare and start with five 
 ships from the coast of Mexico. Miguel Lopez de Legaspi led the 
 expedition, consisting of four hundred soldiers and sailors and six 
 Augustine monks. In due time the expedition landed at Cebu. The 
 formidable appearance of the ships awed the natives, and on April 
 2 7> : 5^5 forty years after Magellan s remnant had fled from the 
 island Legaspi landed and took possession. In honor of the Spanish 
 king the archipelago was given the name of the Philippine Islands. 
 
 In 1570 Legaspi sent his grandson, Salcedo, to subdue the island 
 of Luzon, the northernmost and the largest of the Philippine group. 
 He landed near the present site of Manila. The trustful natives 
 readily agreed to accept the Spanish king as their master, and to pay 
 tribute. Such slight tribal resistances as were offered were quickly 
 subdued. The next year Legaspi went to Manila to visit his grand 
 son ; and, seeing the importance of the situation and its fine harbor, 
 declared that city the capital of the whole archipelago, and the king 
 of Spain the sovereign of all the islands. Accordingly, he moved 
 his headquarters to that point, built houses and fortifications, and 
 within a year had the city well organized, when he died, leaving 
 Salcedo as his successor in command. It is remarkable how much 
 these two men accomplished with so small a force ; but they did not 
 so much by arms as by cajoling and deceiving the simple natives. 
 Furthermore, they allowed the conquered people to be governed by 
 their own chiefs in* their own way, so long as they paid a liberal 
 tribute to the Spanish crown. 
 
28 THE PHILIPPINES PAST AND PRESENT 
 
 The history of the Philippines has been monotonous from their, 
 discovery until the present, a monotony broken at times by periods 
 of adventures in which Manila has generally been the central scene. 
 
 STRUGGLES FOR SUPREMACY. 
 
 About 1580, Limahong a Chinese pirate, took the .city with an 
 armed fleet of sixty-two vessels, bearing 4,000 men and 1,500 women. 
 The met with stubborn resistance, but succeeded in scaling the walls 
 and entering the city. The Spanish forces were driven into a fort, 
 which the Chinese stormed. A bloody hand-to-hand conflict fol 
 lowed, and the Chinese were finally repulsed. 
 
 Early in the seventeenth century the Dutch attempted to obtain 
 possession of the Philippines. They captured scores of Spanish 
 merchantmen and treasure ships. Many naval engagements followed, 
 the details of which read like the thrilling records of buccaneers and 
 pirates, rather than the wars between two civil powers. Finally, after 
 half a century of warfare, the Dutch were decisively beaten, and 
 abandoned their efforts to capture the Spanish islands, much to the 
 disadvantage of the Filipinos, for the islands of Java, Sumatra and 
 other Dutch possessions to the south of the Philippines have been 
 remarkably prosperous under the mild rule of the Netherlands. 
 
 MANILA TAKEN BY THE ENGLISH. 
 
 In 1662, the Chinese planned a revolution against the Spanish 
 authorities. The governor heard of it, and a general massacre of 
 the Mongolians followed. It was even planned to destroy every 
 Chinaman on the islands, and they were in a fair way to do it, when, 
 at length, the Spaniards bethought themselves that by so doing they 
 would practically depopulate the islands of tradesmen and mechanics. 
 Accordingly, they offered pardon to those who would surrender and 
 swear allegiance. In the same year, England sent a fleet under 
 Admiral Cornish, with General Draper commanding the troops, 
 against Manila. After a desperate battle the city fell, and the terms 
 of surrender incorporated provisions for free trade, freedom of speech, 
 and, best of all, freedom in religion to the inhabitants of the islands, 
 and required Spain to pay England about $4,000,000 indemnity. By 
 the Peace of Paris, in 1763, however, the war between England and 
 
VOLCANO "MAYON," IN THE HEMP-PRODUCING DISTRICT OF LUZON. 
 
 This is said to be the most beautiful volcano in the world. It is 8,233 f" eet high, its shape is a perfect cone and its crest is 
 
 always fiery. It has indulged in several destructive eruptions. In 1814 many houses were destroyed and 2500 
 
 people were killed and wounded. At its base are famous hot springs of greit medicinal virtue. 
 
 CHURCH OF CAVITE. 
 
 It was in this church that many devout Catholics took refuge when Admiral Dewey was bombarding the forts and 
 
 Spanish forces at Cavite. 
 
UPRISING OF THE NATIVES 3 
 
 Spain was terminated, and one of the conditions was that Spain 
 should retain the sovereignty of the Philippines. The English troops 
 were withdrawn, and the unfortunate islands were again placed (as 
 Cuba was by the same treaty) under the domination of their tyran 
 nical mistress, and remained under Spanish rule from that time until 
 the Americans freed them in 1898. 
 
 UPRISING OF THE NATIVES. 
 
 In nearly all the uprisings of the natives, the tyranny of the 
 Church, as conducted by the friars and priests, was the cause. Such 
 was the case in 1622, in 1649 an< ^ m !66o. The occasion of the 
 revolt of 1744 is a fair example of the provocations leading to all. 
 A Jesuit priest ordered all his parishioners arrested as criminals when 
 they failed to attend mass. One of the unfortunates died, and the 
 priests denied him rights of burial, ordering that his body be thrown 
 upon the ground and left to rot in the sun before his dwelling. The 
 brother of the man in his exasperation organized a mob, captured 
 the priest, killed him, and exposed his body for four days. Thus was 
 formed the nucleus of a rebel army. The insurgents in their 
 mountain fastnesses gained their independence and maintained it for 
 thirty-five years, until they secured from Spain a promise of the 
 expulsion of the Jesuit priests from the colony. 
 
 Other revolutions followed in 1823, 1827 and 1844, but all were 
 suppressed. In 1842, the most formidable outbreak up to that time 
 occurred at Cavite. Hatred of the Spanish friars was the cause of 
 this uprising also. Spain had promised in the Council of Trent to 
 prohibit friars from holding parishes. The promises were never 
 carried out, and the friars grew continually richer and more powerful 
 and oppressive. Had the plan of the insurgents not been balked by 
 a mistaken signal, no doubt they would have destroyed the Spanish 
 garrison at Manila, but a misunderstanding caused their defeat. The 
 friars insisted that the captured leaders should be executed, and it 
 was done. 
 
 THE LATEST STRUGGLE FOR LIBERTY. 
 
 In 1896, the insurrection broke out again. Its causes were the 
 old oppressions : unbearable taxes, and imprisonment or banishment, 
 with the complete confiscation of property of those who could not 
 
3 2 THE PHILIPPINES PAST AND PRESEN7 
 
 pay; no justice except for those who could buy it; extortion by the 
 friars ; marriage ceremony so costly that a poor man could not pay 
 the fee ; homes and families broken up and ruined ; burial refused to 
 the dead, unless a large sum was paid in advance ; no provision and 
 no chance for education. Such were some of the causes that again 
 goaded the natives to revolution and nerved them with courage to 
 achieve victory after victory over their enemies until they were 
 promised most of the reforms which they demanded. Then they 
 laid down their arms, and, as usual, the Governor-General failed to 
 carry out a single pledge. 
 
 Such was the condition, and another revolt, more formidable 
 than any of the past, was forming, when Commodore Dewey with his 
 American fleet entered Manila Bay, May i, 1898, and by a victory 
 unparalleled in naval warfare, sunk the Spanish ships, silenced the 
 forts, and dethroned the power of Spain forever in a land which her 
 tyranny had blighted for more than three hundred years. 
 
 THE PEOPLE THEIR MANNERS AND CUSTOMS. 
 
 It is impossible within the scope of this article to give details 
 concerning all the inhabitants of this far-away archipelago. Professor 
 Worcester, of the University of Michigan, tells us that the popula 
 tion comprises more than eighty distinct tribes, with individual peculi 
 arities. They are scattered over hundreds of islands, and one who 
 really wants to know these peoples must leave cities and towns far 
 behind, and, at the risk of his life, through pathless forests, amid 
 volcanic mountains, at the mercy of savages, penetrate to the inner 
 most wilds. Notwithstanding the fact that for hundreds of years bold 
 men, led by the love of science or by the spirit of adventure, have 
 continued to penetrate these dark regions, there are many sections 
 where the foot of civilized man has never trocl ; or, if so, he came not 
 back to tell of the lands and peoples which his eyes beheld. 
 
 DIFFICULTIES OF EXPLORING THE COUNTRY. 
 
 There have been great obstacles in the way of a thorough 
 exploration of these islands. Spain persistently opposed the repre 
 sentatives of any other nation entering the country. She suspected 
 every man, with a gun, of designing to raise an insurrection or make 
 
DIFFICULTIES OF EXPLORING THE COUNTRY. 33 
 
 mischief among the natives. The account of red tape necessary to 
 secure guns and ammunition for a little party of four or five explorers 
 admitted through the customs at Manila is one of the most signifi 
 cant, as well as one of the most humorous, passages in Professor 
 Worcester s story of his several years sojourn while exploring the 
 archipelago. 
 
 In the second place, the savage tribes in the interior had no re 
 spect for Spain s authority, and will have none for ours for years to 
 come. Two-thirds of them paid no tribute, and many of them never 
 heard of Spain, or, if so, only remembered that a long time ago white 
 men came and cruelly persecuted the natives along the shore. These 
 wild tribes think themselves still the owners of the land. Some of them 
 go naked and practice cannibalism and other horrible savage customs. 
 Any explorer s life is in danger among them ; consequently most 
 tourists to the Philippines see Manila and make short excursions 
 around that city. The more ambitious run down to the cities of Iloilo 
 and Cebu, making short excursions into the country from those 
 points, and then return, thinking they have seen the Philippines. 
 Nothing could be further from the truth. Such travelers no more 
 see the Philippine Islands than Columbus explored America. 
 
 Even near the coast there are savages who are almost as igno 
 rant as their brethren in the interior. Mr. Stevens tells us that only 
 ;< thirty miles from Manila is a race of dwarfs that go without clothes, 
 wear knee-bracelets of horsehair, and respect nothing but the jungle 
 in which they live." The principal native peoples are of Malayan 
 origin. Of these, to the north of Manila are the Igorrotes, to the 
 south of Manila are the semi-civilized Visayas, and below them in 
 Mindanao and the Sulu Archipelago are the fierce Moros, who 
 originally came from the island of Borneo, settling in the Philippines 
 a short time before the Spanish discovery. They are Mohammedans 
 in religion, and as fanatical and as fearless fighters as the Turks 
 themselves. For three hundred years the Spaniards have been 
 fighting these savages, and while they have overcome them in nearly 
 all the coast towns, they have expended, it is said, upward of $100,- 
 oc 0,000 and sacrificed more than one hundred thousand lives in 
 doing so. 
 
34 THE PHILIPPINESPAST AND PRESENT 
 
 The fierce Moro warriors keep the Spanish settlers along their 
 coasts in a constant state of alarm, and the visitor to the towns feels 
 as if he were at an Indian outpost in early American history, because 
 of the constant state of apprehension that prevails. Fortunately, 
 however, the Moros along the coast have learned to distinguish 
 between the Spaniard and the Englishman or American, and through 
 them the generosity of \\\e Englese, as they call all Anglo-Saxons, has 
 spread to their brethren in the interior. Therefore, American and 
 English explorers have been enabled to go into sections where the 
 Spanish friars and monks, who have been practically the only Spanish 
 explorers, would meet with certain death. The Mohammedan fanati 
 cism of the Moros, and that of the Catholic friars and Jesuits, abso 
 lutely refuse compromise. 
 
 The Negritos (little Negroes) and the Mangyans are the princi 
 pal representatives of the aboriginal inhabitants before the Malayan 
 tribes came. There are supposed to be, collectively, almost 1,000,000 
 of them, and they are almost as destitute of clothing and as uncivil 
 ized as the savages whom Columbus found in America, and far more 
 degenerate and loathsome in habits. 
 
 THE CITY OF MANILA. 
 
 The Island of Luzon, on which the city of Manila stands, is 
 about as large as the State of New York, its area being variously 
 estimated at from 43,000 to 47,000 square miles. It is the largest 
 island in the Philippine group, comprising perhaps one-third of the 
 area of the entire archipelago. Its inhabitants are the most civilized, 
 and its territory the most thoroughly explored. The city of Manila 
 is the metropolis of the Philippines. The population of the city 
 proper and its environs is considered to be some 300,000 souls, of 
 whom 200,000 are natives, 40,000 full-blooded Chinese, 50,000 
 Chinese half-castes, 5,000 Spanish, mostly soldiers, 4,000 Spanish half- 
 castes and 300 white foreigners other than Spaniards. Mr. Joseph 
 Earle Stevens, already referred to, who represented the only Ameri 
 can firm in the city of Manila, under Spanish rule (which finally had 
 to turn its business over to the English and leave the island a few 
 years since), informs us that he and three others were the only repre 
 sentatives of the United States in Manila as late as 1893. 
 
EARTHQUAKES AND TYPHOONS 35 
 
 The city is built on a beautiful bay from twenty-five to thirty 
 miles across, and on both shores of the Pasig River. On the right 
 bank of the river, going up from the bay, is the old walled town, and 
 around the walls are the weedy moats or ditches. The heavy guns 
 and frowning cannon from the walls suggest a troubled past. ThL 
 old city is built in triangular form, about a mile on each side, and is 
 regarded as very unhealthful, for the walls both keep out the breeze 
 and keep in the foul air and odors. The principal buildings in the 
 old part of the city are the cathedral, many parish churches, a few 
 schoolhouses and the official buildings. The population in the walled 
 city is given at 20,000. Up to a few years ago, no foreigner was per 
 mitted to sleep within its walls on account of the Spaniards fear of 
 a conspiracy. A bridge across the Pasig connects old Manila with 
 the new or unwalled city, where nearly all of the business is done and 
 the native and foreign residents live. This section of the city is 
 known as Binondo and its chief street is the Escolta. 
 
 EARTHQUAKES AND TYPHOONS. 
 
 It does not take one long to exhaust the sights of Manila, if the 
 people, who are always interesting, are excepted. Aside from the 
 cathedral and a few of the churches, the buildings of the city are 
 anything but imposing. In fact, there is little encouragement to con 
 struct fine edifices because of the danger from earthquakes and 
 typhoons. It is said that not a year passes without a number of 
 slight earthquake shocks, and very serious ones have occurred. In 
 1645 nearly all of the public buildings were wrecked and 600 persons 
 killed. A very destructive earthquake was that of 1863, when 400 
 people were killed, 2,000 wounded and 46 public buildings and 1,100 
 private houses were badly injured or completely destroyed. In 1874 
 earthquakes were again very numerous throughout the islands, 
 shocks being felt at intervals in certain sections for several weeks. 
 But the most violent convulsion of modern times occurred in 1880, 
 when even greater destruction than in 1863 visited Manila and other 
 towns of Luzon. Consequently there are very few buildings to be 
 found more than two stories high ; and the heavy tile roofs formerly 
 in use have, for the most part, been replaced by lighter coverings of 
 galvanized iron. 
 
36 THE PHILIPPINES PAST AND PRESENT 
 
 These light roofs, however, are in constant danger of being 
 stripped off by the typhoons, terrible storms which come with a twist 
 ing motion as if rising from the earth or the sea, fairly pulling every 
 thing detachable with them. Masts of ships and roofs of houses are 
 frequently carried by these hurricanes miles distant. The better to 
 resist the typhoons, most of the light native houses are built on 
 bamboo poles, which allow the wind to pass freely under them, and 
 sway and bend in the storm like a tree ; whereas, if they were set 
 solidly on the earth, they would be lifted up bodily and carried away. 
 Glass windows being too frail to resist the shaking of the earthquakes 
 and the typhoons, small, translucent oyster shells are used instead. The 
 light thus admitted resembles that passing through ground glass, or, 
 rather, stained glass, for the coloring in the shells imparts a mellow 
 tinted radiance like the windows of a cathedral. 
 
 MANILA AS A BUSINESS CENTER. 
 
 The streets of Manila are wretchedly paved or not paved at all, 
 and, as late as 1893, were lighted by kerosene lamps or by wicks sus 
 pended in dishes of cocoanut oil. Lately an electric plant has been 
 introduced, and parts of the city are lighted in this manner. There 
 are two lines of street cars in Manila. The motive power for a car is 
 a single small pony, and foreigners marvel to see one of those little 
 animals drawing thirty-odd people. 
 
 The retail trade and petty banking of Manila is almost entirely 
 in the hands of the half-castes and Chinese, and many of them have 
 grown immensely wealthy. There are only about three hundred 
 Europeans in business in the whole Philippine group, and they con 
 duct the bulk of the importing and exporting trade. Manila contains 
 a number of large cigarette factories, two of which employ 4,000 and 
 one 10,000 hands. There is also a sugar refinery, a steam rice mill, 
 and a rope factory worked partly by men and partly by oxen, a Spanish 
 brewery and a German cement factory, a Swiss umbrella factory and 
 a Swiss hat factory. The single cotton mill, in which $200,000 of 
 English capital is invested, runs 6,000 spindles. 
 
 The statistics of 1897 show that the whole trade of Manilla com 
 prised only forty-five Spanish, nineteen German, and seventeen Eng 
 lish firms, with six Swiss brokers and two French storekeepers having 
 
GENERAL COMMERCE OF THE PHILIPPINES 37 
 
 large establishments. One of the most profitable businesses is said 
 to be that of selling cheap jewelry to the natives. Breastpins which 
 dealers buy in Europe for twelve cents each are readily sold for from 
 $1.50 to $2.00 each to the simple Filipinos. Almost everything 
 that is manufactured abroad has a fine prospective market in the 
 Philippines, when the condition of the people permits them to buy. 
 
 A certain charm attaches to many specimens of native handi 
 work. The women weave exquisitely beautiful fabrics from the fiber 
 of plants. The floors of Manila houses are admired by all foreigners. 
 They are made of hard wood and polished with banana leaves and 
 greasy cloths until they shine brightly and give a cool airiness to the 
 room. 
 
 Any kind of amusement is popular with the Filipinos with so 
 much leisure on their hands provided it does not require too great 
 exertion on their part. They are fond of the theatre, and, up to a 
 few years ago, bullfighting was a favorite pastime ; but the most 
 prominent of modern amusements for ^e natives and half castes is 
 cockfighting. It is said that every native has his fighting cock, 
 which is reared and trained with the greatest care until he shows 
 sufficient skill to entitle him to an entrance into the public cockpit 
 where he will fight for a prize. The chickens occupy the family 
 residence, roosting overhead ; and, in case of fire, it is said that the 
 game " rooster " is saved before the babies. Professor Worcester 
 tells an amusing story of the annoyance of the crowing cocks above 
 his head in the morning and the devices and tricks he and his com 
 panions employed to quiet them. The Manila lottery is another in 
 stitution which intensely excites the sluggish native, and takes from 
 him the money which he does not lose on the cockfights. Under the 
 United States Government this lottery will, no doubt, be abolished 
 in time. It formerly belonged to the Spanish Government, and 
 Spain derived an annual profit of half a million dollars from it. 
 
 GENERAL COMMERCE OF THF PHILIPPINES. 
 
 It is hardly necessary, so far as the commercial world is con 
 cerned, to mention any other locality outside of the city of Manila. To 
 commerce, this city (whose total imports in 1897, were only $10,000,- 
 ooo, and its exports $20,000000) is the Philippine I^ands. Its 
 
38 THE PHILIPPINES PAST AND PRESENT 
 
 present meagre foreign trade represents only an average purchase of 
 about one dollar per inhabitant, and an average sale of two dollars 
 per inhabitant for the largest archipelago in the world, and one of 
 the richest in soil and natural resources. The bulk of these exports 
 was hemp, sugar, and tobacco; and, strange as it may seem, the 
 United States received 41 per cent, of her hemp and 55 per cent, of 
 her sugar for the year 1897, notwithstanding the fact that we had not 
 one commercial firm doing business in that whole vast domain. 
 
 The city of Iloilo is on the southern coast of the fertile island of 
 Panay, and, next to Manila, the chief port of the Philippines. It has 
 an excellent harbor, and the surrounding country is very productive, 
 having extensive plantations of sugar, rice and tobacco. The popu 
 lation of Iloilo is only 12,000, but there are a few larger towns in the 
 district, of -which it is the seaport. Though the city at springtides is 
 covered with water, it is said to be a very healthful place, and much 
 cooler than Manila. 
 
 The other open port, Cebu, on the eastern coast of the island of 
 the same name, is a well-built town, and has a population of about 
 13,000. From this point the bulk of the hemp for export comes. 
 
 GENERAL CHARACTER OF THE ISLANDS. 
 
 It is impossible to speak of the other islands in detail. Seven of 
 the group average larger than the State of New Jersey ; Luzon is as 
 extensive as Ohio, Mindanao equals I ndiana ; and, as we have stated 
 before, about four hundred of the islands are inhabitable, and, like 
 Java, Borneo, and the Spice Islands, all are rich in natural resources, 
 They are of a volcanic origin, and may be described in general as 
 rugged and mountainous. The coasts of most of the islands are 
 deeply indented by the sea, and the larger ones are well watered by 
 streams, the mouths of which afford good harbors. Many of the 
 mountainous parts abound in minerals. Mr. Karuph, President of 
 the Philippine Mineral Syndicate, in May, 1898, addressed a letter to 
 Hon. John Hay, at that time our ambassador to England, in which 
 he declares that the Philippines will soon come prominently forward 
 as a new center of the world s gold production. " There is not a 
 brook," said Mr. Karuph, " that finds its way into the Pacific Ocean 
 whose sands and gravel do not pan the color of gold. Many valuable 
 
FORESTS AND TIMBER 41 
 
 deposits are close to deep water. I know of no other part of the 
 world, the Alaskan Treadwell mines alone excepted, where pay ore is 
 found within a few hundred yards of the anchorage of sea-going ves 
 sels." In addition to gold, iron, copper, lead, sulphur, and other min 
 erals are found, and are believed to exist in paying quantities. The 
 numerous mineral springs attest their presence in almost every part 
 of the principal islands. 
 
 FORESTS AND TIMBER. 
 
 The forest products of the islands are perhaps of greater value 
 than their mineral resources. Timber not only exists in almost 
 exhaustless quantity, but considering the whole group, which extends 
 nearly a thousand miles from north to south in unprecedented diver 
 sity, embracing sixty varieties of the most valuable woods, several of 
 which are so hard that they cannot be cut with ordinary saws, some 
 so heavy that they sink in water, and two or three so durable as to 
 afford ground for the claim that they outlast iron and steel when 
 placed in the ground or under water. Several of these woods are 
 unknown elsewhere, and, altogether, they are admirably suited for 
 various decorative purposes and for the manufacture of fine imple 
 ments and furniture. 
 
 Here also are pepper, cinnamon, wax, and gums of various sorts, 
 cloves, tea, and vanilla, while all tropical fruits, such as cocoanuts, 
 bananas, lemons, limes, oranges of several varieties, pineapples, 
 citrons, bread-fruits, custard apples, pawpaws, and mangroves flourish 
 and most of them grow wild, though, of course, they are not equal to 
 the cultivated fruit. There are fifty odd varieties of the banana in 
 the archipelago, from the midget, which makes but a single mouthful, 
 to the huge fruit eighteen inches long. There seems to be no limit 
 to which tropical fruits and farm products can be cultivated. 
 
 The animal and bird life of the Philippines offer a field of inter 
 esting research to naturalists. There are no important carnivorous 
 animals. A small wild cat and two species of civet cats constitute 
 about all that belong to that class. The house cats of the Philippines 
 have curious fishhook crooks in the ends of their tails. There are sev 
 eral species of deer in the archipelago. Hogs run wild in large numbers. 
 The large water buffalo (rar^bao) has been domesticated and is the 
 
42 THE PHILIPPINES PAST AND PRESENT 
 
 chief beast of burden with the natives. The timarau is another 
 small species of buffalo, very wild and entirely untamable ; and, though 
 numerous in certain places, is hard to find, and when brought to bay 
 dies fighting. 
 
 Birds abound in all of the islands ; nearly six hundred species have 
 been found, over fifty of which exist nowhere else in the world. One 
 of these species builds a nest which is highly prized by Chinese epi 
 cures as an article of diet. Prof. Worcester tells us "the best quality 
 of them sometimes bring more than their weight in gold." Crocodiles 
 are numerous in fresh-water lakes and streams, attaining enormous 
 size, and in certain places causing much loss of life among stock and 
 men as well. Snakes also abound, and some of them are very .venom 
 ous. Cobras are found in the southern islands. Pythons are numer 
 ous, some of the smaller sizes being sold in the towns and kept in 
 houses to catch rats, at which they are said to be more expert than 
 house cats. 
 
 All the domestic animals, aside from the carabao, have been intro 
 duced from abroad. Cattle are extensively raised, and in some of the 
 islands run wild. The horses are a small Spanish breed, but are very 
 strong and have great endurance. Large European horses do not 
 stand the climate well. 
 
 CLIMATE, VOLCANOES, ETC. 
 
 The mean annual temperature of Manila is 80 degrees F. The 
 thermometer seldom rises above 100 degrees or falls below 60 degrees 
 anywhere in the archipelago. There is no month in the year during 
 which it does not rise as high as 91 degrees. January and December 
 are the coldest months, the average temperature being 70 to 73 de 
 grees. May is the warmest, the average being 84 degrees. April is 
 the next warmest, with an average of 83 degrees ; but the weather is 
 generally very moist and humid, which makes the heat more trying. 
 The three winter months have cool nights. Malaria is prevalent, but 
 contagious diseases are comparatively few. Yellow fever and cholera 
 are seldom heard of. 
 
 The Philippines are the home of many volcanoes, a number of 
 them still active. Mayon, in the island of Luzon, is one of the most 
 remarkable volcanic mountains on the globe. It is a perfect cone. 
 

 THE BATTLE OF MANILA 43 
 
 rising to the height of 8,900 feet, and is in constant activity ; its latest 
 destructive eruption took place in 1888. Apo, in the island of Min 
 danao, 10,312 feet high, is the largest of the Philippine volcanoes. 
 Next is Canloon in Negros, which rises 8,192 feet above the sea. 
 Taal is in a lake, with a height of 900 feet, and is noteworthy as being 
 the lowest volcano in the world. To those not accustomed to vol 
 canoes, these great fire-spouting mountains, which are but prominent 
 representatives of many lesser ones in the islands, seem to be an ever- 
 present danger to the inhabitants ; but the natives and those who live 
 there manifest little or no fear of them. In fact, they rather pride 
 themselves in their possession of such terrifying neighbors. 
 
 Such is an outline view of the Philippine Archipelago of the 
 present day. A new era has opened up in the history of that wonder 
 ful land with its liberation from the Spanish yoke. The dense igno 
 rance and semi-savage barbarities which exist there must not be 
 expected to yield too rapidly to the touch of human kindness and 
 brotherly love with which the Christian world will now visit those 
 semi-civilized and untamed children of nature. Nevertheless, western 
 civilization and western progress will undoubtedly work mighty 
 changes in the lives of those people, in the development of that coun 
 try, during the first quarter of the twentieth century, which ushers in 
 the dawn of its freedom. 
 
 THE BATTLE OF MANILA. 
 
 In all the annals of naval warfare there is no engagement, termi 
 nating in so signal a victory with so little damage to the victors, as 
 that which made the name of George Dewey immortal on the memor 
 able Sunday morning of May i, 1898, in Manila Bay. The world 
 knows the story of that battle, for it has been told hundreds of times 
 in the thousands of newspapers and magazines and scores of books 
 throughout the civilized world. But few, perhaps, who peruse these 
 pages have read the simple details of the fight as narrated by that 
 most modest of men, Admiral Dewey himself. We cannot better 
 close this chapter on the Philippines than by inserting Admiral 
 Dewey s official report of the battle which wrested the Filipinos from 
 Spanish tyranny and placed nearly ten millions of oppressed people 
 under the protecting care of the United States. 
 
44 THE PHILIPPINES PAST AND PRESENT 
 
 ADMIRAL DEWEY S STORY OF MANILA. 
 
 "UNITED STATES FLAGSHIP OLYMPIA, CAVITE, May 4, 1898. 
 
 "The squadron left Mirs Bay on April 27th, arrived off Bolinao 
 on the morning of April 3Oth, and, finding no vessels there, proceeded 
 clown the coast and arrived off the entrance to Manila Bay on the 
 same afternoon. The Boston and the Concord were sent to recon 
 noitre Port Subic. A thorough search was made of the port by the 
 Boston and the Concord, but the Spanish fleet was not found. 
 Entered the south channel at 11.30 P.M., steaming in column at eight 
 knots. After half the squadron had passed, a battery on the south 
 side of the channel opened fire, none of the shots taking effect. The 
 Boston and McCulloch returned the fire. The squadron proceeded 
 across the bay at slow speed and arrived off Manila at daybreak, and 
 was fired upon at 5.15 A.M. by three batteries at Manila and two near 
 Cavite, and by the Spanish fleet anchored in an approximately east 
 and west line across the mouth of Bakor Bay, with their left in shoal 
 water in Canacao Bay. 
 
 " The squadron then proceeded to the attack, the flagship Olympia, 
 under my personal direction, leading, followed at a distance by the 
 Baltimore, Raleigh, Petrel, Concord and Boston in the order named, 
 which formation was maintained throughout the action. The squad 
 ron opened fire at 5.41 A.M. While advancing to the attack, two mines 
 were exploded ahead of the flagship, too far to be effective. The 
 squadron maintained a continuous and precise fire at ranges varying 
 from 5,000 to 2,000 yards, countermarching in a line approximately 
 parallel to that of the Spanish fleet. The enemy s fire was vigorous, 
 but generally ineffective. Early in the engagement two launches put 
 out toward the Olympia with the apparent intention of using torpe 
 does. One was sunk and the other disabled by our fire and beached 
 before they were able to fire their torpedoes. 
 
 "At 7 A.M. the Spanish flagship Reina Christina made a desperate 
 attempt to leave the line and come out to engage at short range, but 
 was received with such a galling fire, the entire battery of the Olympia 
 being concentrated upon her, that she was barely able to return to the 
 shelter of the point. The fires started in her by our shells at the time 
 were not extinguished until she sank. The three batteries at Manila 
 had kept up a continuous fire from the beginning of the engagement, 
 
ADMIRAL DEWEY S STORY OF THE BATTLE 45 
 
 which fire was not returned by my squadron. The first of these batter 
 ies was situated on the south mole-head at the entrance of the Pasig 
 River, the second on the south position of the walled city of Manila, 
 and the third at Malate, about one-half mile further south. At this 
 point I sent a message to the Governor-General to the effect that if 
 the batteries did not cease firing the city would be shelled. This had 
 the effect of silencing them. 
 
 " At 7.35 A.M. I ceased firing and withdrew the squadron for 
 breakfast. At 11.16 I returned to the attack. By this time the 
 Spanish flagship and almost all the Spanish fleet were in flames. At 
 12.30 the squadron ceased firing, the batteries being silenced and the 
 ships sunk, burned and deserted. 
 
 "At 12.40 the squadron returned and anchored off Manila, the 
 Petrel being left behind to complete the destruction of the smaller 
 gunboats, which were behind the point of Cavite. This duty was 
 performed by Commander E. P. Wood in the most expeditious and 
 complete manner possible. The Spanish lost the following vessels : 
 Sunk, Reina Christina, Bastilla, Don Antonio de Ulloa ; burned, Don 
 Juan de Austria, Isla de Luzon, Isla de Cuba, General Lezo, Marquis 
 del Duero, El Correo, Velasco, and Isla de Mindanao (transport) ; 
 captured, Rapido and Hercules (tugs), and several small launches. 
 
 " I am unable to obtain complete accounts of the enemy s killed and 
 wounded, but believe their losses to be very heavy. The Reina Chris 
 tina alone had 150 killed, including the captain, and ninety wounded. 
 I am happy to report that the damage done to the squadron under 
 my command was inconsiderable. There were none killed, and only 
 seven in the squadron were slightly wounded. Several of the vessels 
 were struck and even penetrated, but the damage was of the slightest, 
 and the squadron is in as good condition now as before the battle. 
 
 " I beg to state to the department that I doubt if any com- 
 mander-in-chief was ever served by more loyal, efficient and gallant 
 captains than those of the squadron now under my command. Cap 
 tain Frank Wildes, commanding the Boston, volunteered to remain 
 in command of his vessel, although his relief arrived before leaving 
 Hong Kong. Assistant Surgeon Kindelberger, of the Olympia, and 
 Gunner J. C. Evans, of the Boston, also volunteered to remain, after 
 orders detaching them had arrived. The conduct of my personal 
 
46 THE PHILIPPINES PAST AND PRESENT 
 
 staff was excellent. Commander B. P. Lamberton, chief of staff, was 
 a volunteer for that position, and gave me most efficient aid. Lieu 
 tenant Brumby, Flag Lieutenant, and Ensign E. P. Scott, aide, per 
 formed their duties as signal officers in a highly creditable manner ; 
 Caldwell, Flag Secretary, volunteered for and was assigned to a sub 
 division of the five-inch battery. Mr. J. L. Stickney, formerly an 
 officer in the United States Navy, and now correspondent for the 
 New York Herald, volunteered for duty as my aide, and rendered 
 valuable service. I desire especially to mention the coolness of 
 Lieutenant C. G. Calkins, the navigator of the Olympia, who came 
 under my personal observation, being on the bridge with me through 
 out the entire action, and giving the ranges to the guns with an 
 accuracy that was proven by the excellence of the firing. 
 
 " On May 2cl, the day following the engagement, the squadron 
 again went to Cavite, where it remains. On the 3d the military 
 forces evacuated the Cavite arsenal, which was taken possession of 
 by a landing party. On the same day the Raleigh and the Baltimore 
 secured the surrender of the batteries on Corregidor Island, paroling 
 the garrison and destroying the guns. On the morning of May 4th, 
 the transport Manila, which had been aground in Bakor Bay, was 
 towed off and made a prize." 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 Behind Admiral Dewey s Guns 
 
 The Magnificent Naval Battle of May ist Described by an Officer who stood by 
 Dewey during the Fight. The Personal Side of the Nation s Greatest Hero. 
 A Brush with German Officers. The Surrender of Cavite. 
 
 MAY i, 1898, will go down in history as the date of the greatest 
 naval battle the world has ever seen. Farragut made himself 
 immortal by his famous order, " Damn the torpedoes ; go 
 ahead." Commodore George Dewey, taught in the school of Farra 
 gut, went ahead in Manila Bay, regardless of torpedoes or glowering 
 forts. 
 
 On the night of April 3Oth the United States squadron was off 
 Manila Bay. Darkness came on, and all aboard the vessels were in a 
 state of keen expectancy. At 10 o clock all hands were piped to 
 fighting quarters, and all lights were "doused." No one knew what 
 the next few hours would bring. 
 
 Commodore Dewey had been warned that Spanish mines and 
 torpedoes had been sunk at the mouth of the bay. Balloon-shaped, 
 with the island of Corregiclor across the neck, the bay lent itself 
 naturally to defence. The path to Manila was a narrow and dan 
 gerous one, but Dewey, fearless and confident, decided to make the 
 dash, and either win or lose all in one stroke. 
 
 What a picture the scene conjures up to one s mind ! The inky 
 blackness of the night, the ships themselves lightless, the men keyed 
 to a state of excitement, anxious as to what their fate would be, their 
 Commodore calm as though there was no enemy ahead or danger 
 beneath. All is silence except the swish of the waters as the fighters 
 ploughed through. Then a spark or two blown from the funnel of 
 the McCulloch against the black sky betrays to the sentinels on the 
 forts at the harbor the presence of the fleet. The sharp boom of a 
 gun, another, and still another, echo across the bay. They give to 
 the Spanish forces the first inkling of the approaching battle. 
 
 47 
 
48 BEHIND ADMIRAL DEWEY S GUNS 
 
 The story of that battle, so modestly and simply told in the 
 report of Commodore Dewey, has already been given. At his side 
 on the flagship Olympia all through the engagement stood a young 
 naval officer, Ensign W. Pitt Scott. His name was mentioned by 
 Commodore Dewey in the report to the War Department, and he 
 was specially commended for bravery in the battle. 
 
 ENSIGN SCOTT S STORY OF THE BATTLE. 
 
 It is stated by Colonel George A. Loud, who witnessed the bat 
 tle from the Revenue Cutter McCulloch, that a six-pound shell cut 
 the rigging four feet over Commodore Dewey s head just as Ensign 
 Scott was raising a signal flag and the halyards were shot away. 
 Ensigh Scott has told the story of the battle, which is given here 
 with. He writes : 
 
 The Spaniards had ten ships fighting to our six, and, in addi 
 tion, had five or six shore batteries, some of which bothered us a 
 great deal. We steamed by their line and fired some deadly shot at 
 them. We had anticipated that once across their line would be suffi 
 cient to silence them, but they did not yield, and so, when we got to 
 the end of the line, we turned and went back at them again. It was 
 getting really interesting now, for many of their shots were coming 
 close to us, and the screech of the missiles as they whistled over our 
 heads was anything but pleasant. Now and then we would see a 
 shot strike in the water ahead of us and explode and the pieces of it 
 come at us. I will never forget it. 
 
 o 
 
 " I was surprised to find how little it disturbed us. I never 
 believed I would ever feel so unconcerned while the shots were fall 
 ing around us. No one seemed to care an iota whether the shells 
 dropped on us, or fell a distance away, and in the intervals, between 
 which we were making signals, the most commonplace remarks were 
 made. 
 
 " We passed across the enemy s line the second time ; but that 
 did not seem to silence them any more than the first, and we had to 
 try it a third time, with no better result, although perhaps their fire 
 was not so heavy as at first. A small torpedo boat came out and 
 attempted to get within striking distance of the Olympia, but our 
 secondary battery drove her in ; a second time she came out and at 
 
THE BARRACKS AT CORREGIDOR AFTER SPANISH WITHDRAWAL. 
 
 The two American newspaper correspondents, while touring the island, were guided by six Igorrote warriors from Aguiuald 
 army. Notice they are armed with primitive savage weapons. 
 
 COMMANDANTE S HOUSE, CAVITE. 
 
 The largest arsenal in the Philippines is at Cavite. It is now being used to manufacture and store ammunition 
 
 for the U. S. troops. 
 
THE FLAGSHIP BORE THE BRUNT OF THE FIRE 51 
 
 us, but again our fire was too much for her, and some of our shots 
 striking her, she had barely time to get back to the beach, or she 
 would have sunk. 
 
 THE FLAGSHIP BORE THE BRUNT OF THE FIRE. 
 
 " It soon became apparent that the Spaniards were concentrating 
 their fire on the Olympia (as flagship), and we then received the 
 brunt of the fight. At one time the Reina Christina, the Spanish 
 llagship, attempted to come out from her position and engage us at 
 closer distance, but we turned our fire on her and drove her back. 
 
 " A fourth time we steamed across their line, and a fifth, and it 
 began to. look as if they were not going to give in until after all our 
 ammunition would be exhausted, which would leave us in a very seri 
 ous predicament, in the midst of the enemy and in one of their ports, 
 7,000 miles from supplies ; so after the fifth time across their line we 
 withdrew to count up our ammunition, to see how we stood, and get 
 breakfast. 
 
 " It was only 7.30 A.M., but it seemed to us as if it were the mid 
 dle of the .day. Then we began to count our casualities, and found 
 that no one had been killed and no one injured, with a few slight 
 exceptions. 
 
 " But it was the dirtiest-looking crowd I have ever seen, and by 
 far the oddest. It was so hot that nearly all of the men had stripped 
 off all their clothes, in fact, in the turrets they did strip off about 
 everything but their shoes, which they kept on to protect their feet 
 from the hot floor. Commodore Dewey himself, the most dressed 
 man in the battle, was in white duck ; the rest of us appeared with 
 out collars and some without shirts, an undershirt and white blouse 
 being more than sufficient for our needs, and, if our blouses were not 
 off, they certainly were not buttoned. 
 
 STANDING UNDER SHARP FIRE. 
 
 "We were a mighty dirty crowd. Our faces and clothes were 
 full of smoke and powder and saltpetre, and the perspiration rolling 
 around in that made us picturesquely handsome. I would have given 
 a good deal for a picture of the ship s company, men and officers. 
 
 " Then we looked around to see where the ship had been 
 
52 BEHIND ADMIRAL DEWEY S GUNS 
 
 injured, and found that she had been struck several times, none of 
 which materially hurt her. On the bridge where we stood was, per 
 haps, the hottest place of all, for at least four shots struck within 
 thirty or forty feet of it. One of the ugly shots flew over our heads 
 with a screech, but its cry was a little different from most of the 
 others, and several of us said, That hit something , and we looked 
 aloft to see if it had, and found the halyards on which we had a 
 signal flying cut in two, and the signal out to the leeward. Another 
 shot cut the wire-rigging ten feet over our heads, while any number 
 flew close over us without striking anything. 
 
 11 About halfpast ten we returned to the attack, and gave the 
 Baltimore the post of honor in leading, as we were very short of 
 5-inch ammunition, and the way that the Baltimore did fire into the 
 Spanish batteries was a caution. It was not long before the enemy 
 was completely silenced and the white flag run up. Two of their 
 ships were on fire and burning fiercely, and one was sinking. The 
 Don Antonio de Ulloa was the last to give in, and after she was aban 
 doned by her crew, she still kept her flag flying, which necessitated 
 our firing at her until it was lowered ; but as no one was left on board 
 to lower it, we kept firing at her until she slowly began to sink. It 
 was a grand sight to see her settle aft, with the flag of Spain upon 
 her. 
 
 " Then we sent one of the smaller ships in to destroy those that 
 were still afloat, and the Petrel burned and sunk four or five of them, 
 while the Concord fired a large transport, which, we afterward 
 learned, was quite full of coal and stuff for the Spaniards. Altogether 
 our six ships, the Olympia, Baltimore, Raleigh, Boston, Concord, and 
 Petrel, burned and sunk almost the entire Spanish fleet that is in the 
 East, as follows, viz. : Sunk, the Reina Christina (flagship), Castilta 
 and Antonio de Austria, the Isla de Cuba, the Jsl-.i de Luzon, the 
 Marqiics del Duero, the Velasco, the General Lezo, the El Correo, and 
 the transport Isla de Mindanao. There is still one small vessel, the 
 Argus, on the ways, but she is so badly damaged by shot that I doubt 
 if she would float if we tried to put her into the water. Besides, we 
 captured the Manila, a splendid i goo-ton vessel, which they used as 
 transport, and on which we expect to send home our trophies in the 
 way of captured guns, etc. We also captured any number of tu<*s 
 
PROUD OF THE SHIPS WOUNDS 53 
 
 and steam launches, some of which we are now using. Some of them 
 were very fine tugboats. 
 
 ALL WERE PROUD OF THE SHIPS WOUNDS. 
 
 " Everyone seemed proud of the wounds to the ships. The 
 evening of the fight I had to go around to the different ships on an 
 errand for Commodore Dewey, and on each one all hands made it a 
 point to take me around and show me where each shot hit them. 
 
 " The harbor presents quite an unusual appearance with eight or 
 nine ships showing just above water, the masts charred, and their 
 upper works (those that can be seen) nothing but a twisted mass of 
 iron. It looks as if we had done something to pay for the Maine. 
 
 " I got ashore several days after the engagement and walked 
 through the navy yard. It presents a woeful sight. The barracks 
 had any number of holes in the sides, and things were strewn all 
 over. In one room of the the commandant s house we saw where 
 a large 8-inch shell had gone through the roof, and after carrying 
 away the thick planking had exploded, knocking down the side of 
 the room and wrecking everything in it. In another building I saw 
 where a shell had gone through the side of it, and had scattered 
 the bricks all over the room." 
 
 In this remarkable battle, Admiral Montojo, the Spanish Com 
 mander, fought with the bravery that won from Admiral Dewey com 
 pliments and congratulations. His flagship, the Reina Maria Chris 
 tina, the best of his fleet, dashed bravely towards the long line of 
 belching vessels of Dewey s squadron, hoping to cripple at least one 
 of the warships, that was pouring such an awful fire into his fleet. It 
 was the madness of despair. 
 
 Dewey signalled for a concentration of fire upon the on-coming 
 vessel, and as she neared the Olympia, the latter discharged her 
 8-inch guns both fore and aft, killing sixty of the Spaniard s crew, 
 including her captain, chaplain and a lieutenant, and causing her 
 boilers to explode. The flagship was a burning wreck, and was forced 
 to retire. Admiral Montojo transferred his flag to the Isla de Cuba, 
 which maintained a vigorous fire until she too sank at her moorings. 
 
 Admiral Montojo s own account of the fight is interesting as 
 giving a Spanish view of the greatest of naval encounters. The 
 
54 BEHIND ADMIRAL DEWEY S GUNS 
 
 Admiral is a spare man, of small stature, about 65 years old, with an 
 air of an old Spanish Grandee. He speaks English fluently, but 
 with a slight accent, and the following are his own words in describ 
 ing the battle : 
 
 THE SPANISH ADMIRALS ACCOUNT OF HIS DEFEAT. 
 
 " About 5 o clock on Sunday morning I observed the American 
 squadron coming in line straight across the bay towards Cavite. We 
 prepared to receive them. A few minutes after 5 o clock the engage 
 ment opened, the battery on Pont Sangley (Cavite) firing on each 
 ship as she came within range. The American ships did not reply. 
 All the Spanish ships were in Cavite Bay at anchor the Reina Chris- 
 tina (my flagship), Castilla, Don Juan de Austria, Ulloa, Isla de Cuba, 
 Isla de Luzon, Marques del Duero, and some small gunboats. The 
 Reina Christina and the Don Juan, as you know, were old cruisers ; 
 the Castilla was a wooden cruiser, but was unable to steam owing to 
 the breakdown of her engines ; the Ulloa and Velasco were helpless, 
 and were undergoing repairs off the arsenal. 
 
 "The Olympia, Baltimore, Raleigh, and Boston engaged my flag 
 ship in turn about 5.30, attracted by my flag. I recognized the neces 
 sity of getting under way, and accordingly slipped both anchors, 
 ordering the other ships to follow my example. Although we recog 
 nized the hopelessness of fighting the American ships, we were busy 
 returning their fire. The Reina Christina was hit repeatedly. Shortly 
 after 6.30 I observed fire forward. Our steering gear was damaged, 
 rendering the vessel unmanageable, and we were being subjected to 
 a terrific hail of shell and shot. The engines were struck, and we 
 estimated that we had 70 hits about our hull and superstructure. The 
 boilers were not hit, but the pipe to the condenser was destroyed. 
 A few moments later I observed the afterpart on fire. A shell from 
 the Americans had penetrated and burst with deadly effect, killing 
 many of our men. 
 
 "My flag lieutenant said to me, The ship is in flames. It is 
 impossible to stay on the Christina any longer. He signalled to the 
 gunboat Isla de Cuba, and I and my staff transferred to her, and my 
 flag was hoisted on her. Before leaving the Christina my flag was 
 hauled down. My flagship was now one mass of flame. I ordered 
 
THE LAST SPANISH SIGNAL 5 5 
 
 away all the boats I could to save the crew. Many of the men jumped 
 overboard without clothing and succeeded in reaching the shore, sev 
 eral hundreds of yards away. Only a few men were drowned, the 
 majority being picked up by the boats. 
 
 " Before jumping overboard, Captain Cadarso s son, a lieutenant 
 on board the Christina, saw his father alive on deck, but others state 
 that as the Captain was about to leave a shell burst overhead and 
 killed him. We estimate that 52 men were killed on board the 
 Christina and about 150 wounded. The chaplain was killed. The 
 assistant physician, the chief engineer, and three officers were wounded. 
 The boatswain and chief gunner were both killed. In the Castitla 
 only about 15 men were killed, but there were many wounded, 
 both on the Castilla and the Don Juan, on which 13 men were 
 killed. Altogether, so far as we know at present, 400 men were killed 
 and wounded in our ships. 
 
 " As soon as I translated myself from the Reina Christina to the 
 Isla de Cuba all the shots were directed upon the Cuba, following my 
 flag. We sought shelter behind the pier at Cavite, and, recognizing 
 the futility of fighting more, I prepared to disembark, and gave orders 
 for the evacuation of the remainder of our ships. The Castilla had 
 been on fire from end to end for some time, and was, of course, already 
 abandoned. The Ulloa was also burning. 
 
 THE LAST SPANISH SIGNAL. 
 
 " My last signal to the Captains of all vessels was * Scuttle and 
 abandon your ships/ 
 
 "This was about 7.30. The Reina Christina, Castilla, Don Juan 
 de Austria, Velasco, and Ulloa were all destroyed in this engagement. 
 To prevent the guns being of use to the Americans, the Captains, on 
 abandoning, brought away portions of the mechanism, and also suc 
 ceeded in saving all the ships papers and treasure. At this point 
 there was a cessation of firing. The Boston sent ashore a boat with 
 an officer carrying a white flag, and parleyed with the Chief of the 
 Arsenal. He asked permission to destroy the vessels completely 
 without interference from the shore. After consultation with me, the 
 Chief of the Arsenal replied that it was not competent on my part 
 to give any pledge ; the ships were at his mercy and he could do with 
 
56 BEHIND ADMIRAL DEWEY S GUNS 
 
 them as he liked. While the parleying was proceeding, the Petrel and 
 Concord went across the bay, and fired a large number of shots into 
 the Isla de Mindanao, which was lying ashore near Bacoor, and she 
 soon caught fire. Her captain had run her ashore when the American 
 squadron was observed making for Cavite Bay. She never fired a 
 shot. 
 
 " I was wounded in the left leg by an iron splinter, and my son, 
 a lieutenant, was wounded in the hand by a shell splinter. We were 
 both wounded on the Reina Christina. I directed the movements of 
 my squadron from the bridge. There was no conning tower. The 
 Captain of the Boston said to my chief of staff, Captain Boado, You 
 have combated with us with four very bad ships, not warships. There 
 was never seen before braver fighting under such unequal conditions. 
 It is a great pity that you exposed your lives in vessels not fit for 
 fighting . Commodore Dewey also sent me a message by the British 
 Consul, saying that, peace or war, he would have great pleasure in 
 clasping me by the hand, and congratulating me on the gallant man 
 ner in which we fought." 
 
 A WILD EXULTANT CHEER OF VICTORY. 
 
 And so the great, fight ended. When the little Petrel announced 
 that the Spanish fleet had scuttled their vessels and fled, a great 
 cheer went up from all the men who had braved the perils of the 
 Spanish fire, and that cheer was doubled and redoubled when, later 
 on, it was announced that not one man of the American fleet had 
 lost his life. The only death was due to apoplexy brought on by the 
 intense heat. The Chief Engineer of the McCnlloch was the victim ; 
 he suddenly expired, not in the battle, but just as the fleet was 
 entering the mouth of the bay. 
 
 Fighting ceased about 12.15 p. M., by which time all the Spanish 
 ships were sunk or burned. The arsenal was ablaze, and throughout 
 the night explosions weYe occurring in Cavite Bay an alluring 
 spectacle of destruction. 
 
 It was in the smaller incidents of this great battle that Commo 
 dore (thereafter to be known as Admiral) Dewey showed to his men, 
 and to the whole world, what manner of man he was. The with 
 drawal of his fleet so that his men, exhausted by the severe work of 
 
GEORGE DEWEY, ADMIRAL, HERO, STATESMAN, ETC. $7 
 
 battle, might have breakfast has thrilled every heart. His kindness 
 and courtesy in complimenting a defeated foe for personal bravery, 
 proved him a gentleman even in war. His cablegrams to the Navy 
 Department show him a man of rare modesty. One sentence in the 
 second of his dispatches, harmonizing as it does with the keynote of 
 the whole war " humanity "-will live in history with the sayings of 
 the greatest men the world has had. Let us repeat his own words : 
 " I am assisting in protecting the Spanish sick and wounded. Two 
 hundred and fifty sick and wounded in hospital within our line." 
 That was humanity s own voice. When in naval history had such a 
 spectacle ever been witnessed. Before the smoke of battle had even 
 cleared away, the victorious commander was plying the hand of 
 brotherly charity to stay the sufferings of -the men with whom he had 
 been engaged in deadly combat. 
 
 GEORGE DEWEY, ADMIRAL, HERO, STATESMAN, GENTLEMAN. 
 
 The United States Navy has never had, perhaps, as remarkable 
 a figure as George Dewey. From Maine to Mexico, from the Atlantic 
 to the Pacific, his name is as familiar, and he is as beloved, as any of 
 the great figures of the nation s history. 
 
 Admiral Dewey is not only a great fighter, but has proved him 
 self a great statesman. The situation after the downfall of Cavite 
 was a perplexing one ; immediately after the battle, Dewey had cut 
 the cable that connected Manila with the rest of the world and he 
 was, therefore, thrown upon his own resources as to what to do in an 
 emergency. He could not be directed by the government at Wash 
 ington. He had gone to the islands seeking only the Spanish fleet, 
 and determined to carry out the cabled instructions he had received 
 at Hong-Kong, ordering him to "find the Spanish fleet and capture 
 or utterly destroy it." How well he did this has already been told. 
 But now the question of holding an arsenal, captured by him, without 
 having at his disposal any considerable force of armed soldiers con 
 fronted him. 
 
 The insurgent forces under General Aguinaldo had moved upon 
 Manila, when the attack had been made upon the fleet in the bay. 
 After the withdrawal of the Spanish forces from Cavite the insurgents 
 were eager to plunder the houses left by the terror-stricken people. 
 
58 BEHIND ADMIRAL DEWEY S GUNS 
 
 They did not hesitate to rob even the dead. But Admiral Dewey 
 determined not to allow such things, and immediately he had his 
 hands full. 
 
 DEWEY HAS NEED FOR FIRMNESS. 
 
 To add to his troubles the German Emperor sent to Manila Bay 
 several of his mighty battleships in command of Admiral von Died- 
 rich. The sympathies of Germany were apparently with Spain, and 
 the German Admiral let no opportunity go by without showing his 
 feelings in the matter. An incident occurred when the insurgents 
 were making an attack upon the Spanish outposts which is worth 
 recording. The fighting between the Spaniards and insurgents was 
 always done under cover of darkness, partly because of the extreme 
 heat, and partly because of the guerrilla style of warfare which was 
 carried on. When the battle was begun the German vessels in the 
 harbor turned their powerful search-lights upon the places where the 
 insurgent army was concealed, thus putting them in the glare of the 
 light and rendering them an easy mark for the Spaniards who were 
 hidden effectually by the darkness. But the light rested there only 
 for a moment. Admiral Dewey sent peremptory orders to the Ger 
 man Admiral that if the lights were not extinguished immediately, or 
 if the action were repeated, he would consider it an act of war against 
 the United States, and take steps accordingly. The lights were never 
 again flashed upon the struggling insurgents. 
 
 When Admiral Dewey was ready to shell the Spanish forces, he 
 ordered all of the vessels of the foreign powers then in the harbor to 
 remove to a distance of three miles from his fleet. The attitude of 
 the German fleet, though not openly hostile, had been significantly 
 unfriendly. When the German Admiral received Dewey s order he 
 removed to the required distance, but lined up his vessels in such a 
 way that they bore directly upon the American fleet so that in case 
 there was a display of open partisanship on the part of Germany, 
 Dewey s fleet would be between two fires, the fires of the forts on 
 the one hand, and the fires of the German warships on the other. 
 
 A FRIENDLY ACT BY THE BRITISH ADMIRAL. 
 
 It was then that the British friendliness, which had been such a 
 prominent feature at home, displayed itself as a reality. The British 
 
 \ 
 
THE EARLY CAREER OF DEWEY 61 
 
 Admiral moved his warships and came at anchor in a position imme 
 diately between the vessels of Germany and those of the United 
 States. If Germany, therefore, had fired a shot, it would have fired 
 through the warships of England. The trouble ended then and 
 there, although the German Admiral kept up petty annoyances for 
 some time. Finally, Admiral Dewey turned to one of the German 
 Admiral s Lieutenants and said to him, "If Germany wants war with 
 my country, it can have it in five minutes." The invitation, it is 
 needless to say, was not accepted. 
 
 It was thus that Admiral Dewey met emergencies ever polite, 
 ever the cultured man of the world, but ever the firm, fearless officer, 
 ready to fight if need be to uphold the dignity and honor of his 
 nation and himself. It is fitting that the nation has especially 
 singled out such a man for the highest office that can be given to 
 men of the navy. The President personally tendered him the thanks 
 of the people ; Congress made him Rear Admiral, and revived for 
 him the grade of Admiral, which went out of existence many years 
 ago with Admiral Porter. In addition, it has presented him with a 
 magnificent gold sword as a gift of his countrymen. 
 
 Admiral Dewey is a man to admire at close range. Many 
 heroes lose their gloss on close acquaintance.- With Dewey this is 
 not so. Through a long line of sturdy stock he has inherited a culture, 
 an integrity, and a force of character that make him a man to honor. 
 He was born in a fine old Colonial mansion in Montpelier, Vt., sixty 
 years ago. He was a young man when he first fell in love with his 
 life work. He wanted to go to sea, but his father did not take kindly 
 to the idea. A compromise was effected. The boy at 14 left the 
 Montpelier public school to enter the Norwich University at North- 
 field, Vt., a military school, where his useful enthusiasm was tempo 
 rarily appeased by musket practice and drills. But the craving for 
 the sea life was still strong with Dewey. 
 
 THE EARLY CAREER OF DEWEY. 
 
 So his father secured for him an appointment to the Naval 
 Academy at Annapolis in 1854; he graduated in 1858. When Fort 
 Surrite~ was fired on in 1861, Dewey received his commission as a 
 Lieutenant on the seventeen-gun steam sloop Mississippi. His 
 
62 BEHIND ADMIRAL DEWEY S GUNS 
 
 Yankee blood was hot for fight, and he and his vessel participated 
 in the terrific actions of the West Gulf squadron. History tells how 
 young Dewey received the baptism of battle, and how owing to the 
 terrible fire of the shore batteries on the Mississippi River the crew 
 were forced to abandon their vessel. The last to leave the ship were 
 the Captain and his First Lieutenant, George Dewey. Again and 
 again through the war he showed his metal. He served on the 
 famous Kearsarge and afterward on the flagship Colorado. He 
 received his first command in 1870, the Narragansat. Passing 
 through various years of service, Dewey became, in 1884, a Captain 
 and Commander of the Dolphin, one of the first craft of the new 
 navy. His promotion continued rapidly. From 1885 to 1888 he 
 commanded the Pensacola, flagship of the European squadron. 
 
 On account of his devotion to method, his close application to 
 detail and his wide knowledge of naval science he was elevated, in 
 1888, to the head of the Bureau of Equipment and Recruiting, with the 
 rank of Commodore. In 1893 he served as a member of the Light 
 house Board, and three years later, having reached the actual rank 
 of Commodore, he became President of the Board of Inspection and 
 Survey. He left that important post to take command of the Asiatic 
 squadron. 
 
 His son, George Dewey, speaking of his father a few days after 
 the great victory, said : " When I said good-bye to him at the station 
 I told him, I hope you will have a most pleasant and successful 
 cruise. He said with a laugh, Well, I guess I will, I am the first 
 Commodore to go out there since Perry, and that ought to mean 
 something ? All the others have been Admirals since Perry, and 
 that rather seemed at the moment to have attached some significance 
 to the fact that he was the first Commodore on the Asiatic squadron 
 since then." 
 
 THE MAN IN WHITE IN A PERSONAL WAY. 
 
 Admiral Dewey is known as the Man in White in the Philippines. 
 He is a stickler for dress, is himself always immaculate, and insists 
 that those around him shall be careful about their personal appear 
 ance. Those who think, from his photograph, that he is c small 
 man, are mistaken. He weighs fully 185 pounds, and is so near 6 
 
THE MAN IN WHITE IN A PERSONAL WA Y 63 
 
 feet in height, that he gives one the impression of being fully that. 
 He carries himself well, is graceful, though somewhat quick and ner 
 vous in his movements, and his face reflects keenness, cleverness, and 
 an appreciation of good humor. He has a quick temper which some 
 times leads him to say stinging things, but his self-control is so excel 
 lent, that one cannot but admire how well he holds himself in check. 
 He is the idol of every man in his command, and what is more to his 
 credit, he was their idol before he became the victor at Manila Bay. 
 
 When ashore, he is a great club man, a fine horseman, and an 
 expert-gunner. His wife died many years ago, shortly after the birth 
 of their only son, George. Dewey is an early riser when on shore, 
 temperate to the degree of abstemiousness. He enjoys a good table, 
 but eats sparingly ; he is fond of a good cigar after dinner, and occa 
 sionally smokes between times. He is methodical, business-like, cool 
 and very deliberate ; he does his own work well, and expects every 
 body else to do the same. He is very fond of children, and in his 
 younger clays, when he visited his native town, it was very often a 
 familiar spectacle to see him on the piazza of the old Dewey home 
 surrounded by a group of wide-eyed youngsters, telling them stories 
 about daring men-of-warsmen and sea battles. 
 
 Eugene Field s verse is not a bad description, in many respects, 
 of George Dewey : 
 
 " A single man, perhaps, but good ez gold and true ez steel, 
 He could whip his weight in wild cats and you never heard him squeel, 
 Good to the helpless and the weak ; a brave an manly heart, 
 A cyclone couldn t phase, but any child could rend apart ; 
 So like the mountain pine that dares the storm which sweeps along, 
 But rocks the wind in summertime, an sings a soothin song." 
 
CHAPTER III 
 
 The Second Battle of Manila 
 
 How 8,000 American Soldiers Swept into a Heavily Entrenched City, Garrisoned by 
 Nearly Twice that Number of Spaniards. Insurgent Army Kept from Plunder. 
 Rare Bravery and Sacrifice. What Major-General Wesley Merritt, Command 
 ing the Expedition, General Frank V. Greene, General Arthur McArthur and 
 General Thomas Anderson Said Officially of the Battle. The Peace Protocol. 
 
 AFTER the occupation of the arsenal at Cavite by Admiral 
 Dewey that officer waited without further fighting until he 
 could receive reinforcements from the United States sufficient 
 to enable him to take and hold Manila. The insurgents, however, 
 kept up a continuous fighting in the region around Manila until they 
 practically held all of the territory except that city in their grasp. 
 They fought with great bravery, and, although checked by Admiral 
 Dewey at the outskirts of the city, they managed to drive the Span 
 ish behind their fortifications and force them to the wall. They held 
 Malabon, Tarlac, and Bakkoor, Aguinaldo establishing a provisional 
 government at the latter place and announcing himself dictator of the 
 islands. The insurgents were eager to rush upon the city, but 
 Dewey refused to allow " Hordes of passionate semi-savages to 
 storm a civilized metropolis." He forbade them to cross the Malate 
 River, seven miles south of Manila, threatening to bombard them 
 with the Petrel. 
 
 In a campaign of two weeks the insurgents took 3,000 prisoners, 
 including 2,000 soldiers of the regular Spanish army. On July I3th 
 Dewey sent the following cablegram to the Naval Department : 
 44 Aguinaldo informs me his troops have taken all of Subic Bay except 
 Isla Grande, which he was prevented from taking by the German 
 man-of-war Irene. On July yth the Raleigh and Concord went there ; 
 they took the island and about 1,300 men with arms and ammunition. 
 No resistance. The Irene retired from the bay on their arrival." 
 
 This last sentence contains in a nutshell one of the most exciting 
 64 
 
THE SECOND BATTLE OF MANILA 65 
 
 incidents in the history of the war, an incident which almost involved 
 our nation in a war with Germany. This was the first open action of 
 the German Admiral against the United States. When the insur 
 gents were about to take the island, the German warship Irene 
 appeared on the scene and protected the Spaniards there from 
 attack. Dewey, when informed of the matter, sent the Boston and 
 Raleigh to the island, and the Irene slunk away. One shot from the 
 Raleigh caused the Spaniards to raise the white flag. The captain 
 of the Irene explained that he interfered " in the cause of humanity," 
 and for a time it seemed as though the German meddling would prove 
 a serious matter. The German government, however, repudiated the 
 incident, and that, together with Dewey s splendid handling of the 
 situation, prevented the affair from assuming the proportion it 
 threatened. 
 
 In the meantime three expeditions were on their way across the 
 ocean to take charge of matters, and reinforce Admiral Dewey. 
 General Wesley Merritt was appointed Commander-in-Chief of all the 
 forces in the Philippines, and arrived at Cavite July 25th. Some days 
 before, on June 3Oth, the first expedition under General Thomas An 
 derson had landed. Another expedition under General Frank V. 
 Greene arrived on July i7th, and the third, under General McArthur, 
 arrived July 3Oth, five days later than General Merritt. 
 
 Immediately upon the arrival of General Merritt it was decided, 
 after a conference with Admiral Dewey, to attack and take Manila. 
 No time was lost. General Merritt stated in his dispatch that "to 
 gain approach to the city Greene s outposts were advanced to continue 
 a line from Camino Real to the beach. On the night of July 3ist, 
 Spanish attacked sharply. Artillery outposts behaved well. Held 
 position. Necessary to call out brigade. Spanish loss rumored 
 heavy." Our loss was 9 killed, 9 seriously wounded and 38 slightly 
 wounded. 
 
 This plain statement of facts gives no idea, however, of the real 
 battle which initiated our soldiers into the warfare of the Philippine 
 Islands. The fighting took place amid a terrible rainstorm, a rain 
 storm such as we are not familiar with in the United States ; 3,000 
 Spanish troops made a concerted sortie from Manila on the outposts 
 and trenches of Camp Dewey, near Malate. The attack was directed 
 
66 THE SECOND BATTLE OF MANILA 
 
 at the American right flank held by the Tenth Pennsylvania troops. 
 The trenches of the Americans extended from the beach to the 
 left flank of the insurgents. Sunday was the insurgent feast day, 
 and their left flank withdrew, leaving the American right flank 
 exposed. Companies A and E of the Tenth Pennsylvania and Utah 
 Battery were ordered to reinforce the right flank ; it was there that 
 the attack was made. The brave Pennsylvania men never flinched, 
 but stood their ground under "a withering fire. The alarm spread and 
 the First California Regiment with two companies of the Third Artil 
 lery who fight with rifles were sent as reinforcements. 
 
 The Utah battery covered itself with glory, and all the men 
 showed the greatest pluck under the trying deluge of nature and of 
 the Spaniards. The enemy was repulsed and retreated in disorder. 
 The Spanish loss was about 350 killed and 900 wounded. On the 
 night of August ist the fighting was renewed, but the enemy had 
 been taught a lesson and made the attack at long range with heavy 
 artillery. The Utah Battery replied, and the artillery duel lasted 
 about an hour. 
 
 General Greene, in his report of the battle, says : " Major Cuth- 
 bertson, Tenth Pennsylvania, reports that the Spaniards left their 
 trenches in force and attempted to turn our right flank, coming within 
 200 yards of his position.- But as the night was intensely dark, with 
 incessant and heavy rain, and as no dead or wounded were found in 
 front of his position at daylight, it is possible that he was mistaken, 
 and that the heavy fire to which he was subjected came from the 
 trenches near Block House 14, beyond his right flank, at a distance 
 of about 700 yards. The Spaniards used smokeless powder, the 
 thickets obscured the flash of their guns, and the Mauser bullet 
 penetrating a bamboo pole makes a noise very similar to the crack of 
 the rifle itself ; hence, the difficulty of locating the enemy. 
 
 This attack demonstrated the immediate necessity of extending 
 our intrenchments to the right, and, although not covered by my 
 instructions (which were to occupy the trenches from the bay to Calle 
 Real, and to avoid precipitating an engagement), I ordered the First 
 Colorado and one battalion of the First California, which occupied 
 trenches at 9 A.M., August ist, to extend the line of trenches to the 
 Pasay Road. The work was begun by these troops, and continued 
 
TERRIBLE SERVICE IN THE TRENCHES 67 
 
 every day by the troops occupying the trenches in turn, until a strong 
 line was completed by August 1 2th, about i , 200 yards in length, extend 
 ing from the bay to the east side of the Pasay Road. Its left rested 
 on the bay, and its right on an extensive rice swamp, practically 
 impassable." 
 
 The right flank was refused, because the only way to cross a 
 smaller rice swamp, crossing the line about 700 yards from the beach, 
 was along a crossroad in rear of the general line. As finally com 
 pleted the works were very strong in profile, being five or six feet in 
 height and eight to ten feet in thickness at the base, strengthened by 
 bags filled with earth. 
 
 " The only material available was black soil saturated with water, 
 and without the bags this was washed down and ruined in a day by 
 the heavy and almost incessant rains. The construction of these 
 trenches was constantly interrupted by the enemy s fire. They were 
 occupied by the troops in succession, four battalions being usually 
 sent out for a service of twenty-four hours, and posted with three 
 battalions in the trenches and one battalion in reserve along the 
 crossroad to Pasay ; Cossack posts being sent out from the latter to 
 guard the camp against any possible surprise from the northeast and 
 east. 
 
 TERRIBLE SERVICE IN THE TRENCHES. 
 
 " The service in the trenches was of the most arduous character, 
 the rain being almost incessant, and the men having no protection 
 against it; they were wet during the entire twenty-four hours, and 
 the mud was so deep that the shoes were ruined and a considerable 
 number of men rendered barefooted. Until the notice of bombard 
 ment was given on August 7th, any exposure above or behind the 
 trenches promptly brought the enemy s fire, so that the men had to 
 sit in the mud under cover and keep awake, prepared to resist an 
 attack, during the entire tour of twenty-four hours. 
 
 " After one particularly heavy rain a portion of the trench con 
 tained two feet of water, in which the men had to remain. It could 
 not be drained, as it was lower than an adjoining rice swamp, in which 
 the water had risen nearly two feet, the rainfall being more than four 
 inches in twenty-four hours. These hardships were all endured by 
 
68 THE SECOND BATTLE OF MANILA 
 
 the men of the different regiments in turn, with the finest possible 
 spirit and without a murmur of complaint. 
 
 " August 7th the notice of bombardment, after forty-eight hours, 
 or sooner if the Spanish fire continued, was served, and after that date 
 not a shot was fired on either side until the assault was made on 
 August 1 3th. It was with great difficulty, and in some cases not 
 without force, that the insurgents were restrained from opening fire 
 and thus drawing the fire of the Spaniards during this period. 
 
 " Owing to the heavy storm and high surf it was impossible to 
 communicate promptly with the division commander at Cavite, and I 
 received my instructions direct from the Major-General commanding, 
 or his staff officers, one of whom visited my camp every day, and I 
 reported direct to him in the same manner. My instructions were to 
 occupy the insurgent trenches near the beach, so as to be in good 
 position to advance on Manila when ordered, but meanwhile to avoid 
 precipitating an engagement, not to waste ammunition, and (after 
 August ist)not to return the enemy s fire unless convinced that he 
 had left his trenches and was making an attack in . force. These 
 instructions were given daily in the most positive terms to the officer 
 commanding in the trenches, and in the main they were faithfully 
 carried out. 
 
 AMMUNITION WAS WASTED. 
 
 "More ammunition than necessary was expended on the nights 
 of August 2d and 5th, but in both cases the trenches were occupied 
 by troops under fire for the first time, and in the darkness and rain 
 there was ground to believe that the heavy fire indicated a real attack 
 from outside the enemy s trenches. The total expenditure of ammu 
 nition on our side in the four engagements was about 150,000 rounds, 
 and by the enemy very much more. 
 
 " After the attack of July 3ist, August ist I communicated by 
 signal with the captain of the United States steamship Raleigh, 
 anchored about 3,000 yards southwest of my camp, asking if he had 
 received orders in regard to the action of his ship in case of another 
 attack on my troops. He replied : 
 
 " Both Admiral Dewey and General Merritt desire to avoid gen 
 eral action at present. If attack too strong for you, we will assist 
 you, and another vessel will come and offer help. 
 
SACLOBAN, ISLAND OF LEYTE. 
 
 The island of Leyte belongs to the Visaynn group, and contains about 3,000 square miles, being the eighth in size in the 
 Philippine Archipelago. The finest quality of hemp comes from this island. 
 
 PAMPANGA, A VILLAGE IN THE SUGAR COUNTRY. 
 
 This historic village, on the island of Luzon, is memorable for the terrible massacre of the Chinese by the Spaniards at this 
 
 point in the early history of the islands. 
 
THE DOWNFALL OF MANILA 71 
 
 "In repeating this message, Lieutenant Tappan, commanding 
 United States steamship Callao, anchored nearer the beach, sent me a 
 box of blue lights, and it was agreed that if I burned one of these on 
 the beach the Raleigh would at once open fire on the Spanish fort." 
 
 General Greene issued this address to the troops : " Camp 
 Dewey, near Manila. The Brigadier-General commanding desires 
 to thank the troops engaged last night for gallantry and skill displayed 
 by them in repelling such a vigorous attack by largely superior forces 
 of Spaniards. Not an inch of ground was yielded by the Tenth 
 Pennsylvania Infantry and Utah Artillery stationed in the trenches. 
 A battalion of the Third Artillery and First Regiment California 
 Infantry moved forward to their support through a galling fire with 
 the utmost intrepidity. The courage and steadiness shown by all in 
 their first engagement is worthy of the highest commendation." 
 
 THE DOWNFALL OF MANILA. 
 
 Manila fell before American arms on August I3th. The com 
 bined land and naval forces took the city with little or no opposition. 
 The official story of its downfall is told in the following dispatch 
 sent by General Merritt to the War Department: 
 
 " MANILA, August i3th. On the 7th instant Admiral Dewey 
 joined me in forty-eight-hour notification to Spanish commander to 
 remove non-combatants from city. Same date reply received, ex 
 pressing thanks for humane sentiments, and stating Spanish without 
 places for refuge for non-combatants now within walled towns. 
 
 "On Qth instant sent joint note, inviting attention to suffering in 
 store for sick and non-combatants in case it became our duty to 
 reduce the defences, also setting forth hopeless condition of Spanish 
 forces, surrounded on all sides, fleet in front, no prospect of reinforce 
 ments, and demanded surrender as due to every consideration of 
 humanity. Same date received reply, admitting their situation, but 
 stating Council of Defence declares request for surrender cannot be 
 granted, but offered to consult government, if time was granted neces 
 sary for communication via Hong Kong. Joint note in reply 
 declining. 
 
 " On the 1 3th joined with navy in attack with following results : 
 After about half hour s accurate shelling of Spanish lines, McArthur s 
 
72 THE SECOND BATTLE OF MANILA 
 
 Brigade on right and Greene s on left center under Anderson made 
 vigorous attack and carried Spanish works. Loss not accurately 
 known about 50 in all. Behavior of troops excellent ; co-operation 
 of the navy most valuable. Troops advanced rapidly on walled city, 
 upon which white flag shown and town capitulated. Troops occupy 
 Malate, Bynondo, walled city San Miguel. All important centers pro 
 tected. Insurgents kept out. No disorder or pillage." 
 
 The fleet under Admiral Dewey opened the engagement at 9.30 
 o clock in the morning. A sudden cloud of smoke, green and white, 
 against the stormy sky completely hid the Olympia, and a shell 
 screamed across two miles of turbulent water, and burst near the 
 Spanish fort at Malate. Then the Petrel and Raleigh and the active 
 little Callao opened a rapid fire directed toward the shore end of the 
 intrenchments. The Spaniards replied feebly. 
 
 Less than half an hour after the bombardment began, General 
 Greene reported that it was possible to advance. Thereupon six 
 companies of the Colorado regiment leaped over their breastwork, 
 dashed into the swamp and opened volleys within 300 yards of the 
 Spanish lines. The land forces under General Anderson advanced 
 from the South, General Greene in command of the First Brigade 
 held the left wing, General McArthur of the Second Brigade was on 
 the right of the line and covered two miles. 
 
 The Spanish made a hard fight against the right and left wings, 
 but after a while w r ere forced to retreat inside the Malate fort, from 
 which they were driven by the fire from the ships. The American 
 troops speedily captured the fort. Our land forces followed closely 
 upon the retreating Spaniards. The Second Battalion of the First 
 California headed the advance on the city. A company of the First 
 Nebraska did effective work with Gatling guns. 
 
 TOOK A BLOCKHOUSE AT PISTOL S POINT. 
 
 The Astor Battery gave a splendid example of daring in this 
 assault. At the call of General McArthur, Captain Peyton C. March 
 volunteered to dislodge some Spanish soldiers occupying a block 
 house which controlled the roads at Passay. Fifteen or more of his 
 men accompanied him, armed only with pistols, in the rush up the 
 hill in the face of deadly Spanish fire. Of these fifteen but three, 
 
KEPT THE INSURGENTS OUT 73 
 
 including Captain March, remained when the Spaniards fled from the 
 blockhouse. All the others had been either killed or wounded in the 
 charge. It was a costly and magnificent show of bravery, but it 
 served the purpose, and practically ended the fighting for the day. 
 General Greene, in his report of the battle, says : 
 " Captain Grove and Lieutenant Means, of the First Colorado, 
 had been particularly active in this work and fearless in penetrating 
 beyond our lines and close to those of the enemy. As the time for 
 attack approached, these officers made a careful examination of the 
 ground between our trenches and Fort San Antonio de Abad, and, 
 finally, on August iith, Major J. F. Bell, United States Volunteer 
 Engineers, tested the creek in front of this fort and ascertained not 
 only that it was fordable, but the exact width of the ford at the 
 beach, and actually swam in the bay to a point from which he could 
 examine the Spanish line from the rear. With the information thus 
 obtained it was possible to plan the attack intelligently. The posi 
 tion assigned to my brigade extended from the beach to the small 
 rice swamp, a front of about 700 yards. 
 
 After the sharp skirmish on the second line of defence of the 
 Spaniards, and after Greene s brigade moved through Malate, meet 
 ing a shuffling foe, the open space at the Luneta, just south of the 
 walled city, was reached about i P.M. A white flag was flying at the 
 southwest bastion, and I rode forward to meet it under a heavy fire 
 from out right and rear on the Paco Road. 
 
 KEPT THE INSURGENTS OUT. 
 
 " At the bastion I was informed that officers representing Gen 
 eral Merritt and Admiral Dewey were on their way ashore to receive 
 the surrender, and I therefore turned back to the Paco Road. The 
 firing ceased at this time, and on reaching this road I found nearly 
 1,000 Spanish troops who had retreated from Santa Ana through 
 Paco, and coming up the Paco Road had been firing on our flank. I 
 held the commanding officers, but ordered these troops to march into 
 the walled city. At this point the California regiment a short time 
 before had met some insurgents who had fired at the Spaniards on 
 the walls, and the latter in returning the fire had caused a loss in the 
 California regiment of i killed and 2 wounded. 
 
74 THE SECOND BATTLE OF MANILA 
 
 " My instructions were to march past the walled city on its sur 
 render, cross the bridge, occupy the city on the north side of the 
 Pasig, and protect lives and property there. While the white flag 
 was flying on the walls yet, very sharp firing had just taken place out 
 side, and there were from 5,000 to 6,000 men on the walls, with arms 
 in their hands, only a few yards from us. I did not feel justified in 
 leaving this force in my rear until the surrender was clearly estab 
 lished, and I therefore halted and assembled my force, prepared to 
 force the gates if there was any more firing. The Eighteenth Infan 
 try and First California were sent forward to hold the bridges, a few 
 yards ahead, but the Second Battalion, Third Artillery, First Ne 
 braska, Tenth Pennsylvania and First Colorado were all assembled at 
 this point. While this was being done, I received a note from Lieu 
 tenant-Colonel Whittier, of General Merritt s staff, written from the 
 Captain-General s office within the walls, asking me to stop the 
 firing outside, as negotiations for surrender were in progress. 
 
 " I then returned to the troops outside the walls and sent Cap 
 tain Birkhimer s battalion of the Third Artillery down the Paco road 
 to prevent any insurgents from entering. Feeling satisfied that there 
 would be no attack from the Spanish troops lining the walls, I put 
 the regiments in motion toward the bridges, brushing aside a consid 
 erable force of insurgents who had penetrated the city from the direc 
 tion of Paco, and were in the main street with their flag, expecting to 
 march into the walled city and plant it on the walls. After crossing 
 the bridges the Eighteenth United States Infantry was posted to 
 patrol the principal streets near the bridge, the First California was 
 sent up the Pasig to occupy Quiapo, San Miguel and Malacanan, and 
 with the First Nebraska I marched down the river to the captain of 
 the Port s office, where I ordered the Spanish flag hauled down and 
 the American flag raised in its place. 
 
 "The resistance encountered on the 1 3th was much less than 
 anticipated and planned for, but had the resistance been greater, the 
 result would have been the same, only the loss would have been 
 greater. Fortunately, the great result of capturing this city, the seat 
 of Spanish power in the East for more than three hundred years, was 
 accomplished with a loss of life comparatively insignificant." 
 
McARTHUR PRAISES HIS MEN 75 
 
 General McArthur is strong in his expression of approval of heroic 
 work. In his report he says: 
 
 " The combat of Singalong can hardly be classified as a great mili 
 tary event, but the involved terrene and the prolonged resistance 
 created a very trying situation, and afforded an unusual scope for the 
 display of military qualities by a large number of individuals. 
 
 " The invincible composure of Colonel Ovenshine, during an 
 exposure in dangerous space for more than an hour, was conspicuous 
 and very inspiring to the troops ; and the efficient manner in which 
 he took advantage of opportunities as they arose during the varying 
 aspects of the fight was of great practical value in determining the 
 result. 
 
 " The cool, determined and sustained efforts of Colonel Reeve, 
 of the Thirteenth Minnesota, contributed very materially to the 
 maintenance of the discipline and marked efficiency of his regi 
 ment. 
 
 " The brilliant manner in which Lieutenant March accepted and 
 discharged the responsible and dangerous duties of the day, and the 
 pertinacity with which, assisted by his officers and men, he carried 
 his guns over all obstacles to the very front of the firing line, was an 
 exceptional display of warlike skill and judgment, indicating the 
 existence of many of the best qualifications for high command in 
 battle. 
 
 " The gallant manner in which Captain Sawtelle, brigade quar 
 termaster, volunteered to join the advance party in the rush, volun 
 teered to command a firing line, for a time without an officer, and 
 again volunteered to lead a scout to ascertain the presence or absence 
 of the enemy in the blockhouse, was a fine display of personal 
 intrepidity. 
 
 " The efficient, fearless, and intelligent manner in which Lieu 
 tenant Kernan, Twenty-first United States Infantry, Acting Assist 
 ant Adjutant-General of the brigade and Second Lieutenant Whit- 
 worth, Eighteenth United States Infantry, aid, executed a series of 
 dangerous and difficult orders, was a fine exemplification of stall work 
 under fire. 
 
 "The splendid bravery of Captains Bjornstad and Seebach, and 
 Lieutenant Lackore, of the Thirteenth Minnesota, all wounded, and, 
 
;6 THE SECOND BATTLE OF MANILA 
 
 finally, the work of the soldiers of the first firing line, too, all went to 
 make up a rapid succession of individual actions of unusual merit." 
 
 THE SPANIARDS HOIST THE WHITE FLAG. 
 
 At 1 1.30 A.M. the Spaniards hoisted the white flag. A conference 
 to arrange the terms of surrender was held at the palace of the Gov 
 ernor-General at 4 P.M. General Jandenes agreed to surrender, 
 and the American flag was raised at 5.30 P.M. by Lieutenant Brumby, 
 of the Olympia. The total number of Spanish soldiers who surren 
 dered exceeded 8,000, and there was an unlimited supply of arms and 
 ammunition. In the attack 5 were killed and 43 injured. 
 
 The terms of capitulation, as given in General Merritt s report, 
 were as follows : 
 
 " The undersigned having been appointed a commission to deter 
 mine the details of the capitulation of the city and defences of Manila 
 and its suburbs and the Spanish forces stationed therein, in accord 
 ance with the agreement entered into the previous day by General 
 Wesley Merritt, United States Army, American Commander-in-Chief 
 in the Philippines, and His Excellency Don Fermin Jandenes, acting 
 General-in-Chief of the Spanish Army in the Philippines, have agreed 
 upon the following : 
 
 " i. The Spanish troops, European and native, capitulate with 
 the city and its defences, with all the honors of war, depositing their 
 arms in the places designed by the authorities of the United States, 
 and remaining in the quarters designated and under the orders of 
 their officers, and subject to the control of the aforesaid United States 
 authorities, until the conclusion of a treaty of peace between the two 
 belligerent nations. All persons included in the capitulation remain 
 at liberty, the officers remaining in their respective homes, which 
 shall be respected as long as they observe the regulations prescribed 
 for their government and the laws in force. 
 
 " 2. Officers shall retain their side arms, horses and private prop 
 erty. All public horses and public property of all kinds shall be turned 
 over to staff officers designated by the United States. 
 
 " 3. Complete returns in duplicate of men by organization, and 
 full lists of public property and stores shall be rendered to the United 
 States within ten days from this date. 
 
PEACE 77 
 
 "4. All questions relating to the repatriation of officers and men 
 of the Spanish forces and of their families, and of the expenses 
 which said repatriation may occasion, shall be referred to the Govern 
 ment of the United States at Washington. 
 
 " Spanish families may leave Manila at any time convenient to 
 them. 
 
 "The return of the arms surrendered by the Spanish forces shall 
 take place when they evacuate the city, or when the American army 
 evacuates. 
 
 " 5. Officers and men included in the capitulation shall be sup 
 plied by the United States, according to their rank, with rations and 
 necessary aid as though they were prisoners of war, until the conclu 
 sion of a treaty of peace between the United States and Spain. An 
 the funds in the Spanish treasury and all other public funds shall be 
 turned over to the authorities of the United States. 
 
 "6. This city, its inhabitants, its churches and religious wor 
 ship, its educational establishments, and its private property of all 
 descriptions are placed under the special safeguard of the faith and 
 honor of the American Army. 
 
 F. V. GREENE, NICHOLAS DE LA PETRA, 
 
 Brigadier-General of Volunteers, U. S. A. Auditor-General Excmo. 
 
 B. P. LAMBERTON, CARLOS, 
 
 Captain, United States Navy. Coronel de Ingenieros. 
 
 CHARLES A. WHITTIER, JOSE, 
 
 Lieut. -Colonel and Inspector-General. Coronel de Estado Major." 
 
 E. H. CROWDER, 
 Lieut. -Colonel and Judge-Advocate. 
 
 PEACE. 
 
 While the battle was planned, overtures had been made through 
 the mediation of the French Ambassador at Washington, on behalf 
 of the Spanish Government for a cessation of hostilities, to culmi 
 nate in a treaty of peace. The peace protocol was signed at 4.23 P.M. 
 on Friday, August I2th. The sixth article of the protocol was as 
 follows: "On the signing of the protocol hostilities will be sus 
 pended, and notice to that effect will be given as soon as possible by 
 each government to the commander of its military and naval forces." 
 
78 THE SECOND BATTLE OF MANILA 
 
 As the Manila cable had been cut and was not in use, it was 
 impossible to communicate the news of peace to Admiral Dewey or 
 General Merritt. Consequently they were ignorant of the fact that 
 peace had been declared when they assailed and took Manila. Allow 
 ing for difference in time, the surrender of Manila took place a few 
 hours after the signing of the peace protocol. This proved the turn 
 ing point of most of the arguments which took place later, when the 
 Peace Commissioners met together at Paris to discuss the conditions 
 of the treaty. 
 
 In the meantime, however, General Merritt ruled supreme in the 
 captured city, keeping out insurgents and protecting people and 
 property. 
 
GENERAL AGUINALDO 
 
 This is the Philippine chief as he appeared in military unilorm in February, 1899. 
 
CHAPTER IV 
 The Trouble With Aguinaldo 
 
 A Face-to-Face View of the Insurgent Leader. A Man of Craft and Cunning. Sold 
 out His Own People. Fought against Uncle Sam. Insurgents Swept into the 
 Sea. Immense Sacrifice of Life and Property. The Flight of Agoncillo to 
 Canada. The Oregon Sent for by Dewey "for Political Reasons." Germany 
 Takes a Friendly Step. Emperor William Removes All His Warships from Manila 
 Bay, and Places German Interests in American Hands. 
 
 THE fighting in the Philippines did not end with the downfall of 
 Manila or the signing of the Peace treaty. The insurgents 
 had to be reckoned with. From the beginning they proved 
 even harder to handle than the Spanish. Inflated with victory, Gen 
 eral Aguinaldo, the insurgent leader, proclaimed himself Dictator of 
 the islands, and it was with difficulty that his followers were held in 
 check by the American forces without open hostility. It became evi 
 dent that we should have trouble with the insurgents. That it would 
 be as serious as after-events proved, was not imagined. 
 
 On June i3th Aguinaldo issued a "declaration of indepen 
 dence," of which the following is a rough translation : 
 
 " To the district headmen and village headmen of the prov 
 ince of Bulacan, from the Political Military Governor of this prov 
 ince, whose headquarters are now transferred to the town of San 
 Francisco de Malabon, and combined with the section under his 
 orders at Bacoor, Binacayan, Imus, Novaleta, Salinas and Cavite 
 Viejo. They only require to be combined with the other forces in 
 Indiang and Silang, near by, and then our troops will be sent for 
 ward, and within a few days will be found in possession of almost 
 the whole province, which, being maritime, will be found in a position 
 to proclaim effectively our independence. This proclamation will not 
 be long deferred, because the ultimate object of this government will 
 thus be best attained notwithstanding the suggestions of some of our 
 principal associates. It is better and more convenient to select as 
 
 Si 
 
82 THE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 the place on account of its being near the sea, the township of Cavite 
 Viejo, which is an old port, originally the town of Cavite. 
 
 " Wherefore I decree as follows : 
 
 The 1 2th day of this month is fixed for the declaration of the 
 independence of this our beloved country, in this township of Cavite 
 Viejo, for the due and proper solemnization of which auspicious 
 event there should be on the day named an assemblage of all dis 
 trict headmen and commanders of our forces, and through the proper 
 representatives there should be a notification issued for the purpose 
 of inviting the attendance of all who have in any way assisted in the 
 good work, such, for example, as the distinguished Admiral of the 
 American squadron and his commanders and officers, to all of whom, 
 as having lent invaluable aid in the glorious work, a courteous invita 
 tion will be sent. After the formal reading of the declaration, the 
 same will be signed by all who wish to give support thereto. 
 
 u Given under our hand and seal at Cavite this Qth day of June, 
 1898. EMILIO AGUINALDO, 
 
 Dictator of the Philippines." 
 
 Various congresses were convened within the succeeding months, 
 and Aguinaldo thought it wiser to change his title from that of Dic 
 tator to President of the Revolutionary Government of the Filipinos. 
 He experienced some trouble in securing a suitable cabinet, and the 
 list was changed several times. The following is the latest make-up 
 of the Cabinet : President of the Cabinet and Minister of Foreign 
 Affairs, Mabini ; Minister of the Interior, Teodoro Sandica, civil 
 engineer, educated in England and Belgium, and taken to Manila 
 from Hong Kong by Admiral Dewey ; Minister of War, General 
 Baldomero Aguinaldo, a cousin of Aguinaldo, the President of 
 the so-called Filipino Government, and a leader of the insurrection 
 from the beginning, said to be a large landowner of Cavite ; Minister 
 of Finance, General Trias, a close ally of Aguinaldo ; Minister of 
 Public Works, Gregorio Gonzaga, a lawyer, formerly the Filipino 
 Agent at Hong Kong, and formerly Spanish Attorney-General in 
 Visayas. 
 
 The following description of Aguinaldo by Joseph L. Stickney, 
 who was with Admiral Dewey during the battle of May ist and 
 
A PEN PICTURE OF AGUINALDO 83 
 
 landed later, gives a good view of the insurgent leader and his char 
 acter. He says : 
 
 " Having been on terms of friendly association with General 
 Aguinaldo and his staff during the last half of May and the whole 
 of June, I had an opportunity to get some idea of the man who is 
 to-day one of the most important individual factors in our dealings 
 with the Filipinos. 
 
 " Emilio Aguinaldo, now about 29 years old, is a man of an 
 intelligence far beyond that of most of his people. He comes of a 
 good family in the province of Cavite, near Manila, where he was 
 educated and where he entered the bar. He joined the insurgents 
 immediately after the outbreak of the rebellion in the latter part of 
 1896, but it was not until after the execution of Dr. Rizal that he 
 became one of the leaders of the revolt. 
 
 " The blockade maintained by the Spanish squadron in Philip 
 pine waters against the importation of arms for the insurgents grad 
 ually drove the Filipinos to the wall, and in December, 1897, tne 
 celebrated * pacification of the islands was negotiated, the go-between 
 being Senor Pedro Paterno, director of the Manila museum, a Fil 
 ipino, who had remained at least passively loyal to the Spaniards. 
 The Filipino junta at this time was composed of Emilio Aguinaldo, 
 who exercised such executive powers as were possible to so feeble an 
 organization; Senor Artacho, Home Secretary; Senor Montenogro, 
 Foreign Secretary ; Vito Bilarmino, War Secretary ; and Baldomero 
 Aguinaldo, Secretary of the Treasury. 
 
 "The so-called pacification consisted in a purchase of the 
 insurgent leaders for the sum of $800,000 (Mexican), equal to about 
 $400,000 in gold. Aguinaldo and his associates agreed to surrender 
 all the arms in the possession of the natives and to quit the archi* 
 pelago, remaining away at the pleasure of the Spanish government, 
 and to use their utmost influence to disband and disarm all the insur 
 gent forces. 
 
 " Aguinaldo was to go to Hong Kong to receive the first install 
 ment of the Spanish money, amounting to $400,000 (Mexican), and 
 he was then to cable to Artacho, who surrendered himself to the 
 Captain-General as a hostage. On receiving Aguinaldo s cable mes 
 sage that the money had been paid, Artacho was to dissolve the 
 
84 THE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 insurgent organization, disband the troops and give up their arms. 
 This part of the programme was carried out in December, 1897, or 
 the early part of January, 1898. 
 
 " The cash payment was divided among the junta and Aguinaldo 
 started for Paris. He had gone no farther than Singapore, however, 
 when the destruction of the Maine in Havana harbor brought on an 
 acute tension of the relations between the United States and Spain, 
 and he remained in Singapore to see whether the Filipinos might not 
 profit by Spain s difficulties. 
 
 " General Aguinaldo sailed from Hong Kong for Manila Bay in 
 the dispatch boat McCullock, May 17, 1898. He landed in Cavite on 
 the 1 9th. As I accompanied him from Hong Kong, and was able to 
 be of some service to him, I was received at his headquarters with 
 great cordiality until after the arrival of the first detachment of 
 troops. About that time Aguinaldo began to think he was a great 
 man, and as he was tiresome and often ridiculous when trying to live 
 up to his own estimate of himself, I saw less and less of him. 
 
 " He took possession of one of the numerous abandoned houses 
 in Cavite, and at first he acted with good judgment and simplicity. 
 In a day or two the natives flocked into Cavite in droves, and as a 
 small steamer arrived from Hong Kong, laden with arms and ammu 
 nition, in a week there were more than 1,000 men ready to take the 
 field against the Spaniards in Cavite Province. 
 
 " On the night of May 26th Aguinaldo sent 600 men across the 
 Bay of Bacoor in canoes. This force was attacked by 300 Spaniards 
 on the morning of the 28th, and all the latter were captured. Sharp 
 and continuous fighting occurred for a week, during which after 
 having succeeded in witnessing the fighting for two days without 
 Aguinaldo s consent or assistance I obtained from him a guide and 
 a passport which enabled me to go into battle with more comfort and 
 less risk. 
 
 " When Manila was fairly invested by the insurgents, Aguinaldo s 
 ideas of his own importance and power underwent a very apparent 
 expansion. He had been obliged to quit Cavite, as our troops needed 
 the town ; but he moved his headquarters to Bacoor, and there he 
 was as inaccessible to ordinary mortals as if he had been the Emperor 
 of China. 
 
BELIEVED TO BEAR A CHARMED LIFE 85 
 
 " Anyone who expects Aguinaldo to make gross blunders in 
 dealing with our people will probably be disappointed. He is an 
 exceptionally shrewd man. He is of the distinctly Japanese type in 
 appearance, having the broad, square forehead, which betokens intel 
 lect, re-enforced by the bumps in the back of his head, which indicate 
 the endurance and persistence of a strong animalism. 
 
 " He has rather large eyes, set wide apart, and a straight but 
 sensual nose. His lips are full, and his chin round and not deter 
 mined. His height is about 5 feet 4 inches, and he carries himself 
 very erect. His color is a light chocolate. He speaks and writes 
 Spanish and Tagalog, the native language of the island of Luzon. 
 He understands English fairly well, though he always made a pre 
 tense of not being able to speak or comprehend it. I had reason for 
 believing that he could have held all his conversation with us in Eng 
 lish without an interpreter if he had wished to do so." 
 
 BELIEVED TO BEAR A CHARMED LIFE. 
 
 One of Aguinaldo s great holds over the insurgents was through 
 their superstition. They believed that he bore a charmed life. The 
 Spaniards had often placed large sums on his head, at one time 
 $25,000 having been offered for him dead or alive. He managed, 
 however, to escape both capture from the Spanish and treachery from 
 his own men. At one time some of the insurgents, who were envi 
 ous of his power, poisoned the food which was to have been given 
 him at dinner. In some lucky way, however, Aguinaldo happened 
 not to taste the meal, and he escaped what would have otherwise been 
 certain death. 
 
 The following interesting account of a visit to Aguinaldo s head 
 quarters at Cavite, once the home of a rich native, is given : " The 
 house is broad, low, roomy, and typically Spanish. There is a paved 
 court at the street entrance, and, while Aguinaldo occupied it, a guard 
 of insurgents lined it on either side. They would come to present 
 arms as you passed by, and good form called for a salute in return. A 
 stairway leads from the court, and the landing at the top is large, and 
 makes a good ante-chamber. 
 
 Here stand guards in uniforms of blue. There is little delay, 
 
 the summons to enter the reception-room comes quickly. Aguin- 
 
86 THE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 aldo comes in, extends his hand, and then motions the visitor to a 
 seat. He wears a spotless suit of white linen, a white shirt with 
 well-polished front, a high collar and a black cravat tied in a bow, 
 and red velvet slippers embroidered in gold. At first sight you 
 would take him for a Japanese student. It takes a long stretch of 
 the imagination to believe that this youthful-looking man in white is 
 a leader of a large force of warlike people. 
 
 In his office he has a modern desk, backed with a beveled edge 
 mirror that came from Europe, a couple of large, strong iron boxes, 
 an abundance of easy chairs, an old grand piano, and a large hat- 
 rack of fanciful design. The only signs of war were the ends of 
 sword chains that peeped through holes in the coats of the officers 
 who were with him. 
 
 Such was the man with whom the American commanders had to 
 deal, a man who sold out his own countrymen, and, because the full 
 price of their slavery had not been paid to him, he returned from his 
 voluntary exile and again placed himself at the head of the people he 
 had betrayed. There is little wonder that the American commanders 
 viewed him with suspicion and checked his onward march. 
 
 While the peace conference was being held at Paris to discuss 
 the terms of a treaty, General Merritt was present to consult with 
 the American members of the commission on the subject of the situa 
 tion in the Philippines. General Otis was ordered to replace him in 
 control of the island. The situation which confronted General Otis 
 was not a pleasant one, but no serious outbreak occurred for some 
 time. 
 
 Toward the end of December, however, Aguinaldo assumed an 
 attitude of open defiance against American arms. He ensconsced 
 himself at Malloas, about twenty miles from Manila, and made that 
 the seat of the so-called Revolutionary Government. He began to 
 run things in a high-handed manner, and became even more despotic 
 and overbearing toward his own people than the Spaniards ever were. 
 In the interior cities, controlled by the insurgents, he levied taxes 
 upon the natives much more excessive than any exacted by the old 
 rulers of the islands. 
 
 It became evident to General Otis that something had to be 
 done. The insurgents were inflamed by reports sent to them from 
 
THE ATTACK OF THE INSURGENTS 87 
 
 the United States by Agoncillo, who had been sent to this country 
 by the Junta of the Filipinos to keep an eye on the legislation here. 
 The behavior of this envoy of the Philippine insurgents was such 
 that it was deemed wise to place secret service agents on his track. 
 It was found that he and other Filipinos in this country were plotting 
 against our Government, consequently the watch kept upon him was 
 made so keen that Agoncillo fled for Canada, fearing arrest. 
 
 THE ATTACK OF THE INSURGENTS. 
 
 About the same time that he fled, the news was cabled across the 
 sea that the Filipinos had attacked Manila, and that on the 5th of 
 February a desperate battle had been waged, in which the insurgents 
 were utterly routed and lost nearly 2,000 men. 
 
 The story of the battle, as briefly told in the official cablegram 
 of General Otis, is as follows : " Adjutant-General : Insurgents in 
 large force opened attack on our outer lines at 8.45 last evening; 
 renewed attack several times during night ; at 4 o clock this morning 
 entire line engaged ; all attacks repulsed ; at daybreak advanced 
 against insurgents, and have driven them beyond the lines they 
 formerly occupied, capturing several villages and their defence works ; 
 insurgents loss in dead and wounded large ; our own casualties thus 
 far estimated at 175 ; very few fatal. Troops enthusiastic and acting 
 fearlessly. Very splendid execution on flanks of enemy ; city held in 
 check, and absolute quiet prevails; insurgents have secured a good 
 many Mauser rifles, a few field pieces, and quick-firing guns, with 
 ammunition, during last month." 
 
 In another dispatch General Otis states that our casualities 
 aggregate 250. . He buried 500 of insurgent dead and held 500 
 prisoners. Their total loss was 4.000. 
 
 The fighting was not the result of the aggression on the part of 
 the Americans, but was precipitated by the action of two native 
 soldiers who refused to obey the order of a sentry who challenged 
 them as they attempted to pass his post. These two natives advanced 
 to the outpost of the First Nebraska Regiment, stationed to the 
 northeast of Manila. The sentry ordered them to halt, but they 
 insolently refused to do so. He called upon them again, and as they 
 paid no attention to his order, he leveled his rifle and fired upon them. 
 
88 7 HE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 No sooner had the shot been fired than the Filipinos, who were 
 occupying block-house No. 7, fired a signal for a general attack upon 
 the Americans. Immediately the insurgents moved against the 
 American troops, the Nebraska Regiment being the first to meet the 
 attack. It was evident that the insurgents expected to take our 
 troops by surprise, consequently they were not prepared for the vig 
 orous reception which they received. The Nebraska, Montana, and 
 North Dakota outposts replied briskly until reinforcements arrived. 
 The Filipinos concentrated at three points, Caloocan, Gagalangin, 
 and Santa Mesa. At about i o clock the insurgents opened fire si 
 multaneously from all three places, supplementing the attack by the 
 fire of two seige guns at Balik-Balik, and advancing their skirmishes 
 at Paco. The Utah Light Artillery and the Third Artillery did 
 splendid work. The engagement lasted over an hour. The United 
 States cruiser Charleston and the gunboat Concord, stationed off 
 Malabon, opened fire, and did great damage to the insurgents. 
 
 At 2.45 A.M. there was a fusilade along the entire line, and the 
 monitor Monadnock opened fire from off Malate. With daylight 
 the Americans advanced. The California and Washington regiments 
 made a splendid charge and drove the Filipinos from the villages of 
 Paco and Santa Mesa. The Nebraska regiment also distinguished 
 itself, capturing a very strong position at the reservoir, which is con 
 nected with the waterworks. The Kansas and Dakota regiments 
 compelled the enemy s right flank to retire to Caloocan. 
 
 FILIPINOS DROWNED LIKE RATS. 
 
 The brigade under General King charged upon a strong force of 
 the enemy, and, yelling wildly, drove them helter-skelter into the 
 Pasig River, where, in a frenzy of terror, they were drowned like rats. 
 
 The utter fearlessness of the American soldiers was never better 
 demonstrated than in this onward charge. The Ygorates, armed with 
 bows and arrows, made a very determined stand, in the face of the 
 fire of artillery, and left many dead upon the field. Evidently they 
 did not know what guns were, for they stood in the face of the fire 
 without realizing that they were at a disadvantage, and were mowed 
 down like wheat. One of the chiefs, who was captured, said he had 
 never seen a modern field piece before. 
 
GEN. ARTHUR MACARTHUR. 
 
 GEX. CHARLES KING. 
 
 GEN. HENRY W. I y AWTON. 
 
 GEN. FRED. FUNSTON. 
 
WARNING NON-COMBATANTS TO LEAVE 91 
 
 The next day General H ale s brigade advanced and took the 
 waterworks outside of the city. They had a sharp skirmish with the 
 enemy, which made no determined stand. The pumps were damaged, 
 but the missing parts were found later, and the works were soon 
 placed in good order. 
 
 The terrible loss of the rebels may be gained from the fact that 
 one hundred and sixty of them were buried in one field on one day, 
 and eighty-seven in another. The Americans worked hard to bring 
 hundreds of the suffering insurgents to the hospital for treatment. 
 The character of the insurgents may be judged from the fact that 
 they used the flag of truce as a defence for their own fire. All 
 through Manila white flags were shown from the houses of the 
 natives, and, as the soldiers passed by, they were shot at from these 
 very windows. 
 
 A Filipino Colonel went out from his line under a flag of 
 truce. Several American officers promptly went to meet him, but 
 when the parties met the concealed insurgents opened fire, where 
 upon the Colonel apologized for the barbarous conduct of his troops 
 and returned to his lines. 
 
 On February loth an advance was made upon Caloocan, the 
 stronghold of the insurgents. It was taken after some brisk fight 
 ing, and with slight loss on our part ; but General Otis was not satis 
 fied. He pushod on to Malabon, to which the insurgents had 
 retreated, and soon was in possession of the town. Before leaving, 
 however, Aguinaldo s savage hordes set fire to the town, and much 
 damage was done to property. 
 
 The trouble was not confined to the Island of Luzon. Briga 
 dier General M. D. Miller sent an ultimatum on February loth to 
 the commander of the rebels at Iloilo, notifying him that it was his 
 intention to take the town by force, if necessary. 
 
 WARNING NON-COMBATANTS TO LEAVE. 
 
 The warships began to shell the town at eight o clock the next 
 morning, and soon cleared the trenches of the insurgent force. A 
 detachment from the cruiser Boston and the Petrel were landed and 
 marched into the town, hoisting the Stars and Stripes over the fort. 
 Not a single man on the American side was injured. 
 
92- THE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 After the taking of Caloocan, General Otis pressed the advan 
 tage, and Haytay and Canita were taken by the American advance 
 guard without a shot having been fired. While this was going on, 
 the insurgents inside of Manila made determined efforts to burn 
 dpwn the city. Buildings were fired in three different sections at the 
 same time, and the flames were controlled by the troops only after 
 severe labor. A considerable number of the incendiaries were shot, 
 and a few of our soldiers were wounded. The fire was most success 
 ful at Tongo, the northernmost suburb of the city, which lies on the 
 shore of the bay. The rebels in hiding were very active while the 
 Americans were fighting the fire and caused a great deal of annoy 
 ance. For a time business was suspended in this district, and many 
 suspects were placed under arrest. The Monadnock, of Dewey s fleet, 
 joined in the work of dispersing the Filipinos, effectively shelling the 
 rebel lines under the direction of the signal corps on shore. In the 
 skirmish a surprising discovery was made, that many of the insurgents 
 were armed with dummy rifles, there being about three of these to 
 one of the Mausers, which explained in part the secret of the appar 
 ently good equipment of the Filipinos. 
 
 While the skirmishing was going on, Admiral Dewey telegraphed 
 the Naval Department as follows : 
 
 " MANILA, February 24th. 
 For political reasons, the Oregon should be sent here at once. 
 
 DEWEY." 
 
 This dispatch was made public by an accident. Secretary Long 
 inadvertently handed it with a number of others to some newspaper 
 men, and for a time the department was kept busy, trying to explain 
 exactly what Dewey meant. The general opinion was that the Ad 
 miral wanted the famous vessel, not for any effect on the insurgents, 
 but as a notice to foreigners to keep hands off. The Oregon was 
 promptly dispatched to Manila. Not long after this the German war 
 vessels at Manila were withdrawn, and the interests of German resi 
 dents were placed in the hands of the American officials there. Ad 
 miral von Diederichs, who had proved so offensive to Dewey, was 
 withdrawn by his Government, and in his place Prince Henry of Ger 
 many was sent to take charge of the German squadron which had 
 been sent to Hong Kong. It was stated at the time of the change 
 
CEBU IS TAKEN 93 
 
 that Admiral von Diederichs had shown a lack of tact in the manage 
 ment of affairs at Manila Bay, and consequently the trouble which 
 had hampered Dewey at first disappeared, and the Germans appar 
 ently assumed a friendly attitude toward our Government. 
 
 CEBU IS TAKEN. 
 
 The United States gunboat Petrel, commanded by C. Cornwell, 
 visited Cebu, the most important of the Visayas group, on February 
 22d. The Commander sent an ultimatum ashore declaring the inten 
 tion of the Americans to take possession peaceably, if possible, by 
 force if necessary. The rebels immediately vacated, taking their 
 guns to the hills. A party of marines was landed, and the American 
 flag soon floated over the Government building there. 
 
 For some time the fighting was confined to the region around 
 Caloocan, and this was not aggressive, but defensive. The insurgents, 
 kept up a guerilla warfare at night, which proved rather troublesome, 
 but, as usual, not serious. On March 3d General Otis stated that he 
 had captured 1,500 insurgents since February 4th. 
 
 March 3d was a red-letter day among both the army and navy 
 people in the island. President McKinley sent to the Senate the 
 name of George Dewey to be an Admiral of the Navy under the act 
 approved the day before, and Brigadier-General Elwell S. Otis, 
 United States Army, to be Major-General by brevet to rank from 
 February 4th, and the Senate confirmed both nominations. Secre 
 tary Long and Secretary Alger cabled congratulations for themselves 
 and for the President, and the news was received with great enthu 
 siasm everywhere in the Philippines where American soldiers or sail 
 ors were stationed. Admiral Dewey raised his four-starred flag on 
 the Olympia, and was saluted by the guns of the forts, the foreign 
 warships, the British cruiser Narcissus and the German cruiser Kai- 
 serin Augusta, and all the American ships in port. 
 
 On March 4th the United States cruiser Baltimore arrived at 
 Manila from Hong Kong, having on board Professor J. G. Shurman 
 and Professor Dean C. Worcester, the two of the civil members of 
 the United States Philippine Commission. The transport Senator 
 arrived on the same day with six companies of the Twenty-second 
 Infantry as reinforcements to Otis command. Reinforcements, aggre- 
 
94 THE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 gating 4,800 men, were hurried forward as fast as possible, bringing 
 the total number of officers and men up to 41,800. The force then 
 there consisted of twenty regiments of infantry, one engineer battal 
 ion, seven troops of cavalry and eleven batteries of artillery. Nine 
 teen vessels with an aggregate of 297 officers, 2,990 men and 253 
 marines made up the naval contingent, which did not include the 
 transport Solace with 162 officers and men which was constantly pass 
 ing back and forth from Manila. 
 
 On March loth the United States transport Grant arrived, having 
 on board Major-General Henry W. Lawton, who had so distinguished 
 himself in Cuba and was an old Indian fighter, together with the 
 Fourth United States Infantry and a battalion of the Seventeenth 
 United States Infantry. 
 
 WHEATON S FLYING COLUMN. 
 
 General Wheaton was put in charge of a new divisional brigade 
 and advanced on March i3th from San Pedro Macati for the purpose 
 of corralling the enemy. He moved on Pasig, meeting with slight 
 resistance, as the enemy was in full retreat. His Flying Column sought 
 to cut off communication between the south and north insurgents 
 armies. Guadalupe and the city of Pasig were quickly captured. 
 The enemy fought furiously under a heavy fire and were caught in a 
 trap with the Flying Column on one side and the Pasig River on the 
 other. They made a stand for an hour and were finally forced into 
 the jungle in full retreat. 
 
 The American advance began at daybreak, the cavalry leading at 
 a sharp trot. A dash across the open brought the column to a clump 
 of timber commanding the rear of Guadalupe. The advance, sup 
 ported by the Oregon troops, opened a heavy fire on the insurgents, 
 and then the column divided, the right swinging towards the town of 
 Pasig, and the left advancing with a telling fire into the brush where 
 the insurgents were concealed. 
 
 At Guadalupe church a handful of the rebels made a sullen 
 stand, but finally broke and ran. The rebels who had taken refuge 
 in the jungle were discovered by river gunboats, which poured a dis 
 astrous fire into them. Everywhere the followers of Aguinaldo fled 
 for safety, and for a time the troops were ordered to cease firing to 
 
A BRUSH WITH THE ENEMY 95 
 
 get some rest before attacking Pasig itself. When the attack was 
 finally begun, a heavy rain was falling. After a vigorous fight, the 
 Filipinos finding themselves outwitted and defeated fled to the north 
 ward, and by 5 o clock the whole American line bivouaced around the 
 city. The next day the column advanced beyond Pasig to the shore 
 of Laguna Bay, sweeping everything before it. The enemy made a 
 running fight and suffered severe loss. Their avenues of communi 
 cation north and south were effectively closed. 
 
 A BRUSH WITH THE ENEMY. 
 
 Between Pateros and Taguig General Wheaton with the Twen 
 tieth and Twenty-second Infantry, the Oregon and Washington 
 troops, section six of the Sixth Artillery, and a squad of the Fourth 
 Cavalry came upon the enemy massed in such a force as to cause an 
 unusually heavy fight. The enemy was driven back with great loss. 
 
 On March i6th the First Battalion of the Twentieth United 
 States Infantry advanced from Pasig, clearing the country to Caintia, 
 a well-defended village of seven hundred inhabitants. The enemy 
 was dislodged after a half-hour s fighting, during which the American 
 troops advanced in splendid order under heavy fire, charging across 
 the rice fields against overwhelming odds. 
 
 General Otis sent the following cablegram on March i5th : 
 " Three thousand insurgents moved down last night to the towns of 
 Pasig and Pateros, on shore of Laguna Bay, fronting Wheaton s 
 troops on Pasig River line ; by heavy fighting Wheaton has dislodged 
 and driven them back, taking 400 prisoners and inflicting heavy loss 
 in killed and wounded ; he reports his loss as very moderate ; he now 
 occupies these towns with sufficient force to hold them ." 
 
 Our troops found 106 dead Filipinos and 100 new graves near 
 Pasig. The prisoners were unarmed, and, it is presumed, they exe 
 cuted their threat of throwing their arms into the river. 
 
 In the meantime a number of the Filipinos had grown tired of 
 the continuous victories of our troops, and some of the prominent 
 leaders among the insurgents advised surrender to the United States 
 and an acceptance of our terms of government. Twelve adherents 
 of the plan of independence were sentenced to death by Aguinaldo, 
 because they wrote, advising surrender, and General Legarda, who 
 
96 THE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 visited Malolos for the purpose of advising Aguinaldo to give up the 
 unequal struggle, was executed on the spot by orders of the rebel 
 leader. 
 
 ON TOWARD MALOLOS. 
 
 It was decided to make a concentrated effort to capture Malolos, 
 the capital of the insurgent temporary government and the head 
 quarters of the insurgent leader. Here the Filipinos had massed 
 their forces, and here, too, they had thrown out protection and 
 trenches, and had prepared themselves for a fierce fight. It was 
 hoped that, by taking this place, the backbone of the insurgent strug 
 gles would be broken. In order to meet the American advance, 
 Aguinaldo s forces concentrated in large number about Malabon, 
 which lies to the north of Manila, on the railway and on the shore of 
 the bay. They had constructed several lines of trenches around 
 Malabon, and there they awaited the onward movement of our army. 
 
 The fighting began when, on March 25th, General MacArthurs 
 division, consisting of the brigades of General Harrison Gray Otis, 
 General Hale and General Hall, supplemented by General Wheaton s 
 brigade, advanced and captured the towns of Novaliches on the left, 
 and San Francisco del Monte and Mariquina on the right, clearing 
 the rebel trenches HI front of the line north from the river to Caloo- 
 can. They also secured possession of the railroad, practically corner 
 ing the flower of Aguinaldo s army at Malabon and in the foothills 
 of Singalon, twenty miles apart. The plan was to strike north of Polo. 
 
 The attack was begun at 6 o clock in the morning. The Nebraska 
 and Colorado Volunteer Regiments encountered the first strong re 
 sistance. This was at San Francisco del Monte, and in the surround 
 ing trenches. The Cavalry outflanked the enemy, who broke and 
 ran, but later made a stubborn stand in the woods north of the Laloma 
 church. 
 
 The rebels adopted the American tactics of holding their fire 
 until the enemy were about 1,000 yards away, and they fired lower 
 than usual ; but the boys from the United States fired volleys with 
 terrible effect, and then rushed forward, cheering and sweeping every 
 thing before them. The Twentieth Kansas and Tenth Pennsylvania, 
 with the Montana Volunteers on the left, protected by the Utah Bat 
 tery, advanced over the open rice fields on the double-quick, yelling 
 
BRA VERY OF THE KANSAS TROOPS 9; 
 
 fiercely and occasionally dropping in the grass and firing by volley. 
 The enemy, strongly entrenched in the woods, kept up a steady fire 
 until the Americans were in close quarters, and then they broke and 
 fled. The bodies of 125 of their dead were found in the trenches 
 and many more in the woods. 
 
 Within ninety minutes after the advance was made, the whole 
 front, for a distance of three miles to the north, had been cleared. 
 General Male s brigade had simultaneously swept in a northwesterly 
 direction, routing the enemy. Our advance was over open ground 
 for a mile and a half. The Third Artillery, under command of Major 
 William A. Kobbe, at the apex upon which the line was to turn, got 
 the hardest fighting and lost nine per cent, of its men. 
 
 BRAVERY OF THE KANSAS TROOPS. 
 
 As the line swung northwest, and came to the TuHahan River, 
 General Wheaton s brigade moved out from Caloocan, where it had 
 been held in the trenches, and swept the insurgents directly in front, 
 making the American line stretch along six miles of the south bank 
 of the river. The bridge at Caloocan had been destroyed, and there 
 were solid lines of insurgents in trenches across the river. Bullets 
 were flying all around, but the Third Kansas Artillery boldly waded 
 across the stream, and fiercely stormed the blockhouse which com 
 manded the approach. They were forced almost to swim owing to 
 the depth of the water, but, soaking wet, they charged the trenches 
 and the blockhouse with the wildest cheers, and the Filipinos, who 
 had never heard of such fighting, fled at their approach. It was a 
 most inspiring spectacle of heroism to all who saw it, a spectacle 
 that shall ever live in history. 
 
 In this fight General Mac Arthur and General Hale, with their 
 staffs, were frequently under heavy fire. The heat was terrific, and 
 at times all of the officers, except the two Generals, were forced to 
 dismount, overcome by the heat. The next day MacArthur dashed 
 beyond Polo and to the northeast, and captured Meycauavan, two 
 miles from Polo. It is at the base of the rough hills and the jungles, 
 and the whole way is lined with trenches. The fight here was a brisk 
 one, and among those who fell was Captain Krayenbuhl, who had 
 been promoted for individual bravery at the battle of Manila, as 
 
9 8 THE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 described in another chapter. He was one of the most popular and 
 efficient young men of the campaign, and his death was deplored by 
 everybody who knew him. 
 
 General MacArthurs plan was to cut off the 5,000 insurgents in 
 Malolos from the rest of the insurgents, but he was unable to carry 
 it out, owing to the roughness of the ground and the thickness of the 
 jungle, which prevented him from getting far enough around to the 
 north of Polo to shut the enemy in. 
 
 THE TRAGIC DEATH OF COLONEL EGBERT. 
 
 In this engagement Wheaton s brigade figured almost exclu 
 sively. There were engaged the Fourth, Twenty-second, and 
 Twenty-third Infantry, the Utah Troop, the Third Artillery, and the 
 Oregon troops. These were stretched out along the railroad from 
 Caloocan to the Tuliahan River. The rebels had destroyed the 
 bridge over the river, and on the further side made their stand, while 
 the engineers were trying to replace the floor of the bridge on the 
 iron girders. The Second Oregon Regiment dashed across the 
 river, wading and swimming. The Twenty-second and four com 
 panies of the Twenty-third gained the west bank of the river about 
 the same time. From the river the land rose steadily for half a mile 
 to Malinta, which stands at the summit of the hill. The crest was 
 torn up with intrenchments, but the Americans moved steadily for 
 ward, yet no reply came- from the hidden foe. They waited until our 
 troops were within 300 yards of them, and then the seemingly deserted 
 trenches belched forth a deadly fire. 
 
 The Twenty-second, which was in the advance, with gallant Colo 
 nel Harry C. Egbert at their head, dashed at the entrenchments. 
 The Oregon and Kansas troops at the right and left were fighting 
 with great gallantry, but they were in the woods, while the men of 
 the Twenty-second were in the open, and as these heroes of Santiago 
 made that magnificent charge up the hill in the face of the deadly 
 fire of the insurgents, Colonel Egbert fell forward in his saddle mor 
 tally wounded. 
 
 Close behind him struggling through the grass came General 
 Wheaton and his staff. The soldiers bore the litter with the dying 
 Colonel back, and, as they passed the General, he bared his head and 
 
CAFE AND CHOCOLATE FACTORY, MANILA 
 
 Chocolate and cocoa are the products of the cocoa free, which was introduced early in the history of the 
 islands by missionaries from Mexico. 
 
 INTERIOR VIEW OF A CIGAR AND CIGARETTE FACTORY, MANILA 
 
 The chief manufacturing industry in Manila is that of making cigars and cigarettes. The Spanish 
 
 Government made this a State Monopoly during their ownership of the islands. The growth and 
 
 mauulacture of tobacco is destined to be one of the greatest industries of the Phi ippines. 
 
MALABON IS TAKEN Io i 
 
 gave a soldier s greeting to the dying officer. " It was done nobly," 
 said the General. " I am done for, I am too old," gasped Egbert ; 
 and his words proved only too true, for the gallant hero of two wars 
 was dead before they got him to the rear. Thus ended a record of 
 continuous service as a line officer for nearly forty years. 
 
 Colonel Egbert was appointed a first lieutenant in the army from 
 civil life in 1861. He was taken prisoner at the Battle of Gettysburg, 
 but escaped and rejoined his command. He was severely wounded 
 in 1864 in the Battle of Bethesda Church, Va. In the Santiago 
 campaign he commanded the Sixth Infantry until shot through the 
 body on July i, 1898, when he was disabled. For his distinguished 
 service in this battle he was appointed a Brigadier-General of volun 
 teers, which grade he held until December i, 1898, when, in the 
 reduction of volunteers, he was honorably discharged. He had been 
 promoted Colonel in the regular army on July i, 1898, and was 
 assigned to the Twenty-second Infantry, whose Colonel, Charles A. 
 Wikoff, was killed at San Juan. The Twenty-second sailed for 
 Manila February ist, and in this great charge, so similar to that up 
 the hill at Santiago, it again sacrificed its commanding officer to the 
 bullets of the foe. 
 
 The advance to Malinta was made over the Nivalichaes Rial. 
 The Filipinos fled along the railroad, burning rice mills, tearing up 
 the tracks and obstructing everywhere. They took refuge in the 
 church of Malinta and made a stand there, but the American troops 
 came on a run and took the place by assault. 
 
 MALABON IS TAKEN. 
 
 General MacArthur s division pressed on along the torn up rail 
 roads toward Malabon, and at his near approach the insurgents set 
 fire to that place and fled back to Malolos as fast as they could. The 
 condition of the country was such that rapid progress was not pos 
 sible, but with every step of the advance the Americans carried 
 victory with them. Try as they would, the American forces were 
 unable to carry out their plan of catching Aguinaldo and his whole 
 army between the two advancing lines. The Filipinos were able to 
 make more rapid progress than the American troops, owing to their 
 familiarity with the country. 
 
102 THE TROUBLE WITH AGUINALDO 
 
 On March 27th, the American forces advanced from Meycauavan, 
 General Harrison Gray Otis leading" his brigade on the left of the 
 railroad track and General Hale s brigade taking the right of the 
 track. The resistance was small until the Americans approached the 
 Marilao River within sight of Marilao itself. Again the Filipinos 
 made a stand on the river bank, and when the Americans came near 
 they delivered an effective fire. The river was too deep to ford, and 
 the infranty consequently could not accomplish much. The fire of 
 the Filipinos was such as to lead to the opinion that they were well 
 trained soldiers, probably members of the Milita which the Spaniards 
 organized. The entrenchments of the Filipinos were a revelation to 
 our troops, and were found to have been designed by capable engi 
 neers and constructed with care and thoroughness. 
 
 A BOLD CHARGE BY COLONEL FUNSTON. 
 
 Behind them the Filipinos did effective work, but when the 
 American field artillery came into action it put a dramatic end to the 
 battle. Approaching under cover of the bushes to a clear space not 
 more than sixty yards from the trenches, the artillerymen dashed into 
 plain view, shouting as though in full charge and prepared to fire. 
 Knowing the effect of our artillery the Filipinos were eager to quit 
 before they received a rain of shell. A hundred or more fled from 
 their trenches, while others remaining displayed a white flag and 
 shouted, "Amigos," (meaning friends). The infantry had been 
 chafing at not getting into action, and Colonel Funston with twenty 
 of his Kansas followers again jumped into the river and swam across 
 to the opposite side. They forthwith made a charge and captured 
 80 prisoners with all their arms. It was a foolhardy act according to 
 the books, but it made the name of Colonel Funston and his Kansas 
 Regiment famous all over the world. A lot of men from the Tenth 
 Pennsylvania also crossed the river and captured 40 prisoners. 
 Finally the town fell before the Americans. They were now but 
 eight miles away from Malolos, the insurgent capital, and everybody 
 was eager to press on to what they thought would be the final contest 
 of the war. But General MacArthur thought it best to give the 
 men a rest for a little while. Early on the 29th, he advanced rapidly 
 to Bocave, and at 11.45 ne advanced toward Bigaa, and at 3.15 in 
 
ENTERING THE INSURGENT CAPITAL 103 
 
 the afternoon he turned toward Guiguinto, 3^ miles from Malolos. 
 There was some fierce fighting in the afternoon. Troops crossed 
 the river at Guiguinto by working artillery over the railroad bridge 
 by hand and swimming mules against fierce resistance. 
 
 AGUINALDO IN COMMAND. 
 
 During the fight Aguinaldo commanded his troops in person for 
 the first time since the war against our troops began. Prisoners who 
 were captured, say that officers stood behind the Filipino soldiers 
 with whips instead of swords and lashed the men to keep their posi 
 tion. As the enemy fled they tore up the tracks of the railroad, 
 making the progress of our troops very slow. 
 
 During the approach to Malolos, General MacArthur and his 
 staff, while walking abreast of the line, came near losing their lives. 
 Everything was quiet when suddenly a shower of bullets came on all 
 sides from sharp shooters in trees and on house tops. These were 
 speedily dislodged. The march towards Malolos was rapidly accom 
 plished. 
 
 ENTERING THE INSURGENT CAPITAL. 
 
 As the troops neared the outskirts of the city, General Hale s and 
 H. G. Otis brigades were stretched between the sea and the moun- 
 
 o 
 
 tains. The scene was a magnificent one ; the splendid line with its 
 waiving colors looked like a rainbow, and as it neared the outskirts 
 of the city a number of Filipinos bearing a flag of truce came out to 
 meet it. At the sight of the white signal of surrender, our troops 
 broke into cheers and song, but when our messengers approached, 
 the bearers of the flag of truce turned and ran back to their capital. 
 An instant pursuit was begun and our troops were received with 
 heavy volleys from the outskirts of the town. On the right the 
 jungle swarmed with little blue figures. It was the rear guard, pro 
 tecting the retreat of the rebel army and destroying the railroad track 
 as they swept on. 
 
 The Americans camped all night outside the city. The Generals 
 held a council of war, for they believed that, on the morrow, they might 
 have to fight 20,000 men. The battle opened at daybreak with the 
 bombardment of the trenches in front, and for half an hour the shells 
 fell in a shower. From the huts natives threw knives at Kansas men, 
 
104 THE TROUBLE WITH AGU1NALDO 
 
 while showers of arrows flew on all sides. The right wing unbroken 
 advanced over fields and through streams, taking the main trenches 
 south of the city. They found them deserted. A few men came out 
 to meet the advancing line and informed the soldiers that the army 
 had gone by railway toward the interior. 
 
 The Kansas men led the left, and at the end of the main street 
 of the city they were met by a barricade of stones from which a hot 
 fire was poured by a few insurgents, but Colonel Funston leaping 
 from his horse and swinging his hat led the Kansas men over the 
 barricade and down the street with terrific yells, firing volleys as they 
 ran. But the town was deserted and there the victorious American 
 army rested and feasted, while the American flag flew over the 
 Government building of Aguinaldo s capital. The shattered army 
 had fled for its life into the interior, and Aguinaldo and his cabinet 
 had left two days before, and could not be found. 
 
 And for a time, at least, the backbone of the rebellion was 
 broken. 
 
 A FEW PROCLAMATIONS BY AGUINALDO. 
 
 It was evident, from later information, that Aguinaldo had 
 determined to stake all in an attack upon the American forces. He 
 issued several proclamations defining his position, on February 2d, 
 3rd and 5th. 
 
 The first declares the Americans opened the fight, and calls upon 
 the Filipino Congress .to sustain the Constitution. The second says: 
 
 "We have fought our ancient oppressors without arms, and we 
 now trust to God to defend us against the foreign invaders." 
 
 His proclamation of February 3rd says : 
 
 11 I order and command : 
 
 " First That peace and friendly relations with the Americans 
 be broken and that the latter be treated as enemies, within the limits 
 prescribed by the laws of the war. 
 
 " Second That the Americans captured be held as prisoners of 
 war. 
 
 4 Third That this proclamation be communicated to the Consul, 
 and that Congress order and accord a suspension of the constitu 
 tional guarantee, resulting from the declaration of war." 
 
A FEW PROCLAMATIONS BY AGUINALDO 105 
 
 Aguinaldo s proclamation of February 5th says the outbreak of 
 hostilities was " unjustly and unexpectedly provoked by the Ameri 
 cans," and refers to his manifesto of January 8th, publishing the 
 alleged grievances of the Filipinos at the hands of the army of occu 
 pation, and the " constant outrages and taunts which have been caus 
 ing misery to the Manilians," and refers to the " useless conference" 
 and " contempt shown for the Filipino Government " as proving a 
 " premeditated transgression of justice and liberty." 
 
 The rebel leader also refers to the former losses of the Fili 
 pinos, but says "slavery is bitter," and calls upon them to "sacrifice 
 all upon the altar of honor and national integrity." 
 
 He insists that he tried to avoid, as far as possible, an armed 
 conflict, but claims that all his efforts were "useless before the 
 unmeasured pride of the American representatives" whom he 
 charges with having treated him as a rebel " because I defended the 
 interests of my country, and would not become the instrument of 
 their dastardly intentions." 
 
 Aguinaldo concludes with saying : 
 
 " Be not discouraged. Our independence was watered freely by 
 the blood of martyrs, and more will be shed in the future to 
 strengthen it. Remember, that efforts are not to be wasted that 
 ends may be gained. It is indispensable to adjust our actions to the 
 rules of law and right, and to learn to triumph over our enemies." 
 
 The attack upon Manila by the insurgents was made at a time 
 when the country was watching expectantly to see what the Senate 
 would do in the ratification of the Peace Treaty, which had been 
 framed in Paris. The day preceding the rebel uprising it looked as 
 though the treaty would not be ratified. The news of the slaughter 
 of our troops reached this country the day before the vote was to be 
 taken in the Senate. Immediately the whole nation was swept with 
 feeling. Everybody deplored the sacrifice of life, and everybody 
 looked to the Senate to see what the effect of the news would be. 
 When a vote was taken the Paris Peace Treaty was ratified by a 
 vote of 57 to 27, amid the greatest excitement. 
 
 The Peace Treaty was ratified by Spain, and, on April nth, the 
 last act in the Spanish-American drama was played. This formal and 
 final scene took place at the White House, and, curiously enough, it 
 
106 THE TROUBLE WITH AGUlNALDO 
 
 happened on the anniversary of the day on which President McKin- 
 ley, in a Message to Congress, asked for authority to intervene in the 
 Cuban situation. 
 
 The final scene was the exchange of the ratifications of the 
 Peace Treaty. The French Ambassador, M. Cambon, handed Presi 
 dent McKinley the Spanish copy of the treaty, handsomely engrossed 
 and bound in morocco. The President took from his desk and 
 handed to the Ambassador, who represented the Government of 
 Spain, the American copy of the treaty, also engrossed and bound 
 in dark blue morocco. Each bowed as the exchange took place, and 
 the ceremony so simple, yet so full of meaning, was over. 
 
 After the exchange of the ratifications, President McKinley 
 issued his proclamation, which reads : 
 
 " WHEREAS, A Treaty of Peace between the United States of 
 America and Her Majesty, the Queen Regent of Spain, in the name 
 of her august son, Don Alfonso XIII., was concluded and signed by 
 their respective plenipotentiaries at Paris on the loth day of Decem 
 ber, 1898, the original o-f which convention being in the English and 
 Spanish languages, is word for word as follows : 
 
 (Here the full text of the treaty is given.) 
 
 AND WHEREAS, The said convention has been duly ratified on 
 both parts, and the ratifications of the two Governments were 
 exchanged in the city of Washington, on the eleventh day of April, 
 one thousand eight hundred and ninety-nine. 
 
 " Now, THEREFORE, Be it known that I, William McKinley, 
 President of the United States of America, have caused the said 
 convention to be made public to the end that the same and every 
 article and clause thereof may be observed and fulfilled with good 
 faith by the United States and the citizens thereof. 
 
 " IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and caused 
 the seal of the United States to be affixed. 
 
 " Done at the city of Washington this eleventh day of April, in 
 the year of our Lord, one thousand eight hundred and ninety-nine, 
 and of the Independence of the United States, the one hundred and 
 twenty-third. -WILLIAM McKiNLEY. 
 
 [SEAL] " By the President. 
 
 "JoiiN HAY, Secretary of State." 
 
CHAPTER V 
 
 The Men Who Won Fame in Battle. 
 
 Commanders and Soldiers whose Bravery has Brought them Special Honors. Intrepid 
 Fighting, Mad Dashes, and Fierce Firing of Boys from Pennsylvania, New York 
 and other States of the East ; from Tennessee, Kentucky and the Rest of the 
 South Line ; and the Heroic Warriors from Oregon, California, Dakota, Kansas, 
 Iowa and the Middle and Far West. Individual Deeds of Daring. Scout Work 
 Outside and Inside of the City. 
 
 NOWHERE throughout the war was the valor ot volunteers or 
 the heroism of regulars more strikingly shown, than in our 
 conquest of the Philippines. Far away from home, in a 
 strange land, among a strange people, cut off even from communica 
 tion by any regular channel, these brave sons of the Stars and 
 Stripes faced heat and fever and finally the bullets of their foes to 
 bring victory to American arms both by land and sea. So striking 
 was their conduct in facing the rough chapters of a soldier s life, that 
 Major-General Merritt comments, in his report, of " the exemplary 
 spirit of patient, even cheerful endurance shown by the officers and 
 men, and this feeling of admiration for the manner in which the 
 American soldiers, volunteers and regulars alike, accept the necessary 
 hardships of the work they have undertaken to do, has grown and 
 increased with every phase of the difficult and trying campaign which 
 the troops of the Philippine expedition have brought to such a bril 
 liant and successful conclusion." 
 
 He was particularly struck by the fortitude of General Greene s 
 command just after landing. It was encamped on a strip of sand 
 near the Fhore where " the greater portion of the force had sheltered 
 tents only and were suffering many discomforts, the camp being in a 
 low flat place, without shelter from the heat of the tropical sun, or 
 adequate protection during the terrific downpours of rain so frequent 
 at that season." As was usually the case, the hardships of inactivity 
 were much more trying than the dangers of battle. Men were willing 
 
 107 
 
loS THE MEN WHO WON FAME IN BATTLE 
 
 to face bullets who found it difficult and irksome to bear up under the 
 routine work of camp in the hot tropical sun, with the food which a 
 soldier has to put up with, especially in a tropical land with the nearest 
 place of supply many miles away. But everywhere the gallant boys 
 of the United States showed their true metal, whether it was before 
 the raking fire of the Spanish, the treacherous bullets of the insur 
 gents or the blazing heat and terrible storms of the Philippines. 
 
 The force which occupied Manila consisted of 470 officers and 
 10,464 men. These were drawn from all over the Union the east, 
 north, south, and west joined hands and gave up the flower of their 
 men to champion the American corps. The troops were under 
 Major-General Wesley Merritt, and were made up in three expe 
 ditions, the first of which left California on May 25, 1898, under con 
 trol of General Thomas Anderson. It consisted of 115 officers and 
 2,386 men, the first United States troops to land. They arrived 
 sixty days after Dewey s famous victory of May ist. 
 
 The second expedition left San Francisco on June I5th, and had 
 on board 158 officers and 3,428 men, in command of General Frank 
 V. Greene. The transports bearing this expedition arrived on 
 July i jth, and the wild shouts of those who had landed over two 
 weeks before, and those on board Admiral Dewey s fleet who were 
 impatiently waiting so that the decisive blow might be struck, greeted 
 the incoming vessels, and drove away any feelings of homesickness 
 which might have seized the boys on their way across the long 
 stretch of ocean. 
 
 The last of the transports to arrive was those leaving June 27th, 
 and reaching Manila on July 3<Dth, in command of General Arthur 
 McArthur. He had with him 197 officers and 4,650 men. Five days 
 before this, General Merritt had reached Manila on the transport 
 Newport, which had on board the Astor Battery and others, and the 
 commander of all the forces had taken charge of affairs on the island. 
 Immediately upon his arrival, he was closeted with Admiral Dewey, 
 and the two went over the situation thoroughly and discussed plans 
 for the future. The landing of the troops was the first difficulty 
 encountered on the island, everything had to be taken in in cascoes 
 and dug-outs, and some of the boys had interesting experiences 
 while the operation was going on. 
 
CONVENT AT MALATE SHOWING EFFECT OF SHELLS 
 
 This convent stands in front of Fort San Antcnio de Abad, and was wrecked by shells 
 111 the battle ol August i3th. Ihe hottest fighting was done around it. 
 
 THE PHILIPPINE PONY AND CART 
 
 L,aige European and American horses are not fjun-1 in the Philippines. Tne climate seems to be fatal to them. 
 The small native pony, however, is remarkably strong lor its aize and ha.-> wotiiK-i lui endurance. 
 
THE LANDING OF THE TROOPS 1 1 1 
 
 For instance, on the day the Astor Battery landed, it stormed 
 incessantly, and to add to the gayety of the occasion, one of the cas- 
 coes containing the special ammunition for the handsome guns with 
 which Colonel Astor had equipped them, sunk before it reached land. 
 Consequently the battery was forced to remain out of action on the 
 first days fight, and most of them had to swim in to reach shore. 
 
 Many were the deeds of daring done in the fighting which fol 
 lowed the landing of the American troops, deeds which called forth 
 commendations for special distinction from those in command. Many 
 more were the deeds which history will never record, and which 
 never will be known except among a few of those who witnessed 
 them. General Merritt, in his report of the attack upon Manila, 
 when the city was so easily taken, and the loss was so comparatively 
 small, comments especially upon the valuable work of his own staff 
 and his personal aids. He says : " Brigadier-General R. P. Hughes, 
 my Inspector-General at San Francisco, was especially noticeable in 
 accomplishing the instruction of green troops that came to the city, 
 many of them without arms, clothing or equipment of any kind. 
 
 " I desire especially to express my acknowledgments to Brigadier- 
 General Babcock, my Adjutant-General and Chief of Staff, for his most 
 valuable services from the inception of the campaign in San Francisco 
 to the close of the work at the present time. This officer is too well 
 known to require special mention of his services in any one direction. 
 He was at my right arm, not in the office, but in the field, and much 
 of the success that has attended the expedition is due to his individual 
 efforts. 
 
 "I desire especially to mention Major McClure and Major 
 Whipple of the pay department, who volunteered their services after 
 they had completed their legitimate duties, and performed excellent 
 service whenever called upon. Major McClure was especially im 
 portant in his services immediately after the surrender, taking long 
 rides under my orders to the Spanish lines and bearing instructions to 
 them which resulted in effecting their withdrawal in such manner as to 
 
 o 
 
 prevent the insurgents from pillage in the northern part of the city. 
 
 "I especially call attention to the services of Captain Mott, as 
 
 mentioned in the report of Brigadier-General Greene. He was 
 
 cheerful, willing, intelligent and energetic, in the discharge of 
 
v T2 THE MEN WHO WON FAME IN BATTLE 
 
 multifarious duties imposed upon him in connection with our troops 
 and trenches during the rainy season, and in the final action showed 
 those rare characteristics which stamp him as a very superior 
 soldier." In speaking of the landing of reinforcements to General 
 Greene s troops, he says : " The landing was finally accomplished 
 after days of hard work and hardships, and I desire here to express 
 again my admiration for the fortitude and cheerful willingness of the 
 men of all commands engaged in this operation." 
 
 Too much cannot be said in praise of the bravery and skill as 
 commanders, of General Arthur McArthur, whose forces really bore 
 the great brunt of the battle upon the city, of General Greene and of 
 General Anderson. They in turn each commend those of their com 
 mands who came under their individual notice for conspicuous 
 bravery. General Merritt tells of the work of the Colorado skir 
 mishers who left the shelter of their breastworks on August i3th, and 
 advanced rapidly toward the Spanish line. They found that the 
 Spanish trenches were deserted, 4< but as they passed over the Spanish 
 works, they were met by a sharp fire from a second line situated in 
 the streets of Malate, by which a number of the men were killed and 
 wounded, among others the soldier who pulled down the Spanish 
 colors, still flying on the fort, and raised our own." Thus died a 
 hero, who is not even known by name in this report, and thus died 
 many others who faced the bullets of the Spanish guns for the sake 
 of the flag which this man raised. 
 
 General Anderson pays this tribute to his men : " The opposi 
 tion we met in battle was not sufficient to test the bravery of our 
 soldiers, but all showed bravery and dash. The losses show that the 
 leading regiments of the First Brigade Thirteenth Minnesota, 
 Twenty-third Infantry, and the Astor Battery met the most serious 
 opposition and deserve credit for their success. The Colorado, 
 California and Oregon regiments, the Regulars and all the batteries 
 of the Second Brigade showed such zeal that it seems a pity that they 
 did not meet foemen worthy of their steel." 
 
 Major-General Merritt pays particular tribute to the work of 
 General McArthur. He says, in his report : " The works of the second 
 line soon gave way before the determined advance of Greene s troops, 
 and that officer pushed his brigade rapidly through Malate and over 
 
MAGNIFICENT EXHIBITION OF BRA VER Y 113 
 
 the bridges to occupy Binondo and San Miguel, as contemplated in 
 his instructions. In the meantime the brigade of General McArthur, 
 advancing simultaneously on the Pasay Road, encountered a very 
 sharp fire, coming from the blockhouses, trenches and works in his 
 front, positions which it was very difficult to carry, owing to the 
 swampy condition of the ground on both sides of the roads, and the 
 heavy undergrowth concealing the enemy. With much gallantry and 
 excellent judgment on the part of the brigade commander and the 
 troops engaged these difficulties were overcome with a minimum loss, 
 and McArthur advanced and held the bridges and the town of Malate, 
 as was contemplated in his instructions." 
 
 One of the instances, which has probably never before been 
 recorded, of individual bravery and sacrifice of life, is that of the 
 two sergeants of the Astor Battery, who met death in the splendid 
 and heroic charge upon the blockhouse just outside of Manila. Ser 
 geant Holmes was charging up the hill, with Sergeant Crinnims at 
 
 O O O I O 
 
 his side. A bullet struck the latter, and he fell mortally wounded. 
 As Holmes bent over him to help him and was speaking to him, a 
 bullet entered Holmes open mouth and with terrible force blew out 
 the back of his head completely. There was no mark at all where 
 the bullet entered, and the brave soldier fell dead at the feet of a 
 comrade whom he had stopped to assist. 
 
 On the night of July 3ist, when the Spaniards, to the number of 
 3,000, made their first attack on the American troops, the Tenth 
 Pennsylvania Volunteers, Battery K, of the Third Artillery Regu 
 lars, and Battery A, of Utah, displayed bravery that called forth the 
 highest plaudits of all who were in command. It was a magnificent 
 exhibition of what volunteers could do. The brave men from Penn 
 sylvania and the First California Regiment never flinched under the 
 most glittering fire. The Utah Battery, under Captain Young, cov 
 ered itself with glory. The men pulled their guns through mud, axle 
 deep. After the battle. General Greene issued this address to the 
 troops: 
 
 " The Brigadier-General commanding desires to thank the troops 
 engaged last night for gallantry and skill displayed by them in repel 
 ling such a vigorous attack by largely superior forces of Spaniards. 
 Not an inch of ground was yielded by the Tenth Pennsylvania In- 
 
THE MEN WHO WON FAME IN BATTLE 
 
 fantry and Utah Artillery, stationed in the trenches. A battalion of 
 the Third Artillery and First Regiment California Infantry, moved 
 forward to their support through a galling fire with the utmost intre 
 pidity. The courage and steadiness shown by all in their first 
 engagement is worthy of the highest commendation." 
 
 The attack of the insurgents upon our troops brought forth 
 more heroism and splendid behavior under fire. Captain Charles 
 King, who himself stands high on the rolls of valor, says, in describ 
 ing the battle of his own men : " Let no man say the Filipinos can 
 not fight ; they are brave and skillful. As for the California, Idaho 
 and Washington Regiments, and Dwyer s and Hawthorne s gunners, 
 words are inadequate." He also speaks of the gallantry of Captain 
 Otis, of Company A, First Washington, who " lost much of his 
 ear, but none of his nerve." In describing the death of one of the 
 gallant old heroes of the fight, he says: General Anderson in per 
 son led the attack in the direction of San Pedro, while the brigade 
 commander, with the Washington and Idaho Regiments, made 
 the dash on Santa Ana. It was about 8 o clock. The fields toward 
 San Pedro were open and lightly held, but to the left of the road to 
 Santa Ana the insurgents had strong redoubts, earthworks and 
 Krupp guns. They fought with obstinate courage and no little 
 skill, but their valor was of no avail against the determined rush of 
 the Washingtons and Idahos. Gallant old Major McConville, of the 
 Idaho, got his last order from the lips of the brigade commander as 
 together they rode across the bridge, and his death wound was 
 received leading his men into the attack. The fight was fierce in 
 front of the left wing. The insurgents held on to a redoubt in front 
 of Pandacan until our line had swept beyond the other flank. In the 
 dash u; on this earthwork, Captain Fortman, First Washington, led 
 two companies across the stream, fording the Concordia, as almost 
 all the brigade had to, waist or breast deep. One of McConville s 
 companies attacked at the same moment from the right, and between 
 them the insurgents were driven into the Pasig, leaving forty dead 
 and ma;i} wounded." 
 
 \ he American troops seemed to enjoy the dangers of the con 
 test. They drove the insurgents before them like a flock of sheep, 
 or as one burly Colorado fighter, who was discussing the capture of 
 
A SERIES OF BRILLIANT COMBATS 115 
 
 the waterworks, put it: "It reminded me of a rabbit-drive on the 
 Colorado plains." 
 
 One of the things which caused the American troops to give no 
 quarter to their foes in one of the fights, was the trip in which Dr. 
 Young, formerly Quartermaster-Sergeant of the Third Artillery, lost 
 his life. He was scouting and was captured by the insurgents, who 
 hacked his body to pieces and left it mutilated on the ground. The 
 sight of it aroused all of the fighting blood in the troops, and they 
 pressed forward to avenge his death with great zeal. 
 
 In the taking of Caloocan, a small town just north of Manila, 
 the Filipinos were routed with the most vigorous advance by the 
 American troops. One eyewitness of the fighting has this to say 
 about it : " Brigadier-General H. G. Otis holds the extreme left of the 
 American line from the bay near Cakiican. The regiments on the 
 line and in support are : the Twentieth Kansas, Colonel Funston, 
 eleven companies ; First Montana, Colonel Kerster, nine companies ; 
 Third Artillery, Major Kobbs, four batteries as infantry, and the 
 Tenth Pennsylvania, Colonel Hawkins, four companies. Two com 
 panies oi the Tenth Pennsylvania are behind the walls of the De la 
 Loma churchyard. Across the ravine from the Montana regiment is 
 Captain Jensen s company, holding the stone fort supporting Grant s 
 Battery of four Utah guns ; a fifth gun is to the left and on the rail 
 road, supporting the Kansas troops. 
 
 " To reach its present position the brigade has advanced four 
 times since Saturday in a series of brilliant combats on different parts 
 of the line of action, especially so on the 4th, 5th and yth. 
 
 " Several bayonet charges were made on the yth during the 
 advance of the right and centre. The taking of the Chinese ceme 
 tery on the 5th by the Montana and Pennsylvania regiments was a 
 superb piece of work. A brilliantly executed advance up the slope 
 in the open made a battle picture that would delight any veteran." 
 
 An individual exhibition of bravery has brought the name of 
 Major J. F. Bell, of the Volunteer Engineer Corps, to the front and 
 caused him to be particularly noticed in the report of General Greene 
 to the War Department. Just before the attack was made upon 
 Manila General Greene found it necessary to know the exact condi 
 tion of the territory lying between the trenches of his troops and Fort 
 
1 1 6 THE MEN WHO WON FAME IN BATTLE 
 
 San Antonio de Abad. The Americans, of course, were practically 
 unfamiliar with the ground around the city, and the only method of 
 finding out exactly the lay of the land was through the work of expert 
 scouts. Owing to the comparatively open nature of the land. Thic 
 work was more than usually dangerous, and every man who started 
 out on it expected to sacrifice his life to the cause. 
 
 Major Bell, whose skill as an engineer, as well as his coolness 
 and bravery made him a valuable man in such an emergency, was 
 delegated to report to the General the exact condition of things 
 between the two opposing lines. Between our trenches and the fort 
 was a creek, the depth of which was a matter of doubt, and it was 
 debated whether it was necessary to build a bridge across the stream 
 or not. Under cover of the darkness, with Spanish sharp-shooters 
 lurking all about so that any false step might have caused the crack 
 of a rifle, Major Bell tested the creek right in front of the frowning 
 fort, and discovered that it was of such a depth that it could easily 
 be forded by the troops. He crossed the river, found out its exact 
 width, and then with audacity and bravery which showed the metal 
 of the man, he swam up the river to the bay and around in the very 
 rear of the Spanish troops, where he secured invaluable details which 
 led to an intelligent attack upon the stronghold of the Spanish. 
 
 This was but one of the numerous similar feats performed which 
 the demands of the situation called for. The low walls of the rice 
 fields, hardly more than a foot high, were sometimes the only things 
 that stood between the scout and discovery and certain death. Men 
 went for miles almost flat upon their stomachs, crawling like snakes 
 through the marshy rice fields, raising their heads just enough to note 
 the condition of things around them, ready for any emergency or any 
 danger. 
 
 One of the New York men, who was a member of the volunteers, 
 swam for miles around the forts of the enemy, facing what was almost 
 certain death, if discovered, with a zeal and cheerfulness that was 
 inspiring to all who heard of the deed. 
 
 The influence of the bravery of one man in command is illus 
 trated by the following incident in which a captain turned what looked 
 like defeat into a splendid victory. While the first day s fight was 
 going on, Captain O Hara, in command of the Battalion of the Third 
 
A TIMEL Y BUGLE-CALL 1 1 7 
 
 Artillery, was lying in his tent trying to get a little rest. He was 
 unable to get to sleep, however, and he found himself involuntarily 
 keeping track of the firing of the men. He knew that they had but 
 fifty rounds of ammunition with them, and he realized that, at the 
 rate they were firing, this would soon be used up. He did not know 
 what the trouble was ; but he did know that if these men, who were 
 shooting from the trenches into the dark were attacked, they would 
 want help when their ammunition was gone, and they would want it 
 pretty badly, too. 
 
 As he lay in his tent, thinking over the situation, he counted the 
 volleys one by one, as they pealed on the night air, until they became 
 indiscriminate, and then he knew that the boys were getting rattled. 
 He had no orders, but he took a chance, and he took it just in time. 
 He sounded the assembly, and, as the bugle-call rang out over the 
 camp, the men of Battery H tumbled out of their tents and formed 
 into line, rifles in hand, and one hundred and fifty rounds of ammu 
 nition at their belts. Down in the camp below, where the Third 
 Artillery was, a bugler heard the call and took it up. The First 
 Colorado men heard it and swarmed out with their guns. Nebraska 
 followed suit, and soon half of the camp was in arms. Leaving Cap 
 tain Hobbs in command of Battery H, with orders to be ready to 
 advance at the bugle call and to bring ten thousand rounds of extra 
 ammunition, Captain O Hara, with his orderly and his bugler, started 
 up the road toward the front. A little beyond the corner of the 
 camp he met another orderly coming on the dead run. The man 
 was blown and frightened. He had run through a rain of bullets 
 on his way back for help, and it had increased his excitement and 
 enlarged his notion of what had happened. " We are whipped," he 
 shouted to Captain O Hara; " we re But O Hara didn t care to 
 hear any more. His bugler was already blaring out the command, 
 " Forward !" Back in the camp the bugler of the waiting Captain 
 Hobbs answered the call, and all pressed up the road as hard as they 
 could go. All along the road the bugler sounded the cry of " For 
 ward," and the men of Battery H, crawling up through the dreadful 
 mud, answered with a cheer and a fresh spurt. 
 
 Somewhere ahead O Hara knew that his lieutenant, Krayen- 
 buhl, and his own battery were either waiting or already in action. 
 
1 1 8 THE MEN WHO WON FAME IN BATTLE 
 
 He met men coming to the rear with the wounded, and some, too, 
 coming without wounded. " We re beaten," they shouted, but the 
 only response they got was the call of the bugler, " Forward." These 
 shame-faced stragglers fell in with the Captain, his orderly, and the 
 bugler, and little by little they gained in numbers as they went along. 
 Up the Camino Real they went with mud, ankle-deep, and the rain 
 pouring down in torrents, and all the time the bugle kept singing out 
 the single word, " Forward ", and every time it sounded the answer 
 came sharp and clear from Battery H, which was coming behind. 
 
 At the cross-roads and the first barricade, where Krayenbuhl had 
 been posted, there were only a few stragglers, and Captain O Hara 
 knew that his lieutenant had swung into the rescue of his own 
 accord. Here they were overtaken by Battery H, and all together 
 lifted up their voices in a cheer that was carried down to the trenches. 
 There the hard-pressed Pennsylvanians heard it and it gave them 
 new strength. As the reinforcements were going along, Captain 
 Hobbs felt a sudden sharp sting on his right thigh. He put his hand 
 down and felt blood, and knew that he was hit, but he did not stop. 
 
 As the Captain surmised, Krayenbuhl, who had been keeping a 
 sharp watch out, had been impressed with the indiscriminate firing at 
 the front and knew that help was needed. So he piled in to give 
 them that help, sending a message over to Battery K, on his right, to 
 join in, in a hurry. They reached the Pennsylvania boys just in time, 
 for their ammunition had just about given out. Krayenbuhl, realiz 
 ing that the boys were a little bit rattled, jumped among the excited 
 men, who were firing at will, and shouted to them to get together. 
 He threatened to shoot the first man who fired without orders. His 
 own men swung into action like clockwork, and this, with his personal 
 bravery, had the desired effect. The Pennsylvanians steadied down 
 as the first volley of these regulars, fired as though it was one charge, 
 rang out. That volley, too, reached the ears of O Hara and Hobbs 
 as they were puffing along with their men. They recognized the 
 roar of the Krag-Jorgensen rifles, and they knew from the way they 
 were fired that the men behind them were regulars, and that they 
 were their own men in action. But O Hara did not slack up, and his 
 men went right on, stimulated with the knowledge that they would be 
 able to snatch victory from the jaws of defeat. 
 
THE CORDAGE FACTORY OF SANTA MESA, A SUBURB OF MANILA. 
 
 One of the i?reat industries of the Philippines is hemp-raisins:, hut almost the entire product has been shipped to the United 
 States an 1 Sngland for manufacture. Many cordage factories will no doubt K e built in the islands und r 
 
 America s progressive rule. 
 
 THE FAMOUS SPANISH PRISON, MANILA. 
 
 What the Cubans suffered in Morro Prison, Havana, was fully equaled by the tortures of the Filipinos in the above landmark 
 
 of Spanish cruelty in the East Indies. 
 
DEFEAT TURNED TO VICTORY 121 
 
 In the meantime the frightened courier had stumbled through 
 the camp and finally, almost exhausted, cried out, " Somebody take 
 my gun ! Help me to General Greene ! We are whipped ! Oh ! its 
 awful !" They almost dragged him over to General Greene s quarters 
 in a native hut just in front of the camp. The General was up ex 
 pecting a message from the front. " General," said the wretched 
 courier, " send reinforcements, send every man, send every company. 
 We are whipped ; the whole battery is wiped off the earth, and we 
 are out of ammunition." General Greene put his hand on the 
 frightened messenger s shoulder and said steadily, "keep cool young 
 man ; it s all right ; we will send you help ;" and after a while he was 
 able to get a more explicit account of what had happened and sent 
 plenty of aid. But O Hara s men had already turned defeat to 
 victory. 
 
 Here is how one fellow faced death. Private McIIrath, of 
 Battery H, who was acting Sergeant in command of 20 men, was a 
 first class soldier and had been in the army for fifteen years. There 
 was a good deal of confusion when his men jumped in the trenches to 
 help the Pennsylvanians, and so McIIrath stood up on a parapet and 
 said, " We have got them, now boys, get together and give it to them 
 in volleys/ and while he was walking back and forth on top of the 
 parapet steadying the men in the trenches, and getting them to fire 
 together, he was hit in the head by a Mauser bullet, and fell back 
 among his comrades, to die in the hospital the next day. 
 
 Private J F. Finlay, of Company C, First California, especially 
 distinguished himself. For such work as his, Englishmen get the 
 Victoria Cross. Finlay is detailed to Major Jones transportation 
 department as interpreter. His mother was a Mexican, and he 
 learned Spanish before he did English. When ammunition was sent 
 forward Finlay was in charge of the train, He had eight carromatta 
 loads of it, each carromatta with a native driver. He started when 
 the Spanish fire was hottest and went straight up through the open 
 fields. The bullets buzzed and whistled all about him. They ripped 
 through the tops of his carts, and one of them hit one of the drivers 
 in the leg. Finlay kept on as if he were going after corn on a pleasant 
 afternoon, until he reached the old insurgent trench. Then he halted 
 his train and went forward aloivj to find some one from the Tenth 
 
122 THE MEN WHO WON FAME IN BATTLE 
 
 Pennsylvania, to whom he could deliver the ammunition. That last 
 hundred yards into our trench was what Captain O Hara, who has 
 seen plenty of hot work, called a " very hot place/ It was swept 
 incessantly by Spanish bullets. But Finlay hunted around until he 
 found his man, went back and got his carromattas, and started for 
 ward. One of his ponies was shot just in the rear of our trench. 
 Finlay took it out of the cart, and with a native driver, hauled the 
 cart along to its place, delivered his cartridges, and started back. 
 
 On the way he found Captain Richter lying in the field where 
 he had fallen. He jumped out of his carromatta, put the Captain in, 
 and started on. Pretty soon he found another wounded man. That 
 one was picked up too, and back he went to camp. Then he turned 
 the wounded over to the surgeons and got orders to take ten carro 
 mattas to the front and bring back the wounded. Back over that 
 bullet-swept field he went again, as cool and unconcerned as if on a 
 drive through Golden Gate Park, did his work, brought in the 
 wounded, and turned in to get what sleep he could before the hard 
 day s work began soon after daylight. 
 
 These are but a few of the heroic deeds which have reached the 
 ears of the public mainly through the reports of Commanders of the 
 Army. The list of dead and wounded upon the battlefields tells 
 its own story of the heroism of those who accepted death as pay 
 ment for their loyalty to their country. That list is growing day by 
 day, so that the number of graves of the soldier dead is becoming so 
 large that their more fortunate companions have started a movement 
 for the erection of a monument to commemorate their valor. The 
 special burying grounds at Camp Dewey, and the portions of the 
 cemeteries in Manila which have been given over to the soldiers who 
 fell in battle are pathetic commentaries upon the courage with which 
 our men faced the Spanish and insurgent fire and disease. Even though 
 it is probable that the bodies of our dead will be removed to the 
 United States at some time, nevertheless, the movement for the erec 
 tion of a monument in Manila to commemorate their deeds is being 
 vigorously pushed.. It has been suggested that this monument be 
 erected on the Luneta, the great military parade ground. It is 
 hoped that the sum of $50,000 will eventually be raised. 
 
CHAPTER VI 
 
 A Past History Written in Blood 
 
 Ever Since their Discovery the Philippines have been the Scene of Terrible Conflicts. 
 They Began with Peace, but soon were Rife with War. Legaspi Fortified 
 Manila and made it a Stronghold. The Raid of Limahong, the Chinese 
 Pirate. Naval Battles with the Dutch for Half a Century. England Takes 
 Manila, but Returns It to Spain. 
 
 THE history of the Philippine Islands is a history of bloodshed. 
 Their discovery followed close upon the discovery of America 
 by Columbus. The Spanish government, in order to stimu 
 late the search for unknown lands, published a general concession to 
 all who wished to search for them. Many were the expeditions fitted 
 out, but few were successful. 
 
 The chief search was for rich spice islands which had hitherto 
 been undiscovered. A contract was made between King Charles of 
 Spain and Magalhaens, who is familiarly known as Magellan, by vir 
 tue of which the latter started out on a voyage of discovery. On the 
 loth of August, 1519, the expedition started in the direction of the 
 Canary Islands. Magellan had many adventures, including mutiny 
 of his own men, before he finally reached and passed through the 
 seaway, which now bears his name, Strait of Magellan, dividing the 
 island of Tierra del Fuego from the mainland of Patagonia. This 
 notable event took place on the 28th day of October, 1520. The 
 expedition, which had formerly consisted of five vessels, dwindled 
 down to three, and these three, to their great satisfaction, found 
 themselves on the Pacific Ocean, the first mariners to find that the 
 Atlantic and the Pacific were joined together. 
 
 THE DISCOVERY OF THE PHILIPPINES. 
 
 Cheerfully they kept on their voyage of discovery. On the i6th 
 of March, 1521, the Ladrone Islands were reached. Here they had 
 trouble with the natives, who stole one of the ships boats, so 
 
124 A PAST HISTORY WRITTEN IN BLOOD 
 
 Magellan named it " Robber Island," and a bloody battle was neces 
 sary before the boat could be regained. The fleet then continued its 
 course westward, and finally arrived at the mouth of the Buttean 
 River, on the island of Mindanao, and landed the first white man 
 upon the Philippines. 
 
 It was Easter week, and there, on the shore of this new land 
 which was to figure so largely in the history of their country, these 
 men of chance, who sailed in the hope of discovery without definite 
 knowledge as to what the day would bring forth, knelt down upon 
 the shore and celebrated the first mass of the land over which the 
 Church was thereafter to rule. 
 
 The natives were friendly, and did everything possible for 
 Magellan. He took formal possession of the territory in the name 
 of Charles the First, and then sought other islands nearby, to which 
 he was directed by the Chief of the tribes of Mindanao. So the 
 expedition arrived on the 7th of April at Cebu, where they were met 
 on the beach by 2,000 men in battle array. The reception, however, 
 was one of peace rather than that of war, and it was not long before 
 a compact had been made, in which the king of the island and all his 
 men swore fealty and obedience to the king of Spain. 
 
 The people of Cebu were at war with the tribes on the opposite 
 coast, so Magellan sided with his new allies, and went to war with 
 them. On the 25th of April, 1521, he was shot by an arrow and 
 killed. Three monuments, one opposite the city of Manila, another 
 on the spot where he was killed, and the third at the city of Cebu, 
 where he landed, commemorate the three great events in his life in 
 the Philippines. 
 
 A MASSACRE OF SPANIARDS AT A BANQUET. 
 
 Thus the Philippines came under the rule of Spain. The com 
 mand of the islands was assumed by Duarte de Barbosa, one of 
 Magellan s followers. Barbosa, with twenty-six of his companions, 
 was invited to a banquet by Hamabar, king of the island. At this 
 banquet the king killed all of his guests except one, and that one 
 was held for ransom from the other members of the expedition. 
 The exploring party, however, pulled up anchor and departed, leav 
 ing him to his fate. They had been reduced to one hundred persons, 
 
TO CONQUER AND CHRISTIANIZE THE ISLANDS 1^5 
 
 all told, and found that they were unable to manage all of the three 
 vessels, so one of them was burned at sea. 
 
 The expedition touched at Borneo, and finally reached the Island 
 of Tidor, which had already been discovered by the Portuguese. From 
 there the explorers returned home, where they were received with 
 great honor. 
 
 Several other expeditions were sent out by the king, but none 
 of them were successful, until 1543, when an expedition reached the 
 islands which they named Philippines, in honor of Philip, the son of 
 King Charles, heir apparent to the throne. 
 
 When, a few years later, King Charles abdicated in favor of his 
 son, that ruler determined to follow in his father s footsteps, and 
 annex territory by discovery, and inspired further by religious senti 
 ment, he ordered an expedition to go to the Philippine Islands to 
 conquer and christianize its people. 
 
 TO CONQUER AND CHRISTIANIZE THE ISLANDS. 
 
 Urdaneta, one of the brave and fearless captains of a former 
 expedition, and a man who had fought under King Charles, but had 
 taken the habit of an Augustine monk, was entrusted with the 
 spiritual care of the races to be subdued. He was accompanied by 
 five priests of his order. The whole expedition, consisting of four 
 ships and one armed frigate, carried four hundred soldiers and sailors 
 under the command of General Miguel Lopez de Lagaspi. This 
 general was of noble birth, and had a reputation for piety, justice 
 and loyalty to the Crown. 
 
 The expedition reached the Philippines in the latter part of 
 January, 1565. It was resolved to land at Cebu, which was a safe 
 port. The vessels anchored off the port of Dapatan on Mindanao 
 Island, to the great astonishment of the ruler there. He sent one of 
 his subjects to investigate the vessels, and the man returned with such 
 an extraordinary account of how the men ate stones (hard biscuits), 
 drank fire and blew smoke out of their mouths, that the prince 
 thought it wise to be friendly. 
 
 From him Legaspi learned that Cebu was a powerful kingdom, 
 and considered rich by the neighboring states, consequently he re 
 solved to take possession of it. He landed there on the 27th of 
 7 
 
126 A PAST HISTORY WRITTEN IN BLOOD 
 
 April, 1565, and, as the natives opposed his entrance, he took the 
 town by force and sacked it. It was no easy matter, however, to 
 continue there, for the surrounding tribes harrassed the newcomers 
 continuously, and finally a council was held to discuss the advisability 
 of leaving 1 . General L egaspi decided to remain, and so the first days 
 of contest against the natives began, and from that time to this the 
 island has been a constant scene of trouble. 
 
 The work of pacification not only of Cebu, but of the islands 
 nearby, was steadily pushed forward by Legaspi. He was a man of 
 strength, and little by little he won the confidence of the natives, their 
 dethroned king accepted baptism, and his daughter married a 
 Spaniard. 
 
 AN ATTACK BY PORTUGUESE. 
 
 Then, in the midst of Legaspi s success, the rival Portuguese 
 sent an expedition to dispute possession of the territory. They 
 were compelled to retire, but Legaspi learned through that experi 
 ence the necessity of being prepared for any emergency. He 
 accordingly built a fortress, marked out plots of land for Spanish 
 residences, and finally, in 1570, Cebu was declared a city, and 
 Legaspi was made Governor-General of all the lands that he could 
 conquer by royal grant from King Philip. 
 
 Legaspi sent his grandson, Captain Juan Salcedo,. to the island 
 of Luzon to bring it under Spanish dominion. I le went to the north 
 and was received with extraordinary friendliness by the chiefs of 
 Tondo and of Manila. They yielded up their territory, paid tribute 
 and became allies of the Spaniards, against their own people, and 
 apparently were not given anything at all in return. A treaty of 
 peace was signed and ratified by the exchange of drops of blood, as 
 was the custom in those lands. 
 
 Later on, one of these friendly young chiefs, whose name was 
 Soliman, ruler of Manila, repented of his bad bargain and led his 
 tribes in revolt. He set fire to his capital to prevent its falling into 
 the hands of the invaders, and was completely routed in battle by 
 the Spaniards. Salcedo pardoned him afterward, on his taking the 
 oath of allegiance to the King of Spain. 
 
 News of the trouble at Manila reached General Legaspi, and he 
 proceeded at once to that place. He took formal possession of the 
 
THE INVASION OF THE CHINESE PIRATE 127 
 
 whole territory, declared Manila to be the capital of the Philippine 
 Islands, and proclaimed the sovereignty of Spain over the whole 
 archipelago. He set the natives to work to fortify the place and to 
 build a large residence for himself and a church for the priests. He 
 also built one hundred and fifty smaller dwellings for the other Span 
 iards who were with him. The City Council of Manila was organized 
 on the 24th of June, 1571, and on the 2oth of August of the next 
 year, Legaspi died, leaving a name which will always live in Spanish 
 history. In the meantime Salcedo continued his task of subjugation, 
 and during the next few years most of the nearby tribes were made 
 subject to the domination of Spain. General Legaspi s formal suc 
 cessor, as Governor, was Guido de Lavezares, who was appointed in 
 accordance with sealed instructions from the Supreme Court of 
 Mexico. During Lavezares rule the Chinese pirate Limahong tried 
 to land upon the Philippines and conquer them. His acts against 
 traders caused him to be outlawed by the Chinese Emperor, and for 
 a long time he had been the terror of the Chinese coast. He hap 
 pened to fall in with a trading junk, which had just returned from 
 Manila, and in his usual way he took possession of her, and forced 
 the captain and his crew to take him back to the capital of Luzon. 
 Visions of wealth and pictures of how easily the islands might be 
 captured were before him. He got together a fleet of 62 armed junks, 
 having on board 2,000 sailors, 2,000 soldiers and 1,500 women and 
 sailed forth to capture and establish a new kingdom. 
 
 THE INVASION OF THE CHINESE PIRATE. 
 
 On the 29th of November, 1574 he arrived with his squadron 
 at the Bay of Manila, and sent a lieutenant at the head of 600 
 fighting men to demand the surrender of the place. But a strong gale, 
 probably one of the terrible typhoons, sprang up and destroyed sev 
 eral of his junks and about 200 of his men. He was forced by the 
 storm to Paranque, a village a few miles south of Manila. There he 
 landed and had no resistance until he came fairly to the gates of 
 the city. The marauders burned the residence of Martin de Goiti, 
 second in command to the Governor, and killed him, and the flames 
 and smoke which arose gave the first sign which the Governor had of 
 the approach of the enemy. 
 
T 28 A PAST HISTORY WRITTEN IN BLOOD 
 
 The Spaniards took refuge in the fort of Santiago, and just as 
 the Chinese were on the point of taking it by storm, some fresh troops 
 arrived, led by a Spanish sub-lieutenant. The Chinese, though they 
 were the vanguard of a large body of men, sounded a retreat. A 
 bloody hand-to-hand combat followed, and the Chinese fled to their 
 ships. In the meantime Limahong with reserve forces went off to 
 the capital by sea and attempted to take it. The city was set on fire 
 and a band of chosen men under Sioco, a lieutenant, advanced toward 
 the fort, and then a desperate contest began. Limahong supported 
 the attack with his vessels cannons. 
 
 After prolonged fighting the Spaniards finally gained the vic 
 tory, and the followers of the pirate fled, demoralized. Although 
 foiled in his attempt to take Manila, Limahong determined to set up 
 a capital for himself at the mouth of the Agono River, in the prov 
 ince of Pangasinan. He announced to the natives that he had just 
 conquered the Spaniards, and they received him cordially, so that he 
 founded his new capital there and fortified it. The Spaniards soon 
 sought him out, however, and, as luck would have it, a force of Chi 
 nese arrived, also seeking to discover the whereabouts of the pirate. 
 They united their forces, and Limahong, seeing that he was destined 
 to get himself into trouble, cleverly slipped away from his enemies 
 and fled. Thus ended the invasion of the Chinese pirate, and the 
 day of his flight is kept as a public holiday and gala day still. 
 
 The conquest of the natives was continued until the death of 
 Salcedo from the fever, on the iith of March, 1576. 
 
 THE BATTLES BY SEA WITH THE DUTCH. 
 
 Following upon some internal trouble as to the question of pres 
 tige of Governor, Supreme Court, and Church in the civil affairs of 
 the colony, came the conflict with the Dutch. The latter sent vessels 
 which hovered about the waters of Moluccas Islands to take any 
 trading vessels which they could run across. In roving around, these 
 Dutch vessels were able to take many prizes, and the Philippine 
 colony lost large sums by the seizure of vessels sent to them by the 
 Mexican colony, upon which it was almost entirely dependent for 
 troops and European articles. So the Spaniards in the Philippines 
 began fitting out vessels to protect themselves against this naval 
 
A MARKET MAN IN MANILA 
 
 This tyoe of enterprising huckster marches up and down the streets and alleys of Philippine cities crying his 
 
 vegetables (very much as the familiar " Old iron, rags, copper, bones and mass! " >.oiit?cior^ i averse 
 
 the street* ot American cities) stopping at the dnm wavs from \v ! i h he may be hailed. 
 
FAST FREIGHT LINE OF THE PHILIPPINES. 
 
 This is the cralt in which the country farmer conveys his product to market. The enormous size of the faithful water 
 Buffalo may be judged by comparing it with the master who sits upon his back. 
 
 COCK FIGHTING, THE CHIEF SPORT OF THE NATIVES. 
 
 Every native has his fighting cock, which lives and sleeps in his house with him, and is loved bv the owner as much as his own 
 children. The Filipino will bet his last dollar on the issue of a battle between his own and another s game-cock. 
 
THE BATTLES BY SEA WITH THE DUTCH 131 
 
 enemy. A fleet composed of several frigates, i ship, 6 galleys and 
 100 smaller vessels, all well armed, was brought together. The fight 
 ing men upon them numbered 100 Spaniards, 400 Arquebusiers, 1,000 
 Archers and Lancers, besides 100 Chinese to row the galleys. The 
 Chinese turned out to be a very important part of the expedition. 
 They formed a conspiracy to exterminate the Spaniards. They fell 
 upon them while they were asleep and massacred them. Eighteen 
 of the troops escaped by jumping into the sea. The Governor awoke, 
 and, hearing the noise, ran up on deck, where a Chinaman chopped 
 his head open with a cutlass, so that he died in a few hours. The 
 Chinese were afraid to venture below where the priests and armed 
 soldiers were, so they fastened up the hatches and escaped to Cochin 
 China, where the King and Mandarins seized the vessel and all that 
 she carried. This proved a crushing blow for the time, but other 
 expeditions against the Dutch were more successful, the most nota 
 ble one being that under Juan de Silva, the Governor. 
 
 He sent out a fleet, comprising 6 ships carrying 70 guns and 2 
 galleys, and a number of smaller vessels, having on board over 1,000 
 Spaniards. They met the Dutch, and after a fierce struggle lasting 
 6 hours, they won a splendid victory, recovering plundered merchan 
 dise to the value of $300,000. 
 
 In various years subsequently the Spanish of the Philippines and 
 these warlike Dutch vessels met on the seas and fought. The bat 
 tles continued for over 50 years, during which time the Dutch did not 
 attempt to take possession of the islands themselves or their govern 
 ment, but contented themselves with naval attacks, and with plunder 
 ing the vessels which brought supplies to the Spaniards. 
 
 For some years the inhabitants of the Philippines were not 
 annoyed by foes from without, but the dissensions which arose be 
 tween Church and State kept their history from being common 
 place. 
 
 In the middle of the seventeenth century an event that proved of 
 importance to the Spanish in the archipelago occurred. The Tartars 
 invaded China and overthrew the Min Dynasty, the Chinese Empe 
 ror being succeeded by the Tartar Emperor Kungchi, who had 
 brought nearly all the Chinese Empire under his control. There was 
 one Mandarin, however, who held out against him. His name was 
 
132 A PAST HISTORY WRITTEN IN BLOOD 
 
 Keuseng. He boldly asserted his independence, and flung defiance 
 in the teeth of the victorious Tartar. 
 
 He retired to the island of Kinmuen, where he fortified himself 
 as strongly as possible, and held out an offer of protection to any 
 Chinese who desired to help him in his fight against the Tartar rule. 
 So the Emperor issued an edict that no man should inhabit China within 
 4 leagues of the coast, except in those provinces which were known 
 to be loyal to him. This, of course, played havoc with the coast, and 
 all of the Chinese who had lived for generations by the sea and 
 earned a living by fishing, etc., were forced to flee to the interior. 
 
 But the valiant Keuseng was not at all daunted. He turned his 
 attention to the Formosa Island, which was nearby, and at that time 
 in control of the Dutch. He had little trouble in taking the island, 
 which at that time had about 600 European settlers and a garrison of 
 2,200. The artillery stores and merchandise there were valued at 
 about $$, 000,000. Keuseng had a force of 100,000, and after taking 
 the Dutch stronghold he announced himself as King of Formosa. 
 He sent Riccio, an Italian Dominican missionary, as an ambassador 
 to the Governor of the Philippines, ordering the latter to pay tribute 
 to, him or he would attack Manila. 
 
 The Spaniards, however, had no idea of yielding to the demands 
 of Keuseng. So they decided to concentrate all of their forces 
 in Manila, and in order to do that they demolished the forts on the 
 other islands and transferred their garrisons to the capital. That 
 brought the troops in Manila up to 100 cavalry and 8,000 infantry. 
 
 THE MASSACRE OF THE CHINESE OF MANILLA. 
 
 Everything was placed in readiness for the proposed attack, and 
 then the Spaniards began to suspect that the Chinese residents of 
 the city were getting up a rebellion, Therefore they did the best 
 they could to incite them to some overt act, so that they might have 
 a pretext for their massacre. 
 
 The Chinese population prepared for self-defence, and finally one 
 of them killed a Spaniard in the market place, The Government 
 took this for an excuse, and suddenly opened up a terrible fire on the 
 people. Many of the peaceful Chinese traders hung themselves 
 through fear ; others were drowned in their attempt to escape by 
 
ENGLAND S FLEE7 REACHES THE PHILIPPINES 133 
 
 sea ; while still others fled and were able to reach Formosa, where 
 they joined Keuseng s army. About eight or nine thousand, how 
 ever, remained in the city and held their ground. On these the 
 Spaniards turned their wrath, and for a time desperate fighting was 
 general. 
 
 It looked as though the Chinese were going to win the victory, 
 so the Governor sent ambassadors to offer terms. One of these 
 ambassadors came back to tell the Governor on what terms the Chi 
 nese would return, leaving the other behind, who in his absence was 
 beheaded. This started a general extermination of the Chinese, and 
 the Spaniards swore they would kill every Chinaman on the island. 
 But as all the tradesmen and mechanics were of that race, the Span 
 iards found that they were inconveniencing themselves, so finally they 
 desisted in their general slaughter and pardoned all who laid down 
 their arms. 
 
 While this was going on in the Philippines, Keuseng was pre 
 paring himself to sweep down on Manila and capture it. He died, 
 however, before he could carry out his campaign. His successor was 
 more peacefully inclined, and he entered into a treaty with the Gov 
 ernor of Manila by which they renewed their old commercial rela 
 tions. Not long after, a rebellion arose among the former followers 
 of Keuseng, which resulted in the Tartar party obtaining possession 
 of the island and annexing it to China. 
 
 It was then that Riccio, the ambassador to the dead King, was 
 called upon to explain the result of his mission to the Philippines, 
 and he so presented things that the Chinese governmeat was satis 
 fied, and did not take up the cause of their subjects, otherwise the 
 history of the Philippines might have been radically different. 
 
 ENGLAND S FLEET REACHES THE PHILIPPINES. 
 
 On the ist of May, 1762, Spain agreed to unite her forces with 
 those of France against England, and war was declared shortly after. 
 England pushed her conquest of island territory with great strength 
 and rapidity, and among other things sent a fleet to the Philippine 
 Islands with orders to capture Manila. 
 
 The fleet arrived there on the. 324 pf September, and was made 
 
 up of thirteen ships in Gomman4 of Captain-Admiral Cornish, They 
 
134 A PAST HISTORY WRITTEN IN BLOOD 
 
 demanded the surrender of the city, which was refused, whereupon 
 Brigadier-General Draper disembarked his troops and a bombardment 
 and attack was begun. The whole force in Manila was about 600 
 men and eighty pieces of artillery, while the British forces consisted 
 of 1,500 men, 3,000 seamen, 800 Sepoy fusileers and 1,400 Sepoy 
 prisoners, a total of 6,700. 
 
 The office of Governor-General was being filled at the time by 
 Archbishop Manuel Antonio Rojo, who was temporarily acting in that 
 capacity. He was willing to yield the city, but a war party under the 
 leadership of a magistrate of the Supreme Court named Salazar 
 swept aside his authority and declined to surrender. Salazar, how 
 ever, instead of bravely leading his men to battle, fled from the city, 
 leaving the war party to struggle along as best it could. 
 
 Two rich vessels which were about entering the port of Manila from 
 Mexico, laden with goods valued at $2,500,000, were captured by the 
 British. The fight began and was kept up in a lively way by artillery 
 for some time. The Archbishop s nephew was taken prisoner, and an 
 officer was sent by the British General with a small force to return 
 the young man to his uncle. Some of the natives fell upon the party 
 and murdered them all. The officer s head was cut off and the sav 
 age natives refused to give it up. Consequently General Draper, 
 inflamed by this act, redoubled his efforts to prosecute a merciless 
 campaign against Manila. 
 
 BRITISH TAKE MANILA. 
 
 After a fierce struggle, in which defeat and victory alternately 
 perched upon the banners of the British, General Draper and his 
 troops entered the city on the 5th of October, demolished the forts 
 and overturned the artillery. 
 
 Terms of capitulation were offered and accepted. The fort was 
 delivered up to the British, and the British flag floated above the 
 walls. The natives, who had been imported by General Draper, were 
 plundering the city, so he had them all driven out, as it proved, so 
 that his own soldiers might pillage the place. He placed a guard at 
 the doors of the nunneries and convents to protect the inmates, and 
 then gave up the whole place to the victorious troops to plunder for 
 three hours, 
 
GENERAL DRAPER ADOPTS A NEW POLICY 135 
 
 It was an awful scene, and the atrocities and bloodshed and mur 
 der which took place then will forever blot the name of Draper in 
 history. The following day a similar scene was allowed, and it was 
 only when the Archbishop besought the General to have compassion 
 on the city that that officer restored order. 
 
 Draper then demanded the surrender of Cavite, which was 
 agreed to by the Archbishop and the magistrates, but the officer in 
 command of that place refused to comply. Later, however, he left 
 the garrison, and the natives plundered it. 
 
 When the city capitulated it was agreed that an indemnity of 
 $4,000,000 should be paid to the British, one-half in money and valu 
 ables, the other half in treasury bills on Madrid. In order to raise 
 this amount heavy contributions were levied upon the inhabitants, 
 and, although the Archbishop gave up his rings and the cross which 
 he wore around his neck, and the Church gave up its silver plate and 
 ornaments, the amount raised only reached $546,000. The British 
 proposed to accept $1,000,000 in cash, and take the rest from the 
 cargo of an expected vessel, the Philipino, if she had not been seized 
 previous to the day of capitulation. Then every effort was made to 
 raise this million, but it proved unsuccessful. The day before the 
 city surrendered, a messenger had been sent away with $i 1 1,000 with 
 orders to hide it. An effort was made to get the money back, but it 
 had been placed in the hands of Franciscan friars, who refused to 
 give it up, and removed it from place to place. The British insisted 
 upon their claim, and sent troops to intercept the landing of the 
 cargo of the expected Philipino. These troops overran the country, 
 but were unable to secure the treasure. 
 
 GENERAL DRAPER ADOPTS A NEW POLICY. 
 
 Draper adopted a policy of kindness to secure himself in power. 
 He made a tool of the Archbishop, and issued a friendly proclamation 
 to the natives, saying that the King of England would not exact tribute 
 from them as the Spaniards had done. The Archbishop, at his instance, 
 convened a council of native headmen and of representative families, 
 and proposed the cession of all the islands to the King of England. 
 
 There was one man, however, Simon De Anda, who determined 
 to take up arms rather than yield to the British yoke. He declared 
 
136 A PAST HISTORY WRITTEN IN BLOOD 
 
 himself Governor-General of the island, and a number of his coun 
 trymen upheld him, together with the Austin friars, who joined the 
 rebel party, and were a power in the land. A number of expeditions 
 were sent against Anda, but he managed to avoid any open contact 
 with them. It was decided to send an expedition out to Bulacan to 
 capture it. The convent there was fortified with three small can 
 nons, and when the British vanguard came up it opened fire and 
 caused great havoc. When the British returned the fire, the natives 
 fled panic-stricken, and when an assault was made upon the convent 
 there was a terrible fight and great slaughter, and finally the invad 
 ing troops proved victorious and took the place. 
 
 Occasionally the Lieutenant-General of Anda, whose name was 
 Bustos, appeared and manoeuvred about the convent, but did not dare 
 to make an attack. Finally, however, the British made a sally upon 
 him, and routed him completely. 
 
 A conspiracy was then organized among the Chinese in the 
 province of Pampanga against Anda, and the Chinese entrenched 
 themselves for slaughter. The clash finally came between the two, 
 with the result that Anda won the victory, and large numbers of the 
 Chinese were slain. Ancla issued a general decree declaring all the 
 Chinese to be traitors to the Spanish flag, and ordered them to be 
 hanged wherever they were found. In consequence of this order 
 thousands were executed who had nothing at all to do with the war. 
 
 A PRICE PLACED ON ANDA*S HEAD. 
 
 The British, harassed by Anda s troops without, were compelled 
 to take precautions against an uprising of the natives within the walls 
 of the city. Anda in the meantime, having obtained the treasure 
 from the long-expected Philipinovfas able to organize quite a respect 
 able army. He harassed the British right and left, and a price was 
 placed upon his head by the British commander. In the meantime 
 Anda had been officially acknowledged by the King of Spain, and 
 therefore was given legal right to the position that he had usurped, 
 so that the British commander had to communicate with him officially 
 whenever occasion demanded. 
 
 The friars were busy inoculating the ignorant natives with the 
 idea that the British were infidels, and so persuaded the people that 
 
TREATY OF PEACE 137 
 
 this was a holy war. They abandoned their mission of peace for 
 that of the sword, and once thereafter the British met with their 
 reverse in battle, having; been caught in ambush. 
 
 o o 
 
 TREATY OF PEACE. 
 
 While all this was going on news came from Europe that the 
 preliminaries of peace were going on, under the terms of which 
 Manila was to be evacuated by the British and given back to Spain. 
 Anda claimed that he was the proper person to assume control of 
 things, and one of his friends, named Villa Corta, sought the same 
 honor. The Archbishop who had surrendered the city died, and 
 Anda was acknowledged by the British as Governor. The other 
 rival factions, however, were not so easily set aside, and fierce quar 
 rels ensued, which were happily ended by the arrival of a newly 
 appointed Attorney-General from Spain, Don Francisco de la Torre. 
 
 After the signing of the treaty of peace in Paris the British 
 evacuated the city, and the Spanish flag was once more hoisted over 
 the fort of Santiago, and the day was made a day of general 
 rejoicing. 
 
* 3 
 
 IS. 
 
 4; f J 
 5 O 
 
 10 go- 
 
 < 2 3 
 
 111! 
 
 O a,~TJ 
 
 - -f. a 
 
 li. - co 
 
 O 3x 
 Q 8l 
 
 s 
 
 *> bo 
 
 !fl 
 
 . i 
 
 O ^ 
 
CHAPTER VII 
 Filipinos Struggles for Freedom. 
 
 Periodically the Natives Turned under the Cruel Spanish Heel and Rose up in their 
 Might. Revolts against the Tyranny of the Church. How a Flight of Sky 
 rockets Tore Victory from the Hands of the Natives. The Last Fight for 
 Freedom. The Greatest of Insurgent Martyrs, Doctor Rizal. His Dramatic 
 Execution a Few Years Ago. Other Great Fighters for Freedom. 
 
 THE struggles for liberty of the natives form a most romantic 
 chapter in the history of the Philippines. Conquered by a 
 foreign foe whose civilization and power were such as to ena 
 ble them to hold these barbarians in check, time and again they rose 
 up in their might to regain the liberty they had lost. Patriots, men 
 of finer mould than most of the natives, men who had a little learning 
 which enabled them to hold a place of influence among their own 
 people, inspired now and then ineffectual attempts to break the 
 shackles of subjection. 
 
 Philippine history is blotted with the blood of martyrs and 
 patriots who have sacrificed their lives in the feeble hope that their 
 country might be free. These uprisings began from the very first, 
 for although in the time of Legaspi the great chiefs of Manila and 
 Tondo submitted to the Spanish yoke, this did not imply a total 
 surrender of all of the islands of the archipelago at least it did not 
 render them passive to the rule of the foreigners. Each separate 
 island, and each separate chief had to be brought into subjection, and 
 this kept the European forces busy from the moment they entered 
 into possession of the Philippines, up to the present day. 
 
 THE FIRST GREAT UPRISING. 
 
 In 1622, a great uprising and struggle for freedom took place on 
 Bojol Island. This was largely a struggle against the Church. The 
 Jesuit missionaries had taxed the islanders beyond their power to 
 pay, and had insisted upon their accepting forms of worship which 
 
 141 
 
142 FILIPINOS STRUGGLES FOR FREEDOM 
 
 they did not understand, and in which they did not believe. Their 
 own Pagan form of worship was more to their liking, and so one day 
 they rebelled and proclaimed their intention of regaining their liberty 
 of government, and especially of Church. 
 
 Then followed wild times of plunder, of fire and of battle. 
 Towns and churches became heaps of smouldering ashes, the images 
 within the sanctuary were defiled, destroyed and the remnants scat 
 tered ; but the rebels could not win. The Governor of Cebu gathered 
 a large number of troops, who with superior arms and superior knowl 
 edge of warfare, drove the insurgents like sheep into the interior of 
 the island, where they took refuge and fought in the manner of insur 
 gents of later years. 
 
 BRUTALITY OF A PRIEST BRINGS REBELLION. 
 
 For over a century their attacks upon the Government were 
 spasmodic and disorganized, but in 1744 there was a more serious 
 rising of the natives, brought on by the high-handed acts of a Jesuit 
 priest named Morales. He was in the habit of arresting natives who 
 did not attend mass, and of punishing them as he saw fit. He also 
 exercised his functions as a priest as it pleased him, and once he left 
 the body of one of the natives to decompose, refusing to allow it to 
 be buried. In doing this he made an enemy of the dead man s 
 brother named Dagohoy, who organized a party for revenge. He 
 swore that he would pay the priest back in his own coin or lose his 
 life in the attempt, and what he swore to he did, for not long after 
 ward Morales, the priest, was captured and executed, and for four 
 days his body was allowed to rot in the tropical sun. 
 
 Not satisfied with that, Dagohoy pushed forward his fight into 
 an organized struggle for freedom. Great numbers of the natives 
 flocked to his standard, and for thirty-five years this army of insur 
 gents harassed the government troops constantly, so that it was 
 necessary to always be on the alert against their incursions. The 
 expulsion of the Jesuits from the colony alone ended the uprisings, 
 and after that Dagohoy and his army submitted to the Spaniards, 
 and were pardoned. 
 
 Simultaneously with the uprising of the natives on Bojol Island 
 in 1622, there was an insurrection in Leyte, and the Governor of 
 
KILLED THE MOTHER OF THE REBEL LEADER 143 
 
 Cebu was forced to go to the assistance of the governor of that 
 island. The united armies forced the insurgent leader to the wall ; 
 he was captured and executed, and his head was placed at the top of 
 a high pole in the market place, as a warning to those who aspired to 
 break away from the Spanish rule. Some of the prisoners were gar- 
 roted, others were publicly executed with arrows, and still another 
 was horribly tortured by being burned to death. 
 
 Seven years later the province of Surigao in the East of Min 
 danao Island turned against their conquerors. They burned churches, 
 killed priests and laid waste the territory for the space of three years 
 before they could be suppressed. Twenty years later, in 1649, an 
 attempt was made by the Spanish to secure troops for the arsenal at 
 Cavite, from the natives of Samar Island. This did not seem to 
 please the tribes there, so they rebelled, sacked and burned the 
 churches along the coast, and gradually increased in number and 
 power, until it was found necessary to send not only large forces of 
 troops, but armed vessels after them. 
 
 KILLED THE MOTHER OF THE REBEL LEADER. 
 
 The leader of the insurrection, a native headman named 
 Sumoroy, fled to the hills to escape capture. Not being able to lay 
 their hands upon him, the Spaniards captured his aged mother and 
 literally tore her to pieces in their fiendish desire to revenge them 
 selves upon the insurgent chief. It sounds like the stories made so 
 familiar in later years in Cuba, where thousands of women and chil 
 dren were sacrificed to awful atrocities, because members of their 
 families had dared to take up arms against the rule of Spain. But 
 Sumoroy reached his limit at last. He was able to withstand or 
 evade the attacks of his enemies, but like all such leaders he could 
 not avoid the treachery of his own people. He was betrayed and 
 captured, and in the manner of the Spanish at that time, was 
 beheaded, and his head placed upon a pole as a horrible example. 
 
 This, too, was the fate of another rebel chieftain ten years later, 
 who surrendered on promise of pardon, only to find himself a martyr. 
 These riots of 1649, as ^ ie insurgents uprisings were then termed by 
 the Spanish, extended to other provinces. In Albay, in Masbate 
 Island, in Zamboanga, in Cebu, in Caraga and Butuan, many Euro- 
 
144 FILIPINOS STRUGGLES FOR FREEDOM 
 
 peans fell victims of the fury of the insurgents. In the latter place 
 the Spanish method of dealing" with the rebels was well illustrated. 
 
 The captain there offered pardon to all who would yield to the 
 rule of Spain, and the insurgent army, poor, half-starved and home 
 less, as most of such armies must naturally be, came in large num 
 bers to accept the proffered friendship and pardon of the authorities. 
 The result is an old story in these days, when the Spanish idea of 
 honor is so well understood. Most of those who surrendered were 
 killed ; others were made slaves, and still others were sent to the 
 galleys for life. 
 
 In 1660 one of the most notable of all the native uprisings took 
 place. It seems that the people had been very much harassed by 
 the Spanish authorities, and placed in a condition which was little 
 better than slavery, though not actually such in name. They were 
 forced to do work without recompense, and finally they rebelled in 
 Pampanga. The revolt spread all through the country, and a cer 
 tain Andres Malong declared himself King. Word was sent right 
 and left to the adjacent countries that the natives must revolt against 
 the Spanish, or incur the new King s displeasure. Consequently 
 three good-sized armies were formed one of 6,000, another of 
 3,000, and another, commande d by King Malong himself, of 2,000 
 followers. As they moved on, they gradually increased in strength 
 and equipment, until finally they reached a total of 40,000 men. 
 But again history repeated itself, and a much smaller force of Span 
 iards, better trained and better armed, routed them completely, and 
 the rebel leaders eventually suffered the same penalty of patriotism- 
 death. And so the roll of insurgent uprisings goes on from genera 
 tion to generation, each decade furnishing its new leaders and new 
 struggles for freedom, all ending in the same way, in annihilation 
 and death. 
 
 FIREWORKS MISTAKEN FOR SIGNAL. 
 
 Coming down to the end of the present century, we find daring 
 efforts still going on to win back freedom to the natives. The near 
 est approach to success probably the insurgents ever had was in 1872. 
 Cavite, the stronghold guarding the city of Manila, was the centre of 
 the plot. Some of the native soldiers in the arsenal there were in 
 the conspiracy, and it was arranged that when everything was ready 
 
THE EXECUTION OF DR. RIZAL I45 
 
 for them to strike the decisive blow on which they had staked their 
 all, a flight of rockets at night should announce the fact to all of the 
 tribes. But fate played a strong hand against the fighting people. 
 Nearby the arsenal of Cavite a throng of people gathered on that 
 day to celebrate one of the many feasts which mark the life of the 
 people. At this feast, as a sort of parting entertainment, fireworks 
 were sent off. The waiting tribes in and near Cavite, mistook these 
 fireworks for a signal that the time was ready to strike, and so they 
 unwittingly began the revolt without the support of their comrades 
 across the bay. They succeeded in taking possession of the arsenal, 
 and made an attack upon many of the influential Spaniards in the 
 city ; but before they could get any further, and before the other 
 troops could reach them, the government army had been called out 
 and soon retook the arsenal and made the struggling insurgents pri 
 soners. 
 
 This ended the best organized and the most successful struggle 
 ever made by the Filipinos, up to the time of the latest struggle, 
 begun in 1896. It was due, as indeed was all of the other uprisings, 
 largely to the oppressions of the friars, and to the taxes which were 
 laid upon the people by the Spanish. 
 
 THE EXECUTION OF DR. RIZAL. 
 
 This final struggle for liberty left a pathetic record of martyr 
 dom, heroism and sacrifice. One of the central figures of its mar 
 tyrs was Dr. Jose Rizal 
 
 Dr. Rizal was perhaps the greatest man that the native uprisings 
 have ever known. Had he lived, he would to-day be the man of 
 power among the insurgents ; and had he lived, it is quite probable 
 that the natives would never have fought against the United States 
 and taken up arms against the people who offered them a new lease 
 of life, under new and free institutions, and, at the same time, the 
 protection of the greatest nation in the world. 
 
 The story of Dr. Rizal is, in the main, the story of every Fili 
 pino patriot, and yet there is an added pathos in his romance, because 
 here was a man educated far above the rank and file of any nation ; 
 a poet, whose works will live forever in Philippine literature ; a man 
 of personal force and magnetism; an orator, an essayist, a historian 
 
146 FILIPINOS STRUGGLES FOR FREEDOM 
 
 of no ordinary ability; a man, whose crime was patriotism, whose 
 only offence was the outpouring of a pent-up soul against the cruel 
 wrongs and the barbaric indignities which were inflicted, not espe 
 cially upon himself, but upon his countrymen, who were dearer to 
 him than self. 
 
 This talented man, who is known among the Filipinos as " the 
 Talego Martyr," belonged to the tribe of that name. While still 
 young, he showed extraordinary gifts, and it was decided to send him 
 to Europe to receive his education. He went to Spain and to 
 France, and for some years studied hard and trained himself up, not 
 only as a physician, but for the position which he afterwards took as 
 the leader of his people and the foremost literary man that his island 
 has given to the world. 
 
 Burning beneath the treatment which his people received, he 
 turned his keen pen to writing essays against Spanish oppression. 
 He did not spare either priests, or officials, and for this he was exiled 
 to the island of Dapitan. But even in exile he did not cease his 
 writings in behalf of his countrymen. While there he met a woman 
 of Irish parentage, a Miss Taufer, with whom he fell desperately in 
 love. She, in turn, reciprocated the affection of this brilliant young 
 Filipino, and they were engaged to be married. Before the cere 
 mony took place, however, Dr. Rizal was re-arrested and brought 
 back to Manila. From then on he was a prisoner, never knowing 
 liberty again. He was sent to Madrid and then brought back to 
 Manila, where he was sentenced to death, He was charged with 
 conspiracy against the government of Spain. 
 
 When it was announced that this brave young patriot was to 
 give up his life, Miss Taufer went to the Spanish officials and begged 
 that she might be allowed to wed Dr. Rizal, even though he had but 
 a few days to live. The officials granted her request, perhaps think 
 ing that it would be little comfort to the man, and might add to the 
 terrors of death. 
 
 What a tragic scene was there, as the two young lovers stood 
 together and were wedded in the little cell, the barred windows of 
 which barely admitted light enough to show the features of the priest 
 who performed the ceremony ! The solemn words of the rites, which 
 seemed more like those of a funeral than of a wedding, almost stuck 
 
THE EXECUTION OF DR. RIZAL 
 
 147 
 
 in the throat of the priest as he proceeded. Together the bride and 
 groom waited for the summons to come. It came all too soon. Dr. 
 Rizal was led away to the execution, which was to take place on the 
 Luneta, the chief promenade of the city. Like all of the execu 
 tions, it was a great public event almost a festival. Thousands of 
 people gathered around to see this frail young man, whose courage 
 was great and whose conviction and patriotism were strong, stand 
 up before his executioners and give his life, a martyr to his cause 
 and to his people. 
 
 Rizal displayed great fortitude to the end. He dressed with 
 care, and walked composedly between two priests to the place where 
 he was to be shot. Upon his arrival in the centre of the plaza, he 
 recognized several of his friends in the vast crowd of people and 
 spoke to them cheerfully. Eight native soldiers made up the firing 
 party. Rizal looked at them carefully, and seemed to take a fare 
 well gaze at the sky and the familiar scenes around him, before he 
 knelt down, about ten feet from the muzzles of the rifles. He kissed 
 the crucifix, and, with his eyes fixed upon the rippling, sunlit waters 
 of the bay, he received the volley of eight bullets in his back, 
 dying instantly. 
 
 Another bullet was put into his body, to make sure that life was 
 extinct, and then the band struck up a lively air, and the crowd, some 
 with curiosity, others with veneration and sadness, passed by the 
 prostrate figure, and the romance of the life of Jose Rizal was 
 ended. 
 
 His widow, fired with revenge, set off on foot to the rebel camp 
 at Imus, where she was hailed as a modern Joan of Arc. She 
 assumed command of a company of insurgents and took the field, 
 winning more than one splendid victory. Later she determined that 
 she could be of more assistance to the cause by personally appealing 
 for financial aid among sympathizers. She came to this country, and 
 appeared in leading circles at Philadelphia, New York, Chicago and 
 other places. 
 
 The farewell thoughts of this hero and martyr, Dr. Rizal, are 
 interesting. The night before his execution he wrote them down in 
 a poem on Spain, which is still preserved in the insurgent archives. 
 The translation is as follows : 
 
148 FILIPINOS STRUGGLES FOR FREEDOM 
 
 Farewell, adored fatherland ! Our Eden lost, farewell ! 
 Farewell, O sun-lov d region, pearl of the Eastern sea ! 
 Gladly I die for thy dear sake ; yea, thou knowest well 
 Were my sad life more radiant far than mortal tongue could tell 
 Yet would I give it gladly, joyously for thee. 
 
 On blood-stained fields of battle, fast locked in madd ning strife, 
 Thy sons have dying blest thee, untouched by doubt or fear. 
 No matter wreaths of laurel ; no matter where our life 
 Ebbs out, on scaffold, or in combat, or under torturer s knife, 
 We welcome Death, if for our hearths, or for our country dear. 
 
 I die while dawn s rich Iris-hues are staining yet the sky, 
 Heralds of the freer day still hidden from our view 
 Behind the night s dark mantle. And should the morning nigh 
 Need crimson, shed my heart s blood quickly, freely, let it dye 
 The new-born light with th glory of its ensanguined hue. 
 
 My dreams when yet were ling ring my childhood s careless years, 
 My dreams, my hopes, when vigor pulsed in my youthful heart, 
 Were that one day, gem of the East, thine eyes, undimmed with tears, 
 Might darkly glow, that I might see unwrinkled, free from fears 
 Thy lofty brow wherefrom for aye all blushes should depart. 
 
 Hail unto thee, dreams of my life ! My dying soul doth cry 
 All hail to thee ! And ye I hail, my aspirations deep 
 And ardent ! Oh, how sweet it is to fall beneath thy sky, 
 To die that thou mayst live, and, for thy welfare high, 
 In thine enchanted bosom eternally to sleep! 
 
 If on my grave, midst the thick grass, thou shouldst see spring one day 
 
 A simple, humble flow ret, Life victor over Death, 
 
 Sweet symbol of my loving soul, ah, kiss the dew away. 
 
 Approach to it thy gentle lips, that in my tomb I may 
 
 Feel on my brow thy tender sigh, the soft warmth of thy breath . 
 
 Let o er my grave the placid moon shed its soft tranquil light : 
 Let cool dawn s fleeting splendor shine on my resting place ; 
 Let the deep murmur of the wind caress it in the night ; 
 And if above my lonely cross it stay its restless flight, 
 Twill breathe a prayer of peace and chant a canticle of grace. 
 
THE FAREWELL THOUGHTS OF DR. RIZAL 149 
 
 Oh, let the rain rise pure to Heav n beneath the sun s hot rays 
 And carry to the throne of God my loving, lasting request. 
 Let friendly soul s weep for my end, and in the after days, 
 On evenings clear, when o er my tomb some gentle being prays, 
 Pray also thou, O Fatherland, for my eternal rest. 
 
 Pray for all those who died alone, betrayed, in wretchedness, 
 For those who suffered for thy sake torments and misery, 
 For our poor, loving mothers hearts, who weep in bitternes, 
 For widows, tortured captives and orphans in distress, 
 And pray for thy dear self that thou may st finally be free. 
 
 And when dark night enshrouds in gloom the silent cemetery, 
 When but the lonely dead are left watching by the sea, 
 Disturb not their repose, nor dispel the mystery, 
 Perchance then shalt thou hear cither or psaltery 
 Well tuned, tis I, my country dear, tis I singing to thee. 
 
 And when the memory of my grave has faded from the mind, 
 When my tomb bears no cross nor stone to mark where I lie dead, 
 Plough o er the spot, turn up the earth, and scatter to the wind 
 My ashes ere they turn to naught ; let them go unconfined 
 To form thy rolling meadows and flower-covered glade. 
 
 No matter, then, if all forget; still, still shall I be near; 
 Still shall I breathe thy od rous air, still wander in thy ways, 
 And dwell in space, a thrilling note loud-sounding in thine ear ; 
 I shall be perfume, light and shade, sound, color, refrain clear, 
 Telling forever of my faith and singing thy dear praise. 
 
 Farewell, adored country ! I leave my all with thee, 
 Beloved Filipinos, whose soil my feet have trod, 
 I leave with thee my life s loves deep. I go where all are free ; 
 I go where are no tortures, where th oppressor s power shall be 
 Destroyed, where faith kills not, where He who reigns is God. 
 
 Farewell, my parents, brothers, all friends of my infancy, 
 Dear fragments of my heart, once to my bosom pressed 
 Round our lost hearth. Give thanks to God in glad tranquillity 
 That after day s long, weary hours I sleep eternally; 
 Farewell lov d beings, stranger sweet ; to die is but to rest. 
 
 JOSE RIZAL. 
 
1 5 o FILIPINOS STRUGGLES FOR FREEDOM 
 
 Another insurgent leader, who was executed in Manila for the 
 part he took in this same uprising, was Francesco Venezuela. He 
 was a mestizo (half-caste) by birth, but educated himself far beyond 
 the others of his class. He became one of the great factors in the 
 struggle, and in his house the great uprising was planned. He made 
 one fatal error, however. He wrote to the Premier of Japan, know 
 ing that that nation had long coveted the Philippines, and asked for 
 aid against the Spanish, at the same time disclosing the plans of 
 organization, and promising rich spoils in the division of territory. 
 This communication somehow or other found its way back to the 
 Spanish Governor, and it is said that the aid of the Church was 
 sought, and that Venezuela s wife was so influenced by the priests at 
 confessional that she finally told the secrets of the insurgents and 
 betrayed her own husband. 
 
 Venezuela was taken prisoner with three others, who were with 
 him in his home. They were tried, condemned, and executed. Just 
 before the fatal volley was fired, the secretary of one of the officers 
 of Spain approached Venezuela, and, holding a paper before his eyes 
 so that he might read it, said : " Sign this and your life shall be 
 spared, with safe conduct to any foreign country you may wish." The 
 paper was a promise to disclose the names of the leaders who were 
 associated with him in the uprising, their source of supplies and 
 their plans. Venezuela drew himself up and said, " Was it for this 
 that you have postponed your holiday ? You need not have done so ; 
 you may kill me now, for you will have many more to deal with. This 
 is but just the beginning," and so he and his three silent comrades, to 
 each of whom this offer of life was made, turned to death like brave 
 men. 
 
 The first volley did not kill Venezuela, and so volley after volley 
 was ordered, until all of the bodies were filled with bullets. Then, as 
 if to clinch the horrors of the whole spectacle, one of the soldiers ad 
 vanced, and placing the muzzle of his gun against Venezuela s head, 
 literally blew his brains over the ground. 
 
 HORRIBLE ATROCITIES OF THE SPANISH. 
 
 The atrocities of the Spanish during this last terrible struggle 
 for independence are too horrible to contemplate. The instruments 
 
THE TERRIBLE " BLACK HOLE" OF MANILA 151 
 
 of torture used during the Spanish Inquisition three centuries ago, 
 which had been kept in the monasteries of Manila, were brought out 
 and used to extort confession from insurgent prisoners. More than 
 3,000 suspects were maltreated or hurled into the famous " Black 
 Hole" of Manila. 
 
 An eyewitness described the treatment of prisoners, as follows : 
 " The prisoner is taken before the military court, bound with cords 
 that cut into the flesh, and subjected to examination. If his answers 
 are not satisfactory and they ordinarily are not, unless guilt is con 
 fessed he is taken to the torture chamber. After being stripped, he 
 is first subjected to whipping with rattans, two hundred blows or more 
 if the victim is especially obstinate. If this is not successful, thumb 
 screws are brought into play, and the poor wretch, already half dead 
 from the beating, is obliged to undergo the exquisite pain of these 
 little instruments. These torturing machines are the same as actually 
 used in the days of the Inquisition. This programme of torture is 
 well known to be a fact ; the natives add more tortures to it. They 
 say prisoners are placed against a board wall and small nails are 
 driven through each finger, holding the arms out as in a crucifixion, 
 until the suffering man cries out a " confession." In other cases the 
 suspects are so bound as to be unable to move from one position. 
 Water is so arranged above them that drop after drop falls on their 
 heads, causing great torture." 
 
 THE TERRIBLE " BLACK HOLE " OF MANILA. 
 
 Another of the leaders of the insurrection tells of the awful 
 " Black Hole" of Manila, which was a small dungeon under the bas 
 tions of San Sebastian Intra Muros. The room was forty feet square, 
 sloping steeply towards the sea. At the time he was in it there were 
 one hundred and sixty-nine prisoners in that little place, huddled 
 together like rats. In the roof was a grated hole three feet square; 
 on the floor, on the lowest side next to the sea, there was another 
 hole. These were the only means of ventilation. The prisoners 
 nearest the grating could barely breathe, and the others panted like 
 dogs and tore their clothes in the effort to keep from falling dead 
 under the smothering heat. Every once in a while the grating in 
 the ceiling above would be opened and a man, more dead than alive, 
 
IS 2 FILIPINOS STRUGGLES FOR FREEDOM 
 
 would be hurled in upon the living mass below. The Spaniards 
 seemed to enjoy watching these human rats sway and crush each 
 other beneath the grating, and they came, now and then, to watch 
 them, laughing at their death struggles. 
 
 During the day one of the men was taken out, only to be thrust 
 back sometime afterward with his eyes gouged out and his feet 
 gashed and burned with fire. His brojther, who was also a prisoner 
 there, looked at him in frenzy, and the next time the grating was 
 opened he sprang up on the backs of the other prisoners and grabbed 
 the neck of a Spanish lieutenant who was peering in. Several Span 
 ish soldiers came running to the help of their comrade. They used 
 their swords freely, but the man hung to the officer like a demon, and 
 then finally they thrust their swords deep into the prisoner s chest 
 and, as he fell back on his horror-stricken fellows below, the lieutenant 
 whom he had seized, groaned and expired. He had been choked to 
 death. As the day wore on, the men became crazed and trampled on 
 each other in their effort to get air. When night fell, the tide of the 
 ocean rose inch by inch until it reached the orating down at the end 
 
 J o o 
 
 of the room. The sea-water began coming in, and those who had 
 not been suffocated now faced the terrors of drowning. It was a 
 night of awful torture. In the morning it was found that fifty-four 
 men had been smothered to death or drowned ; twenty others were 
 so far gone that they could not recover. The prisoner who tells this 
 story of horror feigned death and was taken out with the others, and 
 managed eventually to make his escape. 
 
 But still the revolution went on, under the leadership of Emilio 
 Aguinaldo. The method of fighting which the insurgents adopted 
 was such that it was possible for the contest to be continued indefi 
 nitely and at great cost to the Spaniards. The insurgents had no 
 money and needed little. They had sympathizers all over the coun 
 try and lived from hand to mouth, half starved, half clothed and 
 almost without ammunition, but in their guerilla warfare they were able 
 to keep the Spaniards constantly harassed. Several important bat 
 tles were fought, and many of the insurgents met the fate of Dr. 
 Rizal through execution. Finally, the Governor-General of the 
 islands decided that it was cheaper to buy out the insurgents than 
 to fight against them, and so Aguinaldo and his fellow leaders of the 
 
OTHER INSURGENT LEADERS I 5 3 
 
 insurrection sold out their countrymen for $800,000, $400,000 of 
 which was deposited in a bank in Hong Kong in cash, and the 
 remainder was to be given to Aguinaldo later. 
 
 This ended the war not a very creditable or honorable ending 
 to a struggle for liberty, but one which shows some of the insurgent 
 leaders in their true light as men who are willing to barter away any 
 thing for gold, and men who are in insurrection for business purposes. 
 Aguinaldo and his fellow, under the terms of the sale of their coutry- 
 men s freedom, promised to leave the country and return no more. 
 They went to China and there got into a wrangle about the division 
 of the spoils, which almost got into court, but was finally settled 
 outside. 
 
 The remaining $400,000 was not paid up at the time of the 
 advance of Admiral Dewey upon Manila, so Aguinaldo, notwith 
 standing the fact that he had already received half of the amount 
 specified, thought he was absolved from the terms of the contract 
 calling for his staying out of the country, and, hoping that by follow 
 ing in the wake of Dewey s guns he might profit in some way, he 
 returned to Manila, was placed at the head of the insurgent army 
 once more, and to-day is a great figure in the insurgent life of the 
 Philippines, a traitor to his own countrymen, a traitor to the Ameri 
 cans, who befriended him, a soldier of fortune without honor. 
 
 OTHER INSURGENT LEADERS. 
 
 The insurgents of to-day have among their rank a number of 
 young natives who have had the benefit of a good education and who, 
 consequently, are able to handle their ignorant brethren with much 
 skill. Tedoro Sandica, who has been made the Minister of Interior 
 of the so-called Revolutionary Government, is a civil engineer, who 
 learned his profession in England and studied for some time in Bel 
 gium. He was staying in Hong Kong, an exile from his country, 
 when Dewey landed there, and he was allowed to return to Manila 
 on one of Dewey s vessels. A cousin of Aguinaldo, by the name of 
 Baldomero Aguinaldo, is one of the prominent leaders of the insur 
 rection, and has been since its beginning. He has the rank of gen 
 eral, and has recently been made Minister of War in the new govern 
 ment. He is said to be a large landowner at Cavite. Gregorico 
 
FILIPINOS STRUGGLES FOR FREEDOM 
 
 Gonzaga is another well-known patriot, a lawyer of some ability, who 
 used to have charge of Filipino affairs at Hong Kong, and before 
 that occupied a position of trust under the Spanish government, hav 
 ing been Attorney-General for the Spanish in Visayas. Other leaders 
 among the insurgents are Leandro Ibarra, who is Secretary of the 
 Interior, and Mariano Trias, who is Secretary of Agriculture, under 
 Aguinaldo. 
 
 Senor Felipe Agoncillo, whose unsavory career in the United 
 States brought him into much prominence, is another of the leading 
 lights connected with the last uprising and now influential in the new 
 government. He, too, has a good European education, was in con 
 trol of the Junta at Honor Kong; for some time, and then was mven 
 
 J o o o 
 
 the important mission of coming to America and trying to look after 
 the affairs of the Filipinos in this country. He is a man of strong 
 individuality and much ability in many ways. 
 
 Such, briefly, are some of the men who have been closely identi 
 fied with the efforts of the Filipinos to regain the liberty which they 
 lost so long ago, and which will never be theirs as a self-ruling, inde 
 pendent nation. To them has come a new liberty, a liberty of which 
 they know nothing, a liberty that is personal freedom under staple 
 government without oppression and without disgrace, a liberty which 
 America alone could o;ive. 
 
 o 
 
CHAPTER VIII 
 
 The Great Value of the Philippines 
 
 Why all Nations Yearn for what the United States has Won. Importance from the 
 Strategic Standpoint. Immense Wealth and Resources. Exports amounting to 
 over $20,000,000. Rich in Sugar, Rice, Hemp, Coffee, and Cocoa, Spices, 
 and a Host of other Things. Untold and Untried Mineral Resources. 
 
 EVERY nation in the world envies the United States its posses 
 sion of the Philippines. There is no power in the eastern hemi 
 sphere, which would not jump at the opportunity to possess 
 this land of wealth, which, besides its intrinsic value, is tenfold more 
 precious because of its situation. It is the key to the great commerce 
 of the far East, which is slowly opening up, year by year, and which, 
 in the future of the new China, will become a great factor in the 
 commercial life of every country of the globe. 
 
 As a station in time of war it is unsurpassed perhaps the best 
 in the Pacific Ocean and fortified and guarded, it will be invaluable 
 to the United States as long as she possess it. 
 
 The islands themselves are filled to overflowing with riches, the 
 full extent of which is little dreamed of to-day. 
 
 Spain has always kept her colonies from improving their natural 
 resources and turning them into gold, except inasmuch as they hap 
 pened to personally enrich the Governor-General and other Spanish 
 officials. There was little chance for energetic foreigners who were 
 willing to put capital into business to gain a foothold there. Spain 
 met them at the gate, and when it found what their intentions were 
 it slammed the gate in their face. However some large firms man 
 aged to establish places of business at Manila and in some of the other 
 larger towns, and these, mostly Englishmen, are a great power in the 
 city. 
 
 THE TRADE OF THE ISLANDS EXCEEDED $44,OOO,OOO. 
 
 Notwithstanding the embargo placed upon the trade of the 
 Philippines with other nations, the statistics show that at high- 
 
 155 
 
156 THE GREAT VALUE OF THE PHILIPPINES 
 
 water mark, which was in 1880, their exports and imports amounted 
 to $44,042,815. Official statistics in regard to the foreign commerce 
 of the islands are not available for the years subsequent to 1894, and 
 estimates since that time are based on reports of other countries in 
 Bata, procured by consular officers and merchants of Manila. 
 
 In 1894 the total trade was worth $30,792,559, of which $14,- 
 250,717 were imports and $16,541,842 exports. These figures are 
 unusually small compared with the official values of preceding years. 
 In the period between 1880 and 1894 the average annual value of 
 commerce was as high as $37,566,005. Many fluctuations occurred 
 within this time, but taken as a whole there was a noticeable decline 
 in trade. It is probable, however, that this decline was not a decrease 
 in the quantity of the merchandise handled, but in the price, which fell 
 off considerably. 
 
 The distribution cf the Philippine commerce among the various 
 foreign countries of the world is a matter of great interest. Taking 
 the year 1893, which is the last year in which there are official statis 
 tics available, it is shown that nearly 85 per cent, of the entire import 
 and export trade of the islands was divided among four countries, 
 England,, China, Spain and the United States. Out of a total of 
 $38,073,725 England had $14,207,832, or 37.32 per cent, of the 
 total ; China is credited with 18.66 per cent, the value being $7,104,- 
 in, most of which went to Hong Kong; Spain had $7,024,128, or 
 18.45 P er cent -> while the United States had $3,951,603, or 10.38 per 
 cent. ; Germany only had 3.32 per cent, and France 1.89 per cent. 
 
 Manila is rich in agricultural products. Hemp and sugar form 
 the leading staples of the island, and these are the principal factors in 
 their trade ; in fact together they make up 75 per cent, of the total 
 export valuation. After these are leaf tobacco, cigars and cigarettes. 
 At one time coffee was also one of the leading exports, but there has 
 been a great decline in its production, because of the ravages of an 
 insect which laid waste the coffee groves. But these are not all. 
 Rich woods, oils, rice, cocoa, spices, indigo and many other things 
 flourish on the island, and if properly encouraged would yield rich 
 returns to the investor. 
 
 Recognizing what a splendid field the Philippines offer in the 
 line of agriculture, the Secretary of Agriculture, James W. Wilson, 
 
UNCLE SAM EXAMINES HIS NEW POSSESSIONS 1 57 
 
 on behalf of the Government of the United States, sent commis 
 sioners o-ver there to see what the future promised for the agriculture 
 of the islands. The commissioners returned enthusiastic for the new 
 land and talked of it as though it were a veritable Klondike, as yet 
 undeveloped, but having hidden in it fortunes for those who know how 
 to bring them forth. 
 
 In the years before so many colonies were opened up in all 
 parts of the world, there were a few who went to the Philippines 
 and made large fortunes out of sugar and hemp, but more recently 
 there were hundreds of people who started out to make money with 
 only one-tenth of the capital necessary to run the places which they 
 had. Consequently they soon fell into the hands of money lenders, 
 so that they barely were able to earn an honest living from large 
 estates which were mortgaged up to the hilt, and were really owned 
 by the men who advanced money on them. 
 
 The value of sugar cane land depends largely on its nearness to 
 a port, on the condition of the sugar market, on the quality of the 
 soil, on its situation in the island, and on a thousand and one other 
 things. For instance, in the province of Bulacan, which is near 
 Manila, land which yields on an average of twenty-one tons an acre is 
 worth $115, because of its nearness to the capital. In Pampanja 
 province, which is not very much farther away, better land, yielding 
 about thirty tons an acre, is worth only $75 ; still further north, in 
 the province of Neuva Ecija, where it is difficult to get the sugar to 
 market, land which will yield thirty-five tons of sugar to the acre can 
 be bought for about $30. This gives an indication of how money 
 might be made by the introduction of railroad and other facilities for 
 transportation. 
 
 The finest sugar cane producing island in the Philippines is Ne- 
 gros, in the Visaya district. In size it is equal to Porto Rico, but 
 only half of it is opened up, simply for want of capital. Some appre 
 ciation may be had of exactly what that means, when it is known that 
 this island, handicapped as it is, produced in 1889 about 80,000 tons 
 of raw sugar. The yield of sugar cane may be estimated roughly at 
 from thirty to forty tons an acre, and the price varies from $35 to $70 
 an acre. The sugar from Iloilo is chiefly exported to the United 
 States, where there is demand for raw material only, while from 
 
158 THE GREAT VALUE OF THE PHILIPPINES 
 
 Manila a certain quantity of refined sugar ready for consumption is 
 sent to Spain. Consequently they have some high-class European 
 machinery in the latter place, while in the former many rough mills, 
 such as were introduced by the Chinese, are still in use. 
 
 According to those who have carefully looked into the matter, 
 the output of sugar could be very largely increased if intelligent care 
 were directed to the seasons. A great deal of sugar is lost by delay 
 in various branches of cutting and milling and planting. An estate 
 turning out five hundred tons of sugar is considered a large one. In 
 the northern Philippines the plantations are worked on the co-opera 
 tive principle. The landowner divides up his estate and sublets it to 
 a tenant on shares ; in the southern plantations the system is different 
 men are paid by the day for their work. The total export of sugar 
 between 1886 and 1890 averaged 381,068,699 pounds a year. The top- 
 notch was 444,626,218 pounds in 1889. 
 
 Next to sugar, rice is most generally cultivated, although not so 
 largely exported. It is the staple article of diet of the native, and is 
 grown everywhere. Notwithstanding this fact, however, the supply 
 is very much smaller than the demand, and large quantities have to 
 be imported to supply the natives with sufficient for food. This is 
 due partly to the fact that it pays better to use the land for sugar 
 cane than for raising rice, and many of the owners of plantations have 
 converted their property, formerly used for rice, into the raising of 
 sugar. There are very few machines for successfully cleaning the 
 rice, owing to the fact that any machinery which is good for one 
 variety of rice would not be suitable for another, and there are so 
 many different varieties, that the loss in the end would be greater 
 than the gain. 
 
 The number of different kinds of rice paddy is estimated at 
 twenty. The Macan or low land rice is much finer in quality than 
 the others, and usually very white. There is rarely more than one 
 crop a year obtained of this rice, while of the poorer qualities as many 
 as three crops can be secured. The seed of the lowland rice is 
 planted in June on what is called the "seeding plot." It is allowed 
 to grow for about six weeks and reaches the height of about a foot. 
 Then it is pulled up by the roots and transplanted in flooded fields. 
 Little banks of earth are placed all around the fields, so that the 
 
THE TERRIBLE PLAGUES OF LOCUSTS I59 
 
 water cannot run off, and just before the plants are placed in them 
 the fields are plowed up. Then the planters go along with their bun 
 dles of plants, and, picking them out one by one, stick them into the 
 mud. This to the ordinary mind seems like a very long and laborious 
 operation, but the natives are experts in the transplanting, and it does 
 not take them as long as one would think to get over a large field. 
 
 It takes about four months for the rice to ripen. Harvest is 
 usually begun at the end of November. The paddy is made into 
 stacks at the end of January, and about the middle of April the rice 
 is separated from the straw. This is done in a good many ways. 
 Some flail it, others beat it out with their feet, while still others, par 
 ticularly around Cavite, spread the sheaves out and trot a number of 
 ponies around over it. There is not much money in rice-raising, as 
 it is carried on at present, but it is probable with the introduction of 
 new ideas and machinery instead of human hands, a rice farm might 
 be made to pay a good dividend. 
 
 THE TERRIBLE PLAGUES OF LOCUSTS. 
 
 One of the great troubles with which planters both of rice and 
 of sugar have to contend is the plague of locusts. They come in 
 swarms of millions at a time, and travellers state that they are so 
 thick that while the locusts are passing by, the trees on the other side 
 are not visible. Mr. Foreman, one of the most intelligent observers 
 wbo has ever written about the Philippines, describes one experience 
 that he had, as follows : " Sailing along the antique coast one evening, 
 I observed on the fertile shore a large, brown colored plateau. For 
 the moment I thought it was a tract of land which had been cleared 
 by fire, but on nearing it I perceived that countless numbers of locusts 
 had settled on several fields. We put in quite close to them, and I 
 fired off a revolver, the noise of which caused them to move off 
 slowly in a column." 
 
 These locusts increase and multiply rapidly. The new-born 
 insects are not able to fly until they are about ten days old, so they 
 devastate the fields and practically clean them of their crop. A large 
 mass of locusts will destroy the crop for miles and miles in a single 
 night. The way to get rid of them is a problem. The method 
 employed for the young locusts is to build a barrier at one side of the 
 
160 THE GREAT VALUE OF THE PHILIPPINES 
 
 field, dig a pit in front of it, and then put a small army of men around 
 the other three sides and let them beat around until they scare the 
 young locusts into jumping in heaps in the pit. Sometimes twenty 
 tons of locusts are destroyed on one plantation in one season. Noise 
 is the great aid in ridding a place of the winged pests ; the natives 
 take tin cans and drums and anything else that makes a sound and 
 scare the locusts so that they fly away. Other natives light fires to 
 smoke them out. Some of the natives use the locusts as food, frying 
 them into what they call a very delicious dish. 
 
 A GREAT TRADE IN MANILA HEMP. 
 
 Next to the trade in sugar, the most money has been made up to 
 the present time in hemp, which is a wild species of plantain found 
 in many parts of the island. It is something like the banana plant, 
 and only experts can tell the difference. The hemp grows best on 
 sloping land. The tree in the islands reaches an average height of 
 ten feet, from which the fine fibre is drawn out by hand with a knife, 
 and without killing the tree Many attempts have been made to do 
 this by machinery, but so far nothing satisfactory has been produced. 
 The plant requires three years to arrive to a state in which the fibre 
 can be taken out. One of the advantages in the raising of hemp is 
 that the clearing of other trees from the plantations is not necessary, 
 inasmuch as the plants thrive best in the shade. The great drawback 
 in hemp plantation is the fact that the planter has to wait three years 
 at least before he can get his money back or reap any profit from it. 
 The risk after that period is comparatively small. 
 
 One of the great difficulties in the handling of a hemp planta 
 tion by the European is due to the laziness of the native. If left to 
 himself he cuts the plant at any period during its maturity, although 
 he is perfectly aware that there are certain periods at which, if cut, 
 the fibre is much more valuable than at others. The native, when he 
 is hard up, strips a few of the trees, leaving them exposed to the rain 
 and air to soften, as the fibre may be more easily withdrawn then. It 
 is no loss to him that the fibre discolors, and is therefore not so valu 
 able. He has tricks of the trade, which the European soon becomes 
 used to. He delivers this colored fibre at night instead of in day 
 time, first to conceal the fact that it is colored, and secondly so that 
 
ON A COFFEE PLANTATION !6i 
 
 the fibre may absorb the dew at night, and consequently weigh 
 more. One advantage which the Manila hemp has is that it is a 
 monopoly, for no other place produces it, consequently there is no 
 competition in the trade except with other fibres of a somewhat similar 
 nature. Statistics show that the average annual export of Manila 
 hemp was 66,508 tons between 1886 and 1890, the highest being in 
 1888, when 80,400 tons were exported. Measured in value, the 
 Manila hemp imported into the United States between 1888 and 1897 
 formed about 55 per cent, of our total imports from the Philippine 
 Islands. During 1897 tne hemp brought from Manila was valued at 
 $2,701,651 ; and in 1889, owing to the high value of the product, the 
 imount imported was worth $6,436,750. 
 
 ON A COFFEE PLANTATION. 
 
 Coffee is another industry which may be developed greatly in 
 the future. The chief value of a coffee plantation is that the trees 
 bear profitably for twenty-five years before they become practically 
 useless, and some even longer than that. The best coffee comes from 
 the provinces of Batangas, Cavite, and La Laguna. The report of 
 the United States Government shows that the average annual export 
 of coffee from the islands between 1886 and 1890 amounted to 12,752,- 
 228 pounds. The price of a good plantation is about $180 per acre. 
 Four years after the trees are planted they begin to give coffee that is 
 salable. The trees flourish best on high land and in hilly districts, and 
 care is needed to keep the trees shaded from the hot rays of the sun. 
 In Batangas great pains are taken in this matter, and consequently 
 the coffee is very good. The cost to the owner of having the planta 
 tion looked after is about one-half of the produce, so supposing the 
 selling price is up to the average, the grower makes about 18 per 
 cent, upon his invested capital. One year out of every five is sure to 
 give a short crop, consequently it pays better to buy from the small 
 growers than to envolve a great deal of capital in one large estate. 
 
 The berries from the tree are picked by the women and children, 
 and then washed ; afterward they are dried and pounded until they 
 are perfectly clean. The plantations give only one crop a year. 
 
 The tobacco industry was introduced into the islands from Mexico, 
 and has grown so large that it has become one of the great industries 
 
162 THE GREAT VALUE OF THE PHILIPPINES 
 
 of the place. The tobacco trade was in charge of the government 
 for a long time, until it led to so many dishonorable acts on the part 
 of officials that the monopoly was abolished. In 1890, 20,102,387 
 pounds of leaf tobacco and 3,027,384 pounds of cigars and cigarettes 
 were exported. The quality of the tobacco grown there cannot com 
 pare with that of the best Cuban plant according to experts, but is 
 still of such a high grade as to make it capable of becoming a large 
 factor in the export trade. The best quality is produced in the north 
 ern parts of Luzon, the choicest being from Cagayan and La Isabella. 
 Some of the southern districts raise maize or Indian-corn in 
 place of rice. It is pulverized between stone or hard wood slabs, and 
 then eaten. Cocoa trees are plentiful, growing readily in damp or hot 
 districts. The quality is very good, but the occupation is decidedly 
 risky, as a single storm will throw down almost ripen fruit and ruin a 
 man in a day, and disease attacks the plants. If it were not for this 
 a cocoa planter would make handsome profits. 
 
 VALUABLE TRACTS OF TIMBER TREES. 
 
 The Philippines are remarkably rich in valuable timber trees. 
 Sapan wood is found in most of the islands. It is crocked and hard, 
 and so heavy that it sinks in water, but is susceptible of a very fine 
 polish. The heart of the branches is used to make a dye known in the 
 trade as "false crimson." There were 15,438,072 pounds of sapan 
 wood exported in 1888. Many other fine woods are produced and offer 
 a good field for exports. Among them is what is called " narra," the 
 mahogany of the Philippines. It is always employed in Manila in 
 the manufacture of furniture. It runs in a variety of shades from 
 straw colored to blood red. The former is more common, but a Hare 
 equally valuable. The Filipinos presented Consul Williams, who 
 took such a great interest in their welfare, with a splendid piece of 
 this mahogany as a gift. 
 
 The fruits of the island are not very fine, compared with those 
 of America. The mango is most abundant, and is very good. Peo 
 ple eat as many as a dozen a day without harm, and they are very 
 cheap. The banana is plentiful all the year round. It grows wild, 
 but is also largely cultivated. The islands also yield oranges" lemons, 
 and plenty of pineapple. 
 
FORTUNES IN GOLD WAITING FOR DISCOVERY 163 
 
 The Philippines contain vast tracts of mineral land, filled with 
 gold, copper and iron, which some day will yield untold wealth to the 
 world. It is confidently predicted, by many who have looked into the 
 matter, that the gold fields of the archipelago will some day yield an 
 output greater even than that of the Klondike, and we all may live 
 to see a wild rush to the Philippines similar to that to Australia 
 years ago, to California in 59, and to the Klondike in the last few 
 years. All of the streams on the eastern side of Luzon carry gold 
 down from the mountains, and there is no little brook which does 
 not pan at least a little yellow color. 
 
 FORTUNES IN GOLD WAITING FOR DISCOVERY. 
 
 The overgrowth of the islands is so dense that ordinary pro 
 specting for gold is out of the question, but as the country becomes 
 opened up, there is no doubt but that fortunes will be found waiting 
 for discovery. When the Dons first landed in the Philippines they 
 found gold an article of traffic among the natives, and to-day, outside 
 of the large towns, uncoined gold is used extensively as a medium of 
 exchange. It is weighed on small scales, and its value is estimated 
 at about $11 per ounce, owing to its impurities. It is known that 
 there is a good deal of gold in the province of Benguet, central 
 Luzon, and also in the northeastern part of the Island of Mindanao, 
 the streams there are particularly rich. 
 
 The people of this island carry gold around and use it as money. 
 Their method of obtaining the precious metal is, of course, very 
 primitive. They wash the sand and gravel of the streams in wooden 
 bowls, seeking the golden specks which fall to the bottom. In other 
 places they crush the rock to powder and then treat that in the same 
 way. The gold occurs about three feet from the surface of the 
 ground, and increases in quantity to a depth of eighteen feet. The 
 pieces of rock are carried out of the pits in baskets, up ladders of 
 bamboo. They are crushed by what is known as the "errastra," an 
 apparatus consisting of a block of rock, which is moved like a mill 
 stone on another rock by means of buffalo power. Water is added, 
 and the result is a fine mud, which is washed by the women, who 
 kneel before a wooden gutter filled with water. Each woman has a 
 washing board, over which water from the gutter flows through a 
 
1 64 THE GREAT VALUE OF THE PHILIPPINES 
 
 small outlet. The water washes away most of the light sand and 
 other matter, and what is left is treated in a wooden bowl and finally 
 in a cocoanut shell. A small quantity of slimy juice of the gogo is 
 mixed in with the water to keep the sand suspended. Of course, 
 most of the gold is lost during this process, but that which is secured 
 in the shape of dust is put into a small shell and covered with a 
 little charcoal. This is placed in a fragment of a broken pot and the 
 charcoal is lighted. Then a woman blows gently through a little 
 bamboo tube upon it, melting the gold into a small lump. One of 
 the nuggets thus secured was tested and was found to contain 77 per 
 cent, of gold, 19 per cent, of silver, 3 per. cent, of earth and i per 
 cent, of iron. 
 
 COAL BARONS LOOK TO THE PHILIPPINES. 
 
 There is plenty of coal in the archipelago, and yet a large part 
 of the mineral in use there is imported from other countries. This 
 is due largely to the fact that the mining of coal is extremely diffi 
 cult and expensive. The only means of transport "are buffalo carts, 
 and these are neither efficient, quick or cheap. The island of Cebu 
 contains large beds of coal, and the mines of Compostella are said to 
 be very rich, the lodes averaging a thickness of two miles ; but they 
 have never been fully opened for want of capital. The coal is of 
 medium class, still the Spanish naval authorities were willing to 
 contract for large quantities of it ; but it was impossible to make it 
 pay under the present method of cart transportation. 
 
 In Aplaco Mountain, in Cebu, the coal is said to be of good 
 quality; but not to contain much heating power. In the province of 
 Albay, collieries were begun, and after awhile were abandoned, han 
 dicapped as usual by failure of transportation. It is calculated that, 
 up to the year 1876, $1,300,000 was spent on the mines in the Philip 
 pines without any apparent return. 
 
 IRON IS PLENTIFUL AND ALMOST PURE. 
 
 There is plenty of iron, in which the ore is said to yield 75 per 
 cent, of pure metal, yet it is impossible to mine it at a profit, owing 
 to the lack of railways. It has frequently been tried, but never with 
 success. 
 
IRON IS PLENTIFUL AND ALMOST PURE 
 
 167 
 
 There are rich mines near Manila, and others at Angat, in Bula- 
 can province, the latter giving undoubtedly a very rich ore. The 
 mines there are still being worked, though on a very small scale. 
 
 One of the important items of wealth in the Philippines is cop 
 per, of which there are great deposits. The natives use copper uten 
 sils, and the Igorrotes have carried on copper mining for centuries. 
 The ore found at Mancayan contains 16 per cent, of copper; In the 
 interior of the island of Luzon, copper occurs in large masses, and 
 as yet the great extent of the commercial value of that deosit is 
 unknown. The natives get the copper by placing fragments of rock 
 in a round hollow in clayed ground, with which a conical funnel of 
 stone is cpnnected ; a fire is lighted, and blowers with bamboo are 
 worked with plungers to make a draft. 
 
 These, with the deposits of sulphur, marble and gypsum, and 
 with the addition of the valuable pearl fisheries of Sulu, make the 
 man who yearns for fields where wealth can be had for the finding, 
 turn his eyes towards these our new possessions, which hold in their 
 hearts fortunes that, if uncovered, would show riches beyond the 
 wildest imagination. 
 
CHAPTER IX 
 
 The People of the Islands 
 
 More than Eighty Different Tribes on the Islands. Interesting Traits of Character 
 of the Natives, both Half-Civilized and Barbarous. Cannibalism and its Hor 
 rors. Something about the Curious Peoples The Aetas, Negritos, Gadanes, 
 
 Itavis, Igorrotes, Tinguianes and many others. 
 
 
 
 BUT what of these people, whom we have placed beneath the 
 Stars and Stripes, both by the right of capture and purchase 
 of their land ? Who are they? What are they? How do 
 they live ? Th se are questions which everybody asks, when the 
 thought of the Philippines is presented. Most persons know very 
 little of them, except that they are a half-civilized lot of people, at 
 best, and the lowest order of barbarians, at worst. 
 
 And this general impression is almost correct ; civilization is at 
 a very low ebb in the Philippines. Of course, the Spaniards who 
 have settled there, the Europeans who carry on business dealings on 
 the islands, some of the Chinese merchants, and even some of the 
 high-caste natives, are people of culture ; but the great overwhelm 
 ing mass of residents on the island are in low stages of savagery. 
 
 Let us look for a minute at some of the tribes outside of the 
 capital of Manila and the region round about. The recent attack 
 by insurgent forces upon the American troops has made most people 
 familiar with the name at least of the Igorrotes, whose chief was 
 captured in the fight, and whose tribesmen stood before the awful 
 fire of our guns, wondering what on earth they were and why their 
 ranks were thinned out, as if by some mysterious force. 
 
 The chief admitted, as has been stated, that he never saw fire 
 arms before, and this may well be believed, for he himself and all 
 his men went into the conflict armed with bows and arrows. These 
 Igorrotes occupy a very considerable portion of the island of Luzon, 
 of which Manila is the capital. From a physical standpoint, they are 
 about as fine a race of people as one would wish to see. They wear 
 
 169 
 
i;o THE PEOPLE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 their hair long, almost down to their shoulders ; they have flat noses 
 and high cheek bones, and are broad-shouldered and strong of limb. 
 
 Like most of the people of this sub-tropical isle, they are ex 
 ceedingly lazy, and do very little except prey upon nearby tribes. 
 Murder is so common as to be almost a pastime, and they have a way 
 of avenging murders on the murderer s family, if they cannot lay hands 
 upon the culprit himself. 
 
 They have given the government of Spain as much trouble as 
 any of the tribes on the island. The task of civilizing them has been 
 absolutely abandoned by the Spanish, and the occasional expeditions 
 to place them under subjection have been so weak as to encourage 
 these native sons of the isle in the belief that the power of Spain 
 is not very much of a thing to dread. The expeditions, moreover, 
 seem to have given the Spanish officers an opportunity for license, 
 which so prejudiced these savages against Europeans, that all over 
 tures, either of Church or State, were scorned as being beneath con 
 tempt by these islanders. They refused absolutely to receive baptism 
 or accept Christianity, basing their feelings in the matter upon the 
 actions of the only representatives of Christian races which they 
 knew, and who proved themselves immoral and untrustworthy. 
 
 DESCENDED FROM THE FOLLOWERS OF THE PIRATE. 
 
 There is a half-caste tribe, called the Igorrote-Chinese, which is 
 supposed to have come down through the generations from the Chi 
 nese followers of the terrible pirate, Limahong. They have inter 
 married with the original tribe, and the result is a very individual 
 class of islanders, who combine the fierceness and strength of the 
 Igorrotes and the cunning and cleverness of the Chinamen. 
 
 Among the best known of the wilder tribes are the Aetas, or 
 Negritos, who are found here and there in almost all of the islands. 
 They are supposed to be the original inhabitants. In color they are 
 almost as black as African negroes ; they have short, curly hair, some 
 thing like Astrakhan fur. They are, perhaps, the most cowardly 
 people extant, and have no idea of facing the Spaniards in a fair 
 fight. They are not habitually overburdened with clothing, and are 
 usually armed with a lance and with bow and arrow, the latter of 
 which is tipped with poison, Their agility is their chief character- 
 
A WEDDING CEREMONY AMONG THE SAVAGES 171 
 
 istic. They run with great speed and climb trees almost as easily as 
 monkeys. They have, apparently, no mentality or stability, and even 
 those brought under the influences of civilization have lapses, during 
 which they go back to their native customs and native haunts. 
 
 Their religion is a religion of superstition. They are too lazy 
 to work, and live principally on fish, roots and the rice common to 
 the mountains. Spasmodically they rush down upon nearby tribes 
 and settlements which have made some progress under civilization, 
 and carry off anything they lay their hands on. The government 
 was kept busy protecting property against such raids for some years, 
 but recently this people have been driven so far into the interior that 
 their visitations for plunder are becoming less and less frequent. 
 Their idea of plowing the earth and making it yield forth fruit in its 
 season, seems to be to scratch up the surface of the ground slightly, 
 without clearing it of shrubs or trees, and then sprinkling it with 
 seed and trusting to luck for something to grow. 
 
 A WEDDING CEREMONY AMONG THE SAVAGES. 
 
 Mr. John Foreman, who traveled through their country, describes 
 an interesting and typical wedding ceremony which he witnessed there, 
 as follows : " The young bride, who might have been thirteen years 
 of age, was being pursued by her future spouse, as she pretended to 
 run away, and it need hardly be said that he succeeded in bringing 
 her in by feigned force. She struggled and again got away, but a 
 second time she was caught. Then an old man with gray hair came 
 forward and dragged the young man up a bamboo ladder. An old 
 woman grasped the bride, and both followed the bridegroom. The 
 aged sire then gave them a ducking with a cocoanut shell full of 
 water, and they all descended. The happy pair knelt down, and the 
 elder, having placed their heads together, they were man and wife. 
 We endeavored to find out which hut was alotted to the newly mar 
 ried couple, but we were given to understand that, until the sun had 
 reappeared five times, they would spend their honeymoon in the 
 mountains. After the ceremony was concluded, several present began 
 to make their usual mountain call. In the lowlands, the same pecu 
 liar cry serves to bring home straggling domestic animals to their 
 nocturnal resting place," 
 
172 THE PEOPLE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 The Gadanes occupy the extreme northwest of Luzon, and 
 have so far removed from the centre of civilization that compara 
 tively little is known about them. They possess many of the attri 
 butes of the other tribes, are very dark in color and live chiefly on 
 fish and vegetables. Their chief pride is their warlike record, so 
 much so, in fact, that when a young man makes up his mind to assume 
 the bonds of matrimony, he usually starts out on the warpath, in 
 order to dangle before his prospective father-in-law enough scalps to 
 make himself worthy of notice. If one or two young warriors hap 
 pen to be paying attention to the same dusky maiden, the hunt for 
 scalps becomes a contest, and the man who kills the most people is 
 likely to win the prize. 
 
 THE FIRE-TREE STIRS THE NATIVES TO WAR. 
 
 This practice of proving courage at the expense of their ene 
 mies, breaks out in a marked degree when the flowers of what the 
 Spaniards call the fire-tree are in bloom. The fire-tree is covered 
 with brilliant red blossoms, and their appearance is regarded as a 
 signal to the members of this race to count up scalps and celebrate 
 victory with weird rites. 
 
 The Gadanes go about armed in such a way that they can get 
 a breakfast or kill a man with equal ease. Their lances are long, 
 with tridented tips with which they both fish and kill, and their 
 arrows carry at the point two rows of teeth made out of flint or sea- 
 shells. 
 
 To the south of them live the Itavas, who are much similar to 
 them, but neither as fierce or as brave. They are ready to protect 
 themselves against assault, but are not very eager to go into war for 
 the savage love of the sport. Their skin is lighter and their hair is 
 shorter than their neighbors . 
 
 The Tinguianes, who occupy the district of Elabra, are pretty 
 well under control of the Spanish government ; physically they are 
 fine specimens. They wear their hair in a tuft on the top of the 
 head, like the Japanese, and their nose is aquiline, but the rest of 
 their features are much like that of the ordinary lowland native. 
 
 They are not very warlike, and have been kept pretty well in 
 hand by the government troops. The Spaniards appoint their petty 
 
QUEER OATHS AMONG THE PEOPLE 173 
 
 governors, as they do in all of the subdued districts, and when that 
 governor assumes his office, it is related that he takes the following 
 picturesque oath : " May a pernicious wind touch me, may a flash of 
 lightning kill me, and may the alligator catch me asleep, if I fail to 
 fulfill my duties." 
 
 Picturesqueness seems to be the vogue in oaths. When a man 
 is brought up to the bar of justice on any accusation, he has the right 
 to plead guilty or not guilty. If he denies the accusation, a handful 
 of straw is burnt in his presence, and he is made to hold up an 
 earthen-ware vessel and say : " May my belly be converted into a pot 
 like this, if I have committed the deed attributed to me." If the 
 transformation does not take place immediately, that is considered 
 proof positive that he is innocent, and he is allowed to go free. 
 
 They have no temples, but they worship gods who are hidden in 
 mountain cavities. They have priests, supposed to be in touch with 
 these gods, and they are appealed to on all occasions. For instance, 
 when a child is to be named it is carried into the woods and the pagan 
 priest is sought He stands over the new-born babe with a knife in 
 his hand. He pronounces a name and, at the same time, sticks the 
 knife into a tree nearby. If sap runs out of the tree, the name 
 is adopted ; if not, he tries another name, changing it each time until 
 the sap oozing out of the wound in the tree tells the waiting people 
 that the deity has decided upon that name. 
 
 These people build their houses in trees or on posts, sixty or 
 seventy feet from the ground. In these houses they keep a goodly 
 supply of large rocks, so that when their enemies come around and 
 try to climb up to their dwellings, they drop a stone on their heads. 
 They hang skulls of horses and buffaloes out of their windows for 
 luck. Some of the families of El Abra and Ilocos, which are descended 
 from the Tinguianes, have become so civilized that they are consid 
 ered valuable as workmen and servants and are sought in preference 
 to any of the others. There is another race of people supposed to 
 have descended from Hindoo soldiers who formed part of the British 
 troops which occupied Manila in 1763. These people are very 
 decidedly different from the ordinary native. They occupy the 
 Morong district. They are Christians, hard working and law abid 
 ing. They are the only people who voluntarily pay their taxes. 
 
174 THE PEOPLE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 There are in the Philippines a few types of that tropical curiosity 
 known as albinos, who have pure white skin and light, sometimes 
 red hair, with pink eyes. They become almost blind in the daytime, 
 owing to the glare of the tropical sun. 
 
 SIXTY LANGUAGES AMONG EIGHTY TRIBES. 
 
 There are sixty distinct languages spoken in the eighty tribes of 
 the islands, and out of 9,000,000 people not more than a quarter of a 
 million can read and write Spanish, the only language whereby, up to 
 this time, they could be instructed. Almost all of the education seems 
 to have been among the Tagalos, not because they are mentally 
 superior to the other races, but because they happen to occupy the 
 region round about Manila. The Tagolos form about one-sixth of 
 the population of Luzon, yet the casual visitor to the Philippines, or 
 even those who reside in Manila, naturally know more about this 
 race than any other. The other races have been rather jealous of 
 the Tagalos, and dislike them, which made the prospects of civiliza 
 tion through these nations even harder than by direct education of 
 the other tribes. 
 
 Long and careful study of the Filipino shows that in many re 
 spects his character is a mystery. A native may run along for years 
 in a normal way, exhibiting fairly good sense and obeying the law, 
 and then, all of a sudden, he will break out into theft or murder or 
 some other crime, just because, as he puts it, " his head is hot." For 
 instance, there was a native who served with one of the members of 
 the Spanish colony for forty years without getting himself into any 
 very great trouble. One day a son of his master came back from a 
 trip bringing with him a $1,000. The old servant got hold of the 
 bag containing the money, ripped it open, and took out about $30, 
 leaving the rest untouched. He was charged with the crime and 
 calmly admitted it, although he could not offer any reason for not 
 taking the whole sum while he was about it. 
 
 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE FILIPINO. 
 
 The ordinary native is fond of gambling and passionately 
 devoted to cockfighting. He is ready to make all kinds of 
 promises, but is rarely ready to carry them out. If he commits a 
 
YOUNG MAN OF THE UPPER CLASS 
 
 White duck or crash trousers and a silk or pina shirt 
 make a fashionable suit. 
 
 AGUINALDO AT THE AGE OF 22 
 
 Dressed in fine Pina cloth shirt. 
 
 DOING THE FAMILY WASH 
 
 The glory of all Philippine women is their long and 
 beautiful hair. 
 
 NATIVE WOMAN FRUIT SELLER 
 
 And customers, Manila. 
 
GRATITUDE A THING UNKNOWN 177 
 
 fault, or breaks anything by accident, he rarely comes forward and 
 admits it, but tries to hide it until it is found out. The natives are 
 quick to pounce upon any sign of leniency on the part of their 
 European employers. If a foreigner tries to do them a good turn, 
 they will impose upon him ever afterward, thinking that it is the 
 sign of weakness on his part, which, as might be imagined, has 
 resulted in the European residents of the place adopting an atmos 
 phere of authority and harshness more pronounced than might have 
 been the case under different circumstances. If a man pays a native 
 twenty cents for something that he has done, and that is the regular 
 price, he takes it and is glad to get it, but if he gives him thirty cents, 
 the native will raise a storm of protest and grumble, because he didn t 
 get fifty cents. 
 
 The American troops are responsible for a great deal of trouble 
 among the native servants and tradespeople from this very mistaken 
 kindness. When the troops first landed, and there was any work to 
 be done which had to be done by the natives, they paid them a dollar 
 a day for what they were ordinarily receiving twenty-five cents, and 
 thought they were getting off cheaply, according to American prices. 
 And so, after a while, there was a pronounced exodus of native ser 
 vants from the houses of the residents of Manila and Cavite, because 
 they could get four times as much pay from the Americans as from 
 the residents. After a while the Americans became aware of the 
 fact that they had been too generous and tried to reduce prices for 
 work, but then the natives showed that singular characteristic referred 
 to, and declined to take less than the Americans had originally paid. 
 For sometime there was a good deal of disorder and discomfort 
 resulting from this, but recently things have quieted down, but wages 
 and prices have gone up all over the civilized parts of the islands. 
 
 GRATITUDE A THING UNKNOWN. 
 
 Gratitude is a thing almost unknown to the native Filipino ; he 
 does not seem to understand the feeling which prompts one person to 
 give another a gift of any kind. It is a remarkable fact that in the 
 southern islands of the Philippines there is no word or phrase to 
 express thanks for a gift. This would tend to show that the idea of 
 gratitude was wanting, and consequently there was no need of words 
 
1 78 THE PEOPLE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 to express that idea. The native has a funny way of asking for any 
 thing. He never comes straight out with his request, but starts a 
 long tale of woe, probably beginning with an elaborate lie, which you 
 can see through at a glance, and finally coming to the point, with a 
 very beseeching voice, and a face as innocent as though he had never 
 told a lie in his life. 
 
 He never voluntarily returns anything that he borrows. If you 
 speak to him about it, he calmly tells you that he did not return your 
 loan because you never asked him for it. When a European does 
 make a loan of money to a native, it behooves him to parley a little 
 with the borrower, and finally compromise by lending him a little less 
 than he asks, otherwise he would be a target for requests for the 
 next six months. 
 
 The natives are, like most Orientals, good imitators, but not 
 inventors. No matter what you give them, they will sit down and 
 make a copy of it. A native has no idea of sticking to one trade ; 
 he will be a servant one week, go out as a sailor the next, and proba 
 bly wind up as a lawyer or a bandit the week following. He regards 
 the European as an awful being, and the farther away from the cen 
 ters of civilization that one goes in the islands the more awful one 
 finds the conception of Europeans. The name is much like that of 
 our " Bogy-man," who will "ketch you if you don t look out !" The 
 women scare their children into submission with the awful word 
 "Castila" (European). If a baby cries, it is hushed by this magic 
 word ; if a white man comes near a hut in the less civilized parts of 
 the islands, the same word is used as a cry of caution to all who may 
 be within. 
 
 These people are a people of superstition and without humor. 
 A joke is taken with the utmost seriousness, and is sometimes 
 enlarged upon by the natives until its consequences are serious. 
 They rarely show anger, and receive everything without a change of 
 a muscle of the face ; but they store up their wrath for future use, 
 and patiently wait until the opportunity comes for them to plunge a 
 knife into their enemy. A native never can keep a secret, but he is 
 silent in service, with sometimes the most extraordinary results. He 
 will let your horse die for want of food, and tell you afterward it is 
 because the animal had nothing to eat. 
 
A SUPERSTITION ABOUT SLEEP 179 
 
 He never comes when first called, and, sometimes, when one 
 native wants another, he has to call him five or six times before the 
 other responds, although he has heard the summons from the very 
 first. The native does not hesitate to steal, but he usually confines 
 himself to things he wants, and does not take things merely because 
 they are valuable. 
 
 One of the peculiar traits of the Filipinos is that they will never 
 step over a person who is asleep on the floor, and they will not wake 
 anybody, except on the utmost provocation. Their argument in the 
 matter is that the soul is absent from the body while one is asleep, 
 and if it went very far away, it would not have time to get back, if the 
 man were suddenly awakened. If you go to call on a native and are 
 told he is asleep, you might as well turn around and go away again 
 until he wakes up. 
 
 The average Filipino is a good father and a good husband in 
 many ways, although he thinks more of his game cock than his 
 family. In cases of fire, natives have been known to pick up their 
 fighting birds and flee, leaving their wives and children to take care 
 of themselves, and get out as best they could. 
 
 If you put a question suddenly to a native he apparently loses 
 his presence of mind, and gives any reply that happens to come to 
 him, no matter whether it is true or not. Then, as you ply him with 
 questions, he will amend his statement little by little, until finally the 
 truth comes out. He is not ashamed of lying, but is chagrined if 
 his lie fails in its purpose. 
 
 The Tagalog is quite sociable, and if you visit him, he receives 
 you very hospitably. The Visaya, who lives in the south of the 
 island, and is as much civilized as the Tagalog, is not so friendly. He 
 seldom smiles before a stranger, has as little conversation with them 
 as possible, and puts on a great deal of airs. 
 
 There is one thing about these half-civilized islanders that gives 
 hope that some day they may be governed successfully, and that is 
 their sense of justice. Once convinced that they are being justly 
 treated, they are perfectly satisfied. If you beat a man when he 
 knows he has done wrong, he will never say a word ; but if he thinks 
 he is being unjustly chastised, he will carry a grudge against you for 
 years. 
 
i8o THE PEOPLE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 The colleges at Manila have done much to educate the brighter 
 natives. The people have very little idea of art, but all of them are 
 musicians of more or less ability. Native orchestras can be procured 
 for almost nothing, and they will play the most difficult music at a 
 moment s notice. The American soldiers used to hire an orchestra 
 to play during meals and all evening for twenty-five cents. 
 
 When I asked a prominent army man, who had just returned 
 from Manila, what struck him as the most remarkable thing that he 
 came across during his visit to the island, he replied without hesita 
 tion, " A native orchestra playing Sousa s Stars and Stripes For 
 ever , and A Hot Time in the Old Town To-night . Since the 
 advent of the American soldiers the musical repertoire of the native 
 musicians has undergone a decided change. They have adopted 
 almost all of the popular songs of this country, and play them appar 
 ently in preference to anything else. One American officer, who 
 received a large roll of music from friends in the United States, 
 untied the package, called the leader of the native orchestra which 
 was to play at a little dinner that he was giving, and, sitting down at 
 the piano, played a dozen of the selections. That evening the whole 
 orchestra rendered these selections one after the other, without notes, 
 to the amazement of the assembled guests. 
 
 These musicians think nothing of trying the most difficult Ger 
 man and Italian operas, and almost any native orchestra in Manila 
 can give you the overture to " Tannhaeuser " in first-rate style, or 
 anything else that you wish of a similar nature. There is little native 
 music of any sweetness or value, and the natives seem to avoid play 
 ing what they have. They never get tired of music, and they will 
 play for hours at a time practically for nothing. 
 
 THE NATIVE DANCE. 
 
 Their dancing is interesting, and, if well executed, is very grace 
 ful. One of their typical dances, known as the Comitan, is that of a 
 girl rising and dancing a pas seul with a glass of water on her head. 
 Another popular dance is accompanied by a song which is an alter 
 nate diminishing and raising of the voice, with slow movement sug 
 gesting sorrow and then coy, and rapid and energetic steps to show 
 elation. 
 
WHAT THE VIS AY A WOMEN WEAR 181 
 
 The native costumes are very interesting. In a city like Manila, 
 and in its surroundings many varieties of attire may be seen upon 
 the streets at the same time. The Spaniards wear the ordinary Euro 
 pean costumes, the British generally dress in white, and the Chinese 
 have their peculiar national dress. The pure natives and many half- 
 breeds wear a shirt which falls outside of the trousers. It is usually 
 white, with a long, stiff front, cut after the European fashion, but 
 some of the well-to-do natives wear the beautiful pina cloth, an 
 extremely fine, yellow-tinted material, woven from fibres of the 
 pineapple-tree. 
 
 A native woman wears a flowing skirt of bright colors red and 
 green and white, the length of her train and the material depending 
 entirely upon her pocket-book. They wear chemisettes, and cover 
 their shoulders and neck with a starched neckcloth of pina. To the 
 chemisette are added wide, short sleeves. The hair is brushed up 
 from the forehead without a part, and coiled tightly. The native 
 woman is very fond of jewelry. She always carries a fan, without 
 which she would feel ill at ease. She wears no stockings, and the 
 feet are covered with a kind of slipper which has no heel, and just 
 enough upper in front to put two or three toes in. She holds herself 
 badly, and is not prepossessing. The ordinary peasant woman is 
 very much more picturesque. She wears a short skirt, which is made 
 up of a rectangular piece of stuff, folded around her,and tucked in at 
 the waist. She is very erect in her walk, due probably to the fact 
 that she has balanced jars of water or baskets of fruit on her head 
 since infancy. Sometimes the better class natives wear shirt skirts of 
 silk or satin, with gold lace or embroidery, which is very becoming. 
 
 WHAT THE VISAYA WOMEN WEAR. 
 
 The Visaya woman wears a robe like that of the Javanese, which 
 is kept in place by being drawn tightly around the body, reaches to 
 the feet, and is tucked in at the waist. Sometimes she will put 
 another piece of cloth over this. 
 
 The costume of the native men, who have attended the colleges 
 in the city, are amusingly like those of the college student of Europe. 
 They dress their hair fantastically, \\ear patent leather shoes, and felt 
 
 hats carefully tilted to one side. 
 10 
 
1 8. 2 THE PEOPLE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 The native has a decided dislike of being pressed into military 
 service. He is brave if led by his superiors, or if fighting against his 
 equals ; but when he becomes convinced that his antagonist is his 
 superior, it has a depressing effect upon him. He admires bravery, 
 and has a great contempt for cowardice. Whenever he is in service 
 he is a good soldier until his leader is shot. After that he simply 
 becomes demoralized. 
 
 The Filipinos delight in pillage and destruction, and whenever 
 they are victors in a battle there is no holding them in. They resort 
 to all sorts of tricks to escape military service. For instance, a deed 
 of property showed the names of two brothers on it exactly alike. 
 Inquiry disclosed the fact that it was not a mistake, but that the two 
 brothers were given the same name for the purpose of evading mili 
 tary service. One of them had to serve, but the other escaped 
 because the Spaniards never suspected that there were two brothers 
 of the same name in the same family. This was quite a common 
 trick among the poor natives. 
 
 Such are Uncle Sam s new people. Little is known of most of 
 them; a large proportion of them have never been seen, and perhaps 
 will never be for many years. In some of the smaller islands the 
 natives are so uncivilized that cannibalism in all its horrors is still 
 rife ; arid in all of the islands brigandage and piracy are common. 
 What to do with these people is a serious question. Shall we suffer 
 the fate which Kipling so vigorously expresses 
 
 "And when your goal is nearest 
 
 (The end for others sought), 
 Watch sloth and heathen folly 
 
 Bring all your hope to naught." 
 
CHAPTER X 
 
 Fascinations and Terrors of a New Land. 
 
 The Awful Wildness of Typhoons. A Land Ruled by Volcanoes. Thousands Killed 
 by Earthquakes. All Business Suspended until Evening, owing to the Heat. \ 
 Glimpse of its Birds, Beasts and Reptiles. 
 
 THE Philippines would be a delightful place to live in, were it not 
 for two things the terrible typhoons, which sweep the coun 
 try from time to time, and the equally terrible though less fre 
 quent earthquakes, which carry death and destruction to the people 
 of the islands. One can get used to the heat in the Philippines, and 
 live a fairly comfortable and peaceful existence, if that were all, but 
 the typhoons and the earthquakes are not pleasant to even think of. 
 
 As might be imagined, the temperature on the islands is not very 
 low, but then it has the advantage of not being very variable, and 
 consequently when one gets used to the heat and accustomed to the 
 method of living there, he begins to think that after all the Philippines 
 are a pretty pleasant place to live in. The climate is very healthy, 
 and aside from the diseases which are common in all tropical places, 
 and which to a great extent can be prevented by personal carefulness, 
 the residents there are able to keep in very good physical condition 
 and enjoy life thoroughly. 
 
 FOUR PERIODS OF WEATHER IN THE PHILIPPINES. 
 
 The maximum temperature is about 98, and the minimum 75 
 degrees, both records being based on calculatians made at noon in 
 the shade. There are four periods in Manila weather, with which 
 everybody is probably familiar. Spring begins in December and con 
 tinues in January and February, and these three months form about 
 as delightful a period of existence as it is possible to contemplate. 
 March and April and May are months of intense heat, in which the 
 people work only in the early morning and in the evening, all of the 
 central portion of the day being devoted to the difficult task of keep- 
 
 183 
 
1 84 FASCINATIONS AND TERRORS OF A NEW LAND 
 
 ing cool and taking life easy. Then begins the period of heavy rain, 
 which continues for four months, June, July, August and September. 
 The remaining two months, October and November, are doubtful. 
 Sometimes they are quite as wet as the preceding months, and at 
 other times they are dry and delightful. 
 
 Very low temperature, or sudden change of temperature, is prac 
 tically unknown, and one is able to calculate pretty well what kind of 
 weather he may expect, barring the typhoons. These terrible storms 
 which lay waste the country far and wide are expected at least once a 
 year. Sometimes they are not as severe as others, and sometimes 
 they carry in their wake death and destruction incredible to the peo 
 ple of the United States. The typhoons come in the rainy season, 
 between April and the middle of December. Houses are made roof 
 less, and some of them are blown down, ships are torn from their 
 anchorage in the harbor and sometimes blown for miles to be dashed 
 upon the shore and destroyed. 
 
 THOUSANDS KILLED BY TERRIBLE TYPHOONS. 
 
 In 1882 a great typhoon swept Manila accompanied with tor 
 rents of rain, which added to the damag . A number of houses were 
 unroofed, and two Chinamen who went out in the storm for the pur 
 pose of helping themselves to a new corrugated iron roof with the 
 assistance of the storm, were found on the streets the next day with 
 their heads almost cut off, On the 6th of October, 1897, one f tne 
 most disastrous typhoons ever reported visited the Philippines. 
 Thousands of lives were lost, including many Europeans, and damage 
 to property was something appalling. The typhoon struck first at the 
 Bay of Santa Paula, in the province of Samar. Fully four hundred 
 Europeans were drowned, and it is estimated that six thousand natives 
 perished. The entire southern part of the island was devastated. 
 
 The typhoon reached Leyte and struck the capital of Taclobam 
 with great fury. In less than half an hour the town was filled 
 with ruins, the natives were panic-stricken and fled to reach clear 
 ground so they could lie down and let the storm pass over them. 
 Four hundred were buried beneath the debris of wrecked buildings, 
 and one hundred and twenty-six bodies of Europeans were picked up 
 by the authorities when the search for the dead was made. 
 
EARTHQUAKES WORK HAVOC TO LIFE AND PROPERTY 18; 
 
 During these typhoons rivers often overflow their banks and 
 extensive areas are submerged. The approach of the wind is usually 
 known through the sudden effect which its proximity has on the 
 barometer. Hours before its arrival there will be a sudden fall, while 
 if the center of the storm is near the barometer varies quickly up and 
 down, so that the observer knows what to expect. The terrible 
 winds of the typhoon are usually accompanied by tidal waves, which 
 are quite as destructive. They sweep over the land in the most un 
 expected fashion, and a vessel which before the approach of a tidal 
 wave was calmly moored in the harbor will, after it subsides, find itself 
 resting upon the top of a building some distance away. 
 
 EARTHQUAKES WORK HAVOC TO LIFE AND PROPERTY. 
 
 But even more terrible in its effects than the typhoon is the 
 earthquake, which is not at all a stranger to the Philippines. One of 
 the greatest curiosities to the American soldiers who visited Manila 
 was the ruins of a building which had been rent and destroyed by the 
 force of an earthquake. 
 
 The most serious shock, next to the war, which occurred in this 
 century, was in June, 1863. It lasted half a minute, and yet in that 
 little space of time over $8,000,000 worth of property was wrecked 
 beyond recovery, and the falling buildings rolled up a death list of 
 four hundred, while over two thousand people were injured. This 
 was in Manila alone, for Manila has, so to speak, a corner on earth 
 quakes. 
 
 The official records made at that time show that forty-six public 
 edifices were thrown down, twenty-eight were nearly destroyed, five 
 hundred and seventy private buildings were wrecked and five hun 
 dred and twenty-eight were so badly damaged as to be almost a total 
 loss. In 1880 there was an earthquake which did a great deal of 
 damage, but which caused no loss of life, and in 1881 the records show 
 twenty-three slight quakes, but the natives and even foreigners get 
 so used to these little shocks that they hardly notice them. 
 
 This upheaval of 1880 had a permanent effect upon the architec 
 ture of the city of Manila. Up to that time the larger and more 
 extensive buildings had heavy tiled roofs which caused great damage 
 and were easily destroyed. After that galvanized corrugated iron 
 
1 88 FASCINATIONS AND TERRORS OF A NEW LAND 
 
 came into general use for roofing, and now none of the larger build 
 ings in the civilized parts of the Philippines are covered with anything 
 else. Owing to the combination of heavy winds and earthquake shocks 
 the poorer natives cover their houses with " nipa" a long, broad, flat 
 leaf of the nipa-tree, a gigantic fern found almost everywhere in the 
 Philippines. The thick, pithy texture of its leaves yields sufficient 
 protection against the sun and also sheds the rain. Its drawback is 
 its liability to catch fire, and sometimes the destruction of entire towns 
 is due to the fact that the houses are roofed in nipa. 
 
 In getting possession of the Philippines the United States secured 
 the finest volcano from the standpoint of beauty in the world, as well 
 as the most active one. The former is the Mayon Volcano, in the prov 
 ince of Albay, in the extreme east of Luzon Island ; the latter is the 
 Taal Volcano, in the center of Bombon Lake, only thirty-four miles 
 due south from Manila. 
 
 THE ERUPTION OF A VOLCANO. 
 
 Clustered around the bottom of the Mayon Volcano are several 
 towns and villages, including the capital of the province Albay. In 
 1814, on February ist, this volcano burst forth in all its power. Five 
 towns were totally demolished, and the inhabitants fled into caves to 
 shelter themselves, but many were overtaken by the stones ejected 
 from the bowels of the earth, and some even by the lava which 
 flowed down the side of the mountain. Father Francisco Arago- 
 neses, who was in charge of the church there, estimated that twenty- 
 Two hundred people were killed, to say nothing of the large number 
 who were injured in this eruption. 
 
 There were other eruptions in 1887 at which only a small quan 
 tity of volcanic matter was thrown out, doing little damage. On the 
 9th of July, 1888, there was one which was much more destructive. 
 Two towns were damaged greatly, several nearby plantations were 
 destroyed, many cattle were killed and fifteen of the natives lost 
 their lives. 
 
 This beautiful mountain forms almost a perfect cone and rises in 
 the air to a distance of 8,200 feet. But the best known volcano in 
 the Philippines is the Taal, which stretches its snowy peak into the 
 air quite near to the City of Manila. It is on a little island in the 
 
7MV7 MAT 1C SCENE AT THE UPHEAVAL OF THE EARTH 189 
 
 centre of Bombon Lake, and it has been in an active condition since 
 the mind of man runneth not to the contrary. This, too, was in the 
 shape of a beautiful cone, up to the year 1749, when there was a great 
 outburst, which rent it in two, leaving the crater exposed to sight, as 
 it remains to-day. 
 
 In 1754 one of the most notable of the terrible eruptions of this 
 volcano took place, destroying the towns of Taal, Tanauan, Sala and 
 Lipa, and seriously damaging Balayan, fifteen miles distant. 
 
 The cinders from this eruption are said to have reached Manila, 
 thirty-four miles distant, as a bird flies, and one writer, in speaking 
 of this eruption thirty-six years after its occurrence, said that the peo 
 ple in Manila were forced to light their candles at midday, and walked 
 around the streets thunderstruck for eight days during which the bap 
 tism of fire was visible. The smell of the sulphur lasted for six 
 months after it was all over, and the lake waters gave up thousands 
 of dead fish and alligators. 
 
 DRAMATIC SCENE AT THE UPHEAVAL OF THE EARTH. 
 
 There is still extant a description of the priest, Francisco Ven- 
 cuchillo, preserved in the archives of the corporation of St. Augustine 
 in Manila. He tells, in detail, all about the great calamity of 1749, 
 as well as that of 1754. He noticed a strong light on the top of 
 Volcano Island about 1 1 o clock at night on the i ith of August, 1749, 
 but paid little attention to it. While he was asleep, however, a noise 
 like that of artillery firing awoke him. He thought it come from the 
 guns of a vessel expected from Mexico, but when the shots continued 
 rapidly, one after the other until he counted a hundred or more, he 
 became alarmed and imagined that some naval engagement was tak 
 ing place off the coast. Some of the natives ran to him and begged 
 him to flee, telling him that the island had burst, and when daylight 
 came an immense volume of smoke could be seen coming from the 
 top of the volcano, and here and there smaller streams of smoke rose 
 like plumes. It was a magnificent sight to see great mountains of 
 sand hurled from the lake, in the form of pyramids, and then fall back 
 again like the water from a fountain, and while he was watching this 
 spellbound, a tremor of the earth shook the convent, in which he was 
 standing, to its very foundations. 
 
190 FASCINATIONS AND TERRORS OF A NEW LAND 
 
 Pillars of sand rose out of the water near to the shore, and then 
 a second shock caught them before they had fallen and they, with 
 the trees on the island, were thrown down and submerged into the 
 lake. The land shifted, so that houses which were formerly on an 
 elevation were placed in a valley, and vice versa. The activity con 
 tinued for three weeks, and for the first three days ashes fell like 
 rain. The eruption of 1754, as this same priest chronicles it, was even 
 more terrifying to witness. It began between 9 and 10 o clock at 
 night on May i5th. Lava poured forth from the volcano in such 
 quantities that only the water of the lake kept the people from being 
 burned to death. Soon stones were hurled as far as the shore and 
 fell upon the villages there. The eruptions continued incessantly, 
 until the loth of July, when a heavy shower of mud, black as ink, 
 fell on the country round about. A suburb of Sala was swamped 
 with mud. During this phenomenon a constant noise was kept up, 
 which lasted only for a short time, but the fire still continued to belch 
 forth from the mouth of the volcano until the 25th of September. 
 On that night stones fell, and the people of Taal left their houses, 
 fearing lest the weight of these stones would crush them in. 
 
 PANIC AND RUIN FOLLOW IN THE WAKE. 
 
 On the 29th of November, beginning at 7 o clock in the evening, 
 the eruption was at its worst and the volcano threw up more fire than 
 during all the preceding seven months put together. The whole of 
 the island seemed to be a mass of molten metal, and the lava hurled 
 up seemed to reach to the very clouds. A strong wind was blowing, 
 and with the terrible noise which appeared to come from the bowels 
 of the earth, a huge mass of stones was thrown up with great violence, 
 and nearly all of the people fell prostrate and began to pray. The 
 waters of the lake rose and crept toward the houses, and the fright 
 ened inhabitants, laying hands upon whatever property they could, 
 fled for their lives, terror-stricken. Panic ruled everywhere ; people 
 wept and prayed and confessed their sins ; shouting and lamentations 
 were heard on all sides ; and then when the night was spent, and the 
 next day began, no one could tell whether the sun shone or not, for 
 darkness ruled for forty-eight hours. When light reappeared the 
 whole village of Taal had been abandoned. In some of the villages 
 
TERRORS OF PHILIPPINE JUNGLES 1 9 1 
 
 nearby the people climbed upon the house tops to throw down the 
 cinders which were threatening to crush the structure under their 
 weight. 
 
 On the 3oth of November the smoke and noise seemed greater 
 than ever. The lightning flashed, and the end of the world seemed 
 to have arrived. For a day afterward there was a period of compara 
 tive calm, and then followed a hurricane which lasted for two days. 
 The government house and stores, the prison, the state warehouses 
 and the royal rope wharf, together with the church and the convent 
 at Taal and many private houses, were completely destroyed in this 
 upheaval. 
 
 The road from Taal to Balayan was impassable for some time, 
 because of the lava. This ended the life of Taal, once the capital 
 and the greatest city of that province, and forever after it was 
 deserted, and Batangas on the coast took its place as the chief town 
 of importance and became the capital. 
 
 This volcano of Taal can be reached easily, the ascent occupying 
 about half an hour. The crater is 4,500 feet wide, and in it are three 
 separate lakes of boiling liquid, which change color from time to time. 
 At periods there appears also a lava chimney from which smoke is 
 emitted. All of the islands are of more or less volcanic origin. In 
 Negros Island, the Canlauan Volcano sometimes can be seen to be 
 in a state of eruption, and on the island of Camiguin the inhabitants 
 awoke one morning to find that the territory which was the previous 
 day a plain had become a volcanic mountain. 
 
 TERRORS OF PHILIPPINE JUNGLES. 
 
 Ordinarily, when one thinks of tropical lands, he pictures to him- 
 jself visions of poisonous reptiles and beasts of prey which render life 
 unsafe. The Philippines offer little to fear from either beast or rep 
 tile. The only beast of prey, known in the islands, is the wild cat, 
 and the only wild animal which is greatly to be feared is the buffalo. 
 The jungles and swamps are filled with snakes and lizards, centipedes, 
 spiders and tarantulas, but deaths resulting from poisonous contact 
 with any of these are comparatively few. 
 
 The natives cure the bite of a centipede with a plaster of garlic 
 crushed until the juice flows, which is renewed every hour. Rarely 
 
192 FASCINATIONS AND TERRORS OF A NEW LAND 
 
 one comes across boa constrictors, which sound very terrible, but 
 which really are the most harmless of all the snakes on the islands. 
 The most fatal of the snakes are called by the natives alupong and 
 daghong palay. Their bite is fatal if not cauterized at once. The 
 latter is found in the deep mud of the rice fields and among the tall 
 rice plants. Everywhere the stagnant waters are infested with 
 leeches, and there is a small specimen of the same family which 
 jumps into one s face in the dense forest, which, to say the least, is 
 very annoying. Perhaps the greatest nuisances on the islands 
 are the ants. They overrun everything, and are all shapes and sizes, 
 consequently most of the furniture in one s house in Manila has to 
 be protected by bowls of water to keep the ants from climbing up. 
 The ant eats its way through most of the wood, and sometimes 
 render it necessary to pull down and rebuild great warehouses, owing 
 to their inroads. Mosquitoes are troublesome, and rats and mice are 
 very plentiful. There are plenty of bats, which afford a variety of 
 sport, which is much indulged in by those who enjoy shooting. Deer 
 and wild boar are also plentiful, and monkeys can be found in the 
 forests. The great plague of locusts has already been referred to. 
 In the mud of stagnant waters there is a kind of beetle called the 
 Tanga, which the natives relish greatly as an article of food, and they 
 bring as high as fifty cents a dozen. 
 
 The wild buffalo enables those who are anxious to look for dan 
 gerous sport to enjoy a buffalo hunt. The tame buffalo, however, is 
 the great beast of burden of the Philippines. Everywhere one goes 
 he sees this plodding and awkward beast, and the native regards him 
 with the same affection that a man has in America for a horse. 
 When a tame buffalo is six years old he is considered in the prime of 
 life for hard work, and for another six years, if he is well taken care 
 of, he will be able to continue doing just as hard labor. Then for 
 five years after that, providing that he has always been very well 
 treated, he will be able to do light labor and earn his keep. 
 
 It is a common sight to see the natives in Manila down at the 
 riverside letting their buffaloes take a bath. It is an amphibious 
 animal, and if it had its own way would pass one-third of its time in 
 water or mud, and it is impossible to keep them healthy without 
 bathing them at least once a day. The buffaloes are very strong and 
 
TERRORS OF PHILIPPINE JUNGLES 193 
 
 slow, but very easy to train. The people ride them without a 
 saddle, and a child is able to guide them by means of a piece of split 
 rattan attached to a string in the nostrils of the animal. They recog 
 nize the voices of different members of the families to which they 
 belong, and will obey the command to come or stand still when 
 spoken to. 
 
 Singularly enough the Europeans do not seem to be able to 
 manage these buffaloes, as they have neither the patience, the voice 
 or the peculiar movement which the natives use to handle them. 
 The buffalo has not much endurance, and is unable to work more than 
 a couple of hours during the hot part of the day without rest and a 
 bath. If it receives a strain of any kind, or a broken leg, it rarely 
 recovers, and it is subject to an affection of the throat and diseases 
 of the blood which are sometimes epidemic and kill them off in great 
 numbers. These buffaloes are worth from $10 to $30, according to 
 the province, and to the use to which they are put. 
 
 The Philippines also have a small pony which is not indigenous, 
 and which is a fairly good little animal. Pony races take place near 
 Manila every spring, and while the meet lasts, it is a great occasion, 
 being attended by the Governor-General and all of the better-class 
 Spaniards of the city. The Philippines are filled with birds of beau 
 tiful plumage and rare coloring. Pheasants, snipe, wild ducks, wild 
 pigeons and water fowl are common ; parroquets, parrots, humming 
 birds and dozens of others abound everywhere. 
 
A NATIVE RESIDENCE IN THE SUBURBS OF MANILA. 
 
 Every cottaee however humble, is surrounded by tropical trees and flowers. The interiors are remarkably clean and cheerful 
 Bamboo enters largely into the construction of all native houses and they are generally covered with thatch. 
 
 atr I 
 
 THE STRANGE WAGONS OF ALBAY. 
 
 The eighty-odd different tribes who inhabit the Philippines have varying dialects, Banners, a 
 house-roofed waeons. shown in the above illustration, are found in only one 
 
CHAPTER XI 
 
 Manila, the Metropolis of the Philippines 
 
 A Delightful City which may become a Resort under the Stars and Stripes. High and 
 Low Life. Foreigners kept out by the Spanish as much as Possible. The 
 Chinese Class. The Splendid Big Convent. Shops that Delight the Eye. Rare 
 Fabrics Woven from Plants and Embroidered by Nuns. A New York Officer s 
 Big Purchase. A Dress that it took Months to Weave. Inside of the English 
 Club. Americans have Started a Splendid Club for the Army and Navy. The 
 Famous Mestiza Girls. 
 
 WHEN, after valiant battle, the American troops entered the 
 City of Manila, they found a curious but delightful old place 
 without any sign of having been in touch with advanced 
 civilization as it exists to-day, and bearing the ear marks of a land 
 that had come down the years holding fast to the traditions of cen 
 turies ago, and not yielding to the touch of progress. 
 
 But there is something decidedly interesting in this capital city 
 of Luzon, and a visit to it is well worth while, for the old city and the 
 new, the odd people, the curious little houses, the estates of the rich, 
 the hovels of the poor, and the customs, which are such a remarkable 
 blending of Spanish and native, all contribute to make Manila an 
 attractive temporary, if not permanent residence. 
 
 Coming up the muddy Pasig River and wending one s way 
 through cascoes and dug-outs, the traveller comes to this old fortified 
 city with its bastioncd and battlement walls built way back in 1598. 
 These walls are about two miles and a quarter long, and make the 
 city a stronghold. All around the outer wall is water on one side 
 of it the Pasig River, on the other the sea, and around the rest 
 the remnants, of an old moat, which has long ago gone into disuse, 
 and which is now filled with stagnant slime and offensive water. 
 
 There are eight drawbridge entrances to the city proper, which 
 up to 1852, were always raised at night closing the city effectually. 
 But the earthquake in that year caused a change, and thereafter the^e 
 
 197 
 
198 MANILA. THE METROPOLIS OF THE PHILIPPINES 
 
 ancient drawbridges were kept down. On the south side of the 
 river, which is the city proper, are situated some government offices, 
 branch post and telegraph offices, the colleges, convents, meteoro 
 logical observatory, and artillery depot, a cathedral and eleven 
 churches ; on the other side of the river or rather on the island of 
 Binondo, all of the business houses are situated, and this is the lively 
 part of the city. 
 
 As you enter the bay you find two passages by the little island 
 of Corregiclor, on which is a light house, a signal station and the fort 
 which sent the first shot to announce the fact that Dewey s vessels 
 had entered the harbor. 
 
 ON THE STREETS OF MANILA. 
 
 The streets of the city are badly paved and badly lighted ; 
 petroleum lamps and cocoanut oil are largely used, although in later 
 years electricity has been introduced in the more favored avenues 
 and along the docks. The first thing which impresses one on enter 
 ing the city is the lowness of the buildings. Hardly any of the resi 
 dences are more than two stories in height and even in these the 
 lower story is not used for living purposes, and is either uninhabited 
 or used as servants quarters on account of the dampness. The 
 upper story usually has a very large hall, dining and reception rooms 
 and sleeping rooms adjoining. The kitchen is often separate from 
 the rest of the house being connected by a roofed passage. The 
 ground floor is usually of stone or brick but the upper story is almost 
 entirely made of wood, with sliding windows all around. These 
 windows are filled with opaque oyster shells, instead of glass, as they 
 admit the light but not the heat of the sun s rays. 
 
 There are no very high buildings in the city owing to the earth 
 quakes. One of the interesting places is the great cathedral which 
 is probably its most imposing building, although most of the churches 
 stand out prominently because of the low structures which prevail on 
 all sides. The City Hall, a number of government buildings, the 
 palace of the Archbishop, and the Jesuit and Dominican colleges 
 are also prominent features of the city s architecture. 
 
 The city has two lines of street cars, one of which runs through 
 the Escolta which is the principal high-class business street and on 
 
ON THE L UN ETA THE ORE A T DRI VEWAY \ 99 
 
 through that portion of the city which is devoted to the residences 
 of the Spanish ; the other crosses the bridge and goes on up the 
 Rosario, and out to the suburbs. It is funny in this out of the way 
 land beyond the sea to come across street cars made in Philadelphia. 
 They are very small and are drawn by single ponies of the diminu 
 tive Philippine pattern. The approach of the car is announced by 
 the tooting of the horn of the driver. 
 
 ON THE LUNETA THE GREAT DRIVE AND PROMENADE. 
 
 Old Manila is a very quiet happy-go-lucky sort of a place, without 
 many attractions. The theatres do not amount to anything and 
 rarely have performances worth going to. Were it not for occasional 
 cockfights and for the numerous religious processions which bring 
 out large crowds, and for the drives in the afternoon, the place would 
 be very dull indeed. The great drive and promenade of the city is 
 the Luneta, which is an oval piece of ground on which have been 
 placed one or two stands for bands and chairs and benches for the 
 crowd to sit around and listen to the music. In the evening the 
 place is constantly thronged and the native bands, which are splendid 
 organizations with skilled musicians, render programmes which 
 delight the listener, and round and round this place in an apparently 
 endless stream drive the carriages of the well-to-do people of the 
 city, and the social rulers, going all the time in the same direction, 
 for it is forbidden for anybody, except the Governor or Archbishop, 
 to drive in the opposite direction. 
 
 Here, on the Luneta, many a tragic scene has been enacted, for 
 this ground of pleasure was also the execution place of the Spanish. 
 Here they mowed down, before the gaze of a motley crowd of on 
 lookers, the insurgents who had been condemned to death, and here, 
 on the sea-wall, hundreds of poor unfortunates gave up their lives 
 for their country. 
 
 On the Escolta, the chief business street, are the high-class stores 
 of the city, that is the stores which keep European and American 
 goods, which are very expensive owing to the high tax that is put on 
 them when they are brought in. In these, very tempting things are 
 displayed more for the Spanish residents and other foreigners, than 
 for the natives. 
 
200 MANILA, THE METROPOLIS OF THE PHILIPPINES 
 
 The latter deal almost entirely with Chinese merchants, who 
 occupy the nearby streets and especially the Rosario across the river 
 which is lined from one end to the other with Chinese stores. They 
 sell everything on earth that could be desired by the native and 
 hqre the common people jostle each other and shop and enjoy them 
 selves. 
 
 The sights in this quarter of the city are very interesting. The 
 gay colors of the native costumes, mixing with those of the China 
 men, here and there the uniform of a Spanish soldier, occasionally a 
 fair senorita driving by in her carriage, now and then some man 
 wearing the garb of a religious order, and at the present time the 
 ever-present uniform of the American soldier who has found in this 
 quarter of the city the most attractive place for buying and for 
 mingling with the natives and learning their curious habits. 
 
 The whole of Binondo across the river is usually pretty active. 
 It is there that the British merchants have their import and export 
 headquarters and a large part of the trade passes through their 
 hands. It is a funny experience to go through these Chinese Bazaars 
 or stores to buy. One proprietor probably owns three or four stores 
 and sometimes ten or twelve, consequently if a customer does not like 
 the price asked for an article he goes on to the next place and does 
 no better, because the first man has run around the back way and told 
 the other man how much he has asked for the article and so, being 
 under one management, this one charges the same, so finally the 
 customer pays the price asked. 
 
 The Chinese control such things as bootmaking, furniture mak 
 ing, casting, painting, dyeing, while the natives are the silversmiths, 
 the furniture polishers, the bookbinders, etc. The Germans had a 
 monopoly of the drug stores not long ago, but the educated natives 
 and half-castes have entered the field and are now largely controlling 
 the business. 
 
 HACKMEN WHO DO NOT IMPOSE ON TRAVELERS. 
 
 When one wants to go around the city, he hires a carriage and 
 Filipino pony, at a very moderate rate, and wonderful to relate, the 
 driver will not try to cheat you. He charges you so much a mile, 
 and very rarely overcharges. 
 
HOLIDAYS ARE PLENTIFUL 201 
 
 During Holy Thursday and Good Friday of Easter week, the 
 whole business of the town is absolutely suspended. Carriages, or 
 any other vehicles are not allowed on the streets ; the shops are 
 closed and the whole city is still. Even the soldiers who are on duty 
 are forced to point the muzzles of their guns to the ground as they 
 walk along. All of the people who appear on the streets wear 
 black, even the natives. There is an imposing religious procession 
 on Good Friday afternoon, which winds through the city and out 
 into the suburbs. All the church-bells are tolled with muffled ham 
 mers until after the following Saturday morning s, mass. It is a 
 curious sight to see the expectant throng of people waiting for the 
 signal of unmuffled bells to announce that the feast is over. In all 
 the alleys and by-ways, public and private vehicles are ready, and the 
 minute the bells are rung, the streets become an active, shouting, 
 jumbled mass of humanity, trying to make up for lost time in their 
 business. 
 
 WHERE HOLIDAYS ARE PLENTIFUL. 
 
 The religious feasts and processions are so common that I have 
 heard it stated that out of the 365 days in the year, 160 are holidays 
 of some sort or other, chiefly Saints days. Each village and each 
 suburb, both in the capital and outside of it, is supposed to be looked 
 after by some patron Saint, which has his special day, and every 
 annual feast is taken as an excuse for a big procession. 
 
 IN A MANILA HOTEL A MANILA BED. 
 
 There are in Manila two hotels, which are considered very good 
 as hotels go. It takes a European some time to get used to the 
 cooking of native dishes, and it takes him still longer to get used to 
 the Philippine idea of comfort while asleep. It is no small task to 
 wrestle with a Philippine bed, which is springless, unyielding and 
 anything but comfortable. It has four high posts covered with lace 
 curtains, and usually a mosquito bar. Where an American bed 
 boasts springs, it has a rattan surface, similar to that of a rattan 
 chair, which is extremely hard, and the thin mat which is placed over 
 it and the hard pillow and almost as hard bolster which are given one 
 to sleep on are not conducive to rest. It is rather a serious task to 
 get into one of these beds without allowing the mosquitoes to pre- 
 
202 MANILA, THE METROPOLIS OF THE PHILIPPINES 
 
 cede you, but one gets the hang of it after awhile and manages to 
 get to sleep. From i to 3 o clock in the afternoon most people are 
 asleep. Lunch hour all over the colony is noon, and the visiting 
 hours are from 5 till 7 in the evening. Dinner is served at about 
 8 o clock, and after that the more formal functions take place. 
 
 The social class distinction is not as rigidly carried out in Manila 
 as it is in some of the British Colonies, India for example. The 
 Spaniards exchange visits with some of the Mestiza class, and even 
 with some of the wealthier of the natives. Everybody is hospitable 
 as a rule to visitors. The government officials, however, have never 
 encouraged the visits of foreigners to Manila ; in fact, they have 
 done their best to discourage them. Nevertheless there is quite a 
 large colony of foreigners, all of them representatives of business 
 firms, who do heavy trade with the islands. 
 
 Everywhere you go in Manila (or at least this was true during the 
 Spanish regime), one would have a lottery ticket poked in his face. 
 The lotteries were in control of the Spanish government, and they 
 made a revenue amounting to half a million dollars annually from 
 the sale of tickets. 
 
 COCKFIGHTING IN MANILA. 
 
 The Filipinos have a great passion for cockfighting, and this 
 too was in control of the government, which received from it a very 
 large return. Cockfighting is allowed only on Sundays and feast 
 days, and, by special permission in Manila alone, on Thursdays. The 
 tax for a pit is rented out to the highest bidder for a fixed sum. The 
 laws in regard to this sport are very strict. The maximum amount 
 which may be staked by any one person in one contest is $50, and it 
 is regulated that the bird shall wear but one metal spur. The sport 
 causes the same enthusiasm among the natives as horse racing does 
 in England, and they will spend years training a bird which perhaps 
 might be killed in the very first fight. 
 
 Much has been written about bullfights, which always took place 
 at Placo. They were very mild affairs, at worst, and attracted a very 
 inferior quality of the natives. Most of the fights were ludicrous 
 instead of interesting, in which the fighters would go up and twist 
 the tail of the bull or vault over his head as he came toward them in 
 a mad rush, amid the hoots of the crowd. 
 
WEA VING PIN A CLOTH IN THE CONVENTS 20 j 
 
 There are five daily papers in Manila, three of which are con 
 sidered good. This does not include the new paper which has just 
 been founded by the army boys from the United States, which is a 
 lively little sheet devoted to American interests. 
 
 One of the places which the American officers found open to 
 them, and in which they have enjoyed many a pleasant evening, was 
 the European Club, which occupies a very handsome place on the 
 right bank of the Pasig River, about twenty minutes drive from 
 Manila. The controlling spirits in this organization are the English- 
 speaking people employed in the big commercial houses, but a num 
 ber of the prominent Spanish residents are also members of the 
 club. As soon as the American troops landed on the island and took 
 possession of Manila, the first thing the army men decided to do was 
 to establish an American club, and negotiations were entered into for 
 
 o 
 
 a splendid property in the residence section of the city, which doubt 
 less by this time have been completed and the first steps taken for 
 the introduction of American club life into the Philippines. 
 
 WEAVING PINA CLOTH IN THE CONVENTS. 
 
 There is more curiosity on the part of American soldiers in the 
 weaving of the Filipinos than in anything else. The beautiful pina 
 cloth, which is woven from the pineapple fibre, is a fabric which 
 arouses the envy of every man who has a wife, sister or sweetheart in 
 America. The weaving is done in the convents, and there hundreds 
 of the natives, guarded by the nuns, work from morn until dewy eve, 
 turning out the finest fabric and the most beautiful embroidery pos 
 sible. 
 
 They embroider birds in natural plumage, flowers so natural that 
 one thinks the odor will come from them, and fanciful designs that 
 would cause the average American girl to catch her breath and break 
 the commandment which forbids covetousness. One rich New York 
 man, who is a volunteer officer, ordered a magnificently embroidered 
 gown for his daughter. It cost a fortune, and people came from far 
 and near to look at the material while it was being made, and for the 
 two months during which these convent workers toiled over that 
 beautiful fabric, it was the show piece of the whole city and one of 
 the great attractions to all who were there. 
 
204 MANILA, THE METROPOLIS OF THE PHILIPPINE^ 
 
 The dainty handkerchiefs, embroidered with a skill that is won 
 derful ; the magnificent screens of sandalwood, carved by native 
 artists and containing fabric woven with the hands of experts ; the 
 equally dainty fans of sandalwood, covered with cloth and embroi 
 dered true to nature ; the curious spoons wrought by the native 
 workers, the magnificent silks offered at low prices by the Chinese 
 merchants, all were tempting inducements to the army boys, and 
 thousands of dollars were given in exchange for these gifts to be sent 
 home. 
 
 Perhaps more is known of the Mestiza girls than of any other 
 inhabitants of the island. They are the half-caste people, who are 
 really the prettiest types of women on the island. They have long flow 
 ing, hair which reaches almost to the ground, and its shiny blackness 
 makes it beautiful to see. They too are the most graceful and noted 
 of the dancers of the island, and there is scarcely a social function in 
 which they do not figure conspicuously. 
 
 Such is the life in this, the leading city of our new possession. 
 It is the abiding place of about 300,000 people, of which 200,000 are 
 natives, 90,000 are Chinese and Chinese half-castes, 5,000 are Span 
 ish and 3,000 white foreigners other than Spaniards. 
 
 It is the nearest mart to the civilized world outside. From it 
 run the monthly Spanish mail steamers and the smaller boats which 
 go to Hong Kong. Who knows what the future may bring forth for 
 this, the chief town of the Philippines, in its ripe old age ? Who 
 knows how many ships will come and go under the policy of the open 
 door ? Who can tell what wealth will sail from out her ports now that 
 the arsenal, there flies the Stars and Stripes ? 
 
CHAPTER XII 
 
 Other Important Cities of the Islands 
 
 A Sight-seeing Trip to Iloilo, Second in Commercial Importance to Manila Cebu, 
 which once Outranked it, Leyte and other Places of Importance. Scenes and 
 Incidents among the Strange Population. The Terrible Sultan of Sulu. Super 
 stitions of the Moros. Funny Episodes of a very Lively Trip. 
 
 A VISIT to Iloilo, the second city of importance in the Philippines 
 is extremely disappointing after one has been to Manila. The 
 little mail steamer that takes you to the island of Panay, of 
 which Iloilo is the capital, is a dingy little affair, but even it seems out 
 of place as it comes to anchor in front of the shabby-looking creek on 
 which Iloilo is situated. The shore is almost as nature made it, 
 except for slight embankments of soil which have been thrown up to 
 protect some of the produce houses against the water. 
 
 There is neither wharf nor improvements, and the steamers get 
 as near the shore as it is possible for them to go, and then land their 
 passengers over a plank which extends from the deck to the shore 
 itself. It is a low, forbidding-looking place, this Iloilo. It is hot 
 all of the time, and in addition to this it is dirty and badly cared 
 for. From the point where the creek enters into the sea up to the 
 square in the centre of the city there is a series of sheds, used to 
 store sugar in, punctuated here and there by offices of commercial 
 firms. The largest buildings in the place are the headquarters of the 
 various tradespeople who have made Iloilo what it is. Not many 
 years ago this town was unknown to the commercial world, and the 
 annual crop of sugar which it drew from the island was practically 
 allowed to go to waste because the expense of carrying it up to 
 Manila left little profit for the owners of plantations, and did not 
 encourage them to engage largely in business. 
 
 Then came the change. A number of English and German 
 business men saw the opportunity for reaping a rich harvest from 
 this very fruitful little isle, and they established headquarters there and 
 
 205 
 
206 OTHER IMPORTANT CITIES OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 had direct communication with foreign ports. The result was that the 
 unknown village of Iloilo soon surpassed Cebu in trade and became 
 a town second only to Manila in size and in business importance. 
 
 IN THE ILL-KEPT SQUARE OF ILOILO. 
 
 In the square, which is, like most of the city, in a perpetually 
 bad condition, are the church, the tribunal, the convent and a few 
 small houses. At one side of this square is a new block of buildings 
 made of brick, stone and wood, with iron roof, really the most 
 respectable part of the city in appearance. The main street is the 
 Calle Real, which does not run in a straight line, but winds its way 
 out into the country. The houses make no pretence to beauty. 
 They are of all shapes and sizes, and as for a building line on the 
 streets such a thing is comparatively unknown, and in some places 
 one has to walk .off the pavement out into the middle of the road to 
 pass a house. 
 
 All around are rows of dirty-looking little houses which are 
 inhabited by the poorer class. Perhaps the most striking building in 
 the place is the Government house, which is made of stone and wood. 
 In front of it is a little garden in the shape of a semicircle, and in 
 front of this is a little round fenced-in piece of ground, in the middle 
 of which is a flag-pole. About one-third of the business quarter of 
 the town is built on land which some years before was nothing but a 
 swamp, and has been reclaimed by being filled up with earth. 
 
 All during the wet season the place is a mass of shallow pools 
 and mud. It is a pretty expensive place to live in, and there is little 
 to do after one gets there. One cannot hire any conveyance of any 
 kind, and there are no theatres or places of amusement, unless a 
 bowling alley may be classed under the latter head. The streets are 
 practically deserted, except for bullock-carts filled with sugar cane. 
 
 Sugar is the chief stimulus to the life of the city. One can guess 
 that readily, because the odor of it pervades the whole place. After 
 the insurgents obtained possession of Iloilo, ruin and devastation 
 played havoc with the town. It became more unkempt and uninvit 
 ing than before, and when the American troops captured it, it was 
 reeking with filth. At the other end of the island is the town of 
 Concepcion, near which there are many exceedingly fertile sugar 
 
THE FAMOUS "HOLY CHILD OF CEBU" 20; 
 
 plantations. It is even a more despondent-looking place than the 
 capital city. The whole place is dilapidated, the people are poverty- 
 stricken, and, altogether, it is neither convenient nor pleasant to live 
 in. From Concepcion it is but a short journey to Cebu, on the east 
 coast of the island of the same name. Years ago this was a flourish 
 ing and important commercial center. It possesses considerable 
 interests, inasmuch as it was the first place upon which the Spanish 
 settled in the Philippines, and from 1565 to 1571 it was the capital of 
 the whole colony. 
 
 Now it has a population of about 10,000. It forms quite a con 
 trast to its rival, Iloilo, in that it is clean and well kept, and the roads 
 which lead from it are in a very good condition for some miles. The 
 city has a customhouse and is open to trade with the foreign coun 
 tries. It has a cathedral, the Church of St. Nicholas, the chapels of 
 the Paulist Fathers and the Jesuits and the Church of the Santo 
 Nino, "the Holy Child of Cebu." 
 
 THE FAMOUS " HOLY CHILD OF CEBU." 
 
 This church is perhaps the most famous of all the religious 
 places in the whole archipelago. It was on this spot that an image 
 of the Christ Child was alleged to have been found in July, 1565, by 
 a soldier named Juan de Camus. This image was venerated and kept 
 by the Austin friars as though it were a sacred gift direct from Heaven. 
 A fire occurred in the church in which the image stood in 1627, but 
 the image itself was saved, and has been ever since considered the 
 most wonderful of all the sacred relics of the island. 
 
 It is made of wood, is black, and is about fifteen inches in height. 
 As it exists to-day, it is almost covered with valuable trinkets which 
 have been presented to it. When it is shown to the public the occa 
 sion is always one of great festivity, and the image is worshiped with 
 a fervor that is almost incredible. In fact, during the feasts held in 
 its honor, natives come from all parts of the island to prostrate them 
 selves before it. 
 
 In this city, too, is the spot where the first cross was erected 
 upon the island on the day when Legaspi landed. This sacred relic 
 also has the reputation of having been miraculously preserved. It 
 is made of bamboo, and although the edifice in which it was placed 
 
208 OTHER IMPORTANT CITIES OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 was once burned to the ground, this cross rose unscathed from the 
 flames, according to tradition, and is still worshiped second only to 
 the wonderful image. 
 
 The channel which leads up to the city is marked by buoys, and 
 there are four lighthouses which show the entrance to the port. 
 Right in front of the city is Magtan Island, on which has been erected 
 a monument to show the spot where Magellan, the discoverer of the 
 Philippines, met his death by being mixed up with a conflict between 
 two of the native chiefs. 
 
 Not far back of the city is a range of hills, from the top of 
 which the view is extremely beautiful. In the ward of Pampango 
 there still remains the old fortress of San Vidal, which was built 
 when the Spanish first formed a settlement there. The Chinese shops 
 are in the Lutao district, and the half-caste shops are chiefly grouped 
 in the Parian, which was at one time the most important part of the 
 city, but which has lately fallen in decay. 
 
 At Guadaloupe and Mabolo are the big cemeteries of the city, 
 and at the end of the road leading to the former is the place where 
 shooting contests and the annual pony races take place. On the way 
 to Mabolo there is the hospital for lepers, those poor unfortunates, 
 who sent over, sarcastically no doubt, as a gift from the Emperor of 
 China, are still to be found both in Manila and in this, the original 
 settlement of the Spanish, living out their loathsome lives, confined 
 rigorously under the law, and a public charge until death comes to 
 their relief. 
 
 The city has vice-consulates representing America, Great Britain, 
 Italy and Germany, and there is quite a little colony of foreign resi 
 dents there who are engaged in commerce. It is the residence of 
 the Brigadier-Governor of the Visayas and of the Governor of the 
 island. 
 
 The climate of the island is very healthy, and altogether it is a 
 delightful place to live in. The whole population of the island is 
 about 600,000. 
 
 But by far the most interesting, and, it may be added, the most 
 troublesome of the residents of the archipelago, are those in the 
 domain of the Sultan of Sulu. Since the Spaniards first landed on 
 the Philippine Islands there has been more slaughter and more 
 
AN AGREEMENT WITH THE SULTAN OF SULU 209 
 
 trouble from this little group of islands than from any of the larger 
 islands, excepting perhaps Luzon. The very first overtures made to 
 the ruler of the region round about Sulu resulted in the decapitation 
 of the General who was sent to make the overtures, and the return 
 of his body to the Governor at Manila, and that seemed to be the 
 fate of all the first emissaries of the Spanish Government to this ter 
 rible Sultan. 
 
 And not only was he a terror to the Spanish, but he ruled over 
 a people famous far and near as brigands and pirates. These natives, 
 who call themselves Moros, but whom the Spanish call Mussulmans, 
 are still as wild as they were in the old days, for civilization has had 
 apparently no effect on them. 
 
 For over two centuries and a half their war junks visited every 
 part of the adjoining islands and laid waste the territory. Thousands 
 of the colonists were murdered, and others suffered a fate worse than 
 death by being kept as slaves and made to serve the caprices of their 
 captors. Villages and churches were destroyed, and for many years 
 nothing was safe in the archipelago. They did not even stop at 
 Luzon ; and it is still in the minds of some who are alive how the 
 approach of the pirates in the Bay of Manila struck terror into the 
 hearts of the people. It was not until 1860 that any check at all 
 could be put upon this reign of terror, but in that year eighteen 
 steam gunboats, which cruised around the waters in the neighborhood, 
 brought some degree of safety to the colonists, and piracy, as a 
 wholesale business, became a thing of the past. 
 
 AN AGREEMENT WITH THE SULTAN OF SULU. 
 
 Many years before this occurred, the Sultan of Sulu entered into 
 a compact with the Spanish authorities by which he acknowledged 
 the sovereignty of the King of Spain, but this amounted only to as 
 much as the parchment it was written on, for the Sultan of Sulu did 
 as he pleased ; and even if he personally were disposed to be friendly 
 to the Spaniards, there was always a rival willing to take up the lance 
 against him and oust him from his throne. 
 
 And so things went on until 1876, when the uprisings of the 
 people attained such proportions that an expedition was necessary to 
 enforce submission. A large body of troops, headed by Vice-Admiral 
 
2io OTHER IMPORTANT CITIES OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 Malcampo, went to the islands, marched into the interior and inciden- 
 tally into ambush, so that sacrifice of life was great. It, however, 
 accomplished a little, and the Spanish flag was raised in several places, 
 where it was still flying, before the United States came into posses 
 sion of the islands. 
 
 RULER OVER ONE HUNDRED AND FORTY ISLANDS. 
 
 The domain under the rule of the Sultan comprises Sulu Island, 
 which is about thirty-four miles long and twelve miles wide, and one 
 hundred and forty smaller islands, half or more of which are not 
 inhabited. The number of people embraced in the Sultan s dominion 
 is about 107,000. Besides these, there is a half-caste branch of Mus 
 sulmans, nominally under this Sultan s rule, who inhabit the southern 
 half of Palauan Island. 
 
 The present Sultan did not inherit the throne, but was practi 
 cally elected by his own people. In 1885, when the rightful heir to 
 the Sultanate was sent for to come to Manila to receive his investi 
 ture, he declined to comply, probably having in mind the fate of his 
 predecessors who went to Manila for the same purpose and were 
 made prisoners, and finally lost their lives. So the Spanish authori 
 ties announced that they would confer the Sultanate upon anybody 
 the people elected. 
 
 An election was held, and when the throne was offered to the 
 man chosen, he accepted and took the oath of allegiance to the King 
 of Spain on the 24th of September, 1886. He was then given the 
 title of His Excellency Paduca Majasari Malauna Amiril Maumi- 
 nin Sultan Harun Narrasid. In addition to this he was given 
 the [rank and grade of a Spanish Lieutenant-General. The Sultan 
 had hardly become settled in his new office before the leaders of what 
 is called the National party, which is a party opposed to the acknow 
 ledgment of the dominion of Spain over the islands, rose up in arms 
 against him. The insurrection spread to the adjoining islands of 
 Siassi and Bongao. The chief of the latter island, whose name was 
 Pandan, was arrested, and the garrison of Sulu was greatly reinforced 
 and strengthened in the great expectation of a general uprising. In 
 the meantime one of the most cruel of the Mussulman chiefs named 
 Utto openly defied Spanish authority. Consequently an expedition 
 
A FORTUNE SPENT IN SUBJUGATION 211 
 
 was sent out against him, and after two months of vigorous fighting, 
 peace was declared between the two, and the event was the sign for 
 a great celebration at Manila, the feast lasting for some days. 
 
 Yet, notwithstanding the fact that, whatever expedition is sent 
 against these savage tribes is successful, as far as victory in conflict is 
 concerned, it is still true that little effect has been made upon the 
 Mussulmans from the standpoint of civilization. They decline to learn 
 either civilized religion or civilized ways, and, although kept down in 
 places by force of arms, nevertheless, the moment the back of 
 authority is turned, they instinctively turn to their weapons and sav 
 agery wins the day. 
 
 A FORTUNE SPENT IN SUBJUGATION. 
 
 It has cost a fortune for the Spaniards to gain the little foothold 
 which they have had ; and yet, even then, it was not safe for Spanish 
 officers to wander very far out of town without a strong body-guard. 
 
 Under the present state of things, that is, the state of things 
 that existed before the possession of the islands by the United States, 
 the Sultan of Sulu received a salary of $2,400 from the Government 
 of Spain. He was practically the lord and master of all his subjects 
 and all that they owned. He was supported by three ministers, a 
 Minister of War, a Minister of Justice, and another one who acts in 
 his capacity when he leaves. 
 
 John Foreman tells of a very interesting trip which he made in 
 1 88 1 to the Sultan of Sulu. The danger of such a trip may be 
 imagined when it is stated that a young officer had been sent on 
 some mission just outside of the town accompanied by two guards, 
 and had returned with one of his hands cut off as a souvenir of a 
 brush with the Mussulmans ; a number of military officers were sitting 
 in a cafe in the town when a number of Mussulmans came up behind 
 them and cut their throats. Both of these events took place a day 
 or two before Mr. Foreman s trip. Describing his visit, Mr. Fore 
 man said : 
 
 " On our arrival at Maybun, we went first to the bungalow of a 
 Chinaman the Sultan s brother-in-law where we refreshed ourselves 
 with our own provisions and learned the gossip of the place. On 
 inquiry, we were told that the Sultan was sleeping, so we waited at 
 
212 OTHER IMPORTANT CITIES OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 the Chinaman s. I understood this man was a trader, but there were 
 no visible signs of his doing any business. Most of our party slept the 
 siesta, and at about 4 o clock we called at the palace. It was a very 
 large building, well constructed, and appeared to be built almost 
 entirely of materials of his country. A deal of bamboo and wood 
 were used in it, and even the roof was made of split bamboo, although 
 I am told that this was replaced by sheet iron when the young Sultan 
 came to the throne. The vestibule was very spacious, and all 
 around pleasantly decorated with lovely shrubs and plants peculiar 
 to most mid-tropical regions. The entrance to the palace is always 
 open, and we were received by three Dattos, who saluted us in a 
 formal way, and, without needing to ask us any Question, invited us, 
 with a wave of the hand, to follow into the throne-room. 
 
 IN THE PRESENCE OF THE SULTAN. 
 
 " The Sultan was seated, on our entering, but when the bearer 
 of the despatches approached with the official interpreter by his side, 
 and with us following, he rose in his place to greet us. 
 
 " His Excellency was dressed in very tight silk trousers, fastened 
 partly up the sides with showy chased gold "or gilt buttons, a short 
 Eton-cut olive green jacket, with an infinity of buttons, white socks, 
 ornamented slippers, a red sash around his waist, a kind of turban, 
 and a kris at his side. One could almost have imagined him to be a 
 Spanish bullfighter with an Oriental finish-off. 
 
 " We all bowed low, and the Sultan, surrounded by his Sultanas, 
 put his hands to his temples, and, on lowering them, he bowed at the 
 same time. We remained standing, whilst some papers were handed 
 to him. He looked at them a few words were said in Spanish, to 
 the effect that the bearers saluted His Excellency in the name of the 
 Governor of Sulu. The Sultan passed the documents to the official 
 interpreter, who read or explained them in Sulu language ; then a 
 brief conversation ensued, through the interpreter, and the business 
 was really over. There was a pause, and the Sultan motioned to us 
 to repose on cushions on the floor, and we did so. The cushions, 
 covered with rich silks, were very comfortable. Servants, in fantastic 
 costumes, were constantly in attendance, serving betel nut to those 
 who cared to chew it. 
 
A GLIMPSE OF HIS SULTANAS 213 
 
 " One Sultana was fairly pretty, or had been so, but the remain 
 der were heavy, languid and lazy in their movements ; and their 
 teeth, dyed black, did not embellish their personal appearance. The 
 Sultan made various inquiries, and passed many compliments on us, 
 the Governor, Governor-General and others, which were conveyed 
 to us through the interpreter. Meanwhile, the Sultanas chatted 
 amongst themselves, and I guessed they must have been criticizing 
 us as much as we were observing their guise, features, attire, etc. 
 They all wore light colored "dual garments" of great width and 
 tight bodices. Their coiffure was carefully finished, but unfortu 
 nately a part of the forehead was hidden by an ugly fringe of hair a 
 disfigurement which, however, is common among Hongkong Eura 
 sians and some European ladies. 
 
 " We had so little in common to converse on, and that little 
 had to be said through an interpeter, that we were rather glad when 
 we were asked to take refreshments. They at least served to relieve 
 the awkward feeling of looking at each other in silence. Chocolate and 
 ornamental sweetmeats were brought to us, but what frightful mix 
 ture the chocolate was, I could not tell, I believe it was made with 
 cocoanut oil, and to avoid a scene consequent on an indisposition, I 
 elected to leave it. 
 
 "We were about to take our departure, when the Sultan invited 
 us to remain all night in the palace. The leader of our party caused 
 to be explained to him that we were thankful for his gracious offer, 
 but that being so numerous, we feared to disturb His Excellency by 
 intruding so far on his hospitality. Still the Sultan politely insisted, 
 and whilst the interpretation was being transmitted, I found an 
 opportunity to let our chief know that I had a burning anxiety to 
 stay at the palace for the curiosity. In any case, we were a large 
 number to go anywhere, so our leader, in reply to the Sultan, said, 
 that he and four of his accompaniment would take advantage of His 
 Excellency s kindness. 
 
 44 We withdrew from the Sultan s presence, and walked 
 through the town in company with some functionaries of the Royal 
 household. There was nothing very striking in the town ; it was 
 like most others. There were some good bungalows of bamboo and 
 thatching. I noticed that men, women and children were smoking 
 
214 OTHER IMPORTANT CITIES OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 tobacco or chewing and had no visible occupation. Many of the 
 smaller dwellings were built on piles out to the sea. We saw a 
 number of divers preparing to go off to get pearls, mother-of-pearl, 
 etc. They are very expert in the occupation, and dive as deep as 
 one hundred feet. Prior to the plunge, they go to a grotesque per 
 formance of waving their arms in the air and twisting their bodies in 
 order as they say to frighten away the sharks ; then with a whoop, 
 they leap over the edge of the prahu, and continue to throw their 
 arms and legs about for the purpose mentioned. They often dive 
 for the shark and rip it up with a kris. 
 
 A NIGHT IN THE SULTAN S PALACE. 
 
 " Five of us retired to the palace that night, and were at once 
 conducted to our rooms. There was no door to my room ; it was, strictly 
 speaking, an alcove. During the night, at intervals of about every 
 hour, as it seemed to me, a palace servant or guard came to inquire 
 how the senor was sleeping, and if I were comfortable, duerme el 
 senor? (does the gentleman sleep?) was apparently the limit of his 
 knowledge of Spanish. I did not clearly understand more than the 
 fact that the man was a nuisance, and I regretted there was no door 
 with which to shut him out. The next morning we paid our respects 
 to His Highness, who furnished us with an escort more as a com 
 pliment than a necessity and we reached Sulu town again, after a 
 very enjoyable ride through a superb country." 
 
 " These Sulu Islanders have no compunctions of conscience 
 about killing people, and the habit seems to be so deeply rooted in 
 them, that it cannot be eradicated. Mr. Foreman illustrates this as 
 follows : In 1884, a Mussulman was found on a desolate isle lying 
 off the Antigue coast (Panay Island), and of course, had no docu 
 ments of identity, so he was arrested and confined in the jail of San 
 Jose de Buenavista. It was rather a rough way of treating any 
 unfortunate castaway. From prison he was eventually taken to the 
 residence of the Spanish Governor, a very humane gentleman, and a 
 personal friend of mine. There he worked for some little time 
 among the other domestics. 
 
 " In the study of Don Manuel, the Governor, there was a collec 
 tion of native arms, which took the fancy of the Mussulman. One 
 
A GO VERNOR S FIGHT FOR LIFE 2 1 5 
 
 morning he seized a kris and lance, and, bounding into the breakfast 
 room, capered about, gesticulated and brandished the lance in the air 
 much to the amusement of the Governor, and his guests. But in an 
 instant the fellow (hitherto a mystery, but undoubtedly a juramen- 
 tado), hurled the lance with great force towards the public prosecutor, 
 and the missile, after severing his watch-chain, lodged in the side of the 
 table. The Governor and the public prosecutor at once closed with 
 the would-be assassin, whilst the Governor s wife, with great presence 
 of mind, thrust a table knife into the culprit s body between the 
 shoulder blade and the collar bone. The man fell as if dead, and, 
 when all supposed that he was so, he suddenly jumped up. No one 
 had thought of taking the kris out of his grasp, and he rushed around 
 the apartment, severely cut two of the servants, but was ultimately 
 despatched by the bayonets of the guards who arrived on hearing the 
 scuffle. The Governor showed me his wounds, which were slight, 
 but his life was saved by the valor of his wife Dona Justa." 
 
 " The costumes worn by the Sulu Islanders are very original and 
 striking. The women wear gay colors, with a preference for green 
 and scarlet. Their skirt, if such it may be called, or double lower 
 garment, is very loose, and their upper clothing is extremely tight. 
 Their hair is worn in a coil on the top of the head, and they are very 
 much better looking than most of the people of the Philippines. 
 They are extremely fond of jewelry, and their hands and ears are 
 filled with rings, sometimes of metal, but more often of sea-shells. 
 
 The men wear costumes which are equally as bright as those of 
 the women, but the fit of the costume is reversed, that is, their upper 
 garment is very loose, while their lower ones are as tight as a gymnast s. 
 Their whole attire is plentifully sprinkled with buttons, and to crown 
 it all, they add a turban, which is very picturesque, and which tells 
 their rank by the way in which it is tied. They are strong, agile, 
 and rather attractive looking savages, and extremely brave. For 
 weapons they have daggers, lance-heads, and so on, manufactured on 
 the anvil, showing a certain knowledge of the arts, and an expertness 
 of workmanship. The most curious thing they use, is a coat of mail, 
 made of buffalo horn and wire, the latter probably obtained from 
 Singapore. It protects splendidly against arrows or sword thrusts 
 but not bullets. They are great pearl fishers, and the Sultan claims a 
 
Ji6 OTHER IMPORTANT CITIES OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 right to all of the pearls which are of an unusually large size. They 
 are very devout according to their own ideas of religion, and their 
 priests are usually the most influential men in the various tribes. 
 They have one day in the week devoted absolutely to worship, in 
 which they all go to their temples and listen to the prayers and recita 
 tions of their priests. 
 
 A NATIVE FUNERAL. 
 
 On the birth or death of a child or some other important event 
 they have a very solemn ceremonial. They keep a New Year s feast 
 and during the year they have several days of fasting. All of the 
 young men above fifteen years of age are supposed to be enrolled in 
 the service of the Sultan, and are forced to carry arms. The priests 
 are the doctors as well. Whenever a chief dies they chant a funeral 
 hymn, and the bereaved family goes about lamenting, accompanied by 
 the noise of symbals and gongs. The neighbors rush in and join in 
 the general lament, and as soon as that is over, they all sit down to a 
 feast. The body is sprinkled with salt and camphor, but is buried 
 with very little ceremony. The grave is marked by a stone or 
 wooden tablet, and a slip of board of bamboo is placed around it, and 
 a piece of wood carved like the bows of a canoe is stuck in the earth 
 nearby, with a cocoanut shell full of water in front of it. 
 
 The town of Sulu proper is built on the plain not very much 
 above sea level. Its barracks are as fine as those in Manila. There 
 are some houses of stone and brick, and others of wood, with corru 
 gated iron roofs. The church is unpretentious. There are tasteful 
 gardens and squares around, and the whole city is well laid out and 
 well drained. 
 
 " It is supplied with water conducted in pipes from a spring 
 about a mile and a quarter away. By this, and the excellent drain 
 age, the place has become very healthful, although once it was a hot 
 bed of fever. Around the town is a wall, constructed for defence, 
 with two forts outside and three inside. It is a lively, interesting 
 town, and a nice place to live in as long as one remains inside of the 
 fortifications. 
 
 The inhabitants of the Sulu Islands are exceedingly supersti 
 tious. They are naturally afraid of anything they do not know all 
 about, and consequently all travelers in that country report that it 
 
A NATIVE WEDDING 21; 
 
 is exceedingly difficult to get photographs of them, as they turn 
 and flee whenever the camera is pointed at them. They think, 
 according to some of the travelers, that they would die in a short 
 time if photographed. 
 
 A NATIVE WEDDING. 
 
 Dean C. Worcester, in his excellent work on the Philippine 
 Islands, describes a native wedding, which is exceedingly interesting. 
 He says : 
 
 " By exercising considerable diplomacy we contrived to get 
 admission. We were shown into a large, poorly-lighted room, which 
 had a good floor of hewn timber. The well-to-do Moros of the whole 
 region round were assembled. Such gaudy costumes we had never 
 seen. They were silk, for the most part, and the pinks, purples, 
 scarlets, blues and greens were simply gorgeous. At one side of the 
 room was an orchestra. The chief musical instrument consisted of 
 a wooden frame over which were strung cords that supported nine 
 small kettledrums, tuned to the notes of the scale. A woman, kneel 
 ing before this affair, beat out rude airs on it with a pair of sticks. 
 Large kettledrums were suspended from the ceiling, and on the floor 
 were several double-ended wooden drums with heads of python skin. 
 
 " The kettledrums were made of bell metal, and the combination 
 of sounds produced by the various instruments was by no means 
 unpleasant at first, though its monotony wearied one in time. 
 
 " On one side of the room the floor was strewn with mattresses 
 and cushions, among which lounged the prospective bridegroom sur 
 rounded by friends. The centre of the floor was cleared for dancing ; 
 in fact, dancing was going on when we entered. The performers 
 came out one at a time, and their movements were critically watched 
 and freely commented on by the spectators. Moro dancing consists 
 chiefly of contortions of the body above the waist, and movements of 
 the arms, wrists, and hands. The feet are used comparatively little. 
 
 "Some of the attitudes assumed by the dancers were very grace 
 ful ; others were decidedly grotesque, and interesting only as they 
 showed into what remarkable shapes human forms could be twisted. 
 Tiny children executed timid steps, and an old woman, white-haired, 
 toothless, and nearly bent double, took her turn with the rest, winning 
 
 great applause. 
 12 
 
2i8 OTHER IMPORTANT CITIES OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 " The bride, meanwhile, was in a small side room making her 
 toilet. We inferred from the sounds we heard that she had plenty of 
 help. The bridegroom donned his costume in public, putting it on 
 over the handsome Moro suit that he already wore. First came a 
 pair of gauze trousers several sizes too large, then a shirt of similar 
 material, quite too small ; next his companions produced a skirt of 
 rich silk, into which he climbed with great difficulty. He evidently 
 was not accustomed to skirts. Finally they brought out two long 
 ribbons, one embroidered with gold and one with silver. These were 
 so arranged that they crossed on his back and breast while both 
 encircled his waist. The costume was apparently public property, 
 intended for use on such occasions. 
 
 "Two panditas now came in. The groom squatted on the floor 
 and the panditas squatted before him. A saucer of live coals was 
 set between them, and incense burned in it. One of the priests took 
 five large rings and put them on the fingers and thumb of the groom s 
 right hand ; then, holding the hand in a peculiar way he recited a 
 long rigmarole, which was, unfortunately, lost on us. At its end the 
 groom and his friends made some sudden exclamation. 
 
 ** The other pandita now began to sing, very softly at first, then 
 louder and louder. At this signal six young ladies, whom we may 
 as well call bridesmaids, entered the room and seated themselves 
 among the cushions at some distance from the groom. One of them 
 had false finger-nails of silver, two inches long. Their faces were 
 painted white with rich paste. Their eyebrows were artificially 
 broadened, and brought together between the eyes. " Beaucatchers, 
 pasted flat to their cheeks, ran around their ears. Their front -hair 
 was banged, and their back hair but only a woman could describe 
 that. They sat clown with great deliberation, and, with one excep 
 tion, kept still as statues until the ceremony was over. 
 
 THE ENTRANCE OF THE BRIDE. 
 
 "The bride entered, but people crowded around her so that we 
 could not at first see her. She was dressed like her maids, but rather 
 more elegantly. She took position near the groom, turned her back 
 on him in a very pointed manner, and sat down. He and his friends 
 now rose, formed in line, and made a slow and circuitous pilgrimage 
 
OTHER ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO 219 
 
 to where she was sitting. After many pauses and much marking 
 time they reached their destination, and the groom made some 
 advances which the bride promptly repulsed. He then sat down and 
 gazed disconsolately at her back. 
 
 " The crowd extended their sympathy to him, and urged the 
 bride to relent, but she refused. One of the bridesmaids at last arose 
 and favored the audience with a long solo which we could not well 
 understand, but she seemed to be giving the groom a very bad repu 
 tation. She finally finished and resumed her place. After more 
 entreaties from the crowd the bride arose, turned toward the groom, 
 and sat down again. This ended the ceremony, but when we went 
 to supper the newly wedded man and wife were still sitting there and 
 staring stupidly at each other." 
 
 OTHER ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. 
 
 The island of SAMAR, which is about 5,300 square miles in area, 
 has as its capital Catbalogan. It is a small town, much more clean 
 than most of these towns on the smaller islands, and lies on the north 
 shore of a picturesque bay on the west coast. There are several 
 shops in the town, but very little else to attract one s attention. The 
 main business of the place is dealing in abaca, that is, buying, curing, 
 and balling it. Plenty of fish can be obtained there, but poultry, 
 eggs, and even fruit are scarce, and very expensive. 
 
 The island itself is much overgrown with vegetation, and is, 
 practically, a series of jungles. To travel there means to run the 
 risk of scorpions and centipedes, which are liable to give one much 
 annoyance, if not proving even more serious. There are ants, too, 
 in extraordinary quantities, consequently the enjoyment of explora 
 tion in Samar is limited. All through the hills are a number of clear 
 ings made by natives who take this method of avoiding the payment 
 of taxes or escaping from the oppression of priests and public 
 officials. Besides its large crop of abaca, the island also produces 
 quantities of valuable timber. Several of its rivers are quite large, 
 but the mountains, for the most part, are low and unimportant. The 
 climate is favorable and fairly healthful. 
 
 PALAWAN has an area of about 4,150 square miles. Its chief 
 city is Puerto Princesa. This island is known to the Spaniards as 
 
220 OTHER IMPORTANT CITIES OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 Paraqua. It was formerly part of the territory of the Sultan of 
 Borneo. The northern end was fortified by the Spaniards in the 
 eighteenth century in order to protect themselves from the Moros. 
 Same years afterward the Sultan of Borneo gave up the whole island 
 to Spain, and another garrison was established, in order to hold it, at 
 Tay-Tay. The capital of the island, which is situated on the bay, is a 
 fairly prosperous place, without the defences. It is called a naval 
 station because it has a place for repairing vessels, and two gunboats 
 are usually quartered there. It is a very unusual thing for any 
 vessels, except the regular mail steamers, to touch at this place, so 
 when a man lands there, he is practically shut off from the rest of the 
 world until the next steamer is due. 
 
 Palawan is the most western of all the more important islands 
 of the Philippine group. It is about 300 miles long, and has an 
 average breadth of about twenty miles. It is well watered by many 
 streams, and has a high range of mountains, as a sort of backbone, in 
 the interior. It is rich in splendid timber lands, which contain valu 
 able hard woods, such as ebony. As to mineral wealth there is very 
 little known. Puerto Princesa is, perhaps, better known as a penal 
 settlement than anything else. Convicts and prisoners are sent there 
 from other places, and they usually settle there after their term of 
 imprisonment expires, as they have no money to pay their passage 
 home. The natives are divided into three classes. The Moros, who 
 are the most warlike of the inhabitants, live in the southern part ; the 
 Tagbanuas live along the northern coast, and the Battaks live in the 
 northern mountain regron. The Tagbanuas are the most peaceful of 
 the residents. All through the island there are plenty of large-sized 
 pythons, some of which measure twenty-three or twenty-four feet in 
 length, and weigh about 350 pounds. 
 
 MINDORA has an area of about 4,500 square miles. It is directly 
 south of Manila Bay. Its capital is Calapan, and the whole island is 
 very much avoided by all white men, owing to its deadly fevers. 
 There was a time when it was very prosperous and produced large 
 quantities of rice, but to-day the once rich fields are overgrown with 
 trees and shrubbery, and have become haunted by escaped criminals, 
 who know that no possible inducement could persuade the Spanish to 
 follow them. The island is chiefly inhabited by a tribe called Mang- 
 
A POPULAR STREET CONVEYANCE. 
 
 As elsewhere, carriages and street cars are used in Manila, but there are hundreds of the above " native cabs," for carrying 
 single persons short distances, and they are liberally patronized. 
 
 DRYING SUGAR. 
 
 Large pans containing the sugar are set in the sun to evaporate the moisture. No refining or clarifying machinery has 
 
 been introduced into the Philippine Islands. 
 
OTHER ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO 223 
 
 yans, who have a very bad reputation ; but, according to more recent 
 travelers, this is undeserved. They are, for the most part, friendly 
 natives. 
 
 NEGROS is nearby Cebu, and has an area of 2,300 square miles. 
 Its capital is Dumaguete, a much better class of town than one 
 usually finds. The Chinese are the merchants of the place, and the 
 population is made up almost entirely of natives of the island. In 
 this town are public buildings of unusual size, together with a church 
 and convent. On the island is an active volcano called Malaspina or 
 Canlooan, which is over 8,000 feet high. This is, probably, the rich 
 est island of its size in the archipelago, and much of the land near 
 the coast is cultivated. Its chief product is sugar, although there is 
 some fine tobacco in the Escalante region. So great is the sugar 
 crop that a number of modern sugar mills have been established 
 upon the larger estates. 
 
 CEBU contains about 1,650 square miles. It has a capital of the 
 same name, which has already been spoken of. MASBATE is another 
 island of importance, with an area of 1,315 square miles. The chief 
 town is Palanog, which is built on high ground quite near the bay. 
 It is very small, and the only buildings of importance are the church 
 and the schoolhouse. The natives of the island are, for the most 
 part, quite civilized. Rice is raised in parts of the island, and live 
 stock forms the chief industry. BOHOL, the next island in size, has 
 an area of 925 square miles. CATANDUANES has an area of 450 
 square miles, and there, are a dozen or more islands which vary in 
 size from 100 to 250 square miles. 
 
 Little is known of these smaller places, and, indeed, the whole 
 series of islands in the archipelago offer a fruitful field to the 
 explorer. They will probably be of little use to Uncle Sam, and 
 may be a source of great annoyance, inasmuch as the natives on many 
 of them are still followers of piratical leaders, and given to taking 
 the law in their own hands. 
 
CHAPTER XIII 
 
 The Future of the Islands 
 
 How they will Develop tinder the Care of the United States. The Treaty of Peac* 
 at Paris and its Effect. What President McKinley says about the Situation. 
 Extracts from his Famous Speeches on the Subject. Views of Anti-Expansion 
 ists. Extracts from Speeches made by Senators and others. Freedom and 
 Prosperity in Sight for the Long Misgoverned Islands. 
 
 SUCH are the islands of the past and present, but what of the 
 future ? The wings of peace, hovering over the two battling 
 nations, brought a cessation of hostilities. The war was over, 
 practically, and there lay before both Spain and America the task of 
 formally agreeing to terms of peace and the adoption of a peace 
 treaty. The President appointed a commission consisting of Ex- 
 Secretary of State W. R. Day, Senator Cushman K. Davis, Senator 
 George E. Gray, Senator William P. Frye, and Hon. Whitelaw Reid 
 to go to Paris and meet a similar body appointed to represent Spain 
 in the negotiations. There was a long struggle between the two 
 before any agreement could be reached ; but finally, after two months 
 of debate, a treaty embracing seventeen articles was signed by the 
 representatives of both countries. 
 
 TERMS OF THE TREATY OF PEACE. 
 
 Under the terms of the treaty Spain agreed to renounce all sov 
 ereignty over Cuba, and when the island was evacuated it should be 
 occupied temporarily by the United States until a stable government 
 could be established by the Cubans. Spain ceded to the United States 
 Porto Rico and her other islands in the West Indies, and the Isle of 
 Guam, in the Ladrones, and, most important of all, the whole of the 
 Philippines, the United States agreeing to pay $20,000,000 within 
 three months after the ratification of the treaty. Spanish ships are to 
 be admitted to the ports of the Archipelago under the same conditions 
 as ships from the United States during a term of ten years. All 
 
 225 
 
226 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 prisoners of war are to be liberated under the treaty. Both coun 
 tries renounce all claims for national or private indemnity resulting 
 from the war. 
 
 These, in a nutshell, are the main terms of the treaty. The 
 greatest stumbling block to the agreement of the commissioners was 
 the disposal of the Philippines. Spain gave them up with the great 
 est reluctance, and for a time it looked as though, on account of the 
 islands, all of the negotiations would come to naught and that hos 
 tilities would again be resumed. And not only was this question of the 
 possession of the Philippines warmly debated by these commissioners. 
 Immediately people of prominence in the United States arrayed them 
 selves on one side or the other as to the advisability of our keeping the 
 islands. Every speech by the leaders of politics for months rang 
 with sentiments bearing upon this important national issue, the most 
 important that has faced the country for many years. Arguments of 
 expansionists clashed with those of the anti-expansionists. The ad 
 ministration and its closest allies favored expansion, and most of the 
 prominent Republicans of the country espoused this side of the cause. 
 The Democrats for the most part were against expansion, led by Ex- 
 President Grover Cleveland and William J. Bryan. 
 
 There was a warm debate over the treaty in the Senate, and just 
 as its passage seemed to be in jeopardy news came from Manila of the 
 savage attack of the insurgents, led by Aguinaldo, upon the Ameri 
 can troops, and the fierce fighting that followed turned the tide of 
 feeling. The next day the treaty of peace was ratified, and the 
 Philippines became ours by the double right of conquest and 
 purchase. 
 
 But the great question of the future of these beautiful and 
 rich islands remains unsolved. The treaty of peace leaves the matter 
 of their government to be regulated later, and the great issue of the 
 coming presidential campaign will probably swing around this pivot. 
 The ablest minds of our nation seem to differ on the question of 
 territorial expansion. Their arguments are interesting. Without 
 comment pro or con the opinions of the most distinguished men of 
 the day on this question are given herewith. These opinions are 
 chosen with a view to giving the ablest representatives both for and 
 against expansion. 
 
PRESIDENT McKINLEY S VIEWS 227 
 
 President McKinley gave his views on this vital question in a 
 speech made at the Atlanta Peace Jubilee. He said : 
 
 "The flag has been planted in two hemispheres, and there it 
 remains, the symbol of liberty and law, of peace and progress. Who 
 will withdraw from the people over whom it floats its protecting 
 folds? Who will haul it down ? 
 
 I " The peace we have won is not a selfish truce of arms, but one 
 whose conditions presage good to humanity. The domain secured 
 under the treaty yet to be acted upon by the Senate came to us not 
 as the result of a crusade of conquest, but as the reward of temperate, 
 faithful, and fearless response to the call of conscience which could 
 not be disregarded by a liberty-loving and Christian people. 
 
 " We have so borne ourselves in the conflict and in our inter 
 course with the powers of the world as to escape complaint or com 
 plication, and give universal confidence of our high purpose and 
 unselfish sacrifices for struggling peoples. 
 
 "The task is not fulfilled. Indeed, it is only just begun. The 
 most serious work is still before us, and energy of heart and mind 
 must be bent, and the impulses of partisanship subordinated to its 
 faithful execution. This is the time for earnest, not faint, hearts. 
 
 " New occasions teach new duties. To this nation and every 
 nation there come formative periods in its life and history. New 
 conditions can be met only by new methods. Meeting these condi 
 tions hopefully and facing them bravely and wisely is to be the might 
 iest test of American virtue and capacity. Without abandoning past 
 limitations, traditions and principles, but by meeting present oppor 
 tunities and obligations we shall show ourselves worthy of the great 
 trust which civilization has imposed upon us. 
 
 | " At Bunker Hill liberty was at stake ; at Gettysburg the Union 
 was the issue ; before Manila and Santiago our armies fought, not for 
 gain or revenge, but for human rights. They contended for the 
 freedom of the oppressed, for whose welfare the United States has 
 never failed to lend a helping hand to establish and uphold, and I 
 believe never will. 
 
 " The glories of the war cannot be dimmed, but the result will 
 be incomplete and unworthy of us unless supplemented by civil vic 
 tories harder, possibly, to win, in their way no less indispensable. 
 
228 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 " We will have our difficulties and embarrassments. They follow 
 all victories and accompany all great responsibilities. They are in- 
 separable from every great movement or reform. But American 
 capacity has triumphed over all in the past. Doubts have in the end 
 vanished. 
 
 "Thus far we have done our supreme duty. Shall we now, 
 when the victory won in war is written in the treaty of peace, and the 
 civilized world applauds and waits in expectation, turn timidly away 
 from the duties imposed upon the country by its own great deeds ? 
 And when the mists fade, and we see with clearer vision, may we not 
 go forth rejoicing in a strength which has been employed solely for 
 humanity and always been tempered with justice and mercy, confident 
 of our ability to meet the exigencies which await, because confident 
 that our course is one of duty and our cause that of right." 
 
 POSTMASTER GENERAL SMITH S VIEWS. 
 
 One of the most vigorous orations in behalf of the new policy 
 was made by the Postmast-Gereneral, Charles Emory Smith, at 
 Omaha, during the Exposition. He said : 
 
 "This war has opened a new career, and we joyfully turn from 
 its thrilling drama to the grandeur of the peaceful mission which it 
 ushers in. We turn to the contemplation of peace and its duties with 
 the consciousness of a new position and a new power. We have 
 stepped out on the broad stage of the world s action ; we have 
 advanced from continental dominion to world influence; we have 
 moved out of the isolation of a great but still limited and self-circum 
 scribed sphere into the large arena of the world s activities ; and if in 
 this departure there are the risks and possibilities which attend all 
 human progressive enterprise there are also necessities and obliga 
 tions from which we cannot shrink and opportunities and glories 
 which beckon us onward. 
 
 u The world s acknowledged tribute is the measure of its estimate 
 of the potency of our new position. Our use of that position will be 
 the measure of our wisdom and rulership. Equal to every crisis in 
 the past, we shall deal with this new emergency in the true American 
 spirit. It makes us responsible for Cuba. It gives us Porto Rico. 
 It plants our outposts on the farther side of the globe. Whatever we 
 
POSTMASTER-GENERAL SMITH S VIEWS 229 
 
 hold, whether it be more or less, will be held not for territorial aggran 
 dizement, but solely in acceptance of responsibilities which Provi 
 dence has laid upon us. 
 
 "Men lightly talk of imperialism. Our imperialism is not ter 
 ritorial lust, but benignant trade expansion and civilizing influence, 
 and our flag is at Manila, not in a spirit of spoliation, not in either 
 the greed or the glory of conquest, but, let it be reverently said, 
 under the controlling force of a providential guidance, at the ripe hour 
 in the development and requirements of our national growth. 
 
 " For the coincidences are clear and unmistakable. This has 
 come just at the time when we needed broader commercial scope and 
 new outlets. It came just at the time when all the great powers are 
 engaging in a keen, vigilant and aggressive rivalry of trade opportu 
 nity and extension. It came just at the time when the ancient and 
 colossal empire of China, with a quarter of the world s population, is 
 opening her doors. It came just at the time when we were turning 
 our longing eyes across the Pacific for a share of the trade and when 
 we needed a base of commercial enterprise in the Orient. And the 
 thunder of our cannon at Manila, under the sudden uplifting of a 
 veil which no vision could have penetrated, gave us in a day the pres 
 tige, the position and the opportunity which years of ordinary history 
 and endeavor would never have brought. 
 
 " It is treated in many quarters simply as a question of territorial 
 expansion, but that is a secondary and incidental consideration. The 
 great and overshadowing question is one of commercial openings. 
 The heart of the issue is not mere territory, but trade necessities and 
 facilities. Beyond and behind and beneath this departure lies the 
 broad problem of America s destiny in the commerce and civilization 
 of the world. 
 
 " Others speak, and rightly speak, of what is clue to those dark 
 ened people to whom our starry flag has brought the radiant sunshine 
 of hope and life. Let me suggest what is due to ourselves and our 
 future in the steady march of our development ? Our growth has 
 been so marvelous that we need new opportunities ; and our fate is 
 so happy that the opportunities are here for our taking. 
 
 " The imperial Louisiana acquisition, in the heart of which we 
 now stand, and which has become the seat of twelve mighty States 
 
230 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 and fifteen millions of happy people, was dictated by the demand for 
 the commercial outlet of the Mississippi; and under the stress of that 
 necessity Thomas Jefferson broke away from old ideas and rose to a 
 larger statesmanship. Our need to-day, like that of a hundred years 
 ago, is for commercial outlets, and it is for the descendants of our 
 fathers to rise to our occasion and duty as our fathers rose to theirs. 
 
 " Our past policy has established our industrial independence. It 
 has enabled us to outstrip all other nations, and has endowed us with 
 a present attainment and a potential force which almost baffle the 
 imagination. We are immeasurably the greatest consumers among 
 men, but our productive capacity has grown beyond our wants, and 
 now looks to the markets of the world. We make one-half as much 
 iron and steel, the basic fabrics of civilization, as all other countries 
 put together. We produce one-half as much coal. We use one-half 
 as much wool. Our motive power, our railroad operations, our gen 
 eral business are in the same or greater ratio. The savings out of 
 our earnings in the last thirty years amounted to one-sixth of all that 
 the world has saved and handed down since the dawn of the Christian 
 era. We are the only great commercial nation which sells more than 
 it buys. We are the only nation which is absolutely independent, 
 untrammeled and self-supporting within itself. While we were grow 
 ing up we sent abroad food and brought home equipment. But now 
 that our American policy has realized its ultimate aim and its full 
 fruition in our unchallenged industrial supremacy we are sending not 
 only the products of our farms, but the products of our forges and 
 factories. 
 
 "We place our pipes in the streets of London; we land our 
 tubing at Singapore ; we sell our paper in Japan ; we send our 
 machinery all over the world. The hour when our manufactured 
 exports passed our manufactured imports marked the turning point 
 of commercial mastery and opened new vistas before us. Having 
 gained the undisputed control of our vast domestic market, we boldly 
 enter into the world s trade competition. 
 
 " Yet, with all this achievement, we have in many fields but just 
 begun the development of our enormous resources. We grow seven- 
 eighths of the world s cotton, but we manufacture only a fourth of it. 
 We consume more of some leading products of the tropics than all 
 
BRIDGE OVER THE PASIG RIVER. 
 
 This bridge connects the old walled city on one side of the river with the new unwalled city on the other. Sea-going vessels 
 
 ascend the river as far as the bridge. 
 
 A WEDDING PROCESSION. 
 
 As in Asiatic countries, weddings in the Philippines are occasions of great ceremony. This engraving shows a wedding 
 
 procession in the Philippine Islands as photographed by an enterprising American. The bride and groom are 
 
 inside the chairs born on the shoulders of the men. 
 
POSTMASTER-GENERAL SMITH S VIEWS 233 
 
 other nations ; but we have had no proportionate share of their trade. 
 While the amazing multiplication of our productive capacity, there is 
 no limit to our possible development but the world s needs. In 
 twenty-five years we shall be a nation of a hundred millions, equalling 
 all Europe in energy of creation, and to contemplate the dazzling 
 splendor of that beneficent destiny, if only the growth of the past 
 twenty-five years shall be maintained, seems like the rhapsody of a 
 dream. 
 
 "If we are to fulfill that destiny we must have commercial 
 expansion ; and it is a profoundly significant fact which shows a guid 
 ing hand that overrules the will of man that this war should have 
 come just as this great necessity begins to be realized. This oppor 
 tunity matches the need. The elevation of the United States to a 
 new rank among the nations ; the universal acceptance of its obliga 
 tion to stretch forth its civilizing hand where the fate of war has car 
 ried it ; the fortunate possession of an established emporium on the 
 very theatre of the world s seeking have brought the occasion and 
 the duty together. Is it not for enlightened American statesmanship, 
 watchful of American interests, to use the opportunity, not in terri 
 torial avarice, but for commercial extension and civilizing influence in 
 the Orient with the base and the bulwark that are needed for its 
 support ? 
 
 " Trade follows the flag. Around the waters of the Orient dwell 
 more than a quarter of the human race. Among these ancient peo 
 ples there is agitation and awakening. The old walls of isolation 
 and seclusion will be broken down, and in throwing off the thraldom 
 of ancient prescription and primitive life, there will be the invitation 
 and the inroad of civilizing instruments and influences. We shall 
 enter into no struggle of imperial division ; but why should we not 
 share the opening traffic of that vast region ? Why should not our 
 mills use our own cotton, now sent abroad, and multiply our spindles 
 in clothing China ? Why should we not furnish her electric power 
 and materials ? Why should we not join in laying the rails of the 
 new lines of communication that are to set her sluggish life in motion? 
 Why should we not find in the requirements of a vast people, arous 
 ing from their ages of torpor, one of the openings that are needed 
 for our surplus manufactures ? 
 
234 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 " The Pacific is rightfully within our commercial sphere. We 
 hold one shore, and we are nearest the other. Europe must cross 
 two oceans to the Orient, and we but one. Why should we not 
 peacefully and providently avail ourselves of the commercial advan 
 tages within our grasp? We have, besides, learned the value and the 
 needs of a navy. Dewey, respecting the neutrality of Hong Kong, 
 had nowhere on the broad Pacific to rest his foot save on his own 
 deck, and under the signal from Washington he steamed straight to 
 Manila, defiant of mine and of fort, because the Spanish fleet was 
 there, and because he needed and proposed to make an American 
 harbor ! And we have come to understand that under modern neces 
 sities our Olympias and Oregons and our commercial fleets bearing 
 our flag over the world must have harbors where they can ride in 
 safety in their own unchallenged right. 
 
 "And so, as we move forward to the new duties before us, let us 
 try to realize the majesty of our position and the grandeur of our 
 destiny. Picture the strength and the promise of the commanding 
 place our mighty Republic now holds in the realms of nations. A 
 continental domain washed by the two great oceans ; midway and 
 overarching the Orient and Occident, and impregnable because but 
 tressed by the seas ; the home of the only civilized people on earth 
 who are economically independent and self-sustaining and boundless 
 in their resources ; along the granary and now fast becoming the 
 workshop of the world ; gaining in its new acquisitions the gates of 
 the Caribbean, the mastery of the Isthmus and the key of Asia, 
 embracing within its own wide territory, as no other nation does, the 
 varied and exchangeable products of the temperate and tropic zones, 
 and all the necessities of complete and self-centered national exist 
 ence ; and thus fronting the coming time of world-wide rivalry with 
 a rounded development beyond any other nation, with the new need 
 of commercial extension which springs from those unlimited capabili 
 ties, and with the stepping-stones and facilities brought within our 
 possession by providential events which the imagination had not 
 dreamed six months ago. Surely, as we contemplate this vision, we 
 can justly feel that the mistress of the future is the noble figure of 
 the Republic, whose torch of liberty, enlightening the world, is no 
 less the beacon of commerce and humanity." 
 
PEACE COMMISSIONER REID S VIEWS 23$ 
 
 Hon. Whitelaw Reid, of New York, just before he was appointed 
 one of the Peace Commissioners, said in an article in the Century 
 Magazine : 
 
 " The question of the Philippines is different and difficult. They 
 are not within what the diplomatists of the world would recognize as 
 the legitimate sphere of American influence. Our relation to them 
 is purely the accident of recent war. We are not in honor bound to 
 hold them, if we can honorably dispose of them. But we know that 
 their grievances differ only in kind, not in degree, from those of Cuba ; 
 and having once freed them from the Spanish yoke we cannot honor 
 ably require them to go back under it again. That would be to put 
 us in an attitude of nauseating national hypocrisy, to give the lie to 
 all our professions of humanity in our interference in Cuba, and to 
 prove that our real motive was conquest. What humanity forbade 
 us to tolerate in the West Indies it would not justify us in re-estab 
 lishing in the Philippines. 
 
 " The chief aversion to the vast accessions of territory with 
 which we are threatened springs from the fact that ultimately they 
 must be admitted into the Union as States. No public duty is more 
 urgent at this moment than to resist from the very outset the conces 
 sion of such a possibility. In no circumstances likely to exist within 
 a century, should they be admitted as States of the Union. 
 
 " With slight modifications, the territorial form of government 
 which we have tried so successfully from the beginning of the Union, 
 is admirably adapted to such communities. It secures local self- 
 government, equality before the law, upright courts, ample power 
 for order and defence, a voice in Congress for the presentation 
 of local wants and such control by Congress as gives security 
 against the mistakes or excesses of people new to the exercise of 
 rights. 
 
 "The power of the government to deal with territory, foreign 
 or domestic, precisely as it chooses, was understood from the begin 
 ning to be absolute, and at no stage in our whole history have we 
 hesitated to exercise it. The question of permanently holding the 
 Philippines or any other conquered territory as territory is not and 
 cannot be made one of constitutional right ; it is one solely of 
 national duty and of national policy." 
 
236 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 One of the most striking speeches made in the United States 
 Senate during the debate on the treaty, was that of Senator Lodge, 
 of Massachusetts. He said : 
 
 "In connection with these resolutions and others which have 
 been introduced, two questions have been raised, one of Constitutional 
 law and one of public policy. It is not my purpose to enter at length 
 into the former discussion. The Constitutional questions are many, 
 and the hypothetical situations which have been imagined with much 
 ingenuity as tests of the Constitution, are almost countless. It is an 
 inviting field, rich in casuistry and subtle distinctions, but I do not 
 think that I could add much to the sum of human information or 
 misinformation by attempting its elaborate cultivation. 
 
 " My own views as to our Constitutional rights and powers are 
 simple and well defined, and have not been formed without some 
 study, both of our Constitution and our history. I shall content 
 myself with stating them. I believe that the United States has the 
 undoubted power, which it has frequently exercised to acquire terri 
 tory, and to hold and govern it. I am ready to admit, if necessary, 
 that action in these directions must be taken for Constitutional pur 
 poses, but the constitutionality of the purposes must be determined 
 by Congress itself through its majority. I believe that the power of 
 the United States in any territory or possession outside the limits of 
 the States themselves is absolute, with the single exception of the 
 limitation placed on such outside possessions by the XIII Amend 
 ment. Such, at all events, has been the policy of the United States 
 and its course of action in practice. 
 
 " Constitutions do not make a people ; people make consti 
 tutions. Our Constitution is great and admirable, because the men 
 who made it were so, and the people who ratified it and have lived 
 under it were and are brave, intelligent and lovers of liberty. There 
 is a higher sanction and a surer protection to life and liberty, to the 
 right of speech and trial by jury, to justice and humanity, in the 
 traditions and beliefs, the habits of mind, and the character of the 
 American people than any which can be afforded by any constitution, 
 no matter how wisely drawn. If the American people were disposed 
 to tyranny, injustice and oppression, a constitution would offer but a 
 temporary barrier to their ambition and the reverence for the con- 
 
SENATOR LODGE S ARGUMENTS 237 
 
 stitution and for law and justice grows out of the fact that the 
 American people believe in freedom and humanity, in equal justice 
 to all men, and in equal rights before the law, and while they so 
 believe the great doctrines of the Declaration of Independence and 
 of the Constitution will never be in peril. 
 
 " Holding these views as to our Constitutional powers, the great 
 question now before the American people resolves itself, in my mind, 
 to one policy, surely. 
 
 " In our war with Spain we conquered the Philippines, or, to put 
 it more exactly, we destroyed the power of Spain in those islands and 
 took possession of their capital. The treaty cedes the Philippines 
 to us. It is wisely and skilfully drawn. It commits us to no policy, 
 to no course of action whatever in regard to the Philippines. When 
 that treaty is ratified we have full power, and are absolutely free 
 to do with those islands as we please ; and the opposition to its 
 ratification may be summed up in a single sentence, that the Ameri 
 can people and the American Congress are not to be trusted with 
 that power and with that freedom of action in regard to the inhabit 
 ants of those distant islands. 
 
 " What our precise policy shall be I do not know, because I for 
 one am not sufficiently informed as to the conditions there to be able 
 to say what it will be best to do ; nor, I may add, do I think any one 
 is. But I believe that we shall have the wisdom not to attempt to 
 incorporate those islands with our body politic, or make their inhabit 
 ants part of our citizenship, or set their laborers alongside of ours 
 and within our tariff to compete in any industry with American 
 workmen. 
 
 " I believe that we shall have the courage not to depart from 
 those islands fearfully, timidly and unworthily, and leave them to 
 anarchy among themselves, to the brief and bloody domination of 
 some self-constituted dictator and to the quick conquest of other 
 powers, who will have no such hesitation as we would feel in crushing 
 them into subjection by harsh and repressive methods. It is for us 
 to decide the destiny of the Philippines, not for Europe, and we can 
 do it alone and without assistance. I believe that we shall have the 
 wisdom, the self-restraint and the ability to restore peace and order 
 in those islands and give to their people an opportunity for self-gov- 
 
238 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 ernment and for freedom under the protecting shield of the United 
 States until the time shall come when they are able to stand alone, if 
 such a thing be possible, and if they do not themselves desire to 
 remain under our protection. 
 
 "To the American people and their Government I am ready to 
 intrust my life, my liberty, my honor ; and, what is far dearer to me 
 than anything personal to myself, the lives and liberty of my children 
 and my children s children. If I am ready thus to trust my children 
 to the Government which the American people create and sustain, 
 am I to shrink from intrusting to that same people the fate and for 
 tunes of the inhabitants of the Philippine Islands ? 
 
 " I can look at this question in only one way. A great respon 
 sibility has come to us. If we are unfit for it and unequal to it, then 
 we should shirk it and fly from it. But I believe that we are both fit 
 and capable, and that therefore we should meet it and take it up. 
 There is much else involved here, vast commercial interests which I 
 believe we have a right to guard and a duty to foster. " 
 
 SENATOR TLATT S ARGUMENTS. 
 
 During the debate on the Peace Treaty, the following was part 
 of the notable speech made by Senator Platt, of Connecticut : 
 
 " I do not propose to discuss the policy of expansion," said Mr, 
 Platt in the preface to his argument. " I do not propose either to 
 discuss the features of the government we might establish in any 
 foreign territory we might acquire. Expansion has been a law of our 
 national growth, the mainspring of our national development. I 
 shall maintain that the United States has shown a great capacity for 
 government in all trying times and under many trying conditions, 
 and that it is capable to meet any emergency likely to arise. 
 
 " I shall contend that the United States is a nation, and that as 
 such it possesses every sovereign power not reserved by the Consti 
 tution to the States or to the people themselves ; that the right to 
 acquire territory was not reserved, and that, therefore, that right is an 
 inherent right a sovereign right, a right to which there is no limita 
 tion. I shall show, also, that in certain instances this inherent sov 
 ereign right is to be inferred from specific clauses of the Constitution 
 itself." 
 
SENATOR CHAUNCEY M. DEPEW S POSITION 239 
 
 Mr. Platt then made a constitutional argument, quoting exten 
 sively from authorities treating of the question. In maintenance of 
 his position of the right of the United States to acquire foreign terri 
 tory he quoted from the opinion of Justice Gray in the Chinese 
 exclusion case. Me declared that, in the discussion of the annexa 
 tion of the Hawaiian Islands, the entire question of this Govern 
 ment s right to acquire foreign territory was considered thoroughly, 
 and that the Senate had settled it satisfactorily and rightly. "We 
 did not annex the Hawaiian Islands as a State," he said, " or with 
 any declaration that the territory should become a State. We took 
 it by cession. Our title to the territory is perfect and complete and 
 constitutional." 
 
 Mr. Platt maintained that the right to Florida did not rest alone 
 on the quitclaim from Spain, but on a deeper and broader right. He 
 held that the United States "have the right to acquire territory in 
 all ways that are used by other sovereign nations of the world." 
 
 "Yes; the right to acquire territory is an element of nationality; 
 and I do not believe that there is any obligation to give to the people of 
 acquired territory the right of self-government until such time as they 
 are fit to exercise that right. If we believe the people of a country 
 acquired are not fitted for the government of themselves, it is our 
 duty to give them the most liberal government they are capable of 
 accepting, and to educate them up, as best it may be, to the point 
 where they will be capable of self-government. The Constitution 
 does not confer the right of suffrage." 
 
 SENATOR CIIAUNCEY M. DEPEw s POSITION. 
 
 Senator-elect Chauncey M. Depew, when he was the guest of 
 the Independent Club of Buffalo, speaking for expansion, said : 
 
 "In the closing hours of 1898 we are at the highest development 
 of American prosperity and power. By a marvelous series of provi 
 dences we are in the possession of vast territories, peopled by alien 
 races in various degrees of civilization, in regard to which there have 
 been thrust upon us the gravest responsibilities. Our success in their 
 government depends upon the faithful application of the same oft- 
 tried and ever-successful principles which have been worked out in 
 such a marvelous way in our own history. 
 
2 4 o THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 " The evolution of its administration of the affairs of the Ameri 
 can Republic has been for one hundred years toward national supre 
 macy. Now, in 1898, at the close of the Spanish War, the President 
 of the United States possesses and exercises an authority beyond 
 that of any ruler in the world, except the Czar of Russia, and with 
 out question from any source. 
 
 " We face at this time questions as vital to the future of our 
 country as any which in the past have been met and successfully 
 answered. The Federation of Washington, in 1798, has developed 
 into the United States of 1898, with that inherent power which is 
 always attached to national sovereignty of acquiring territory by 
 conquest or power. No constitutional lawyer will doubt this power. 
 I do not think any body of constitutional lawyers will doubt that 
 among the reserved powers of sovereignty which belong to us as a 
 nation is the right to administer the affairs of territories acquired by 
 conquest or by cession, under such form of government as Congress 
 and the Executive may prescribe. 
 
 " To maintain order in Cuba, until the people shall be able to 
 reach a stable government of liberty and law, is humanity. To 
 incorporate Porto Rico in our domain, relieve its citizens from 
 oppression, and give them good government, is humanity. To per 
 mit the bloody hand of Spain to again grasp the throat of ten 
 millions of Filipinos, or to pass them over to the tender mercies of 
 European governments, would be inhuman and cowardly ; it would 
 be refusing the mission which Providence has distinctly forced upon 
 us. We must judge of the future of these possessions, not by the 
 oppressions, which they have suffered, but by the liberty which they 
 will enjoy. The Philippines to the United States, like Java to Hol 
 land, under the inspiring influences of American opportunity, of 
 American schools and American hope, will be an immense market, 
 and a large source of revenue over and above the cost of administra 
 tion for the United States. Our Government, firmly planted, will 
 not only enter the open door of the Orient for the products of our 
 fields and our factories, but when the great boot of Uncle Sam is put 
 in the crack of the door which continental nations would close, there 
 will be no musket jammed upon that boot to compel its with 
 drawal," 
 
WILLIAM /. BRYAN S VIEWS 243 
 
 William J. Bryan, of course, emphatically disapproved of the 
 stand taken by the Government. He said : 
 
 " Spain, under compulsion, gives us a quitclaim to the Philip 
 pines in return for $20,000,000, but she does not agree to warrant 
 and defend our title as against the Filipinos. To buy land is one 
 thing, to buy people is another. Land is inanimate, and makes no 
 resistance to a transfer of title ; the people are animate, and some 
 times desire a voice in their own affairs. But, even if measured by 
 dollars and cents, the conquest of the Philippines should prove profit 
 able or expensive, it will certainly prove embarrassing to those who 
 still hold to the doctrine which underlies a republic. Military rule is 
 antagonistic to our theory of government. The armaments which 
 are used to defend it in the Philippines may be used to excuse it in 
 the United States. Under military rule much must be left to the 
 discretion of the Military Governor ; and this can only be justified 
 in the theory that the Military Governor knows more than the peo 
 ple whom he governs, is better acquainted with their needs than they 
 are themselves, is entirely in sympathy with them, and is thoroughly 
 honest and unselfish in his desire to do them good. Such a combina 
 tion of wisdom, integrity, and love is difficult to find ; and the Repub 
 lican party will enter upon a hard task when it starts out to select 
 suitable Military Governors for our remote possessions. 
 
 " We cannot afford to destroy the Declaration of Independence ; 
 we cannot afford to erase from our Constitutions, State and National, 
 the Bill of Rights ; we have not time to examine the libraries of the 
 nation and purge them of the essays, the speeches, and the books 
 that defend the doctrine that law is the crystallization of public 
 opinion, rather than an emanation from physical power. 
 
 " But even if we could destroy every vestige of the laws which 
 are the outgrowth of the immortal law penned by Jefferson ; if we 
 could obliterate every written word that has been inspired by the 
 idea that this is a government of the people, by the people, and for 
 the people , we could not tear from the heart of the human race the 
 hope which the American Republic has planted there. The impas 
 sioned appeal, Give me liberty, or give me death , still echoes around 
 the world. In the future, as in the past, the desire to be free will be 
 stronger than the desire to enjoy a mere physical existence. The 
 
244 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 conflict between might and right will continue here and everywhere 
 until a day is reached when the love of money will no longer sear 
 the national conscience, and hypocrisy no longer hide the hideous 
 features of avarice behind the mask of philanthropy." 
 
 WHAT EX-PRESIDENT CLEVELAND THINKS. 
 
 Ex-President Grover Cleveland, lent the weight of his influence 
 against expansion. On one occasion he gave the following sarcastic 
 interview : 
 
 " Assuming that my ideas on the subject are antiquated and un- 
 suited to these progressive days, it is a matter of surprise to me that 
 the refusal of certain natives of our new possessions to acquiesce in 
 the beneficence of subjecting them to our control and management 
 should, in the least, disturb our expansionists. This phase of the 
 situation ought not to have been unanticipated, nor the incidents 
 naturally growing out of it overlooked. 
 
 11 The remedy is obvious and simple. The misguided inhabitants 
 of our annexed territory who prefer something different from the 
 plan for their control which we propose, or who oppose our designs 
 in their behalf, should be slaughtered. The killing of natives has 
 been a feature of expansion since expansion began, and our imperial 
 istic enthusiasm should not be checked by the prospective necessity 
 of destroying a few thousand or a few hundred thousand Filipinos. 
 This should only be regarded as one stage in a transcendentally 
 great movement a mere incident in its progress. Of course, some 
 unprepared souls would then be lost before we had the oppor 
 tunity of christianizing them, but surely those of our clergymen who 
 have done so much to encourage expansion could manage that 
 difficulty." 
 
 SENATOR HOAR S ARGUMENTS. 
 
 Senator Hoar, of Massachusetts, calls it a spasm of folly. In his 
 speech before the Senate, he said : 
 
 " The persons who favor the ratification of this treaty without 
 conditions and without amendment differ among themselves certainly 
 in their views, purposes and opinions, and as they are so many of them 
 honest and well-meaning persons, we have the right to say, in their 
 actual and real opinions. In general, the state of mind and the 
 
SENA TOR HOAR S ARG UMENTS 245 
 
 utterance of the lips are in accord. If you ask them what they want, 
 you are answered with a shout : Three cheers for the Flag ! Who 
 will dare to haul it down ? Hold on to everything you can get. The 
 United States is strong enough to do what it likes. The Declaration 
 of Independence and the counsel at Washington and the Constitution 
 of the United States have grown rusty and musty. They are for 
 little countries and not for great ones. There is no moral law for 
 strong nations. America has outgrown Americanism/ 
 
 "In general, the friends of what is called imperialism or expan 
 sion content themselves with declaring that the flag which is taken 
 down every night and put up again every morning over the roof of 
 this Senate Chamber, where it is in its rightful place, must never be 
 taken down where it once floated, whether that be its rightful place 
 or not a doctrine which I shall have occasion to say before I get 
 through is not only without justification in international law; but if it 
 were implanted there would make of every war between civilized and 
 powerful nations a war of extermination or a war of dishonor to one 
 party or the other. 
 
 * The power to conquer alien peoples and hold them in subjuga 
 tion is nowhere expressly granted. 
 
 " The power to conquer alien peoples and hold them in subjuga 
 tion is nowhere implied as necessary for the accomplishment of the 
 purposes declared by the Constitution. 
 
 " It is clearly shown to be one that ought not to be exercised by 
 anybody one that the framers of the Constitution thought ought 
 not to be exercised by anybody 
 
 " i. Because it is immoral and wicked in itself. 
 
 " 2. Because it is expressly denied in the Declaration of 
 Independence, the great interpreter and expounder of the meaning of 
 the Constitution, which owes its origin to the same generation and 
 largely to the same men. 
 
 " 3. It is affirmed that it is immoral and unfit to be exercised 
 by anybody in numerous instances by contemporary State Con 
 stitutions and the contemporary writers and authorities on public 
 law, who expressed the opinion of the American people in that 
 generation who adopted the Constitution as well as of the men who 
 framed it. 
 
246 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 11 The power to hold property is implied whether that property 
 be land or chattels. And, Mr. President, you are not now proposing 
 to acquire or own property in the Philippines with dominion as a 
 necessary incident, you are not to own a foot of land there. You 
 propose now to acquire dominion and legislative power and nothing 
 else. Where in the Constitution is the grant of power to exercise 
 sovereignty where you have no property. 
 
 " Now, there are Senators here, yet hesitating as to what their 
 action may be in the future, who will tell you that they loathe and 
 hate this doctrine that we may buy nations at wholesale ; that we 
 may acquire imperial powers or imperial regions by conquest ; that 
 we may make vassal states and subject peoples without constitutional 
 restraint, and against their will and without any restraint but our 
 own discretion. 
 
 " The one great lesson which sums up the teachings of American 
 history during our century of constitutional life is the dignity of 
 labor. It is an unquestionable truth that no tropical colony was ever 
 settled by men not born in tropical climes, for the purpose of finding 
 work. There was scarcely ever a tropical colony successful at all. 
 There was never a tropical colony successful except under the system 
 of contract labor. That is to be set up, enforced and administered 
 by the agencies of the Republic of the United States, if we are to 
 succeed in such administration at all. 
 
 " The Senator from Connecticut seems to contemplate that we 
 shall embark on a permanent system of national expenditure which 
 will put this nation under an obligation, the equivalent of which will 
 be a national debt greater than that of any other nation on the face 
 of the earth. Our civil list, already so enormous, must be enormously 
 increased. Instead of taking from the people by fair competition, or 
 even by fair selection, men to take their share in self-government, we 
 must have in the future, as they have in England, a trained class whose 
 lives are to be spent not in self-government, but in the government of 
 other men." 
 
 SENATOR VEST S VIEWS. 
 
 Senator Vest s speech, in starting the opposition to the Peace 
 Treaty, stated that our forefathers had fought for years against tax 
 ation without representation. The Declaration of Independence 
 
SENATOR VEST S VIEWS 247 
 
 had been drawn up with the idea that all governments derived their 
 just powers from the governed. It was incredible that the founders 
 of the Government could have looked forward to the time when 
 millions of human beings could be held without their consent, merely 
 as chattels, to be disposed of as the sovereign powers of the mother 
 country might choose. It seemed to him the historic argument that 
 the just powers of the Government were derived from the consent of 
 the governed fully covered his position, inasmuch as it had been 
 fully maintained by the courts. 
 
 Mr. Vest thought it was the purpose of the expansionists to 
 adopt the European system of colonization. He pointed out that 
 Great Britain had in the mother country 120,979 square miles of 
 territory, and in her colonies 16,667,071 square miles. The dispro 
 portion of population was about the same. He maintained that the 
 fundamental principle of this Government was the granting of citi 
 zenship to all within the jurisdiction of the Government, except 
 alone the Indians. The question, Mr. Vest thought, was the result 
 of the efforts of desperate disputants who appear in the public press 
 day by day and attack public men because they adhere to the Con 
 stitution and resist this new evangel. 
 
 u To say," declared Mr. Vest, " that citizens of a territory are 
 excluded from the privileges guaranteed by the Bill of Rights and 
 are merely subjects of the arbitrary will of Congress, is a monstrous 
 proposition ; but fortunately the Supreme Court had determined 
 that question in many cases. 
 
 " I do not deny the power of the Federal Government to 
 acquire territory, but I do deny its power to acquire territory peo 
 pled with millions without their consent and with no intention of 
 conferring upon them citizenship. I may be answered that the point 
 is not good ; that it may be evaded by the taking in of vast tracts of 
 lands peopled with barbarians, to be held merely for commercial 
 advantages. When the Congress of the United States shall become 
 so degraded as this, it is only a question of time when the end shall 
 come." 
 
 "We are a great people," concluded Mr. Vest. " We are told 
 that this country can do anything, Constitution or no Constitution. 
 We are a great people, it is true, but we cannot do more than another 
 
248 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 great people did a people that conquered the world, not with steel 
 ships and modern cannon, but with bare swords and primitive galleys. 
 The colonial system destroyed all hope of republicism in the old 
 time. It is an appendage of monarchy. It can exist in no free 
 country, because it uproots and eliminates the bases of all republican 
 institutions that governments derive their just powers from the 
 consent of the governed. I know not what may be done with the 
 glamour of foreign conquest and greed of the money-making classes 
 of this country. For myself, I would rather quit public life this 
 minute nay, I would be willing to yield life itself rather than give 
 my consent to this fantastic and wicked attempt to revolutionize our 
 Government and to substitute the principles of our hereditary enemy 
 for the teachings of Washington and his associates." 
 
 HON. CARL SCHURZ S VIEWS. 
 
 Perhaps none of the anti-expansionists received as much criti 
 cism as Hon. Carl Schurz, the noted New Yorker. In an address, he 
 said: 
 
 " If we take these new regions, we shall be well entangled in 
 that contest for territorial aggrandizement, which distracts other 
 nations and drives them far beyond their original design. So it will 
 be inevitably with us. We shall want new conquests to protect that 
 which we already possess. The greed of speculators working upon 
 our Government will push us from one point to another, and we shall 
 have new conflicts on our hands, almost without knowing how we 
 got into them. It has always been so under such circumstances, and 
 always will be. This means more and more soldiers, ships and guns. 
 
 " We are already told that we shall need a regular army of at 
 least 100,000, three-fourths of whom are to serve in our new pos 
 sessions. The question is, whether this necessity is to be only tern-; 
 porary or permanent. Look at the cost. Last year the support of 
 the army proper required about $23,000,000. It is computed that, 
 taking the increased costliness of the service in the tropics into 
 account, the army under the new dispensation will require about 
 $150,000,000; that is, $127,000,000 a year more. 
 
 " It is also officially admitted that the possession of the Philip 
 pines would render indispensable a much larger increase of the navy 
 
HON. CARL SCHURZ S VIEWS 249 
 
 than would otherwise be necessary, costing untold millions for the 
 building and equipment of ships, and untold millions every year for 
 their maintenance and for the increased number of officers and men. 
 What we shall have to spend for fortifications and the like cannot 
 now be computed. 
 
 " But there is a burden upon us which, in like weight, no other 
 nation has to bear. To-day, thirty-three years after the Civil War, 
 we have a pension roll of very nearly 1,000,000 names. And still 
 they come. We paid to pensioners over $145,000,000 last year, a 
 sum larger than the annual cost of the whole military peace estab 
 lishment of the German empire, including its pension roll. Our 
 recent Spanish war will, according to a moderate estimate, add at 
 least $20,000,000 to our annual pension payments. But if we send 
 troops to the tropics and keep them there, we must look for a steady 
 stream of pensioners from that quarter, for in the tropics soldiers are 
 " used up " very fast, even if they have no campaigning to do. 
 
 " The cry suddenly raised that this great country has become 
 too small for us is too ridiculous to demand an answer, in view of the 
 fact that our present population may be tripled and still have ample 
 elbow-room, with resources to support many more. But we are told 
 that our industries are gasping for breath ; that we are suffering from 
 over-production ; that our products must have new outlets, and that 
 we need new colonies and dependencies the world over to give us 
 more markets. More markets ? Certainly. But do we, civilized 
 beings, indulge in the absurd and barbarous notion that we must own 
 the countries with which we wish to trade? Here are our official 
 reports before us, telling us that of late years our export trade has 
 grown enormously, not only of farm products, but of the products of 
 our manufacturing industries ; in fact, that our sales of manufactured 
 goods have continued to extend with a facility and promptitude of 
 results which have excited the serious concern of countries that, for 
 generations, had not only controlled their home markets, but practi 
 cally monopolized certain lines of trade in other lands. 
 
 " That our victories have evolved upon us certain duties as to the 
 people of the conquered islands, I readily admit. But are they the 
 only duties we have to perform, or have they suddenly become para 
 mount to all other duties ? I deny it. I deny that the duties we 
 
250 THE FUTURE OF THE ISLANDS 
 
 owe to the Cubans and the Porto Ricans and the Filipinos and the 
 Tagals of the Asiatic islands absolve us from our duties to the 
 75,000,000 of our own people and to their posterity. I deny that 
 they oblige us to destroy the moral credit of our own Republic by 
 turning this loudly heralded war of liberation and humanity into a 
 land-grabbing game, and an act of criminal aggression. I deny that 
 they compel us to aggravate our race troubles, to bring upon us the 
 constant danger of war and to subject our people to the galling bur 
 den of increasing armaments. If we have rescued those unfortunate 
 daughters of Spain, the colonies, from the tyranny of their cruel 
 father, I deny that we are therefore in honor bound to marry any of 
 the girls, or to take them all into our household, where they may 
 disturb and demoralize our whole family. I deny that the liberation 
 of those Spanish dependencies morally constrains us to do anything 
 that would put our highest mission to solve the great problem of 
 Democratic government in jeopardy, or that would otherwise endan 
 ger the vital interests of the Republic. Whate\ er our duties to them 
 may be, our duties to our own country and people stand first ; and 
 from this standpoint we have as sane men and patriotic citizens to 
 regard our obligation to take care of the future of those islands and 
 their people. 
 
 " They fought for deliverance from Spanish oppression, and we 
 helped them to obtain that deliverance. That deliverance they 
 understand to mean independence. I repeat the question whether 
 anybody can tell me why the declaration of Congress that the Cubans 
 of right ought to be free and independent, should not apply to all of 
 them ? Their independence, therefore, would be the natural and 
 rightful outcome. This is the solution of the problem first to be 
 taken in view. It is objected that they are not capable of inde 
 pendent government. They may answer that this is their affair, and 
 that they are at least entitled to a trial." 
 
VIEW IN BANCA SHOWING DUTCH FORTIFICATIONS. 
 ^ 
 
 THE NATIVE FARMER AND HIS FAITHFUL SERVANT. 
 
 The Carabao, or large Water Buffalo of the Philippine Islands is the chief domestic animal of the nati 
 captured wild when youns. It is large and as strong as two horses. 
 
 ves. It is generally 
 
.,.. HI 
 
 SENOR MONTERO RIOS 
 
 President of the Spanish Peace Commission, whose 
 
 painful duty required him to sign away his 
 
 country s colonial possessions. 
 
 GENERAL RAM ON BLANCO 
 
 Who succeeded Weyler as Captain General of Cuba 
 
 in 1897. He was formerly Governor-General 
 
 of the Philippine Islands. 
 
 ADMIRAL CERVERA 
 
 Commander of Spanish Fleet at Santiago. 
 
 SAGASTA 
 
 Premier of Spain during the Spanish-American War. 
 
CHAPTER XIV 
 
 The Ladrone Islands. 
 
 The Bloodless Battle of Guam. When the Charleston Opened Fire on the Little City 
 of Agana, the Governor Thought we were Saluting Him. A Population which 
 has Twice Disappeared. Poverty and Laziness on all Sides. The Value of the 
 Island as a Military Station. 
 
 ON July 4, 1898, the United States steamship Charleston had 
 a little celebration all by itself in the middle of the Pacific 
 Ocean, during which it captured an island and hoisted the 
 American flao; in a new land. It was an incident of war which was 
 
 o 
 
 unexpected. The inhabitants of the island did not even know that 
 war existed between the United States and Spain. The country was 
 so far removed from the seat of Spanish government and so out of 
 touch with the things that were going on in the world, that when the 
 war vessel of Uncle Sam came near to this Spanish possession and 
 fired her shot upon the frowning forts that guarded the little city of 
 Agana, there was no reply, and when troops were landed to take 
 possession of the city, and the Governor of the island was asked to 
 surrender, he expressed his great surprise at the demand and was 
 startled to learn that his country had become involved in a struggle 
 with the United States. 
 
 He had heard the roar of the guns of the Charleston, but he thought 
 " the noble Americans were saluting him, and he was deeply humili 
 ated because he had no powder to return their salute." It followed 
 that he had no powder with which to fight, so he immediately surren 
 dered the island of Guam to the American officers, and soon the flag 
 of Spain was lowered over the little isle where it had fluttered for 
 so many years, and in its stead waved a new flag, a symbol unknown 
 to the people of that place, a symbol that is to bring them peace and 
 prosperity greater than any they have ever known, guaranteed by the 
 Stars and Stripes of the United States. 
 
 253 
 
2 5 4 THE LAD RONE ISLANDS 
 
 The Governor of the island and all his soldiers were taken on 
 board the Charleston as prisoners of war. Then the vessel continued 
 her voyage to Manila, leaving a handful of men to garrison the 
 fort of Guam. Later on, when the Treaty of Peace was signed, this 
 little island of Guam was ceded to the United States as a coaling 
 station. Its situation makes it valuable to the United States from a 
 naval standpoint, for it is in a direct line across the Pacific, giving us 
 Hawaii, Guam and the Philippines as keys to practically the whole 
 commerce of the Pacific Ocean, which if the prophecies of the present 
 are fulfilled will be the great highway of commerce in the years to 
 come. 
 
 This little Island of Guam is not intrinsically a valuable posses 
 sion. As a coaling station, however, it will more than repay for its 
 keep, for this only of all the islands possessed by the United States 
 is not self-supporting, and has not been for years. 
 
 THE DISCOVERY OF THE LADRONES. 
 
 It was a welcome sight to Magellan and his crew when, one day 
 in March, nearly four hundred years ago they beheld the verdant and 
 beautifully sloping hills of the Ladrone Islands. Eighteen weary 
 months before they had sailed from the coast of Spain, and all that 
 time, first to the southwest and then to the northwest, they had fol 
 lowed the setting sun. Theirs were the first vessels manned by 
 white men that had ever plowed the trackless Pacific ; and this was 
 the first land ever seen by white men within that unknown ocean. 
 
 It was a pitiable crew on these small, weather-beaten ships, who 
 drew, that March morning, toward the coast of the present island of 
 Guam. Hunger and thirst had driven them to the verge of mad 
 ness. They had eaten even the leather thongs from their sail fasten 
 ings, and only a small mug of water per day was the portion of drink 
 for a man. " Land ! Land !" It was a glad cry from the watch aloft. 
 There were palm trees, cocoanuts, green grass, tropical fruits, an 
 abundance of fresh water, and though naked a curious and friendly 
 people. No wonder Magellan paused to rest himself and his sailors. 
 But the welcome he got on this i6th day of March, 1521, was such 
 that his stay was not a very long one. The sight of these strange 
 ships from a foreign land aroused the curiosity of the natives to such 
 
IT WAS CALLED THE ISLE OF ROBBERS 255 
 
 an extent that they swarmed around in their native canoes, and some 
 even swam out to meet the newcomers. They climbed over their 
 ships sides, and overran them so that they had to be expelled by 
 force. As a farewell token these natives took one of the ships boats, 
 and nearly a hundred men had to be sent on shore to recover it. 
 There was a bloody combat, in which many lives were sacrificed, 
 but the Spaniards eventually recovered their lost possession. 
 
 IT WAS CALLED THE ISLE OF ROBBERS. 
 
 Magellan named the place Islas de las Velas Latinas, or islands 
 of the Lateen Sails, but Legaspi called them Ladrones, which is the 
 Spanish word for "robbers," and by that name they have been known 
 ever after. 
 
 Since that time they have been visited by many explorers. In 
 1662 one of these roving vessels, the San Damian, while on a voyage 
 from Mexico to Manila, anchored on the Island of Guam. It had on 
 board a missionary, Fray Diego Luis Desan Victores, who was very 
 much struck by the wretched poverty of the natives and their terrible 
 condition, both physically and spiritually. When he reached Manila 
 he tried to get prominent members of his Church interested in these 
 natives, and so much did he plea for them to his superiors that they 
 had to order him to drop the subject. Finally, however, he secured 
 a good word on behalf of his project from the Archbishop, who 
 brought the matter to the attention of King Philip the Fourth. 
 Other pressure was also brought on that monarch so that in 1666 a royal 
 decree was received sanctioning the establishing of a mission in the 
 Ladrones, so Fray Diego, finally successful in the scheme that had 
 taken possession of his whole life, set sail from Spain for the islands, 
 intending to stop in Mexico on the way. But the owners of the 
 vessel in which he sailed wished to change her destination to Peru, so 
 that they might carry a full cargo. All of the pleas of the priest 
 could do nothing, and finally when the cargo was put on it shifted to 
 one side, so that the vessel leaned and was not able to right herself. 
 This decided the owners to lighten her, and they dispatched the 
 vessel to Mexico, as was desired by the priest. So Fray Diego finally 
 arrived safely in that city, but there he encountered more trouble. 
 The Viceroy declared that he had no orders to send an expedition to 
 
256 THE LA DRONE ISLANDS 
 
 the Ladrones, and remained inflexible to all entreaty. Even his wife 
 begged him on her bended knees to yield to the call for help from 
 these far-away islands, and it is said that while she besought him an 
 earthquake shook the city. The friar called it a manifestation of the 
 disapproval of Heaven, and so superstition accomplished what entrea 
 ties could not accomplish, and the expedition started in March, 1668, 
 in charge of a Jesuit mission. 
 
 THE NAME OF THE ISLANDS IS CHANGED. 
 
 Subsequently Queen Maria Anna, who had succeeded King Philip 
 IV. to the throne, gave the mission a pension of $3,000 per year, to 
 commemorate which liberality the Spaniards formally named the islands 
 the Islas Marianas, by which name they are known in Spain up to this 
 day, although the older name Ladrones is better known elsewhere. 
 
 As soon as the mission of Fray Diego became fairly established 
 on the island, a small body of troops, consisting of 12 Spaniards and 
 19 Filipinos was sent there, with 2 pieces of artillery. For a time 
 the natives accepted the dominion of the invaders, but as they 
 became more and more trodden under the feet of these foreigners, 
 they arose in rebellion. But here, again, Fray Diego was lucky, for 
 once more Nature came to him as a powerful ally working upon the 
 superstition of the ignorant islanders. While the rebellion was going 
 on, a severe storm came up and swept" all of the huts of the natives 
 before it. Thereupon the priests told them that Heaven was angered 
 at their uprising, and finally peace was declared. Fray Diego went 
 over to Visayas shortly after, where he was killed. No sooner had 
 he gone than the natives again revolted against the oppression of 
 these foreign priests, who wished to force them to adopt a religion 
 of which they knew nothing, and rites which were mysterious to 
 them. From time to time they sacrificed the priests, either in war 
 fare or in massacre. In 1778 a Governor of the islands was 
 appointed. He came from Mexico with thirty soldiers, but, after 
 two years service, resigned, finding the field unfruitful and the honor 
 barren ; for so great is the poverty there that, during the first cen 
 tury of Spanish rule, the Government was never able to collect a 
 cent of tribute from the natives, and, even at the present time, the 
 revenue from the islands is not nearly sufficient to pay expenses. 
 
THE EXTENT OF THE ARCHIPELAGO 257 
 
 There are two groups of islands in the Ladrones, divided by a 
 broad channel. Altogether they have an area of about 417 square 
 miles. The northern group consists of ten islands, which are unin 
 habited. The southern group comprises five islands, one of which 
 is not inhabited, Guahan or Guam, as it is known, Rota, Aguigan, 
 Tinian, and Saypan. The chief one of these is Guam, which is the 
 largest, the most settled, and the most southern of the islands. It 
 contains the only city in the colony, San Ignacio de Agafia, and the 
 fortified harbor of Umata. 
 
 The former is situated on a creek called the Port of Apra. 
 Vessels are not able to get up to Agafia, and they come at anchor 
 about two miles off Punta Piti, where passengers and cargo, as 
 well as the mails, are taken over to a very little wooden landing place. 
 Not far from there, at a distance of about 500 yards, is the office of 
 the harbor master. The road from there to the capital is a hard one to 
 travel, and extends for a distance of five miles. So difficult is com 
 munication between the harbor and the capital of the islands that it 
 has been a mooted question for many years as to whether it would not 
 be better to change the location of the chief city of the colony, but, 
 as yet, nothing has been done. 
 
 In the capital there are some fairly good-sized buildings, includ 
 ing a government house, a military hospital and pharmacy, an artil 
 lery depot, infantry barracks, a prison, a tribunal and administra 
 tor s office, as well as some ruins which mark the spot where once 
 stood what was known as the Public Buildings. There are also a Col 
 lege of San Juan de Letran for boys and a school for girls there. 
 
 In the city there are eight so-called stores, besides small wretched 
 huts, where native aguardiente is sold. It is made out of fermented 
 cocoanut milk. The stores are classed as follows : First, Manila ; 
 second, Japanese ; third, Chinese ; fourth, Chamarro (native) ; and 
 fifth, American. There are three of the Manila stores where ready- 
 made articles of apparel, notions in general demand, and high-priced 
 canned goods of poor quality are sold ; also poor cigars made of 
 native tobacco. The Japanese store is one of the best, carrying the 
 same class of goods with some additions. It has eggs and bread, the 
 latter baked every other day, and of a poor quality. The Chinese 
 store is very poor. The native store has a supply of native coffee of 
 
258 THE LAD RONE ISLANDS 
 
 fair quality and excellent chocolate, also cotton goods. The Ameri 
 can store is more pretentious, but inferior to the Japanese. It carries 
 a large supply of canned goods, clothes, notions, shoes, and furniture. 
 Flour is difficult to obtain. Butter and lard are not good, owing to 
 the warm climate. Chickens and eggs are plentiful. The ,beef is 
 poor, and no sheep are raised inland. There are plenty of pigs. 
 Yams, sweet potatoes and corn are abundant. Bananas, cocoanuts, 
 and breadfruit are the chief sources of food of the natives. There 
 is little fishing. The clams are fairly good, and the oysters are very 
 small and have a sweet taste. There are plenty of deer, goats, wild 
 turkey, plover, ducks and other game birds. 
 
 Nine other towns exist on the island, which boast parish priests 
 and churches built of stone and roofed with reed patching. All of 
 these towns have tribunals, six made of bamboo and reed, one built 
 of wood, and another of stone. In seven of these towns there are 
 schools, four for boys, five for girls and nine for both sexes, under 
 the direction of twenty-six teachers. 
 
 The islands themselves are of little value. The general surface 
 of the southern group is low, while that of the northern is moun 
 tainous, although the mountains are not very high. Volcanic forma 
 tions occur, and on two of the islands there are smoking craters. All 
 of the archipelago practically is densely wooded, and the vegetation 
 is much like that of the Philippines. 
 
 THE DISAPPEARANCE OF POPULATION. 
 
 When first visited by Europeans, the archipelago contained from 
 40,000 to 60,000 souls, represented by two distinct classes, the nobles 
 and the people, between whom marriage and even contact was for 
 bidden. But the Spanish conquest soon ended this distinction by 
 reducing all alike to servitude. For a long time after Spanish occu 
 pation, the natives complained and finally rebelled against the oppres 
 sive measures of their rulers ; but by the end of the seventeenth cen 
 tury they ceased their resistance, and it was found by a census that 
 fully half of them had perished or escaped in their canoes to the 
 Caroline Islands, and that two-thirds of their 180 villages had fallen 
 to ruins. Then came an epidemic which swept away nearly all the 
 natives of Guam, and the island of Tinian (one of the group) was 
 
THE DISAPPEARANCE OF POPULATION 259 
 
 depopulated and its inhabitants brought to Guam. Nearly all the 
 new arrivals soon died. In the year 1760, a census showed a total of 
 only 10,654 inhabitants left in all the islands, and the Spaniards 
 repopulated them by bringing Tagals from the Philippines. 
 
 The population of the islands in 1899 was estimated at about 
 9,000. The people are generally lacking in energy, loose in morals 
 and miserably poor. Their education has been seriously neglected. 
 The natives of the islands are about as much domesticated as the 
 Philippine islanders, and their features are much more regular. The 
 introduction of Spanish language has practically driven out their own 
 language, which is called Chamorro, and which much resembles the 
 dialect of the Visayas. Some of the natives also speak English, as 
 these islands used to be the resort of some English speaking whalers. 
 The Spaniards have taught the natives the use of firearms, and all 
 are pressed into service and trained in the arts of war. 
 
 The climate of the islands is damp but salubrious, and the heat 
 is so tempered by trade winds that it is very much milder in tem 
 perature than the Philippines. The yearly mean temperature at 
 Guam is about 81* F. August and September are the warmest 
 months, but they do not differ greatly from the rest of the yean 
 
 There is a wet and a dry season, although in the latter there is 
 considerable rain at times. From October to May the winds are 
 usually northeasterly, while during the rest of the year they are 
 northwesterly and southwesterly as a rule, the latter being accom 
 panied by much rain. 
 
 The islands are full of rivers, although in Guam the clearing 
 away of the woods has caused many of the largest streams to dwindle 
 down to mere brooks. Cocoanut and other palms, the bread tree 
 and other tropical trees and plants generally thrive. The large fruit 
 bat which abounds in the Philippines is indigenous to the Ladrones, 
 and, despite its objectionable odor, is a popular article of food. 
 Swine and oxen are allowed to run wild, and are hunted when 
 needed. There are only a few species of birds; even insects are rare; 
 and the reptiles are represented by several kinds of lizards and a 
 single species of serpent. No domestic animals were known in the 
 islands until introduced by the Spaniards. 
 
CHAPTER XV 
 
 The Hawaiian Islands, u The Paradise of the 
 
 Pacific." 
 
 Annexed to the United States by Act of Congress, July 7, 1898. Truly a Paradise in 
 Climate, Fertility and Healthfulness. Discovery by Captain Cook. Something 
 about the Inhabitants. Old times in Hawaii. A Pen Sketch of Queen Lilioukalani, 
 the Last of the Royal Line. The Revolution of 1893. The Plea for Admission 
 to the United States. The Mission of Senator Blount. The Work of American 
 Missionaries. Some Hawaiian Superstitions and Amusements. Products and 
 Commerce. Sugar is to the Islands what Wheat is to our Northwest. Honolulu, 
 the Capital City. A Beautiful and Delightful Resort. On the Threshold of a 
 Great Industrial Era. 
 
 RIGHT in the pathway which leads across the sea, to the shores 
 of our new possessions gained by war, appears another pos 
 session, obtained through peace, the Hawaiian Islands. Five 
 years ago the American flag which had been hoisted above the build 
 ings of Honolulu, taking the " Paradise of the Pacific " under the 
 protection of its folds, was lowered, and now by a joint vote of Con 
 gress, the flag has again been hoisted over the islands, and they have 
 been formally annexed to the United States. 
 
 When the flag was raised for the second time on August 12, 
 1898, in obedience to the act of Congress of July yth, some of the 
 richest, most fertile and most valuable of all of the islands of the globe, 
 became the property of our Government. In climate, fertility, and 
 healthfulness, they are truly the " Paradise of the Pacific." There are 
 eight inhabited islands in the Sandwich archipelago, including Hawaii, 
 Maui, Kalroolawe, Lanai, Molokai, Oahu, Kaui, Niihau. Alto 
 gether they have an area of 6,700 square miles, a little less than that 
 of the State of New Jersey, and about 500 square miles greater than 
 the combined areas of Rhode Island and Connecticut. They extend 
 from northwest to southeast over a distance of about 380 miles, the 
 several islands being separated by channels varying in width from 6 
 
 261 
 
2 6 2 THE HA W All AN ISLANDS 
 
 to 60 miles. They lie entirely within the tropics, not far from a 
 direct line from San Francisco and Japan, 2,089 miles from San 
 Francisco. 
 
 CAPTAIN COOK DISCOVERS THE ISLANDS. 
 
 The islands were first discovered in January, 1778, by Captain 
 Cook, who named them the Sandwich Islands after Lord Sandwich, 
 but the native name Hawaii, is more generally used. There is good 
 evidence that Juan Gaetano, in the year 1555, that is 223 years 
 before Captain Cook s visit, landed upon their shores. Old Spanish 
 charts and the traditions of the native bear out this theory, but they 
 were not made known to the world until Cook visited them. The 
 original inhabitants came from New Zealand, according to popular 
 belief, although that island is some 4,000 miles southwest of them. 
 The physical appearance of the people is very similar and their lan 
 guage is so much alike that a native Hawaiian and a native New 
 Zealander, meeting for the first time can carry on a conversation. Their 
 ideas of the Deity and some of their religious customs are nearly the 
 same. That the islands have been peopled for a long time is proven 
 by the fact that human bones are found under lava beds and coral 
 reefs where geologists declare they have lain for at least 1,300 years. 
 
 Captain Cook s visit to the islands was a notable event, according 
 to an old historian, The captain was worshiped as a god ; the 
 people declined to charge him for anything, but loaded up his ship 
 freely with the best productions of the islands. " The priests ap 
 proached him in a crouching attitude, offering prayers and exhibiting 
 all the formalities of worship. After approaching him with prostra 
 tions, the priests cast their red capas over his shoulders and then 
 receding a little they presented hogs and a variety of other offerings, 
 with long addresses rapidly enunciated which were a repetition of 
 their prayers and religious homage. 
 
 " When he went on shore most of the people fled for fear of him, 
 and others bowed down before him with solemn reverence. He was 
 conducted to the house of the gods, and into the sacred enclosure, 
 and receive there the highest homage. Kalaniopuu, the King, arrived 
 from Maui, on the twenty-fourth of January, and treated Captain 
 Cook with much kindness, giving him feather coats, and fly brushes 
 and paid him divine honors. 
 
THE DEATH OF CAPTAIN COOK 263 
 
 Describing the death of Captain Cook, this historian says that 
 Cook had established a blockade to stop thieving in canoes. He 
 continues : "A canoe came from an adjoining district bound within 
 the bay. In the canoe were two chiefs of some rank, Kekuhaupio 
 and Kalinm The canoe was fired upon from one of the boats and 
 Kalimu was killed. Kekuhaupio made the greatest speed till he 
 reached the palace of the King, where Captain Cook also was, and 
 communicated the intelligence of the death of the chief. The 1 " 
 attendants of the King were enraged and showed signs of hostility, 
 but were restrained by the thought that Captain Cook was a god. 
 At that instant a warrior with a spear in his hand approached the Cap 
 tain, and was heard to say, that the boats in the harbor had killed 
 his brother and he would be revenged. Cook, from the warrior s 
 enraged appearance and that of the multitude, was suspicious of him 
 and fired upon him with his pistol. Then followed a scene of con 
 fusion and in the midst Captain Cook, being hit with a stone and 
 perceiving the man who threw it, shot him dead. He also struck a 
 certain chief with his sword. The chief instantly siezed Captain 
 Cook with a strong hand designing merely to hold him, and not to 
 take his life, for he supposed him to be a god, and that he could not 
 die. Captain Cook struggled to free himself from the grasp and, as 
 he was about to fall, uttered a groan. The people immediately ex 
 claimed, " He groans, he is not a god," and instantly slew him. 
 Such was the melancholy death of Captain Cook. 
 
 " Immediately the men in the boat commenced a deliberate fire 
 upon the crowd. They had refrained in a measure before for fear of 
 killing their captain. Many of the natives were killed. The body of 
 Captain Cook was carried into the interior of the island by the 
 natives, the bones secured according to their customs, and the flesh 
 burned in the fire. 
 
 " The heart and liver of Captain Cook were stolen and eaten by 
 some hungry children, who mistook them in the night for the inwards 
 of a dog. Some of his bones were sent on board his ship in compli 
 ance with the urgent demands of the officers, and some were kept by 
 the priests as objects of worship." 
 
 The people of that period were about as wild and ignorant and 
 superstitious as people well could be. They numbered at the time 
 
264 THE PI A WAIIAN ISLANDS 
 
 of discovery about 400,000. Forty years after, when a census was 
 taken, there were 142,000. These diminished one-half during the 
 next fifty years ; and the native population of the islands in 1897 was 
 only 31,019. The total population by the last census, when the 
 islands became a part of the United States, was 109,020, made up, 
 in addition to the natives mentioned, of 24,407 Japanese, 21,616 
 Chinese, 12,191 Portuguese, and 3,086 Americans. The remainder 
 were half-castes from foreign intermarriage with the natives, together 
 with a small representation from England, Germany, and other 
 European countries. 
 
 A RACE BECOMING EXTINCT. 
 
 That the original Hawaiians must soon become extinct as a pure 
 race is evident, though they have never been persecuted or mal 
 treated. They are a handsome, strong-looking people, with a rich, 
 dark complexion, jet black eyes, wavy hair, full voluptuous lips, and 
 teeth of snowy whiteness ; but they are constitutionally weak, easily 
 contract and quickly succumb to disease, and the only hope of per 
 petuating their blood seems to lie in mixing it by intermarriage with 
 other races. 
 
 Prior to 1795 all the islands had separate kings, but in that and 
 the following year the Great King of Hawaii, Kamehameha, with 
 cannon that he procured from Vancouver s ships, assaulted and sub 
 jugated all the surrounding kings, and since that time the islands 
 have been under one government. Previous to this the natives had 
 been at war, according to their traditions, for three hundred years. 
 The*fierceness of their hand-to-hand conflicts, as described by their 
 historians, has probably not been surpassed by those of any other 
 people in the world. 
 
 Kamehameha I. was succeeded by Kamehameha II., who made 
 for himself a record as reformer. He broke through the sacred 
 priestly law which prevented a man from eating at the same table 
 with his female relatives, and finally succeeded in breaking up, to a 
 great extent, but not completely, the old barbaric rites and customs. 
 It was during his reign that the missionaries from this country first 
 succeeded in making headway. The last Kamehameha died in 1872, 
 leaving one child. He was the fourth of his race, and is perhaps 
 
A RACE BECOMING EXTINCT 265 
 
 best remembered by the reputation of his Queen, Emma, who became 
 a great favorite with Queen Victoria when she visited England. She 
 was a woman of lovely character, and attracted much attention to 
 herself and her people. 
 
 On the King s death the succession lay between Prince Lur- 
 alilo, a grandson of the original Kamehameha and David Kalakaua, 
 who was the son of a chief of royal blood. Luralilo was given the 
 throne by a popular election, but lived only two years. He died in 
 1874, without naming a successor, and Queen Dowager Emma 
 announced her readiness to rule over Hawaii, but there arose, as an 
 aspirant to the throne, this Kalakaua, who was a boatman in the har 
 bor of Honolulu, and who, if rumor is to be believed, used to pick 
 up extra money at night by playing the banjo in one of the water 
 front dives. He was a descendant of the old Hawaiian chiefs, and 
 had a strain of Kamehameha blood in his veins. He cast eager 
 eyes on the throne, and, by using American influence, he was able to 
 secure thirty-nine out of forty-five votes of the Legislature, which 
 had been convened in extra session to decide the matter, and, conse 
 quently, was declared King of the islands, much to the disgust of the 
 people who were in sympathy with Queen Emma. 
 
 During his reign the Government of Hawaii entered into vari 
 ous negotiations with the Government of the United States which 
 resulted in a treaty of reciprocity being established in 1876. By this 
 treaty rice and the lower grades of sugar were admitted duty free 
 into the United States. This was of an immense advantage to 
 Hawaii during the period in which the tax on sugar was unusually 
 high in this country, and she was able to realize $45 or $50 per ton 
 more than any other on her sugar. This was instrumental in draw- 
 ing American capital and American people to the colony, and they 
 began immediately to take a controlling position in the political and 
 social affairs of the islands. 
 
 In 1887, under President Cleveland s first administration, addi 
 tional provisions were made to the treaty and its time lengthened, in 
 return for which the King ceded to the United States the exclusive 
 right to establish and fortify a naval station on the Hawaiian Islands. 
 Pearl Harbor was designated as the station; but in 1889 Secretary 
 of the State, James G. Elaine, dissatisfied with the imperfect cessions 
 
266 THE HA W All AN ISLANDS 
 
 of this harbor, as well as with the general status of affairs between 
 our country and Hawaii, urged upon the Hawaiian Minister at Wash 
 ington, H. A. P. Carter, an enlargement of the treaty provisions. It 
 was proposed to make the treaty permanent, to create absolute free 
 trade between the two countries in all articles except intoxicants, to 
 make the cessation of a naval station permanent as well as exclusive, 
 and to pledge to Hawaii full participation in any bounties to be given 
 American producers of sugar. In short, Hawaii, in all its commer 
 cial and productive interests, was to enjoy all the privileges of one 
 of the United States. In return, besides the cession of Pearl Har 
 bor, Mr. Elaine asked a pledge of Hawaii to enter into no treaty 
 engagement with other powers without the full consent of the 
 United States. 
 
 Canada, however, put its finger in the pie, and so worked upon 
 King Kalakaua that he rejected the treaty, and before another could 
 be made, he died. Queen Liliuokalani, his sister, ascended the throne, 
 and made immediate provision for her succesor. As she had no chil 
 dren of her own, there was, of course, no direct heir to the crown, 
 but she announced that the heir to the crown would be Princess 
 Kaiulani, one of the most beautiful, cultured, and fascinating of the 
 children of the islands. She was the daughter of Honorable Archi 
 bald Cleghorn, an Englishman, who was the Governor of the Island of 
 Oahu, and Princess Likelike. But, as fate would have it, this beauti 
 ful Hawaiian never ruled in Hawaii ; she died early in March, 1899. 
 
 Queen Liliuokalani had not only inherited a throne, but she had 
 inherited the discontent of a people who had been imposed upon 
 by Kalakaua. He had shown himself a great champion of his own 
 people, but a great foe to foreigners, and, as the latter were the most 
 powerful and richest of the dwellers upon the islands, he laid up 
 trouble, not only for himself, but for his successor. He was a great 
 seeker after personal power, and used every means possible to sur 
 round himself with subservient officeholders. Through his follies, in 
 the seven years up to 1887, the national debt grew from $389,000 to 
 $1,936,000. Finally matters went from bad to worse, until an open 
 revolt was precipitated by his accepting two bribes, one of $80,000, 
 the other of $75,000, for which he gave the same exclusive privileges 
 in the opium traffic to each of two rival bidders. 
 
A RACE BECOMING EXTINCT 267 
 
 Immediately there was an uprising of such magnitude that it 
 took the King s breath. The foreigners organized a united move 
 ment for reform, and they secured concessions which took all the real 
 power away from the King and placed it in the hands of a cabinet, 
 subject only to the Legislature. 
 
 In 1889 Robert W. Wilcox headed a revolution against the 
 methods employed by the King. He was a full-blooded Hawaiian, 
 and he protested not only against the King s extravagance, but the 
 way in which in his later years he allowed the Government affairs to 
 be dictated practically by the business men of other countries. His 
 uprising was not a success. He seized the military school, the palace 
 yard and the Government house, but the movement was suppressed 
 within a few hours. 
 
 When the Queen took her seat she insisted on her right to 
 appoint a Cabinet of her own. This right was granted her, and for 
 some time she lived up to the Constitution which the previous King 
 had signed. 
 
 Later, however, she made up her mind to take matters into her 
 own hands and again turn the Government into a personal one. In 
 1892 there was a Legislative session which was protracted over a 
 space of eight months, chiefly through her desire to get matters into 
 her own control. Opium and lottery bills were championed by her, 
 which were of such a nature as to arouse violent opposition. But the 
 final crash came later. The Queen had a Constitution drawn up 
 which would have had the effect of making her absolute monarch of 
 the islands, and would have disfranchised a class of citizens who paid 
 a large proportion of the taxes to the Government. She attempted to 
 promulgate this new Constitution on January I4th. The matter had 
 been ready for two weeks previous to that, and in expectation of it a 
 large crowd of Hawaiians had assembled around the palace gates 
 and in the grounds. Natives were also gathered in large groups in 
 the Government building yard and elsewhere in the neighborhood. 
 
 The Queen retired to the blue room and summoned her minis 
 ters. She was seated at a table dressed in a magnificent costume 
 with a sparkling coronet of diamonds. She presented the ministers 
 upon their arrival with a draft of the new Constitution, demanding 
 their signatures, and declaring her intention of promulgating the 
 
268 THE HA WAIIAN ISLANDS 
 
 document immediately. Two of the ministers refused to accede to 
 her wishes, and somewhat hesitatingly the others joined in the 
 refusal. They urged Her Majesty not to violate the law, but she 
 was not to be dissuaded from her revolutionary course. 
 
 Bringing her clenched hand down upon the table, the Queen 
 said : " Gentlemen, I do not wish to hear any more advice. I intend 
 to promulgate this Constitution, and to do it now." Then she told 
 her Cabinet that unless they abandoned their resistance at once she 
 would go out upon the steps of the palace and tell the excited crowd 
 that she wished to give them a new Constitution, but the ministers 
 were preventing her from doing it. Remembering a previous riot, 
 and the fate of the unlucky men who fell into the hands of the insur 
 gents, and knowing that the Queen had prepared just such a trap for 
 them, the ministers fled before her threat could be put into execution. 
 
 From the Government building they sent word all around town 
 asking citizens what support could be expected to resist the revolu 
 tionary movement begun by the Queen. There was but one opinion, 
 and all joined together to support the law and the liberties of the 
 people. When this was learned, great pressure was brought upon the 
 Queen to retrace the steps she had already taken. While her troops 
 stood drawn up before the palace waiting for the final word of com 
 mand, the Queen hesitated. There was another conference which 
 lasted for a long time, and finally, although she could not be per 
 suaded to give up her plan, the Queen consented with bitter reluc 
 tance to a postponement. She was a very angry woman when later 
 she entered the throne room where were assembled the leading men 
 of her rule, but she announced publicly that the new Government 
 would not yet be declared. 
 
 A PROCLAMATION. 
 
 Knowing that the Queen would eventually carry out her plans, 
 the foreign element in the community called a mass meeting and 
 appointed a committee of public safety, which issued a proclamation 
 stating that : " It is firmly believed that the culminating, revolutionary 
 attempt of last Saturday will, unless radical measures are taken, 
 wreck our already damaged credit abroad and precipitate to final 
 ruin our already overstrained financial condition, and guarantees of 
 
A PROCLAMATION 269 
 
 protection to life, liberty and property will steadily decrease. The 
 political situation is rapidly growing worse. In this belief, and also 
 in the belief that the action hereby taken is and will be for the best 
 personal, political and property interests of every citizen of the land, 
 we, citizens and residents of the Hawaiian Islands, organized and act 
 ing for public safety and common good, hereby proclaim as follows : 
 
 "The Hawaiian monarchical system of Government is hereby 
 abrogated. Provisional Government for the control and management 
 of public affairs and the protection of public peace is hereby estab 
 lished, to exist until terms of union with the United States of America 
 have been negotiated and agreed upon. Such Provisional Govern 
 ment shall consist of an Executive Council of four members, who are 
 hereby declared to be S. B. Dole, J. A. King, P. C. Jones, and W. 
 O. Smith, who shall administer the Government of the islands, the 
 first named acting as President and Chairman of such Council, 
 administering the Department of Foreign Affairs, and the others sev 
 erally administering the Departments of Interior, Finance and Attor 
 ney-General, respectively, in the order in which enumerated, accord 
 ing to the existing Hawaiian law, as far as may be consistent with 
 this proclamation and also of an Advisory Council, which shall con 
 sist of fourteen members, who are hereby declared to be S. D. Damon, 
 A. Brown, L. A. Thurston, J. F. Morgan, E. Emmelsmith, H. Water- 
 house, J. A. McCandless, E. D. Tenny, F. W. McChesney, F. Wil- 
 helm, W. R. Castle, W. G. Ashley, W. C. Wilder, and C. Bolte. 
 Such Advisory Council shall also have general legislative authority. 
 Such Executive and Advisory Councils shall, acting jointly, have 
 power to remove any member of either Council, and to fill such or 
 any other vacancy. 
 
 " All officers under the existing Government are hereby requested 
 to continue to exercise their functions and perform the duties of their 
 respective offices excepting the following named persons : Queen 
 Liliuokalani, Charles B. Wilson, Marshal ; Samuel Parker, Minister 
 of Foreign Affairs ; W. II. Cornwell, Minister of Finance; John F. 
 Colburn, Minister of Interior; Arthur P. Peterson, Attorney-General, 
 who are hereby removed from office. All Hawaiian laws and con 
 stitutional principles not inconsistent herewith shall continue in 
 
2/0 THE HA WAIIAN ISLANDS 
 
 force until further order of the Executive and Advisory Councils. 
 HENRY E. COOPER, J. A. MCCANDLESS, 
 
 ANDREW BROWN, THEODORE F. LANSING, 
 
 JOHN EMMELSMITH, C. BOLTE, 
 
 EDWARD SUHR, HENRY WATERHOUSE, 
 
 W. C. WILDER, F, W. MCCHESNEY, 
 
 WILLIAM O. SMITH." 
 
 The following day, the Provisional Government was organized, 
 and at once issued a proclamation reciting the arrogance of the 
 Queen, enumerating the broken promises of Her Majesty and detail 
 ing the wrongs inflicted on the residents and property. 
 
 The new Government called on volunteers, who assembled, 
 armed, to the number of 500. The old Government surrendered 
 without striking a blow, although it had about 400 men under arms 
 and a battery of Gatling guns. The Provisional Government then 
 notified the representatives of foreign Governments of the change, 
 and asked recognition. It was at once granted by all the powers 
 except England. 
 
 The Government assumed formal control of the palace and 
 barracks. The Ex-Queen retired to her private residence at Wash 
 ington Place, and the Government granted her an honorary guard of 
 1 6 men. The household guards were paid off to February ist, and 
 disbanded. A strong force of volunteers took possession, and is now 
 in charge of the palace, the barracks, the police headquarters and 
 other Government buildings. 
 
 At the headquarters the work of military organization was 
 pushed rapidly forward, and volunteers continued to pour in steadily 
 from all quarters. The Provisional Government spent a large part 
 of the night in perfecting its organization and adjusting the wheels 
 of Government to changed order. In the meantime the ordinary 
 routine work of the Government was going ahead with but little break. 
 The Hawaiian steamer Claudine was chartered, and left Honolulu on 
 the morning of Wednesday, January iQth, four days after the revolt, 
 with five commissioners aboard instructed to proceed to Washington, 
 and negotiate a treaty of annexation. The commissioners were Lorrin 
 A. Thurston, William C. Wilder, William R. Caset, Charles L. 
 Carter and Joseph Marsden. 
 
PROTESJ^ OF THE QUEEN 271 
 
 During the critical time, just as the reformers were about to 
 sieze the throne, the United States warship Boston arrived unex 
 pectedly and landed marines to protect the lives and property of 
 Americans on the island. This turned out to be an important event 
 in the subsequent history of the islands, for President Cleveland used 
 it against the new Government. The deposed Queen openly charged 
 that these troops were part of a conspiracy against her. In the pro 
 clamation issued when she was deposed, she said : 
 
 " I, Liliuokalani, by grace of God, and under the Constitution of 
 the Hawaiian Kingdom Queen, do hereby solemnly protest any and 
 all acts done against myself and the Constitutional Government of 
 the Hawaiian Kingdom, by certain persons claiming to have estab 
 lished a Provisional Government of and for this Kingdom ; that I 
 yield to the superior force of the United States of America, whose 
 Minister Plenipotentiary, His Excellency John L. Stevens, has caused 
 United States troops to be landed at Honolulu, and declared that 
 he would support the said Government. 
 
 " Now, to avoid any collision of armed forces and perhaps loss 
 of life, I do under this protest and impelled by said force, yield my 
 authority until such time as the Government of the United States 
 shall, upon facts being presented to it, under the action of its repre 
 sentative reinstate me in the authority which I claim as constitu 
 tional sovereign of the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 Done at Honolulu, this iyth day of January, A.D., 1893. 
 (Signed) LILIUOKALANI." 
 
 United States Minister Stevens immediately recognized the 
 new Government in the following communication : 
 
 " To S. B. Dole, Esq., and others, composing the Provisional 
 Government of the Hawaiian Islands : A Provisional Government 
 having been duly constituted in place of the recent Government of 
 Queen Liliuokalani, and the said Provisional Government being in 
 full possession of the Government buildings, archives and treasury, 
 and in control of the capital of the Hawaiian Islands, I hereby recog 
 nize said Provisional Government as the de facto Government of the 
 Hawaiian Islands. JOHN L. STEVENS, 
 
 Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary 
 of the United States" 
 
272 THE HA WAIIAN ISLANDS 
 
 When the matter officially reached our Government, a treaty of 
 annexation was negotiated by President Harrison, and was sent to 
 the Senate for confirmation, but was not passed before that body 
 adjourned. 
 
 The election of President Cleveland put a new phase on the 
 subject for he did not take the same view of the question as did his 
 predecessor. It seemed to him that the protectorate established on 
 the islands, and the control of the reform Government had been the 
 result of conspiracy in which our own consul and the captain of the 
 Boston had played a conspicuous part. Even before his inauguration 
 he started an investigation into the matter, and one of the first things 
 he did after he entered the White House was to withdraw the treaty 
 which was in the hands of the Senate, and to send the Hon. 
 James H. Blount, of Georgia, to the islands with instructions to 
 investigate the whole affair. Such were Mr. Blount s powers that he 
 was ever known afterward as " Paramount " Blount. He had been 
 in Honolulu but two days, when he ordered the American flag hauled 
 down from the Government building where it was flying and 
 ordered the marines, which were doing duty there to return on 
 board the Boston, and other ships to which they belonged. He 
 immediately took a position which was higher in authority than 
 either the naval officers there, or the American Minister. He started 
 to take a testimony, but according to the unprejudiced mind it seems 
 to have been testimony chiefly of the people allied to the deposed 
 Queen, and was filled with perversions of facts which are well known, 
 and was not at all convincing. 
 
 His report, however, was accepted by President Cleveland with 
 out more ado, and the latter sought to restore the Queen to her 
 throne. Here, however, he met with an unexpected difficulty. One 
 of the conditions which he laid before the Queen was that, when the 
 throne should be restored to her, she should not punish the officers 
 of the Provisional Government and the leaders of the revolution. 
 This she bitterly refused to accede to, demanding that it was her right 
 not only to confiscate the property of the people who sought her 
 crown, but to behead them as well. This gave Mr. Cleveland a bet 
 ter idea than he had had before of the blood-thirstiness of Queen 
 " Lil", and, even though she agreed finally to forego the pleasure of 
 
THE BIRTH OF A NEW REPUBLIC 
 
 273 
 
 chopping" off the heads of her foes, it was done in such a way that 
 the United States, through its Minister, merely went through the 
 formality of requesting the Provisional Government to vacate, and, 
 when the latter declined to do so, the whole matter was dropped, and 
 the incident was declared closed. 
 
 Owing to President Cleveland s feeling on the subject, no efforts 
 were made during his Administration to push the annexation of the 
 islands, and, consequently, the Provisional Government began to 
 strengthen itself, and to look forward to becoming a permanent one. 
 For that purpose a constitutional convention was called, which met 
 on May 2oth, and it continued in session until July 3d. On July 4, 
 1894, the Constitution of the new Republic of Hawaii was pro 
 claimed, and Sanford B. Dole was elected the first President of the 
 Republic, the same position which he occupied in the Provisional 
 Government. And so, on the anniversary of the birthday of the 
 greatest of all republics, there was born on this island, in the midst 
 of the Pacific Ocean, a new republic, which was destined to become 
 a territorial part of the United States. 
 
 But, although the islands and their throne had passed from 
 beneath the sway of the dusky Queen " Lil" and the beautiful Kaiulani, 
 they were not content to allow themselves to be deposed without at 
 least a protest ; so both the Queen and her niece visited this country 
 with a view to enlisting the sympathies of President Cleveland and 
 of the Senators and Representatives, who were to pass upon the sub 
 ject of what was to become of the islands in the future. 
 
 The Princess Kaiulani was received everywhere with open arms. 
 Her beauty, her culture, her grace and tact won for her hosts of 
 friends wherever she appeared. Her journey was a series of social 
 ovations. Not so with the Queen. She created but little stir, and 
 outside of the newspaper cartoons which ridiculed her, and the frigid 
 reception accorded her by Mr. Cleveland, she had but little attention 
 paid her during her visit. Her reputation had preceded her, and 
 though she stayed for a long time lobbying against the annexation of 
 the islands to the United States, she finally left, unsuccessful and dis 
 consolate. 
 
 On June 15,1 898, by a vote of 209 to 9 1 , the bill providing for the 
 annexation of Hawaii passed the House; and July 7th, the Senate 
 
THE HA WAIIAN ISLANDS 
 
 passed the same resolution by a vote of 42 to 21, and President Mc- 
 Kinley immediately signed it. The measure brought forth one of the 
 most spirited debates ever known in the halls of the Legislature, inas 
 much as it was the first step of our Government, outside of the domain 
 which it had set down for itself, the first Congressional act of expan 
 sion. These resolutions declared that the islands were thereby 
 annexed to the United States, and provided for five Commissioners, 
 two at least of whom are to be residents of Hawaii, who should 
 recommend such legislation to Congress as they thought advisable. 
 The United States assumed the Hawaiian debt up to $4,000,000; 
 Chinese immigration was prohibited ; the treaties existing between 
 Hawaii and the other powers were declared void ; all civil, judicial, 
 and military powers exercised by the officers of the Hawaiian Repub 
 lic were to be exercised according to the directions of the President, 
 and that officer was given power to appoint those who are to put in 
 effect the Provisional Government of the islands. And so, on August 
 12, 1898, the flag of Hawaii was hauled down forever, and the new 
 Republic began its life under the Stars and Stripes. 
 
 The American flag was raised above the Government Building 
 with due solemnity, at which American marines and sailors from the 
 United States vessels Philadelphia and Mohican attended. Shortly 
 before 12 o clock President Dole, attended by his Cabinet and Chief 
 Justice Judd, arrived, and was joined by Minister Sewall, Admiral 
 Miller and members of the Legislature and the Diplomatic Corps. 
 There, on behalf of the Government of Hawaii, President Dole 
 transferred the islands to the care of the United States, and, as the 
 last salute to the old Government died away, and the flag that had 
 floated for years over the islands was hauled down, the Hawaiian 
 national anthem gave way to the " Star Spangled Banner," and the 
 American flag was raised, while salute after salute greeted it. 
 
 Thus ended the hopes of Queen Liliuokalani, and the still greater 
 hopes for the far future of the beautiful Princess Kaiulani for the 
 crown which she was never to wear; but that the good of Hawaii 
 was conserved, -cannot be doubted. Neither of them attended the 
 ceremony ; the latter, with her eyes filled with tears, sat alone at her 
 own home and passed through the bitterest moments of her life, 
 denying herself friends and comforters. 
 
HA WAI I AN BANQUET 275 
 
 President McKinley, under the terms of the resolution which 
 annexed Hawaii, appointed as Commissioners to visit the islands Sena 
 tor Shelby M. Cullom, of Illinois ; Senator John T. Morgan, of 
 Alabama; Representative Robert R. Hitt, of Illinois; President 
 Sanford B. Dole, of Hawaii ; and Justice W. F. Frear, of the 
 Hawaiian Supreme Court. They visited the islands in August in 
 order to formulate a plan for the Government. The bill which they 
 formulated and presented to Congress provided for the government 
 of Hawaii as a territory. Provision was made for a legislature of 
 two houses, and the people were practically allowed to govern them 
 selves according to the rules of the other territories of the United 
 
 o 
 
 States. And so this possession of peace, which came to the United 
 States in time of war, begins a new era of prosperity. 
 
 All of the American troops who have gone to Manila are enthu 
 siastic about Hawaii. It was the first stop which they had on their 
 long voyage halfway around the world, and when they reached it 
 the weather was as delightful and the islands as beautiful as anyone 
 could wish. The men stopped for a little breathing time there, and 
 it proved a time of delight to those who visited these shores for 
 the first time. The beauties of Honolulu, its civilization, the culture 
 and refinement of many of the people, the richness of the coloring of 
 flowers and foliage, and the novelty of everything that met their 
 sight shattered all their former belief that Hawaii was an unknown, 
 uncivilized land. 
 
 The Astor Battery boys were particularly enthusiastic about the 
 reception they received. Everywhere they met with an ovation, as 
 indeed did all the troops of Uncle Sam, and they were entertained 
 by some of the residents of the place at a native dinner. This func 
 tion is one that will long live in the minds of those who enjoyed it 
 for the first time. A member of the Astor Battery tells of such a 
 dinner which he attended, and at which Princess Kaiulani was present. 
 He says: The guests sat on the floor facing each other, and the 
 good things, from a Hawaiian point of view, were placed on the floor 
 before them. There were no courses, but in eating one helped him 
 self, and then passed the dish on to the next neighbor, who in turn 
 helped it circulate around the company. One of the dishes was the 
 favorite Honolulu dish called " Poi," which was served in a bowl, and 
 
2/6 777^ HA WAIIAN ISLANDS 
 
 each guest helped himself with his fingers. This was all right for 
 the first one, but when one was seated at the other end, unless he 
 was used to the habit, or had a soldier s appetite, or had had assur 
 ances that the others had washed their hands, he was likely not to 
 relish this dainty of the Sandwich Islands. 
 
 " I was very much surprised with the appearance of Princess 
 Kaiulani. I had read of her in the papers, but was not prepared to 
 find a woman of such rare intelligence and refinement as she proved 
 to be. She is extremely fascinating, and came dressed in the fashion 
 peculiar to the high class members of Hawaiian royalty. Around her 
 throat she wore a necklace which might more strictly be called a boa. 
 It was a magnificent piece of art and had been in her family for gen 
 erations. It was made entirely of feathers, each feather of which had 
 been separately plucked from beneath the wing of one bird of a rare 
 native species, after which the bird was killed. It took years to com 
 plete this necklace, and thousands of birds were sacrificed in its 
 making. 
 
 " The Princess spoke English fluently, also French, and, in fact, 
 any of the languages which her guests were able to speak. She was 
 very bright and vivacious, and gave no symptom of not being in the 
 best of health." 
 
 This last remark was apropos of the sad news that recently came 
 from Honolulu that the lovely Princess passed away in the early part 
 of March, 1899, and was buried with all possible ceremonies on the 
 i 2th of the same month. 
 
 The manners and customs of the native Hawaiians are most 
 interesting, but space forbids a description of them here. Their 
 religion was a gross form of idolatry, with many gocls. Human sac 
 rifice was freely practiced. They deified dead chiefs and worshiped 
 their bones. The great king, Kamehameha I., though an idolater, 
 was a most progressive monarch, and invited Vancouver, who went 
 there in 1 794, taking swine, cattle, sheep, and horses, together with 
 oranges and other valuable plants, to bring over teachers and mission 
 aries to teach his people "the white man s religion." 
 
 But it was not until 1820, after the death of the great King, that 
 the first missionaries arrived, and they came from America. The 
 year previous, in 1819, Kamehameha II. had destroyed many of the 
 
CHURCH IN HONOLULU, HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Built of lava stone. Seating capacity about 3000. 
 
 SUGAR CANE PLANTATION, HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 About one-fifth of the entire population is engaged in sugar culture. The average product is about three tons per acre. 
 
THE WORK OF AMERICAN MISSIONARIES 279 
 
 temples and idols and forbidden idol worship in the islands ; conse 
 quently, when the missionaries arrived, they beheld the unprecedented 
 spectacle of a nation without a religion. The natives were rapidly 
 converted to Christianity. It was these American missionaries who 
 first reduced the Hawaiian language to writing, established schools 
 and taught the natives. As a result of their work, the Hawaiians are 
 among the most generally educated people, in the elementary sense, in 
 the world. There is hardly a person in the islands, above the age of 
 eight years, who cannot read and write. In spite of education, how 
 ever, many of the ancient superstitions still exist, and some of the old 
 stone temples are yet standing. What the United States will do with 
 these heathen temples remains to be seen. The natives revere them 
 as relics of their savage history, and as such they may be preserved. 
 Aside from the horrors of superstitions, the Hawaiians lead a 
 happy life, full of amusements of various kinds on the land and water 
 for Hawaiian men, women and children live much of their time in 
 the water. Infants are often taught the art of swimming before they 
 can walk. The surf riding or swimming of the natives astonished 
 Captain Cook more than any of their remarkable performances. The 
 time selected was when a storm was tossing the waves high and the 
 surf was furious. Then the men and women would dive through the 
 surf, with narrow boards about nine inches wide and eight feet long, 
 and, swimming a mile or more out to sea, mount on the crest of a 
 huge billow, and sitting, kneeling or standing, with wild gesticulations 
 ride over the waves and breakers like gods or demons of the storm. 
 This practice is less indulged now than formerly. But the swimming 
 of the Kanaka boys, who flock around incoming steamers, and dive 
 after and catch coins which tourists throw into the water, like so 
 many ducks diving after corn, shows what a degree of perfection the 
 natatorial art has attained among the native Hawaiians. Sledging 
 down the mountain sides, boxing and tournament riding are other 
 popular amusements ; and, with the exception of boxing, the women 
 compete with the men in the amusements. 
 
 PRODUCTS AND COMMERCE. 
 
 Sugar is king in Hawaii as wheat is in the Northwest. In 1890 
 there were 19,000 laborers nearly one-fifth of the total population 
 
280 THE HA WAIIAN ISLANDS 
 
 engaged on sugar plantations. Ten tons to the acre have been 
 raised on the richest lands. The average is over three tons per acre, 
 but it requires from eighteen to twenty months for a crop to mature. 
 Rice growing is also an important industry. It is raised in marsh 
 lands, and nearly all the labor is clone by Chinese, though they do 
 not own the land. Coffee is happily well suited to the soil that is un 
 fitted for sugar and rice, and the Hawaiian coffee is particularly fine, 
 combining the strength of the Java with a delicate flavor of its own. 
 Diversified farming is coming more into voooie. Fruit raising 
 
 o o o o 
 
 will undoubtedly become one of the most important branches when 
 fast steamers are provided for its transportation. Sheep and cattle 
 raising must also prove profitable, since the animals require little 
 feeding and need no housing. 
 
 Almost all kinds of vegetables and fruits can be raised, many 
 of those belonging to the temperate zones thriving on the elevated 
 mountain slopes. Fruit is abundant ; the guava grows wild in all the 
 islands, and were the manufacture of jelly made from it carried on 
 on a large scale the product could doubtless be exported with profit. 
 Both bananas and pineapples are prolific, and there are many fruits 
 and vegetables, which as yet have been raised only for local trade, 
 which would, if cultivated for export, bring in rich returns. 
 
 Of the total exports from the Hawaiian Islands in 1895, the 
 United States received 99.04 per cent., and in the same year 79.04 
 per cent, of the imports to the islands were from the United States. 
 The total value of the sugar sent to the United States in 1896, was 
 $14,932,010; of rice, $194,903; of coffee, $45444; and of bananas, 
 $121,273. 
 
 THE CHIEF CITY. 
 
 Honolulu, the capital city, is to Hawaii what Havana is to 
 Cuba, or better, what Manila is to the Philippine Islands. Here are 
 concentrated the business, political and social forces that control the 
 life and progress of the entire archipelago. This city of 30,000 in 
 habitants is situated on the south coast of Oahu, and extends up the 
 Nuuanu Valley. It is well provided with street-car lines which also 
 run to a bathing resort four miles outside the city a telephone sys 
 tem, electric lights, numerous stores, churches and schools, a library 
 of over 10,000 volumes, and frequent steam communication with San 
 
THE CHIEF CITY 281 
 
 Francisco. There are papers published in the English, Hawaiian, 
 Portuguese, Japanese,, and Chinese languages, and a railroad is being 
 built, of which thirty miles along the coast are already completed. 
 Honolulu has also a well-equipped fire department and public water 
 works. The residence portions of the city are well laid out, the 
 houses, many of which are very handsome, being surrounded by 
 gardens kept green throughout the year. The climate is mild and 
 even, and the city is a delightful and a beautiful place of residence. 
 Hawaii is peculiarly an agricultural country, and Honolulu gains its 
 importance solely as a distributing centre or depot of supplies. 
 Warehouses, lumber yards and commercial houses abound, but there 
 is a singular absence of mills and factories and productive establish 
 ments. There are no metals or minerals, or, as yet, textile plants or 
 food plants, whose manufacture is undertaken in this unique city. 
 
 The Hawaiian Islands are, without question, on the threshold of 
 a great industrial era, fraught with most potent results to the pros 
 perity and development of that land. Its climate is delightful and 
 healthful, and its soil so fertile that it will easily support 5,000,000 
 people. 
 
CHAPTER XVI 
 
 Cuba, "The Child of Our Adoption." 
 
 The Island whose Cry to Humanity Brought the War of Relief. How It Received its 
 Name. The Founding of the Capital, Havana. A Terrible History of Spanish 
 Cruelty. The Extermination of a Great People, Beginning in the Time of the 
 Son of Columbus, before 1560 the Whole of the Population had Disappeared 
 from the Island. The First Cuban Revolt. The Capture of Havana by the 
 English. Its Restoration to Spain. A Long Series of Insurrections. The 
 Seven Years War. The Last and Final Uprising. The Advent of Weyler, "the 
 Butcher." Atrocities before which the whole World Stood Aghast. His Motto 
 was "Subjugation or Death." American Filibusters Lend a Helping Hand. 
 The Death of General Maceo, through Treachery, a great Blow to the Insurgents. 
 Weyler and the Reconcentrados. Two Hundred Thousand Men, Women and 
 Children Die of Disease and Starvation. Insurgents the Masters of almost the 
 whole Island. The Fearful Cost of the War. The Cuban Debt Reached 
 Nearly $300,000,000. 
 
 A LTHOUGH Cuba is not a part or a possession of the United 
 States, it has since the war with Spain, in 1898, come under the 
 protection of this government, and is, therefore, entitled to a 
 place in this volume. In the hand of Providence, this island became the 
 doorway to America. It was here that Columbus landed, October 28, 
 1492. True, he touched earlier at one of the smaller islands to the 
 north ; but it was merely a halting before pushing on to Cuba. 
 "Juana" Columbus called the island, in honor of Isabella s infant 
 son. Afterward it was successively known as Fernandina, Santiago, 
 and Ave Maria ; but the simple natives, who were there to the num 
 ber of 350,000, called it Cooba, and this name prevailed over the 
 Spanish titles, as the island has finally prevailed over Spanish domina 
 tion, and it has come under the protection of America with its Indian 
 name, slightly changed to Cuba, remaining as the sole and only herit 
 age we have of the simple aborigines, who have utterly perished from 
 the face of the earth under Spanish cruelty. 
 
 In 1494 Columbus visited Cuba a second time, and once again 
 in 1502. In 1511 Diego Columbus, the son of the great discoverer, 
 
 283 
 
284 CUBA, l THE CHILD OF OUR ADOPTION" 
 
 with a colony of between three and four hundred Spaniards, came, 
 and, in 1514, he founded the towns of Santiago and Trinidad. Five 
 years later, in 1519, the present capital Havana, or Habana, was 
 founded. The French reduced the city in 1538, practically demolish 
 ing the whole town. Under the governor De Soto, it was rebuilt 
 and fortified, the famous Morro Castle and the Punta, which are still 
 standing, being built at that early date. 
 
 THE ORIGINAL INHABITANTS. 
 
 The natives, whom Columbus found in Cuba, were agreeable in 
 feature, and so amiable in disposition that they welcomed the white 
 man with open arms, and, besides contributing food, readily gave up 
 their treasurers to please the Spaniards. Unlike the warlike cannibal 
 tribes of the Lesser Antilles, known as the Caribs, they lived in com 
 parative peace with one another, and had a religion which recognized 
 the Supreme Being. Columbus held several conferences with these 
 simple natives, who numbered, according to his estimate, from 350,- 
 ooo to half a million souls, and his associations and dealings with them 
 on his first visit were always friendly and of a mutually pleasing 
 nature. But when he returned to Spain he left soldiers, who brutally 
 maltreated them, until the natives rose in revolt and exterminated 
 every white man. Even Columbus himself, in 1494, had to fight the 
 Indians at the landing-place. 
 
 A salubrious climate, a fertile soil, and simple wants rendered it 
 unnecessary for the native to do hard work ; and although it is well 
 proven that he did mine copper and traded in it with the mound 
 builders of Florida, yet the native was not accustomed to arduous 
 toil, and rebelled against it. This, perhaps, was unfortunate, for the 
 perpetuity of his race at that time depended upon this very quality. 
 The Spanish " friend " who came to the island was incapable of work. 
 He neither would nor could, under his ethics of self-respect, abase 
 himself to labor, so he proceeded to enslave the native to labor for 
 him. The Cuban rebelled, and fled before the superior Spanish 
 weapons from the coasts to the mountain fastnesses of the interior. 
 
 Then began that cruel and long-continued war of extermination, of 
 which history has recorded the most shocking details. The conquest 
 was begun under Diego Columbus, the son of the great discoverer. 
 
A PERIOD OF REST 285 
 
 The merciless Velasquez was his general, and the frightful cruelties 
 which he inaugurated upon the simple natives have been continued 
 for nearly four hundred years by his successors in the island, though 
 the annihilation of the aboriginal tribes themselves was a brief and 
 bloody work. Velasquez rode them down and trampled them re 
 gardless of age or sex under the iron hoofs of his war-horses, 
 slashed them with swords, devastated their villages, and bore them 
 away into slavery. The Cuban had no weapons ; the mountain fast 
 nesses could not hide him from his relentless pursuer. African slaves, 
 who were brought to the island in Spanish ships, were armed and 
 forced by their masters to chase the natives, and not a forest or 
 mountain top was a place of refuge for these doomed children of the 
 soil. One historian declares : " There is a little doubt that before 
 1560 the whole of this native population had dissapeared from the 
 island. They were so completely exterminated that it is doubtful if 
 the blood of their race was even remotely preserved in the mixed 
 classes who followed African and Chinese introduction." 
 
 A PERIOD OF REST. 
 
 For nearly two hundred years after the extermination of the 
 natives, Cuba rested without a struggle in the arms of Spain The 
 early settlers engaged almost wholly in pastoral pursuits. Tobacco 
 was indigenous to the soil, and in 1580 the Cuban planters began its 
 culture. Later, sugar-cane was imported from the Canaries, and 
 found to be a fruitful and profitable crop. The beginning of the 
 culture of sugar demanded more laborers, and the importation of 
 additional slaves was the result. In 1717, Spain attempted to make 
 a monopoly of the tobacco culture, and the first Cuban revolt occurred. 
 In 1723 a second uprising took place, because of an oppressive gov 
 ernment ; but these early revolts against tyranny were insignificant 
 as compared with those of the last half-century. 
 
 In 1762, the city of Havana was captured by the English, with 
 an expedition commanded by Lord Albemarle, but his fighting troops 
 were principally Americans under the immediate command of Generals 
 Phineas Lyman and Israel Putnam of Revolutionary fame. The 
 story of Putnam s command in this war is thrilling and sad. After 
 first suffering shipwreck and many hardships in reaching the island, 
 
286 CUBA, "THE CHILD OF OUR ADOPTION" 
 
 they lay before Havana, where Spanish bullets and fever almost an 
 nihilated the whole command. Scarcely more than one in fifty lived 
 to return to America. By the Treaty of Paris, 1763, Cuba was un 
 fortunately restored to Spain, and it was afterward that her troubles 
 with the " Mother Country," as Spain affectionately called herself to 
 all her provinces, began. The hand of oppression for one and a 
 quarter centuries relaxed not its grasp, and year by year grew heavier 
 and more galling. 
 
 DISCONTENT AND INSURRECTIONS. 
 
 Some of the most prolific seeds of modern revolutions may be 
 said to have been sown when the African slave trade assumed impor 
 tant proportions, in 1791. About the same time began a large impor 
 tation of Chinese coolies, for which Cuba paid a bounty of $400 
 apiece to the importer. These coolies bound themselves to the 
 Spaniards for eight years, for which they received $4.00 per month as 
 wages. The new influx of labor and the coming of Las Casas as 
 Captain-General to Cuba, in 1790, mark the beginning of Cuba s 
 great period of prosperity. This enterprising ruler introduced numer 
 ous public improvements, established botanical gardens and schools 
 of agriculture, with a view to developing and increasing Cuba s re 
 sources and commercial importance. Owing to his wise administra 
 tion, Cuba prospered and remained undisturbed for a long while. An 
 insurrection occurred among the slaves in 1812, which was promptly 
 put down with characteristic cruelty, and the blacks remained "good 
 niggers" for a third of a century. By the year 1844, the slave trade 
 with Cuba had grown to enormous proportions. In that year alone, 
 statistics tell us, 10,000 slaves were landed from Africa upon the 
 island. Another wild and fanatical insurrection occurred the same 
 year among them, in which thousands of their lives were sacrificed, 
 but, as before, they failed. By 1850, the slaves had so multiplied 
 and the importation had been so large that the census showed there 
 were nearly 500,000 on the island. 
 
 Meantime, in 1830, a revolution on the part of the Creoles 
 (descendants of Spanish and French settlers) and other free Cubans 
 had broken out. It was put down, but the blood of the martyrs 
 was seed in the ground. Revolutionist and enslaved insurrectionist 
 
ENTRANCE TO THE PUBLIC GROUNDS, HAVANA, CUBA 
 
 MAGNIFICENT INDIAN STATUE IN THE PRADO, HAVANA, CUBA. 
 
ANTONIO MACEO. 
 
 Lieutenant-General in the Cuban Army. Killed De 
 cember 4, 1896. Ei}iht of his brothers had pre 
 viously given their lives for Cuban freedom. 
 
 GENERAL CALIXTO GARCIA. 
 
 Hero of three wars for Cuba s freedom. Died of pneu 
 monia in Washington, D. C., December, 1898. 
 
 GENERAL MAXIMO GOMEZ 
 
 The Washington of Cuba is the title applied to 
 
 this hero, who, as Commander-in-Chief of the 
 
 patriot army, made Cuban liberty possible. 
 
 JOSE MARTI 
 
 President of the Cuban Revolutionary Party. L,ed into 
 
 ambush and killed by the Spaniards, 
 
 May 19, 1895. 
 
 CUBAN HEROES AND MARTYRS. 
 
THE TEN YEARS WAR 289 
 
 gradually drifted together. They had a common cause to struggle 
 for freedom against oppression. The bondsman was little or no 
 worse off than tjie Creoles, Chinese coolies, and free negroes all 
 native-born Cubans were shut out from the enjoyment of true citizen 
 ship. They must do the work and pay the tribute, but Spaniards, 
 born in Spain, were alone allowed to hold office of profit or trust 
 under the government ; and they looked with inexpressible contempt 
 upon the rest of the population, and, with the backing of the army, 
 preserved their domination in spite of their inferior numbers. The 
 Governor-General was appointed from Spain and held office from three 
 to five years, and was expected to steel or extort himself rich in that 
 time. It is said that not one Governor-General ever failed to do so. 
 
 THE TEN YEARS WAR. 
 
 The first long and determined struggle of the oppressed people 
 of Cuba for liberty began in 1868. In that year a revolution broke 
 out in Spain, and the patriots seized the opportunity, while the 
 mother country was occupied at home, for an heroic effort to liberate 
 themselves. They rose first at Yara, in the district of Bayamo, and 
 on October loth of that year made a declaration of independence 
 Eight days later the city of Bayamo was taken by the patriots, and 
 early in November they defeated a force sent against them from 
 Santiago. The majority of the South American republics hastened 
 to recognize the Cubans as belligerents ; but though they held the 
 entire interior of the island throughout a period of ten years, contin 
 ually winning battles, and it was evident to all the world that Spain 
 could not subdue them there was not one great power in the world 
 willing to extend to the patriots the recognition of belligerent rights. 
 The cruelty of the Spaniards toward the soldiers they captured, and 
 to all inhabitants who sympathized with the patriots cause, was 
 equaled only by the courage, fortitude, and exalted patriotism which 
 animated their victims. The following instances, selected from 
 scores that might be cited, are given in the Spaniards own words 
 translated, verbatim, into English : 
 
 Jacob Rivocoba, under date of September 4, 1896, writes : 
 41 We captured seventeen, thirteen of whom were shot outright ; 
 on dying they shouted, Hurrah for free Cuba ! hurrah for independ- 
 
2go CUBA, THE CHILD OF OUR ADOPTION" 
 
 ence ! A mulatto said, Hurrah for Cespedes ! On the following 
 day we killed a Cuban officer and another man. Among the thirteen 
 that we shot the first clay were found three sons and their father; 
 the father witnessed the execution of his sons without even changing 
 color, and when his turn came he said he died for the independence 
 of his country. On coming back we brought along with us three 
 carts filled with women and children, the families of those we had 
 shot ; and they asked us to shoot them, because they would rather 
 die than live among Spaniards." 
 
 Pedro Pardon, another officer, who entered entirely into the 
 spirit of the service he honored, writes on September 22, 1869: 
 
 " Not a single Cuban will remain in this island, because we 
 shoot all those we find in the fields, on the farms, and in every 
 hovel." 
 
 And, again, on the same clay, the same officer sends the follow 
 ing good news to his old father : 
 
 " We do not leave a creature alive where we pass, be it man or 
 animal. If we find cows, we kill them; if horses, ditto; if hogs, 
 ditto ; men, women, or children, ditto ; as to the houses, we burn 
 them : so every one receives his clue the men in balls, the animals 
 in bayonet-thrusts. The island will remain a desert." 
 
 These atrocities were perpetrated not alone by the common 
 soldier. In fact, the above reports come from men who were officers 
 in the Spanish army, and they show that such actions were approved 
 by the highest authority. A well-authenticated account assures us 
 that General Count Balmaceda himself went on one occasion to the 
 home of a patriot family, Mora by name, to arrest or kill the patriots 
 he had heard were stopping there ; but, finding the men all absent, 
 he wreaked his vengeance and thirst for blood by butchering the two 
 Mora sisters and burning the house over their bodies. 
 
 PEACE AND FAIR PROMISES. 
 
 At last, Spain, seeing that she could neither induce the Cubans 
 to surrender nor draw them into a decisive battle ; and finding, 
 furthermore, that her army of 200,000 men was likely to be annihi 
 lated by death, disease, and patriot bullets, made overtures, which, by 
 promising many privileges to the people that they had not before 
 
THE LAST GREAT STRUGGLE FOR FREEDOM 291 
 
 enjoyed, effected a peace. As a result of this war, slavery was abol 
 ished in the island ; but Spain s promises for fair and equitable 
 government were repudiated, and the civil powers became more ex 
 tortionate and severe than ever. This war laid a heavy debt upon 
 Spain, and Cuba was taxed inordinately. The people soon saw that 
 they had been duped. The world looked upon Cuba and Spain as at 
 peace. To the outsider the surface was placid, but underneath "the 
 waters were troubled." Such heroic spirits as Generals Calixto 
 Garcia, Jose Marti, Antonio Maceo, and Maximo Gomez, leaders in 
 the ten years struggle, still lived, though scattered far apart, and in 
 their hearts bore a load of righteous wrath against their treacherous 
 foe. While such men lived and such conditions existed another con 
 flict was inevitable. 
 
 THE LAST GREAT STRUGGLE FOR FREEDOM. 
 
 It was on February 24, 1895, tnat tne ^ ast revolution of the 
 Cuban patriots began. Spain had heard the mutterings of the com 
 ing storm, and hoped to stay it by visiting with severe punishment 
 every Cuban suspected of patriotic affiliations. Antonio Maceo, a 
 mulatto, but a man of fortune and education, a veteran of the Ten 
 Years War, and a Cuban by birth, was banished to San Domingo. 
 There were other exiles in Key West, New York, and elsewhere. 
 Jose Marti was the leading spirit in forming the Cuban Junta in New 
 York and organizing revolutionary clubs among Cubans everywhere. 
 Antonio Maceo was selected to lead the patriot army. He went 
 secretly to Cuba and began organizing an army, and when war was 
 declared the flag of the new republic, bearing a red lone star in a red 
 field, was flung to the breeze in three of the six provinces. Captain- 
 General Campos declared martial law in the insurgents vicinity, and 
 troops were hastily summoned and sent from Spain. The revolu 
 tionists from the start fought by guerrilla methods of warfare, dash 
 ing upon the unsuspecting Spanish towns and forces, and escaping to 
 the mountains before the organized Spaniards could retaliate. 
 
 Jose Marti and Jose Maceo brother of the General were 
 prompt to join the active forces, and on April 13, 1895, General 
 Maximo Gomez, a native of San Domingo, came over and was made 
 commander of the insurgent forces. This grizzled old hero, with 
 
292 CUBA, " THE CHILD OF OUR ADOPTION" 
 
 nearly seventy years behind him, was at once an inspiration and a 
 host within himself. An army of 6,000 men was ready for his com 
 mand, and the revolution took on new life and began in all its fury. 
 On May igth the insurgents met their first great disaster, when Jose 
 Marti was led into an ambush and killed. But his blood was like a 
 seed planted, from which thousands of patriots sprang up for the 
 ranks. Within a few days there were 10,000 ill-armed but deter 
 mined men in the field. They had no artillery, nearly half were 
 without guns, and there was little ammunition for those who were 
 armed. 
 
 THE PLANS OF CAMPOS THWARTED. 
 
 Captain-General Campos formed a plan to march with the 
 Spanish troops from end to end of the island, and drive the insur 
 gents into the sea if they refused to surrender. Information of thk 
 plan was carried to Gomez, who proved so wily that Campos cotilc 1 
 neither capture him nor force him into an engagement. Everywhere 
 Gomez marched he gathered new patriots into his army, and captured 
 many carloads of Spanish stores and arms. Near the city of Bayamo, 
 Maceo attacked Campos, and the Spanish commander barely escaped 
 with his life. He was besieged in Bayamo, and had to stay there 
 until 10,000 soldiers were sent to escort him home. That was the 
 last of Campos fighting. By August, Spain had spent $21,300,000 
 and lost 20,000 men by death, and 39,000 additional soldiers had been 
 brought into the island, 25,000 of them the flower of the Spanish 
 army, and she was also forced to issue $120,000,000 bonds which she 
 sold at a great sacrifice, to carry on the war. 
 
 The patriots met in September 13, 1895, at Camaguey and 
 formed their government by adopting a constitution and electing a 
 president and other state officers. This body formally conferred 
 upon Gomez the commission of Commander-in-Chief of the army. 
 Before the close of the month, there were 30,000 rebels in the field. 
 Spanish warships patroled the coast, but the insurgents held the 
 whole interior of Santiago province, and the government forces dared 
 not venture away from the sea. The same was true of Santa Clara 
 and Puerto Principe. Matanzas was debatable ground ; but Gomez 
 made bold raids into the very vicinity of Havana. Spain soon had 
 an army of 200,000 and the insurgents 50,000. 
 
THE DEATH OF GENERAL MA CEO 
 
 293 
 
 As if the cup of Cuba s sorrow were not sufficiently bitter, or her 
 long-suffering 1 patriots had not drunk deep enough of its gall, General 
 Campos was recalled, and General Valeriano Weyler (nicknamed 
 "The Butcher") arrived in February, 1896. He promptly inaugu 
 rated the most bitter and inhuman policy in the annals of modern 
 warfare. It began with a campaign of intimidation, in which his 
 motto was " Subjugation or Death." He established a system of 
 espionage that was perfect, and the testimony of the spy was all the 
 evidence he required. He heeded no prayer and knew no mercy. 
 Pi is prisons overflowed with suspected patriots, and his sunrise execu 
 tions, every morning, made room for others. It was thus that 
 General Weyler carried on the war from his palace against the un 
 armed natives, his 200,000 soldiers seldom securing a shot at the in 
 surgents, who were continually bushwhacking them with deadly effect, 
 while yellow fever carried them off by the thousands. How many 
 lives Weyler sacrificed in that dreadful year will never be known. 
 How many suspects he frightened into giving him all their gold for 
 mercy and then coldly shot for treason, no record will disclose ; but 
 the crowded, unmarked graves on the hillside outside Havana are 
 mute but eloquent witnesses of his infamy. 
 
 Under these conditions Gomez declared that all Cubans must 
 take sides. They must be for or against. It was no time for neutrals 
 and there could be no neutral ground, so he boldly levied forced 
 contributions upon planters who were unfavorable to his cause, and 
 who extended protection to those who befriended the patriots. 
 
 THE DEATH OF GENERAL MACEO. 
 
 On the night of December 4, 1896, the insurgents suffered an 
 irreparable loss in the death of General Maceo, who was led into an 
 ambush and killed, it is believed, through the treachery of his staff 
 physician. Eight brothers of Maceo had previously given their lives 
 for Cuban freedom. 
 
 At the close of 1896, the island was desolate to an extreme per 
 haps unprecedented in modern times. The country was laid waste and 
 the cities were starving. Under the pretext of protecting them, 
 Weyler gathered the non-combatants into towns and stockades, and 
 
 it is authoritatively stated that 200,000 men, women, and children of 
 16 
 
294 CUBA, <; THE CHILD OF OUR ADOPTION" 
 
 the " reconcentrados," as they were called, died of disease and starva 
 tion. The insurgents remained masters of the island except along 
 the coasts. The only important incident of actual warfare was the 
 capture of Victoria de las Tunas, in Santiago province, by General 
 Garcia at the head of 3,000 men, after three days fighting. In this 
 battle the Spanish commander lost his life and forty per cent, of his 
 troops were killed or wounded ; the rest surrendered to Garcia, and the 
 rebels secured by their victory 1,000 rifles, 1,000,000 rounds of am 
 munition, and two Krupp guns. 
 
 In the spring of 1898, the United States intervened. The story 
 of our war with Spain for Cuba s freedom is elsewhere related, 
 
 Spain has paid dearly for her supremacy in Cuba during the last 
 third of the nineteenth century. Notwithstanding the fact that the 
 revenue from Cuba for several years prior to the Ten Years War of 
 1868-78 amounted to $26,000,000 annually about $18 for every man, 
 woman, and child in the island $20,000,000 of it was absorbed in 
 Spain s official circles at Havana, and " the other $6,000,000 that the 
 Spanish government received," says one historian, " was hardly enough 
 to pay transportation rates on the help that the mother country had 
 to send to her army of occupation." Consequently, despite this 
 enormous tax, a heavy debt accumulated on account of the island, 
 even before the Ten Years War began. 
 
 FEARFUL COST OF THE WAR. 
 
 At the close of the Ten Years* War (1878) Spain had laid upon 
 the island a public debt of $200,000,000, and required her to raise 
 $39,000,000 of revenue annually, an average at that time of nearly $30 
 per inhabitant. But Spain s own debt had also increased to nearly 
 $2,000,000,000, and during this Ten Years War she had sent 200.000 
 soldiers and her favorite commanders to the island, only about 50,000 
 of whom ever returned- According to our Consular Report of July, 
 1898, when the last revolution began, 1895, tne Cuban debt had 
 reached $295,707,264. The interest on this alone imposed a burden 
 of $9.79 per annum upon each inhabitant. During the war, Spain 
 had 200,000 troops in the island, and the three and one-half years 
 conflict cost her the loss of nearly 100,000 lives, mostly from sick 
 ness, and, as yet, unknown millions of dollars. 
 
CHAPTER XVII 
 Possibilities of the Island 
 
 Its Possibilities, its Hopes. The Extent of the Island, its Soil and its vast Products. 
 Rich in Sugar, in Timber and in Minerals, it is a Place Promising Wealth, 
 Rivaling that of the Klondike. Its Commerce and its Climate. Havana, the 
 Capital City, and other Ports. 
 
 WHAT the future of Cuba may be under new conditions of 
 government remains to be seen. Certainly, in all the 
 world s history few sadder or more devastated lands have 
 gathered their remnants of population upon the ashes of their ruins 
 and turned a hopeful face to the future. So far as the people them 
 selves are concerned, a more hunted, starved, wasted, and wretched 
 mass of humanity never lay upon the bosom of their desolated land. 
 
 But the soil, the mineral and the timber, not even Spanish 
 tyranny could destroy; and in these lie the hope, we may say the sure 
 guarantee, of Cuba s future. In wealth of resources and fertility of 
 soil, Cuba is superior to all other tropical countries, and these fully 
 justify its right to the title, " Pearl of the Antilles," first given it by 
 Columbus. 
 
 Under a wise and secure government its possibilities are almost 
 limitless. Owing to its location at the entrance of the Gulf of 
 Mexico, which it divides into the Yucatan and Florida channels, on 
 the south and north, the island has been termed the " Key to the 
 Gulf of Mexico," and on its coat of arms is emblazoned a key, as if 
 to imply its ability to open or close this great sea to the commerce 
 of the world. 
 
 Cuba extends from east to west 760 miles, is 21 miles wide in its 
 narrowest part and 1 1 1 miles in the widest, with an average width of 
 60 miles. It has numerous harbors, which afford excellent anchor 
 age. The area of the island proper is 41,655 square miles (a little 
 larger than the State of Ohio), and including the Isle of Pines and 
 
 -95 
 
296 CUBA, " THE CHILD OF OUR ADOPTION" 
 
 other small points around its entire length, numbering in all some 
 1,200, there are 47,278 square miles altogether in Cuba and belong 
 ing to it. The island is intersected by broken ranges of mountains, 
 which gradually increase in height from west to east, where they 
 reach an elevation of nearly 8,000 feet. The central and western 
 portions of the island are the most fertile, while the principal mineral 
 deposits are in the mountains of the eastern end. In Matanzas and 
 other central provinces, the well-drained, gently sloping plains, diver 
 sified by low, forest-clad hills, are especially adapted to sugar cul 
 ture, and the country under normal conditions presents the appear 
 ance of vast fields of cane. The western portion of the island is 
 also mountainous, but the elevations are not great, and in the valleys 
 and along the fertile slopes of this district is produced the greater 
 part of the tobacco for which the island is famous. 
 
 FERTILITY OF SOIL AND ITS PRODUCTS. 
 
 The soil of the whole island is well-nigh inexhaustible. Except 
 in tobacco culture, fertilizers are never used. In the sugar districts 
 are found old cane-fields that have produced annual crops for a hun 
 dred years without perceptible impoverishment of the soil. Besides 
 sugar and tobacco, the island yields Indian corn, rice, maniac (the plant 
 from which tapioca is prepared), oranges, bananas, pineapples, man 
 goes, guava and all other tropical fruits, with many of those belong 
 ing to the temperate zone. Raw sugar, molasses and tobacco are 
 the chief products, and, with fruits, nuts and unmanufactured woods, 
 form the bulk of exports, though coffee culture is rapidly coming to 
 the front, and its fine quality indicates that it must in time become 
 one of the most important products of the island. 
 
 As a sugar country, Cuba takes first rank in the world. Mr. 
 Gallon, the English Consul, in his report to his government in 1897 
 upon this Cuban crop, declared : "Of the other cane-sugar countries 
 of the world, Java is the only one which comes within 50 per cent, 
 of the amount of sugar produced annually in Cuba in normal times, 
 and Java and the Hawaiian Islands are the only ones which are so 
 generally advanced in the process of manufacture." Our own Con 
 sul, Hyatt, in his report of February, 1897, expresses the belief that 
 Cuba is equal to supplying the entire demands of the whole western 
 
MINERAL AND TIMBER RESOURCES 297 
 
 hemisphere with sugar a market for 4,000,000 tons or more, and 
 requiring a crop four times as large as the island has ever yet pro 
 duced. Those who regard this statement as extravagant should 
 remember that Cuba, although founded and settled more than fifty 
 years before the United States, has nearly 14,000,000 acres of 
 uncleared primeval forest-land, and is capable of easily supporting 
 a population more than ten times that of the present. In fact, 
 the Island of Java, not so rich as Cuba, and of very nearly the same 
 area, with less tillable land, has over 2 2,000,000 inhabitants as against 
 Cuba s perhaps at this time not more than 1,200,000 souls. 
 
 MINERAL AND TIMBER RESOURCES. 
 
 The mineral resources of Cuba are second in importance to its 
 agricultural products. Gold and silver are not believed to exist in 
 paying quantities ; but its most valuable mineral, copper, seems to 
 be almost inexhaustible. The iron and manganese mines, in the 
 vicinity of Santiago, are of great importance, the ores being rated 
 among the finest in the world. Deposits of asphalt and mineral oils 
 are also found. 
 
 The third resource of Cuba in importance is its forest product. 
 Its millions of acres of unbroken woodlands are rich in valuable hard 
 woods, suitable for the finest cabinet-work and shipbuilding, and also 
 furnish many excellent dye woods. Mahogany, cedar, rosewood and 
 ebony abound. The palm, of which there are thirty-odd species 
 found in the island, is one of the most characteristic and valuable of 
 Cuban trees. 
 
 CITIES AND COMMERCE. 
 
 The commerce of Cuba has been great in the past, but Spanish 
 laws made it expensive and oppressive to the Cubans. Its location 
 and resources, with wise government, assure to the island an enor 
 mous trade in the future. There are already four cities of marked 
 importance to the commercial world : Havana with a population of 
 250,000, Santiago with 71,000, Matanzas with 29,000, and Cien- 
 fuegos with 30,000, are all seaport cities with excellent harbors, and 
 all do a large exporting business. Add to these Cardenas with 
 25,000, Trinidad with 18,000, Manzanillo with 10,000, and Guan- 
 tanamo and Baracoa, each with 7,000 inhabitants, we have an array 
 
298 CUBA, "THE CHILD OF OUR ADOPTION" 
 
 of ten cities such as few strictly farming countries of like size possess. 
 Aside from cigar and cigarette making, there is little manufacturing 
 in Cuba ; but fruit canneries, sugar refineries, and various manufac 
 turing industries for the consumption of native products will rapidly 
 follow in the steps of good government. Hence, in the field of 
 manufacturing, this island offers excellent inducements to capital. 
 
 SEASONS AND CLIMATE. 
 
 Like all tropical countries, Cuba has but two seasons the wet 
 and the dry. The former extends from May to October, June, July 
 and August being the most rainy months. The dry season lasts from. 
 November to May. This fact must go far toward making the island 
 more and more popular as a winter health resort. The interior of 
 the island is mountainous, and always pleasantly cool at night, while 
 on the highlands the heat in the day is less oppressive than in New 
 York and Pennsylvania during the hottest summer weather; conse 
 quently, when once yellow fever, which now ravages the coasts of the 
 island on account of its defective sanitation, is extirpated, as it 
 doubtless will be under the new order of things, Cuba will become 
 the seat of many winter homes for wealthy residents of the United 
 States. Even in the summer, the temperature seldom rises above 
 80, while the average for the year is 77*. At no place, except in the 
 extreme mountainous altitude, is it ever cold enough for frost. 
 
 THE EVACUATION OF HAVANA. 
 
 The complete transfer of authority in the island of Cuba from 
 Spain to the United States took place on Sunday, January i, 1899. 
 At noon on that day Captain-General Castellanos and staff met the 
 representatives of the United States in the hall of his palace, and 
 with due formality and marked Spanish courtesy, in the name of the 
 King and Queen Regent of Spain, delivered possession of Cuba to 
 General Wade, head of the American Evacuation Committee, and he 
 in turn transferred the same to General Brooke, who had been ap 
 pointed by President McKinley as Military Governor of the Division 
 of Cuba. No unpleasant incident marred the occasion. General 
 Castellanos spoke with evident, yet becoming emotion on so important 
 an occasion. Three Cuban generals were present, who, at General 
 
THE STARS AND STRIPES HOISTED 
 
 Castellanos request, were presented to him, and the Spaniard said, 
 with marked grace and evident sincerity " I am sorry, gentlemen, 
 that we are enemies, being of the same blood ; " to which one of the 
 Cuban patriots courteously responded, with commendable charity, 
 " We fought only for Cuba, and now that she is free, we are no 
 longer enemies." 
 
 THE STARS AND STRIPES HOISTED. 
 
 The formal transfer had scarcely taken place within the palace 
 hall, when the flag of Spain was lowered from Morro Castle, Cabanas 
 Fortress, and all the public buildings, and the Stars and Stripes 
 instantly arose in its place on the flagpoles of these old and historic 
 buildings. As its graceful folds floated gently out upon the breeze, 
 the crowds from the streets cheered, the band played the most appro 
 priate of all airs, while voices in many places in the throng, catching 
 up the tune, sang the inspiring words of the " Star-Spangled Banner." 
 
 HAVANA, THE BEAUTIFUL CAPITAL. 
 
 When one mentions Cuba, the first thought that enters the 
 minds is of Havana, the beautiful capital of this beautiful Isle. For 
 many years it has been the Mecca of social pilgrims who journey 
 south during the winter to escape the cold. It is supposed to have 
 been founded by Diego Velasquez, the conqueror of Cuba in 1508, 
 who, being so delighted with the harbor and its general position, 
 called it La Have del Nuevo Mondo, which means the key to the 
 new world. In 1528, it was burned to the ground, but it was soon 
 built anew, and protected by a chain of fortifications, which made it 
 a great stronghold. In 1802, it was again largely destroyed by fire 
 and instead of wood, it was rebuilt in stone and masonry. 
 
 GRIM MORRO CASTLE 
 
 The first thing that impresses the traveler as he enters Havana 
 by the sea, is Morro Castle, which stands at the mouth of the harbor t 
 cold, gloomy, but powerful, and one naturally shudders a little at its 
 sight, because around it cluster tales of the most horrible brutality 
 and savagery ever known in this continent. Here all the prisoners 
 were kept to be led out later to pay the penalty of patriotism, for 
 
300 POSSIBILITIES OF THE ISLAND 
 
 crimes real or imaginary against the Spanish Government. Here 
 in its dungeons, prisoners were starved and tortured to madness, 
 and here too men, women and children whose only crimes were that 
 they had relatives in the ranks of the insurgents, were huddled to 
 gether like rats in a cage, and made to suffer atrocities which have 
 shocked the whole civilized world. 
 
 The harbor of Havana is a beautiful one, and from a military 
 point of view, is practically impregnable. The city proper is quite as 
 beautiful. The commercial quarter consists of a labyrinth of narrow 
 lanes, traversed by one or two streets, which are wider and more 
 striking, the principal of which is the Calle Oreilly, which runs from 
 the Governor s palace out to the very walls of the City. Few of the 
 houses which line the little streets are more than one story in height, 
 but a Spanish one-story is almost equal to three stories of an average 
 house. The lower half of every house is painted either a dark blue, 
 deep red, or vivid yellow, while the upper part is always a dazzling 
 white. The columns of the buildings, which are plentiful, are usually 
 treated in the same way, one-half being one color, and the other half 
 another. The lower windows are protected for the most part by 
 heavy iron bars, which would make the place look like a prison, 
 especially as in passing one sees the fair face of some senorita look 
 ing from between them, were it not for their bright colors. Some of 
 the finer houses of the city are very handsome indeed, but there is 
 little variety in their architecture ; they are all built in the style 
 which reminds one of Rome, with an inner courtyard surrounded by 
 handsome marble or stucco columns. 
 
 THE BEAUTY OF THE COURTYARDS. 
 
 In this inner courtyard is usually to be found a garden, with a 
 fountain in the centre, or perhaps some statues, and here the women 
 of the house entertain in the evening or enjoy themselves quietly 
 beneath the blazing glare of the lights, and as one passes up the 
 street outside, he cannot resist the temptation to glance in through 
 the doorway and see this brilliant scene, which adds so much to the 
 beauty of the city at night. 
 
 The Cerro is the handsomest residence street in Havana. It 
 runs up the hill at the back of the town, and has on either side, 
 
THE SPLENDID CHURCHES OF HAVANA 301 
 
 large old villas, which are surrounded by magnifkient gardens. 
 Upon this street is the former summer villa of the Bishops of 
 Havana, in the midst of a forest of cocoa palms. It is now used as a 
 private residence. One hears a great deal of the old time volante, 
 which was to Cuba what the gondola is to Venice. It is not as com 
 mon in Havana nowadays as it used to be, but occasionally one sees 
 this remarkable vehicle with its wheels so thin that one wonders why 
 they do not break, its long shafts and the driver perched upon the 
 animal which draws it. Sometimes the characteristic volantes are 
 magnificently decorated with silver and costly cloths. In these later 
 days the usual vehicles of America are much more common in the 
 city proper than this famous old Cuban equipage, although it is still 
 to be generally seen in other parts of the island. 
 
 As one walks along he notices that the lamp-posts are painted 
 various colors to tell the district red for the central district, blue for 
 the second, and green for the outside district. This enables even a 
 stranger to compute the carriage hire of public conveyances. The 
 laws are very strict in the matter of charges, and one is able to keep 
 from being imposed upon by the hack drivers, owing to the fact that 
 he can tell exactly how far he is going. 
 
 THE SPLENDID CHURCHES OF HAVANA. 
 
 There are one or two very fine churches in this city, the 
 largest of which is the Mercede. Here the fashionable people wend 
 their way on Sundays and holidays, the young men lining up in rows 
 outside the church door after services as they do in this country. 
 The most magnificent edifice, however, is the great Cathedral of 
 Havana, which was erected in 1724. It has one big dome and two 
 little towers on either side of the centre much like the other churches 
 of Spanish-American architecture, and both inside and outside it is 
 beautiful and effective. 
 
 The columns of the church are of mahogany so highly polished 
 that they look like deep-red marble. They are strikingly relieved by 
 great gilt bronze capitals. The choir place is the most striking of 
 its kind probably on this continent ; and in it is the tomb of Columbus, 
 from which the body of the great discoverer was recently taken and 
 sent to Spain. The stalls are of mahogany, magnificently carved, 
 
302 POSSIBILITIES OF THE ISLAND 
 
 and highly polished. The ceiling, too, is very artistic, and is made 
 almost entirely of mosaic work in rare woods. 
 
 Another prominent building of Havana is the Jesuit College for 
 boys, which has connected with it one of the best observatories out 
 side of the United States. It also has a museum and a library, in 
 which are relics and manuscripts illustrating Cuban affairs from the 
 sixteenth century down to the present day. Throughout the city 
 there are a number of large charitable institutions, which are, for the 
 most part, very clean and well carried on. 
 
 One of the things that the traveler first notices in Havana is 
 the great number of beggars. They appear everywhere, and from 
 them there is little escape, as their boldness is something amazing. 
 
 SHOPS AND THEATRES. 
 
 The shops in Havana are numerous, but most of them are built 
 on the principle of the bazaars in the far East, without windows and 
 with all the wares exposed to the passer-by. 
 
 As for amusements, the chief opera house of the city, the Tacon, 
 is considered a very fine place, and the attractions there are nearly 
 always of the best. It seats about 5,000 persons, and the boxes are 
 arranged in tiers, which are separated by gilded lattices. The top 
 most gallery is given over to colored people entirely. The first two 
 rows of boxes are usually filled up with the aristocracy of the city 
 and the wealthy merchants, and on a gala night the display of jewelry 
 and costumes may be said to quite rival that of the large cities of the 
 United States. In the lower part of the house are a pit and orchestra 
 stalls. The stage is large and well managed according to the most 
 approved American ideas. The orchestra is largely made up of col 
 ored people, some of them full-blooded negroes, but the music they 
 give is such that the most captious critic could not find fault with it. 
 
 Salvini, Duse, and Bernhardt have appeared here, and the audi 
 ences which greeted them would compare favorably with the audiences 
 which cheer them in any other country. 
 
 A GLIMPSE AT CUBAN SOCIETY. 
 
 In an article recently published in the Fortnightly Review, Rich 
 ard Davey gives the following very interesting account of Cuban 
 society : 
 
A GLIMPSE AT CUBAN SOCIETY 303 
 
 u Of society, in our sense of the word, there is little or none 
 in Havana, and one may count upon the ringers of one hand the 
 houses where balls and parties are given. Conversation soon flags 
 in a country where education is so backward, especially among the 
 women, whose intellectual pabulum consists generally of the very 
 worst French novels and their prayer-books a singular combination. 
 The education of the males is a little better. The wealthier families 
 send their sons either to the Jesuits at Havana, to Europe, or the 
 United States. So far so good ; but when they come home for their 
 holidays, or their education is finished, the home influence is dis 
 astrous. Waited on hand and foot by the negroes, and pampered by 
 their parents, they soon fall victims to the relaxing climate and to 
 every sort of vicious influence. Lack of energy is the result of this 
 lamentable system, which fosters most unhealthy love of ease and 
 sensual indulgence. 
 
 "The usual way of spending the evening in a Cuban house is to 
 place a long,- double row of rocking-chairs opposite each other, and 
 sit there chattering, everybody meanwhile smoking the inevitable 
 cigarette. In some houses music of a high order may be heard, and 
 some of the ladies sing charmingly otherwise the place is socially dull. 
 
 "The Cuban lady is a very fascinating creature. She is elegant, 
 walks gracefully, has pretty features, beautiful eyes, admirable teeth, 
 and splendid hair, but spoils herself by her insane fashion of coating 
 face, neck, shoulders and arms with rice powder to such a thickness 
 as to give her a most ghastly appearance, not unlike that of a Pier 
 rette. Coquettish as a young girl, she is generally both devoted and 
 blameless as a wife and mother. On the other hand she is capable, 
 on provocation, of displaying fiendishly vindictive and cruel traits, a 
 fact only too well known by many a poor ex-slave. 
 
 * Religion occupies a great deal of the time of the Cubans of 
 both sexes, but I am afraid it is considered rather a pastime than a 
 moral factor. Among the men of the better class, who have been 
 educated in Paris, it is never allowed to interfere with their passions, 
 pleasures, or caprices. In the days of slavery they considered their 
 duty to their dependents ended with the wholesale administration of 
 baptism, which was obligatory by law, but it never entered their head 
 to teach them any duties beyond those of implicit obedience to their 
 
304 POSSIBILITIES OF THE ISLAND 
 
 own will, even the rudiments of the catechism being absolutely 
 neglected. That there are many admirable men among the Cubans 
 cannot be gainsaid, but unfortunately the mass of them is corrupt, as 
 must ever be the case with a people whose slaves have for generations 
 been only too eager to pander to their worst vices. 
 
 " Much more sincere than the Spaniards, they have always been 
 distinguished for their hospitality and for the grace and dignity of 
 their manners. If they offer you a thing they wish you to accept it, 
 and do not say so for the mere form. They welcome you heartily, 
 and regret your departure. 
 
 BRUTAL TREATMENT OF SLAVES. 
 
 " In former times their treatment of their slaves was notoriously 
 cruel, and I shall never forget the contrast between the splendid hos 
 pitality which I myself enjoyed on a Cuban plantation, and the horrid 
 sights which I witnessed in its coffee-fields, where the negroes were 
 whipped by the overseers for the most trivial offences. An appalling 
 incident occurred, too, during my stay, which can never be effaced 
 from my mind, and which I discovered by the merest chance, for I 
 was to have been kept in total ignorance of its occurrence. A strik 
 ingly handsome young mulatto had escaped into the woods and had 
 been recaptured. For nearly a week he was tortured every day regu 
 larly for two hours, and in the presence of all the other hands, and, 
 needless to say, in that of his master. I chanced one afternoon to go 
 for a walk, accompanied by one of the children of the family, a lad of 
 twelve years, who thoughtlessly asked me to come and see what they 
 were doing to Pedro. They were flaying him alive with pincers, 
 burning him with hot wires, and rubbing his wounds with saltpetre ! 
 The poor wretch, who was shrieking desperately and writhing in 
 agony, was tied hand and foot to the stump of a tree. The strangest 
 part of it all was that the negroes for whose intimidation this dia 
 bolical torture, which eventually ended in slow death, had been 
 devised, did not seem to be particularly impressed by its horror, for 
 they were laughing and shouting like so many fiends. Needless to 
 say, I left that hacienda somewhat hurriedly. 
 
 "The house slaves, however, were treated with extreme indul 
 gence, petted and spoiled to their heart s content, and a more idle, 
 
A CITY FILLL^ WITH ODORS 305 
 
 vicious, happy-go-lucky lot I never came across in all my life. The 
 house on this plantation was a very fair specimen of its class. It was 
 enormous, built of stone with spacious verandas, and, although but 
 one-story high, the rooms were so prodigiously lofty that the external 
 appearance was quite majestic. Its wide, inner courtyard, numerous 
 saloons, billiard-room and corridors were luxuriously furnished in 
 excellent taste, and were cool and delightful. The garden was a 
 veritable paradise. I wish I had the space to describe the many 
 pleasant days I passed there, marred alone by the dreadful incident 
 above alluded to." 
 
 A CITY FILLED WITH ODORS. 
 
 Notwithstanding the fact that Havana is a pleasant city, taken 
 as a whole, yet there are many things which cause it to be a place to 
 be avoided at certain seasons of the year. The odor which comes up 
 from the harbor is such that one can scarcely enjoy life while it exists. 
 So offensive was it that as soon as the United States came into pos 
 session of the city under the terms of the protocol, Colonel George 
 E. Waring, of New York, was sent to Cuba by the Government to 
 look into the matter of cleaning up Havana and making it as sanitary 
 as possible. The trip proved a fatal one for Colonel Waring. While 
 in Havana he contracted yellow fever, and came home to die from 
 this terrible scourge. However, the work he did in Havana was of 
 such a nature that the Government was able immediately after tak 
 ing possession of the city to start in its task of cleaning the Cuban 
 capital. 
 
 Vigorous action was also begun to improve the moral sanitation 
 of Havana. Vans now go around the city after midnight and pick up 
 the vagrant and homeless persons who fill the porticos everywhere. 
 Those who are able to labor are turned over to the public work of 
 the city, such as sweeping the streets and cleaning up the gutters. 
 For this they are paid ninety cents a day. Those who are not able 
 to work, and these form by far the larger class, are provided for 
 either at the San Isidro Asylum or the hospitals. It is hoped to 
 clear the streets entirely of these people. 
 
 The children, too, are being looked after, and provided with 
 home in the San Jose Asylum. This formerly had a manual training 
 
306 POSSIBILITIES OF THE ISLAND 
 
 school in connection with it, which will be revived, and the children 
 taught to do some trade. 
 
 RECONCENTRADOS DIE BY THOUSANDS. 
 
 Another attractive part of Cuba is Matanzas, near which, during 
 the recent uprising, the Cuban insurgents had their headquarters. 
 Here under the edict of General Weyler, 11,000 Reconcentrados 
 gathered together, and here, too, 9,000 of them died of starvation 
 and want. The whole of the province is about as large as the State 
 of Delaware. 
 
 The city, although smaller than Havana, is better built, and the 
 streets are very much more regular. It is perhaps the most delight 
 ful place to live in on the island, and is in the midst of a wonderfully 
 fertile district. Near it is the valley of the Yumurri, the " happy 
 valley," which is so pleasant in temperature, even in the hottest days 
 in summer, that it is the most charming of places to spend either 
 summer or winter. 
 
 But perhaps the best known city of the island, after Havana, a 
 city which has been brought into the greatest prominence by the war, 
 is Santiago de Cuba. Here the American forces gathered both by 
 land and sea, and after an attack more brilliant perhaps than any 
 other of which we have known, captured this stronghold against fear 
 ful odds. And when they marched into it, they found this little town, 
 nestling at the base of the hills, in an awful state of filth and decay. 
 Fever, more terrible even than Spanish bullets, began towage war in 
 the ranks of our army, and after the city had completely yielded itself 
 into our hands the first great work of those appointed to take care of 
 it was to cleanse it and remove as far as possible the danger of 
 plague. This work was placed in charge of Doctor Leonard Wood, 
 the famous Colonel and commander of the Rough Riders, who after 
 winning the most notable laurels as a fighter, added to them laurels 
 equally notable, through his remarkable work in ridding the city of 
 filth and disease. 
 
 THE CLEANING OF SANTIAGO. 
 
 Perhaps the best idea of what was accomplished may be gained 
 from the report of Robert P. Porter, Special Commissioner for the 
 
THE CLEANING OF SANTIAGO 307 
 
 United States to Cuba and Porto Rico. " The disagreeable smells of 
 the typical Cuban city," his report says, "are less pronounced in Sant 
 iago, while whitewash, limewash, fresh paint and all sorts of disin 
 fectants have deodorized the surrounding atmosphere and made the 
 old town quite habitable. The streets are no longer used as sewers, 
 and the unhappy individual who violates the law and escapes the 
 lash of the Sanitary Commissioner s whip is compelled to work on the 
 streets for thirty days. This official, Major Barbour, with 126 men 
 dressed in spotless white, and 32 good United States mule teams and 
 carts, having dug out from the streets of Santiago the filth of ages, 
 is now able to keep them absolutely clean. Every day, by the aid of 
 petroleum, the garbage of the city is burned. 
 
 "The work of sanitation is not confined to the streets, but extends 
 to the dwelling houses, shops and buildings of all kinds. To accom 
 plish this, however, the doors of houses had to be smashed in, and 
 people making sewers of the thoroughfares were publicly horsewhipped 
 in the streets. Eminently respectable citizens were forcibly brought 
 before the commanding general and sentenced to aid in cleaning the 
 streets they were in the habit of defiling. 
 
 " The campaign has ended in a complete surrender to the sanitary 
 authorities, and the inhabitants of Santiago, regardless of class, have 
 had their first object lesson in the new order of things inaugurated by 
 the war. Several important streets have been repaved ; all the public 
 buildings have been thoroughly cleaned, the work even extending to 
 the Opera House." 
 
 Continuing in his report, Mr. Porter says, in speaking of the 
 general condition of the island : 
 
 " The rural districts of Santiago have been so depleted that it 
 would be impossible to collect taxes over and above those needed for 
 the bare necessities of schools for the poor, and possibly small sums 
 to improve sanitary conditions. 
 
 "The dawn of prosperity, however, should be the signal for in 
 augurating systematic work on the country roads. The British 
 Government spends annually for the roads in Jamaica about $500,000, 
 where there are now 2000 miles already constructed. The money 
 expended on roads, whether from the general funds of the island or 
 from the local budgets, would come back a hundred fold, it is stated, 
 
308 POSSIBILITIES OF THE ISLAND 
 
 and make Santiago one of the richest sugar, coffee and fruit growing 
 districts in the West Indies. Bananas can be grown at a profit, and, 
 as it takes only fourteen months to grow, unlike coffee and oranges, 
 the poorer classes could undertake its cultivation to their great 
 advantage. The internal, industrial, professional, licensing and 
 other miscellaneous taxes have so far been remitted in this part of 
 , Cuba, but the authorities are now preparing to enforce them." 
 
 Now that the customs tariff has been disposed of, Mr. Porter 
 recommends that an immediate scheme be prepared for levying and 
 collecting internal revenue for the entire island. The question of 
 separating these taxes from purely municipal taxes should also be 
 considered. The large total of delinquencies during the last three 
 years, which amounted to about $6,000,000, was, of course, due to 
 the war. In normal times we have here $4,000,000 or $5,000,000 of 
 revenue that must not be overlooked, revenue which, if properly and 
 economically employed, would aid in the industrial rehabilitation of 
 Cuba. 
 
 WHERE SUGAR AND TOBACCO GROW. 
 
 The other divisions of the island are Pinar del Rio, Santa Clara 
 and Puerto Principe. Each has a capital of the same name, which is 
 more or less a copy of Havana. One of the most notable ports of 
 the island is Baracoa, which formerly was a place much visited by 
 American traders dealing in bananas, cocoanuts and chocolate. In 
 one year this port did a business amounting to 2,000,000 bunches of 
 bananas and 4,000,000 cocoanuts, together with large quantities of 
 other fruit. But since the war, importations from Baracoa practically 
 amounted to nothing. The great tobacco district of the island is in 
 the Santa Clara and Santiago de Cuba Provinces, the former giving 
 what is thought to be the finest tobacco in Cuba. The export from 
 this Province reached about 250,000 bales and 175,000,000 cigars, but 
 like all the other industries of the island, it was laid waste during the 
 war of the insurgents, and almost all of the tobacco plantations were 
 destroyed. 
 
 The great sugar belt comprises the Provinces of Havana, Santa 
 Clara and Matanzas, while Santiago de Cuba also has a share of the 
 big plantations. Some idea may be had of the enormous, production 
 

 WHERE SUGAR AND TOBACCO GROW 39 
 
 of sugar in Cuba, when it is known that the yield of 1894 was 1,040,- 
 ooo tons. As soon as the regions which usually were productive of 
 large harvests of sugar came into the hands of the insurgents, they 
 either burned the mills and the houses on the plantations, or kept the 
 planters from working, with the result that in one year after the 
 beginning of the war the production of sugar fell from over a million 
 to 225,000 tons, and, as the war proceeded, this was greatly reduced 
 until it amounted to practically nothing. 
 
 But such is the remarkable fertility of this island, and such are 
 its wonderful resources that the future seems promising, although 
 there is little left of the land but ruins since the march of the devast- 
 ing insurgent troops. Under the conditions which are promised to 
 the beautiful isle, when a staple government has been assured by the 
 United States, and when the people will be free to carry on their 
 work without fear of molestation, there seems to be no limit to the 
 financial success of this country, which has so long been held down 
 and kept from progressing by the iron hand and the bloody rule 
 of Spain. 
 
 17 
 
CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 The Explosion of the "Maine," and War 
 
 Awful Catastrophe to the Big Battleship in the Harbor of Havana. Firm Belief that 
 the Vessel was Blown up by Spaniards. A Naval Board of Inquiry. A Wave of 
 Feeling Sweeps the Whole Nation. McKinley Places the Matter Before Congress. 
 War is Entered upon for the Sake of Humanity. The First Call for Troops. 
 All the States of the Union Respond Immediately with their Quota of Men. 
 The Mobilization of the American Army. 
 
 DIPLOMATIC relations between the United States and Spain 
 became somewhat strained in the latter part of 1897, through 
 the dissatisfaction of Spanish political leaders, with the sym 
 pathy manifested by the American public toward the struggle of the 
 Cubans for independence. A number of prominent Americans had 
 made tours of Cuba, and others had seen for themselves the situation 
 in Havana and its immediate vicinity, and the facts thus ascertained 
 were laid before the Congress of the United States in the form of 
 reports or petitions, so vigorously presented and so eloquently sup 
 ported, that many debates occurred in the National Legislature over 
 resolutions that had been introduced for the recognition of the 
 Cubans as belligerents, and more than one effort was also made to 
 secure American recognition of the insurgents. 
 
 THE "MAINE" SENT TO HAVANA. 
 
 The newspapers of both countries were full of pointed and semi- 
 sarcastic editorials on the opposing national attitudes, and the air was 
 full of the possibilities of war, though the hope ran high in the hearts 
 of thoughtful people that such a serious consequence might be 
 avoided. In the last week in January, however, the battleship Maine, 
 which had been lying at Key West with the rest of the South Atlan 
 tic Squadron, was ordered to proceed to Havana at once. The vessel 
 left Key West on January 25, 1898. The order for her departure 
 had not been heralded in advance, and there was no time for specula- 
 
 JU 
 
3 1 2 THE EXPLOSION OF THE MAINE WAR 
 
 tion as to the why and wherefore of her journey until she was already 
 at the Cuban port. 
 
 The Secretary of the Navy and other important officials at 
 Washington declared that the visit of the warship to Havana meant 
 only the friendly relations with Spain were now formally resumed in 
 that particular, since for some time previously there had been no 
 American war vessels in that port. Nevertheless, the feeling was 
 strong that the Maine would not have been sent there unless Consul- 
 General Fitzhugh Lee had believed there was special need for a pro 
 tector of Americans and American interests. 
 
 Officials of the McKinley Administration were quoted as having 
 said that a mistake was made by the Cleveland Administration in 
 deciding, at the very beginning of the Cuban insurrection, not to 
 send any warships to Havana or to permit any of the naval vessels 
 to stop at that port as they had occasionally been in the habit of 
 doing. It was always maintained in these utterances that the deci 
 sion to keep our war vessels away from Havana was uncalled for, and 
 was a wholly unnecessary concession to the sensibilities of the 
 Spanish public. If that decision had not been reached by the Cleve 
 land Administration our warships could have visited Havana in 1896 
 and 1897 just as they had done previously, and then there would have 
 been no thought that the sending of the Maine to Havana in 1898 
 was an indication of trouble with Spain. 
 
 It was ascertained that Consul-General Lee had reported to the 
 State Department that he feared serious disturbances might take 
 place in Havana at any moment, and that, while he would not him 
 self take the responsibility of asking for a warship, he wished the 
 Administration to understand that the conditions of affairs in Havana 
 was such as might lead to disturbances almost any day, which would 
 involve the lives of American citizens. 
 
 THE VIEWS OF SENOR DE LOME. 
 
 The Spanish Minister, De Lome, called at the White House on 
 the day that the battleship went to Havana, was shown the orders 
 that had been issued for the departure of the Maine, and publicly 
 expressed himself to the effect that, so far as his advice was con 
 cerned, the Spanish Government would not regard the sending of the 
 

 MAJOR-GENERAL FITZHUGH LEE. 
 
 MAJOR-GENERAL NELSON APPLETON MILES. 
 
 MAJOR-GENERAL WESLEY MERRITT. MAJOR-GENERAL WM. R. SHAFTER. 
 
 LEADING COMMANDERS OF OUR ARMY IN THE SPAN ISH -AM ERICAN WAR. 
 
DE LOME RESIGNS 3 i 5 
 
 Maine to Havana as a hostile act, or a threat against the friendly 
 relations that were in existence between the two countries. Still, 
 there was a decidedly uneasy feeling throughout the country, not 
 because a war with Spain was feared, but because the people seemed 
 not to have been taken into the confidence of those who had the 
 power to prevent war or to bring it about. 
 
 Naval and army officers were particularly interested in the mat 
 ter, and promptly expressed themselves as confident that the time 
 was near at hand when the chance for active service in front of an 
 enemy, which is the height of every officer s ambition, would not be 
 much longer delayed. The fact that there was a large fleet assembled 
 at Key West, within a few hours run from the port to which the 
 Maine had been sent, and the further fact that unusual activity was 
 being manifested in the navy yards and arsenals throughout the 
 country, gave color to much of the war talk, and turned all eyes in 
 the direction of the Maine, though no one seemed to expect the fate 
 that was about to befall her. 
 
 The situation was rendered very much more serious by the publi 
 cation in American newspapers, on February 9, 1898, of a remark 
 able letter said to have been written by the Spanish Minister in 
 Washington. It was addressed to a Spanish editor who was stop 
 ping at a hotel in Havana, and contained, among other comments on 
 the American attitude toward the Cubans, a characterization of Presi 
 dent McKinley as " weak, and catering to the rabble ; and, besides, a 
 low politician, who desires to leave a door open to me and to stand 
 well with the jingoes of his party." 
 
 DE LOME RESIGNS. 
 
 This letter was made public through the Cuban Junta, who 
 secured it at Havana. The Junta claimed that the receiver of the 
 letter was so astonished at its contents that he could not help telling 
 some of his friends about it, and that in this way it had come into 
 the hands of their agents. The authenticity of the letter was not 
 doubted for a moment ; but the officials at Washington promptly 
 afforded Minister De Lome an opportunity to deny it if he cared to. 
 Nothing came from De Lome, however, and the State Department 
 then sent a request to him for immediate information as to the genu- 
 
316 THE EXPLOSION OF THE "MAINE" -WAR 
 
 ineness of the letter. De Lome called at the State Department. 
 He admitted that the letter was genuine, but explained that the trans 
 lation was inaccurate, and he volunteered the further information 
 that he had cabled his resignation to Madrid. 
 
 The resignation of the Spanish Minister was accepted, and he 
 withdrew to Canada. The Spanish Government made a feeble 
 attempt to disclaim responsibility for this gratuitous insult to the 
 President of the United States, but this incident filled the cup of the 
 Nation s patience almost to overflowing, and there was, therefore, 
 less surprise manifested than would have been the case a week or so 
 earlier, when, on the morning of February i6th, the whole world was 
 electrified by the news of the blowing up of the Maine, as she lay 
 moored in the harbor of Havana, and the loss of several hundred 
 lives. 
 
 The news of the catastrophe was officially communicated to 
 Washington in a message to the Secretary of the Navy, from Captain 
 Sigsbee, of the Maine, which was received just after midnight, and 
 read as follows : 
 
 " Maine blown up in Havana harbor and destroyed. Many 
 wounded and doubtless more killed and drowned. Wounded and 
 others on board Spanish man-of-war and Ward Line steamer. Send 
 lighthouse tenders from Key West for crew and a few pieces of equip 
 ment still above water. No one has other clothes than those upon 
 him. Public opinion should be suspended until further report. All 
 officers believed to be saved. Jenkins and Merritt not yet accounted 
 for. Many Spanish officers, including represensative of General 
 Blanco, now with me and express sympathy. SIGSBEE." 
 
 The first reports received from the scene of the disaster placed 
 the loss at something over a hundred, but at that time it was still 
 dark and it was impossible to obtain more accurate information. 
 This, however, was bad enough as it was, but when it became known 
 that the great majority of the crew of the big battleship had been 
 killed or drowned, the anxiety for further details was deep and 
 universal. 
 
 On the day following the explosion, it was ascertained that the 
 total victims of the disaster were 264 men and 2 officers killed, and 
 many men wounded. The officers killed were Lieutenant Friend W. 
 
THE DISASTER DESCRIBED BY AN EYEWITNESS 317 
 
 Jenkins and Assistant Engineer Darwin R. Merritt. Captain Charles 
 D. Sigsbee, the Commander, and Lieutenant-Commander Richard 
 Wainwright, were both on board at the time, and, with all the other 
 officers, escaped. The Navy Department was besieged with inquiries 
 from the friends of the members of the crew, and the whole Nation 
 was aroused to fever heat by the disaster. 
 
 None of the Government officials would say that they thought 
 the Maine had been purposely blown up, but thousands of citizens so 
 expressed themselves, and there was a general feeling throughout 
 the country, while waiting for further particulars, that if the explosion 
 was shown to be due to bomb, torpedo or mine, it would mean noth 
 ing less than war with Spain. 
 
 The officers of the Maine, promptly recognizing the possible sig 
 nificance of the catastrophe, were somewhat reticent as to the details 
 of the occurrence. Various descriptions of the disaster were given, 
 but it was some time afterward that a perfectly connected story was 
 available. 
 
 Lieutenant-Commander Wainwright, at a quarter to 10 o clock 
 on the night of February I5th, was half undressed and was smoking 
 in his cabin. Suddenly an explosion occurred, which put out the 
 electric lights. Wainwright struck a match and made his way to the 
 adjoining cabin of Captain Sigsbee. The Captain had been thrown 
 from his bunk, but was uninjured. Wainwright s belief was that the 
 explosion was due to a short-circuited dynamo. Captain Sigsbee and 
 he hastened on deck and ordered a man to flood 2,500 pounds of gun 
 cotton which was on board. The order was carried out, but the man 
 never returned, for by the time he could go to the place where the 
 flood cocks were and get back again to the quarter-deck, a second 
 explosion had taken place, and he was undoubtedly added to the 
 victims. 
 
 THE DISASTER DESCRIBED BY AN EYEWITNESS. 
 
 One officer described the disaster as follows : 
 
 " Three of us were sitting in the mess-room, when a heavy ex 
 plosion occurred. We rushed on the upper deck and found that 
 the vessel was on fire and sinking. All efforts were then directed 
 toward lowering the boats and saving lives, but the Maine settled 
 quickly on the bottom of the harbor, only her upper works remaining 
 
3 1 8 THE EXPLOSION OF THE MAINE - WAR 
 
 above the water. Boats from the Spanish warship Alfonso XII, and 
 boats from the Ward Line steamer, City of Washington, came along 
 side and rendered assistance." 
 
 All the officers agreed that the explosion occurred somewhere in 
 the forward part of the midship section of the battleship. Many of 
 the crew who were below at the time of the first explosion were un 
 able to escape, and those who succeeded in reaching the upper decks 
 saved their lives with great difficulty. 
 
 The Maine, at the time of the explosion, was at anchor, about 
 500 yards from the arsenal, and about 200 yards from the floating 
 dock. The explosion put out the lights near the wharf, and blew 
 down telephone and telepraph wires in that vicinity. The smoke 
 stacks of the battleship fell at 11.30, The first of the American 
 sailors to reach the wharf were swimming. Three of those who thus 
 escaped fell senseless just as they reached a place of safety. The 
 total number of those saved, out of a crew of 350 was less than a 
 hundred. 
 
 OTHER VESSELS LEND ASSISTANCE 
 
 Eyewitnesses of the scene of the explosion, within a few minutes 
 after its occurrence painted striking word pictures of the struggles 
 of wounded men in the water, and of the excitement that prevailed 
 in and about the harbor. Boats from the Spanish warship and 
 merchant vessels, searching for the wounded, more frequently en 
 countered the bodies of the dead, and each hour seemed to add to 
 these ghastly accumulations, until the wharves on shore became open- 
 air morgues, and the victims of the disaster lay in long rows side by 
 side, waiting for identification. 
 
 The wounded were taken to Key West as rapidly as possible, but 
 many of the dead were temporarily buried in Havana, and in these 
 burials the sympathy of the citizens of Havana was certainly made 
 manifest, though the feeling of suspicion that the disaster was due to 
 treachery had a strong hold in the minds of the surviving sailors as 
 well as in the minds of their friends at home. 
 
 The interment of twenty-two martyrs of the Maine took place on 
 the afternoon of February 17, 1898. The flags on the public build 
 ings of Havana were at half-mast and many of the houses were draped 
 
A BOARD OF INQUIRY APPOINTED 3 lg 
 
 in mourning. All classes were represented in the throngs that filled 
 the streets along which the funeral procession passed to the cemetery. 
 The procession included the Municipal Guards on horseback, the City 
 Fire Brigade, representatives of various official bureaus, officers of 
 the Spanish army and navy, and committees representing the Cham 
 ber of Commerce and other trade organizations. 
 
 BURYING THE DEAD. 
 
 The bodies rested in coffins in the City Hall, and were profusely 
 covered with flowers. A great crown from the City Council bore 
 the inscription : " The People of Havana to the Victims of the 
 Maine. " There was also a handsome crown of silk ribbons in the 
 Spanish national colors with the inscription: " The Navy Department 
 at Havana to the Victims of the Maine" The Mayor of Havana 
 headed the funeral procession ; General Solana represented Captain- 
 General Blanco. The population that lined the route of the proces 
 sion gave every indication of the profoundest sympathy. 
 
 Others of the victims of the Maine were subsequently buried at 
 Key West. The bodies of many were claimed by friends and taken 
 to their homes for burial. Many bodies were never recovered, and 
 some were found by the divers who subsequently worked upon the 
 wreck of the Maine, wedged in between the decks, where they had 
 met their death by drowning. A few of those who had been picked 
 up in a wounded condition died in the hospitals, but the great ma 
 jority of the injured were only slightly hurt and rapidly recovered. 
 
 A BOARD OF INQUIRY APPOINTED. 
 
 Captain Sigsbee, of the Maine, had asked, immediately upon the 
 occurrence of the disaster, for a Board of Inquiry to determine the 
 cause of the explosion. This was in line with the usual custom of 
 commanders of vessels which have met with any mishap, so that the 
 record of the commander may be established ; but in this instance 
 there came also a demand from the entire American nation, and, 
 while the Board that was appointed was officially named in response 
 to Sigbee s request, it was equally in answer to the popular demand, 
 and its proceedings and findings were eagerly watched and waited for. 
 
THE EXPLOSION OF THE "MAINE" -WAR 
 
 The Spanish authorities in Havana, taking the cue from those 
 higher in authority at Madrid, continuously deplored the " unfor 
 tunate accident" which had befallen the Maine, and straightway insti 
 tuted an investigation of their own, the manner of conducting which, 
 and the subsequent findings that were promulgated, all going to show 
 that the Spanish Government had no intention of listening for a mo 
 ment to any theory concerning the affair except that it was purely an 
 accidental occurrence. 
 
 Divers were sent down into the wreck of the battleship by the 
 Spaniards secretly, when no other divers were there, and on the 
 reports made by these Spanish submarine investigators a document 
 was formulated, which was widely circulated through Spanish official 
 channels, to the effect that the Maine had been blown up by an in 
 terior explosion. The wreck of the Maine was so complete, its com 
 partments were so utterly shattered, and its constructive iron so 
 twisted and broken, that the Spaniards found it comparatively easy 
 to mystify themselves, if indeed they failed to delude the rest of the 
 world. 
 
 Meanwhile, the divers engaged by the Government of the United 
 States conducted an investigation which was scientifically superin 
 tended, and the results of which were accurately recorded. Diagrams 
 were made for presentation to the Board of Inquiry, and nothing was 
 left undone that could in any way be expected to throw light upon the 
 cause of the disaster. The Government of the United States was 
 fully determined that the truth should be made known. 
 
 BLOWN UP BY AN OUTSIDE EXPLOSION. 
 
 When the exact condition of the wreck had been determined, 
 and when the circumstances came to be considered in the new light 
 afforded by the official investigation, naval engineers throughout the 
 world, and scientific men of international prominence, promptly gave 
 it as their opinion that the Maine had been blown up from the out 
 side. It then became known that the Maine had been moored at a 
 certain buoy in the harbor of Havana, to which she had been con 
 ducted by a Spanish official, and it was also ascertained that this buoy 
 was in the immediate vicinity, if not exactly over, mines that had 
 been placed in the harbor bottom. 
 
CAPTAIN SIGSBEE S STOR Y 321 
 
 One theory was that the American warship had been thus placed 
 with the direct purpose of accomplishing her destruction. Others 
 accepted that portion of this theory which included the destruction of 
 the vessel, but were charitable enough to say that perhaps Spain s 
 managers of the affair did not intend to explode the mines except in 
 the event of war being declared between the two countries. 
 
 This left it an open question for the public mind as to whether 
 the Maine had been blown up by a secret order on the part of the 
 Government, or whether some over-enthusiastic individual enemy of 
 the United States had exploded a mine beneath her bottom without 
 waiting for orders. There was considerable talk about torpedoes, 
 and about electric connections with the shore batteries, but there had 
 been ample time for every outward evidence of treachery to be 
 removed before the official American investigation began, and it only 
 remained for the Board of Inquiry to establish the nature of the ex 
 plosion and leave the world to judge as to its cause. 
 
 On February i8th r three days after the explosion, Congress ap 
 propriated $200,000 for the employment of divers, for the raising of 
 the vessel if it was found practicable, and for the preliminary expenses 
 of the Court of Inquiry. On February 2oth the divers began their 
 work ; on the 25th the Court of Inquiry began its investigations at 
 Havana, and on the 22d Consul-General Lee informally advised 
 Americans not necessarily detained in Cuba to leave for home at 
 once. 
 
 CAPTAIN SIGSBEE S STORY. 
 
 The sessions of the Court of Inquiry were held behind closed 
 doors. The first witness was Captain Sigsbee. The record of the 
 testimony was strictly guarded until the conclusion of the investiga 
 tion, but when once an officer had been a witness before the Court, 
 he seemed to be at liberty to speak more freely of experiences on 
 that dreadful night. 
 
 Captain Sigsbee himself, after being a witness, told to corre 
 spondents in Havana the following story of his vessel s destruction. 
 He said : " I find it impossible to describe the sound or shock, but 
 the impression remains of something awe-inspiring, terrifying, noise- 
 rendering, vibrating, all-pervading. There was nothing in the former 
 experience of anyone on board to measure the explosion by. 
 
3 2 2 THE EXPL OSION OF THE MAINE WAR 
 
 11 After the first great shock, I cannot myself recall how many 
 sharper detonations I heard, but it was not more than two or three. 
 I knew my ship was gone. In such a structure as the Maine, the 
 effects of such an explosion are not for a moment in doubt. I made 
 my way through the long passage, in the dark, groping from side to 
 side, to the hatchway and thence to the poop deck, being among the 
 earliest to reach that spot." 
 
 " So soon as I recognized the officers, I ordered high explosives 
 to be flooded, and I then directed that the boats available be lowered 
 to rescue the wounded or drowning. Discipline, in a perfect measure, 
 prevailed. There was no more confusion than a call to general 
 quarters would produce, if as much. I soon saw, by the light of the 
 flames, that all my officers and crew left alive and on board, sur 
 rounded me." 
 
 " I cannot form any idea of the time, but it seemed five minutes 
 from the time I reached the poop until I left, the last man it was pos 
 sible to reach having been saved. It must have been three quarters 
 of an hour or more, however, from the amount of work done. I 
 remember the officers and men worked together, lowering the boats, 
 and that the gig took some time to lower." 
 
 PLACED ABOVE THE FATAL MINE. 
 
 Captain Sigsbee testified before the Court of Inquiry that an 
 investigation was sometimes made of the bottoms of harbors in which 
 men-of-war are moored, but that in connection with the mooring of 
 the Maine in the harbor of Havana, presumably the port of a friendly 
 power, he had taken the berth officially assigned without question as to 
 its safety; but that he had taken the usual precautions against attack. 
 The quarter-watch being ordered to have ammunition for the smaller 
 guns ready to hand, so that, in the improbable event of an attack on 
 the ship, it would have been found ready. This ammunition exploded 
 when the heat reached it, and is supposed to account for the detona 
 tion that occurred after the two first and greater explosions. 
 
 From the testimony of other officers, it was learned that the 
 usual rounds of the ship had been made at eight bells on that fatal 
 evening, and everything had been reported all right. There was 
 nothing in prospect but another night of untroubled dreams. One 
 

SPAIN PREPARES FOR TRO UBLE 3 2 5 
 
 of the seamen testified that, looking over the side in the dark, at 
 about half past nine, he fancied he saw a black shining object silently 
 approaching the vessel, but it was supposed that the man s mind had 
 probably been set on edge by the gossip of his mates, and that he was 
 perhaps over-keen to scent danger. He testified that he was about to 
 give warning to the officer of the deck, when the explosion occurred. 
 The whole forward part of the ship seemed to be lifted from the 
 water. Then followed the second explosion with outflaming. 
 
 The crash had been so terrific as to deprive some who heard it 
 of their reason, to stun others, to astound many, but for 250 gallant 
 seamen it was, if they heard it at all, the last sound that was to ring 
 in their ears in this world. The portholes of nearby ships were 
 smashed in, also the windows of houses facing the harbor. The 
 lights on the water front were extinguished. Great masses of the 
 vessel s iron substance were torn from her, and sent flying through 
 the air. Some witnesses testified to having heard an awful chorus of 
 groans from those not yet dead but dying between the vessel s decks. 
 
 As the hearings of the Court of Inquiry drew near their close, 
 more and more secrecy was maintained in regard to the evidence. 
 This led to the belief that developments were being made- that 
 threatened the peace of the nations. Consul-General Lee s advice to 
 Americans in Cuba, that they had better get off of the island as soon 
 as possible, particularly annoyed the Spaniards, and an urgent 
 effort was made at Madrid to get United States Minister Woodford 
 to suggest General Lee s recall. This effort, however, signally failed, 
 and the temper of the American people in the emergency was magni 
 ficently manifested, on March 8th, when Congress voted unanimously 
 for a defense fund of fifty millions of dollars, which President 
 McKinley was authorized to expend as he might deem best in the 
 interest of peace or war, as the case might be 
 
 SPAIN PREPARES FOR TROUBLE. 
 
 Nor was Spain lying upon her oars in the matter of preparation. 
 She was making strenuous efforts to purchase warships, and to pro 
 vide for a big war loan. Another thing that she undertook at this 
 time was to create an impressive moral effect by dispatching a fleet 
 of vessels westward, as if to let the Americans see that she was ready 
 
THE EXPLOSION OF THE "MAINE" WAR 
 
 for anything that might happen. It turned out, however, that the 
 destination of this fleet was the Cape Verde Islands, and the length 
 of time it remained at those islands, subsequently gave it the name 
 of the Cape Verde Fleet, and this was the fleet that really did venture 
 further west several months later, and never went back. 
 
 The Maine Court of Inquiry finished its work on March iQth, 
 and a summary of its findings was forwarded to the President and the 
 Navy Department on the following day. Then followed more than 
 a week of delay, during which time every detail of the report was 
 carefully considered by the Cabinet, and after this consideration had 
 been taken, the report in full, with all the evidence taken, was, on 
 March 28th, submitted to Congress. Meanwhile, all vessels of the 
 American Navy were donning their smoke-colored warpaint, and 
 everybody s mind was being made up to the fact that war was in 
 evitable. 
 
 The tension of feeling throughout the nation was so great at 
 this time that the report of the Board of Inquiry was not altogether 
 satisfactory. It positively declared that the explosion by which the 
 Maine was wrecked was external, but it was impossible for the Board 
 to make any statement as to the responsibility. This omission was 
 the part that failed to give universal satisfaction ; but subsequent 
 events developed the fact that the Administration felt that there were 
 grounds for war, if war must come, even grander and more praise 
 worthy than any that could be based upon the idea of revenge for a 
 national insult, or of reprisal for loss of life. 
 
 THE REPORT OF THE BOARD OF INQUIRY. 
 
 In any event the report of the Board of Inquiry was submitted 
 without attempt to fix the responsibility, though the public was left 
 free to draw its own conclusions from the findings. These findings 
 were substantially as follows : 
 
 1. That the battleship Maine was conducted to buoy No. 4 in 
 the harbor of Havana by the regular Government pilot, and that the 
 United States Consul-General at Havana had notified the authori 
 ties, on the previous evening, of the intended arrival of the Maine. 
 
 2. The state of discipline on board the Maine was excellent, and 
 all orders and regulations in regard to the care and safety of the 
 
THE REPORT OF THE BOARD OP INQUIRY 32; 
 
 vessel were strictly carried out. The fire alarms were in working 
 order, and there had never been a case of spontaneous combustion 
 of coal on board. On the night of the destruction of the Maine, 
 everything had been reported secure for the night at 8 r.M. by reli 
 able persons, through the proper authorities, to the commanding 
 officer ; and, at the time of the explosion, the vessel was quiet, and, 
 therefore, least liable to accidents caused by movements from those 
 on board. 
 
 3. The destruction of the Maine occurred at 9.40 P.M. on Feb 
 ruary 15, 1898, in the harbor of Havana, Cuba, she being at that 
 time moored to the same buoy to which she had been taken upon her 
 arrival. There were two explosions. By the first, the forward part 
 of the ship was lifted to a marked degree. The second explosion 
 was, in the opinion of the Court, caused by the partial explosion of 
 two or more of the forward magazines. 
 
 4. That portion of the portside of the protected deck, which 
 extends from about frame 30 to about frame 41, was blown up aft and 
 over to port. The main deck, from about frame 30 to about frame 
 41, was blown up aft and slightly over to starboard, folding the for 
 ward part of the middle superstructure over and on top of the after- 
 part. 
 
 5. In the opinion of the Court, these effects and others devel 
 oped in evidence could have been produced only by the explosion of 
 a mine situated under the bottom of the ship at about frame 18, and 
 somewhat on the portside. 
 
 6. The Court finds that the loss of the Maine was not, in any 
 respect, due to fault or negligence on the part of any of the officers 
 or members of the crew. 
 
 7. In the opinion of the Court, the Maine was destroyed by the 
 explosion of a submarine mine, which caused the partial explosion of 
 two or more of her forward magazines. 
 
 8. The Court has been unable to obtain evidence, fixing the 
 responsibility for the destruction of the Maine upon any person or 
 persons. 
 
 The report was signed by Captain W. T. Sampson, U. S. N., 
 President, and Lieutenant-Commander A. Marix, U. S. N., Judge- 
 Advocate, and the proceedings and findings of the Court were 
 
328 THE EXPLOSION OF THE "MAINE" -WAR 
 
 approved by Rear- Admiral Sicard, Commander-in-Chief of the 
 United States Naval force on the North Atlantic Station. 
 
 No further evidence has been officially recorded as to the cause 
 of the explosion ; but many stories were subsequently circulated in 
 apparent confirmation of popular opinion that Spain should have 
 been held responsible. One of these stories was to the effect that 
 dynamite had been purchased in England by private agents of General 
 Weyler, and that it was to the desire of his friends to resent his recall 
 from Cuba that the disaster to the Maine was due. 
 
 CONGRESS STIRRED TO ACTION. 
 
 The United States Government authorities, however, studiously 
 avoided laying the blame for the explosion at the door of Spain, but 
 there was no cessation of the preparations for war. Members of the 
 Senate and of the House of Representatives emphatically declared 
 that the time had come for America to intervene in Cuban affairs, 
 and, within two or three days after the report of the Board of 
 Inquiry was made public, resolutions to that effect were introduced 
 in both houses of the National Legislature. 
 
 Senator Foraker, of Ohio, on March 3Oth, presented resolutions 
 recognizing the independence of Cuba, and favoring armed interven 
 tion. He declared that autonomy had absolutely failed, and that just 
 as this failure was realized the country was confronted by the De 
 Lome incident. Scarcely had this begun to attract less interest when 
 the explosion of the Maine threw the country into a hurricane oi 
 excitement, but that the proper action for Congress to take was upon 
 the general Cuban question. 
 
 Senator Frye, of Maine, also introduced a resolution, based on 
 the declaration that the war in Cuba had been conducted by the 
 Spanish Government in violation of the rules of civilized warfare ; 
 that the President be authorized " to take such effective steps as, in 
 his discretion, may be necessary to secure a speedy termination of 
 the hostilities between the Government of Spain and the people of 
 Cuba, the withdrawal of the military and naval forces of Spain from 
 said island, and the complete independence of said people." 
 
 Senator Rawlins, of Utah, offered a resolution for the recogni 
 tion of Cuba s independence, and for a declaration of war against 
 
ALL POWERS STRIVE FOR PEACE 329 
 
 Spain. Senator Allen, of Nebraska, introduced a resolution recog 
 nizing the independence of Cuba, and that the United States should 
 immediately intervene and put an end to the war that was being 
 waged by the Spaniards against the citizens of that island. Similar 
 resolutions were introduced in the House of Representatives, all 
 being referred to the Committees on Foreign Affairs, with instruc 
 tions for an early report. 
 
 ALL POWERS STRIVE FOR PEACE. 
 
 Spain began to have inquiries made through devious diplomatic 
 channels as to what would satisfy the United States in regard to 
 Spanish conduct of Cuban affairs. Several propositions passed back 
 ward and forward, unofficially, and there was every evidence of an 
 effort on the part of Spain to gain more time. Meanwhile, there was 
 a great rush at all the navy yards. The squadron at Key West, of 
 which the Maine had been a part, was rapidly put into fighting trim. 
 
 The Spanisli vessels Viscaya and Almiranie Oquendo, which had 
 been in Havana harbor since a few days after the destruction of the 
 Maine, withdrew to Porto Rico, and thence to the Canaries, being 
 subsequently attached to the Cape Verde fleet under command of 
 Admiral Cervera. 
 
 Representatives of the great powers called upon the Secretary of 
 State at Washington in the interest of peace, but, recognizing at once 
 the trend of events, reported their opinions to their home Govern 
 ments, and the importunities of the powers were then directed toward 
 influencing Spain to see the folly of allowing war to be declared. 
 
 The excuse put forward by Spain for not agreeing to the sugges 
 tions of the United States was that the Spanish dynasty would be 
 imperiled by the rising of the people in revolution if too great con 
 cessions were made in Cuba. The powers, however, agreed to take 
 care of the dynasty and to keep down rebellion if Spain would give 
 up; but Sagasta refused to negotiate for the preservation of peace, 
 Minister Woodford prepared to leave Madrid, and it became plainly 
 apparent early in April that the United States Consul-General could 
 be of no more service in Havana. 
 
 On the evening of April Qth, General Lee and his staff left 
 Havana on board the lighthouse tender Fern. The wharf was 
 
330 THE EXPLOSION OF THE "MAINE"- WAR 
 
 crowded, but no discourtesy was shown. General Lee had called at 
 the palace of the Governor-General to say good-bye to General 
 Blanco, but the Governor-General was very busy and could not 
 receive General Lee. The American flag" upon the Consulate Build 
 ing was taken down by consular employees during the afternoon, and 
 American interests were left in the hands of the British Consul. A 
 great many Americans accompanied General Lee from the Cuban 
 capital, but Havana seemed to be absolutely indifferent to the 
 evacuation. 
 
 AN ARMISTICE TO INSURGENTS. 
 
 On the same day that General Lee quitted Havana, the Spanish 
 Cabinet decided to grant an armistice to the insurgents in Cuba. The 
 Ambassadors of foreign powers had induced the Spaniards to make 
 this concession in the hope of averting the war. The conditions of 
 the armistice were to be the withdrawal of the American squadrons 
 from Cuba and the Philippines. The armistice was to last for five 
 days. The temper of the American Congress, however, was not favor 
 able to any deviation from the programme that had been laid clown. 
 Prominent leaders of both political parties insisted that Congressional 
 action should be taken regardless of the armistice, and it was also 
 necessary for the Cubans to be communicated with in regard to the 
 proposed cessation of fighting. 
 
 Meanwhile, however, the authorities in Madrid appeared to 
 imagine that armistice meant peace, for they still believed there would 
 be some way found for them to meet America s demands and still 
 retain sovereignty in Cuba; but, on April nth, President McKin- 
 ley sent to Congress his famous message asking for power to inter 
 vene in Cuba. The message referred to the fearful starving and 
 desolation which had followed General Weyler s policy of devastation 
 and concentration ; it denounced the policy of reconcentration as 
 uncivilized ; and it opposed the recognition of the belligerency of the 
 insurgents, or the recognition, at this time, of the independence of 
 the present insurgent Government. 
 
 The President declared forcible intervention to stop the war to 
 be justifiable in the cause of humanity and for the protection of our 
 citizens, and to prevent further loss to our commerce and trade. He 
 spoke of the inexpressible horror over the destruction of the Maine; 
 
THE RESULT OP THE MESSAGE 331 
 
 and referred to the report of the Naval Court of Inquiry as com 
 manding the unqualified confidence of the Government, adding that 
 the only hope of relief and repose from a condition, which could no 
 longer be endured, was the enforced pacification of Cuba. 
 
 " In the name of humanity, in the name of civilization, in behalf 
 of endangered American interests, which give us the right and the 
 duty to speak and to act," said the President, " the war in Cuba must 
 stop. In view of these facts and of these considerations, I ask the 
 Congress to authorize and to empower the President to take measures 
 to secure a full and final termination of hostilities between the Gov 
 ernment of Spain and the people of Cuba, and to secure in the 
 island the establishment of a stable government, capable of main 
 taining order and of observing its international obligations, ensuring 
 peace and tranquility, and the security of its citizens as well as our 
 own, and to use the military and naval forces of the United States 
 as may be necessary for these purposes." 
 
 THE RESULT OF THE MESSAGE. 
 
 The President s message was referred to the Committees on 
 Foreign Affairs of both Houses of Congress, and was taken under 
 consideration in connection with the various resolutions for interven 
 tion and recognition which had recently been introduced, and, on 
 April 1 8th, a joint resolution was agreed upon. The Senate had 
 declared for recognition, but the House had directly sustained the 
 President in his views upon this question, and the result was a non- 
 recognition measure, the full text of which was as follows : 
 
 WHEREAS, The abhorrent conditions which have existed for 
 more than three years in the Island of Cuba, so near to our own 
 borders, have shocked the moral sense of the people of the United 
 States, have been a disgrace to Christian civilization, culminating, as 
 they have, in the destruction of a United States battleship, with two 
 hundred and sixty-six of its officers and crew, while on a friendly visit 
 in the harbor of Havana, and cannot longer be endured, as has been 
 set forth by the President of the United States in his Message to 
 Congress of April n, 1898, upon which the action of Congress was 
 invited ; therefore, 
 
332 THE EXPLOSION OF THE MAINE WAR 
 
 Resolved, By the Senate and House of Representatives of the 
 United States of America in Congress assembled 
 
 First. That the people of the Island of Cuba are, and of right 
 ought to be, free and independent. 
 
 Second. That it is the duty of the United States to demand, 
 and the Government of the States does hereby demand, that the 
 Government of Spain at once relinquish its authority and govern 
 ment in the Island of Cuba, and withdraw its land and naval forces 
 from Cuba and Cuban waters. 
 
 Third. That the President of the United States be, and he 
 hereby is, directed and empowered to use the entire land and naval 
 forces of the United States, and to call into the actual service of the 
 United States the militia of the several States, to such extent as may 
 be necessary to carry these resolutions into effect. 
 
 Fourth. That the United States hereby disclaims any disposi 
 tion or intention to exercise sovereignty, jurisdiction or control over 
 said Island except for the pacification thereof ; and asserts its deter 
 mination when that is accomplished to leave the government and 
 control of the Island to its people. 
 
 The adoption of this resolution was looked upon at home and 
 abroad as a practical declaration of war, and the preparations which 
 had been rapidly pushed forward since the destruction of the Maine, 
 now began to be rushed at high speed. The President signed the 
 joint resolution of Congress on April 2Oth, and the Government s 
 ultimatum was forwarded to Spain on the same day. Spain was given 
 three days in which to make a satisfactory reply, but Minister Polo y 
 Barnabe, who had succeeded DeLome temporarily, withdrew to 
 Canada. On April 2ist, Minister Woodford was handed his pass 
 ports at Madrid, before the American ultimatum was presented, and 
 he promptly left the Spanish capital. On the following day, April 22d, 
 orders were given the American fleet at Key West and the Flying 
 Squadron to seek the fleet of Spain, which was supposed to be on its 
 way across the ocean, and on the same day President McKinley issued 
 a call for troops, summoning 125,000 men for service in Cuba. 
 
 This call was in the form of a proclamation, as follows : 
 
THE PEACE COMMISSIONERS. 
 
 Appointed September 9, 1898. Met Spanish Commissioners at Paris, October ist. Treaty of Peace signed by the Commis 
 sioners at Paris, December loth, and ratified by the United States Senate at Washington, February 6th, 1899 
 
A PROCLAMATION 335 
 
 By the President of the United States : 
 
 WHEREAS, By a joint resolution of Congress, approved on the 
 2oth day of April, 1898, entitled, "Joint Resolution for the Recogni 
 tion of the Independence of the People of Cuba, Demanding that the 
 Government of Spain Relinquish its Authority and Government in 
 the Island of Cuba, to Withdraw Its Land and Naval Forces from 
 Cuba and Cuban Waters, and directing the President of the United 
 States to use the land and naval forces of the United States to carry 
 these resolutions into effect " ; and, 
 
 WHEREAS, By an Act of Congress, entitled " An Act to provide 
 for temporarily increasing the military establishment of the United 
 States in time of war and for other purposes," approved April 22, 
 1898, the President is authorized in order to raise a volunteer army 
 to issue his proclamation calling for volunteers to serve in the army 
 of the United States. 
 
 Now, THEREFORE, I, William McKinley, President of the United 
 States, by virtue of the power vested in me by the Constitution and 
 the laws, and deeming sufficient occasion to exist, have thought fit to 
 call for, and hereby do call for, volunteers to the aggregate number 
 of 125,000 in order to carry into effect the purpose of the said resolu 
 tion, the same to be apportioned, as far as practicable, among the 
 several States and Territories and the District of Columbia, accord 
 ing to the population, and to serve for two years, unless sooner dis 
 charged. The details of this object will be immediately communi 
 cated to the proper authorities through the War Department. 
 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and caused 
 the seal of the United States to be affixed. 
 
 Done at the City of Washington, this 23d day of April, A.D., 
 1898, and of the Independence of the United States the i22d. 
 
 [SEAL] WILLIAM McKiNLEY. 
 
 By the President. 
 
 JOHN SHERMAN, Secretary of State. 
 
 Among the lasting glories of the United States of America, will 
 ever be prominent the manner in which all the States of the Union 
 responded to this call for national defenders. The quota of each 
 
336 THE EXPLOSION OF THE "MAINE" -WAR 
 
 State was fixed according to the population of those of the militia 
 age. On this basis the State of New York was to furnish 12,512 
 volunteers; Pennsylvania, 10,762; Illinois, 8,048; Ohio, 7,248; 
 Missouri, 5,411 ; and all other States in the same proportion, down 
 to 351 men from Delaware; 237 from Nevada; 231 from Wyoming; 
 181 from Arizona, and 142 from Oklahoma. 
 
 These volunteers were speedily mobilized at central points in 
 their respective States, and everything possible was done to perfect 
 their equipment. The members of the State Guards went into camp 
 under their own officers, and all, officers and men, were submitted to 
 a rigorous physical examination. The response to the call had been 
 so generous, that the War Department determined to take only those 
 who were best fitted for the arduous service which was to be expected 
 of them in Cuba. The result was that the ranks of the State Guards, 
 though they had been only slightly impaired by failure to volunteer, 
 were considerably thinned by the weeding done by the regular army 
 surgeons. So eager were men in all parts of the country to have a 
 chance to fight against Spain, that all sorts of subterfuges were resorted 
 to in the hope of deceiving the examiners in regard to actual physical 
 conditions, but the weeding out was successfully accomplished, the 
 vacancies in the State regiments were filled by men selected through 
 the same process, and the result was as fine a body of men as ever 
 enlisted for any service in any part of the world. 
 
 THE FIRST STATE TO REPORT. 
 
 The first State to complete her quota was Pennsylvania, not 
 withstanding the fact that hers was second only to New York in 
 point of numbers. The Keystone soldiers were mobilized at Mt. 
 Gretna, the site of the annual State encampments, forty miles from 
 Harrisburg, The President s call had been issued on April 2ist ; on 
 April 28th, the entire National Guard of Pennsylvania was in camp, 
 and within thirty days its ten thousand men had been selected, uni 
 formed and equipped, and many of them were on their way to camps 
 of preparation nearer to Cuba, while one of its regiments, the Tenth, 
 was already on its way to Manila. 
 
 And what Pennsylvania had accomplished was approximated in 
 the other states throughout the Union. Camps of preparations 
 
WAR IS DECLARED 337 
 
 were established at Falls Church, Va., near the historical battlefield 
 of Bull Run, and in the National Military Park at Chickamauga, Ga., 
 which had been the scene of memorable battles during the War of 
 the Rebellion, Other temporary camps of further preparation were 
 established at different points, but the great majority of the troops 
 were eventually mobilized at these two most important rendezvous, 
 and from them the different regiments were forwarded to Tampa, 
 Charleston, Newport News, and other ports from which embarkation 
 was subsequently made for service in Cuba. The bulk of the troops 
 that went to Manila was selected from the Western States, the 
 Tenth Pennsylvania being the only volunteer regiment to serve in 
 that campaign from east of the Mississippi. 
 
 The regiments of the regular army were perfected in numbers 
 and equipment, and these were the nucleus of the army corps, which 
 were organized for the earliest service. The First Corps, however, 
 under Major-General Brooke, which was organized at Camp Thoinas, 
 Chickamauga, was made up entirely of volunteers, but the Second 
 Corps, which did such gallant service before Santiago, under General 
 Shafter, was made up largely of regulars, but with a grand leaven of 
 volunteers who fully shared the honors of that eventful campaign. 
 Many officers who had been prominent in the Civil War were given 
 commissions as general officers in the volunteer service. Among 
 them were General Joseph Wheeler, who had been the great cavalry 
 leader of the Rebellion, General Fitzhugh Lee, of Va., General 
 Gordon, of Georgia, and others. Soldiers of all states were equally 
 eager. There was no longer any North or South, East or West. It 
 was one flag and one country, and " On to Cuba" was the cry. 
 
 WAR IS DECLARED. 
 
 These unmistakable preparations constituted a declaration of 
 war in themselves, but, for the sake of avoiding complications that 
 might arise in connection with blockades, etc., President McKinley, 
 recommended and Congress passed, on April 24th, a bill, as follows : 
 
 " First. That war be, and the same hereby is, declared to exist, 
 and that war has existed since the 2ist day of April, A.D., 1898, in 
 cluding said day, between the United States of America and the 
 Kingdom of Spain. 
 
338 THE EXPLOSION OF THE "MAINE" WAR 
 
 "Second. That the President of the United States be, and he 
 hereby is, directed and empowered to use the entire land and naval 
 forces of the United States, and to call into actual service of the 
 United States, the militia of the several States to such an extent as 
 may be necessary to carry this bill into effect." 
 
 Then followed the active operations that were conducted by the 
 Navy upon the Atlantic coast and far away among the islands of the 
 Pacific. The victory of Admiral Dewey over the Spanish fleet in the 
 harbor of Manila, on May ist, seemed to set the pace for the rest of 
 the war. The news of this glorious achievement stirred the hearts 
 of every American to such an extent that all efforts against the 
 national enemy seemed to have been accelerated thereby. The plans 
 of the War Department began more rapidly to mature, and the naval 
 vessels in the vicinity of Havana could scarce restrain their impulse 
 to make a decisive onslaught, but the Administration had the situa 
 tion well in hand, and the advance of the army and navy was near at 
 hand. 
 
CHAPTER XIX 
 
 The Campaign in Cuba 
 
 A Close Blockade Established at Havana. The First Shot of the War. The 
 Buena Ventura Captured as the Initial Prize of the Conflict. The First Death 
 of the War. Ensign WorthBagley, of the Torpedo Boat Winslow, Killed. 
 Admiral Cervera s Fleet Leaves Spain for the Cape Verde Islands. A Period of 
 Search and Apprehension. The Spanish Vessels Reach Santiago. Commodore 
 Schley Bottles up the Fleet in Santiago Harbor. "I ve got them, and they Will 
 Never Get out Alive." Sampson takes Charge of the Blockade. Lieutenant 
 Hobson s Daring Deed of Heroism. The Brilliant Young Naval Officer Sinks 
 the Merrimac at the Mouth of the Harbor to Prevent the Enemy from Com 
 ing Out. Afloat on a Raft Amid the Shells of Spanish Forts and Cruisers. 
 Taken Prisoner and Landed in Morro Castle. The American Vessels Shell the 
 Castle, although the Captured Men were Exposed to the Deadly Fire. The Mag 
 nificent Naval Battle of July 3d. The Capture of Admiral Cervera and the 
 total Annihilation of the Spanish Fleet. 
 
 THE blockade of Havana by the vessels of the American navy 
 included in the North Atlantic Squadron, under Admiral 
 Sampson, began in the latter part of April, 1898. One by one 
 the vessels had gathered at Key West from different points on the 
 Atlantic coast, and on the 226. of the month, soon after 5 o clock in 
 the morning, the entire squadron of sea-fighters, except the monitors 
 Terror and Puritan, and the smaller cruisers, sailed from Key West 
 headed for the Florida Straits. 
 
 This movement was made in pursuance of a proclamation issued 
 by President McKinley, and was really the first concerted movement 
 of the war. The call of the President for 125,000 volunteers was 
 not made until the following day, but it had been promptly deter 
 mined that not a moment should be lost in blockading the principal 
 seaport of Spain s chief possession in the West Indies, so that the 
 effect of the declaration of war might be immediately felt. 
 
 It was known throughout the fleet, and on shore as well, that the 
 long-expected advance on Havana was near at hand. Key West was 
 
 339 
 
340 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 in a fever of anticipation. Advices from Washington on the 2ist 
 indicated the probability of a movement during the night or on the 
 following morning, but naval men kept their knowledge to themselves 
 as long as they could. Early in the evening, however, signals were 
 hoisted recalling to the ships all men who were on shore, and this 
 was accepted as a foregone conclusion that the movement was cer 
 tainly near at hand. 
 
 Still later at night this idea was further confirmed by the arrival 
 of a special boat from the flagship with orders for every officer to go 
 on board. Midnight found Key West empty of gold braid and blue 
 jackets. The theatre of action was transferred to the harbor, where a 
 glittering panorama was enacted until daybreak, and then it was appar 
 ent to everybody that the vessels would soon be beyond the offing. 
 
 For many days past the flagship New York had majestically 
 swung at anchor about seven miles out, flanked by her big sisters, the 
 towa and the Indiana. To the eyes of Key West their great smoke 
 stacks were barely visible, while the hulls lay like shadows in the dis 
 tant water. The inner harbor, however, offered a striking picture, 
 crowded as it was with monitors, cruisers, gunboats, and torpedo 
 boats, flitting noiselessly in and out of the maze of greater vessels 
 lying at anchor. 
 
 THE MESSAGES OF THE LIGHTS. 
 
 When twilight fell, on the evening of April 22d, this scene 
 was unchanged, but in the darkness that followed, signal lights glim 
 mered their messages across the skies almost without cessation, and 
 in the early dawn, while it was still dark enough for the same sort of 
 signalling, on the morning of the 23d, a great line of fire appeared 
 on the sky above where lay the flagship. A moment later and the 
 signal staff of the Cincinnati, in the inner harbor, flashed into colored 
 lights, answering the call. Then the Puritan and the Helena joined in 
 the incandescent conversation, and soon the skies were kaleidoscopic, 
 as ship after ship answered and new lights ticked messages fraught 
 with the gravest import, and creative of the Nation s history. 
 
 Those on shore knew not the words that had been transmitted; 
 they saw the ships of the inner 1 harbor move out toward the larger 
 ones when the daydawn had advanced a little further, and everyone 
 knew that the flagship was drawing the rest of the fleet toward her. 
 
THE FIRST SHOT OF THE WAR. 341 
 
 It was just 5.42 A.M. when the New York, without unnecessary dis 
 play, moved slowly toward the outer waters of the Gulf. The hwa 
 and the Indnna followed on either side, but separated from her by a 
 good stretch of water. As the line advanced toward the horizon, the 
 ships spread out until there was perhaps a distance of three miles 
 between the tips of the crescent. Those following the three leaders 
 were the cruisers Cincinnati, Detroit and Nashville; the gunboats 
 Wilmington, Castine, Machias and Newport ; the monitor Amphitritc, 
 the torpedo boat Foote, the Mayflower and the cable repair-boat ^Ian- 
 grove. The MarbleJiead was taking on water and followed within a 
 day or two. 
 
 Although it was a fact that the departure of the squadron was in 
 pursuance of orders merely to establish a blockade, there were 
 many rumors in Key West, and throughout the entire country, when 
 the departure was made known, that an attack was to be made upon 
 Havana without delay. It became apparent subsequently, however, 
 that it was nothing but blockade duty that was expected of the 
 squadron at this time. The vessels patrolled the northern coast for 
 many miles east and west of Havana, and carried out the instructions 
 of the President concerning the stoppage and overhauling of all 
 vessels bound to and from Havana. The care exercised in carrying 
 out these instructions was made manifest by the paucity of complica 
 tions growing out of the seizures that were made, and the energy of 
 the blockaders was emphasized in the many interesting incidents that 
 occurred. 
 
 THE FIRST SHOT OF THE WAR. 
 
 On the very first day out from Key West a prize was captured. 
 The Nashville saw a steamer flying the Spanish flag and overhauled 
 her. She first fired a blank shot, which the Spaniard ignored. This 
 was followed by a six-pound shot fired across the bows of the fugi 
 tive the first shot of the war. The Spaniard then came to a stop 
 and surrendered. She proved to be the Buena Ventura, of 1,000 
 tons, having on board a cargo of lumber. The Nashville towed her 
 prisoner into Key West, thus having secured the first prize. 
 
 The first fight of the war, however, was the bombardment and 
 reduction of the outer fortifications at Matanzas on the afternoon of 
 April 2 ;th, by Admiral Sampson s flagship New York, with the 
 
342 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 monitor Puritan and the cruiser Cincinnati. Matanzas is about fifty 
 miles east of Havana. Before the destruction of the Maine, its only 
 protection consisted of two old-fashioned forts near the entrance to 
 the harbor, with old-fashioned guns that were not at all formidable ; 
 but the Spaniards, anticipating trouble, had hundreds of men 
 employed on the works for several weeks previous to this attack, and 
 it was rapidly becoming almost as formidable as Havana itself. 
 
 The extent of the fortifications was not known to Admiral 
 Sampson, but it was known that whatever was being done, was being 
 rushed. Hence the determination of the Admiral, to vary the mono 
 tony of blockade duty by a little target practice. The flagship started 
 out alone to do the work. The Puritan and Cincinnati were already 
 in front of Matanzas doing blockade duty. The New Yotk signalled 
 what she was going to do as she started for the point furthest from 
 Matanzas, where the fortifications of Point Rubalcava were being 
 pushed ahead, and the Piiritan and Cincinnati fell in behind. 
 
 The New York ran provokingly close to the fortifications and in 
 a few minutes there was a puff of smoke from Rubalcava, followed 
 by the roar of a heavy gun and the whistle of a shell. At the same 
 time there was another puff of smoke to the east and the roar of 
 another gun. These two shots were the invitation that the men of 
 Admiral Sampson s ship had been looking for, and in less time than 
 it takes to tell it, the big 8-inch gun on the starboard side forward on 
 the New York, sent a shell directly into the fortification at Rubalcava. 
 At the same time, the Puritan steamed up behind the New York, 
 and the Cincinnati sailed directly toward the mouth of the harbor. 
 
 AMERICAN GUNNERS PROVE THEIR SKILL. 
 
 Before the Spaniards in the fortifications had recovered from the 
 suprise the first shell gave them, the New York had planted three 
 more almost in the same spot, and the Puritan and Cincinnati had 
 unlimbered their guns and were paying the same sort of compliment 
 to the other fortifications. Every shot they fired struck the fortifica 
 tions and tore them asunder. Great clouds of dust arose, and lumps 
 of masonry went flying. 
 
 The marksmanship of the Americans was excellent. The 
 Spaniards fired wide of their mark. When the firing began the New 
 

 
 AMERICANS STORMING SAN JUAN HILL. 
 
 The most dramatic scene, the most destructive battle of the Spanish War. 
 
THE FIRST LIVES LOST FOR THE FLAG 345 
 
 York was about 6,000 yards from the shore, but she gradually reduced 
 the distance to less than 3,000 yards, and she increased the rapidity 
 of her fire to three shots a minute, and every shot had a telling 
 effect. 
 
 The Pitritan did not fire quite so rapidly, but her shots were not 
 more than a minute apart, and she did not miss anything she shot at. 
 The Cincinnati fired broadsides with equal effectiveness, and after 
 about fifteen minutes of this rapid work, the firing from the fortifica 
 tions had practically ceased, and the flagship signalled to back away. 
 
 At that moment Rubalcava fired her last shot. The Puritan 
 was a long distance from her, but her gunners saw the smoke puff 
 out and aimed for that spot with one of the big 1 2-inch guns. The 
 aim was magnificent. The huge i,ooo-pound shell of the Puritan 
 struck exactly where the smoke had been, hit the cannon from which 
 it had come, smashed it, and drove on into the earthworks, carrying 
 destruction before it exploded. When it exploded it seemed to those 
 who were watching the shot, as if about all that was visible of the 
 island of Cuba went up into the air. 
 
 This was the last shot of the first fight of the war. The three 
 vessels then sailed out several miles off shore. There was no sign 
 of life about the fortifications of Matanzas after they left. Not one 
 of the Spanish shots had taken effect on the vessels, so, of course, 
 no one was injured. The casualties among the Spaniards have 
 never been known. It will be remembered that Blanco sent his 
 famous message to Madrid, which said : " Killed one mule," as the 
 report of loss in this engagement, but there is reason to believe that 
 the mule had plenty of Spanish company in the happy hunting 
 grounds. 
 
 THE FIRST LIVES LOST FOR THE FLAG. 
 
 The first lives to be offered up in connection with the war, that 
 had been inaugurated, were those of Ensign Worth Bagley and four 
 men of the torpedo boat Winslow, which bore the brunt of a terrific 
 fire from batteries in the harbor of Cardenas, on May the i ith. The 
 harbor of Cardenas had been a refuge for Spanish gunboats, and the 
 gunboat Wilmington, with the gunboat Hudson and the Winslow, had 
 been ordered to rout them out. It was in the carrying out of these 
 orders that death came to these initial heroes. 
 
34 6 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 Only one Spanish gunboat could be seen from the entrance to 
 the harbor. The Wilmington was too deep of draft to enter, so the 
 Winslow was sent in to capture her by threatening to blow her up 
 with a torpedo, and the Hudson stood by to lend a hand. When the 
 Winslow had advanced to within a thousand yards of the shore, a 
 masked battery opened fire on her. The plucky torpedo boat replied 
 sturdily with her small guns and continued to advance, but as she 
 swung around to move out of range, a lo-inch shell, struck her, 
 wrecking her steam steering gear, and rendering her helpless. 
 
 Still the little vessel replied vigorously with her three guns until 
 one of them was disabled by a fragment of a shell, but the others con 
 tinued to operate while some of the crew attempted to connect the 
 hand steering apparatus. In the meantime another lo-inch shell 
 struck the Winslow on the port side, wrecked her forward boiler, 
 filling the compartment with dense clouds of steam, and driving the 
 men who were at work there to seek the deck for air. 
 
 The Spaniards quickly recognized the helpless plight of the 
 torpedo boat and began to cheer. Shore batteries and the guns of 
 two or three Spanish boats, which had not been visible from outside 
 the harbor, all concentrated their fire upon the little American vessel. 
 The entire engagement lasted for nearly an hour, and while it lasted 
 it was terrific. The Hudson steamed forward to the aid of the 
 Winslow, and attempted to tow her out of harm s way. The Span 
 iards seemed to pay no attention to the Hudson, so intent were they 
 upon destroying the Winslow. Ensign Bagley and several of his 
 men stood on the deck of the latter, doing the best they could to 
 answer the fire of the enemy. When the H^tdson approached within 
 hailing distance, Bagley called out : " Pass us a line quickly ; it s 
 getting too hot here for comfort." The Hudson s crew threw the 
 line and it was made fast, but it was too late to save the lives that 
 seemed to have been doomed. 
 
 Just as the hawser drew taut, a lo-inch shell exploded in the 
 midst of the group of men on the deck of the Winslow. Every man 
 in the party was thrown backward, all dead or mortally wounded. 
 The plucky ensign, who had been in an exposed condition during the 
 entire conflict, was instantly killed. So also were John Denfee, a 
 fireman, and John Varvarves, an oiler. Two others, George B. Meek, 
 
THE FIRST AMERICAN FLAG IN CUBA 347 
 
 fireman, and E. B. Tunnell, cook, were so grievously injured that they 
 died a short time afterward. For a moment after the explosion the 
 Hudson wavered, and then she started with her heavy tow for the 
 mouth of the harbor. The hawser parted, however, before she had 
 gone far, and she turned, in the midst of a perfect hail of missiles, to 
 aid her disabled consort. This time the cable held, and the Winslow 
 passed out safely. 
 
 The shore batteries did not fire another shot after the Winslow 
 was towed away by the Hudson. On account of the smoke and the 
 masking of the battery, it was impossible to know what the Spanish 
 loss in killed and wounded was ; but it has always been thought that 
 the Winslow did much more damage by her answering fire than the 
 Spaniards were willing to concede, particularly because of the moral 
 effect of casualties at that early stage of the war. The bodies of 
 Bagley and his men were taken to Key West by the fludson, and 
 their death was deeply mourned throughout the nation. 
 
 Another incident of this eventful week was a ruse resorted to 
 by the wily Spaniards to send a couple of Sampson s ships to the 
 bottom. They baited the trap as one would bait a rat-trap. A small 
 schooner was sent out from Havana harbor, shortly before daylight, 
 to draw some of the Americans into the ambuscade. The ruse 
 worked like a charm. The Vicksburg and the Morill, who had been 
 added to the blockading fleet, in the heat of the chase, and in their 
 contempt for Spanish gunnery, closed in upon their quarry almost 
 under the guns of Morro Castle, but the poor marksmanship of the 
 Spanish gunners gave them warning of their danger, and allowed 
 them to escape without damage. 
 
 THE FIRST AMERICAN FLAG IN CUBA. 
 
 On May nth, while the Wilmington , Winslow, and the Hiidson 
 were engaged with the enemy at Cardenas, where Ensign Bagley 
 and his men were killed, the steel gunboat Machias undertook to 
 silence the Spanish fire at Diora Bay, the barracks located a short 
 distance from the main batteries of Cardenas. The fight was 
 spirited, and in less than half an hour the Spaniards retreated from 
 their wrecked fortifications. Scarcely waiting for the firing to cease, 
 Ensign Willarcl, accompanied by three men, went ashore in a launch, 
 
348 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 hauled down the Spanish flag, which the enemy had left behind in 
 their haste to get away, and raised in its stead the Stars and Stripes. 
 This was the first American flag erected over the enemy s works in 
 Cuba. 
 
 On May I2th, while Admiral Sampson and several of his war 
 ships were reducing the fortifications at San Juan de Porto Rico, 
 the Manning, Dolphin, and Gussie reached Mariel, on the Cuban 
 coast, and the latter succeeded in landing a quantity of Winchester 
 rifles, ammunition, and supplies for the Cuban insurgents. On the 
 1 4th, four boat crews, from the MaibUhead and Nashville, cut the 
 cables at Cienfuegos, losing one man killed and several officers and 
 men wounded. 
 
 Commander McCalla, of the Maiblekcad, had signalled to the 
 Nashville that morning that he proposed cutting the cable, and he 
 ordered that volunteers be called for. So hearty was the response 
 to this call that the officers of the vessels had to make selections 
 from the entire crews. Four boats were fitted out. There were 
 about forty men in the party. In each boat beside the crew were 
 several marines, and each of the launches had a one-pound gun in its 
 bow. All four boats made their way in, directly toward the shore, 
 until they were not more than thirty yards from the beach. The men 
 in the cutters were to work at the cables, so the launches stood 
 between them and the shore, and the men in the latter promptly 
 began firing at the Spanish soldiers who had gathered on the beach, 
 while the Marblehead and the Nashville shelled the woods on either 
 side. 
 
 The men in the boats cut a long piece out of the first cable, and 
 then began to grapple for the other. Meantime the Spaniards were 
 firing low in an evident desire to sink the cutters. Several men were 
 kept at the oars to hold the cutters in position, and the first man 
 wounded was one of these. No one else in the boat knew it, how 
 ever, until he fainted in his seat from the loss of blood. Others took 
 the cue from this, and there was not a groan or complaint from the 
 two boats as the bullets, coming thicker and faster, began to bite 
 flesh every now and then. The men simply possessed themselves in 
 patience, and went on with their work. They did not even have the 
 satisfaction of returning the Spanish fire, but the marines in the bow 
 
AM EFFECTIVE BLOCKADE KEPT UP 349 
 
 of the boats shot hard enough for all, and the men at the oars again 
 and again grunted approval when they saw Spaniards on the beach 
 fall victims to the shots that were fired. 
 
 BOTH CABLES ARE CUT. 
 
 This sort of thing kept up for about two hours before both 
 cables had been successfully severed, the Spaniards all the while keep 
 ing up a fire on the daring cable-cutters, and the marines defending 
 the workmen. When it became too hot for comfort, a few cans of 
 shrapnel were exploded over the heads of the Spaniards. This was 
 too much for the Dons, and they ran to cover behind a lighthouse, 
 and to this place they dragged a number of their machine guns and 
 again opened fire. By this time, however, the work that the Ameri 
 cans had started out to do was fairly well accomplished. The cutters 
 and launches withdrew from the shore, and were soon at the side of 
 the Marblehead and the Nashville. The warships trained guns upon 
 the lighthouse, where the Spaniards had taken refuge, and speedily 
 knocked it into fragments. The only man killed instantly in this 
 engagement was Patrick Regan, a marine. A sailor, who had been 
 shot at the oars, died of his wounds on the same day. Five other 
 sailors were wounded, Commander Maynard, of the Nashville, was 
 grazed in the shoulder, and Lieutenant Winslow was wounded in the 
 hand. 
 
 AN EFFECTIVE BLOCKADE KEPT UP. 
 
 The blockade was kept up at all ports on the northern coast of 
 Cuba, and, though some of the Spanish skippers succeeded in eluding 
 the watchfulness of the Americans, many prizes were captured, and 
 the blockade was satisfactorily successful. Its effectiveness was soon 
 made very evident in Havana, where provisions grew to be very 
 scarce. It was impossible to prevail upon merchants to embark in 
 such a dangerous enterprise, as running the blockade, and shipowners 
 were equally loath to risk the almost certain capture and condemna 
 tion of their vessels. The exigencies of the war, however, demanded 
 from time to time, the withdrawal of a part of the blockading force, 
 and thus it was made possible to introduce into Havana occassional 
 small consignments of supplies. 
 
350 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 Among the earlier captures made by the blockading squadron, was 
 that of the steamer Lafayette, of the French transatlantic line, which was 
 taken by the gunboat Annapolis just off the harbor of Havana, but 
 the Lafayettt was subsequently released on a technicality. The gun 
 boat Vicksburg captured the schooner Oriente, and the dispatch boat 
 Uncas captured the Antonio Suaves. The cruiser Montgomery brought 
 into port the Spanish brigantine Franzquito, bound for Havana, also 
 the brigantine Lorenzo ; the Newport captured the Padre de Dio^, the 
 Morrill overhauled the sloop Espana, and the auxiliary cruiser Yale 
 secured a rich prize in the steamship Rita. The flagship New York 
 also made several notable captures including the Carlos F, Rosas. 
 In a secret chamber of the Argonauta, were found rifles and ammuni 
 tion to the value of $6,000. A United States prize court was estab 
 lished at Key West, and the Spanish vessels that remained unclaimed 
 were condemned and ordered sold. 
 
 A feature of the naval operations off the coast of Cuba, at this 
 time was the arrival at Key West, May 26th, of the battleship Oregon, 
 having made the voyage from San Francisco since March iQth, a 
 distance of more than 13,000 miles, which it covered in 65 days of 
 actual travel. 
 
 HUNTING FOR THE SPANISH FLEET. 
 
 The monotony of the blockade was broken nearly every day by 
 news of the supposed movements of the fleet of Admiral Cervera, 
 which was known to have left Spain for the Cape Verde Islands, and 
 which was supposed to be on its way to the West Indies. Marvelous 
 stones had been told of the prowess of these Spanish men-of-war, and 
 the appetite of the entire American Navy had been whetted to a 
 keen point. The desire to try conclusions with the enemy on the sea 
 was uppermost in the minds of every sailor, and there was sincere 
 disappointment when each succeeding rumor of the discovery of the 
 fleet proved to be without foundation, and there was equal satisfac 
 tion when the enemy was at last definitely located. 
 
 Admiral Sampson had reduced the fortifications at San Juan de 
 Porto Rico and had seen nothing of the enemy s fleet in that direc 
 tion. He then returned to Havana. Commodore Schley had been 
 placed in command of the Flying Squadron. Orders had been sent 
 
STARTED TO CRUISE EASTWARD 351 
 
 him to establish a blockade at Cienfuegos with the least possible 
 delay. His instructions were, that if the Spanish vessels showed 
 themselves in that vicinity, and, finding him on the lookout, should 
 try to come around the island, whether east or west, he was to send 
 word by the swiftest vessel he had, so that Sampson might be ready 
 for them at Havana. 
 
 The first definite information as to the whereabouts of Cervera s 
 fleet came through the United States Minister to Venezuela, who 
 cabled when he learned from a confidential source that the Spaniards 
 were seen on May 1 7th, headed in the direction of Cuba. They did 
 not appear off Cienfuegos, as expected, and Sampson sent instruc 
 tions to Schley on May 2ist, that word had come to Washington that 
 the Spanish squadron, consisting of four ships and three torpedo 
 destroyers, were probably at Santiago de Cuba. 
 
 " If you are satisfied that they are not near Cienfuegos," were 
 Schley s instructions, " proceed with all dispatch, but cautiously, to 
 Santiago de Cuba, and, if the enemy is there, blockade him in port." 
 
 STARTED TO CRUISE EASTWARD. 
 
 Meanwhile, Sampson assembled a powerful squadron off Havana 
 and started to cruise eastward, with a view to prevent the possible 
 approach of Cervera s fleet from that direction, but not so far as to 
 make it impossible to fall back to Havana in case of Cervera s fleet 
 coming around the western end of the island. It was not believed 
 by the Navy Department that Cervera, if he was in Santiago, would 
 remain there, unless the port was closely blockaded, 
 
 Schley did not reach Santiago on May 24th, as expected, because, 
 as he telegraphed to Sampson, he " was not satisfied that the Span 
 ish squadron was not at Cienfuegos." "The large amount of smoke 
 seen in the harbor," were the words of Schley s message, " would in 
 dicate the presence of a number of vessels, and under such circum 
 stances it would seem to be extremely unwise to chase up a pro 
 bability at Santiago, reported via Havana, no doubt as a ruse. I shall 
 therefore remain off this port, with this squadron, availing myself of 
 every opportunity for coaling and keeping it ready for any emergency." 
 
 Admiral Schley also embodied in his message to Sampson, the 
 following paragraph : 
 
352 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 11 I am further satisfied that the destination of the Spanish 
 squadron is either Cienfuegos or Havana. This point, being in com 
 munication with Havana, would be better for their purposes, if it was 
 left exposed, and I think we ought to be very careful how we receive 
 information from Havana, which is, no doubt, sent out for the purpose 
 of misleading us." 
 
 On May 23d, Schley further reported that a steamer leaving 
 Santiago on the iSth, had brought word of seeing the lights of seven 
 vessels several miles to the southward of Santiago, and, notwith 
 standing this report, Schley added that, "on Saturday, May 2ist, 
 when about 40 miles southwest of Cienfuegos, I heard, from the 
 bridge, firing of guns towards Cienfuegos, which I interpreted as a 
 welcome to the Spanish fleet, and I am convinced that the fleet is 
 here. Latest Bulletin from Jamaica, received this morning, asserts 
 that the fleet has left Santiago. I think I have them here in Cien- 
 
 o 
 
 fuegos almost a certainty." In reply to this message from Schley, 
 Sampson sent him the following : 
 
 41 ST. NICHOLAS CHANNEL, May 27, 1898. 
 
 Sir: Every report, particularly confidential reports, state Span 
 ish squadron has been in Santiago de Cuba from the iQth to the 25th 
 inst, inclusive, the 25th being the date of the last report received. 
 You will please proceed with all possible dispatch to Santiago to 
 blockade that port. If, on arrival there, you receive positive infor 
 mation of the Spanish ships having left, you will follow them in 
 pursuit. Very respectfully, W. T. SAMPSON." 
 
 SCHLEY PROCEEDS TO SANTIAGO. 
 
 Schley s response to this message was that he should proceed to 
 Santiago at once, though he was embarrassed by the short coal sup 
 ply of the Texas, and her inability to coal in the open sea ; further 
 more, that he would not be able to remain off Santiago, on account 
 of the general short coal supply of the squadron. Upon learning 
 this, Admiral Sampson at once decided to go to Key West, coal, and 
 if authorized by the Department, proceed to Santiago. Colliers 
 were sent with all haste to Schley, and he was instructed to blockade 
 the Spanish squadron at all hazards. Admiral Sampson cabled to the 
 Navy Department as follows : 
 
SAMPSON TAKES COMMAND AT SANTIAGO 353 
 
 " Notwithstanding the apparent uncertainty of Schley s move 
 ments, I believe Spanish squadron is still in the port of Santiago ." 
 The same dispatch said that Sampson s orders to Schley had included 
 the sinking of a collier across the entrance to Santiago, and this was 
 the origin of the incident in which naval constructor Hobson after 
 ward played so prominent a part. Meanwhile, however, there was 
 great unrest at Washington as to what Schley was doing and what 
 he was going to be able to do at Santiago. 
 
 The dispatches that passed between Sampson and the Depart 
 ment regarding Schley s movements included one sent by Sampson 
 on the afternoon of May 29th, as follows : " The importance of abso 
 lutely preventing the escape of the Spanish squadron is so paramount, 
 that promptness and most efficient use of every means is demanded." 
 To this the Secretary of the Navy replied with the statement : 
 " Schley telegraphs from Santiago that he goes to Key West with 
 his squadron for coal, though he has 4,000 tons of coal with him in a 
 broken-down collier." Following this statement from the Secretary 
 was the following query : " How soon after arrival of Schley at Key 
 West could you reach Santiago with the New York, Oregon and the 
 Indiana, and lighters, and how long could you blockade there, send 
 ing your vessels singly to coal from our lighters at Gonaives, Hayti ? 
 Consider if you could seize Guantanamo and occupy as a coaling 
 station. Schley has not ascertained whether Spanish squadron is at 
 Santiago." 
 
 The Admiral s response to the above was : " Answering telegram 
 regarding time of reaching Santiago : three days. Can blockade in 
 definitely. Think can occupy Guantanamo. Would like to start at 
 once with New York and Oregon, arriving in two days. Do not quite 
 understand the necessity of awaiting the arrival of Schley, but would 
 propose meeting and turning back the principal part of the force 
 under his command if he has left. Try to hold him by telegraph. 
 Failure of Schley to continue blockade must be remedied at once if 
 possible. There can be no doubt of presence of Spanish squadron at 
 Santiago." 
 
 SAMPSON TAKES COMMAND AT SANTIAGO. 
 
 Meanwhile Schley sent word that he had been able to repair his 
 broken-down collier; that he would endeavor to coal the Texas and the 
 
354 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 Marblehead in the open sea and to retain his position off Santiago as 
 long as the coal lasted. To this information Sampson sent Schley a 
 message of congratulation, warning him, however, to maintain a 
 close blockade, especially at night, but Secretary Long ordered 
 Sampson to proceed at once to Santiago and take command. 
 
 In pursuance of these direct orders, therefore, the New York, 
 with Admiral Sampson on board, left Key West for Santiago, just 
 before midnight of May 29th. The next morning the Oregon, May 
 flower, and the Porter joined the flagship, and they all raced eastward 
 as fast as they could go. Up to that time no word had been received 
 from Schley as to whether he knew where the Spanish squadron 
 really was, but on the way along the northern coast of Cuba the St, 
 Paul and the Yale were encountered bound for Key West for coal. 
 Captain Sigsbee, of the St. Paul, had with him a copy of a dispatch 
 he had sent from Mole St. Nicholas, to Secretary Long, from Schley, 
 announcing the " bottling up" of the Spanish squadron, in the fol 
 lowing terms: "Enemy in port. Recognized Chtistob.il Colon, 
 Infanta Maria Teresa, and two torpedo boats moored inside Morro, 
 behind point. Doubtless others are here." 
 
 SUSPENSE APPEARED AT AN END. 
 
 The suspense of the past few days appeared to be at an end 
 after learning of this dispatch, but it was not until the early morning 
 of June ist, when Admiral Sampson reached a point off the port of 
 Santiago and found Schley and his ships still there, that all anxiety 
 was removed and the fate of the Spanish squadron was sealed beyond 
 peradventure. Sampson assumed command, by virtue of his orders 
 from Washington, and at once began the arrangements for sinking 
 the Merrimac and in other ways making it impossible for Cervera to 
 escape. 
 
 It will perhaps never be quite understood why the Spanish squad 
 ron did not get out of Santiago harbor before the Americans had 
 established their blockade. Some of the Spanish captains, who were 
 afterward captured, said it was owing to lack of coal, but others inti 
 mated that Cervera had preferred to be blockaded in the tortuous 
 harbor of Santiago rather than in Cienfuegos, and that it had not 
 occurred to them that Santiago would become so untenable by reason 
 
THE SINKING OF THE MERRIMAC 355 
 
 of land and sea bombardment. The fact that they had not escaped, 
 however, was enough for the Americans to know at that time, and 
 the next step was to "put a cork in the neck of the bottle." 
 
 THE SINKING OF THE MERRIMAC. 
 
 The original plan for sinking a vessel at the mouth of the harbor 
 of Santiago, had embodied the selection of the collier Stirling for 
 that purpose, and it was that name that had been given to Commo 
 dore Schley, when Admiral Sampson sent his instructions regarding 
 the proposition. It was the Merrimac, however, that the Admiral 
 had in mind, and the name Stirling had been used through a mistake 
 of the stenographer. Schley had found no opportunity to carry out 
 this order, and Sampson at once went to work to perfect his plan. 
 He had no idea that a sunken vessel would prove a lasting impedi 
 ment to Cervera s escape, because he was of the opinion that the 
 Spanish would be able to blow her up sufficiently to gain a path of 
 egress. His main object was to keep Cervera in Santiago until the 
 troops were landed. 
 
 On the passage from Key West to Santiago, Hobson, as assist 
 ant naval constructor, had been called into the Admiral s cabin for 
 consultation as to the proposed blowing up of the ship. He took up 
 the subject with so much intelligence and enthusiasm that Sampson 
 put him in charge of the work of preparing the Merrimac. When the 
 call was made for volunteers, on the night of June 1st, Hobson begged 
 the Admiral to let him retain charge of the ship on her adventurous 
 trip. Other men begged for the same privilege, and every man in the 
 fleet volunteered for service on board of the Merrimac, but the 
 Admiral did not wish to risk any more lives than would be absolutely 
 necessary, and Hobson was so perfectly acquainted with all the 
 details, that Sampson finally put him in charge and refused to allow 
 any other officer to go on the expedition. The Admiral seems to have 
 been almost the only man on board the New York who expected to 
 see Hobson and his crew come out of trie adventure alive. He said, 
 before the start was made, "It is a dangerous undertaking, and a 
 brave act on the part of those who are going, but it is not so easy to 
 shoot a few men on a big ship in a dark night, and, you know, the 
 Spaniards are very poor shots." 
 
356 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 The Merrimac was a steel cargo steamer of about 5,500 tons 
 burden. She was built at Newcastle-on-Tyne, for a Norwegian 
 company, but was burned at Newport News, in 1896. The hull was 
 sold to a New York firm. It was overhauled and refitted, and the 
 reconstructed vessel was sold to the Government for a collier in April, 
 1898. In fitting her up for the purpose of sinking her, a line was run 
 along the portside of the ship, parallel to the water line. Along this 
 line were suspended, in 8-inch copper cases, ten charges of ordinary 
 brown prismatic powder, each charge weighing about 80 pounds ; 
 over this an ordinary igniting charge of brown powder was placed, 
 and the whole was covered with pitch for protection against water, 
 with a primer and a wire for exploding the charges. The first plan 
 contemplated the simultaneous explosion of all the charges. It was 
 found, however, that the battery on hand was not sufficient to explode 
 with certainty more than six of the charges, so only six were con 
 nected. The ship s anchors were lashed over the rail, ready for 
 instant dropping. The cargo ports, two on each side, were opened to 
 aid in the submerging of the vessel. 
 
 PREPARATIONS. 
 
 Below, in the engine room, the nuts holding the bonnets of the 
 main injection valve, and the sea-suction valve of the big fire pump, 
 were slackened off ready for instant removal, and wooden props were 
 wedged in on top of the bonnets, so that after the nuts had been 
 taken off, one blow with a sledge would knock out the prop, allow 
 the bonnet to fly off and admit the sea. All these preparations were 
 made with the greatest haste, as it was decided to send the ship in 
 before daybreak on the morning of the 2d. One of the ships life- 
 rafts was to be towed from a line amidships on the starboard side. 
 
 Hobson, of course, was to be in charge ; Deignan was stationed 
 at the wheel ; Boatswain Murphy was to cut the lashings of the star 
 board bower anchor ; and Montague was to similarly cut the lashings 
 of the quarter anchor ; Charette was to explode the charges on signal. 
 At the first signal, Phillips was to knock out the props, Kelly was to 
 cut the small sea pipes and then run on deck to haul in the liferaft. 
 At the second signal, Phillips was to stop the engine, then run on 
 deck and jump over the starboard side. The strong floodtide was 
 
THE FAREWELL OF HOB SON AND HIS MEN 357 
 
 relied on to head the ship properly and to assist in sinking her. It 
 was the intention of Hobson to remain on the bridge until he felt the 
 ship settle. He expected that a mine would be exploded under the 
 ship by the enemy, thus materially aiding his own plan. 
 
 THE FAREWELL OF HOBSON AND HIS MEN. 
 
 Finally all preparations were completed. By this time it was 
 broad daylight, but the Merrimac s crew had said " good-bye " to the 
 rest of the fleet and she was already headed in toward her fate. 
 Suddenly came an order to return, from the flagship. Some slight 
 changes in the original plan were made. Hobson decided also that 
 it would be safer to explpde each powder charge separately. It was 
 also decided to follow the Merrimac in with a steam launch. These 
 details having been arranged, Hobson at 7 P.M., June 2d, went below 
 on the flagship, to get a little rest, and the men who were going with 
 him also took what rest they could get. At 1.30 A.M., Hobson and 
 his men were all on board the Merrimac, Cadet Powell was prepared to 
 follow with a steam launch, and the expedition finally got under way. 
 
 The moon was partly obscured by clouds and those on the other 
 vessels of the fleet could not see the movements of the Merrimac 
 after she neared the entrance to the harbor. At 3.15 A.M., June 3d, 
 a shot was fired, which evidently came from one of the guns of the 
 Socapo battery on the hill to the westward of the harbor mouth. 
 The shot was seen to splash seaward from the Merrimac having 
 passed over her. Firing became very general soon after that, being 
 especially fierce and rapid from inside the harbor on the west. For 
 fifteen minutes a perfect fusillade was kept up, and the whole fleet 
 knew that the Merrimac was having a hot time of it. Then the fire 
 slackened, and by 3.30 A.M., had almost ceased. A close watch was 
 kept on the mouth of the harbor in order to pick up the steam launch, 
 which was confidently expected to return with definite news, if not 
 with Hobson and the men who had accompanied him. 
 
 Cadet Powell brought the launch alongside the Texas and 
 reported that u no one had come out of the entrance of the harbor. 
 His words sounded like the death-knell of all who had gone in on the 
 Merrimac. It seemed impossible that any of them could have lived 
 through the awful fire that had been directed at the vessel. The 
 
353 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 launch had followed behind the ship at a distance of about 400 
 yards. The collier was in plain view of Cadet Powell until she 
 rounded the bend of the channel, and until the helm had been 
 put to port to swing her into position across the channel. Powell 
 heard or saw and counted seven explosions, which were undoubtedly 
 those of the powder charges under the collier. He remained in the 
 entrance as long as he deemed it safe to do so. No wreckage or 
 bodies floated out, but everything had evidently been swept inside by 
 the strong floodtide, and those who made up the launch party were 
 convinced that Hobson and his men were dead. 
 
 THE MERRIMAC S MEN PRISONERS. 
 
 Much to the surprise of every one, therefore, a tug, flying a flag 
 of truce, came out of the mouth of the harbor in the afternoon and 
 made for the American fleet. The Vixen, flying a tablecloth at the 
 fore, went to meet the tug. A Spanish officer went aboard the Vixen 
 from the tug, and was taken aboard the flagship. He announced to 
 Admiral Sampson that the collier s crew were prisoners of war. Two 
 had been slightly wounded, but the others were all well. The Span 
 ish officer also said that the prisoners were confined in Morro Castle. 
 He said further that Admiral Cervera considered the attempt to run 
 in and sink the Merrimac across the channel an act of such bravery 
 and desperate daring that he thought it only proper that the Ameri 
 can Admiral should be notified of the safety of those who went on 
 such a perilous expedition. 
 
 So far as blocking the channel was concerned the attempt was 
 not distinctly successful. The firing from the shore batteries did so 
 much damage to he collier that the original plan could not be closely 
 ^followed. Hobson maintained his place on the bridge, and the crew 
 was distributed as planned, but the crushing of shells through the 
 side of the vessel caused her to begin to sink before the details that 
 had been agreed upon could be carried out. When the vessel began 
 to settle, Hobson exploded some of his powder charges and ordered 
 the men in the engine room to come on deck. 
 
 A perfect shower of shot came from the forts on shore, and it 
 seemed as if the men would surely all be killed. Hobson ordered the 
 men to lie on the deck. The water came up until only their heads 
 
LOCKED UP IN MORRO CASTLE 359 
 
 were above water, but they remained there until it was apparent that 
 the vessel was going down as she lay, and that they had better try to 
 save their lives. They all managed to get on board the raft and cast 
 loose from the sinking ship. They saw her settle until only the 
 upper half of her masts were above the water, and while they were 
 watching these, and wondering whether they had accomplished their 
 object or not, a Spanish craft, on board of which was Admiral Cervera 
 himself, came alongside and took them off. The Spanish Admiral 
 took Hobson by the hand and complimented him and his men upon 
 their bravery, promising them to send the message to Admiral Samp 
 son, which gave the fleet its knowledge of the safety of the crew. 
 
 LOCKED UP IN MORRO CASTLE. 
 
 The prisoners were taken on shore at once and promptly con 
 ducted up the hill to Morro Castle. There they were confined for 
 several days They were kept in separate cells and were not 
 allowed to communicate with each other. It was reported to the 
 fleet that the quarters of the prisoners were in an exposed portion of 
 the Castle, so that they would be directly in the line of fire if any 
 bombardment was attempted Hobson afterwards said, however, 
 that this was not the fact, though from his place of confinement on 
 the further side of the Castle he could hear the sound of the striking 
 of the missiles that were fired in the bombardment that did follow, 
 and could see the shells that soared over the castle and fell into the 
 fields beyond. The British Consul, however, protested against the 
 prisoners being kept at Morro, and they were thereupon removed 
 to the hospital nearer the City of Santiago, where they were kept 
 imprisoned until an exchange was agreed upon. 
 
 The Spaniards succeeded in blowing the Merrimac partially to 
 pieces, so that she really formed no obstruction in the way of ingress 
 or egress to the harbor. When this had been done, the officers of the 
 American fleet were convinced that Cervera intended to make a dash 
 for the freedom of the seas. Everybody, therefore, was upon a con 
 stant lookout. There was no time of the day or night that the eyes 
 of the Americans were not fixed upon " the neck of that bottle ;" but 
 a whole month passed by after the daring exploit of Hobson and his 
 men before the happening of the expected. Meanwhile a bombard- 
 
360 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 ment of the city of Santiago had been undertaken by throwing shells 
 over the hills by which the harbor was enclosed, and the Morro and 
 other batteries were persistently hammered at whenever the fleet 
 seemed in need of target practice. 
 
 THE DAWN OF JULY 31.). 
 
 Sunday, July 3d, the fifth Sunday spent by the American vessels 
 before Santiago, and the ninth recurrence of that sacred day since the 
 victory of Dewey at Manila, broke with no particularly different 
 situation from that which had marked preceeding Sundays. The 
 monotony, the heat of the tropical sun. the wonder why something 
 was not being done beside waiting, all these were there, and no one 
 outside the harbor had reason to believe that anything unusual was 
 about to occur. 
 
 The American fleet swung lazily at a distance of from four to 
 five miles from the harbor entrance. The line which was at all times 
 supposed to be in a half circle, inclosing the harbor entrance as 
 a central point, was more than ordinarily broken up this awfully hot 
 morning. The big battleships had drifted to the east considerably, 
 and the Massachusetts, the New York, the New Orleans and the 
 Newark, were not in sight. The New York had taken Admiral 
 Sampson down to Altares, eight miles east from the blockade, to 
 make a visit to the camp of the American army, while the other 
 missing vessels were. at Guantanamo forty miles to the east. 
 
 The vessels on the blockade were the Iowa, Indiana, and Oregon, 
 battleships ; the flagship of Commodore Schley, the Brooklyn, and 
 the small yachts Gloucester and Vixen. The Iowa was swinging a 
 mile further out than the rest of the squadron, trying to arrange mat 
 ters in her forward 1 2-inch turret, which was a little out of repair, 
 while the Indiana was doing the same with her forward 1 3-inch turret. 
 The absolutely available ships in the squadron, therefore, were only 
 the Oregon, Texas, and Brooklyn, although the Iowa and the Indiana 
 were not long in coming forward and getting a share in the fight. 
 
 It is a custom on naval vessels that there shall be a general mus 
 ter, at least once every three months, and that the articles of war 
 shall then be read. First call for this purpose had been sounded on 
 board the Brooklyn at 9.15 A.M., and the men were assembling on the 
 
THE DASH FOR LIBERTY 361 
 
 decks. The lookout in the masthead had some time before reported 
 smoke in the harbor, but, as the same thing had been noticed several 
 times, no special attention was paid to it. Presently the lookout 
 fairly yelled, " There is a big ship coining out of the harbor, sir." 
 Navigator Hodgson, who was on the forward bridge at the time, 
 looked toward the harbor s mouth, and then, grasping the megaphone : 
 " After bridge there, tell the Commodore, the enemy s fleet is coming 
 out." 
 
 Commodore Schley was sitting under the awning on the quarter 
 deck. Going to the bridge, he said : " Raise the signal to the fleet", 
 and, turning to Captain Cook, who stood by his side, he added, 
 "Clear ship for action." Then the Commodore, who was to have 
 charge of this important engagement in the temporary absence of 
 the Commander of the fleet, went forward, and took his place on a 
 little platform of wood running on the outside of the conning tower, 
 which had been built expressly for his point of lookout in the event 
 of the Brooklyn s getting into a battle. He was dressed in blue 
 trousers, a black alpaca jacket, and the regulation cap without the 
 commodore s broad band of gold braid. 
 
 THE DASH FOR LIBERTY. 
 
 The Brooklyn and the Vixen were the only vessels to the west of 
 the entrance, the others having all drifted well to the east. Schley, 
 therefore, had the first good view of the oncoming vessel, which 
 proved to be the Infanta Maria Teresa. The Oregon was the first to 
 fire. She opened with her 1 3-inch shells, and the Texas followed 
 suit. Even the Indiana and the Iowa, coming up as rapidly as possi 
 ble from their greater distance, began to fire, though the range was 
 so long that their first shots were not particularly effective. 
 
 Still the Brooklyn waited, but clown below the coal was being 
 forced into the furnace, every boiler was being worked, and every gun 
 made ready to fire. Schley wanted to know which way the vessels 
 of the enemy were all going; whether they would follow in a line to 
 the westward, or whether they would scatter. Lieutenant Sears, who 
 had been sharing the Commodore s watchfulness, remarked, " They 
 all seem to be coming west, sir." Schley nodded, and gave the order, 
 "Full speed, ahead ; open fire, and don t waste a shot." In an instant 
 
362 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 the Brooklyn s terrific 8- and 5 -inch batteries on her port side opened, 
 and the cruiser headed for a point in front of the first escaping ship, 
 firing at and receiving the fire from two of them. 
 
 The Maria Teresa came on directly toward the Brooklyn with 
 the evident intention of ramming her. " Hard aport your helm !" 
 shouted Schlcy, and his vessel began to turn. She turned so quickly 
 that in a minute her big steel ram was pointing at the oncoming 
 enemy ; and the Maria J^eresa had to work inshore to avoid the same 
 fate which she had planned to inflict upon the Commodore s flagship. 
 But the shells of the Texas and Oregon, with a terrible shower of 
 shot from the Brooklyn, had done their work. The smoke began to 
 appear pouring from the decks of the enemy s advance guard, and 
 everybody knew that the Maria Teresa was on fire. 
 
 THE GLOUCESTER S" PLUCKY FIGHT. 
 
 In the meantime, the converted yacht Gloucester could be seen 
 pluckily engaged with two torpedo boat destroyers that had followed 
 the last ship out, and "Dick" Wainwright won undying fame by 
 sinking them. At 10 o clock the entire Spanish squadron was out 
 side the harbor, and going rapidly westward. The Iowa and the 
 Indiana could not quite keep the pace, but they did excellent execu 
 tion while they had the range. The Oregon, however, came across 
 to the assistance of the Brooklyn, which was now engaging the Chris- 
 tobal Colon and the Viscaya. At 10. 10 the Spanish ships seemed all 
 to be concentrating their shots on the Brooklyn. She was in a per 
 fect rain of shells, though most of them went over her. 
 
 , Standing in this hail of shells, Schley asked Yeoman Ellis, who 
 was near at hand with a stadimeter : "What is the distance to the 
 Viscaya f " The man took the observation. " Twenty-two hundred 
 yards, sir," he said. There was a whistle, followed by a splash, and 
 his head was literally torn from his shoulders by an 8-inch shell. 
 
 The Maria Teresa ran her nose on the beach, and in an instant 
 was a mass of flames. The fire of the Brooklyn, the Oregon, and the 
 Indiana was then concentrated on the Almirante Oquendo, and in ten 
 minutes she, too, was sent ashore a burning wreck just a short dis 
 tance from Santiago. The Iowa, in the meantime, had sunk one 
 torpedo boat destroyer, and the other one had been driven ashore by 
 
A LIVELY CHASE 363 
 
 the Gloucester s terrific rapid fire. The Iowa and Texas also poured 
 hot shot into the Oquendo at a distance of 1,100 yards. Many 12- 
 and 8-inch shells were seen to explode inside of her, and smoke came 
 out through her hatches. 
 
 Next the Viscaya slowly drew abeam of the Iowa, and for the space 
 of fifteen minutes it was give and take between these two ships. 
 The Viscaya fired rapidly but wildly, not one shot taking effect on the 
 Iowa, while the shells from the latter tore great rents in the sides of 
 the Spaniard. The Viscaya finally drew ahead of the Iowa, but then 
 she came under the murderous fire of the Oregon and Te.\as. A 
 moment later and she was raked fore and aft, clean along her gun- 
 deck, by an 8- inch shell from the Brooklyn. Another moment and a 
 shell exploded in her superstructure with terrific force, killing eighty 
 people; then she headed for the beach at Acerraderos, and was out of 
 the running. 
 
 A LIVELY CHASE. 
 
 The Christobal Colon seemed to be the greyhound of the Spanish 
 fleet. Only the Brooklyn and Oregon were able to keep near her. 
 At 1 1 o clock the other vessels were from six to eight miles behind. 
 Firing was suspended and all interest centred in the chase. The 
 men came up on deck and began to cheer. They cheered for Schley 
 and for Captain Clark, of the Oregon, and the Oregon s men returned 
 the chee-r. Up to the masthead of the Oregon went a pennant. 
 14 Remember the Maine," read the signal officer. " Tell them we 
 have," said Schley, and there was a roar, as the answer went up, that 
 might have been heard almost in Santiago. 
 
 The Colon, at a distance of five miles, hugged the shore, but 
 Schley ordered the Oregon to follow her, and then, with the Brooklyn, 
 he made a straight course for Cape Cruz, around which the Colon 
 would have to steer on a long detour if she hoped to get away. 
 The three vessels pumped along at great speed. In an hour the 
 pursuers had made a considerable gain on their victim. Captain 
 Clark, of the Oregon, signalled : u A strange ship, looking like an 
 Italian, in the distance." He alluded to the fact that the Colon 
 was bought from Italy. Schley, sitting on the edge of the forward 
 8-inch turret, swinging his legs and happy, said : " Tell the Oregon 
 she can try one of those 1 3-inch railroad trains on her." 
 
364 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 There was a terrible roar as the big shell went by the Brooklyn, 
 a moment of suspense and watching, and then a hearty cheer as the 
 missile struck the water close astern of the Colon, four miles away. 
 Another was tried. That reached the mark, and there were more 
 cheers. Then the Brooklyn opened her forward and starboard 8-inch 
 guns, and one shell was seen to go through the Colon at the top of 
 her armor belt. At 1.15 P.M. the Colon turned toward the shore and 
 gave up the fight. As she hauled down her flag the sailors on the 
 Brooklyn and the Oregon began a cheer that lasted for fully five 
 minutes. 
 
 THE SPANISH ADMIRAL S SURRENDER. 
 
 A boat was lowered from the Brooklyn, and Captain Cook went 
 aboard to receive the surrender. The Spanish Rear Admiral, with 
 tears in his eyes, said : " I surrender unconditionally to Commodore 
 Schley. We were badly hurt and could not get away." While 
 Captain Cook was returning to the Brooklyn, the New York, with 
 Admiral Sampson on board, came along, ran in between the Brooklyn 
 and the prize, and ordered Captain Cook to send the prisoners on 
 board the New York. Commodore Schley, seeing this, megaphoned 
 over : " I request the honor of receiving the surrender of the officers 
 of the Christobal Colon! No answer was vouchsafed him from the 
 New York. Commodore Schley then raised the pennant : " A glori 
 ous victory has been won ; details later." The answer from the 
 New York was : Report your casualties." 
 
 Meanwhile the Iowa headed for the wreck of the Viscaya,vf hich was 
 burning furiously fore and aft. When the big battleship had approached 
 as near as the depth of the water would permit, Captain Evans low 
 ered all his boats and sent them to the assistance of the unfortunate 
 men who were being drowned by dozens or roasted on the decks. It 
 was soon discovered that insurgent Cubans on the shore were shoot 
 ing at men who were struggling in the water after having surrendered 
 to the Americans. Evans immediately put a stop to this, but he 
 could not put a stop to the mutilation of many bodies by the sharks 
 inside the reef. All the Spaniards were practically without clothes. 
 Some of them had their legs torn off by fragments of shells. Others, 
 who had been in the water, were mutilated in every conceivable way. 
 
PRAYER ON BOARD THE "TEX AS" 365 
 
 Admiral Cervera surrendered to Commander Wainwright, of the 
 Gloucester, who had been a deck officer on board the ill-fated Maine, 
 and who thus by the irony of fate had an opportutnity to " Remem 
 ber the Maine/ indeed. The crews of the Maria Teresa and of the 
 Almirante Oquendo were taken on board the auxiliary cruiser Har 
 vard, which vessel had nearly 1,000 prisoners on board by midnight. 
 
 The annals of naval history record no more complete destruction 
 of an enemy s fleet than this. Nor had there ever been a more nota 
 ble act of implicit obedience to a superior power under such awfully 
 adverse circumstances as those which confronted the Spanish Admiral 
 in this connection. It was subsequently learned that Cervera received 
 direct orders from Madrid to make the sortie, and that he had no 
 thought of escaping, except by a mere chance. This heroic feature 
 of the enemy s position was prominent in the minds of his conquerors, 
 and the Admiral and his men were treated with every consideration, 
 so much so that Cervera, during his detention in the United States 
 as a prisoner of war, never ceased to speak of it. 
 
 PRAYER ON BOARD THE " TEXAS." 
 
 The scenes and incidents of this great naval conflict would fill 
 
 & 
 
 the pages of many books, but some there are which were particularly 
 striking. Notable among these was the assembling of his crew upon 
 the quarter-deck, by Captain Philip, of the Texas, immediately after 
 the consummation of the victory, and his public acknowledgement, 
 then and there, of his belief in Almighty God, by the offering of a 
 prayer of thanksgiving for the success that had attended the efforts 
 of the American ships. 
 
 " Fighting Bob" Evans, the Commander of the Iowa, when some 
 one referred in his presence to Captain Philip s action in this regard, 
 and asked him why he had not followed the example, said : " I found 
 my ship surrounded by boats carrying dying and wounded prisoners. 
 To leave these men to suffer for want of food and clothing while I 
 called my men aft to offer prayer was not my idea either of Christianity 
 or religion. I preferred to clothe the naked, feed the hungry, and suc 
 cor the sick, and I am strongly of the opinion that Almighty God has 
 not put a black mark against me on account of it, for every drop of 
 
 zu 
 
366 THE CAMPAIGN IN CUBA 
 
 blood in my body on that afternoon of July 3d was singing thanks 
 and praise to Him for the victory we had won." 
 
 The official announcement of the destruction of the Spanish 
 fleet was cabled to Washington as follows : 
 
 " SIBONEY, July 4th, 3 A.M. 
 " To the Secretary of the Navy : 
 
 The fleet under my command offers the Nation as a 4th of 
 July present the destruction of the whole of Cervera s fleet. Not 
 one escaped. Their attempt to escape was made at 9.30 A.M. yester 
 day, and at 2 P.M. the last, the Christobal Colon, ran ashore 60 miles 
 west of Santiago, and let down her colors. 
 
 " The Infmta Maria Teresa, Oquendo and Viscaya were forced 
 ashore, burned and blown up within 20 miles of Santiago. The 
 Furor and Pluton were destroyed within four miles of the port. 
 
 " Enemy s loss probably several hundred from gun fire, explo 
 sions and drowning. About 1,300 prisoners, including Admiral 
 Cervera. Our loss, one killed and two wounded. The man killed 
 was George H. Ellis, chief yeoman of the Brooklyn. 
 
 SAMPSON." 
 
 The Spanish prisoners were transferred at once to Portsmouth, 
 N. H., and from there Admiral Cervera was taken to Annapolis, Md., 
 where he remained until his release. The Maria Teresa was subse 
 quently raised under the supervision of Naval Constructor Hobson, 
 but was lost on her way to Hampton Roads. The other Spanish 
 vessels were left upon the beach where they had been driven by the 
 fierce onslaught of the American gunners. Most of the victorious 
 American vessels returned to American ports soon after their notable 
 achievement ; others remained at Santiago to aid the army in the final 
 capture of that city. This great victory, however, is conceded to have 
 practically ended the war, for there was no longer any hope that the 
 beleaguered city could withstand the operations that were being made 
 against it. 
 
CHAPTER XX 
 The Invasion of Cuba by the Army 
 
 General Shatter Starts from Tampa with Transports. The Shutting up of the Spanish 
 Fleet Changes the Campaign from Havana to Santiago. The Landing of Troops 
 at Baiquiri. The Brilliant Charge of the "Rough Riders" under Colonel Wood 
 and "Teddy" Roosevelt. Marvelous Bravery at El Caney and San Juan Hill. 
 The Small American Force though Handicapped on all Sides Wins Victory from 
 the Better Armed and Better Protected Spaniards by Sheer Bravery, and the Mad 
 Rush of their Battle. Terrible and Costly Hours of Waiting. Shatter 111 in the 
 Rear, Generals Wheeler, Lawton, Chaffee, Colonels Wood and "Teddy" 
 Roosevelt Lead the Men to a Marvelous Victory. 
 
 THE troops that had been mobilizing at the different camps were 
 more than longing for a chance to join in an attack upon 
 Havana, and when the orders for a forward movement were 
 given, many who were not in the secrets of the campaign thought 
 they were bound for the Cuban capital. Word had come to the 
 President, however, and to the Departments in Washington, that the 
 situation in the harbor at Santiago demanded immediate operations 
 on shore. The fleet was maintaining a perfect blockade, but could 
 not coax the rat from its hole. To get behind the enemy, therefore, 
 and to grind him, if possible, between the upper and the lower mill 
 stones was an absolute necessity. The original plan, which had 
 Havana for the objective point, was therefore changed, and the eyes 
 of the leaders of the military expeditions to Cuba were turned towards 
 Santiago. 
 
 It was on June 13, 1898, that troops began to leave Tampa and 
 Key West to play their part in the operations against Santiago. 
 Seven days later all the transports bearing them arrived off the har 
 bor. The start from Florida had been much delayed. There was 
 ground for the criticism that everything had not been well planned, 
 but the plans, such as they were, were pushed forward as rapidly as 
 possible under the circumstances, and the fleet, when it finally loomed 
 
 367 
 
368 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 in the offing opposite the neck of the bottle in which Cervera s fleet 
 was held in bondage, presented quite a formidable spectacle. 
 
 The transports rolled about in that vicinity for the next thirty- 
 six or forty hours, but on the second day, the 23d, General Shafter 
 landed his army of 16,000 soldiers at Daiquiri, a few miles east of the 
 Castle of Morro. This landing was accomplished with a loss of only 
 two men, and these met their fate by drowning. Before the coming 
 of the troops the Spanish had evacuated the village of Baiquiri, 
 which is just a little back from the landing. They set fire to the 
 town, destroyed the powder magazines, and utterly demolished a rail 
 road roundhouse in which were several locomotives. 
 
 LANDING THE TROOPS FOR BATTLE. 
 
 Admiral Sampson had escorted the transports with men-of-war, 
 and when the soldier-bearing vessels approached the landing places 
 the warships shelled the vicinity and opened fire also upon the forts to 
 the east and west for a distance of several miles so that the attention 
 of the enemy was perfectly distracted, and the soldiers landed 
 unmolested. 
 
 To have made this landing on the imperfect wharves and from 
 the beach boats which were best available would have been terribly 
 disastrous if the enemy had been actively opposed, but under the 
 circumstances it was only the crowded condition of the transports, 
 and the awkward arrangements that were made, that caused it to 
 be at all disagreeable to these men who had long been eager to gain 
 a foothold upon Cuban soil. 
 
 Colonel Huntington s marines, who had already landed at Guan- 
 tanamo and had established Camp McCalla at the sacrifice of several 
 lives, had expected that the army of Shafter would land where they 
 did. The facilities at that point, however, were far from being good. 
 The marines themselves had found it hard to reach the shore, and it 
 would have been practically impossible for the regulars and artillery 
 to have disembarked at that point. Shafter had thought of making 
 the landing at Acerraderos. The Government map shows a "road run 
 ning from this point to the city of Santiago, but the engineers found 
 that this so-called road was simply a mule path over which it would 
 be killing work to attempt to transport artillery. 
 
THEODORE ROOSEVELT. MAJOR-GENERAL ELWELL S. OTIS. 
 
 POPULAR HEROES OF THE SPAN ISH -AM ERICAN WAR 
 
LANDING THE TROOPS FOR BATTLE 37 i 
 
 For this and other reasons Daiquiri was selected as the place for 
 disembarkation. Back of the town, already referred to as having 
 been burned by the Spaniards upon the approach of the transports, 
 there is a high plateau extending along the coast almost to Santiago. 
 Behind this plateau a coral road runs for some distance, occupying a 
 good strategic position for part of the way. Moreover, there is a 
 famous iron pier at Baiquiri, built by American capital for the sake 
 of facilitating the loading of ore brought down from the Cuban mines 
 which were being worked by a Chicago corporation. This pier was 
 particularly well built for the purpose for which it was designed, but 
 as its height above the water was about 15 feet it was really not 
 satisfactorily available for the landing of troops. Its shore approaches, 
 however, were advantageous in this connection, and it is probable, 
 therefore, that Baiquiri presented as good advantages for the disem 
 barkation as could have been found at any other place along the coast. 
 
 The fleet of transports consisted of about 40 vessels. The con 
 voy was made up of 16 warships of different rates. The expedition 
 comprised 14,564 enlisted men, and 773 officers. The great majority 
 of the the troops were regulars. The only volunteer organizations 
 were the Seventy-first New York, Second Massachusetts, and two 
 dismounted squadrons of four troops each from the First Volunteer 
 Cavalry, with Colonel Leonard Wood in command and Theodore 
 Roosevelt as Lieutenant-Colonel. There were also two dismounted 
 squadrons of four troops each from the First, Third, Sixth, Ninth and 
 Tenth regular cavalry, making a total of 2,875 enlisted men of dis 
 mounted cavalry and 159 officers. 
 
 Of artillery, there were light batteries E and K of the First 
 Artillery, A and F of the Second, and G and H of the Fourth ; a 
 total of 1 8 officers and 445 enlisted men from this branch of the 
 service. There were also 200 enlisted men and 9 officers of engineers, 
 and one detachment from the Signal Corps, comprising 45 enlisted 
 men and two officers. 
 
 The regiments of regular infantry were the First, Second, Third, 
 Sixth, Seventh, Eighth, Ninth, Tenth, Twelfth, Thirteenth, Sixteenth, 
 Seventeenth, Twentieth, Twenty-first, Twenty-second, Twenty-fourth, 
 and Twenty-fifth, making, with the volunteers, a total of 561 officers 
 and 10,709 enlisted men. 
 
372 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 When the army began to disembark there was a great deal of 
 undue haste on the part of different commands to be the first to get 
 on shore. Life on board the troopships had not been pleasant. 
 They had all been fearfully crowded. Everybody suffered greatly. 
 The thermometer had been close to a hundred down in the holds of 
 the vessels where the troops were packed in like sardines at night. 
 On one transport alone, the Cherokee, five regulars, inured though 
 they were to all kinds of hardships, fainted away, while one or more 
 cases of prostration had been reported from nearly every other 
 transport. 
 
 THE SCENE AT THE LANDING. 
 
 A thousand men could have prevented ten times that number 
 from landing at Daiquiri, but the Spaniards apparently had their 
 hands full at other points. Still, a few warships could have made the 
 position very hot for any one who undertook to prevent the landing. 
 The woods and the hillsides for miles around Daiquiri were shelled 
 by the vessels of Sampson s fleet, and the Spaniards practically kept 
 out of the way. From their point of observation, the fleet of trans 
 ports with the convoy of battleships, must have presented a decidedly 
 formidable appearance, and when the soldiers began to swarm in the 
 rigging and over the sides, cheering wildly, the bands playing national 
 airs, interspersed with popular songs, the men joining in the choruses, 
 the warships banging away at the beach, smoke enough hanging over 
 the water to suggest war indeed, the scene so impressed the Spaniards 
 who saw it, that they apparently stood not upon the order of their 
 going but went at once. 
 
 Throughout the day smoke rose up from the buildings which the 
 retreating Spaniards had fired in the town, and made a sort of a 
 screen between the transports and the lower foothills. The higher 
 ground, however, was plainly in sight from the vessels, and detach 
 ments of Spanish horse and foot, scurrying along upward and away 
 from this scene of impressively active operations, could be seen to 
 halt and look back as if taking in the full import of the picture. 
 
 Outside, stretching to the offing, were the transports, ranging 
 from the huge coastwise steamer built on the models of Atlantic 
 liners to side-wheelers and nondescript vessels half-way, apparently, 
 
THE SCENE AT THE LANDING 373 
 
 between the ark and a tugboat. All were moving constantly to 
 overcome the drift of the current. Among them, and spread out on 
 either side toward the shore, were the convoys, whose keen-eyed 
 lookouts constantly scanned the beach and the hills beyond, and 
 which occasionally sent a shot whizzing through the air. 
 
 Small boats were everywhere. They came and went singly, in 
 pairs, and in long strings. They were rowed, towed and allowed to 
 drift. They clung to the ships, lined the landing wharf, and filled all 
 space between. The soldiers, scrambling over the sides of the vessels 
 as best they might, packed themselves away in these boats, and it 
 was in connection with this haste and recklessness that the only 
 fatalities occurred. Each man carried his gun and field accoutre 
 ments, and his blankets were slung in a roll over his shoulder. 
 
 It usually happened that men from several different commands 
 would find themselves in the same small boat, but when they landed 
 at a low wharf inside the iron pier, straggling up to a level bit of 
 sand beyond it, or if they had stepped overboard in shallow water and 
 waded ashore, they managed to fall into their own companies without 
 much delay, and, marching off, were almost immediately out of sight 
 in the tangle of tropical underbrush. Of the thousands that landed 
 not more than two or three hundred were in sight at any one time 
 during the three days in which the disembarkation was going on. 
 
 Some of the men were packed in the small boats for four hours 
 between the time they came over the side of the transport and the 
 time when it was their turn at the wharves. This is the reason why 
 so many became restless, and why hundreds of the impatient soldiers 
 left the small boats and waded, sometimes up to their waists, though 
 even this did not cool their desire to be on terra firma. 
 
 Those transports which had stock on board drew up along the 
 dock of the coal company. One of the side-wheelers got jammed 
 against the wharf in such a position that in self-defence it had to dis 
 charge its cargo of 100 mules into thirty feet of water, and these 
 poor beasts, apparently as eager as the soldiers to get ashore, swam 
 gamely to the beach, fully forty yards away. 
 
 During the first day of the disembarkation the volunteers all got 
 ashore and a great part of the regulars. This day extended far into 
 the night, and the next day began where its predecessor had finished. 
 
374 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 The searchlights from the men-of-war turned night into day, and 
 quite as good progress was made at midnight as at noon. The Engi 
 neer and Signal Corps were among the first to land. The artillery, 
 including the siege guns, were among the last. The cavalry had 
 things pretty much their own way, for Roosevelt had set their pace 
 at Tampa by practically pre-empting a vessel to which some other 
 command had been assigned, and here at Daiquiri, Colonel Wood 
 having left the details of the disembarkation to him, it turned 
 out the Rough Riders were on shore among the first, and the other 
 cavalry were not far behind. There was a great deal of pulling and 
 hauling, and it looked for a time as if it would take a week to get 
 everybody landed. General Shafter and Admiral Sampson came 
 ashore in the same boat, and were loudly cheered by those who had 
 preceded them. 
 
 General Joe Wheeler, in command of the cavalry division, 
 promptly pushed forward to Siboney. General Young and Colonels 
 Wood and Roosevelt were with him. These knew that the first work 
 to be done in the way of facing the enemy would probably fall upon 
 them. Shafter established temporary headquarters at Playa del Este, 
 and the great bulk of the infantry bore off toward Jaragua, the 
 artillery being instructed to come on as rapidly as possible. The 
 Rough Riders, making a forced march, found themselves, the first 
 night after their landing, in a position which gave them a surety of 
 being in the very van of those who were to have this early oppor 
 tunity to show the stuff they were made of. 
 
 THE ENEMY PREPARES FOR BATTLE. 
 
 On the afternoon of June 23, 1898, while the artillery and 
 infantry were still moving toward Jaragua, word came to General 
 Wheeler, through a Cuban officer, that the enemy had gathered in 
 considerable numbers at Guasimas, and that they were blocking the 
 way to Santiago in that direction. There is no town at Guasimas, 
 not even so much as a village. It is merely the junction of two trails 
 that meet at the point of a V, one coming from Siboney and the 
 other from Daiquiri, and both proceeding as one toward Santiago. 
 That same afternoon General Wheeler took with him a handful 
 of Cubans and reconnoitered this trail. That night he sat around a 
 
THE ENEMY PREPARES FOR BATTLE 375 
 
 camp fire with General Young, Colonel Wood, and Lieutenant-Colonel 
 Roosevelt, and, after discussing the situation thoroughly, it was 
 decided to attack the enemy on the following morning. 
 
 Little sleeping was done that night. The news soon flew 
 through the cavalry quarters that there was to be "business" the 
 next day. Moreover, stores and ammunition were still being landed 
 on the coast only three or four miles away, and the searchlights on 
 the vessels in the harbor were throwing their great arms of light 
 athwart the sky in every direction, so that the whole place was almost 
 as light as day. In this night light, and in the midst of this wakeful- 
 ness, the men did their best to dry their uniforms, and considerable 
 time was spent in cooking coffee and bacon. 
 
 At 5 o clock in the morning, the men having had not more than 
 two or three hours sleep at the best, the forward movement began. 
 General Young started first toward Guasimas with the First and 
 Tenth (dismounted) Cavalry, taking the eastern trail. The Rough 
 Riders climbed the steep hill above Siboney and struck in on the 
 western trail. There was about half a mile between the Rough 
 Riders and General Young s command. Within less than half an 
 hour after the men left Siboney, Colonel Wood took the very precau 
 tions which the earliest reports said had been neglected. He sent 
 Captain Capron forward with his troop as an advance guard. There 
 were Cuban scouts in front of these and flankers on the right and 
 left. 
 
 At about 6 o clock Colonel Wood ordered a halt. Several of 
 the officers were mounted. They had been moving slowly to give 
 the men a chance to keep up. Every few moments a pause had been 
 made for the purpose of resting, so when this halt order came the 
 men thought it one of the ordinary stops that had been allowed them 
 during the hard march. But those who were in sight of the leaders 
 had noticed a Cuban scout dropping back and whispering softly in 
 the ear of Colonel Wood. A dozen men were sent back with the 
 scout, but there was otherwise no evidence of the seriousness of the 
 situation. The country was covered with high grass and chaparral. 
 Thousands of Spaniards might have been hidden without betraying 
 their whereabouts, and in it, as a matter of fact, thousands were con 
 cealed and ready to do much damage. 
 
376 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 It was fully ten minutes before Colonel Wood gave the signal 
 for the entire command to advance. Colonel Roosevelt took a third 
 of the regiment into the forest on the right. Firing was begun by 
 the hidden foe, so our men quickened their pace, and were preparing 
 for a rush toward a point from which firing could be distinctly heard, 
 when one of the men who had been sent with the Cuban scouts a few 
 moments before met them. He had been wounded. His face was 
 covered with blood. He was sobbing like a child. 
 
 "I am not hurt," he said, in an apologetic tone, "but I am a 
 fool. I set off one of my own cartridges while I was loading. My 
 face and eyes are full of powder and I can t fight." Then he sat 
 down on the grass, and the others went on, leaving him alone there 
 sobbing and swearing alternately. 
 
 THE FOE IN AMBUSH. 
 
 In the meantime the enemy was pouring a telling fire into the 
 men. General Young, with the regulars, was off at the left, Colonel 
 Wood occupied the centre, and Roosevelt was on the right. These 
 three gradually drew together at the apex of the V, pushing forward 
 through the high hot grass and undergrowth right into the face of the 
 firing that came from the dense thickets, and with never an oppor 
 tunity at this stage of the proceedings to get a fair shot at those who 
 were firing upon them from ambush. 
 
 Every little while a comparatively open space would be encoun 
 tered. Then it was like breaking through the walls of a maze. In 
 other places the troopers could not see those who were nearest them. 
 If they heard a twig break, or the heavy breathing of a man, they 
 knew they were not alone, but there was no sign of human beings 
 except in the intervals when they came out into the open. 
 
 The fire of the enemy was awfully accurate. Nine men of the 
 Rough Riders were killed in the short space of three minutes. The 
 wounded were dragged into the shade when opportunity offered, but 
 many of those who had fallen were left to lie, where they fell, until the 
 first-aid men or the surgeons could find them. 
 
 The enemy was firing very low. The Rough Riders had to 
 advance oftentimes on their hands and knees. It was mighty hot 
 work, and it didn t take long for everybody to strip to the waist. If 
 
THE TERRIBLE ROLL OF DEATH 377 
 
 a fellow kept his cartridge belt and canteen, he had all he wanted to 
 carry, so the trail along which they passed was strewn with bits of 
 uniforms and articles of equipment, and looked more as if a retreating 
 army had passed that way than that an army of advance had fought 
 its way to victory. Blanket rolls, haversacks, carbines, canteens, 
 hats and even shoes were cast aside, and here and there an empty 
 cartridge belt was found in evidence of some one having used the 
 last of his precious ammunition. 
 
 THE TERRIBLE ROLL OF DEATH. 
 
 It has been estimated that there were about 3,000 Spaniards 
 engaged in this fight, The Americans were less than 1,000. The 
 Americans had 16 killed and 52 wounded, 42 of the casualties occur 
 ring to the Rough Riders and 26 among the Regulars. The Spanish 
 killed were about 100, notwithstanding their advantage of ambush. 
 Thirty-seven Spaniards were found dead on the ground. The 
 wounded had been carried off, and it was ascertained after the battle 
 that many of the killed had also been carried away and buried. 
 
 Prominent among those who were killed along the bloody trail 
 of Guasimas was Captain Capron. He was the fifth generation of 
 soldiers that his family had produced, and his father was at the head 
 of a battery of artillery only a few miles away. The younger Capron 
 was only 28 years of age. He was shot in the shoulder. The wound 
 was known to be fatal from the first. One or two of his friends saw 
 him as the surgeon was trying to do what he could for the man. 
 
 The death of Sergeant Hamilton Fish was another sad event of 
 this day s experiences. Fish, defiant in life, had met death standing. 
 Half a dozen of the troopers had called to him to crouch and creep 
 along with the rest of them, but he was at the head of his men and 
 stalked across the occasional open spaces without a thought of him 
 self until finally he fell like a log across the trail. 
 
 Some of the escapes from death were miraculous. Champney 
 Marshal, of Washington, had one bullet pass through his sleeve. 
 Another passed through his shirt, where it was pulled close to the 
 spine. The holes where the ball entered and went out again were 
 clearly cut. Another man s skin was slightly burned by three bullets 
 in three distinct lines, as though it had been touched for an instant 
 
THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 by the lighted end of a cigar. Roosevelt himself was so close to one 
 bullet, when it struck a tree, that it filled his eyes and ears with splin 
 ters, and his color sergeant, Wright, following close at his heels, was 
 clipped three times in the head and neck, and four bullets passed 
 through the folds of the flag he carried. 
 
 THE MAN WHO WOULDN T GIVE UP. 
 
 A cowboy named Heffner was shot through the body. He 
 asked to be propped up against a tree with his canteen and cartridge 
 belt beside him. As those who placed him in this position turned 
 away they saw him firing over their heads in the direction of the 
 enemy. Subsequently this man was taken to a hospital apparently 
 half-dead, but when he heard an ambulance coming to take wounded 
 men to the hospital ship, he rolled off of his blanket under the edge 
 of the tent, and the ambulance went off without him. Next day he 
 dragged himself to the firing line. He was sent back by Colonel 
 Roosevelt, but when it came to the battle of El Caney this man appeared 
 among the rest of the Rough Riders and insisted on handling a gun. 
 
 " I thought I told you to go to the hospital and stay there," said 
 Colonel Roosevelt. 
 
 " I believe you did, Colonel ; but there was nothing going on 
 back there, and I thought I had better be with the rest of the boys." 
 
 This man recovered from his wound sufficiently to come home 
 with his regiment to Montauk Point, and subsequently helped to 
 make some of the noise that the Rough Riders made during Colonel 
 Roosevelt s successful campaign for the governorship of New York. 
 
 Another of the men who fell in the first volley was Captain Mc- 
 Clintock. A private who had been sick for some days, seeing Mc- 
 Clintock lying on the field, crawled up between the latter and the 
 firing line and said : 
 
 " Never mind, Captain ; I am between you and the enemy. They 
 can t hurt you now." 
 
 Edward Culver, a Cherokee Indian, was alongside of Hamilton 
 Fish when the latter was shot. As Fish fell to the ground, he called 
 out, " I am wounded." Culver called back, " And I am killed." 
 
 Culver was shot through the left lung, the ball coming out the 
 muscle of his back. He believed he was dying, but he said if h~ was 
 
THE HEROIC WORK OF "BOB" CHURCH 381 
 
 to die he would do the Spaniards as much damage as possible before 
 leaving. He braced himself up against a bush and sent forty-five 
 bullets at the enemy before being taken away. 
 
 THE HEROIC WORK OF "HOB" CHURCH. 
 
 "Bob" Church, of Princeton football fame, was junior surgeon 
 of the Roosevelt regiment. Me carried as many as half a dozen 
 wounded men on his back half a mile from the firing line to a tempo 
 rary dressing station, and those who knew of the work he did on that 
 day say that these and many others owe their lives to his indefatiga- 
 bility and nerve. 
 
 There was no difference in the bravery of the two predominating 
 elements in the Rough Riders organization, but there was a differ 
 ence in their style of fighting. The cowboys of the western frontier 
 slipped cautiously from cover and dodged deftly behind the next pro 
 tecting thicket, but tke eastern athletes made wild rushes and were 
 reckless in exposing themselves. On every hand, however, evidence 
 was constantly accumulating that there was never a body of men 
 possessing such varied elements, and yet it was easily welded into an 
 effective fighting-machine so easily that a foreigner would not have 
 known that all these men were not as much brothers in blood, charac 
 ter, occupation, mutual faith and long companionship as any soldier 
 organization that ever took the field. 
 
 The dominant element was the big-game hunter and the cowboy. 
 Every field officer and captain had at one time. or another owned a 
 ranch. The majority came from Arizona, New Mexico, Oklohoma, 
 and the Indian Territory, though nearly every State in the Union 
 was represented. There were graduates of Harvard, Yale, Columbia, 
 Princeton, Cornell, University of Pennsylvania, of Virginia, of Colo 
 rado, Iowa, and other western and southern colleges. There were 
 members of the Knickerbocker Club of New York, the Somerset 
 Club of Boston, and of famous horse organizations of Philadelphia, 
 New York, and New Jersey. There were revenue officers from 
 Georgia and Tennessee, policemen from New York City, half a dozen 
 deputy marshals from Colorado, several Texan rangers, three or four 
 Cherokees and Chickasaws, Choctaws and Creeks, and one Pawnee 
 Indian. There were Catholics, Protestants, and Jews in this organi- 
 
382 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 zation ; there was one strapping Australian, and one of the Queen s 
 Mounted Police from the British-American possessions, though 90 
 per cent, of all were native born Americans. 
 
 This is the sort of material that forced the Spaniards along the 
 Guasimas trail back from the position they had occupied and gradu 
 ally drove them out of reach. The result was that the way was 
 cleared through this defile to the immediate vicinity of Santiago. 
 Furthermore, the fact that the Spaniards who had occupied this com 
 manding position were not re-enforcecl, demonstrated the further fact 
 that the enemy knew how useless it would be to stop the onrush of 
 the Americans, and established in the minds of the American com 
 manders the idea that their strongest opposition would be met much 
 nearer the beleaguered city. 
 
 The position of the Spanish in the vicinity of Guasimas was 
 naturally so strong that, if it had been held in force, the United States 
 troops must have had several days of hard fighting before they could 
 have driven the enemy from the mountainous ridges commanding the 
 road. But after the onslaught of the dismounted cavalry squadrons, 
 the Spaniards made no attempt to utilize the natural advantages 
 afforded by the lay of the land, and fell back immediately on the 
 line of defences at San Juan and El Caney, almost within firing dis 
 tance of Santiago. 
 
 ROOSEVELT TAKES COMMAND OF THE ROUGH RIDERS. 
 
 Soon after noon, on the day of the Guasimas fight, the advance 
 guard of the cavalry was pushed forward to the plateau at Sevilla. 
 Here the country was fairly open with stretches of grass land at 
 intervals. The distance from Siboney, which had become the base 
 of supplies, was not more than five miles, and General Wheeler, in 
 command of the cavalry division, and General Lawton, commanding 
 the Second Infantry division, decided to make this point their head 
 quarters for the present. On the following day Colonel Wood was 
 placed in command of a brigade, and Roosevelt s Rough Riders from 
 that time on were Roosevelt s in fact as well as in name. 
 
 With the cavalry at Sevilla, General Shafter maintained his head 
 quarters at Playa del Este. One reason for this was that the cable 
 station was located at this point. The Commanding General also 
 
SH AFTER IS TAKEN ILL 3^3 
 
 felt that he wanted to be near the coast until the very last of the 
 troops and munitions of war had been disembarked. When the 
 Spaniards had been driven out of Guasimas, and it became evident 
 that their firmest stand would be made near Santiago, Shafter trans 
 ferred his headquarters to La Redonda, about six miles from Siboney, 
 and only a little way from Sevilla. Generals Kent, Lawson, and 
 Chaffee were also in that immediate neighborhood, so that Sevilla, as 
 a matter of fact, may be said to have been the location of the entire 
 army immediately after the exploit of the Rough Riders and other 
 cavalry along the Guasimas trail 
 
 The encampment was continued at this point for three or four 
 days, and it became a common remark of field and company officers 
 that any enemy with a small degree of enterprise could have attacked 
 the invaders and done them great damage, if, indeed, the entire force 
 could not have been routed and driven back in confusion. The camps 
 were in a jumbled condition, supplies were irregular, and the men 
 soon became pretty well disgusted with what seemed to them to be 
 an interminable delay. 
 
 Meanwhile news was constantly being brought to General Shafter 
 that the Spaniards were improving their position, particularly in the 
 vicinity of El Caney and along the San Juan hills. They had evi 
 dently been indifferent to the easy prey that the invading army might 
 have been, merely because they had already seen something of the 
 valor of the American troops, and had chosen the battleground on 
 which they preferred that the bulk of the fighting should take place. 
 
 The natural conformation of the country could hardly have been 
 more favorable to a defensive campaign. The Wilderness in Virginia 
 presented far less difficulties to the invading Northerners than did 
 the San Juan valley to Shafter s army. The greater part was cov 
 ered with young undergrowth, interlaced with thorny vines, and the 
 roads were little more than blind trails. 
 
 SHAFTER IS TAKEN ILL. 
 
 General Shafter was taken ill while the army was at Sevilla, and 
 his condition was made worse by the extreme heat. He kept in touch 
 with what was going on, however, but for several days the duty of 
 personal observation had to be delegated to others. He and all his 
 
3 84 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 officers saw, within forty-eight hours after the fight at Guasimas, that 
 an early advance must be made upon El Caney. The subsequent 
 capture of this point and the really brilliant engagement at San Juan 
 constitute one event, and it has always been so regarded by all the 
 general officers who took part in the fighting. 
 
 The reinforcements that General Pando was known to be offer 
 ing to the beleaguered garrison at Santiago would have found their 
 easiest approach through El Caney, and it was decided, therefore, to 
 put this possibility out of the way as soon as circumstances would 
 permit. The Spaniards had apparently expected that the army would 
 reach Santiago by detour along the coast, but Shafter evidently had 
 his own reasons for sending his men directly across the country. 
 
 Progression and protection of the American position was ren 
 dered imperative by the problem of feeding the men who had pene 
 trated into the enemy s country. The roads were impassable. The 
 dry weather had given place to tropical rains. Every pathway had 
 become a sunken road. There seemed to be only one of two things 
 for the invaders to clo they must either hold the ground they had 
 gained and advance therefrom, or some of the troops must move 
 westward along the coast, where the Spaniards had made special 
 preparations to receive them, and try to capture some little port, thus 
 shortening up the line of supplies between the fleet and the troops. 
 The forward movement was decided upon. Moreover, the officers all 
 felt that July 4th was approaching, and everybody wanted to cele 
 brate that day by some great event. 
 
 A COUNCIL OF WAR. 
 
 On June 2Qth a council of war was held. Every man who took 
 part in it had learned a great deal regarding the use of rapid-fire guns 
 and smokeless powder. Older officers, who had served in the Civil 
 War, saw that the rapid-fire guns of to-day, where smokeless powder 
 is used, give to each man the value of five men during the Rebellion. 
 More than that, with the accuracy of aim now possible, a good marks 
 man can kill ten men with such a gun where he could only kill one 
 thirty years ago. The new arms, with their low range and rapid fire, 
 had wholly altered the manoeuvres that must immediately precede and 
 occur during the battles of the future. The play, therefore, was to 
 
FIERCE FIGHTING BEFORE EL CANEY 385 
 
 be for a flank attack, and that was the plan decided upon at this con 
 ference in front of Santiago. 
 
 Generals Young and Chaffee favored clearing the right flank 
 first, and not exposing both of our flanks to the scientifically posted 
 Spanish infantry. It was decided, therefore, to take El Caney by 
 assault early on the morning of July ist, and let the other two di 
 visions conform to the movement that was to be made by Lawton, who 
 was to deliver the swinging, jugular-vein blow. General Lawton 
 wanted to go out that very night and get into position to deliver his 
 blow, but every commander was as zealous as he was, and the result 
 was that this disposition was not made. The plan was further devel 
 oped during the final day of June, and on the following night bivouac 
 was made at 10 o clock, and the men slept on their arms. 
 
 Before daylight General Chaffee had worked his men forward 
 so that he might approach El Caney from the east of north. 
 He got his men well entrenched, personally supervising every detail. 
 It was subsequently discovered that the Spaniards also well under 
 stood the trick of digging good trenches. Their rifle-pits consisted 
 of a deep, narrow hole in which a marksman could crouch, making 
 the earth itself his guardian angel, and when, at the first sight of 
 dawn, Chaffee ordered the advance, and line after line of rifle-pits 
 was encountered, there was an occasional hesitation, not inspired by 
 fear, but by indecision. 
 
 The fighting was stubborn from the very outset. Resistance 
 was determined, and the patience of the two divisions on the left, 
 already under fire from the San Juan forts, was sorely tried. Their 
 commander sent over to know if the movement of Chaffee could not 
 be hurried or abandoned, so that they could go into action against 
 the enemy in front of them, but Chaffee was too far committed to 
 consider the proposition of withdrawing. The effect of this message, 
 however, was to redouble the energy of the men before El Caney, 
 and many acts of individual courage were performed that day. 
 
 Captain Capron, father of the young man who had been killed 
 with the Rough Riders along the Guasimas trail, concentrated the 
 fire of his battery upon the blockhouses by getting two of them in 
 line. So accurate was the aim of his battery that he knocked whole 
 corners out of these stone structures. His guns were so placed tha 
 
 21 
 
386 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 after the shells went through one blockhouse they would land and 
 explode in the next one, rending it apart like a box of pasteboard. 
 
 While this sort of thing was going on, Adjutant-General Gilmore 
 had ridden over from the San Juan way with the information that 
 the fight had its heart in front of the forts at that point, and that 
 reinforcements must be hurried there to insure success. General 
 Lawton turned to the officer who brought this news and said : " There 
 is important business to be done here, and I can t quit." A hurried 
 consultation was held, however, and it was decided that the village 
 must be taken. It was done in thirty minutes by a splendid assault 
 led by Captain Haskell, of the Twelfth Infantry. Those who saw 
 this gallant officer lead the charge up that hill will never forget it. 
 He rushed along at the head of his men with his long, white beard 
 flying in the air and surrounding his face like a patch of fog. His 
 men followed him without question, and one blockhouse was carried 
 almost before the Spaniards knew that the enemy was upon them. 
 
 A TERRIBLE FIGHT IN A BLOCKHOUSE. 
 
 This blockhouse stood at the top of a hill, facing the pathway, 
 leading up to it and into the town. Intrenchments were all around 
 it, and no one knew how many soldiers of Spain were in and behind 
 these fortifications. There were about fifty inside the blockhouse, 
 shooting through the holes. A company of the Ninth Infantry 
 reached this point first, and twenty of them climbed up to the roof 
 and dropped inside. A terrific fight took place in these close quarters. 
 The first Americans who entered were awfully slaughtered by the 
 Spaniards. Some of them were badly mutilated. Fifteen others of 
 the Ninth regulars also mounted the walls of the blockhouse and 
 jumped down into this pit of death. The sight of their outraged 
 comrades galled them. It took only a moment for vengeance to be 
 wrought. One man was shot in the wrist, but he killed the Spaniard 
 who shot him and brought away the pistol that the Don had used. 
 One American is known to have killed four Spaniards in this hand- 
 to-hand encounter. One of the regulars had a piece of his nose shot 
 off. Turning on the Spaniard who had maimed him he ran him 
 through with his bayonet, pinned him to the wall and held him there 
 until he died. 
 
FOREIGN REPRESENTATIVES SURPRISED 387 
 
 Meanwhile others of the Americans were doing desperate work 
 in the immediate vicinity of the blockhouses. The rush that had 
 been made seemed to take away the breath of the Spaniards, and the 
 shower of leaden hail which was fired upon them created awful havoc. 
 When our men got into the Spanish ditches they found some of them 
 three to five feet deep with dead Spaniards, but no wounded were 
 found, these evidently having been taken along with the retreating 
 force. The Spaniards, however, made a desperate resistance at many 
 points. Their firing was much more accurate than many have been 
 led to suppose, Their artillery was well placed and did a great deal 
 of damage, but it was the intrepidity of the Americans that staggered 
 them. The fact that their advantage with smokeless powder did not 
 deter the onslaught, seemed to be more than they could understand. 
 
 WHAT FOREIGN REPRESENTATIVES SAID OF THE FIGHT. 
 
 The assault and capture of El Caney took the breath of the 
 foreign attaches who were watching the manoeuvres. One said : c< It 
 is very gallant, but very foolish." " It is slaughter ; absolute slaugh 
 ter," said another, " they never can take it, you know." The little 
 Japanese attache merely shrugged his shoulders and said nothing. 
 But they all watched the assault with eagerness, and when it was 
 crowned with victory they could hardly believe their own eyes. 
 
 The Rough Riders dynamite gun, handled by Alsop Borrowe, 
 did good execution against the fortifications at El Caney. This was 
 the first opportunity afforded for work with this weapon, and every 
 one was well pleased with what it accomplished. It was located in a 
 position that was guarded by several troops of the Rough Riders, who 
 were particularly anxious to have more active work to do than they 
 seemed likely to get in this connection. Later in the day, however, 
 Colonel Roosevelt made good use of his opportunities, but it was in 
 the second day s fighting that the regiment again distinguished itself. 
 
 The lack of more artillery was very disheartening. Had it not 
 been for the marvelous prowess of the infantry, the Spaniards would 
 not have been driven out of El Caney. The slightest faltering on 
 the part of the Americans would have resulted in their having been 
 hurled back further than their starting point. It was their continuous 
 forward movement that won the day. 
 
388 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 The first wounded man to reach headquarters was a private of 
 the Second Massachusetts, who had two fingers shot away. His 
 battalion had been within 200 yards of the enemy when the Spaniards 
 opened fire. He spoke particularly of the disadvantage he and his 
 comrades had had in not being able to see where the shots came 
 from. They felt like rats in a trap at first, but they soon learned the 
 Spanish tactics of fighting under cover. This wounded man com 
 plained bitterly that his regiment had not been allowed to light fires 
 for twenty-four hours, and had started into battle with only ten pieces 
 of hardtack and a piece of bacon an inch wide. 
 
 THE WORK OF THE SHARPSHOOTERS. 
 
 During the progress of the fight, the Eighth Infantry was under 
 a heavy fire, in the neighborhood of a big mango tree. Some of the 
 men were under the tree, and the fruit fell on them in showers, 
 knocked down by the bullets. The greatest annoyance experienced by 
 all the troops was from the sharpshooters who were posted with their 
 smokeless powder pieces in the surrounding trees. It was impossible 
 to get at these fellows until their companions had been driven from 
 the rifle-pits. Then one of these roosting birds would occasionally 
 drop down to join in the flight, and the chances were very much 
 against his getting away alive. 
 
 It had been thought before this fight began that El Caney could 
 be captured in very short order. The first blockhouse fell into the 
 hands of the Americans within half an hour after its fierce assault 
 was undertaken, but the day was well spent before all the trendies 
 were cleaned out, and the enemy was entirely driven back. It had 
 been a day of bravery, and a day of slaughter on both sides, though 
 the exact loss could not be reckoned until the following day s work 
 was complete. The United States troops had stuck their finger 
 nails into the crest of the bluff and stayed there. They were vic 
 torious as far as they had gone, but there was much more to be 
 accomplished. Westward from El Caney, on the top of the ridge, 
 were the forts of San Juan. These constituted the outer stronghold 
 of Santiago, and these must be captured at once. 
 
 Officers and men all knew that this was the work cut out for 
 them on the 2d of July. There was very little sleep that night, but 
 
WHY ROOSEVELT KEPT AHEAD 389 
 
 a great deal of work was done in perfecting the intrenchments and 
 getting ready for the morrow. The morning broke clear and beauti 
 ful. The men could be seen on the crest of the hill, in the holes 
 they had dug in the ground during the night, and the entire army 
 was eager to go to their support. The enemy was evidently quite 
 as wide awake and anxiously awaiting the attack. 
 
 San Juan hill is a long and steep irregular ridge. It is of unequal 
 height, and the highest point was crowned by an old building which 
 had been converted into a fort with trenches in front of it, and the 
 ordinary broken-stone construction of the Spanish blockhouse. In 
 front of the blockhouse the hill was at least a hundred feet higher 
 than the plateau before it. The ascent was at an angle of fully forty- 
 five degrees. The face of the hill was stony and thorny, and on the 
 margin of the plateau was a wilderness of trees and thick brush 
 through which the American soldiers had to fight their way, and 
 when they had penetrated this thicket they were out in the open 
 fully exposed to the fire of the fort and those who were in the 
 intrenchments at the top of the hill. 
 
 WHY ROOSEVELT KEPT AHEAD. 
 
 The original order had been not to advance beyond the San 
 Juan River, which flowed sluggishly through the thicket, but the fire 
 in this brushwood was too effective to engender patience, and as each 
 regiment came to the stream, which really was not much of an impedi 
 ment to progress, they rushed over it and up on the hill without 
 waiting for further orders. It was at this point where Colonel 
 Roosevelt dismounted and led his Rough Riders up the slope. Af 
 terward, when complimented on the good time he had made at the 
 head of his command, he smiled and said : 4< I had to move quick to 
 keep out of their way." The men of several commands got separated 
 in this advance, and it was this fact, particularly in the case of the 
 Seventy-first New York, which led to contradictory reports as to 
 obedience of orders and manifestations of indifference. Those who 
 neared the top of the hill first saw that they could do nothing, unsup 
 ported, against the enemy, and, as they looked around in their 
 anxiety, each on-coming command was warmly welcomed, and thus 
 each moment it grew warmer for the Spaniards. 
 
390 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 On this hillside also the barbed wire fence played no unimportant 
 part. Several companies of the Sixth Infantry ran plump against 
 one of these obstructions halfway up the hill. Captain Burns saw 
 a big Cuban fighting with a machete a little way off and called to him 
 in Spanish to cut the wires. He did so, and the men rushed through 
 and onward. The hill was so steep at that point that the men had to 
 drag themselves up by catching at roots and bushes, stopping every 
 other second to kill a Spaniard or two, and some of them stopping to 
 be killed. 
 
 Several of the cavalry regiments became seriously mixed up 
 owing to the utter impossibility of moving straightforward at any 
 thing like regular intervals. Captain Morton commanded a battalion 
 of the Third Cavalry. When he finally approached the open space 
 across which the clash was made for the right of the San Juan posi 
 tion, he found himself surrounded by men of two or three different 
 regiments, mostly, however, of his own. He did not hesitate. There 
 was no time for hesitation. Mauser bullets and shrapnel were sing 
 ing thick and fast through the air, and men were falling on every 
 side. Morton simply put all the men near him into line, led them 
 forward and quickly took the most advanced position on the right, 
 driving the Spaniards back upon a battery of theirs down under the 
 walls of San Juan barracks. 
 
 SKILL OF SPANISH ENGINEERS. 
 
 The artificial strengthening of the Spanish line of defense showed 
 the very highest order of engineering skill. The utmost advantage 
 was taken of the conformation of the ground. Each fortified point 
 or angle commanded some other one. In many places, on gaining 
 certain intrenchments, the American troops found themselves under 
 a crossfire from other portions of the original line. The result was 
 that the Americans seemed sometimes to be almost surrounded, and 
 it was like fighting their way out of a hollow square when any ad 
 vance was made. 
 
 It was under these conditions that all the regiments, engaged in 
 that day s fighting, did so nobly. The rush of the Ninth and Tenth 
 cavalrymen was noted by the commanders of many other regiments, 
 and those colored regulars became heroes from that hour. The 
 
PERSONAL IMPRESSIONS OF OFFICERS 39 1 
 
 regulars naturally gained the most of the glory, for they were in a 
 large majority, but the commanding officers have accorded a full 
 meed of praise to all concerned. 
 
 General Kent, commanding the first division of the Fifth Army 
 Corps, gave special credit to Brigadier-General H. S. Hawkins, who, 
 placing himself between the two regiments leading his brigade, the 
 Sixth and Sixteenth Infantry, urged and led them by voice and bugle 
 calls to the attack so successfully accomplished. 
 
 The total number of killed on July ist in the First Division was 
 89, the wounded nearly 500. On July 2d, 9 were killed and 94 
 wounded. The total for the three days fighting, from the morning 
 of the attack upon El Caney until the truce on the afternoon of July 
 3cl, was 12 officers and 87 men killed, 36 officers and 561 men 
 wounded, and 62 unaccounted for. General Lawton lost 410 men, 
 the cavalry lost 285 men, and the grand total, as given by General 
 Shafter in his official report, was 1,593 men, killed, wounded and 
 missing. 
 
 PERSONAL IMPRESSIONS OF OFFICERS. 
 
 The large proportion of officers killed in these engagements has 
 been attributed by many to the fact that this was a junior officers 
 campaign. General Wheeler was unable to be in the field on July 
 ist and 2d. Generals Kent, Lawton and Chaffee were active, of 
 course, but General Shafter was practically confined at headquarters, 
 and the bulk of the work fell upon the juniors. These were mowed 
 down with the men under their command, and have taken, with them, 
 their place among the heroes who swept away the obstructions to the 
 approaches to Santiago and made the subsequent surrender of the 
 city a certainty. 
 
 The personal impressions of some of the officers who were 
 engaged against the Spaniards on these earliest days of July tell the 
 story at first hand. Lieutenant Joseph A. Carr, of the Rough Riders, 
 speaking of the fight at San Juan Hill, has said : " We were not sup 
 ported by artillery, and it was a test of what American nerve and 
 determination could do. Most of my men were shot down from am 
 bush. I was left in command of what remained. After we had 
 driven the Spanish back and taken possession of San Juan hill, I 
 was sent to occupy another eminence about 500 yards away. The 
 
392 THE INVASION OF CUBA BY THE ARMY 
 
 Spanish fire never ceased. We had no earthworks and no artillery. 
 I saw no flinching. No man seemed to think of retiring, but every 
 nerve was strained to its utmost, and our boys made a display of 
 courage and coolness that I cannot help feeling is somehow a part of 
 American blood." 
 
 Captain Hunter said : " It occurred to me, as we were going up 
 San Juan Hill, that just twenty-five years before, to the very day and 
 hour, Grimes battery had opened the battle at Gettysburg. This 
 coincidence was no unpleasant thought. I knew we had a hot day s 
 work ahead, but I also knew that we were bound to win. As the 
 battle proceeded our loss was heavy indeed, but when we saw the 
 terrible execution our own men were doing we began to feel more 
 than satisfied. When the artillery firing began the very first shell 
 fired by the enemy killed one man and seriously wounded two others 
 under my very eyes, but they paid for this a hundred times over 
 before the day was done." 
 
 The large number of killed and wounded in the engagements 
 which took place before Santiago was very galling to the commanders, 
 and even more so perhaps to the authorities at Washington. General 
 Shafter has been criticized in this connection for allowing the fighting 
 to proceed without the aid of the siege guns, and without the artil 
 lery to support the infantry, but it is claimed, on the other hand, 
 that there was a certain amount of work to do, and that it had to be 
 done at once, and that the loss of so many men, deplorable as it was, 
 could not have been prevented under the circumstances. 
 
 The sacrifice of these lives, however, occurred in the midst of 
 onslaughts that powerfully impressed the Spaniards as to the mettle 
 of Uncle Sam s soldiers. There was no longer any thought in the 
 minds of the enemy that they had to deal with novices in war, or that 
 they would have no difficulty in driving the invaders into the sea. 
 Quite the contrary. The news was carried into Santiago that the 
 American army could, and probably would, sweep everything before 
 it, and it was this sort of tidings, emphasized by the accumulating 
 assurances of the next few days, that paved the way for the subse 
 quent surrender. 
 
CHAPTER XXI 
 
 The Surrender of Santiago 
 
 Truce Proclaimed and Prolonged from Day to Day. Consultation for Surrender of 
 Santiago General Miles, Commander-in-Chief of the Army, Joins Shafter and 
 Takes part in the Negotiations. General Toral Surrenders. Terms of Evacua 
 tion. Raising the Stars and Stripes above the City. Hobson and His Fellow- 
 Heroes Exchanged. A Rousing Reception by Land and Sea. 
 
 fF you do not surrender the city I will bombard it." That, in 
 effect, was the ultimatum which General Shafter sent the 
 Spanish commander in Santiago on the 3d of July. General 
 Linares had been wounded. General Toral was in command. He 
 refused to surrender. With this refusal came to General Shafter an 
 appeal from foreign residents in the town for an opportunity to get 
 out of the city before the bombardment began. The representatives 
 of foreign nations came out to have a consultation with General 
 Shafter, and the result was that notice was given that the bombard 
 ment would not take place until noon of July 5th. 
 
 General Toral was urged to aid the rapid departure of foreign 
 ers and non-combatants, and notices were posted in the streets of the 
 city advising all women, children and non-combatants, that, between 
 5 and 9 o clock in the morning of July 5th, they might pass out of 
 any gate of the city. Everybody must go on foot. There could be 
 no carriages. Stretchers would be provided for the ill and infirm. 
 A great company of pilgrims took advantage of this opportunity, 
 and there was a continuous line of refugees pouring out of the threat 
 ened city between the hours that had been named, and nearly 400 
 persons were carried out on litters. 
 
 All this took place, of course, under a flag of truce, and while the 
 flag was still flying a communication was received from General Toral 
 requesting that the truce be still further extended. He wanted to 
 communicate again with the Spanish Government at Madrid con 
 cerning the surrender of the city, but all the telegraph operators, 
 
 393 
 
394 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 being Englishmen, had gone out with the refugees. General Shatter 
 extended the truce until 4 o clock on Sunday, July loth, and the oper 
 ators returned to work the wires for the Spanish commander. During 
 all this time the refugees continued to throng the roads to Siboney and 
 El Caney until there were nearly 20,000 of them congregated at these 
 two points. Meanwhile the Spanish soldiers were helping themselves 
 to everything that had been left behind by the families who had de 
 parted, and no effort seems to have been made on the part of the 
 Spanish commanders to stop the looting. 
 
 GENERAL MILES ARRIVES ON THE SCENE. 
 
 General Miles arrived upon the scene on the day set for the ex 
 piration of the truce. The first of the two expeditions containing 
 reinforcements landed on July 8th, the second on the Qth, and an 
 other on the loth, so that Shatter s army had been strengthened by 
 6,000 men. General Toral knew of the arrival of General Miles, and 
 with this knowledge came the impression, strongly urged on the part 
 of the American emissaries, that further resistance on the part of the 
 Spanish commander could only result in a useless loss of life. 
 
 The answer of the Spanish commander was that his home gov 
 ernment had not yet given him permission to surrender the city, and 
 that, if the Americans could not wait any longer, he and his men would 
 die fighting. A joint bombardment by the army and navy therefore 
 was promptly begun. 
 
 The response of the Spanish guns to the firing of the Americans 
 on sea and shore was feeble. When the Americans fired with small 
 arms the answer was more vigorous, but Shafter s lines were well 
 protected with sandbags, and not much damage was done. The ves 
 sels of the fleet kept up a rain of shot and shell on the water forts 
 and the approaches to the city, and the artillery was used much more 
 than smaller arms in the trenches. 
 
 This bombardment continued until the afternoon of the second 
 day. Then another flag of truce was hoisted over the city, and the 
 general impression was that Toral was about to surrender, but he 
 only asked for more time. Generals Miles and Shafter held a con 
 sultation. Another truce was consented to, and, at last, on July i4th, 
 General Toral agreed to surrender the city on condition that the 
 
THE CONDITIONS OF THE SURRENDER 395 
 
 Spanish army be returned to Spain at the expense of the United 
 States. On July i6th, the agreement of surrender, the points of which 
 had been communicated by cable to Washington and Madrid, and 
 had been approved, was signed in duplicate by the commissioners of 
 both sides. 
 
 THE CONDITIONS OF THE SURRENDER. 
 
 The conditions of the surrender involved the following points : 
 (i) The 20,000 refugees at El Caney and Siboney to be sent back to 
 Santiago, (2) An American infantry patrol to be posted on the 
 roads surrounding the city and in the country between it and the 
 American cavalry. (3) Our hospital corps to give attention, as far 
 as possible, to the sick and wounded Spanish soldiers in Santiago. 
 (4) All the Spanish troops in the province, except ten thousand men 
 at Holguin, under command of General Luque, to come into the city 
 and surrender. (5) The guns and defenses of the city to be turned 
 over to the Americans in good condition. (6) The Americans to 
 have full use of the Juragua Railroad, which belongs to the Spanish 
 Government. (7) The Spaniards to surrender their arms. (8) All 
 the Spaniards to be conveyed to Spain on board of American trans 
 ports with the least possible delay, and be permitted to take portable 
 church property with them. 
 
 The American army took formal possession of the city of San 
 tiago on the morning of July i7th. General Shafter had notified 
 General Toral of his wish in this regard, and no obstacle was inter 
 posed. At 8.30 o clock on the morning of that clay, therefore, Gen 
 eral Shafter, accompanied by General Miles, General Wheeler and 
 General Lawton approached Santiago on foot, walking clown the 
 road from headquarters in a leisurely manner. Under a great mango 
 tree, just outside the walls of the city, they were met by General 
 Toral in full uniform, accompanied by nearly 200 officers. The com 
 manding generals faced each other, and General Toral, speaking in 
 Spanish, said : 
 
 "It is by fate that I am forced to surrender to the American 
 army the city of Santiago." 
 
 General Shafter replied : 
 
 " 1 receive the city in the name of the Government of the United 
 States." 
 
396 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 This was all of the simple ceremony which transferred the 
 ancient capital of Cuba to our forces. The officers of the Spanish 
 General wheeled about and presented arms as General Shafter, with 
 the American officers and troops that had been chosen for the occa 
 sion, passed on into the city and to the Governor s palace. 
 
 That picturesque building is in the centre of the city fronting 
 the Plaza, at the other end of which stands the Cathedral. The 
 watching soldiers in the American trenches could see their com 
 manders as they proceeded in the direction of the Plaza, and all 
 along the lines they gave voice to cheer after cheer. 
 
 In front of the palace about 3,000 persons had gathered to see 
 what was going to take place. The Civil Governor, the Mayor of the 
 city, the Chief of Police, and perhaps two score of the minor officials of 
 the municipality were waiting with the rest. There were also pres 
 ent some of the English and French residents of the city. Irrepressi 
 ble cheers by American sympathizers were objected to by some of the 
 Spaniards, and one or two fist-fights occurred. But the trouble was 
 juelled almost as soon as it began. 
 
 After the Americans had arrived at the palace, the Archbishop 
 of Santiago, the most powerful ecclesiastic in Cuba, accompanied by 
 ten priests, came forward, gravely saluted General Shafter, and 
 entered into conversation with him, the Archbishop speaking excel 
 lent English. 
 
 Preceding the formal ceremony of handing over the city to the 
 Americans, luncheon was served at the palace. The only Cuban 
 present at any of the ceremonies was General Joaquin Castillo and 
 one of his aides, who were the personal guests of General Shafter. 
 
 RAISING THE FLAG OVER SANTIAGO. 
 
 Just before noon, Lieutenant Miley, General Shafter s chief of 
 staff, disappeared from the crowd at luncheon, and shortly afterward 
 every one went out on the plaza in front of the palace, where Ameri 
 can cavalry and infantry were drawn up. General Shafter and the 
 other Americans, followed by the Spanish military officers and offi 
 cials, took up a position in front of the soldiers. Lieutenant Miley 
 appeared on the top of the palace, accompanied by two other 
 officers. 
 
RAISING THE FLAG OVER SANTIAGO 397 
 
 Every eye was riveted upon them as they stood silhouetted 
 against the sky. Every voice was hushed expectantly, and then, as 
 the great bell of the tower of the Cathedral gave the first stroke of 
 12, Lieutenant Miley ran the Stars and Stripes up to the top of the 
 staff which had before known only the emblem of Spain. Its folds 
 spread to the southwest breeze, and as it fluttered there, all hats were 
 removed, and Americans and Spanish officials alike stood bare before 
 the fla^ of the victor. 
 
 o 
 
 As the last stroke of the hour tolled out, the military band played 
 the " Star Spangled Banner," following it up with " Three Cheers for 
 the Red, White and Blue." Again and again the soldiers cheered, 
 and so did more than half of the people. The crowd was composed 
 largely of men and women of a half-starved appearance, most of 
 whom seemed to be grateful that the Americans were in possession 
 of the city, evidently anticipating that their days of hunger and 
 misery were over. One enthusiastic Cuban started the cry, "Viva los 
 Americanos ! " and hundreds of his compatriots joined in the acclaim. 
 
 As the American flag floated over the city, one of the batteries 
 of artillery at the right centre of the American line fired a national 
 salute. As the guns thundered, our 20,000 men, from the Third Regi 
 ment on the left of the line, to the Eighth Regiment far off on the 
 El Cobre road on the west, yelled, cheered, shouted, threw their hat? 
 in the air, and jumped up and down. The soldiers stood on th v 
 crests of the trenches, which they had won at the cost of so many 
 lives, and, though they could not be seen from the city, their cheen 
 were easily caught by the ear, and it was thus made plainly evident 
 how completely Santiago and the Spanish army had been hemmed in. 
 
 After cheering the flag on the palace, the soldiers in the city 
 cheered for General Shafter and for the army as a whole. General 
 Shafter and his officers then left for the American camp, and soldiers 
 were assigned to patrol duty in the city. 
 
 The navy also had its share in the ceremonies of surrender. 
 Admiral Sampson had received requests from every small vessel in 
 the fleet for permission to enter the harbor, but the danger from sub 
 marine mines was not yet well defined, and nothing but launches were 
 allowed to enter. Three of these felt their way into the harbor, pass 
 ing the wreck of the Rcina Mercedes and the Merrimac, with only her 
 
398 777^ SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 topmasts above the water, and so on up the bay, at the head of which 
 the surrendered city lay. They arrived in time to take part in the final 
 cheering. They found the army already in possession of everything. 
 
 The only war vessel in the harbor was the small gunboat Alvarez, 
 which mounts a modern 4-inch gun forward and a machine gun aft. 
 The Spaniards requested that the American flag be not raised on her 
 until all her crew had left her. This request was granted. The Span 
 iards took the boat up to the dock and all disembarked. Lieutenant 
 Marble then ran up a new American flag on the vessel, and a ship of 
 war was added to our navy. The Lieutenant also took possession of 
 all the other vessels in the harbor. One of them was a big steamer 
 that had been used as a transport ; the others were two tugs, four 
 lighters, twelve schooners, and a number of small boats. The Ameri 
 can flag was raised on all of them. 
 
 Lieutenant Marble boarded the gunboat which had been cap 
 tured and returned on her to the fleet. He had with him two Spanish 
 officers who knew all about the mines in the harbor. On the way 
 down the bay he told them of the destruction of the Spanish fleet at 
 Manila. They said that the Spanish official reports declared that 
 Admiral Montijo had won a glorious victory at Manila, and that, if 
 the soldiers in Santiago had known of the Spanish defeat in the 
 Philippines, they would not have been so willing to fight the 
 Americans. 
 
 Before the gunboat reached the sea, the men on the vessels of 
 Sampson s fleet saw American infantrymen and cavalry at Morro Cas 
 tle and on the side batteries. They knew then that the surrender was 
 complete, and the sailors added their full quota of cheering to the 
 shouts that had been sent up by the soldiers. Some of the vessels 
 moved up close under the castle, and then they saw for the first time 
 the awful havoc their guns had wrought. 
 
 The Morro was literally a pile of ruins at least on the side next 
 the sea. The rock on which it had been built had crumbled to dust 
 wherever shot and shell had struck ; there was a dozen holes in the 
 lighthouse, and the building around the semaphore had been com 
 pletely destroyed. All but two of six guns that had been mounted 
 on a battery to the east of the castle were wrecked. This battery 
 was protected by barrels of sand, and it was evident that the reason 
 
HAVOC WROUGHT BY OUR GUNS 399 
 
 the Spaniards had shot too high in answering the American fire was 
 that some of the sand barrels in front of the guns were so high that it 
 was necessary to greatly elevate the guns in order to shoot over 
 them. Several of the guns were dismounted, the earth was badly 
 torn up, and the sand bags were ripped open in many places. 
 
 Inside the harbor entrance some tremendous holes were seen 
 that had evidently been made by the coughdrops administered by the 
 Vesuvius on Dr. Dynamite s prescription. The first close inspection 
 of the wrecks at the entrance of the harbor revealed the fact that the 
 Reina Mercedes did not block the channel. Further examination 
 showed two twelve-inch holes in her side, plainly establishing the fact 
 that she was sunk by one of our ships, and not by the Spaniards 
 themselves. The Spanish officers volunteered to help remove or 
 explode the mines in the harbor. Four had been exploded against 
 the Merrimac, but there were yet half a dozen that were dangerous. 
 There were also several contact mines at the right of the Merrimac, 
 going in. Those on the left of the Merrimac, the Spanish officers 
 said, had been removed to let Admiral Cervera s fleet out. Half a 
 dozen launches from the warships went about with the Spanish offi 
 cers, and eventually the mines were made harmless. 
 
 An incident of the surrender was the raising of a Cuban flag on 
 the western end of the fortifications known as water batteries. This 
 was discovered on board the New York, and orders were sent to 
 haul it down. It was an American victory on land and sea, and Old 
 Glory was the only flag to float. 
 
 Meanwhile the soldiers left on duty in Santiago had restored 
 comparative order. Immediately upon hoisting of the Stars and 
 Stripes over the Governor s palace the refugees began to crowd back 
 into the city, and the Spanish soldiers began to leave. They did not 
 pretend to go in any sort of marching order, and as they reached the 
 rifle-pits they stacked arms and went into camp. They spent the 
 time in good-natured chaffing with the men they had been seeking to 
 destroy, and ate greedily of the hard-tack that was given them. 
 General Linares and General Toral were not in the city when our 
 flag was hoisted. They remained in houses outside of the town, and 
 they remained there until a transport was read} for them to go on 
 board. 
 
400 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 The formal surrender of Santiago and its possession by the 
 army of the United States was announced to the Government at 
 Washington by General Shafter, as follows : 
 
 " I have the honor to announce that the American flag has been 
 this instant, 12 noon, hoisted over the house of the civil government 
 in the city of Santiago. An immense concourse of people was 
 present, a squadron of cavalry and a regiment of infantry presenting 
 arms, and a band playing national airs. A light battery fired a salute 
 of twenty-one guns. Perfect order is being maintained by the 
 municipal government. The distress is very great, but there is little 
 sickness in town and scarcely any yellow fever. 
 
 " Battalions of Spanish troops have been depositing arms since 
 daylight in the armory over which I have a guard. About 7,000 
 rifles, 60,000 cartridges, and many fine modern guns were given up. 
 
 " This important victory with its substantial fruits of conquest 
 was won at a loss of 1,593 men killed, wounded and missing. Law- 
 ton, who had the severe fighting around El Caney, lost 410 men; 
 Kent lost 859 men in the still more severe assault on San Juan and 
 the other conflicts of the centre ; the cavalry lost 285 men, many of 
 whom fell at El Caney. The feint of Aguadores cost 37 men. One 
 man of the signal corps was killed and one wounded. Trying as it is 
 to bear the casualties of the fight, there can be no doubt that in a 
 military sense success was not dearly won. 
 
 In forwarding to the War Department at Washington a copy of 
 the agreement between the American and Spanish commissioners for 
 the surrender of Santiago, General Shafter stated that the men, sur 
 rendered by Toral, numbered between 22,000 and 23,000, about 6,000 
 more than the Americans themselves. The following is his report of 
 the situation as he found it after the surrender : 
 
 5 The city of Santiago is simply a network of fortifications at 
 every street corner. I had no proper conception of its strength until 
 I went into it, although I knew those old stone towns were naturally 
 very strong. Everything is going admirably, so far as the transfer is 
 concerned, and the Spanish troops are behaving well. They seem 
 perfectly delighted with the idea of returning to Spain. 
 
 " I send you a copy of a telegram of General Linares to his 
 Government, which one of the Consuls gave me. It shows the straits 
 
GENERAL SH AFTER SENDS THE NEWS 401 
 
 in which the Spaniards were and the feeling that animated them. He 
 stated the case exactly. I did have him so surrounded that it was 
 impossible for him to get away, and I could wait, and he could not. 
 
 " To-morrow morning I shall send out to receive something over 
 2,000 men about thirty miles in the interior, and in two or three days 
 we shall send to Guantanamo to receive the 7,000 who have surren 
 dered there. There are also about 800 men each at Baracoa and 
 Sagua de Tanamo, on the north coast, to whom I will send an officer 
 with a Spanish guide to take their arms and military supplies. 
 
 " We have secured a great deal more than I had any idea of get 
 ting in the way of munitions of war. In everything except food the 
 Spaniards were well supplied. My only fear is that we shall have 
 some sickness, and it is for that reason that I have wired so earnestly 
 about getting the prisoners away so that we can go up into the moun 
 tains with our soldiers, fifteen or twenty miles, at the end of the rail 
 road, at San Luis, which is said to be very healthy. It is at any rate 
 about 1,500 feet above the sea, and has communication by rail with 
 Santiago. 
 
 " Of those here who served throughout the Civil War, all declare 
 they never had anything that could compare with it for hardship. 
 With only one set of clothes, officers have been, until now, rained on 
 nearly every clay, carrying three days rations, like the men, on their 
 persons, and suffering every privation in addition to all the horrors 
 of disease in an unknown land, and very limited accomodations in 
 case of sickness or injury. The spirit shown by the whole army has 
 been simply grand." 
 
 The following schedule of ordnance surrendered at Santiago was 
 officially reported to the department at Washington : 
 
 Rifles. Spanish Mausers, 16,902 ; Argent, 872 ; Remington, 
 6,118. 
 
 Carbines. Mausers, 833 ; Argent, 84 ; Remington, 330 ; 
 Revolvers, 75. 
 
 Ammunition for small arms. Mauser rifles, 1,500,000 cartridges ; 
 Argent rifles, 1,471,200 cartridges; Remington rifles, 1,660,000 
 cartridges. 
 
 The worthless small arm ammunition amounts to 973,000 
 cartridges. 
 
 22 
 
402 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 Forty-four smooth-bore siege guns and 5 mortars were also cap 
 tured, besides 30 bronze, 10 cast-iron and 8 steel guns, all rifled. 
 
 Projectiles captured. Solid shot spherical 3,55 1 ; shells spherical, 
 678 ; shells cylindrical, 1,879 ; shrapnel, 437. 
 
 GENERAL LINARES* PITIFUL STORY. 
 
 The cablegram of General Linares to the Government at Madrid, 
 referred to by General Shafter as having disclosed the true state of 
 affairs at Santiago, before the surrender was written by the Spanish 
 Commander while confined to his house by reason of wounds received 
 in battle. It was sent to Madrid by way of Havana, and is there 
 fore presumed to have had the endorsement of General Blanco. 
 It certainly set forth the situation in a deplorable light, and those 
 who afterward entered the city agreed with General Shafter that it 
 presented actual facts. The dispatch in full is as follows : 
 
 To the Minister of War ; 
 
 " Although prostrated in bed by excessive weakness and sharp 
 pains, I am preoccupied to such an extent by the terrible condition 
 of these long-suffering troops that I consider it my duty to address 
 your Excellency the Minister of War in order to expose the true 
 condition of affairs. 
 
 " The enemy s position is very strong, and his outposts are very 
 close to the limits of this city. The natural formation of the sur 
 rounding country gives our besiegers great advantages. Our lines 
 extend fourteen kilometers. 
 
 " Our troops are attenuated and the proportion of sick is con 
 siderable, but they are not allowed to go to a hospital, owing to the 
 necessity of keeping them in the trenches. Our horses have no grain 
 or forage. Under a veritable deluge we remained for twenty hours 
 at a stretch in the trenches and breastworks, soaked to the marrow, 
 with no earthly shelter or protection possible for the unfortunate 
 soldiers, who eat nothing but rice, and cannot even change or dry 
 their clothes. 
 
 * The great losses among our officers either dead, wounded, 
 sick or disappeared deprive our men of the neccessary direction and 
 command at critical moments. 
 
GENERAL LINARES PITIFUL STORY 403 
 
 " Under such conditions it would be impossible to attempt to 
 break through the enemy s ranks, as one-third of our men are too 
 feeble to walk, and would have to be left behind, while the rest would 
 be decimated and routed by the superior forces of the enemy. The 
 result of such an attempt would be a wholesale slaughter and disaster. 
 The attempt would utterly fail in the object desired by your Excel 
 lency, which is the salvation of these eleven thinned and impover 
 ished battalions. 
 
 " In order to attempt a sortie under the protection of the Hol- 
 guin division, it is in the first place necessary for those forces to 
 break through the enemy s ranks and reinforce ours before we could 
 move. On the other hand, the Holguin forces would have ahead of 
 them eight days of forced marches, and would have to bring a great 
 quantity of commissary supplies and rations, which it would be im 
 possible for them to do. Altogether the gravity of the situation is 
 appalling. The surrender of the town is inevitable ; a prolonged 
 resistance would simply mean a protraction of our death agony. The 
 sacrifice would be sterile and fruitless. 
 
 " The enemy appreciates our position perfectly, and, with our 
 lines circumvented and walled in as securely as they are, he is able to 
 drain and wipe out our forces without exposing his own, as he did 
 yesterday, cannonading us with vertical fire, while we could not see 
 or make out his batteries. Moreover, his navy has our range down 
 to so fine a point that his ships can bombard the town by sections 
 with mathematical precision. 
 
 "Santiago de Cuba is not Gerona, which was defended inch by 
 inch to the last drop of blood by women and children, by the old and 
 by the feeble, all moved by the sacred spirit of independence, and 
 animated and encouraged by the hope and promise of relief, which 
 they did actually receive. 
 
 " Here solitude alone reigns. The total population, native as 
 well as Spanish, has left the city. Not only have private individuals 
 abandoned it, but public officials and Government employes as well. 
 The clergy alone remain within our wall, and they, too, are preparing 
 to flee to-morrow, with their prelate at their head. 
 
 " Our troops are not starting to-day, fresh and vigorous, full of 
 energy and enthusiasm, on a campaign ; they are men who have 
 
404 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 struggled three long years against climatic perils, fatigue, hardships, 
 disease, and hunger, and who to-day, when called to face these trying 
 and critical conditions, are wasted away in body and soul, with no 
 earthly means or possibility of relief. 
 
 " They are fighting without spirit or nerves. They have no 
 sacred fire, no ideal to defend, for the very property they are called 
 upon to defend and protect has been abandoned before their eyes by 
 its veritable owners, many of whom are allied to the American 
 forces, strengthening those ranks against ourselves. 
 
 " The honors of arms and of war have limits, and I appeal to 
 the judgment of the Government and of the whole nation as to 
 whether these troops have not given repeated illustrations of cour 
 age, valor, and devotion, and whether they are to be further sacrificed 
 for a lost cause. 
 
 " If, for reasons of which I am ignorant, their sacrifice is 
 demanded, or if some person is required who will assume the respon 
 sibility for the inglorious end predicted in my former despatches, I 
 offer myself loyally on the altar of my country, to assume command 
 and responsibility in either case, and I will, if necessary, be alone 
 answerable for the surrender of this place, as my modest reputation 
 is of small value compared with the national welfare. 
 
 LINARES." 
 
 THE SURRENDER MUST HAVE COME. 
 
 The entry into Santiago, and the discovery of the exact situation, 
 as so pathetically described in General Linares dispatch, was a source 
 of great gratification to the army. Every one was convinced that, 
 if General Toral had not voluntarily relinquished the defense of the 
 city, he would have lost it by force of arms within forty-eight hours 
 of fighting, and that too, without a great loss to the Americans. The 
 position of the besiegers had been constantly improved. The invest 
 ment of the city had daily been growing more and more complete. 
 Not only had the lines been stretched further and further around, but 
 they had been advanced and set in better places. The artillery had been 
 put in most effective stations, so that, if firing had begun again, awful 
 damage would have been inflicted. Many of the Spanish lines had been 
 enfiladed, so that they could have been swept clear in a short time. 
 
ON THE VERGE OF STARVATION 405 
 
 The enemy appears to have known all this, for the certainty of a vast 
 destruction and the unavoidable necessity of an early capitulation 
 undoubtedly led Toral to yield when he did. 
 
 The plight among the Americans who were sick was pitiable in 
 deed, but there were enough well men to have taken Santiago with 
 less ado than many may have thought possible. Sick and well alike, 
 profited immediately from the surrender. A day s ration for some of 
 the soldiers consisted of five or six pieces of hard-tack, two potatoes 
 and an onion, but the pack trains began to come in regularly just 
 before the surrender, and with them came not only food of better 
 variety and quality, but many appliances for the sick and wounded. 
 Quantities of rations were distributed among the refugees every day, 
 at least until they began to pour back into the city, and everybody 
 was glad indeed when the tension was relaxed and the matter of 
 supplies could be systematized. 
 
 ON THE VERGE OF STARVATION. 
 
 A Cuban woman from El Caney staggered into the camp of the 
 Ninth Cavalry on the morning of the surrender. She was pale and 
 pinched, and the ragged silk dress that half covered her attenuated 
 body spoke no more of past luxury and refinement than did her 
 features, her despair, and her utter exhaustion. She did not ask for 
 food. She wanted work. She washed clothes from the hospital tent 
 for half a day in return for food, and sat down to the welcome army 
 fare with hands bleeding from the unaccustomed labor. At dusk she 
 turned wearily back toward El Caney, six miles away, richer, at least, by 
 one meal. There had been many visits paid to the camps by Cuban 
 soldiers, but none of them were as willing to work for what they got 
 as this poor woman. 
 
 On the afternoon of the surrender of Santiago, the relief ship 
 State of Texas came up the harbor loaded with food enough to 
 give something to eat to every one within the city. She was moored 
 at the principal wharf, opened her ports, and began to issue food to 
 the people who thronged to her side. Questions to the applicants 
 were unnecessary. Their emaciated faces and eager eyes told that 
 they were desperately hungry. The plight of the children was par 
 ticularly pitiful. The skin was drawn tight over their pinched faces. 
 
406 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 and the eyes of many of them had an unnatural lustre. They 
 stretched forth their skinny hands timidly, and the beseeching look 
 in their eyes went straight to the heart of every American. The 
 Spanish soldiers did not openly beg for food, but when questioned 
 they said earnestly that they were hungry, and when food was given 
 to them they devoured it ravenously. 
 
 The supplying of food to the destitute was soon reduced to a 
 system, and the policing of the city of Santiago was rapily placed 
 upon a satisfactory basis. There was no offensive display of military 
 force by the American soldiers, and the occupation of the city was 
 practically accomplished without disturbance. There was no scarcity 
 of liquor in the town, but it was not sold openly. There was no 
 clashing between the forces that had been so bitterly opposed to each 
 other, and thus within thirty days after the landing of Shafter s army 
 on Cuban soil, the entire province, as well as the city of Santiago, 
 was in the peaceful possession of our arms. 
 
 THE EXCHANGE OF LIEUTENANT HOBSON. 
 
 Among the incidents preceding the raising of the Stars and 
 Stripes at Santiago was the exchange of Lieutenant Hobson and the 
 seamen who had composed the crew of the Merrimac when she was 
 sunk in the harbor. Hobson and his men were held as prisoners of 
 war by the Spaniards until the 6th of July ; the fleet of Cervera had 
 been sunk, the battles of Guasimas, El Caney, and San Juan Hill had 
 been fought, and these brave sailors were shut away from the active 
 operations. Several efforts had been made to secure their exchange, 
 but for some time these efforts were unavailing. Admiral Cervera 
 had taken such a deep interest in Hobson s exploit that it was tacitly 
 understood that he had become personally responsible for the hero 
 of the Merrimac, and there was no doubt, after the first few days, 
 that an exchange would eventually be made. 
 
 It was thought at first that the Spanish Government would 
 excuse their delay in consenting to an exchange on the ground that 
 Hobson had had full opportunity during his detention to observe the 
 character of the defences, and to gather other military information 
 that might be disastrous to the Spanish, if disclosed to the American 
 naval and military commanders. Captain-General Blanco, in Havana, 
 
THE EXCHANGE OF LIEUTENANT HOBSON 407 
 
 authorized a statement to this effect , but the point was made on the 
 part of the United States that this reason would, of course, disap 
 pear upon the capture of Santiago, and when Cervera s fleet had been 
 destroyed, and the surrender of the city was only a matter of time, 
 it was easier for an exchange to be brought about. 
 
 On the morning of the 6th of July the Spanish authorities con 
 sented to make the exchange, and a truce was established for that 
 purpose. The place selected for the exchange was under a tree 
 between the Spanish and American lines, two-thirds of a mile beyond 
 the entrenchments occupied by the Rough Riders, near General 
 Wheeler s headquarters. The America!! prisoners left the Reina 
 Mercedes Hospital, on the outskirts of Santiago, where they had 
 been confined after their first week or so in the Morro, just before 
 3 o clock in the afternoon, in charge of Major Irles, a Spanish staff 
 officer, who spoke English perfectly. The prisoners were conducted 
 to the meeting place on foot, but were not blindfolded. The Spanish 
 prisoners to be exchanged were Lieutenants Volez and Aurelius, both 
 of the Twenty-ninth Regiment Infantry, who had been captured at 
 El Caney on the preceding Friday, and Lieutenant Adolfo Aries, of 
 the First Provisional Regiment of Barcelona, one of the most aristo 
 cratic organizations of the Spanish army. There were also fourteen 
 non-commissioned officers and privates. Lieutenant Aries and a 
 number of the men had been wounded in the fight at El Caney, but 
 none of them seriously. The Spanish prisoners were brought through 
 the American lines mounted and blindfolded, in charge of Colonel 
 John Jacob Astor and Lieutenant Miley, accompanied by Interpreter 
 Maestro. 
 
 The meeting between Colonel Astor and Major Irles was 
 extremely courteous and extremely formal. No attempt was made by 
 either of them to discuss anything but the matter in hand. To Major 
 Irles was given a choice of one of the three Spanish lieutenants in 
 exchange for Hobson ; and he was also informed that he could have 
 all of the fourteen men in exchange for the American sailors. Lieu 
 tenant Aries was selected, and the other two Spanish officers were 
 conducted back to Juragua. 
 
 The exchange took place at 4 o clock. Just as the two parties 
 were separating, Major Irles turned and said, courteously enough, but 
 
408 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 in a tone which gave his hearers the impression that he desired hos 
 tilities to be renewed at once : 
 
 " Our understanding is, gentlemen, that this truce comes to an 
 end at 5 o clock." 
 
 Colonel Astor looked at his watch, bowed to the Spanish officer, 
 without making any reply, and then slowly started back to the Ameri 
 can lines, with Hobson and his companions. 
 
 WILD WELCOME FROM AMERICAN TROOPS, 
 
 The meeting of the two parties and the exchange of prisoners 
 had taken place in full view of both the American and Spanish sol 
 diers who were entrenched near the meeting place, and the keenest 
 interest was manifested in the episode. As Hobson and the men of 
 the Merrimac approached the first line of entrenchments, which hap 
 pened to be occupied by the Rough Riders, low murmurs ran from 
 one end of the line of cowboys and athletes to the other, and by the 
 time the party reached them every man was on his feet cheering 
 wildly and rushing over every obstacle that chanced to be in the way, in 
 the effort to reach Hobson and his party and grasp them by the hand. 
 
 The released prisoners were soon surrounded. They were com 
 pelled to stop and receive the greetings, congratulations and heart 
 felt handshakings of men they had never seen before. Sunburned 
 cavalrymen who had spent their lives on the plains, and who did not 
 know the difference between a ship s maintop, bilge or keel, threw 
 their arms around the sailor boys and literally dragged them over the 
 entrenchments, all the time sending out yells that, under other cir 
 cumstances, might well have struck terror to hearts even as gallant as 
 the heroes of the Merrimac. 
 
 In the entrenchments next to the Rough Riders were the Sev 
 enty-first New York Volunteers, and Hobson and his men now had 
 to run the. gauntlet of their greeting. Almost immediately afterward 
 the Ninth and Tenth Cavalry, both colored regiments, joined in the 
 general enthusiasm, and cheer after cheer arose as Hobson and his 
 companions forced their way through the lines of white and colored 
 soldiers. 
 
 Hobson, as far as possible, grasped each hand extended toward 
 him, and neither he nor his men made any protest against the uncom- 
 
HOBSON MEETS GENERAL SHAFTER 409 
 
 fortable crowding and jostling which they had to undergo. If the 
 young officer, whose home is in Alabama, had any race prejudice 
 he certainly forgot all about it as he passed through the lines of 
 soldiers. 
 
 These prisoners, so recently set free, saw only the uniforms of 
 the United States army, and the Southerner who had distinguished 
 himself so gallantly cared not for the color of the wearers of the uni 
 form. He grasped the hands of the colored cavalrymen and ex 
 pressed his thanks for their patriotic welcome with as much hearti 
 ness as he displayed toward men of his own color. He and all of 
 his men were completely overcome by the reception accorded them, 
 and tears rolled down their cheeks as the soldiers crowded around. 
 
 When the crew of the Merrimac approached Grimes Battery, a 
 great cry went up for the firing of a salute in their honor. Hobson 
 protested against this, and called out to the artillerymen, who had 
 caught the infection, not to fire their guns. Some of the more en 
 thusiastic soldiers, however, appealed to Colonel Astor, and he, enter 
 ing into the spirit of the occasion, told the men they need not obey 
 Hobson s orders, as he was "only a lieutenant anyway/ The offi 
 cers of the battery, however, prevented the men from firing the guns 
 for fear the Spaniards might mistake it for the re-opening of the 
 attack, and if the latter had responded the American soldiers were in 
 no position, in their state of disorder and enthusiasm, to repel an 
 assault. 
 
 HOBSON MEETS GENERAL SHAFTER. 
 
 Hobson first paid his respects to General Wheeler, who was 
 nearest at hand, after which he started for General Shafter s head 
 quarters, still accompanied by his men. Word of the coming of the 
 party ran along ahead of them, and regiment after regiment lined up 
 to greet and hail the heroes. On the way to Shafter s position they 
 met Captain Chadwick, of the New York, and Lieutenant Staunton, 
 assistant chief of staff, who had been conferring with General Shafter, 
 and who were then on their way to visit the firing lines. Warm 
 greetings were exchanged by the naval officers, and Hobson pressed 
 forward. After a short visit to General Shafter, Hobson rode to 
 Siboney, off which place the New York was lying. Here he and his 
 men were greeted with another tremendous ovation. 
 
410 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 The single street of the little village was blocked with soldiers, 
 Cuban camp followers and sailors from the transports. Cheer after 
 cheer went up for Hobson and his sailors. They kept up a continu 
 ous smiling, bowing, all the while insisting that they had merely done 
 what every American soldier or sailor would do if the opportunity 
 offered. 
 
 Hobson s reception on board the New York was equally enthusi 
 astic as it was throughout all the fleet. He had very little to say 
 about himself, but one thing he did say was that from his place of con 
 finement in the hospital, after being taken from Morro Castle, he saw 
 the battle of the preceding Friday, and, as he looked on that gallant 
 charge of the Rough Riders and the colored troops of the Tenth 
 Cavalry up the San Juan Ridge, he had said to himself that none but 
 American soldiers could have won such a victory. 
 
 Lieutenant Hobson impressed all who met him with his evidently 
 sincere desire not to have the incident of the sinking of the Merrim >c 
 made more of than a simple performance of a sailor s duty. He 
 talked in a straightforward manner about the incident, and did not 
 seem to think that he and his men had been in any great danger while 
 confined in Morro. 
 
 "In Morro," said Lieutenant Hobson, "we were confined in cells 
 in the inner side of the fortress, and were there the first day the fleet 
 bombarded the castle. I could only hear the whistling of the shells 
 and the noise they made when they struck, but I judged from the 
 conversation of the guards that the shells did considerable damage. 
 After this bombardment Mr. Ramsden, the British Consul, protested, 
 and we were removed to the hospital. There I was separated from 
 the other men in our crew and could see them only by special per 
 mission. Montague and Kelly fell ill from malaria two weeks after we 
 were captured, and I was permitted to visit them twice. Mr. Rams- 
 den was very kind to us, and demanded that the sick men be removed 
 to better quarters in the hospital. This was done. As for myself 
 there is little to say. The Spanish were not disposed to do much for 
 any of the prisoners at first, but, after our army had taken some of 
 their men as prisoners, our treatment was better. Food was scarce 
 in the city, and I was told that we fared better than the Spanish 
 officers." 
 
THE FIRST TROOPS IN CUBA 411 
 
 The announcement of the exchange of Lieutenant Hobson and 
 his men was officially made to Washington by General Shafter as 
 follows : 
 
 PLAY A DEL ESTE, July 6, 1898. 
 HEADQUARTERS FIFTH ARMY CORPS. 
 Secretary of War, Washington : 
 
 Lieutenant Hobson and all of his men have just been received 
 safely in exchange for one Spanish officer and other prisoners taken by 
 United States All in good health, except two seamen convalescing 
 from remittent fever. SHAFTER, 
 
 Major- General, Commanding. 
 
 THE FIRST TROOPS IN CUBA. 
 
 The engagements which resulted in the capture of Santiago 
 were the last battles that took place on Cuban soil. It was only two 
 months, however, before this that the first landing of troops had 
 been made. A portion of the First Regiment, U. S. Infantry, did 
 the fighting in the original instance, and the vessel on which they 
 proceeded from Key West to Cuba, was the Gussie. 
 
 The commander of the expedition was Colonel J. H. Dorst, 
 U. S. V., and the troops accompanying him were as follows : 
 
 Company E, First Infantry, 60 men and Captain J. J, O Connell 
 and Second Lieutenant W. M. Crofton ; Company G, First Infantry, 
 60 men and Captain M. P. Phister, First Lieutenant F. E. Lacey 
 and Second Lieutenant D E. Nolan. The object of the expedition 
 was to effect a junction with the Cuban troops that were supposed to 
 be in the western part of the island, and to provide for the landing of 
 stores and ammunition for the insurgents. 
 
 One bright May morning, the Gussie left Key West and 
 essayed to make a landing on the north coast of Cuba, a little to the 
 east of Mariel. The Cubans on board, who were to be put on shore 
 at the first opportunity, to act as scouts and guides for the expedi- 
 tion,made an inspection of the lay of the land from on shipboard, and 
 decided that they would prefer to land elsewhere. The whole 
 country-side seemed to know of the coming of the expedition. 
 Whenever the Gussie got anywhere near the shore, a Spanish 
 soldier would take a shot at her, but without effect, and as the vessel 
 
412 THE SURRENDER OF SANTIAGO 
 
 proceeded on down the coast, squads of Spanish cavalry could be 
 seen keeping her in sight, evidently determined to prevent the carry 
 ing out of her plans. Off Cabanas a drizzling rain began to fall 
 which soon turned into a regular drenching tropical downpour. After 
 that, nothing more was seen of the Spanish cavalry, and the com 
 mander of the Gussie decided to land his scouts at Arbolitos Point. 
 
 FIERCE FIRING IN THE JUNGLE. 
 
 Three Cuban scouts went off first in a light skiff, to show the 
 way over the reef, but their boat was capsized, and they had to swim 
 and wade to shore. Two boats carrying about 40 men of Company 
 E, commanded by Captain O Connell and Lieutenant Crofton, next 
 started. O Connell s boat was upset on the reef and Lieutenant 
 Crofton s command therefore, was the first to land upon Cuban soil. 
 Captain O Connell presently reached the beach about 300 yards to 
 the right. 
 
 Both parties went ahead in skirmish lines and dissappeared from 
 the sight of those on board the Gussie in a network of shrubbery. 
 Two minutes later the silence was broken by heavy volleys of mus 
 ketry followed by the sharp cracking of skirmish firing. It was hard 
 to tell exactly what had happened, but evidently the skirmishers had 
 stumbled upon Spaniards in the jungle. 
 
 The advancing Americans had clambered over a line of Spanish 
 rifle-pits, unoccupied, but when Captain O Connell and his party 
 finally came out upon a grass-grown road, they encountered about 50 
 Spanish guerillas, some mounted and some on foot, all evidently 
 pushing on with the greatest haste to reach the rifle-pits. 
 
 The guerillas were the first to fire. One bullet found lodge 
 ment in the arm of a newspaperman, but all the rest went wild of 
 their mark. Our men, facing about and firing at ease, brought down 
 four of the Spaniards. The exhibition of marksmanship thoroughly 
 demoralized the guerillas, who made off into the jungle, firing wildly 
 as they retreated. Private Metzler, of Company E, brought down 
 the commanding officer of the band, who proved to be a Lieutenant 
 of that crack corps, the Civil Guard. 
 
 Lieutenant Crofton and his command now came up from the 
 left and both commands gave chase to the fugitives. The gunboats 
 
FIRED UPON FROM AMBUSH 413 
 
 tore the jungle and the chapparal at the right of the skirmishers with 
 shot and shell, and the infantry fired half a dozen volleys in the same 
 general direction. Now and again a shot came back in reply, but the 
 Spaniards were more fleet of foot than accurate of aim, and nothing 
 more was seen of them. 
 
 The first action of the war fought on Cuban soil between 
 Spanish and American troops resulted decidedly in favor of the 
 United States. The enemy had lost at least four dead, whose bodies 
 were seen, and doubtless more were killed or wounded by the heavy 
 firing from the vessels. Lieutenant Crofton brought back with him 
 to the Gussie, as prisoner of war, a charcoal burner who had given 
 the first landing party misinformation, and who was thought to have 
 been a decoy in the pay of the Spaniards. 
 
 Another incident of this expedition took place after the Cubans 
 had been landed who were to make the connection with the camp of 
 their compatriots. The Gussie, still proceeding along the coast, 
 caught sight of a white flag, extended to the breeze from a tall palm 
 tree. It would be waved for a minute or two and then vanish, but 
 only to reappear, some moments later, a few hundred yards to the 
 westward. 
 
 FIRED UPON FROM AMBUSH. 
 
 The commander of the Giissie, and many others on board, looked 
 upon this as a signal from Cuban friends who were kindly guiding 
 the expedition toward a safe place for further landing, but suddenly, 
 when the Giissie had been lured to within 300 yards of the beach, the 
 Spaniards opened fire from two field batteries concealed in the jungle 
 of shrubbery and vines. In this instance, as usual, the Spaniards 
 displayed very poor marksmanship, and no damage was done. 
 
 Their presence and their readiness, however, convinced those in 
 charge of the expedition that the stores and ammunitions on board 
 the Gussie could not be landed with any assurance of their escaping 
 the Spaniards. The land had been approached at three points where 
 meetings with the insurgents had been pre-arranged, and in each 
 case the Cubans had not been able to keep their engagement. In 
 view of the Spanish force along the coast it would have been poor 
 policy for them to have appeared, so the Gussie flew to the breeze 
 the homeward bound pennant and sailed back to Key West. 
 
CHAPTER XXII 
 
 The Campaign in Porto Rico 
 
 General Miles Plans for the Invasion of the Island. Preliminary Operations by 
 Sampson s Fleet. Bombardment of San Juan de Porto Rico. Miles in Charge 
 of the Army Expedition. Troops Meet with but Little Resistance. Spanish 
 Officers and the People Cheer the American Flag. Capture of Towns, and 
 Movements of the Army. The First Steps Toward Peace, in Washington. The 
 French Ambassador Consults our President and Secretary of State on Behalf of 
 Spain. As the Guns of Pennsylvania Troops were being Placed in Position for a 
 Battle, Word Came from Washington, Announcing that Fighting Must Cease. 
 The Last Scenes and Shots of the War. 
 
 WHEN Santiago surrendered, the attention of the army and 
 navy was turned toward Porto Rico. The power of the 
 United States had already been manifested there, through 
 the naval arm of its service, by the bombardment of San Juan, the 
 capital of the island, about two months earlier. 
 
 When the fleet of Cervera was known to be at sea somewhere 
 between Spain and the West Indies, it had been thought advisable 
 to make sure that San Juan should not be a fit stopping place for the 
 coming Spanish men-of-war ; and, moreover, it had been deemed wise 
 to obtain a moral effect that could not be overlooked by letting the 
 world in general, and Spain in particular, see something more of what 
 Uncle Sam s gunners could do. 
 
 At midnight of May 3d the fighting squadron of Admiral Samp 
 son left Key West eastward bound. The Admiral really hoped to 
 meet the Spanish fleet at Porto Rico, and, by destroying it, to strike 
 such a blow to Spain as would force her to sue for peace. In any 
 event the other objects enumerated were to be accomplished, so there 
 was nothing of the nature of an experimental excursion about the 
 expedition. 
 
 Sampson had with him the New York as his flagship, and the 
 battleships Iowa and Indiana^ the monitors Amphitnte and Terror, 
 the cruisers Montgomery and Ddroit, and the torpedo boat Porter. 
 
4 i 6 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 The cruise was slow from the start. On the nth the fleet crossed 
 Mona Passage. At 5 o clock that afternoon the Admiral moved his 
 flag to the Iowa, issued orders for the disposition of the vessels of the 
 fleet, and waited for the morning. 
 
 In the dim light of early dawn, the Morro (for every Spanish 
 port seems to have a castle of this name) loomed up like a gray moun 
 tain of stone as the Iowa steamed slowly across the channel under 
 its guns. The sentinel on the watchtower could be heard giving 
 the alarm to the city and garrison. General quarters had been 
 sounded on board the vessels at half-past four, and, though it was not 
 yet sunrise, the order was given to hoist colors as the vessels were in 
 motion, and, just as the Detroit passed the point of Morro, " Old 
 Glory " was flaunted in the face of the enemy. 
 
 THE FIGHT BEGINS. 
 
 Almost on the minute of 5 o clock the Iowa fired the first shot 
 of the engagement. Quick as a flash the Dons answered, and the 
 fight was on. With the Iowa in the lead, the big battleships steamed 
 slowly by and delivered their broadsides. It was a sort of a reveille 
 that the Spaniards were not used to being awakened by ; but they 
 were not slow in getting into action, and their responses to the guns 
 of the Americans were a long way from feeble. 
 
 The line of the big battleships was just fifty-five minutes in pass 
 ing, and, during that time, the Detroit stood still and allowed herself 
 to be used as a target for the guns from the entire range of forts. It 
 was this that caused Captain Bob Evans to remark to Admiral Samp 
 son on the bridge of the Iowa: "The Detroit is the gamecock of the 
 squadron." As the Iowa passed, however, the Detroit got under way 
 and slowly moved out, and presently her guns were doing their full 
 share in the bombardment. 
 
 From the topmast of the Iowa streamed in brilliant colored flags, 
 " Remember the Maine." Behind her came the huge Indiana, of 
 such enormous bulk that she rode almost steady even upon that heav 
 ing sea. Then followed the New York, almost as formidable as a 
 battleship, the low-lying monitors Amphitrite and Terror, with the 
 Montgomery and Porter marking the limits of the course over which 
 this line of seafighters was passing. 
 
MANEUVERING DURING THE FIGHT 417 
 
 First the starboard broadsides were brought to bear. One of 
 the great 1 3-inch guns of the Iowa belched forth flame, and a shell 
 sailed high toward Morro. It fell short, but the response was a 
 roar from all the batteries and forts along the shore. It was a 
 tremendous burst of sound and smoke and flame a shower of shells 
 that wasted themselves in the sea. So wild was the volley that even if 
 the Iowa had been within range, none of the shots would have hit her. 
 
 Presently, however, all the vessels drew in nearer to the shore. 
 Each ship was now firing, and each shore gun was answering. The 
 Spanish aim was wild, but the American gunners fired with the calm 
 ness and precision of experienced target practice. The fleet and the 
 shore were soon enveloped in smoke. Only outlines could be made 
 out ; but it was apparent that, while the Spanish shells issued from 
 the smoke of the shore to fall into the sea, the American shells rushed 
 from the fleet s envelope of smoke to bury themselves in the smoke 
 on shore, and, now and then, as the wind drifted the thick gray cur 
 tain aside, it could be seen that the American ships were uninjured, 
 and that on shore the line of fortifications, that had at first been 
 unbroken, was torn and ruined in many places. 
 
 NO GREAT DAMAGE DONE. 
 
 When the Iowa came up to the "stakeboat," she turned and led 
 the column back again across the line of fire, and the above scene 
 was thus, repeated again and again. The Spanish shells did not all 
 go wild, though none of them did any great damage. One shell 
 struck a boat on the Iowa, passed through it and entered the super 
 structure, scattering splinters in every direction. Three men were 
 injured, Admiral Sampson and Captain Evans were on the lower 
 bridge, and narrowly escaped the flying fragments. 
 
 In all, the Iowa was hit nine times. She was struck once by a 
 i4-centimeter shell at a distance of about 5,000 yards. The shell 
 came over the stern of the ship, broke off an 8-inch iron stanchion, 
 demolished a wooden boat in which it exploded and set fire to the 
 canvas covering and the splinters that had been made. The shell 
 itself burst into many pieces. One fragment went downward and 
 struck near the port 8-inch waist gun where 12 men were stationed. 
 One man was killed and several others injured. 
 
4 i 8 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 After two hours of this sort of work the day had become furi 
 ously hot, so hot that men were fainting below the decks and at the 
 guns. The gunners were streaming with perspiration. A gunner s 
 mate on the Amphitrite was overcome, and died in a few hours. But 
 the battle went on. The fire from the ships was unabated. Many 
 of the Spanish guns were silenced, but when the shore batteries 
 could be seen it was evident that the Spanish gunners were becoming 
 demoralized. They seemed to be drunk with fury. They loaded 
 and fired like madmen, without aiming, without any appearance of 
 discipline or direction, and seemed to be in such a crazed condition 
 that they performed such absurd acts as waving their swords, shaking 
 their fists and discharging pistols at the warships that were pepper 
 ing them from far out in the harbor. 
 
 o 
 
 The man on the watchtower of the Morro, who had given the 
 alarm to the city, stood at his post through the whole fight, and it 
 was said on board the vessels that his bravery was so much admired 
 that no one made any special effort to dislodge him from the eyrie to 
 which his duty had assigned him. He marched up and down on the 
 parapet through all the three hours rain of shot and shell, and was 
 still there when the fleet, satisfied that the defences of the harbor had 
 been badly crippled, and knowing that the city had been set on fire 
 by the bombardment, ceased firing and drew away. 
 
 Next day, at St. Thomas, it was ascertained that San Juan had 
 been practically destroyed. Nothing had been seen of Cervera s 
 fleet and Admiral Sampson had thought best, after inflicting the 
 punishment of this eventful day, to leave the enemy to their own 
 devices for the present. No further operations were carried on 
 against any portion of Porto Rico until two months later when 
 General Miles and General Brooke invaded the island at another 
 point. 
 
 THE EXPEDITION TO CONQUER THE ISLAND. 
 
 The operations against Porto Rico, following the destruction of 
 Cervera s fleet and the surrender of Santiago, were largely prompted 
 by the desire of the United States not to enter empty-handed 
 into a peace parley. It was plainly evident to the authorities at 
 Washington that the end of the war was near at hand, and the pos 
 session of Porto Rico was an important desideratum. To bring 
 
EXPEDITION TO CONQUER THE ISLAND 4*9 
 
 about this possession three expeditions were sent. The first, under 
 General Miles, sailed from Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, July 2ist; the 
 second, which was part of General Brooke s command, sailed from 
 Charleston also on July 2ist, with General Ernst as brigade com 
 mander, and the third, under General Brooke himself, embarked at 
 Newport News, on July 26th. 
 
 All these expeditions, aggregating about 11,000 men, were con 
 voyed by warships and were successfully landed. The first, under 
 General Miles, reached Guanicaat daylight on July 25th. A Spanish 
 force attempted to resist the landing, but a few well-directed shells 
 from the Massachusetts, Gloucester and Columbia soon put the enemy 
 to flight. The Gloucester (formerly J. Pierpont Morgan s yacht 
 Corsair^), commanded by Lieutenant Commander Wainwright, was 
 then headed into the port with orders to send a party on shore. 
 
 The harbor of Guanica is a veritable haven of rest, with high 
 mountains for a background, a bay of considerable extent, a plateau 
 of cultivated meadow land stretching from the beach to the mountains, 
 a score or so of prettily painted houses on the line of the shore, a 
 sugar mill on the right, a blockhouse distant a couple of miles on the 
 left, and, directly in front of the place, a smaller blockhouse, before 
 which floated the Spanish flag. 
 
 The Gloucester made direct for this flagstaff. When she came 
 to a stop, thirty men, under Lieutenant Huse, were sent ashore in the 
 launch. The Spaniards began to fire upon them. The Americans 
 replied with their rifles and machine guns, and several shots were 
 also fired from the vessels in the harbor. This served to scatter the 
 Spaniards from the vicinity of the flagstaff, around which the Ameri 
 can sailors soon rallied, pulled clown the red and yellow flag of Spain, 
 and hoisted the Stars and Stripes. 
 
 This action on the part of the Americans seemed to greatly 
 enrage the Spaniards. They set their gunners at work right merrily 
 in all the little batteries alono- the shore, and their soldiers fired from 
 
 o 
 
 around the corners of the houses in the town, but the American ves 
 sels continued to fire into their midst, and the landing party quickly 
 threw up an entrenchment across the street, mounted a Colt rapid- 
 fire gun on its centre, tangled some barbed wire in front of this im 
 provised entrenchment, signalled for reinforcements, and then opened 
 
420 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 fire with the Colt. The result was that five of the enemy were killed, 
 while not one American was even wounded, and no further resistance 
 was made on the part of the Spaniards. 
 
 General Miles then went on shore and personally superintended 
 the landing. Boatload after boatload of men, and long strings of 
 boats, towed by the steam launches of the Massachusetts, made for 
 the shore. The troops formed into companies and promptly occu 
 pied points of vantage in the neighborhood. A strong detachment 
 of troops was sent to Yauco, a small place about five miles inland, 
 which forms the western terminus of the railroad leading to Ponce, 
 15 miles distant, due east. The troops accompanying General Miles 
 from. Guantanamo were batteries C and F of the Third Artillery, and 
 B and F of the Fourth Artillery, Loniras Battery of the Fifth Artil 
 lery, the Sixth Illinois Volunteers, the Sixth Massachusetts, 275 
 recruits of the Fifth Corps, 60 men of the Signal Corps and Seventh 
 Hospital Corps 3,415 men all told. 
 
 It had been expected by the War Department at Washington 
 that the first landing in Porto Rico would have been made at Fajarclo, 
 but General Miles cabled by way of St Thomas that the circum 
 stances were such that he had deemed it advisable to take the harbor 
 of Guanica first. There was considerable friction in connection with 
 this change in the programme, which some of the Washington 
 authorities claimed had been made unwisely by General Miles, but 
 the General of the army, being upon the spot, evidently considered 
 himself the best judge of the situation. 
 
 THE SURRENDER OF PONCE. 
 
 General Miles arrived at Port Ponce, having marched with his 
 division from Guanica on the morning of July 28th. General Frnst s 
 brigade and General Wilson s division of the First Army Corps, which 
 had left Charleston on the 2 ist, arrived the same morning. They 
 found the port already under American control. It had been surren 
 dered to Commander C. H. Davis, of the gunboat Dixie, on the 27th. 
 There was no resistance, and the Americans were welcomed with 
 enthusiasm. General Ernst s brigade immediately started for the 
 town of Ponce, three miles inland, which also promptly capitulated, 
 and where a still warmer welcome was given to the invaders. 
 

 THE MARKET PLACE, PONCE, PORTO RICO. 
 
 THE CUSTOM HOUSE. PONCE. PORTO RICO, AFTER THE RAISING OF THE AMERICAN 
 
 FLAG BY GENERAL MILES. 
 
A PROCLAMATION 423 
 
 Ferdinand Toro, the British Consul, acting in behalf of the 
 Spaniards, placed the city in the possession of General Miles, with 
 whom was General James H. Wilson, commanding the First Division 
 of the First Army Corps. The scene was more like one on a gala 
 clay than one involving the surrender of a city. A majority of the 
 residents remained in the city to welcome the Americans. The cere 
 mony was unique. General Miles and General Wilson, by a pre 
 arranged plan, had been driven from the American headquarters at 
 Port Ponce to Casa del Rey, in the city proper, where Consul Toro 
 and the Mayor awaited them. The bombero, or city fire brigade, was 
 drawn up opposite the casa, and as General Miles and General Wilson 
 left their carriages the fire brigade band played a Sousa march. Guards 
 in front of the building forced away for the American generals, and 
 through the cheering crowd they marched into the building. 
 
 Consul Toro said to General Miles that the citizens of Ponce 
 were anxious to know if the same municipal officers, and system as 
 had been in vogue would be continued temporarily. He was assured 
 that municipal affairs would not be disturbed for the time being, but 
 it was explained that all would be responsible to General Wilson, as 
 Military Governor, who would keep the city under a form of martial 
 law which would be oppressive to none. 
 
 General Miles and General Wilson then stepped out on the 
 balcony to view the square. The crowd cheered wildly, and the two 
 American generals hastily withdrew. They received an ovation as 
 they made their way back to headquarters, and all that afternoon the 
 Porto Ricans continued to arrive in carriages, on bicycles and on 
 foot to cheer the generals and the troops. General Miles principle 
 of purchasing or renting everything used by the army had a most ex 
 cellent and immediate effect, and this was enhanced by the prompt 
 employment of several hundred natives as stevedores. 
 
 A PROCLAMATION. 
 
 General Miles added still further to the good understanding 
 between the Americans and the Porto Ricans by issuing the follow 
 ing proclamation : 
 
 " In the prosecution of the war against the Kingdom of Spain 
 by the people of the United States, in the cause of liberty, justice 
 
424 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 and humanity, its military forces have come to occupy the island of 
 Porto Rico. They come bearing the banners of freedom, inspired by 
 a noble purpose, to seek the enemies of our Government and of 
 yours, and to destroy or capture all in armed resistance. 
 
 " They bring you the fostering arms of a free people, whose 
 greatest power is justice and humanity to all living within their fold. 
 Hence they release you from your former political relations, and, it 
 is hoped, insure your cheerful acceptance of the Government of the 
 United States. 
 
 " The chief object of the American military forces will be to 
 overthrow the armed authority of Spain and give the people of your 
 beautiful island the largest measure of liberty consistent with this 
 military occupation. They have not come to make war on the people 
 of the country, who for centuries have been oppressed, but, on the 
 contrary, they bring protection not only to yourselves, but to your 
 property, promote your prosperity, and bestow the immunities and 
 blessings of our enlightenment and liberal institutions and government. 
 
 " It is not their purpose to interfere with existing laws and cus 
 toms, which are wholesome and beneficial to the people, so long as 
 they conform to the rules of the military administration, order and 
 justice. This is not a war of devastation and desolation, but one to 
 give all within the control of the military and naval forces the advan 
 tages and blessings of enlightened civilization." 
 
 One of the first acts of General Wilson, as Military Governor of 
 Porto Rico, was to release the political prisoners. One of these was 
 charged with having cut the telegraph wire between Ponce and San 
 Juan the night before the Americans arrived and would have been 
 killed on the following clay. The first thing these political ex- 
 prisoners thought of, when once they breathed free air again, was to 
 see their friends and relatives ; the next was vengeance. They 
 promptly corralled the Spaniards who had put them into prison, and 
 dragged them before General Wilson, expecting no cloubt that they 
 would immediately be put to death, but General Wilson released the 
 Spaniards and told the Porto Ricans that the redress they expected 
 was not his to give. 
 
 There came also to General Wilson, a large delegation of Porto 
 Rican priests who wanted to know what provision the United States 
 
ENTHUSIASM AT YAUCO 425 
 
 Government intended to make for the churches. The Military 
 Governor informed them that, under the Constitution of the United 
 States, no appropriations could be made to religious organizations, 
 and that the churches would have to support themselves. The 
 editors of several newspapers also came to General Wilson to ask, if 
 they must suspend publication, but the General told them to " go 
 ahead and print the news." 
 
 While these matters were running so smoothly at Ponce, how 
 ever, General Garreton s brigade, which had remained in the vicinity 
 of Guanica, had a spirited engagement on skirmish lines, July 26th. 
 The Americans were making an advance upon Yauco when they 
 were met by the enemy and a lively fifteen minutes fight ensued. 
 Four men of the Sixth Massachusetts were wounded, but none 
 seriously, while three of the Spaniards were killed and thirteen were 
 wounded. Yauco was reached on the 28th, and was then added to 
 the towns that were fast coming into American possession. 
 
 ENTHUSIASM AT YAUCO. 
 
 At Yauco the enthusiasm of the Porto Ricans was even more 
 marked than at Ponce. When the Spaniards had been driven away 
 the citizens greeted the soldiers with as much enthusiasm as if they 
 had been men of their own blood returning from victory over a com 
 mon enemy. The Mayor of the town promptly issued the following 
 proclamation : 
 
 44 Citizens! On to-day the citizens of Porto Rico assist in one of 
 her most beautiful fetes the sun of America shines upon our moun 
 tains and valleys this day of July, 1898. It is a day of glorious 
 remembrance for each son of this beloved isle, because for the first 
 time there waves over us a flag of the stars, planted in the name of 
 the Government of the United States of America, by the Major- 
 General of the American army, Senor Miles. 
 
 44 Porto Ricans, we are by the miraculous intervention of the God 
 of the just, given back to the bosom of our mother, America, in 
 whose waters Nature placed us as people of America. To her we 
 are given back in the name of her Government by General Miles, 
 and we must send her our most expressive salutation of generous 
 affection through our conduct towards the valiant troops represented 
 
426 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 by distinguished officers and commanded by the illustrious General 
 Miles. Citizens, long live the Government of the United States of 
 America. Hail to their valiant troops ! Hail, Porto Rico, always 
 American. "ALCALDE FRANCISCO MEGIA." 
 
 " Yauco, Porto Rico, United States of America. 
 
 This proclamation was acted upon by the people without hesita 
 tion. All day the bands played in the public square, the balconies 
 were filled with people, and dancing with the soldiers was the popular 
 amusement of the Porto Rican belles. At night the town was illumi 
 nated, and half a dozen receptions were given. The only disturbing 
 elements were reports that came in from time to time that the 
 Spaniards had been re-inforced and were coming back, but the 
 American soldiers speedily dispelled these fears and the revelry went 
 on till long after midnight. 
 
 Guanica had been the first town captured, Ponce was next sur 
 rendered, and Yauco was third. The fourth town to be taken posses 
 sion of was Juan Diaz. This was captured by the Sixteenth Pennsyl 
 vania Volunteers, under command of Colonel Willis J. Hulings, 
 subsequently promoted to a Brigadier-Generalship in recognition of 
 his services here and at Coamo. This was the first Pennsylvania 
 regiment to get a baptism of fire. The Tenth had not yet gotten 
 into any engagements in Manila, and the Fourth, which was part of 
 the Second Brigade of General Wilson s division, did not get an 
 opportunity at this early date. 
 
 On August ist, Arroyo was added to the captured towns. It 
 came into the possession of the United States without a struggle. 
 When the sun rose over the picturesque village that morning, it was, 
 nominally at least, in possession of the Spanish, but the gunboat 
 Gloucester arrived at 9 A.M., sent a landing party on shore, and before 
 noon the Stars and Stripes were flying over the Custom House. The 
 only two declared Spaniards in the place the Captain of the port 
 and a priest were brought out to the Gloucester as prisoners, but 
 were released on parole. A city judge and His Honor the Mayor 
 were subsequently discovered and similarly treated. 
 
 A careful investigation of the neighborhood disclosed the fact 
 that, if there had been any Spanish soldiers there, they had made 
 good their escape before the appearance of the gunboat, but the 
 
FIGHTING FOR THE PENNSYLVANIANS 427 
 
 Gloucester, not wishing to seem to have made such an easy capture, 
 dropped a couple of shells into the woods above the town, where 
 half a dozen horsemen were seen toward evening, and if these were 
 a squad of Spanish cavalry, they speedily joined the main body of 
 their command somewhere far away, for no resistance of any sort was 
 offered. 
 
 Six or eight miles to the westward of Arroyo was the more im 
 portant town of Guayama. This fell into the hands of General Brooke 
 the day after he landed with General Haines brigade, where the 
 Gloucester had made sure of a clear footing, at Arroyo. In this 
 brigade were the Fourth Ohio, the Third Illinois, and the Fourth 
 Pennsylvania. There was a garrison of 250 at Guayama, and General 
 Brooke determined to send an adequate force there rather than take 
 any chances that the strength of the garrison had not been under 
 estimated. A message was sent demanding the surrender of the 
 place, and word came back that the Mayor of Guayama was consider 
 ing the advisability of complying with the demand. It was not con 
 sideration that General Brooke was looking for, however, but surren 
 der. Therefore, leaving the Fourth Pennsylvania at Arroyo, General 
 Haines was ordered to take the Fourth Ohio and Third Illinois to 
 Guayama. These regiments appeared in front of the town on August 
 5th, had some slight skirmishing with the enemy, and obtained pos 
 session without strong resistance. Three privates of the Fourth Ohio 
 were wounded in the skirmishing, none of them seriously. 
 
 FIGHTING FOR THE PENNSYLVANIANS. 
 
 The town of Coamo was captured on August 9th, after half an 
 hour of fighting, by Generals Wilson and Ernst. General Wilson 
 devised the method of attack, supervised the performance in person, 
 and was one of the first to enter the town after its surrender. The 
 troops under him, comprising General Ernst s brigade, were the 
 Second and Third Wisconsin and the Sixteenth Pennsylvania. They 
 left camp at 6 o clock in the morning, taking with them two batteries 
 of artillery with which they began a cannonading of the town with a 
 view to disclosing the strength of the opposing force. The Sixteenth 
 Pennsylvania, however, had the good fortune to do all the real fight 
 ing. They were guided in their advance upon Coamo by Colonel 
 
428 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 Biddle and Captain Gardiner of General Wilson s staff, and reached 
 the town ahead of the Wisconsin Volunteers. 
 
 Suddenly, emerging from behind a hill back of the town, they 
 saw a line of Spanish rifles aimed at them. Then came the crash of 
 a volley, the ping and whistle of bullets and a scramble for cover. 
 The Americans had no shelter, while the Spaniards had a perfect 
 breastwork in a bank of earth, which had been thrown up by the road- 
 builders to protect the gutter of the road from being washed away, 
 but the American fire was very effective. There was among the 
 Spaniards about a dozen mounted men and officers, and in a few 
 minutes all of them had been shot down. Six of the horses were 
 found dead and all wounded. The Second Battalion of the Sixteenth 
 Pennsylvania now emerged upon the road beyond the Spaniards, and, 
 as soon as the entrapped Dons saw themselves surrounded, the whole 
 line fluttered with white signals of surrender. Major Windsor ac 
 cepted the surrender, and had them drop their arms and accoutre 
 ments in piles in the middle of the road. The prisoners included 
 one major, one captain, three lieutenants, and 162 enlisted men, 
 nearly all of whom belonged to the Twenty-fifth Battalion of the 
 Spanish Infantry. 
 
 The Spanish wounded were cared for at the same time with 
 those of the Americans who were hit. Dead and wounded were 
 both taken to one of the official road houses near at hand. There 
 were five dead Spaniards on the road, and one more died soon after 
 the surrender. The Americans had a number of men slightly 
 wounded, most of them, however, being merely clipped by the 
 shower of Mauser bullets. Five had to go to the hospital, all 
 privates of the Sixteenth Pennsylvania, except Corporal Barnes, of 
 Company E, whose abdomen was cut by a Mauser bullet as if by a 
 knife. 
 
 The Spanish dead were treated with the highest respect. Sur 
 geon Major John McG. Woodbury, of General Wilson s staff, took 
 charge of their burial, and gave full permission to the Spanish chap 
 lain and the local priests to conduct the services in any manner they 
 chose. The bodies of the officers were sent to Ponce for burial, the 
 others were interred in the cemetery at Coamo with all the cere 
 monies of the Catholic Church. 
 
NOT A VERY CORDIAL RECEPTION 429 
 
 The noise of the firing between the Spaniards and the Sixteenth 
 Pennsylvania was plainly heard in the town, and, when General Wil 
 son and the rest of the troops appeared on the outskirts, the alcalde 
 was there to offer the place in surrender. Generals Wilson and 
 Ernst slept that night at the residence of the alcalde, and the troops 
 passed on through the town and made camp in the direction of 
 Aybonito. 
 
 NOT A VERY CORDIAL RECEPTION. 
 
 The reception of the Americans in Coamo was not as cordial as 
 it had been in Ponce or at Yauco. Many of the people were in the 
 streets and some shouted welcomes, but there was a much greater 
 reserve than in places previously occupied. This was due, in a great 
 measure, to the misbehavior of some of the American soldiers who 
 first entered the town. Some of them went into the stores and 
 eating houses, seized what they wanted, and went off without paying 
 for it. The result was that the stores soon closed, and it was not 
 possible for any one to buy a thing to eat The action of the soldiers 
 in this regard was strongly condemned by General Wilson, but the 
 offenders could not be identified. 
 
 Meanwhile General Schwan, with a force of 1,300 men, including 
 regulars of the Eleventh Infantry, two batteries of regular artillery 
 and one troop of regular cavalry, had started from Guanica, where 
 General Miles had made his landing and was undertaking a some 
 what independent expedition in the direction of Mayaguez. This 
 expedition possessed one or two peculiarities. A Brigadier-General 
 commanded what was barely more than a single regiment. It included 
 all three arms of the service, and it was accompanied by a wagon 
 train. Moreover, it kept moving, and was constantly confronted with 
 a force which was its numerical equal, if not its superior. 
 
 It occupied Savana Grande and San German practically without 
 opposition, but about six miles beyond San German, midway between 
 that place and Mayaguez, the enemy was met in considerable force. 
 A hamlet at this point, bearing the name of Hormigueros, boasted 
 an army barracks, the headquarters of a Spanish battalion, which is 
 practically the equivalent of an American regiment in its numerical 
 strength. Here an engagement took place. There was a bit of 
 sharp infantry firing, with a slight casualty list for both sides. It 
 
430 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 was not much of a fight, but it put the American flag" in the place of 
 the red and yellow over a Spanish military edifice. The Spaniards 
 might have stopped the Americans twenty times within the next few 
 miles. They might have decimated the invading ranks by guerilla 
 firing, but they seemed to have been terror-stricken by the appear 
 ance of an army which fired as it moved forward and moved forward 
 always. 
 
 For General Schwan did not stop for a grand celebration at 
 Hormigueros. He left a small detatchment as garrison and went on 
 his way. This detatchment might easily have been swallowed up by 
 a return of the Spaniards from their flight across the hills, but they 
 seemed to have been too much interested in cfettin^ somewhere else. 
 
 o o 
 
 Mayaguez was occupied practically without resistance, and the 
 army pushed on toward Aguaclilla and Lares. Anasco was occupied 
 and Aguarcla virtually so. The Spanish troops fell back on Lares, 
 with the Americans in hot pursuit. They were overtaken on the 
 banks of a river near Las Marias where an engagement took place in 
 which the Spanish are known to have lost five killed and fourteen 
 wounded, though later reports were to the effect that the losses from 
 the American firing and from death by drowning in crossing the river 
 were many times that number. Another twenty-four hours would 
 undoubtedly have found General Schwan in possession of Lares and 
 Aguadilla, and in control of all the western part of the island, but the 
 truce had been declared before these points were reached. The 
 American losses throughout this whole campaign amounted to two 
 men killed and one officer and seventeen men wounded. 
 
 TRUCE IS DECLARED. 
 
 The truce had been brought about, it will be remembered, as the 
 result of the advances made by the French Ambassador in Washing 
 ton, on the part of the Government of Spain, on July 26th, asking 
 President McKinley upon what terms he would consent to peace. 
 This was two clays before Ponce surrendered to General Miles, but 
 the result of the negotiations was still problematical. Two days later, 
 on July 3Oth, President McKinley s statement as to the conditions on 
 which he would agree to end the war was given to the French 
 Ambassador. 
 
SUNRISE EXECUTIONS 
 
 Outside the prison walls, Havana. Weyler s way of getting 
 rid of prisoners. 
 
 A MARKET GIRL, PORTO RICO. 
 
 A VOLANTE, 1 H E TYPICAL CUBAN CONVEYANCE. 
 
TRUCE IS DECLARED 433 
 
 The proposition submitted by the Ambassador, acting for the 
 Spanish Government was general in its terms. It was confined to 
 the one essential point of an earnest plea that negotiations be opened 
 for the purpose of terminating the war and arriving at terms of peace. 
 The communication of the Spanish Government did not suggest any 
 specific terms of peace, nor was there any reference made to Cuba, 
 the Philippines, Porto Rico, or other Spanish possessions. 
 
 The evident purpose of the Madrid authorities was to first learn 
 whether the United States would treat on the subject of peace, and 
 after that to take up such terms as the two parties might suggest. 
 Neither was there any suggestion from the Spanish Government 
 that an armistice be established, pending the peace negotiations. It 
 was generally expected, however, that if formal peace negotiations 
 were entered upon a cessation of hostilities would occur. 
 
 Owing to the importance of the communication, the French 
 Ambassador adopted the usual diplomatic procedure of reading the 
 communication of the Spanish Government from the original, a trans 
 lation being submitted at the same time. In the conversation which 
 followed the reading of the proposition, neither the President nor the 
 Ambassador entered upon the question of the terms of peace. The 
 instructions of the Ambassador confined him to the one essential 
 point of opening peace negotiations, and it was evident that the 
 President desired to consider the proposition before giving any defi 
 nite reply. It was finally determined that the President should con 
 sult his Cabinet concerning the proposition and that M. Cambon 
 would be invited to the White House for further conference and for 
 a final answer from the Government of the United States. 
 
 On July 3oth the answer of the American Government to Spain 
 was handed to the French Ambassador. It included the following 
 propositions : The absolute surrender of Porto Rico to the United 
 States ; relinquishment of Spanish sovereignty in Cuba ; the cession 
 of several small islands adjacent to Cuba and Porto Rico to the United 
 States ; the cession of one of the Ladrone Islands to the United 
 States as a coaling station, and the leaving of the disposition of the 
 Philippine subject to future negotiations. 
 
 The Government of the United States did not put forward any 
 claim for pecuniary indemnity, but required the relinquishment of all 
 
434 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 claim of sovereignty over or title to the island of Cuba, as well as the 
 immediate evacuation by Spain of the Island. The United States 
 announced its intention to occupy and hold the city, bay and harbor 
 of Manila, pending the conclusion of a treaty of peace, which would 
 determine the control, disposition and government of the Philippines. 
 It was also provided, that, if these terms were accepted in their 
 entirety by Spain, commissioners would be named by the United 
 States to meet commissioners on the part of Spain for the purpose of 
 concluding a Treaty of Peace on the basis indicated. 
 
 THE PROTOCOL SIGNED. 
 
 On August 9, 1898, the Spanish Cabinet approved the terms for 
 preliminary negotiations, and this acceptance of the conditions was 
 communicated to President McKinley. On August I2th, protocols 
 agreeing as to the preliminaries for a Treaty of Peace were signed by 
 Secretary of State Day and the French Ambassador, United States 
 naval and military commanders were ordered to cease hostilities, and 
 the negotiation of a permanent peace was begun. The full text of 
 the protocols was as follows : 
 
 " i. That Spain will relinquish all claim of sovereignty over and 
 title to Cuba. 
 
 " 2 That Porto Rico and other Spanish islands in the West 
 Indies and an island in the Ladrones, to be selected by the United 
 States, shall be ceded to the latter. 
 
 " 3. That the United States will occupy and hold the city, bay 
 and harbor of Manila, pending the conclusion of a Treaty of Peace 
 which shall determine the control, disposition and government of the 
 Philippines. 
 
 " 4. That Cuba, Porto Rico and other Spanish islands in the West 
 Indies shall be immediately evacuated, and that commissioners, to be 
 appointed within ten days, shall, within thirty days from the signing 
 of the protocol, meet at Havana and San Juan, respectively, to 
 arrange and execute the details of the evacuation. 
 
 "5. That the United States and Spain will each appoint not 
 more than five commissioners to negotiate and conclude a Treaty of 
 of Peace. The commissioners are to meet at Paris not later than 
 October ist. 
 
A PROCLAMATION 435 
 
 " 6. On the signing of the protocol, hostilities will be suspended 
 and notice to that effect will be given as soon as possible by each 
 Government to the commanders of its military and naval forces." 
 
 The proclamation declaring the existence of an armistice was as 
 follows : 
 
 "By the President of the United States of America: 
 
 A PROCLAMATION. 
 
 WHEREAS, By a protocol concluded and signed August 12, 1898, 
 by William R. Day, Secretary of State of the United States, and 
 His Excellency Jules Cambon, Ambassador Extraordinary and Pleni 
 potentiary of the Republic of France at Washington, respectively 
 representing for this purpose the Government of the United States 
 and the Government of Spain, the United States and Spain have 
 formally agreed upon the terms on which negotiations for the estab 
 lishment of peace between the two countries shall be undertaken; and, 
 
 "WHEREAS, It is in said protocol agreed that upon its conclusion 
 and signature hostilities between the two countries shall be suspended, 
 and that notice to that effect shall be given as soon as possible by 
 each Government to the commanders of its military and naval forces; 
 
 " Now, THEREFORE, I, William McKinley, President of the United 
 States, do, in accordance with the stipulations of the protocol, declare 
 and proclaim on the part of the United States a suspension of hos 
 tilities, and do hereby command that orders be immediately given 
 through the proper channels to the commanders of the military and 
 naval forces of the United States to abstain from all acts inconsistent 
 with this proclamation. 
 
 " IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and caused 
 the seal of the United States to be affixed. 
 
 "Done at the city of Washington, this i2th day of August, in 
 the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and ninety-eight, 
 and of the independence of the United States the one hundred and 
 twenty-third. 
 
 [SEAL] "WILLIAM McKiNLEY. 
 
 "By the President. 
 
 " WILLIAM R. DAY, Secretary of State." 
 
THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 This armistice proclamation was followed at once by orders from 
 the War and Navy Departments to the several commanders in the 
 field and of the fleets, directing that all operations be suspended. 
 Identical cablegrams were sent to General Miles in Porto Rico, Gen 
 eral Shafter in Cuba, General Merritt in the Philippines, and to 
 Admirals Sampson and Dewey ; but it was in Porto Rico that the 
 principal operations were going on at that time, and it was there that 
 the effect was most interesting. 
 
 General Miles was at Ponce when the news of the signing of the 
 protocol was cabled from Washington. Generals Brooke and Wil 
 son, with their brigades, were further afield. General Wilson had 
 received instructions from General Miles to demand the surrender of 
 Aybonito whenever he felt that the position warranted such a demand. 
 With the view, therefore, of making a demonstration in force, and 
 also for the sake of developing the enemy s position, General Wilson 
 had, on the morning of August I3th, ordered Major Lancaster to 
 take a battery of the Third Artillery, advance from the outskirts of 
 Coamo, where they had been in camp, and shell the Spanish position 
 at that place and Aybonito Pass. 
 
 IN A SHOWER OF LEADEN BULLETS. 
 
 These positions were very strong, consisting of a series of rifle- 
 pits along the crests of the mountains overlooking the military road 
 for miles. The enemy also had several fieldpieces, modern guns of 
 small calibre, mounted behind earthworks. As the horses of the 
 battery galloped up the road, the enemy s infantry, from the pits on 
 the mountains, showered bullets all about them. Four of the guns 
 were unlimbered off the road, behind a natural fortification in the 
 shape of a ridge, while the fifth gun was taken further above and 
 unlimbered at a turn within plain sight of the Spanish position, though 
 the horses and caissons were sheltered by a high bank on the roadside. 
 
 Within two minutes all five guns were thundering at the hill on 
 which the enemy s artillery was located. Instantly came the reply. 
 Shells screamed over the heads of the Americans for the thirty 
 minutes that the duel continued. Our fire was so well directed that, 
 after half a dozen shots, only one of the Spanish guns replied. 
 Twenty minutes l^ter this also was silenced, and the Spaniards could 
 
GENERAL BROOKE S EXPERIENCE 437 
 
 be seen fleeing from the trenches and making for the rifle-pits on the 
 left. The rifle-pits were promptly shelled and a sharp fire was returned 
 for a few minutes, but silence presently prevailed along the entire 
 Spanish line. General Wilson then ordered the artillery to cease 
 firing. This was about 3 P.M. Another section of the battery was 
 then ordered up the road, and when it reached the point whence the 
 former firing had taken place, the enemy began a fusillade, and all 
 three of the American batteries were at once turned loose upon them 
 until silence ultimately reigned supreme. 
 
 General Wilson then sent Colonel Bliss, his chief of staff, into 
 Aybonito under a flag of truce to demand the surrender of the city. 
 Colonel Bliss delivered the demand and reported to General Wilson 
 that the commandant had said : " If you want to save the further 
 shedding of blood, stay where you are." 
 
 General Wilson promptly ordered the artillery to unlimber again, 
 and the gunners were making preparations to fire when the message 
 was received from General Miles, notifying General Wilson of the 
 signing of the protocol and the ending of hostilities. The artillery 
 men were so put out by being stopped from again attacking the 
 Spaniards that many of them wept. 
 
 Meantime General Brooke had been operating in the vicinity of 
 Guayama, and his experience at the final moment of the war was 
 equally interesting. He had instructed General Haines to advance 
 with the Fourth Ohio and the Third Illinois from Arroyo with a 
 view to ascertaining the truth of a report to the effect that the 
 enemy s troops had gathered in considerable force, at a point about 
 five miles distant up the military road to San Juan. The Fourth 
 Pennsylvania, under Colonel David Brainerd Case, was left at Arroyo 
 as a temporary garrison, this being the only other regiment in General 
 Haines brigade. After proceeding about half the distance to the 
 reported point of interest the Third Illinois was left as a reserve, and 
 the Fourth Ohio proceeded along the main road, General Brooke 
 and his aides being in advance of the column. 
 
 The day was beautiful. A slight breeze cooled the air and tem 
 pered the heat of the sun. A peculiar haze covered the hills with a 
 bluish veil. There was nothing to break the stillness for a while, but 
 
 presently a sharply singing "pstwing" was heard over the heads of the 
 24 
 
438 THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 soldiers, a sound which nearly every one took for the whizzing of a 
 Mauser bullet. One of the General s aides, however, called attention 
 to a telegraph wire that had sagged by the roadside, and he insisted 
 that it had been cut, but the discussion was immediately ended by 
 the arrival of a great many messages, not over the wire, but through 
 the air, and the soldiers then knew that the enemy were watching 
 and intending to oppose their progress. 
 
 The range of the enemy s fire was evidently a long one, as many 
 of the bullets lay spent at the very feet of the invaders, and the 
 report of the Mausers was not heard until long after the song of the 
 bullet. No smoke or flash could be seen in any direction. It was 
 some time before the enemy s exact position could be ascertained. 
 This sort of thing kept up for about an hour. Finally the Spaniards 
 retreated toward the hills and took up positions behind rocks, from 
 which they did some pretty brisk firing. The dynamite guns were 
 finally brought up, five shells were thrown into the midst of the 
 enemy, and this silenced them effectively. 
 
 This engagement occurred on August i8th. Two days later 
 another advance was made along the San Juan road to a point where 
 the Spaniards could be seen, distinctly with a glass, throwing up 
 entrenchments on the opposite hills ; also small bodies of them mov 
 ing about upon the side of the mountain some three or four thousand 
 yards distant. The Fourth Ohio, under Colonel Coit, was at the 
 head of the column. The road along which they were proceeding 
 was cut from the face of the hill. The last company was about to 
 pass through two open ledges in which the road was laid, when a ter 
 rific volley fire was opened from the Spanish entrenchments. Colonel 
 Coit and two members of General Brooke s staff, who had ridden up, 
 took shelter behind a small house by the roadside, and the rest of the 
 command lay flat upon their faces. A gutter or trench by the side of 
 the road was the only cover. Into that rolled the men, and finally, 
 by its cover, managed to crawl around the bend to a place protected 
 from the enemy s fire. 
 
 The firing line was soon formed, however, the wounded were 
 brought back, and a few well-directed volleys told the enemy that 
 they were not to have it all their own way. In a few minutes the 
 dynamite guns were once more brought up. These caused the 
 
THE FINAL OPERATION 439 
 
 Spanish to retreat. Several of the men of the Fourth Ohio were 
 slightly wounded in this engagement, but none were killed, and there 
 was never any means of ascertaining the effect of the American fire 
 upon the Spanish lines at this point. 
 
 THE FINAL OPERATION. 
 
 The final operation was on the morning of the i3th of August, 
 when General Brooke, who had come up to General Haines position 
 again, with three batteries of artillery and two troops of cavalry, 
 ordered a concentrated movement upon the enemy s position. The 
 orders for this movement had been issued on the night of the I2th. 
 They were that the troops should be in readiness at 6 A.M. for the 
 advance in the direction of San Juan. There was little sleep that 
 night. The route had been reconnoitered, and the reports that had 
 been made upon it indicated that serious work was to be expected. 
 
 The military road along which the advance was to be made was 
 a winding affair with deep cuts. Often there was a sheer wall of two 
 hundred feet rising on one side, while across the road would be a 
 
 o 
 
 descent of perhaps three times that distance. The road led directly 
 over the mountains, and on every advantageous spot along that road 
 of ten miles, the Spaniards had planted batteries that could not be 
 seen from the road and were unapproachable in any other way. 
 
 Some of these entrenchments overlooked precipices three hun 
 dred feet deep. To get at them, except by way of the road, meant to 
 scale walls of perpendicular rock. In some places tons of rocks and 
 boulders were held in place on lofty ledges by great vines and prickly 
 scrub growth. 
 
 From these entrenchments of the Spaniards it was possible to 
 note every movement of the American troops. The enemy could 
 accurately determine the strength of the invading force, but an esti 
 mate of the force of the enemy was all guesswork. It was only 
 known that the Spaniards, many or few, were magnificently en 
 trenched, and that it was going to be a hard job to rout them. 
 
 When the troops were led out of Guayama, on that morning of 
 August 1 3th, with General Brooke and his staff at the head, the 
 streets and balconies were crowded with natives. General Haines, 
 with some of the infantry, was sent to flank the enemy s position on 
 
44 o THE CAMPAIGN IN PORTO RICO 
 
 the left, while the cavalry were to perform a similar movement on the 
 right. General Brooke continued to lead the advance in person. 
 Part of the time he was on foot, while his staff and horses halted 
 along the roadside. He carefully scanned the hills with his field- 
 glass, and others who did the same could plainly see the Spaniards in 
 their fortifications at points where they had perfect command of the 
 road. To have taken those hills would have been as memorable a 
 victory as that of the division of General Lawton at El Caney, or the 
 dash up the slopes of San Juan, and General Brooke s force was eager 
 for the chance to take them. 
 
 The troops were soon ordered forward, and, clambering up the 
 steep slope, were formed into a firing line. The batteries followed. 
 Battery B, of Pittsburg, Pa., having the right of the line, was the first 
 to begin unlimbering. The guns were soon in place ; their targets 
 were marked and the range calculated. The cavalry then disappeared 
 around the hills. General Haines was only a little distance away 
 with the rest of the infantry. The Spanish position could be plainly 
 noted. Eagerness and expectation were universal. There was an 
 almost impressive silence. Even the final orders were issued in a 
 subdued voice, and everybody believed that the next thing to occur 
 would be the belching of artillery and a hail of leaden missiles. 
 
 THE MESSAGE THAT ENDED THE WAR. 
 
 Such was the situation when a mounted officer, closely followed 
 by his orderly on a mule, appeared around a bend of the road, lashing 
 his tired steed through the battery. It was Lieutenant McLaughlin, 
 of the Signal Corps. He rode up to General Brooke, neglecting, in 
 his haste, to dismount, and said: " An important message, sir." 
 General Brooke took the message from the hand of the messenger, 
 read it, passed it to one of his staff, then quietly turned about and 
 gave the order that the troops return to Guayama. 
 
 The contents of the message were soon known to everybody. 
 They were as follows : 
 
 "PORT PONCE, August 13, 1898. 
 "Major- General Brooke : 
 
 " By direction of the President, operations against the enemy are 
 suspended. Negotiations are near completion. The protocol has 
 
THE MESSAGE THAT ENDED THE WAR 441 
 
 been signed by representatives of the two countries. All com 
 manders will be governed accordingly. 
 
 "By COMMAND OF MAJOR-GENERAL MILES, 
 
 11 GILMORE, Chief of Staff." 
 
 Not a comment was heard. The soldiers were utterly stupefied. 
 ^The retreat was made sullenly, but on the march the disappointed 
 soldiers, officers and all, used not a little strong language in condem 
 nation of their luck. 
 
 " Three minutes more," said General Brooke, " and we should 
 have fired." Just then an enthusiast in the ranks, determined to give 
 some vent to his feelings, discharged his rifle, and this was the last 
 shot of the war. General Brooke looked around for a moment, as if 
 wishing he knew who had committed this breach of discipline, but he 
 merely smiled, as if perfectly understanding the situation, and led the 
 troops back to the coast. Thus was the military feature of the expe 
 dition to Porto Rico brought to an end, and all that remains to be 
 told is in connection with the Civil Departments. 
 
CHAPTER XXIII 
 
 Porto Rico Past, Present and Future 
 
 The Island and Its Population. Its Future as a Winter Resort. Timber in 
 Abundance and Variety. Minerals and Mining. Some Facts about Its 
 Commerce, which Amounts to over $36,000,000. The Chief Cities and Towns 
 of Porto Rico. Snap-shots of San Juan, the Capital, and of Ponce, the Next 
 Largest City. 
 
 IT was in November of the year 1493, on his second voyage to the 
 New World, that Columbus landed on a strange island, in quest 
 
 of water for his ships. He found it in abundance, and called 
 the place Aquadilla the watering place. As he had done at Cuba 
 the year before, the great discoverer held pleasant conferences with 
 the natives, and with due ceremony took possession of the island for 
 his benefactors and sovereigns Ferdinand and Isabella of Spain. 
 From that day until it was ceded to the United States in 1898, as a 
 result of the Spanish-American War, Porto Rico remained one of 
 the most attractive and valuable of Spain s West Indian possessions. 
 
 The simple and friendly natives gladly welcomed their Spanish 
 invaders, who, with the same promptness which was manifested in 
 Cuba, proceeded to enslave and exterminate them. In 1510, Ponce 
 de Leon founded the first settlement on the site of the present 
 village of Puerto Viejo. The next year the noted ivader founded 
 San Juan, the present capital of the island. One of the most inter 
 esting sights of this old city to-day is the Casa Blanca, built at that 
 period as the palatial residence of Ponce de Leon. It was there, 
 perhaps, after he had finished his conquest of the island, that this 
 famous old Spaniard listened to the wonderful story of the natives, 
 who served him as slaves, concerning the mysterious country over 
 the sea which had hidden in its forests a fountain wherein an old 
 man might plunge and be restored to all the vigor of youth. It was 
 there and thus, perhaps, while sitting at leisure in his palace, that de 
 Leon planned the voyage in search of that "fountain of youth" 
 which resulted in the discovery and exploration of Florida. 
 
 443 
 
444 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 As to the number of natives in Porto Rico when the Spaniards 
 came old chroniclers differ. Some say there were 500,000, others 
 300,000. It is all surmise. Probably the latter figure is an over 
 estimate, for Cuba, more than ten times as large, was not thought to 
 contain more than half a million of inhabitants at most. A detailed 
 account of their manners and customs was written by one of the 
 early Spaniards, and part of it is translated by the British Consul, 
 Mr. Bidwell, in his Consular Report of 1880. Some of the state 
 ments in this old book are most peculiar and interesting. Within the 
 last forty years archaeologists have discovered many stone axes, 
 spear-heads and knives, stone and clay images, and pieces of earthen 
 ware made by the aboriginal Porto Ricans, and these are preserved 
 in the Smithsonian Institute at Washington, in Berlin, and elsewhere. 
 It is curious that none of these remains had been found prior to 
 1856. On the banks of the Rio Grande there still stands, also, a 
 a rude stone monument, with strange designs carved upon its surface. 
 
 From the earliest times, the island, with its rich produce and 
 commerce, was the prey of robbers. The fierce cannibal Caribs 
 from the south made expeditions to it before the white men came ; 
 and for many decades after the Spanish conquest it suffered attacks 
 from pirates by sea and brigands upon land, who found easy hiding 
 within its deep forests. 
 
 ATTACKS AND INVASIONS BY FOREIGN FORCES. 
 
 In 1595, San Juan was sacked by the English under Drake, and 
 again, three years later, by the Duke of Cumberland. In 1615, 
 Baldwin Heinrich, a Dutchman, lost his life in an attack upon the 
 governor s castle, and several of his ships were destroyed by a hurri 
 cane. The English failed to capture it, fifty-three years later ; and 
 Abercrombie tried it again in 1797, but had to give up the under 
 taking after a three days siege. It was one hundred and one years 
 after Abercrombie s siege, before another hostile fleet appeared before 
 and bombarded San Juan. This was done by Admiral Sampson, 
 May 12, 1898, with the United States squadron of modern iron-clad 
 battleships and cruisers. In this engagement Morro Castle, which, 
 though impregnable a hundred years before, was unable to withstand 
 modern guns, and was in a large part reduced to ruins. 
 
THE ISLAND AND ITS POPULATION 445 
 
 General Nelson A. Miles landed his United States troops on 
 the island in July, 1898, and on the I2th of August, before he com 
 pleted his conquest, hostilities were closed by the protocol of peace, 
 and amid the rejoicing of the natives "Beautiful Porto Rico" 
 became a province of the United States. The one and only attempt 
 the Porto Ricans ever made to throw off the Spanish yoke was in 
 1820; but conditions for hiding from the soldiers were not so good 
 as the Cubans enjoyed in their large island, and Spanish supremacy 
 was completely re-established by 1823. 
 
 THE ISLAND AND ITS POPULATION. 
 
 Porto Rico is at once the most healthful and most densely popu 
 lated island of the West Indies. It is almost rectangular in form 
 100 miles long and 36 broad. Its total area is about 3,600 square 
 miles a little larger than the combined areas of Rhode Island and 
 Delaware. Its population, unlike that of Cuba, has greatly increased 
 within the last fifty years. In 1830, it numbered 319,000; in 1887, 
 813,937 about 220 people to the square mile, a density which few 
 States of the Union can equal. About half of its population are 
 negroes or mulattoes, who were introduced by the Spaniards as slaves 
 in the i6th and I7th centuries. 
 
 Among the people of European origin the most numerous are 
 the Spaniards, with many Germans, Swedes, Danes, Russians, 
 FYenchmen, Chuetos (descendants from the Moorish Jews), and 
 natives of the Canary Islands. There are also a number of Chinese, 
 while the Gibaros, or small land-holders and day-laborers of the 
 country, districts, are a curious old Spanish cross with the aboriginal 
 Indian blood. In this class the aborigines are more fortunate than 
 the original Cubans in having even a trace of their blood preserved. 
 
 This island is said to be capable of easily supporting three times 
 its present population, the soil is so universally fertile and its resour 
 ces are so well diversified. Though droughts occur in certain parts 
 of the island, it is all extremely well watered, by more than one thou 
 sand streams, enumerated on the maps, and the dry sections have a 
 system of irrigation which may be operated very effectually and with 
 little expense. Of the 1,300 streams, forty-seven are considerable 
 rivers. 
 
446 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 Forests still cover all the elevated parts of the hill country of 
 the interior, the inhabitants living mostly along the coast. The 
 main need to set the interior teeming with a thrifty and healthy 
 population is a system of good roads. The interior, with the excep 
 tion of a few extensive savannas, is one vast expanse of rounded 
 hills, covered with such rich soil that they may be cultivated to their 
 summits. At present these forests are accessible only by mule, 
 tracks. "The timber of the island," says our official report, "com ! 
 prises more than five hundred varieties of trees, and in the more ele 
 vated regions the vegetation of the temperate zones is not unknown. 
 On the hills is found a luxuriant and diversified vegetation, tree-ferns 
 and mountain palms being abundant. At a lower level grow many 
 varieties of trees noted for their useful woods, such as the mahogany, 
 cedar, walnut and laurel. The mammee, guaiacum and copal, 
 besides other trees and shrubs valuable for their gum, flourish in all 
 parts of the island. The coffee tree and sugar cane, both of which 
 grow well at an altitude of a thousand feet or more, were introduced 
 into the island the former from Martinique in 1722, the latter from 
 the Canaries, through Santo Domingo. Tobacco grows easily in the 
 lowlands, while maize, pineapples, bananas, etc., are all prolific. The 
 banana and plantain bear fruit within ten months after planting, and, 
 like the cocoa palm, live through an ordinary lifetime." 
 
 MINERALS AND MINING. 
 
 " The mineral resources of the island," says our consul in his 
 report, "have been very little developed, the only mineral industry 
 of any importance being the salt works situated at Guanica, Salinas 
 and Cabo Rojo. Sulphides of copper and magnetic oxides of iron 
 are found in large quantities, and formerly gold to a considerable 
 extent was found in many of the streams. At present the natives 
 still wash out nuggets by the crude process in use in the time of 
 Ponce de Leon. Marble, carbonates, lignite and amber are also pre 
 sent in varying quantities, and hot springs and mineral waters occur, 
 the best known ones being at Coamo, near Santa Isabel." 
 
 The commerce of Porto Rico amounted, in 1896, to $36,624,120, 
 exceeding the records of all previous years ; the increase, no doubt, 
 being largely due to the unsettled condition of Cuba, The value of 
 
REORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT 447 
 
 the exports for the same year was, for the first time for more than a 
 decade, slightly in excess of that of the imports ; the former being 
 valued at $18,341,430, the latter at $18,282,690. The chief exports 
 from the island are agricultural products. The principal articles are 
 sugar, coffee, molasses and tobacco ; while rice, wheat, flour and 
 manufactured articles are among the chief imports. The value of 
 the sugar and molasses exported to the United States during the ten 
 years from 1888 to 1897 made up 95 per cent, of the total value of 
 the exports to that country. Fruits, nuts and spices are also ex 
 ported to a small extent. Of the non-agricultural exports, the most 
 important are perfumery and cosmetics ; chemicals, drugs and dyes ; 
 unmanufactured wood and salt. 
 
 The leading article of import from the United States is wheat 
 flour. Corn and meal, bread, biscuit, meats, dairy products, wood 
 and its manufactures, iron, steel, etc., are also imported. 
 
 GENERAL HENRY REORGANIZES THE GOVERNMENT. 
 
 When the American forces took possession of the island a 
 change was immediately felt, pointing toward a new era of success in 
 every branch of trade. General Guy V. Henry, " Fighting Guy," 
 as he is called, was appointed and established Military Governor of 
 Porto Rico. He immediately set out to reorganize the affairs of the 
 Government. How he succeeded is told by Major George W. Fish- 
 back, Chief Paymaster of the Department of Porto Rico, as follows : 
 
 " The management of the island and its affairs commands the 
 admiration of both natives and Americans. Major-General Guy V. 
 Henry, who is Military Governor has proved himself to be most 
 acceptable to both. He is a forceful man and full of the kindliest 
 sympathies for the native people. He has surrounded himself with a 
 cabinet made up of the most intelligent men of the island, and through 
 them, as representatives of the different branches of the Government, 
 he rules the island firmly and justly. He summoned the leaders of 
 the Roman Catholic Church and conveyed to them the fact that he 
 proposed to have perfect freedom of religious worship in Porto 
 Rico ; that he would not tolerate any interference with the affairs of 
 the Roman Catholic Church, nor would he allow that Church to inter 
 fere with free religious worship on the part of the Protestant denomi- 
 
448 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 nations. He furthermore served notice upon the Archbishop that he 
 would expel from the island any priest, or body of priests, who openly 
 or in underhanded ways made any effort to influence the native 
 people in questions of religious worship. 
 
 " I asked the Minister of Justice the other day in what esteem 
 General Henry was held among the best people in Government 
 circles, and he replied that he was very well liked, but was open to 
 criticism of making his Cabinet officers do more work than they were 
 accustomed to. The idea of working hours a day, with only a short 
 interruption for a midday breakfast, was something that Porto Rican 
 business men are not accustomed to. 
 
 UNDER PERFECT CONTROL. 
 
 " The whole island is under the most perfect control, under 
 General Henry s military supervision. Disturbers of the peace have 
 felt the weight of his iron hand and now appreciate the fact that an 
 offender will be dealt with quickly and severely if he commits an 
 offence against either public health or morals. The post office ser 
 vice is being extended to all parts of the island, and letters mailed in 
 San Juan one evening are delivered in Ponce the following night. 
 General Frederick D. Grant is in command of the district of San 
 Juan, and, as a result of many inspection trips throughout his part of 
 the island, has the military body in excellent condition. There is no 
 sickness to speak of in any of the camps." 
 
 General Henry, immediately upon taking charge of affairs, issued 
 a formal letter to the Presidents and Secretarys of the Council there, 
 announcing what his program would be for the Government of the 
 island. In this statement he says, that as far as possible he wishes 
 to give independence of action to the Alcaldes and Consuls in the 
 various towns, and, after the selection of these officers, to hold them 
 responsible for the condition of affairs. He orders them to see that 
 the town is kept in proper police law and order, to introduce sanitary 
 regulations, to obtain in the absence of a sewer system, the odorless 
 system of carts, used in the United States, to see that there are no 
 overcrowded houses, and that cleanliness is kept up, taxing those 
 people who refuse to observe the orders for health. He commends the 
 introduction of a water supply and frequent flushings of the streets. 
 
UNDER PERFECT CONTROL 449 
 
 The choice of City officials he leaves entirely to the people 
 themselves under certain restrictions. The men chosen are not to be 
 removed except for cause, such as inefficiency, failure to do their 
 duty, or crookedness. 
 
 In this letter he takes up the system of education as follows : 
 
 " The system of school education should be looked into, and it is 
 my desire to ascertain how many teachers they can pay who can teach 
 the American or English language, beginning with the younger chil 
 dren. It is believed that people who can speak English only can 
 accomplish the purpose by object lessons. It is thought that Ameri 
 can women for teaching can be obtained at $50 per month in gold, 
 and they are well worth it. The young children are anxious to learn 
 and now is the time for them to do so. If Alcaldes will report to me 
 how many teachers they can so employ they will be brought from the 
 United States and sent to these towns. 
 
 " It is also my desire to introduce, as soon as possible, policemen, 
 so as to teach the native policemen what their duties are, and also to 
 encourage them to exercise some authority, which at present they 
 seem not desirous of doing. 
 
 He further says that men should not be put in jail except upon 
 definite charges and upon proper evidence, and gives certain restric 
 tions as to the punishment of criminals. The matter of customs and 
 the value of money he leaves to the Congress. He restricts articles in 
 newspapers of an incendiary character reflecting upon the Govern 
 ment or its officials, and he goes on to say: " Upon my assuming 
 command, the cabinet selected by General Brooke handed in their 
 resignations so as to leave me free to act. I consider it for the best 
 interests of the island to retain those gentlemen in office until I have 
 some reason for relieving them, for I believe they are capable men 
 and have the good of the island at heart, and in their actions are gov 
 erned simply by the interest of the island rather than by personal 
 motives. It is the intention that the soldiers so far as possible shall 
 preserve law and order, but as in the United States the soldiers are 
 not needed, so the idea now is to educate the people to take care of 
 themselves." 
 
 Such was the opinion of General Henry when he took charge, 
 and the result was better than anyone hoped. As this is being 
 
450 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 written, Aguadilla, on the west coast, is the only city under a Military 
 Mayor ; all of the others have a native in charge. Captain T, W. 
 Mansfield took charge of that town, not because of disruption among 
 the people, but because of a deadlock and corruption in the town 
 council. He was in charge for one month up to March ist, and then 
 a new set of councilmen was elected, but these city fathers, instead of 
 voting for some native to act as Mayor, begged that Captain Mans 
 field continue in charge. He was very popular with everybody. 
 
 DISHONESTY OF OFFICIALS. 
 
 When he took the office he discovered a system of corruption in 
 the government of the place which demanded an immediate reform. 
 No sooner was he seated than a clerk brought in a number of docu 
 ments for him to sign. " What are these ?" asked the Captain. " Re 
 ceipts for February," said the clerk. " Has the money been paid <* 
 " Not yet, sir." 
 
 This opened the Captain s eyes, and he soon found out how 
 officials had made money without much work. This was the plan : 
 The previous Mayors signed Treasury receipts sufficient to pay all 
 day-laborers employed by the city for a month in advance. As they 
 were dated a month ahead they could not be cashed by the workmen 
 until that time had expired. So when a laborer needed a loaf of 
 bread, he was forced to sell this order for money at a big discount, 
 and the city officials personally bought them in. They would give 
 $30 for a $40 slip, and when it became due, they would cash it and 
 pocket the difference, $10, and there would be no record on the books 
 of any crookedness, although the poor laborer had been cheated out 
 of $10. It did not take long to correct that trouble, and it served as 
 a warning that Porto Rican officials were not the most honest crea 
 tures in the world. 
 
 A MONUMENT TO A SPANISH SOLDIER. 
 
 At Yauco, Captain C. A. Vernon has made himself exceedingly 
 popular with the natives and has organized a street-cleaning depart 
 ment, strengthened the police force, and made the merchants inter 
 ested in a village improvement association. Right outside of the vil 
 lage is a little monument which bears the following inscription : "In 
 
LIFE IN THE SMALLER TOWNS 451 
 
 memory of a Spanish soldier killed in action with United States 
 troops, July 27, 1898. Presented by officers of Yauco Post, First 
 Battalion, Nineteenth Infantry." 
 
 In the capital of the island American officers are to be found in 
 the Department of Justice, of Finance, the Engineering Department, 
 and the Educational and Health Boards. They are simply assigned 
 to duty there in order to introduce American methods. 
 
 When the United States took charge of the Treasury at San 
 Juan, the capital of Porto Rico, investigation showed that the insular 
 Treasury held 76 cents in copper, $3.80 in Venezuelan gold and about 
 $900 in American bankbills. This was a great surprise, as there 
 should have been at least several hundred thousand dollars deposited 
 to the credit of a general guarantee fund. Investigation showed that 
 at least $200,000 was missing from that fund, and it is probable that 
 the full amount which should be there is nearly 500,000 pesos, between 
 $300,000 and $400,000. There can be no doubt that the money was 
 taken to Spain. It is generally known that the late Captain-General 
 Macias delivered to the Government at Madrid 91,000 pesos, and 
 that the Brigadier de Marina Vallarino delivered to his Government 
 46,000 pesos which rightfully belonged to Porto Rico and which were 
 drawn from this guarantee fund. 
 
 The Spanish Bank of Porto Rico was found to be in arrears to 
 the Government, and it was forced to pay to the Treasury 20,000 
 pesos collected on account of taxes and revenues, and will be forced 
 to meet further obligations. 
 
 LIFE IN THE SMALLER TOWNS. 
 
 A glimpse of the life in one of the smaller towns of this island 
 is not uninteresting. Take, for instance, Adjuntas, which is one of 
 the places about which little is known, consequently it may be taken 
 as a representative small town. It is an exceedingly pretty little 
 place with a square plaza in the centre filled with beautiful roses, 
 palms and flowering bushes. It has several nice stores which sell 
 shoes and clothes and, liquor. The stores generally carry very few 
 dry goods, as the people depend chiefly on the venders who go round 
 the streets with their baskets on their heads selling anything from a 
 baby s rubber ring to a very pretty dress. 
 
452 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 All the saloons, or casinos, as the Porto Ricans call them, have 
 gambling rooms attached, for Porto Rico is a great gambling place. 
 
 Little fruit stands may be found on every corner, and the price 
 of oranges and bananas is absurdly cheap. The people are dark in 
 color, for even the Porto Ricans of the better class have a tinge of 
 Negro blood in their veins, while the lowest classes show strong traces 
 of Indian blood. 
 
 The people are for the most part lazy and dirty. They never 
 bathe, and they always wear the same clothes. Their chief food is 
 plantains, a kind of banana, which they boil, and oranges and bread. 
 Meat is very expensive, and therefore little used. During the coffee 
 season the workers picking coffee receive about 30 cents a day. At 
 the end of the season, instead of looking for more work, they gamble 
 away the little they have saved, and when it is gone they steal. The 
 people bury their dead in a rude box shaped like a coffin, and some 
 times, if they have not enough money for this, they rent a coffin for 
 the occasion. Some of the coffins are not even painted. Four men 
 carry the box on their shoulders for many miles, and relief pallbearers 
 take the places of the others when they get tired. The body is taken 
 to a church and then to the cemetery, where, if the coffin is not rented, 
 it is buried. If the coffin is rented, however, the body is taken out 
 and buried right in the ground. 
 
 AT A COCKFIGHT. 
 
 Porto Rico is a great place for cockfights. The season is from 
 November until April, and Sunday is the chief day for the sport. 
 Every village, however small, or however how far up in the moun 
 tains, has a pit dug in the earth and covered with a wooden roof to 
 keep out the sun in the dry season and the rain in the wet. The 
 spectators sit around on rough board seats, and yell at the top of 
 their lungs. They become so excited, and howl so vigorously, that 
 they sometimes scare the birds so that they turn and flee. In betting 
 the men never deposit their money. All wagers are paid at the end 
 of the afternoon fights, A man has to call out his bet at the top of 
 his voice, and his ears or eyes must then catch the answer. There is 
 no pit at San Juan, because that city is so overcrowded. But across 
 the harbor in Catano there is a place where all the sportsmen congre- 
 
LAND IS EXPENSIVE 453 
 
 gate. Ten coppers is the fare and a native sailboat takes the gamblers 
 over. Admission is 20 cents. In Ponce there is a place owned by a 
 wealthy Spaniard. Behind the rickety board-fence he keeps more 
 than a hundred game-birds worth from $3.00 to $200 each. Half a 
 dozen negroes take care of his gamestock, clipping their feathers, 
 polishing their spurs, and feeding them. 
 
 The island offers great inducements for profitable investment. 
 It needs, however, good judgment, carefulness, and plenty of capital 
 to get anything like big returns. Agriculture is the great source of 
 wealth, and consequently the prosperity of the island depends on 
 the success of the crops. It also must be taken into consideration 
 that Cuba and Porto Rico produce about the same kind of crops, 
 and, unless Porto Rico is given extraordinary tax advantages over 
 Cuba, the latter will have the advantage of being so much nearer and 
 better situated in respect to the American market, and also is capable 
 of much larger and consequently much cheaper production. 
 
 LAND IS VERY EXPENSIVE. 
 
 Land is expensive in Porto Rico, because the island is so very 
 thickly populated, and, of course, since the occupation by the Ameri 
 cans, the price has gone up remarkably. The land is divided into four 
 classes : First-class land is the sugar land, the second class the coffee 
 land of the interior, the third class comprises black sandy loam ad 
 joining sugar lands, which is chiefly used for truck farms, and the 
 fourth class comprises the sandy beach land, where cocoanuts are 
 planted. Land is sold by the cuerda, which is equal to sixty-nine yards 
 square in our measurement. The sugar lands are found in the belt 
 of low flat land, running around the island between the foothills of 
 the mountains and the sea. First-class property has been known to 
 bring $400 a cuercla, but the price of to-day is about $150. This 
 represents land that has already been drained and ditched and is 
 ready for planting. The coffee plantations, if already planted, are 
 considered to be worth about $150 a cuerda, although land suitable 
 for raising coffee, if not planted, may be bought for about 10 or 25 
 pesos. For instance, a farm of 500 cuerdas is advertised for sale at 
 9,000 pesos, made up of forty cuerdas already set out with young coffee 
 trees, one hundred more suitable for immediate planting, and the 
 25 
 
454 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 balance in woodland and pasture, part of which would grow fruits and 
 vegetables. The black loam of the third class varies very much in 
 value. Some farms of it are quite expensive, and others may be 
 bought for 10 or 20 pesos, depending largely on the location in 
 respect to the seaports. The sandy soil for cocoanut planting also 
 ranges from 5 to 25 pesos. 
 
 THE BEST FIELDS FOR INVESTMENT. 
 
 Orange raising, together with the raising of pineapples and 
 bananas, offers the best field, probably, for profitable investment. It 
 is a field that may be developed to a large degree, and, if the results 
 show sufficient production to warrant a line of fruit steamers, this 
 industry might have good returns. Sugar depends largely upon the 
 laws which will regulate its exportation. The Cuban crop will be its 
 greatest rival. The tobacco of the island is of excellent quality, 
 although it has been very badly harvested and cured of late. Here 
 is an example of what may be realized from a good tobacco farm : 
 A farm of 100 cuerdas produced in one year $12,000 in gold, and cost 
 the owner $3,000 for cultivation and general expenses. 
 
 In regard to the prospects for the future, Frank A. Vanderlip, 
 Assistant Secretary of the Treasury, who was sent there to look into 
 currency and custom problems, says: "The people are delighted to 
 be Americans, and there is every prospect of prosperity for our new 
 possession. Whatever mineral wealth there is, is wholly undeveloped, 
 and the agricultural possibilities are, apparently, boundless. Only a 
 portion of the land is under cultivation. There are no water works, 
 sewers, electric lights, or electric railways. There is a good field for 
 electric roads throughout the island. With the exception of the mili 
 tary road, there is no railroad of any kind in Porto Rico. The fran 
 chise seekers and promoters in general, who rushed to the island 
 almost before the American troops were landed, have begun to give 
 place to a more solid and promising class. Undoubtedly capital will 
 begin to seek investment there soon. There is no field for a man 
 without capital on account of the high prices for land." 
 
 In regard to the mineral resources of the island, Robert T. Hill, 
 of the United States Geological Survey, reports that the conditions 
 are theoretically favorable for valuable iron deposits, and, in one or 
 
MINERAL RESOURCES OF THE ISLAND 455 
 
 two instances these undoubtedly exist, notably north of J uncos. At 
 this place there is a large deposit of magnetic iron ore of great 
 purity, containing 66 per cent, of iron and less than .023 of phos 
 phorous. A French engineer has calculated that there are at least 
 35,000 tons of this ore in sight. At present it is many miles from a 
 seaport, and its development will necessitate the construction of a 
 railway. In Mr. Hill s opinion this deposit is the most valuable 
 metallic resource of the island at present in sight, and American 
 capital will develop it. It has been estimated that the deposit contains 
 10,000,000 tons of metallic iron. 
 
 MINERAL RESOURCES OF THE ISLAND. 
 
 The best-known iron mines, which are already in operation, are 
 situated in the Sierra Maestra, a few miles east of Santiago, and are 
 owned by American companies. There are als ) rich deposits of 
 manganese in the same range of mountains. The mines in the neigh 
 borhood of Ponupo yielded 200 tons a day before they were closed 
 by the insurgents. 
 
 There is also plenty of asphaltum of great richness beneath the 
 waters of Cardenas Bay and in several other places. Ne^r Villa 
 Clara is an unusually rich deposit, which has supplied the material for 
 illuminating gas for the city for forty years. The copper mines of 
 Cobre, about twelve leagues north of Santiago, used to be the greatest 
 copper mines in the world, back in 1867, and it is generally believed 
 that large quantities of the ore still exist in that locality, although 
 the mines themselves have been filled up with water, and it is a ques 
 tion whether they can be profitably reopened. 
 
 Near Juana Diaz is a belt of beautiful marble of great hardness. 
 It is variegated in color, consisting of a reddish matrix, mottled with 
 small white spots. At present it is only used for structural purposes, 
 such as piers for bridges. Green sand marl occurs in great abund 
 ance on the road from Lares to San Sebastian, immediately adjoining 
 the most productive coffee region. Lime marls abound everywhere 
 around the coast, and gypsum marls occur near Juana Diaz adjacent 
 to the Rio Portugues and near Ponce. These are especially import 
 ant in as much as these natural fertilizers will play a large part in the 
 agricultural development of the island. 
 
456 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 Gold is found along the bed of streams but only in small quanti 
 ties, and Mr. Hill does not think that any quartz veins will be found. 
 
 Salt deposits exist and there are some thermal springs which arc 
 said to be of great value in curing skin diseases and rheumatic 
 troubles. 
 
 OUR TRADE WITH PORTO RICO. 
 
 A word or two about our trade with Porto Rico may not be 
 amiss. Frank H. Hitchcock of the Department of Agriculture, has 
 recently made an investigation, into the exports and imports of Porto 
 Rico. His report shows that during the year ending June 30, 1897, 
 the commercial transactions between this country and Porto Rico 
 amounted to $4,169,912, and, with exception of 1895, when the value 
 of trade fell to $3,340,056, this was the smallest recorded for any 
 year since the Civil War. The high water mark in our trade with 
 Porto Rico was reached way back in 1872, in which the imports and 
 exports had a combined value of $13,870,925. 
 
 Products of agriculture play the most important part in our 
 commerce with Porto Rico, comprising in value more than 80 per 
 cent, of the merchandise imported and exported. Among these pro 
 ducts sugar is by far the most important. Measured in value it com 
 prised nearly 75 per cent, of all the merchandise we received from the 
 island during the ten years up to 1897, and if the value of the mo 
 lasses be also included the combined item would form more than 95 
 per cent, of the total imports. After these, coffee is the most im 
 portant, while fruits, nuts and spices make up the rest of the imports. 
 
 The annual receipts of sugar during 1893 a d 1897 averaged 
 79,941,404 pounds, valued at $1,980,460. That of molasses 2,445,897 
 gallons valued at $558,042. The annual average imports for the past 
 five years in coffee amounted to only 164,769 pounds, worth $32,671. 
 
 In regard to exports the United States has chiefly sent to Porto 
 Rico breadstuffs and meat products, their combined value represent 
 ing nearly 95 per cent, of the whole volume of agricultural exports. 
 Wheat flour is the chief breadstuff exported during the five years, 
 1893 to J 897- The average number of barrels shipped per annum 
 was 148,487, valued at $570,619. 
 
 During the same period our exports of wood and its manufac 
 tures reached an annual value of $292,336. Our exports of iron and 
 
CHIEF TOWNS OF PORTO RICO 457 
 
 steel manufactures during the year 1897 were larger than ever before, 
 and amounted to $180,486. 
 
 There are plenty of harbors along the coast of Porto Rico, but 
 those on the north side are mostly unprotected from the trade winds, 
 and those on the west side are filled with sand. The whole of the 
 north coast is lined with navigable lagoons, some of which are nearly 
 ten miles in length. Of the twenty-one rivers, most are quite small, 
 but several of them can be navigated for five or six miles. A num 
 ber of the bays and creeks are deep enough for vessels of consider 
 able size, but the north coast is subject to tremendous ground seas 
 which drift against the cliffs with great violence. 
 
 CHIEF TOWNS OF PORTO RICO. 
 
 The exporting towns are Mayaguez, San German and Agua- 
 dilla, on the west, and Guanica, Guayanilla, and Puerto Ponce on the 
 south. The eastern part of the island is less important commercially. 
 
 The capital of the island is San Juan. It is situated on a long 
 narrow island, separated from the mainland at one end by a shallow 
 arm of the sea. There is a bridge connecting this end with the 
 mainland, while the other extremity ends in a great high bluff, which 
 is crowned by Morro Castle, the chief fort of the town. Back of this 
 bluff is a magnificent bay with a good depth of water. It is one of 
 the best harbors in the West Indies. The town itself, built over 250 
 years ago, is a fine specimen of the old walled town, having a port 
 cullis, moat, gates and battlements, which must have cost millions of 
 dollars. The city is laid off in regular squares, with six parallel 
 streets running the length of the island and seven at right angles with 
 these. The city is devoid of running water and depends entirely 
 upon rain water which is caught upon the tops of the buildings and 
 kept in cisterns. There is no sewage system, and the risks of con 
 taminating the water supply are very great, while in dry season the 
 supplies are frequently exhausted. 
 
 The town is very much overcrowded. It is surprising to see the 
 great number of poor who are packed like rats in a garret in the 
 tenements in the upper part of the place, and it is almost impossible 
 to rent for residential purposes second stories that are not directly 
 over people who live in squalor, foul air and confusion. As may be 
 
458 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 imagined, dwelling houses are expensive, and our soldiers found great 
 trouble in securing quarters. 
 
 It can be seen readily that in the absence of a good water supply 
 and a sewage system, and with people packed together in such a man 
 ner, epidemics of disease are frequent. The Spaniards once started an 
 expensive system of aqueducts costing $400,000, and issued municipal 
 bonds for that purpose, but the work was never completed. The 
 piping was almost finished, however, and steps are now being taken 
 to push the work oh a stone supply reservoir to be erected in the 
 northern and highest part of the city which would ultimately be used 
 in connection with the unfinished aqueduct. It will take at least a 
 year to complete this reservoir, and even then it will hold less than 
 3,000,000 gallons, which would only last the city five days. 
 
 The streets of the city are wider than those in the older part of 
 Havana and admit two carriages abreast. The pavements are good, 
 but made of material which is easily broken. Besides the portion of 
 the town within the walls, there are small portions just outside called 
 the Marina and Porta de Tierra, each of which have about 3,000 
 inhabitants. There are also two suburbs, San Turce approached by 
 the only road leading out of the city, and the other Catano, which 
 may be reached by ferry right across the bay. The entire population 
 of city and suburbs is about 30,000, one half of which consists of 
 negroes and mixed races. 
 
 THE CITY OF PONCE. 
 
 The city of Ponce, with a population of 37,500, and in commercial 
 importance next to the largest city of Porto Rico, is situated on the 
 south coast of the island about two miles from the sea, and about 
 seventy miles from the capital. It is one of the healthiest cities of 
 Porto Rico and is regularly built, the central part of it being made of 
 brick and the outside part of wood. Here the military commander of 
 the island used to live. It has an appellate criminal court, besides other 
 courts, and contains two hospitals, a military station, two churches, one 
 of which is the only Protestant church in the West Indies, a good 
 fire department, a bank, a theatre, three hotels, and a gas works. 
 
 The chief occupations of the people are the cultivation of sugar, 
 cocoa, tobacco and oranges and the breeding of cattle. The port 
 
CITIES AND TOWNS 459 
 
 which is connected to the city by a splendid road is called the Playa. 
 Here all the import and export trade is transacted, and here is 
 the customhouse and all the consular offices. The port is a good 
 one, and will hold vessels of 25 feet draft. The water supply, which 
 is conveyed to the city by an aqueduct, is ample and good. 
 
 The third largest city of Porto Rico is Mayaguez. It is situated 
 in the western part, 102 miles from San Juan, on Mona Channel. 
 There are three manufacturies of chocolate there, and the city ex- 
 ports sugar, coffee, oranges, pineapples and cocoanuts. The coffee is 
 of the best quality and competes with Java and other first-rate 
 brands. The population is about 20,000, the majority of whom are 
 white. The city is connected with street cars with the town of 
 Aguadilla hear by, and a railroad is being built to Lares in the 
 interior. 
 
 Aguadilla has about 5,000 inhabitants. Its chief industries are 
 the cultivation of sugar, coffee, tobacco, and cocoanuts. The climate 
 is very hot, but healthy. The city is a port for a district which has 
 about 30,000 inhabitants. 
 
 The town of Arecibo is situated on the northern coast of Porto 
 Rico, facing the Atlantic. It is much the same in construction as 
 other Porto Rican towns, with a plaza in the centre and streets run 
 ning at right angles from it. The harbor is not a good one, being 
 exposed to the full force of the ocean, and having dangerous reefs 
 close into shore. The Rio Grande de Arecibo empties into the har 
 bor, and is a small, shallow stream upon which goods are conveyed 
 on flat-bottom boats from the city out to the bar, and there trans 
 ferred to lighters which carry them over to the vessels. It is, how 
 ever, the port of about 30,000 inhabitants, and is, consequently, an 
 important place, although the town itself has but 7,000 people 
 in it. 
 
 Fajardo, on the east coast, has a population of 9,000. It is a 
 good port, with a lighthouse at the entrance, and a customhouse. 
 The town itself is a mile and a quarter from the bay. Most of the 
 people of the district manufacture muscovado sugar, which is the 
 chief article of export. The climate is healthy. 
 
 Naguabo, on the east side, having 2,000 inhabitants, Playa de 
 Nao-uabo, with 1,500, and Humaco, the capital of the district, with 
 
460 PORTO RICO PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE 
 
 4,000, Arroyo in the district of Guayama (southeast portion), with 
 1,200 inhabitants, are the other well-known cities of the island. 
 
 The general healthfulness of the whole island gives rise to the 
 belief that it will become a splendid winter resort in the future under 
 the Stars and Stripes. It already has fame in that connection, and 
 now, with its new affiliations, the personal safety and comfort of visi 
 tors will be such that it will probably be the land of refuge when 
 snow and sleet chase the rich from their homes in the great cities of 
 the North. 
 
CHAPTER XXIV 
 
 The Heroes of 1898 and 1899 
 
 Something About the Men Who Led Our Forces on to the Great Victories Achieved 
 by American Arms. Sketches of Dewey, Sampson, Schley, Bob Evans, Captain 
 Clarke, Captain Gridley, Lieutenant Hobson and Lieutenant-Commander Wain- 
 wright, Who Won Fame at Sea, and Generals Miles, Shafter, Wheeler and Lawton, 
 and Colonel Roosevelt, Who Made History m Cuba, and Generals Merritt, Otis 
 and MacArthur, Who Are Adding to the Army s Laurels in the Philippines. 
 
 APART from all other considerations, the war demonstrated one 
 thing, and that is there are heroes of more than common 
 mould in our country who are ready to do deeds of daring for 
 the Stars and Stripes at any call. The number of men who distin 
 guished themselves during the conflict with Spain and the Filipinos, 
 not only in the ordinary gallantry of war, but in the extraordinary 
 heroism of leadership is unusually large. Both army and navy have 
 contributed to this roll of highest honor. Names which were un 
 known to the great majority of people, are now household words, 
 and will live when those who made them illustrious have passed 
 away. 
 
 It is fitting, as we close this review of the most wonderful year 
 in the history of the United States, or of any other nation, that we 
 take a personal view of some of the renowned leaders. As the fight 
 ing was begun by the navy, it is appiopriate that we glance first at 
 the personnel of those who figured prominently in our naval battles. 
 
 ADMIRAL GEORGE DEWEY. 
 
 There is no name which comes closer to the hearts of the people 
 of a grateful country than that of George Dewey, now through the 
 special legislation of Congress, Admiral of the Navy of the United 
 States. Those who know him, those who have met him in his long 
 lifetime of service have reason to remember the force, and the 
 strength of character of the man who has proved himself not only a 
 
 (461) 
 
462 THE HEROES OF 1898 AND 1899 
 
 fearless fighter and commander, but a statesman of rare ability. The 
 personal side of Admiral Dewey has already been shown to the 
 readers of this volume in a previous chapter, and little can be added 
 to what has already been said. 
 
 ADMIRAL W. T. SAMPSON. 
 
 When the blockade of Havana and the isolation of the island of 
 Cuba from the rest of the world was decided upon, Captain William 
 T. Sampson was placed in command of the United States Naval 
 forces at Key West. There has been, and no doubt will continue to 
 be, considerable criticism of the administration for placing this man 
 in charge of the forces over the head of other officers who outranked 
 him; but history has proved, to the satisfaction of a large majority of 
 thinking people, that William T. Sampson was the right man in the 
 right place throughout the war. It was to his foresight and watch 
 fulness, his care and knowledge that the nation is indebted for the 
 speedy termination of the naval part of the war. Admiral Samp 
 son was chosen because President McKinley and Secretary Long 
 recognized his ability to act with good clear judgment, and to do 
 rather than to say. 
 
 As an ordnance expert he has a world-wide fame, having made 
 executive work and the study of naval science the absorbing object 
 of his career. His knowledge of modern armor and armament is 
 such that he has been of immense service to the Government, and he is 
 equally at home in his knowledge of the use and comparative value 
 of explosives. Both of these subjects require years of thought, 
 hard study and dangerous experiment. To him, with others, was 
 entrusted the task of determining the policy of building up the navy, 
 and his advice was always sought when the Government turned its 
 attention to the building of ships. His keen intellect and good judg 
 ment inspired confidence in all who knew him, and so this student of 
 war became the foremost figure in the naval affairs of the country. 
 
 A tall, slim man, with shoulders a trifle rounded, with hair and 
 beard heavily touched with white, with eyes deep set beneath 
 strongly marked eyebrows, and a quiet thoughtful expressive face, 
 such, briefly, is William T. Sampson. He was born in Palmyra, New 
 York, February 9, 1840, the son of poor and hard-working parents, 
 
ADMIRAL W. T. SAMPSON 463 
 
 who knew no luxury and could give him no advantages. His educa 
 tion was the result of determination. He found little time to attend 
 the county school, but he had made up his mind to push himself 
 along and so nothing could keep him down. 
 
 In 1857, he obtained an appointment as midshipman in the 
 United States Naval Academy, and four years afterwards he gradu 
 ated at the very head of his class. He was so young when the 
 Civil War broke out that he could not take a command, but his con 
 duct as master on the Frigate Potomac won him promotion to the 
 rank of second Lieutenant in 1862. He served on the practice ship 
 John Adams and on the Colorado, the flagship of the European 
 Squadron. 
 
 On January 16, 1865, he was ordered as executive officer on 
 the ironclad Patapsco, to enter Charleston harbor, before which the 
 Union ships had established a blockade, and to remove or destroy 
 all submarine mines that could be found. The task was a dangerous 
 one, but the little ironclad pluckily made her way into the harbor 
 through a storm of bullets from the rifles of the Confederate sharp 
 shooters. Lieutenant Sampson, standing on the bridge in the most 
 exposed position, saw his men fall before the fire, but he did not 
 flinch. Ordering his men below, he himself stayed at his post, a 
 target for a hundred marksmen. 
 
 Then came an ominous cessation of firing as the Patapsco moved 
 forward. A moment after, a terrific explosion shook the water for 
 miles around and lifted the boat clean into the air. Other explosions 
 quickly followed and the shattered ironclad sank beneath the waters 
 of the harbor. Young Sampson was rescued about 100 feet from the 
 wreck, where he had been blown by the explosion. Twenty-five of 
 his crew were also saved, but seventy men met death in the brave 
 attempt to do their duty. 
 
 Sampson was promoted to Lieutenant-Commander in 1866, 
 while on the Colorado. He was at the Naval Academy from 1868 to 
 1871, and on the Congress in 1872 anp 1873 ; was made Commander 
 in 1874 and assigned to the Alert \ then from 1876 to 1878 he was 
 again at the Naval Academy. In 1879 he was * n China, commanding 
 the Swatara. He commanded at other times both the Iowa and the 
 San Francisco. He was chief of the bureau of the ordnance from 
 
464 THE HEROES OF \8 9 8 AND iS 99 
 
 1893 to 1897, in which position he did such constant and exhausting 
 work that he almost wrecked his health. 
 
 To him was due the plan which prevented Cervera s fleet from 
 coming out from Santiago harbor and making its escape. Unluckily 
 when the Spanish Commander made the attempt to run the gantlet 
 of the American vessels outside of the harbor, Admiral Sampson 
 was some distance away, too far in fact for his vessel to take part 
 in the annihilation of the Spanish warships, but his plan of attack 
 was followed out and to him therefore the successful termination of 
 that great naval battle was largely due. 
 
 ADMIRAL WINFIELD SCOTT SCHLEY. 
 
 The great rival of Admiral Sampson for the honors in the 
 destruction of Cervera s fleet was Winfield Scott Schley, who was the 
 ranking officer on the vessels actually engaged in the fight with the 
 Spanish fleet. He was born in Maryland, near Frederick, in 1839, 
 and his very baptism was subject to military influence, for just at this 
 time General Winfield Scott was in Frederick holding Court Martial, 
 and Schley s father, who had served in the navy and the war of 1812 
 became a close friend of the General. So the son and heir of the 
 Schleys was baptized Winfield Scott. 
 
 The Schley of to-day is a tall, strong-looking man with more 
 muscle than flesh, a fair complexion, with lightish hair and a gray 
 moustache and goatee which give him an air of vigor and almost 
 fierceness. He, too, is a product of the Naval Academy, which he 
 left in 1861, graduating at the top of his class. He was immediately 
 given shore duty on the frigate Potomac, and in 1862 was promoted 
 to Master and ordered to the Winona of the blockading squadron, of 
 the West Gulf. He was in a number of skirmishes along the Missis 
 sippi River, and engaged in operating with field batteries. Under 
 heavy fire Schley aided in cutting out two schooners which were car 
 rying supplies to the enemy. For this he was honorably mentioned 
 in special orders. He became a Lieutenant in 1862 ; from 1864 to 
 to 1866 he was an executive officer of a steam gunboat on which he 
 served in the Pacific Station. 
 
 Schley figured in the insurrection among the Chinese Coolies in 
 the Chin Chi Islands in 1864. In 1866 he was made Lieutenant-Corn- 
 
CAPTAIN CHARLES EDGAR CLARKE 465 
 
 mander. After duty at the Naval Academy for three years, he took 
 part in the overthrow of the forces defending the Salu River, in 
 the Corea. He spent sometime at Annapolis as head of the depart 
 ment of modern languages, and, when made Commander in 1874, 
 spent five years on the North and South Atlantic Stations and the 
 Western Coast of Africa. 
 
 He was in command of the Greely relief expedition which 
 safely brought Lieutenant Greely and six others from the land of 
 the North Pole, for which he received a gold medal from Congress 
 and was promoted to Chief of the Bureau of Equipment with rank of 
 Captain. Later he resigned and was placed in command of the 
 cruiser Baltimore. That vessel figured in difficulties at Valparaiso, 
 where some of the soldiers were stoned by Chileans, and for a time 
 disagreeable complications with that country threatened. When the 
 war broke out, Schley was placed in command of the Flying Squadron, 
 and the work done by him in the defeat of Cervera s fleet is told in 
 a preceding chapter. 
 
 CAPTAIN CHARLES EDGAR CLARKE. 
 
 When the war with Spain was first threatening, the battleship 
 Oregon, one of the new vessels built at San Francisco, was in charge 
 of Captain Charles Edgar Clarke, and was fresh out of the dry dock 
 at the Naval Station at Puget Sound. Word was sent for this com 
 paratively unknown fighter to join the other vessels of the American 
 fleet in Atlantic waters. To do this it was necessary to go down the 
 west coast of the United States, Mexico, Central America and South 
 America, pass through the straits of Magellan and come almost as far 
 up the east coast of the southern continent to Key West. 
 
 It was a voyage filled with danger and uncertainty. The Spanish 
 fleet was at that time heading toward our shores, according to rumor, 
 and the fear was that the Oregon would be intercepted on her way up 
 the eastern coast of South America and would be sunk or captured 
 by the Spanish fleet But " nothing venture nothing have," so the 
 Oregon left San Francisco on March 19, 1898, on a journey which has 
 never been equalled in the annals of naval history. The distance to be 
 traveled was 14,000 nautical miles, and there was no rest in sight for 
 the men or for the vessel, until the great battleship was safely anchored 
 
466 THE HEROES OF i% 9 8 AND 1899 
 
 off Key West. It was a voyage of intense excitement and anxiety to 
 all on board, for no one knew at what moment the enemy might turn 
 up. The engines were kept working away, and from the start until 
 May 24th, when the Oregon arrived in Jupiter Inlet, Florida, she 
 did not lose one day or one hour by accident to machinery or for 
 repairs. She completed the run at the incredible rate of 1 1 knots an 
 hour for the whole 14,000 miles, and then she joined her prowess 
 with that of the North Atlantic Squadron and gave a good account 
 of herself in the battle of July 3d. She is called the " Queen of the 
 Seas " now, and it would seem that she deserves the title, for the 
 whole world has viewed with amazement this mighty output of Ameri 
 can shipbuilders, which stands easily first in its record among the 
 vessels of the whole world. This run alone would have made its 
 commander, Captain Clarke, famous, even had he not fought so 
 bravely in the battle with Cervera s fleet. 
 
 Like Admiral Dewey, he was born in Vermont, and, like him, he 
 had in early youth a desire to devote his life to service at sea. He 
 entered the Naval Academy September 29, 1860 ; was appointed En 
 sign October i, 1863, and served during the remainder of the Civil 
 War in that grade. He was present at the battle of Mobile Bay and 
 the bombardment of Fort Morgan, and conducted himself with credit 
 in all these engagements. He passed rapidly through the lower 
 grades and became Lieutenant-Commander March 12, 1868, and 
 Commander November 15, 1881. He commanded the Ranger in 1883 
 to 1886, and in 1891 he was stationed at the Navy Yard, Mare Island, 
 California. On the 2ist of June, 1896, he was promoted to Captain, 
 and on March I7th, two days before the Oregon began her famous 
 trip, he was placed in command of that vessel. 
 
 After the war, the strain of service told very vigorously on Cap 
 tain Clarke, and he was condemned by the Board of Medical Survey, 
 and was relieved of his command. He was placed in charge of the 
 League Island Navy Yard at Philadelphia. 
 
 BOB " EVANS. 
 
 One can hardly think of the heroes of the Navy without thinking 
 of Captain Robley D. Evans, who is very much better known as 
 " Fighting Bob " Evans. As the commander of the Iowa he did him 
 
"FIGHTING DOB EVANS " 467 
 
 self and the nation great credit during the war. Evans is a native of 
 Virginia, but received his appointment to Annapolis from Utah. He 
 graduated in 1863, and was made an Ensign in the same year. His 
 career began on the steam sloop Powhattan, of the West India Squad 
 ron, and almost immediately he saw active service. He participated 
 on both the land attacks on Fort Fisher, January 15, 1865. He was 
 among the leaders in the assault, and while under the ramparts was 
 so severely wounded that he was thought to be dead when found. 
 When he recovered consciousness he was told that one of his legs 
 must be amputated, if he was to have any chance of recovery. His 
 pistol was still in his belt, and he declared that he would shoot the 
 first surgeon that touched him, unless he promised that there should 
 be no amputation. He was afraid the loss of a leg would prevent 
 him from ever taking his place as an officer on the deck of a warship. 
 
 Soon, however, he sank into a sleep out of sheer weakness, and 
 then he was chloroformed and the operation was performed. 
 Although it took him nearly a year to recover, he finally pulled 
 through, and was delighted to know that he was kept on the active 
 list. There are few who know to-day that "Fighting Bob" has only 
 one leg, for he handles an artificial limb so cleverly that it does the 
 work of the member it replaced. 
 
 Evans was assigned to the League Island Navy Yard in 1866, 
 and was made Lieutenant the same year. He was commissioned 
 Lieutenant-Commander March 12, 1868; from 1870 to 1872 he was 
 assigned to shore duty, and was then attached successively to the 
 Shenandoah, Congress and Saratoga. He was promoted to Com 
 mander in July, 1878 ; from 1882 to 1886 he was Lighthouse Inspec 
 tor, and on the following year he became Chief Inspector of steel 
 cruisers. He served as Secretary of the Lighthouse Board from 
 then until 1889. 
 
 The title " Fighting Bob" was given him while in command of 
 one of the United States vessels in the harbor of Valparaiso, just 
 after the Schley incident. The relations between our Government 
 and that of Chile were somewhat strained, and for awhile it looked 
 as though war would result. Several of the Chile torpedo boats 
 began manceuvering in a threatening manner about Evans vessel. 
 He trained his guns on the torpedo boats, and then ordering his 
 
468 THE HEROES OF 1898 AND i8 99 
 
 launch, went on shore and gave the authorities a half hour to stop 
 the manoeuvering. Within the time specified the boats were ordered 
 away, and that incident ended the trouble. At the outbreak of the 
 war with Spain he asked to be placed in command of the Iowa and 
 was accommodated, and gave a good account of himself in the fight 
 with Cervera s fleet off Santiago. 
 
 LIEUTENANT-COMMANDER RICHARD WAINWRIGHT. 
 
 When the Maine was blown up in Havana harbor, she had as her 
 executive officer Lieutenant-Commander Richard Wainwright. He 
 was one of the fortunate few who escaped death in the explosion. 
 After the disaster, Wainwright stayed for seven weeks in Havana 
 harbor, but during all that time did not once set foot in Havana City. 
 He was ordered on board the Fern, and on it, according to rumor, 
 he registered a vow that he would never enter Havana City, while it 
 was under Spanish rule, unless it was at the head of a battalion of 
 blue jackets. At the hearing of the Court of Inquiry Wainwright 
 was one of the chief witnesses. He was keenly vindictive about the 
 disaster, and frequently expressed his desire to get even with the 
 Spaniards for the loss of the Maine. 
 
 On April 5th, long after Captain Sigsbee and all his other sub 
 ordinates had been relieved, Wainwright, the only officer of the 
 Maine, remaining in Havana harbor, pulled down the weather-stained 
 flag that had floated day and night from the shrouds of the wrecked 
 battleship, and went in obedience to the summons to report at Wash 
 ington for staff duty in the Navy Department. But he did not like 
 it. With the outbreak of the war he was eager to obtain command 
 of some small vessel with some capable guns, all he could expect, 
 being only a Lieutenant-Commander. It was not long before he was 
 placed in command of the transformed pleasure yacht the Corsair; 
 and everybody is familiar with what Wainwright did to " Remember 
 the Maine." 
 
 Though a strict disciplinarian, he was popular with both officers 
 and men. He lacked somewhat the charming personality and con 
 versational powers of some of the other officers, yet he showed such 
 sterling manly qualities that everybody liked and admired him. He 
 was dignified, strict and firm, but not to excess. He inherited his 
 
CAPTAIN CHARLES V. GRIDLEY 469 
 
 fighting instincts from his father, the late Commodore Wainwright, 
 who died in the naval service during the Civil War. 
 
 The son was born in Washington, and is about 48 years of age, 
 the youngest man of his grade in the navy. He was graduated from 
 the Naval Academy in 1868, and was assigned to the Jamestown of 
 the Pacific fleet. He was promoted to Ensign in 1869, and the fol 
 lowing year was ordered to the Hydrographic Office. The same year 
 he was promoted to Master, and from 1870 to 1872 was assigned to 
 the Colorado, of the Asiatic fleet. He was commissioned Lieutenant 
 in 1872, and the next year was ordered back to the Hydrographic 
 Office. From 1875 to 1878 he was in command of the coast survey 
 vessel Arago, and since that time he has made two cruises to China. 
 He is considered one of the best tacticians in the navy, and his 
 advice, just before the war broke out, proved exceedingly valuable in 
 the construction of tlie naval plan by the Secretary of the Navy. 
 
 CAPTAIN CHARLES V. GRIDLEY. 
 
 When Admiral Dewey planned to enter Manila Bay he had with 
 him as Commander of his flagship, the Olympia, Captain Charles V. 
 Gridley, and no man deserved higher praise or won greater laurels 
 from the Admiral than did this hero who sacrificed his life for the 
 flag. He fought his ship from the conning tower, while the Admiral 
 directed the movement of the squadron from the bridge of the vessel. 
 After the battle the brave Captain died from the injuries received 
 during that fight. He was condemned by the Board of Medical 
 Survey just after the fight, and was on his way home when he died. 
 
 Captain Gridley was not a dress-parade-officer. He had the 
 reputation of being one of the best equipped men in the navy. He 
 was a splendid navigator, and had a good knowledge of all the details 
 and requirements of the service. He was born in Logansport, 
 Indiana, in 1845, DUt was appointed to Annapolis from Michigan, to 
 which place the family had moved. He was graduated in 1863, a 
 year ahead of his time, owing to the Civil War. He was made an 
 Ensign October i, 1863, and in the battle of Mobile Bay he showed 
 his coolness and bravery. He passed through various important 
 posts until, on March 10, 1882, he was made Commander. 
 
47 o THE HEROES OF i8 9 8 AND i8 99 
 
 From October, 1882, to February, 1884, he was Chief Naviga 
 tion Officer at the Boston Navy Yard ; in February, 1884, ne was 
 ordered to command the training ship Portsmouth ; from June to 
 November, 1886, he was the senior officer of the Cruising Training 
 Squadron. In July, 1887, he was Inspector of the Tenth Lighthouse 
 District stationed at Buffalo, where he served until October, 1891. 
 In March, 1897, while Commander of the receiving ship Richmond 
 at League Island he was ordered to the Asiatic Squadron ; and on 
 July 1 8th, he was assigned to command the Olympia. 
 
 RICHMOND P. HOBSON. 
 
 No record of the heroes of the Navy would be complete with 
 out a sketch of Richmond Pearson Hobson, who braved death on the 
 Merrimac in his attempt to sink that vessel and shut in the Spanish 
 fleet. Although only 28 years of age, Hobson has achieved a repu 
 tation for heroism that is doubtlessly envied by many an older man. 
 He was born in the little town of Greensboro, Ala., where his father, 
 James M. Hobson, had been Judge of the Probate Court of the 
 county for twenty-five years, and is now a retired planter. In that 
 quiet country town, which is so far from larger cities that newspapers 
 do not reach it until at least twelve hours after publication, this young 
 man was reared, and his character was formed. 
 
 Those who remember him in Greensboro say that his chief 
 characteristics were shown very early in his life. He was brave, reso 
 lute, modest, yet aggressive, when occasion required. Mentally he 
 was original and brilliant. He was a good shot and a good athlete, 
 even in his boyhood days. As he grew up he attended the Southern 
 University which was situated in his native town, and while there, 
 though not a hard student, he led his class easily and carried off all 
 the honors, including that of champion debater in the literary society. 
 Later he went to Annapolis, and there he obtained the reputation of 
 being a hard worker. He cared more for his books than for 
 a good time. Perhaps the thing that he was most noted for there 
 was his intolerance of hazing and the horse-play which are so common 
 at institutions of learning. He graduated with high honors and 
 plunged into the work of his profession with great zeal. 
 
GENERAL NELSON A. MILES 471 
 
 Judge Hobson, when asked when his son first showed a desire 
 to become a naval officer, said : " Richmond was always interested in 
 army and navy matters. In 1884 he made a trip to New Orleans, 
 and there he saw the old warship Tennessee. He came back possessed 
 of many details about the construction and operation of the vessel, 
 and announced his desire to go to Annapolis. He evinced a decided 
 talent for mathematics and the mechanical construction of toyships, 
 and such things as boys generally make." The people of his native 
 town are proud of him, as they were of his father before him, and the 
 old home in the midst of a grove of magnolias, cedar and water-oaks 
 on the hill at the western terminus of Greensboro s main avenue, a 
 typical plantation house of the old colonial style, is the Mecca of 
 hero worshipers from all parts of the country. 
 
 These constitute some of the leaders who won fame for our 
 country on the sea. It is difficult to make a distinction, for nearly 
 all of those who were in command of vessels during the war won 
 laurels for bravery and good judgment and coolness under fire. The 
 same is true of the leaders of the army, and yet there are a few whose 
 names are more familiar than others on account of their position, or 
 on account of their individual heroism. 
 
 GENERAL NELSON A. MILES. 
 
 When the war with Spain broke out, the Commander of all the 
 forces of the United States, General Nelson A. Miles, decided to 
 remain at Washington and take control of all the troops from that 
 IDoint. Later, however, he determined to go to the front, and for 
 that purpose he embarked from Key West and reached Santiago in 
 time to be present at the surrender of the city, although he did not 
 displace General Shafter from the command of the forces there. 
 After the city had surrendered General Miles took personal charge of 
 the campaign in Porto Rico, and was pushing forward on a victorious 
 march when the news of the cessation of hostilities reached him. 
 
 The fame of the commander of all the forces of the United 
 States was made chiefly as an Indian fighter. He had been schooled 
 in the Civil War and graduated in the conflict with the savage tribes 
 in the West. General Miles did not have a West Point training. He 
 began his service in the ranks of the Union volunteers. The blood 
 
472 THE HEROES OF 1898 AND i8 99 
 
 of a long line of ancestors who had been fighters flowed through his 
 veins. One of his ancestors was a captain in King Philips War, 
 while Daniel, his great-grandfather, and three of Daniel s sons, one 
 of whom was Joab, the General s grandfather, were in the Revolu 
 tionary Army. 
 
 General Miles had just attained his majority when he went to 
 the front as first Lieutenant of a company he had raised himself. He 
 was working in a crockery store when the first call for volunteers 
 came in the Civil War. He drew from a savings bank $1,000 which 
 he had saved from his wages, and borrowing $2,500 on his personal 
 note he raised and equipped a company. The Governor of the State 
 mustered in the company and made Miles a captain. Later, however, 
 when a political friend wanted an appointment, the Governor recalled 
 the commission on the ground that Miles was too young for such a 
 command, and offered to make 4iim a first Lieutenant instead, and as 
 such he went into the war. 
 
 He had been in the field but a short time, when General O. O. 
 Howard became interested in him and took him upon his staff. 
 Miles was one of Howard s aides at Fair Oaks, and in that battle he 
 gave proof of the stuff that he was made of. Howard had orders 
 that had to be delivered at once. The mission was one filled with 
 the greatest danger, and Miles was chosen to carry it out. Half an 
 hour after the young man had started with his message, Howard, 
 standing in front of his tent, saw a stretcher being carried towards 
 him with a wounded man upon it. From a great ragged wound in 
 his neck the blood was flowing, and the victim was trying vainly to 
 check it by gripping the torn flesh in his fingers. As the stretcher 
 came to the front of the General s tent, the wounded man halted 
 and said : 
 
 " General, I want to tell you that your lines are weak over yon. 
 der, and there will be trouble unless you send reinforcements at 
 once." 
 
 The speaker was young Miles, and as the men carried him away ; 
 General Howard asked where he had been picked up. 
 
 " Down there near the far end of the line, about a mile and 
 ahalf, sir." 
 
 Hearing this Howard turned to the officers near him and said : 
 
GENERAL WILLIAM R. SH AFTER 473 
 
 " Holding that wound for a mile and a-half to bring that report! 
 If that young fellow lives he will be heard of again." 
 
 He did live and was heard of frequently throughout the war, 
 and was shot both at Fredericksburg and Chancellorsville. 
 
 After the Civil War General Miles saw twenty years of service 
 as an Indian fighter, and his efficiency and bravery in dealing with 
 the redskins won him promotion which finally terminated in his 
 achieving the highest rank in the army. 
 
 Personally General Miles is an ideal soldier. ,He is one of the 
 handsomest men in the army, carries himself well, and has the ease 
 and polish of a man who has long mixed with the social life for which 
 the army is noted. He is popular with his men everywhere, is a good 
 organizer and a good leader. 
 
 GENERAL WILLIAM R. SHAFTER. 
 
 The army of invasion in Cuba was in command of General 
 William Rufus Shafter. He, too, had seen Indian fighting for many 
 years. Adjutant-General Corbin summed up his history in a para 
 graph : " He came from what Lincoln called the plain people. He 
 did not go to West Point ; he is a self-made soldier, if there can be 
 such a thing. It were better to say that he was born a soldier and 
 that, even had he tried to alter his career, he could not, in spirit at 
 least, ever have been other than a soldier." 
 
 He was a farmer s boy, tough and lean as hickory. He was 
 twenty-five years old, when the Civil War broke out, and entered the 
 Seventh Michigan Infantry in 1861, as a First Lieutenant, lie 
 served with distinction through the war, having been consecutively, 
 Major of the Nineteenth Michigan Infantry, Lieutenant-Colonel and 
 Colonel of the United States Infantry, and breveted Brigadier- 
 General in March 1865. He won brevet of Colonel also for gallant 
 and meritorious services in the Battle of Fair Oaks. 
 
 His commission as Colonel of the First Infantry was vacated 
 May 4, 1897, by his promotion to Brigadier-General. He was put 
 in command of the Department of California, with headquarters at 
 San Francisco. During the past thirty years of his life his service 
 has been continously in the West. He won distinction in the Indian 
 campaign of Texas, New Mexico and along the Rio Grande. 
 
474 THE HEROES OF 1898 AND i8 99 
 
 Personally General Shafter is a trifle less than six feet in height 
 and so stout that he weighs about three hundred pounds. He has 
 blue eyes under heavy shaggy brows and a fighting hook nose. He 
 wears a heavy mustache of gray, and hair parted in the middle. He 
 is popular with his men, and his bravery has never been questioned. 
 As might have been expected in a man of his physique the heat of 
 the campaign in Cuba told heavily upon him, and while the great 
 battle which resulted in the downfall of Santiago was fought, he was 
 too ill to take command in person. General Shafter was born in the 
 town of Galesburg, Kalamazoo County, Michigan, October 16, 1835. 
 
 GENERAL JOE WHEELER. 
 
 It is a matter of more than ordinary interest, that the man, who 
 perhaps as much as any other hero of the war won honors for indivi 
 dual heroism and bravery as a leader, came from the ranks of the 
 Confederate Army, with a record for bravery in the Confederate 
 cause, equal to that which, in his mature years, he achieved for the 
 Stars and Stripes. 
 
 In the popular mind, General Joe Wheeler stands out in bold 
 relief as one of the notable men in the Spanish war. None, perhaps, 
 is more picturesque. He is a small man of about 120 pounds, bearing 
 his sixty-two years of age with a vigor that is surprising, an agile, 
 active man, who knows neither fear nor fatigue. 
 
 Wheeler was born a cavalryman, and when he resigned his 
 Second Lieutenant s commission in the Fifth Dragoons in 1861, to 
 serve the Confederacy, it was with some reluctance that he accepted 
 a First Lieutenant s commission in the artillery and an assignment to 
 garrison duty at Pensacola. A few months later he received a 
 Colonel s commission in an Alabama infantry regiment. 
 
 At the battle of Shiloh, both he and his command gave good 
 accounts of themselves. The regiment was almost shattered, but 
 Colonel Wheeler, according to his brigade commander, " bravely 
 charged at the head of the small remnant of his regiment, and the 
 remnant of Mississippians, bearing the regimental colors aloft." In 
 this charge two horses were shot under him, in fact Wheeler s horse 
 always offered a better target than his rider, and before the war ended 
 sixteen had been shot and killed under him in battle, besides a great 
 
COLONEL THEODORE ROOSEVELT 475 
 
 number wounded. He was always in the thick of the fio-ht, even 
 after he rose to the command -of a division and a corps, and duty on 
 his staff was by no means a sinecure. From first to last no fewer 
 than thirty-two of his staff officers were killed or wounded while 
 riding beside him in battle. He himself was wounded three times. 
 
 The history of the Confederate battles teems with the name of 
 Wheeler on almost every page. Daring calvary raids and counter- 
 raids were made successfully by this brave officer, and in the dying 
 days of the Confederacy, Wheeler was taken prisoner and confined 
 in Fort Delaware, from which he was liberated after a short imprison- 
 me.nt on parole. 
 
 He was the first ex-Confederate to offer his services to the 
 Government as a soldier in the war with Spain, and, when he again 
 took up arms, he belted his sword around a blue instead of a gray 
 uniform, and went forth to battle under the Stars and Stripes, and 
 not only did he go, but his two sons went with him to the front and 
 his daughter put on the uniform of a nurse, and at the battle of 
 Santiago, was to the sick and wounded what her father was to the 
 men in battle, an inspiration and an aid. 
 
 COLONEL THEODORE ROOSEVELT. 
 
 It is difficult to say which is better known, Colonel " Teddy" 
 Roosevelt or the Rough Riders. After the promotion of Colonel 
 Wood, Lieutenant-Colonel Roosevelt was placed in charge of this 
 invincible body of fighters, which distinguished itself at the front. 
 He had left the Navy Department, where he had been assistant to the 
 Secretary in order that he might taste the delights of battle. His 
 has been a career of which any man might well be proud. Although 
 a young man, having been born on October 27, 1858, he has fought 
 his way to the front and stands to-day at the foremost ranks of the 
 younger men, who have made fame in the political world, besides 
 proving himself a hero in battle. His family has figured prominently 
 in the business, social and political affairs of New York, for many 
 generations, and some member of the family took part in every 
 struggle from the Revolution to the war with Spain. 
 
 Although "born with a silver spoon in his mouth," Theodore 
 Roosevelt had no idea of living a life of idleness and uselessness, A v s 
 
47 6 THE HEROES OF 1898 AND i8 99 
 
 a boy he was sickly and delicate, and so the first thing that he set 
 about to do was to make himself well and strong. By the time he 
 entered Harvard he was able to take part in all kinds of sports, 
 although never excelling as an athlete. He graduated in 1880, a 
 strong vigorous man, well trained, both in body and in mind. He 
 studied law and in his first year out of college began his career in 
 politics, having been elected to the Assembly from the Twenty-first 
 District of New York. He was re-elected three times and had 
 become so prominent as an agressive man that he became the 
 Republican candidate for Mayor of New York, but was defeated. 
 President Cleveland appointed him a Republican member of the 
 United States Civil Service Commission, and his ability and honesty 
 in that position added to his hold on the popular regard. He con 
 tinued in that office until May i, 1895, when he was made Police 
 Commissioner by Mayor Strong of New York. He soon began to 
 turn things upside down, and made it evident, that he was a man who 
 had to be recognized in every move. President McKinley appointed 
 him Assistant Secretary of the Navy on April 6, 1897, an< ^ i n tnat 
 position he contributed largely to the successful administration of 
 the naval affairs prior to the breaking out of the war. 
 
 Mr. Roosevelt always spent his summers on his ranch in Dakota, 
 and there he became familiar with the rough life of the cowboy, and 
 became used to the hardships which he had to undergo in the cam 
 paign in Cuba. In the midst of his very busy political life, Mr. 
 Roosevelt has found time to do considerable literary work, and has 
 published nearly a score of interesting books. 
 
 GENERAL HENRY W. LAWTON. 
 
 Among those who were conspicuous for their bravery in the 
 Cuban campaign, is one General who is equally conspicuous in the 
 fighting in the Philippines. That is Major-General Henry W. Law- 
 ton. General Lawton takes to fighting as a duck does to water. He 
 is ranked as one of the very best Indian fighters in the country, and 
 his knowledge of the savage methods of warfare has made him of 
 great value both in Cuba and the far-away islands across the sea. He 
 was famous even before the war with Spain. He had made a reputa 
 tion as a fearless fighter on many a battlefield. 
 
GENERAL ELWELL S. OTIS 477 
 
 He entered the volunteer army as a sergeant in the Ninth Indi 
 ana Infantry immediately after the firing on Fort Sumter. He 
 became a First Lieutenant in the Thirtieth Indiana in August, 1861, 
 and rose to the rank of Lieutenant-Colonel by November, 1864, being 
 mustered out with a brevet of Colonel for gallant and meritorious 
 service. He was appointed to the regular army in 1866, and was 
 transferred to the Fourth Cavalry as a First Lieutenant in 1871. He 
 became a Captain March 20, 1879, m which rank he led his troops in 
 a number of the hardest Indian campaigns which our army has ever 
 undertaken. In direct recognition of this splendid service Captain 
 Lawton was promoted to the Inspector-General s Department, with 
 the rank of Major, in 1888. The following year he was made Lieu 
 tenant-Colonel, and at the outbreak of the war he was appointed a 
 Brigadier-General, and in reward of meritorious service was further 
 advanced to Major- General after the Battle of Santiago, where he so 
 greatly distinguished himself. 
 
 Lawton is the giant of the army. He is six feet three inches 
 tall, weighs 210 pounds, and every ounce of it is bone and muscle. 
 He is 55 years old, but is as vigorous and springy as an athlete. 
 There is nothing in the way of strength and endurance that he can 
 not do. He has imbibed much of the unconventionalities of a man 
 who has spent a long term on the frontier actively engaged in war 
 fare with the Indians. He is quick-tempered, but just, and his men 
 worship him, and are ready to follow him to the last ditch. 
 
 GENERAL ELWELL S. OTIS. 
 
 When the American troops were sent to the Philippines General 
 Wesley Merritt was placed in command, but after the downfall of 
 Manila General Merritt was relieved to attend the Peace Conference 
 at Paris, and General Elwell Stephen Otis was appointed to succeed 
 him. By birth, General Otis is a Marylander. He was born at 
 Frederick, which is also the birthplace of Admiral Schley, in 
 1838, but New York claims him, as he has lived most of his life in 
 that State. He was graduated from Rochester University in 1858, 
 and admitted to the bar in the following year. He entered the Law 
 School of Harvard in 1859, so as to more thoroughly ground himself 
 in legal knowledge, and in due time took his degree. 
 
478 THE HEROES OF i8 9 8 AND i8 99 
 
 When the Civil War broke out he went to the front as Captain of 
 the One Hundred and Fortieth New York Infantry, becoming Colonel 
 of the regiment and Brigadier-General of volunteers in 1864. He 
 saw plenty of hot fighting, and was severely wounded at Weldon 
 Road, Virginia, a ball entering his face to the left of the nose and 
 passing out just back of the ear. This wound has never healed, and 
 it is extraordinary how much work General Otis has been able to do, 
 while suffering for years with it. Because of this physical incapacity 
 for the field, he was honorably mustered out in January, 1865, and 
 received new brevets for gallant and meritorious services at Spottsyl- 
 vania and Chapel House, Va. His higher brevet of Brigadier-Gen 
 eral of Volunteers dates from July 28, 1866. 
 
 His heart was w r ith the army, however, and he returned to it in 
 1867 as Lieutenant-Colonel of the Twenty-second Infantry, and 
 became Colonel of the Twentieth in February, 1880. He became 
 skilled in frontier warfare, and for fourteen years served in Indian 
 campaigns. He organized in 1883 the Infantry and Cavalry School 
 at Leavenworth, Kansas, which has been invaluable to the army in 
 the training of young officers. On November 26, 1893, after thirty- 
 one years of service, he was commissioned as a Brigadier-General, 
 and after going to the Philippines was made a Major-General. Gen 
 eral Otis is not a demonstrative man, but is inclined to be reticent 
 and unobtrusive. He is a man of untiring energy, and derives inex 
 plicable pleasure from looking after the minutest details of his com 
 mand things which are usually deputized to inferior officers. For 
 instance, he usually writes out all of his own orders, so that his adju 
 tant practically has nothing to do. He reads every official order 
 carefully, and works early and late on details of this kind. He finds 
 more pleasure in his home than at his club, and works there inces 
 santly when not at his own office. 
 
 GENERAL ARTHUR MAC ARTHUR. 
 
 Of all those in General Otis command General MacArthur has 
 achieved more prominence in the fighting in the Philippines than any 
 other officer. Everywhere his troops carried victory with them, and 
 he himself was always in the hottest part of the firing line, facing 
 death fearlessly, MacArthur won his spurs as a fighter in the Civil 
 
GENERAL ARTHUR MAC ARTHUR 479 
 
 War, when but a boy of nineteen. He went into the war as a First 
 Lieutenant. Two years later he was made a Major, and at the time of 
 Lee s surrender he was breveted Colonel for bravery. Two months 
 later he was appointed a Lieutenant-Colonel and held that rank, when 
 the war closed. But the spirit of war was upon him. He obtained 
 an appointment as Second Lieutenant of the Seventeenth Infantry a 
 year after the surrender Two months later he was made First Lieu 
 tenant and three months after Captain of the Thirty-sixth Infantry. 
 In 1889 he was assigned to the Adjutant General s Office, and in 
 1896 he was made a Lieutenant-Colonel in that department. 
 
 When the troops were sent to the Philippines he was appointed 
 a Brigadier-General of Volunteers. By birth he is a Massachusetts 
 man, although he went into the army from Wisconsin, where his 
 family removed. Mac Arthur is a rather short, heavily-built man who 
 dresses carefully and with taste, and is an ideal soldier in action. He 
 is rather quiet and thoughtful, though he enjoys a good story and 
 appreciates a good joke.. He is the bravest of the brave, and his men 
 swear by MacArthur. 
 
 Coolness and carefulness characterize his fighting, and he care 
 fully plans his warfare and then aggressively carries it out. His father 
 was a Judge at Washington, D. C., and consequently MacArthur 
 saw a great deal of social life there. He is very careful about his 
 social duties, and rather enjoys the lighter side of men and women, 
 As one of his aides summed him up : i( He is an ideal soldier and 
 an ideal man." 
 
 And so the record of our heroes goes on, and might be prolonged 
 indefinitely, but these are fair samples of the American leaders who 
 have shown the world how American men can fight, and how Ameri 
 can men do fight when there is a just cause. 
 
CHAPTER XXV 
 
 The Closing Events of the Philippine War 
 
 A Proclamation by the Commissioners from the United States, Giving Assurance of 
 our Good Will but Stating that American Supremacy Will be Maintained for 
 Good Government. Dagupan Bombarded. General Montenegro One of the 
 Great Insurgent Leaders Killed. Lawton s Flying Column Sweeps Down Upon 
 the Province of Laguna. Santa Cruz Captured. Lumban and Pagsangan Also 
 Fall Before the American Troops. Lawton s Expedition Recalled. MacArthur s 
 Men Gloriously Storm Calumpit s Trenches. The Fighting Continues. 
 
 SHORTLY after the fall of Malolos, the United States Philip 
 pine Commissioners issued a proclamation on behalf of our 
 Government to show the good will of the President and the 
 people of the United States towards the inhabitants of the Philip 
 pines. This proclamation was one of the most important documents 
 issued in connection with war in those islands, and is given herewith 
 in full, inasmuch as it shows the attitude which President McKinley 
 has taken and proposes to carry out in regard to the Filipinos. 
 The proclamation follows : 
 
 "The commission desires to assure the people of the Philippine 
 Islands of the cordial good will and fraternal feeling which is enter 
 tained for them by the President of the United States and by the 
 American people. 
 
 The aim and object of the American Government, apart from 
 the fulfillment of the solemn obligations it has assumed toward the 
 family of nations by its acceptance of sovereignty over the Philippine 
 Islands, is the well-being, prosperity and happiness of the Philippine 
 people and their elevation and advancement to a position among the 
 most civilized peoples of the world. 
 
 " The President believes that this felicity and perfection of the 
 
 Philippine people is to be brought about by the assurance of peace 
 
 and order, by the guarantee of civil and religious liberty, by the 
 
 establishment of justice, by the cultivation of letters, science and the 
 
 ( 4 8o) 
 
A PROCLAMATION BY THE COMMISSIONERS 481 
 
 liberal and practical arts, by the enlargement of intercourse with 
 foreign nations, by expansion of industrial pursuits, by trade and 
 commerce, by multiplication and improvement of the means of 
 internal communication, by development, with the aid of modern 
 mechanical inventions, of the great natural resources of the archi 
 pelago, and, in a word, by the uninterrupted devotion of the people to 
 the pursuit of useful objects and the realization of those noble ideas 
 which constitute the higher civilization of mankind. 
 
 " Unfortunately, these pure aims and purposes of the American 
 Government and people have been misinterpreted to some of the 
 inhabitants of certain islands, and as a consequence, the friendly 
 American forces, have, without provocation or cause, been openly 
 attacked. And why these hostilities ? What do the best Filipinos 
 desire? Can it be more than the United States is ready to give ? 
 They are patriots and wants liberty. 
 
 " In the meantime the attention of the people of the Philippines 
 is invited to certain regulative principles by which the United States 
 will be guided in its relations with them. 
 
 " These are deemed to be the points of cardinal importance : 
 
 " i. The supremacy of the United States must and will be 
 enforced throughout every part of the archipelago, and those who 
 resist it can accomplish no end other than their own ruin. 
 
 " 2. To the Philippine people will be granted the most ample 
 liberty and self-government reconcilable with the maintenance of a 
 wise, just, stable, effective and economical administration of public 
 affairs and compatible with the sovereign and international rights 
 
 and the obligations of the United States. 
 
 i 
 
 " 3. The civil rights of the Philippine people will be guaranteed 
 and protected to the fullest extent ; religious freedom will be assured, 
 and all persons shall be equal and have equal standing in the eyes of 
 the law. 
 
 "4. Honor, justice and friendship forbid the use of the Philip 
 pine people or the islands they inhabit as an object or means of 
 exploitation. The purpose of the American Government is the 
 welfare and advancement of the Philippine people. 
 
482 THE CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR 
 
 " 5. There shall be guaranteed to the Philippine people an honest 
 and effective civil service in which, to the fullest extent to which it is 
 practical, natives shall be employed. 
 
 " 6. The collection and application of all taxes and other reve 
 nues will be placed upon a sound, economical basis and the public 
 funds, raised justly and collected honestly, will be applied only to 
 defray the regular and proper expenses incurred by and for the 
 establishment and maintenance of the Philippine Government and 
 such general improvements as the public interests may demand. 
 Local funds collected will be used for local purposes and not to be 
 devoted to other ends. 
 
 " With such prudent and honest fiscal administration it is 
 believed that the needs of the Government will, in a short time, 
 become compatible with a considerable reduction in taxation. 
 
 " 7. A pure, speedy and effective administration of justice will 
 be established whereby may be eradicated the evils arising from 
 delay, corruption and exploitation. 
 
 " 8. The construction of roads, railroads and similar means of 
 communication and transportation, and of other public works, mani 
 festly to the advantage of the Philippine people, will be promoted. 
 
 " 9. Domestic and foreign trade and commerce, agriculture and 
 other industrial pursuits tending toward the general development of 
 the country, in the interests of the inhabitants, shall be objects of 
 constant solicitude and fostering care. 
 
 " 10. Effective provision will be made for the establishment of 
 elementary schools in which the children of the people may be 
 educated, and appropriate facilities will be provided for a higher 
 education. 
 
 "n. Reforms in all departments of the Government, all 
 branches of the public service and all corporations closely touching 
 the common life of the people will be undertaken without delay and 
 effected conformably with right and justice in a way to satisfy the 
 well-founded demands and the highest sentiments and aspirations of 
 the people. 
 
INSURGENT GOVERNMENT TOTTERS 483 
 
 " Such is the spirit in which the United States comes to the 
 people of the islands, and the President has instructed the commis 
 sion to make this publicly known. 
 
 11 In obeying his behest, the commissioners desire to join the 
 President in expressing their good will toward the Philippine people 
 and to extend to the leading representative men an invitation to 
 meet them for the purpose of personal acquaintance and the 
 exchange of views and opinions. 
 
 JACOB GOULD SCHURMAN, GEORGE DEWEY, 
 
 U. S. Commissioner. U. S. Navy. 
 
 ELWELL S. OTIS, CHARLFS DENBY, 
 
 Major-General, U. S. A. U. S. Commissioner. 
 
 DEAN C. WORCESTER, 
 
 U. S. Commissioner. 
 
 Colonel Charles Denby, one of the members of the Commission, 
 said concerning it, "This is the most important proclamation since 
 the Declaration of Independence. Spanish, Tagalo and English 
 versions of it have been printed and it is proposed to circulate them 
 at all the seaports and they will be sent to the lake towns by gun 
 boats." The effect of this publication was to bring thousands of 
 Filipinos into our lines under the flag of surrender. 
 
 In the meantime General Mac Arthur s army rested at Malolos, 
 the men sleeping in the trenches and occasionally exchanging shots 
 with stray detachments of insurgents, who kept up just enough fire 
 to make life unbearable to the soldiers. After the battle which 
 resulted in the capture of the Filipino capital, a priest and two mem 
 bers of the so-called Filipino Congress, who hid themselves in the 
 woods during the fighting, returned and surrendered to the American 
 troops and stated that 2,000 of the Filipino soldiers were anxious to 
 give up fighting and would do so, except for their officers to keep 
 them under arms. The natives were still further depressed by the 
 loss of one of their best leaders, General Montenegro, who was 
 killed in the battle of Malolos. Next to Aguinaldo and General 
 Luna, he was the greatest of the Filipino officers. 
 
 On April 3, 1899, General Otis cabled to the Adjutant-General 
 at Washington as follows: "Present indications denote insurgent 
 
484 THE CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR 
 
 government in perilous condition. Its army defeated, discouraged 
 and shattered. Insurgents returning to their homes in cities and 
 villages between here and points north of Malolos which reconnoiter- 
 ing parties have reached, and desire protection of Americans. Views 
 from Visayan Islands more encouraging every clay." 
 
 On April 4th, General MacArthur s brigade moved out of 
 Malolos to the northward in the hope of finding the main body of 
 the Filipino army and effectually destroying it. They were not able 
 however to locate the remnants of Aguinaldo s forces, although they 
 went for twelve miles seeking some trace of them. 
 
 About the same time the United States Cruiser Charleston, while 
 cruising along the west coast of Luzon Island sent a boat inshore 
 near Dagupan to make soundings. The rebels opened fire, wound 
 ing one of the officers, whereupon the cruiser bombarded the town 
 and the insurgents fled. 
 
 Malolos soon resumed its natural aspect. Business went on as 
 usual and there was nothing extraordinary except the nightly attacks 
 of the insurgents and the hard work of the soldiers who were active 
 in cleaning up the city and turning it from a place of pestilence to a 
 healthful spot. 
 
 Reports reached Manila about this time, that there had been 
 trouble on the island of Negros. On March 27, 1899, a number of 
 bandits headed by a man named Papaissio attempted a rebellion and 
 killed several officials. A proclamation was issued calling upon the 
 natives to rise up against the American troops. Two expeditions 
 were sent to the scene of the disturbance and on April 2d, the head 
 quarters of the bandits at Labzid was captured and the town itself 
 destroyed. Thirty-five prisoners were brought back, and the rebellion 
 was practically quelled at the start. In Samar things were reported 
 to be quiet and the Filipinos were said to be anxious to accept 
 American rule. 
 
 LAWTON LEADS AN EXPEDITION. 
 
 After the taking of the capital it was decided to send an expedi 
 tion across the Laguna de Bay and capture Santa Cruz. General 
 Lawton was in command and under him were three gunboats and 
 i, 500 picked men. The expedition consisted of eight companies of 
 
THE NATIVES MAKE A BOLD STAND 485 
 
 the Fourteenth United States Infantry, three companies of the 
 Fourth Cavalry, four of the North Dakota Volunteers, four of the 
 Idaho Volunteers, two mountain guns and two hundred sharpshooters 
 of the Fourteenth Infantry. 
 
 General Lawton captured Santa Cruz after a splendid battle. 
 The attack was made simultaneously by land and water and the tak 
 ing of the city was the result of a spirited charge. Santa Cruz is the 
 military key of Laguna de Bay, the large sheet of water in the centre 
 of the island of Luzon, connected with the Bay of Manila by the 
 Pasig River. The capture of this city cut off the only telegraphic 
 communication between the insurgent forces to the north of Manila 
 and those south of Manila, and consequently these two bodies are 
 forced to act independently of one another in the future. 
 
 On Saturday night April 8th, the troops started, but progress in 
 boats was slow so that they did not reach the other side of the lake 
 until noon of the following day. Consequently the attack was post 
 poned until the dawn of April loth. Then the line advanced in 
 extended order, the gunboats moving slowly along the shore, shelling 
 the wooded places in front of the American lines, driving the Fili 
 pinos inland. The Catling guns were placed upon the decks of the 
 boats and used to clear some entrenchments which were near enough 
 for the fire to be effective. The battalion of the First Idaho had a 
 short sharp fight against a force of Filipinos on the high ground on 
 the right of our advancing line. They made a sudden charge upon 
 the enemy which turned and fled leaving many of their dead on the 
 field. In order that the prisoners taken, might be safely guarded by 
 a few men, their hands and feet were tied. General Lawton hap 
 pened to see them in that condition, and with his own hands cut the 
 bands from the prisoners and forbade such action in the future. 
 
 THE NATIVES MAKE A BOLD STAND. 
 
 A mile south of the town on the shore of the lake the Filipinos 
 made a strong stand against the advancing forces. They did not 
 retreat even when the gunboat Caste advanced and began to shell 
 their lines, but pluckily answered back with their muskets. A troop 
 of Cavalry however, which was advancing on the city, wheeled round 
 and put these insurgents to flight. They rushed forward at double 
 
4 86 THE CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR 
 
 time, stopping now and then to fire an effective volley. The gun 
 boat Laguna de Bay bombarded the entrenchments close to the town 
 and also the stone buildings occupied by fighting men, particularly 
 the prison which was used as a fort. The shells crushed in the roof 
 of this building in the bombardment. The main line of the Amerp 
 cans in the meantime swept the Filipinos before them, driving them 
 in full retreat through the town to the swamp beyond. The advance 
 was conducted in perfect system, and the exhibition of tactics was- 
 enough to gladden the heart of a military expert. 
 
 General Lawton with the Fourteenth Infantry under his per 
 sonal direction made a magnificent charge across a bridge over a 
 creek on the southern side of the town, The men tore down a stone 
 barricade with their hands and drove the enemy backward at the 
 point of the bayonet. After the capture of the city General Lawton 
 established his headquarters at the palace of the Governor of the 
 Alcalda Mayor, province of Laguna of which Santa Cruz is the capital. 
 
 GENERAL LAWTON s NARROW ESCAPE. 
 
 During the advance on the city, when the troops were half way 
 to the town from the landing place a single Filipino remained be 
 hind when his comrades fled, and bravely met death in an attempt to 
 kill General Lawton. He secreted himself in a house which he 
 knew the Americans would pass When General Lawton and his 
 staff reached this place the insurgent, who was only six feet away, 
 fired point blank at the group of officers. Fortunately in his excite 
 ment his aim was bad, and the bullet flew wide of its mark. After 
 firing, the native jumped from a window and fired from the yard, but 
 again failed to hit anybody. Before he could get out of the yard, he 
 was surrounded and shot three times. Even then he would not sur 
 render, until he was finally struck with a gun and completely disabled. 
 
 Two members of the Fourteenth Infantry who ventured a hundred 
 yards beyond the American lines had a lively experience. No sooner 
 had they gotten out of sight of our lines than they were surrounded 
 by insurgent troops who took them prisoners. They were disarmed, 
 but one of them managed to conceal his bayonet in the leg of his 
 trousers, and while their captors were taking them to the insurgent 
 line, this man whose name was Myers, suddenly drew the bayonet 
 
GENERAL OTIS REPORT 487 
 
 and stabbed the Filipino who was guarding him. At the same time 
 the other prisoner grabbed his guard s rifle and struck out with it in 
 every direction, the natives were so surprised that for a time they 
 did not know what to do, and both of the Americans ran for their 
 lives in the direction of their camp. Myers reached the American 
 lines safely, but the other man did not arrive, and it was thought he 
 had been lost. Searching parties were sent out to look for him, and 
 he was finally found hidden in a tree where he had climbed to escape 
 the Filipinos who had pursued him, and where he stayed for many 
 weary hours. 
 
 GENERAL OTIS* REPORT. 
 
 In reference to this attack of Lawton, General Otis reported as 
 follows : 
 
 " Enemy left ninety-three uniformed dead on the field and a 
 number seriously wounded. Lawton captured city without destruc 
 tion of property, his loss ten wounded, slightly except two. One 
 since died. Lieutenant Filing only officer wounded, slightly in hand. 
 Enemy retired eastward, Lawton in pursuit this morning." 
 
 In that pursuit General Lawton captured two more towns, 
 Lumban and Pagsangan. He also captured two gunboats and four 
 launches in the Santa Cruz river, which had been taken from their 
 owners by the insurgents. From Lumban he advanced eight miles 
 north and occupied Pacte the military centre of the district. The 
 troops forded two rivers and marched through tangles of underbrush 
 driving a small number of the enemy before them. In taking Pacte 
 the North Dakotas were in the centre and the sharpshooters flank 
 ing, when the column suddenly encountered a cross fire of the rebels. 
 Sharpshooters were moved out quickly and a squad of five of the 
 North Dakota men was surprised by a volley at fifteen yards from a 
 concealed trench. Two were killed and two wounded, one mortally. 
 The Dakota sharpshooters rushed the steep incline and took the 
 trenches. 
 
 As the Flying Column, as Lawton s expedition was called, moved 
 northward, the enemy retreated everywhere before it. Late after a 
 victorious march General Lawton was ordered to return to Manila 
 with his expedition. All of the territory taken by him was evacu 
 ated. It was considered unwise to deplete our troops on the island 
 
4 88 THE CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR 
 
 by leaving sufficient garrison in the various places captured to hold 
 them. The main objects of the expedition, which had been to cap 
 ture the insurgents boats and distribute copies of the proclamation 
 issued by our commissioners had been accomplished and the strength 
 of the American troops had been emphasized throughout the lake 
 region, consequently it was considered that the expedition had been 
 very successful. 
 
 AN ATTACK ON GENERAL WHEATON. 
 
 In the meantime General Wheaton had been having a lively 
 time near Malolos. The rebels cut the telegraph line at several 
 places between Manila and Malolos, and signal fires were lighted and 
 rockets sent up among the foothills to the right of the railroad. All 
 this signified that something was going to happen, and so it proved, 
 for later the enemy attacked the outposts of the Minnesota regiment 
 between Bigaa and Bocave, five miles south of Malolos, killing two 
 men and wounding fourteen. Simultaneously the outposts of the 
 Oregon regiment at Marilalo, the next station on the way to Manila, 
 were attacked with the result that three Americans were killed and 
 two wounded, while the enemy lost ten men killed and six wounded. 
 Troops were concentrated along the railroad as thickly as possible 
 and the rebels were driven back to the foothills. 
 
 WOULD NOT WAIT TO BE KILLED. 
 
 Later General Wheaton with the Tenth Pennsylvania and the 
 Second Oregon regiments and two guns advanced to drive the rebels 
 still further. He met with slight resistance near Santa Maria and 
 had one man wounded. The enemy bolted when shelled by the 
 artillery and burned and abandoned the town of Santa Maria, where 
 a thousand rebels had been reported to have collected. During the 
 rest of the day the enemy was in full retreat, burning the villages 
 behind them. Occasionally a few of them dropped to the rear and 
 fired at the advancing American troops, thinking apparently that this 
 would check the advance and cover the retreat of the Filipinos. 
 Finding this ineffectual, these rebels gave it up and fled with the 
 others. As General Wheaton telegraphed to Major-General Otis, 
 " They would not wait to be killed." 
 
A LIVELY SKIRMISH 489 
 
 One of the sad fortunes of war was described in a cablegram 
 from Admiral Dewey, which caused much comment in this country. 
 The cablegram tells the whole story concisely all else is conjecture. 
 It said : 
 
 " The Yorktown visited Baler, Luzon, east coast of Luzon, P. I., 
 April 1 2th for the purpose of rescuing and bringing away the Span 
 ish forces, consisting of eighty soldiers, three officers and two priests, 
 which were surrounded by 400 insurgents. Some of the insurgents 
 armed with Mauser rifles as reported by natives. Lieutenant J. C. 
 Gilmore, while making an examination of the mouth of the river in 
 an armed boat, was ambushed, fired upon and captured. Fate 
 unknown, as insurgents refused to communicate afterward. The 
 following are missing : 
 
 Lieutenant J. C. Gilmore, Chief Quartermaster W. Walton, 
 Coxswain J. Ellsworth, Gunner s Mate H. J. Hygard, Sailmaker s 
 Mate Vendgit, Seamen W. H. Rynders and C. W. Woodbury, 
 Apprentices D. W. A. Venville, J. Peterson, Ordinary Seamen F. 
 Brisolese and O. B. McDonald, Landsmen L. T. Edwards, F. Ander 
 sen, J. Dillon and C. A. Morrissey." 
 
 Here again was noble sacrifice "for humanity." The little band 
 of Spanish troops less than a hundred all told, had been keeping a 
 large number of Filipinos at bay at Baler for months. Their con 
 dition had become critical, and just at the time when there seemed 
 no hope, the gallant Admiral made this brave attempt to aid those 
 who had a few months before been his sworn enemies. 
 
 The fate of the reconnoitering party is still doubtful. It was 
 thought that they had been mutilated and tortured after the Filipino 
 fashion of treating prisoners, but word was received some days after 
 that the unfortunate men were being held as prisoners of war in the 
 hope that some day they might be useful to the rebels. 
 
 A LIVELY SKIRMISH. 
 
 A lively skirmish took place on April 2ist. Three companies 
 of the South Dakota marched from Bocave, and united with three 
 companies of the Minnesota regiment just north of that place. There 
 they encountered about 500 insurgents and a brisk interchange of 
 shots resulted. The insurgents finally fell back in good order, after 
 
490 THE CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR 
 
 suffering great losses. The Americans lost one man wounded, and 
 returned to Bocave after ammunition was exhausted. The army 
 tugs along the river took up the fighting and drove the insurgents 
 inland. 
 
 A force of 200 insurgents attacked the outposts of the Washing 
 ton regiment on the same day near Tagig, south of Pasig. They 
 were routed after two hours hard fighting, leaving twelve killed and 
 several wounded on the field. Three of our men were wounded in 
 this fight. 
 
 General Lawton was put in charge of a new flying column and 
 started to outflank the enemy before joining MacArthur north of 
 Malolos. 
 
 A DESPERATE FIGHT. 
 
 While he was on the way, one of the most depressing of all our 
 battles with the Filipinos occurred near Quenqua, about four miles 
 northeast of Malolos. In the engagement two gallant officers, 
 Colonel John M. Stotzenberg, of the First Nebraska, and Lieutenant 
 Sisson of the same regiment were killed, and our total loss was six 
 killed and forty-four wounded. 
 
 The insurgents had a horseshoe trench, about a mile long v 
 encircling a rice field on the edge of a wood. Major Bell, with forty 
 cavalrymen, while making a reconnoissance, encountered a strong 
 outpost and at the first fire one of his men was killed and five 
 wounded. The Americans retired, carrying their wounded back with 
 great difficulty, closely followed by the enemy. Reinforcements were 
 sent for, and two battalions finally arrived, under Colonel Stotzenberg. 
 He decided that a charge was the best means of dislodging the 
 enemy, and he led the advance in person. When about 200 yards 
 from the enemy s breastworks, a bullet struck him, and he died 
 instantly. Lieutenant Sisson suffered the same fate. The bullet 
 which pierced his heart, pierced also the picture of the woman which 
 he wore around his neck, suspended by a ribbon. 
 
 The arrival of the artillery materially aided the American forces, 
 and the Filipinos fell back to another series of trenches, a mile away. 
 
 The eyes of the leaders now centered upon Calumpit, to which 
 the insurgent Government had retired when Malolos was taken. 
 
FUNSTON *S MAD FEAT 491 
 
 jVith its fall, they hoped would come the fall of the whole fabric of 
 >he so called Filipino Government, and in this it would seem they 
 were correct. 
 
 THE TAKING OF CALUMPIT. 
 
 The taking of Calumpit was characterized by one of the most 
 brilliant deeds of daring the war has seen a deed which made 
 Colonel Fred Funston, " Fighting Fred," as they call him the 
 most talked of man of the day. 
 
 The troops had advanced step by step to the edge of the Bag- 
 bag River beyond which the enemy was intrenched with great skill 
 and was able to hold a large force at bay. The bridge over the rivei 
 had been cleverly stripped by the Filipinos, and had been so fixed 
 that the girders would part if a train were forced over thus throwing 
 the whole into the river. Fortunately the girders fell before their 
 time. The advance was made along the railroad. The Kansas 
 regiment was on the right side of the road and the Utah light artillery 
 and the First Montana on the left. In the centre was an armored train 
 mounted with six-pounders and rapid fire guns, pushed ahead by 
 Chinamen. The train was moved right up to the mouth of the 
 bridge and a vigorous response was made to the fire of the enemy. 
 
 FUNSTON S MAD FEAT. 
 
 Then Colonel Funston did one of the dare-devil feats which have 
 made him famous. u Volunteers to cross the bridge," he cried, " and 
 I ll go myself." 
 
 There were too many volunteers eager for the adventure, so the 
 doughty Colonel had to pick his men. He chose Lieutenant Bell, a 
 private of Company E, one from Company K, trumpeter Barsfield 
 and Corporal Ferguson of Company I. This gallant half-dozen set 
 out for their perilous feat in the storm of shot which rained around 
 them. Slowly they crawled accross the iron work of the bridge, with 
 Filipino bullets popping from the heights above them. When they 
 reached thd Broken span, they dropped into the swift water and swam 
 ashore. Colonel Funston was the first to reach the bank, and as the 
 brave six Americans rose, dripping from the water, and charged upon 
 the trenches with wild western yells, the armed Filipinos fled before 
 them. 
 
492 THE CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR 
 
 The severest fighting however was encountered by the other 
 brigade of Mac Arthur s division, that commanded by General Hale, 
 and consisting of the Nebraska, South Dakota and Iowa regiments. 
 Six were killed and twelve wounded in this engagement, and many 
 rebels were left dead on the field, and 350 prisoners were taken. The 
 fiercest engagement took place at Pulillan, north of Quenqua. Here 
 the Filipinos were strongly entrenched, and continued to receive 
 reinforcements from Calumpit. When night closed General Hale, 
 and General Wheaton had joined forces, and as Calumpit was too 
 strongly fortified to be taken offhand the troops waited until morning 
 before making the attack. 
 
 This was the last ditch of the Filipinos, They brought artillery 
 into use for the first time since the war began, but did not handle it 
 with much effect. The attack was pushed effectively and Calumpit 
 fell, the enemy retiring to Apalit. They finally were forced out of 
 that town, which they burned as they left it. 
 
 THE MOST BRILLIANT ACHIEVEMENT OF THE WAR. 
 
 In this, the last great battle of the Philippines, Colonel Funston 
 again proved himself a man absolutely without fear. He performed 
 what General MacArthur said \vas the most brilliant and daring 
 achievement of the war, and won a victory unparalleled in the history 
 of American arms. 
 
 The victorious march of the American troops had again been 
 checked by a river the Rio Grande. It was too deep to ford and 
 the bridge across it had been stripped, as usual, by the enemy. 
 Something had to be done and Colonel Funston volunteered to do 
 it. He asked to be allowed to cross the river and Wheaton- gave 
 him permission. The first attempt to cross was to be made at night, 
 some miles below the bridge. The barking of dogs revealed activity 
 in the American lines however, and the Filipinos were ready with 
 showers of bullets to check the attempt. 
 
 Kansas and Montana volunteers had occupied the whole town 
 except the splendid entrenchments which controlled the bridge over 
 the river. The entire strength of the enemy had been concentrated 
 in these trenches and they must be taken. Only the river (100 yards 
 wide) separated the two forces. Funston first thought of taking 
 
THE FIRST STEP TOWARD PEACE 493 
 
 fifteen men over the bridge at night, but Corporal Ferguson of Com 
 pany I, Kansas, reconnoitered and reported that plan impracticable. 
 He went within ten feet of the insurgent sentry on the bridge and 
 was not discovered. 
 
 The next day Funston determined to brazenly defy the bullets of 
 the Filipinos and cross the river before the very eyes of the enemy; 
 with 1 20 Kansas men he went to a point several hundred yards from 
 the bridge, where two privates, White and Trembly, swam with a 
 rope to the opposite shore. They landed and attached the rope to a 
 portion of the insurgent trench, being under the protection of the 
 vigorous fire of our troops. Several insurgents were on the shore 
 where the men landed, but fled when the two fearless fellows began 
 yelling. The rope was attached to three rafts loaded with fifty men, 
 and these were drawn to the shore in safety, although exposed to an 
 awful fire from the enemy. 
 
 This little band advanced upon the trenches and literally scared 
 the Filipinos out of their stronghold. The bridge was thus left 
 without protection and our troops immediately crossed it and swept 
 the enemy before them. General Luna, who commanded the 
 retreating forces in person, tried to check the demoralization of his 
 army but was powerless. They could understand some things, but 
 such fearlessness and such fighting was too much for them, and they 
 fled. 
 
 FUNSTON MADE BRIGADIER-GENERAL. 
 
 In recognition of his bravery in this and other battles, Funston 
 was appointed a Brigadier-General of Volunteers on May 2d. 
 The appointment was strongly recommended by General Otis 
 and Major-General MacArthur, both of whom cabled to Washington 
 the most unstinted praise of the fearless Kansan. 
 
 General Funston has been a fighter all his life. His career has 
 been one of unusual excitement, and has served to bring out strongly 
 those qualities which go so far toward making a popular hero. His 
 first appearance before the public was made at a political meeting in 
 Kansas when he was little more than a boy. The meeting was in 
 opposition to his father who was running for Congress, and in the 
 midst of it young Funston sprang upon the platform unannounced 
 
V94 
 
 THE CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR. 
 
 and spoke so eloquently to the crowd that he won many of them to 
 his side and aided materially in securing his father s nomination. 
 
 After being educated in the common schools and graduated from 
 the Kansas State University, he set to work as a reporter on the 
 Fort Smith Tribune, a paper with strong Democratic tendencies. 
 While the editor was absent, young Funston turned the sheet into a 
 Republican organ and wrote some burning editorials in favor of that 
 party. Naturally it cost him his position, and after more or less 
 indefinite wandering he joined the troops in fighting Indians. 
 Shortly after winning his commission in some hot fights he led the 
 memorable expedition to Death Valley and then went on a scientific 
 exploration to Alaska to collect flora and fauna for the Government 
 From there he went to Cuba and joined the army of Garcia. Here, 
 as elsewhere, his absolute fearlessness made him conspicuous and he 
 was soon appointed chief of artillery. His services with the Cuban 
 army continued until the war between the United States and Spain 
 broke out, when he took command of the Kansas regiment and 
 began the series of triumphs which has made him one of the most 
 admired men in the Army. 
 
 OVERTURES FOR PEACE. 
 
 At the time, it appeared as though the end of the war had come. 
 It was no secret that the Filipino army was discouraged and dissatis 
 fied at their condition, and this move toward peace was looked upon 
 as a first step in the direction of surrender. 
 
 Colonel Arguelesses and Lieutenant Bernal were escorted to 
 General Otis headquarters with the greatest formality and there 
 they were received by the victorious commander with courtesy and 
 respect. They stated, in behalf of their chief, that they were 
 desirous of ending the war as soon as possible, but that could not be 
 done until Aguinaldo should have time to summon the Filipino Con 
 gress and place the terms before that body for action. Therefore, 
 they requested General Otis to order his forces to cease hostilities for 
 two weeks until that necessary step could be taken. General Otis 
 heard the envoys to the end and then replied : " Tell your General that 
 there must be no reservations. He must lay down his arms at once. 
 I cannot recognize the Filipino Government or its Congress. If you 
 
CONTINUED FIGHTING. 495 
 
 wish peace, surrender. You will be allowed perfect amnesty. There 
 will be no punishments for acts already committed. America for 
 gives you. 
 
 The proclamation issued by my Government is sincere, and 
 you shall share with our own people the fullest liberty. But now 
 you must make a complete and unreserved surrender. You are com 
 pelled to admit that you are defeated. 
 
 " America did not begin the war. It was of your making. There 
 is a big army on the way from the United States and there is nothing 
 for you to do but surrender. This is absolute." 
 
 This constant refusal to recognize the Filipino Congress has 
 nettled Aguinaldo not a little, and it is an interesting commentary on 
 his scheme that only sixty of the 300 members of the Congress have 
 taken the necessary oath of allegiance required by their constitution. 
 
 The overtures toward peace were fruitless, and the two com 
 missioners returned to the insurgent army, expressing the hope of 
 being able to reach some definite decision within the next few days. 
 
 CONTINUED FIGHTING. 
 
 But the Americans continued their preparations for more fight 
 ing. Positions were strengthened and one or two small skirmishes 
 took place. Major Bell, with a squad of scouts, occupied the town 
 of Macabebe, about four miles southwest of Calumpit and the invad 
 ing army was welcomed by the townsmen with cheers and the ringing 
 of bells. 
 
 A Spanish prisoner who had escaped into the American lines 
 stated that 200 Filipinos had been killed in General Male s advance 
 on Quingan. This was the largest number of insurgents killed in 
 any battle for several months previous 
 
 During the fiist week of May, Major-General MacArthur suc 
 ceeded in capturing San Tomas after encountering strong resistance. 
 Brigadier-General Hale attacked the enemy on the right and Briga 
 dier-General Wheaton on the left. In a daring charge made by the 
 latter s command, the gallant Funston added one more brilliant feat 
 of daring to his already long record, but this time he came out with a 
 badly wounded hand. Colonel Summers took Moasim, on the right, 
 with a part of his Oregon and Minnesota regiments. 
 
49 6 7 HE CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR. 
 
 When Major-General MacArthur s division advanced on San 
 Fernando, they found the town deserted by the rebels who had left 
 only a small cletatchment to cover their retreat. The success of the 
 American arms was so marked that Aguinaldo sent an emissary to 
 General Otis requesting passes for his commissioners to enter our 
 lines. He was told that an unarmed emissary would never be stopped. 
 
 PRESIDENT MCKINLEY S PROPOSED FORM OF GOVERNMENT. 
 
 Early in the morning of May I7th, General Lawton s advance 
 guard under Colonel Summers moved on San Isidro, the insurgent 
 capital and captured it after some fighting. The American forces 
 were now in such strong position that they seemed to hold the key 
 to the situation and seven commissioners from Aguinaldo met 
 
 o 
 
 General Otis and discussed further plans for a settlement. They 
 declared that they were not empowered to bind the Filipino Congress 
 to any agreement and could only submit to that body the results of 
 the conference. The United States Commissioners submitted a pro 
 posed form of government which had been approved by President 
 McKinley. It was as follows : 
 
 While the final decision as to the form of government is in the 
 hands of Congress, the President, under his military powers, pending 
 the action of Congress, stands ready to offer the following form of 
 government : 
 
 " A Governor-General to be appointed by the President ; a 
 Cabinet to be appointed by the Governor-General ; all the Judges to 
 be appointed by the President ; the Heads of Departments and 
 Judges to be either Americans or Filipinos or both ; and also a 
 General Advisory Council, its members to be chosen by the people 
 by a form of suffrage to be hereafter carefully determined upon. 
 
 " The President earnestly desires that bloodshed cease, and that 
 the people of the Philippines, at an early date, enjoy the largest 
 measure of self-government compatible with peace and order." 
 
 While the discussion was still going on, a sharp skirmish took 
 place near San Fernando, in which fifty Filipinos were killed and 
 many wounded. The American losses were two men killed and 
 twelve wounded. Another small engagement took place at Santa 
 Rita, in which the Filipinos were repulsed. 
 
ADMIRAL DEWEY TO RETURN HOME. 497 
 
 On May 8th, the President issued orders stating that in each of 
 the new possessions Cuba, the Philippines and Porto Rico there 
 would be created " the offices of Auditor of the islands; one Assist 
 ant Auditor for auditing the accounts of the Department of Customs ; 
 and one Assistant Auditor for auditing the accounts of the Post 
 Offices, who shall be appointed by the Secretary of War, and whose 
 duties shall be to audit all accounts of the islands. 
 
 " There is hereby created and shall be maintained the office of 
 Treasurer of the Islands which shall be filled by the appointment 
 thereto of an officer of the regular army of the United States." 
 
 The constant procrastination of the Filipinos in the settlement 
 of the terms of surrender soon exhausted the patience of the authori 
 ties at Washington. The stand taken by General Otis was known to 
 be approved and his need of more troops was recognized. During 
 May, reinforcements were sent to Manila and arrangements made for 
 the shipment of 2,000 more troops to leave San Francisco whenever 
 necessary. The proposition of General MacArthur to arm the 
 Macabebes and have them join the American forces in fighting their 
 old enemies, the Tagalos, was also looked upon favorably as follow 
 ing an experiment England had so successfully made in her colonies. 
 
 Immense pressure was brought to bear upon President McKinley 
 to issue a call for additional volunteers but as General Otis had not 
 yet asked for such a step it became understood that nothing in that 
 direction would be done until a request for large reinforcements was 
 made. 
 
 ADMIRAL DEWEY TO RETURX HOME. 
 
 Meantime, Admiral Dewey, at his own urgent request, was 
 relieved and was succeeded by Rear- Admiral John C. Watson, who 
 was in charge of the Mare Island Navy Yard at San Francisco. As 
 soon as it was announced that Dewey would return home, the whole 
 country rose as one man to prepare a fitting reception to the man 
 who, above all others, had won the hearts of the American people. 
 Elaborate banquets were planned in all the large cities he would be 
 likely to visit on his return and invitations were cabled to him. A 
 great popular movement was started to present him with a handsome 
 residence as a gift of a grateful nation to its hero. No sooner had 
 the movement started than subscriptions came pouring in from all 
 
498 77^5" CLOSING EVENTS OF THE PHILIPPINE WAR. 
 
 over the country, and among the first to contribute to this national 
 testimonial was President McKinley. 
 
 Dewey s departure from Manila on May 2Oth, was a rousing 
 ovation. As the Olympia got under way the Oregon, the Baltimore 
 and the Concord fired the Admiral s salute, and at the first shot the 
 bands on board started and the white-clad sailors swarmed on deck and 
 gave cheer after cheer. And then came a short half-hour which, in 
 noise at least, equalled the memorable day which first sent Dewey s 
 name sounding around the world. Guns were fired seemingly from 
 everywhere, bands played and men shouted themselves hoarse, little 
 steamers, darting here and there in excitement, whistled their shrill 
 farewells to the departing Admiral, and big steamers, standing 
 stolidly in the harbor, blew their deep basses to swell the chorus. 
 The whole of Manila had gone hero-mad, and through it all, the 
 hero bowed his triumphant way, sorry to leave the scene of his new- 
 won fame, yet glad to get home again to quiet and to rest. 
 
 His very leaving was a sign that peace was near for he had 
 requested to be kept on duty until the war was over. 
 
RETURN TO: CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 198 Main Stacks 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 Home Use 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS. 
 
 Renewals and Recharges may be made 4 days prior to the due date. 
 Books may be renewed by calling 642-3405. 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW. 
 
 nrn ? n 1QQQ 
 
 
 
 Utu ^ " 333 
 
 
 
 MAY 1 1 2002 
 
 
 
 ULU 9 2004 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FORM NO. DD6 
 50M 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 Berkeley, California 94720-6000 
 
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 022710117